THE MANITOBA WATER SERVICES BOARD

TENDER

PROJECT NO.: MWSB #1758

Title: RM of Headingley Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse

Front End Version 2025_rev_0

 TABLE OF CONTENTS
NO. OF
TENDER DOCUMENTS
PAGES
MWSB PART 1 Instructions to Bidders 10

MWSB PART 2 Insurance, Performance Security and Safety Requirements 5

MWSB PART 3 Bid Forms –including:

Bid Submission (electronic submission):

The electronic bidding forms required to be completed by the Bidder, listed below in Part A are
located on the e-Bidding Platform located at Bids & Tenders -
https://mwsb.bidsandtenders.ca/Module/Tenders/en

PART A Forms to be submitted before Submission Deadline:

Bid Form 2
Schedule of Prices 1
Bid Bond 2
Agreement to Bond 1

PART B Forms to be submitted before Contract Award:

Performance Bond 2
Labour & Materials Payment Bond 3
Contractor’s Certification Form – Legislative and Safety Requirements 3

MWSB PART 4 Form of Agreement 3

 MWSB STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
*Note: Refer to MWSB Website for copies of these Specifications.
http://www.mbwaterservicesboard.ca/standard-construction-specs.html

Section Title Rev. Date Pages

DIVISION 1 – General
MWSB 1000 General Conditions Mar 2022 44
Traffic Control MIT Work Zone Traffic Control Manual
http://www.gov.mb.ca/mit/contracts/pdf/traffic_manual_2015.pdf
DIVISION 2 – Site Work
02 11 60 Clearing and Grubbing Mar 2022 2
02 20 10 Construction of Waterways Mar 2022 8
02 21 80 Pipe Excavation, Bedding and Backfill Mar 2022 11
02 21 90 Structural Excavation, Backfill and Compaction Mar 2022 11
02 28 40 Supply and Placement of Rip Rap and Rip Rap Bedding Mar 2022 4
02 41 40 Underslab and Foundation Drainage Pipe Mar 2022 2
02 43 60 Placing Pipe Culverts and Pipe Arches Mar 2022 5
02 48 50 Topsoil and Finish Grading Mar 2022 2
02 48 60 Seeding Mar 2022 6
02 70 20 Water Service Connections Mar 2022 5
02 70 30 Sewers Mar 2022 12
02 70 60 Pressure Pipelines Mar 2022 30
02 71 10 Fencing Mar 2022 8
02 72 90 Sewage Pumping Stations Mar 2022 16
DIVISION 3 – Concrete
03 10 00 Concrete Formwork Mar 2022 5
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement Mar 2022 5
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete Mar 2022 27
DIVISION 5 – Metals
05 90 00 Miscellaneous Metal Mar 2022 3

DIVISION 13 – Special Construction

13 12 60 Pre-Engineered Steel Building Mar 2022 10
13 12 70 Wood Frame Building Mar 2022 10
13 42 10 Disinfection & Leak Testing of Reinforced Concrete Reservoirs Mar 2022 3

DIVISION 15 – Mechanical
15 05 00 Basic Materials and Methods Mar 2022 20
DIVISION 26 – Electrical
26 01 00 Electrical Work Mar 2022 16
APPENDIX
Standard Drawings Mar 2022 40
Standard Forms Mar 2022 5
Listing of Approved Products 52

ENGINEER’S SPECIFICATIONS
Section Title Pages
00 01 05 Certification Page 1
DIVISION 1 – General Requirements
01 00 10 Special Provisions 2
01 00 20 Coordination 2
01 00 30 Geotechnical Reports 1
01 11 00 Summary of Work 3
01 14 00 Work Restrictions 2
01 14 16 Contractor’s Use of the Premises 1
01 23 00 Alternatives 1
01 26 13 Request for Information 2
01 29 00 Measurement and Payment 4
01 30 00 Administrative Requirements 2
01 21 19 Project Meetings 2
01 32 00 Construction Schedule 4
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 5
01 35 29 Health and Safety Requirements 4
01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 2
01 45 00 Quality Control 3
01 51 00 Temporary Utilities 3
01 52 00 Construction Facilities 4
01 56 00 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures 3
01 61 00 Common Product Requirements 5
01 74 00 Cleaning 3
01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal 3
01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 2
01 78 00 Closeout Submittals 4
01 79 00 Demonstration and Training 6
01 90 00 Equipment Installation 6
01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements 8

DIVISION 03 – Concrete (Stantec)

03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories 5
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 3
03 25 00 Concrete Accessories 4
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete 10
03 35 05 Concrete Floor Hardening – Dry Shake 2
03 90 00 Hydrostatic Testing and Disinfection 3

DIVISION 05 – Metals (Stantec)

05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 5
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 7
05 55 00 Metal Stair Nosing 3
DIVISION 06 – Wood, Plastics and Composites (Stantec)
06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 2
06 80 00 Composite Fabrications 5

DIVISION 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection (Stantec)

07 11 13 Bituminous Damproofing 3
07 16 16 Crystalline Waterproofing 3
07 21 13 Board Insulation 3
07 21 14 Concrete Faced Board Insulation 2
07 21 19 Formed in Place Insulation 3
07 41 15 Double Skin Insulated Roof Panels 6
07 41 15 Double Skin Insulated Wall Panels 4
07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 5
07 52 00 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 4
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 4
07 84 00 Fire Stopping System 3
07 92 00 Joint Sealing 5

DIVISION 08 – Doors and Openings (Stantec)

08 06 71.Sch Door Hardware Schedule 3
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 7
08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall 9
08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 5
08 71 00 Door Hardware 4
08 80 50 Glazing 9

DIVISION 09 – Finishes (Stantec)

09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 7
09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing 3
09 51 00 Acoustic Tile Ceilings 3
09 91 00 Painting 9

DIVISION 10 – Specialties (Stantec)

10 06 80 Schedule for Other Specialties 2
10 28 10 Toilet and Bath Accessories 2
10 40 00 Safety Specialties 2
10 51 13 Metal Lockers 3
10 90 00 Miscellaneous Specialties 3

DIVISION 11 – Equipment (Stantec)

11 13 13 Loading Dock Bumpers 2
11 53 00 Laboratory Equipment 6

DIVISION 12 – Furnishings (Stantec)

12 21 23 Roller Blinds 3
12 35 53 Laboratory Casework 6

DIVISION 13 – Special Construction (Stantec)

13 34 19 Metal Building Systems 7
DIVISION 22 – Plumbing (Stantec)
22 05 01 General Mechanical Provisions 6
22 05 19 Meters and Gauges 3
22 05 23 General Duty Valves and Strainers 4
22 05 29 Hangers and Supports 6
22 05 53 Painting and Identification 3
22 07 19 Piping Insulation 4
22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping 7
22 13 19 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties 5
22 14 29 Sump Pumps 2
22 33 00 Electric Domestic Water Heaters 2
22 42 00 Plumbing Fixtures 3

DIVISION 23 – Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditions (Stantec)

23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 4
23 05 92 Coordination with Balancing Agency 2
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC Systems 6
23 07 13 Duct Insulation 4
23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC 5
23 09 13 Instrumentation and Control Devices for HVAC 7
23 09 93 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls 5
23 23 00 Copper Tubing and Fittings Refrigerant 3
23 31 13 Metal Ducts 4
23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 4
23 33 46 Flexible Ducts 2
23 34 00 HVAC Fans and Ventilators 4
23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 3
23 55 01 Duct Heaters 2
23 63 12 Air Cooled Split System Heat Pump Unit 13
23 82 39 Unit Heaters and Outdoor Duct Furnaces 3

DIVISION 25 – Integrated Automation (Stantec)

25 05 00 Common Work Results – Integrated Automation 8
25 14 23 Field Equipment Panels 10
25 30 01 Process Controllers 4
25 30 02 Instruments 8
25 30 03 Instrument Index 2
25 30 04 I/O Check Sheets 6
25 90 01 SCADA System 10

DIVISION 26 – Electrical (Stantec)

26 05 00 Common Work Results – Electrical 26
26 05 21 Wire and Cable (0 – 1000 V) 6
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 5
26 05 29 Fastening and Supports 2
26 05 32 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings 2
26 05 33 Wire and Box Connectors (0-1000V) 2
26 05 34 Conduit, Conduit Fastening and Fittings 5
26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 7
26 05 43 Installation of Cable in Trenches 3
26 05 83 Miscellaneous Mechanical Systems 2
26 12 16 Dry Type Transformers 3
26 24 16 Panelboards – Breaker Type 2
26 24 19 Motor Control Centres 9
26 27 26 Wiring Devices 3
26 28 16 Circuit Breakers 2
26 28 23 Disconnect Switches – Fused and Non-Fused 2
26 29 23 Variable Frequency Drives 7
26 29 34 Motor Control Wiring 3
26 32 13 Backup Generator 11
26 33 53 Uninterruptible Power Supply 3
26 35 33 Power Conditioning 5
26 36 23 Transfer Switches 3
26 43 13 Surge Protection Device - Standard 4
26 50 00 Lighting Fixtures 3
26 52 00 Emergency Lighting 3
26 53 00 Exit Signage 2

DIVISION 28 – Electronic Safety and Security (Stantec)

28 13 00 Security Access Control 4
28 23 00 Video Surveillance 7

DIVISION 31 – Earthwork (Stantec)

31 23 33.01 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling 3
31 32 19.01 Geotextiles 1

DIVISION 32 – Exterior Improvements (Stantec)

32 11 16.01 Granular Sub-Base and Base Course 2
32 31 00 Fencing and Gates 1
32 91 19.13 Topsoil Placement, Grading and Seeding 2

DIVISION 33 – Utilities (Stantec)

33 11 16 Water Utility Distribution Piping 1
33 31 13 Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping 1
33 32 13 Weeping Tile Packaged Pumping Station 4
33 36 00 Sewage Holding Tanks 2
33 42 13 Pipe Culverts 1
33 46 13.01 Foundation and Underslab Drainage 2

DIVISION 40 – Process Integration (Stantec)

40 05 00 Common Work Results for Process Integration 8
40 05 51 Process Valves 11
40 20 00 Process Piping Materials and Methods 13

DIVISION 41 – Bulk Material Processing Equipment (Stantec)

41 22 23 Monorail Hoists 3
DIVISION 43 – Process Gas and Liquid Handline, Purification
and Storage Equipment (Stantec)
43 21 50 Vertical Turbine Pumps 6

APPENDICES
Appendix 1 Geotechnical Report
Appendix 2 Process Narrative
DRAWINGS

Drawing # Title

GENERAL
G-001 Drawing Index and Cover Page

CIVIL
C-101 Site Servicing Plan
C-102 Grading Plan
C-501 Typical Details

STRUCTURAL
S-000 Structural Cover Sheet & 3D Isometric View
S-001 General Notes
S-101 Tank Base Foundation Plan
S-102 Main Floor Framing Plan
S-103 Enlarged Main Floor Plan
S-104 Roof Framing Plan
S-201 Building Sections
S-501 Typical Details
S-502 Typical Details
S-503 Typical Details
S-521 Miscellaneous Details

ARCHITECTURAL
A-001 Life Safety Plan, Code Matrix and Legends
A-101 Main Floor Plan, Enlarged Plans
A-102 Roof Plan
A-103 Reflected Ceiling Plan
A-201 Exterior Elevations
A-301 Building Sections
A-301 Wall Sections
A-501 Details 1
A-502 Details 2
A-601 Schedules

PLUMBING
P-101 Reservoir and Pumphouse Domestic Water Piping Layout, Schematic and Details
P-102 Reservoir and Pumphouse Domestic Wastewater Piping Layout, Schematic

PROCESS
DI-001 Process Abbreviations Legends and Symbols Sheet 1 of 2
DI-002 Process Abbreviations Legends and Symbols Sheet 2 of 2
DI-003 Electrical Abbreviations Legends and Symbols Sheet 1 of 1
DI-601 Piping and Instrumentation Diagram Water Supply
DI-602 Piping and Instrumentation Diagram Distribution Pumping
D-101 Reservoir and Pumphouse Tank Floor Plan
D-102 Reservoir and Pumphouse Main Floor Plan
D-301 Reservoir and Pumphouse Sections (Sheet 1 of 2)
D-302 Reservoir and Pumphouse Sections (Sheet 2 of 2)
D-501 Reservoir Details Sheet 1 of 2
D-502 Reservoir Details Sheet 2 of 2
D-901 Reservoir and Pumphouse 3D Views

MECHANICAL
M-001 Mechanical Symbol Legend
M-101 Main Floor Plan Ventilation Layout
M-301 Mechanical Sections
M-501 Mechanical Details
M-502 Mechanical Details
M-601 Mechanical Schematics
M-701 Mechanical Schedules
M-901 3D Representation

ELECTRICAL
E-001 Electrical, Abbreviations, Legends and Symbols
E-101 Electrical Site Plan and Details
E-102 Area Categorization
E-103 Power and Lighting Layout
E-104 Instrumentation and Security Layout
E-501 Installation Details 1 of 2
E-502 Installation Details 2 of 2
E-601 Reservoir and Pumphouse Single Line Diagram
E-602 Reservoir and Pumphouse MCC Elevation and PLC Panel Details
E-603 Reservoir Network Architecture
E-604 PLC Panel Loop Diagrams 1 of 3
E-605 PLC Panel Loop Diagrams 2 of 3
E-606 PLC Panel Loop Diagrams 3 of 3
E-701 Electrical Schedules
 Table of Contents – Instructions to Bidders
1. Project Information ................................................... 1
2. Tender Documents .................................................... 1
3. Work Site Viewing ................................................... 2
4. Test Hole Digs ...................................................... 2
5. Online Bid Submission Procedure .......................................... 2
6. Inquiries .......................................................... 3
7. Tender Addendums ................................................... 3
8. Substitutes as Approved Equals ........................................... 4
9. Opening of Bids ..................................................... 5
10. Bid Submission ...................................................... 5
11. Schedule of Prices .................................................... 5
12. Bid Security ........................................................ 6
13. Bid Form .......................................................... 7
14. Qualification of Bidders ................................................ 7
15. Irrevocable Bids ..................................................... 8
16. Cost of Bid ......................................................... 8
17. Evaluation of Bids .................................................... 8
18. Negotiations ........................................................ 8
19. Acceptance of Bid and Contract Award ...................................... 9
20. Bid Conditions ..................................................... 10
(a) Conflict of Interest ................................................... 10
(b) Right to Cancel and Reissue Tender ....................................... 10
(c) Governing Law ..................................................... 10
 MWSB PART 1

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1. Project Information

(a) The Manitoba Water Services Board (MWSB) is issuing this Request for Tenders on behalf
of the Rural Municipality of Headingley for the following project:

PROJECT NO.: MWSB #1758

PROJECT NAME: RM of Headingley Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse

(b) The following is a brief description of the Work required for the project:

Construction of a new 3,855 m3 below ground reservoir, 210 m2 pre-engineered pumphouse

building, and associated process mechanical, building mechanical, electrical instrumentation
and controls.

Details of the scope of Work required for the project are set out in the project Specifications.

(c) The Work Site is located at:

South of the Grand Trunk Trail and west of Rockall Road on Field Way in the RM of
Headingley, MB.

(d) The MWSB’s Engineer is:

Stantec Consulting Ltd.
Brett Ransom, P.Eng. – ph: (204) 478-8992
Email: [email protected]

(e) The MWSB’s Construction Manager is:

Brad DeGraeve, C.E.T. – ph: (204) 726-6082
Email: [email protected]

(f) Project Owner is:

Rural Municipality of Headingley
Shawn Tosh, C.E.T. – ph: (204) 981-4345
Email: [email protected]

2. Tender Documents

(a) The Tender Documents are available online at MWSB’s e-Bidding Platform website “Bids &
Tenders”, located at https://mwsb.bidsandtenders.ca/Module/Tenders/en. Bidders may also
access the e-Bidding Platform through the MWSB’s website located at:
www.mbwaterservicesboard.ca through a link under the “Bid Opportunities” tab.

(b) Paper copies of the Tender Documents are no longer available. For each Bid Opportunity, the
Tender Documents are uploaded in PDF format and can be viewed, downloaded and printed
Page 1 of 10
 MWSB PART 1

from the e-Bidding Platform. Bidders are responsible for ensuring they have received all
Tender Documents including changes and are advised to check the e-Bidding Platform
for addenda before submitting their Bids.

(c) The form of agreement is included in the Tenders Documents at Part 4 for the purpose of
information to Bidders and shall not be completed at the time of Tender submission.

3. Work Site Viewing

(a) Work Site viewing is not mandatory.

(b) The Engineer will be available at the following date and time to provide Bidders with access
to the Work Site for viewing:

July 25, 2025 at 10:00 a.m.

(c) Although the Work Site viewing is not mandatory, the MWSB suggests Bidders view the
Work Site.

(d) Bidders are not entitled to rely on information received from the Engineer or other third
parties at the site viewing unless MWSB has provided the information in writing in the form
of an addendum.

4. Test Hole Digs

(a) The Engineer will conduct test hole digs at the Work Site viewing.

5. Online Bid Submission Procedure

(a) The MWSB will only accept electronic Bid submissions through the MWSB’s e-Bidding
Platform. Bid submissions received by any other method such as mail, personal or courier
delivery, facsimile or e-mail will be rejected, unless the MWSB has instructed otherwise by
addendum.

(b) The Bidder will be required to create a free account and register a user profile with the
MWSB’s e-Bidding Platform, and the submission procedure set out on the e-Bidding
Platform shall apply, including those with respect to Addenda Acknowledgements.

(c) Bids must be submitted electronically through the MWSB’s e-Bidding Platform, and received
by no later than the Submission Deadline. It is solely the Bidder’s responsibility to ensure
that their Bid is successfully submitted and received by the e-Bidding Platform before the
Submission Deadline. Bids will not be accepted after the Submission Deadline.

(d) File uploads approaching 500 Megabytes in size may be rejected by the e-Bidding Platform.
That said, there is no limit to the number of files a Bidder may submit. If for any reason size
does not permit sending the Bid in one upload, a Bidder may submit their Bid in multiple
submissions, with the files separated as required.
Page 2 of 10
 MWSB PART 1

(e) Bidders will be sent a confirmation e-mail from the e-Bidding Platform to the e-mail address
provided by the Bidder when it registers as a “Plan Taker” in the e-Bidding Platform for the
Request for Tenders advising that their Bid was submitted successfully and received. Bidders
should not consider their Bid to have been submitted and received until they have received
the confirmation email. Bidders who do not receive a confirmation email upon submission
should contact Bids & Tenders Technical Support at [email protected].

(f) The receipt of electronic Bid submissions can be delayed due to factors such as internet traffic,
file transfer size, transmission speed, and any other causes for delay. Bidders should allow
sufficient time to upload their Bid submissions, including any attachments.

(g) The Bidder bears all risk associated with submitting their Bid by electronic submission,
including but not limited to delays in transmission between the Bidder’s electronic (computer)
system and the e-Bidding Platform.

(h) Bidders are able to make changes to their Bid submission on the e-Bidding Platform
(including re-uploading/re-submitting) prior to the Submission Deadline.

6. Inquiries

(a) The MWSB will receive inquiries from Bidders by way of a formal process.

(b) All inquiries about the Work or the Tender Documents shall be directed, in writing by email,
or on the “Submit a Question” link on the e-Bidding Platform, at least five (5) Business Days
before the Submission Deadline. Inquiries received after this date may not be answered.
Written inquiries by email must be sent to MWSB’s Engineer and copied to the MWSB
Construction Manager at the email addresses set out in Sections 1(d) and (e) of these
Instructions to Bidders.

(c) Bidders may confirm whether an inquiry has or has not been received by the foregoing
deadline by phoning the Construction Manager at: (204) 726-6082.

(d) If the MWSB, in its sole discretion, determines that an inquiry will be of interest to all Bidders,
it will be communicated in writing to all Bidders by way of addendum. The source of the
inquiry will be kept confidential.

7. Tender Addendums

(a) The Construction Manager may extend the Submission Deadline by issuing an addendum at
any time before the Submission Deadline or before the date and time previously specified in
any addendum extending the Submission Deadline.

(a) Where an error, discrepancy or omission in the Tender Documents has been found, or where the
Construction Manager determines that the Tender Documents require clarification, the
Construction Manager will issue an addendum that addresses the error, discrepancy, omission
or ambiguity.

Page 3 of 10
 MWSB PART 1

(c) Bidders are responsible for ensuring that they have reviewed all addendums and that they
have considered the effect of such addendum in formulating their Bid.

(d) The Bidder will be required to acknowledge all addenda in the space provided in the Bid Form
before submitting their Bid through the e-Bidding Platform. Failure to acknowledge addenda
will result in the Bid being deemed “incomplete” and will not be accepted by the e-Bidding
Platform.

8. Substitutes as Approved Equals

(a) The Work is based on the Plant, Material or methods (including make, model or trade name
or catalogue reference) specified in the Tender Documents.

(b) Substitutions as an “approved equal” shall only be allowed if application has been made to
and prior approval has been granted by the Engineer in writing in accordance with this
Section.

(c) Requests for approval of a substitute as an approved equal will not be considered unless the
Engineer receives in the request in writing at least five (5) Business Days before the
Submission Deadline.

(d) Bidders shall ensure that any and all requests for approval of a substitute as an approved
equal:
(i) provide sufficient information and details to enable the Engineer to determine the
acceptability of the Plant, Material or method as an approved equal; and

(ii) certify that the substitute will fully perform the functions called for by the general
design, be of equal or superior substance to that specified, is suited to the same use
and capable of performing the same function as that specified and can be incorporated
into the Work, strictly in accordance with the proposed construction schedule and the
dates specified in the Tender Documents for Substantial Performance.

(e) The Engineer, after assessing the request for approval of a substitute, may in their sole
discretion grant approval for the use of a substitute as an approved equal or may refuse to
grant approval of the substitute.

(f) The Engineer will provide a response in writing, at least two (2) Business Days prior to the
Submission Deadline, only to the Bidder who requested approval of the substitute as an
approved equal. The Bidder requesting and obtaining the approval of a substitute shall be
entirely responsible for disseminating information regarding the approval to any person or
persons they wish to inform.

(g) If the Engineer approves a substitute as an approved equal, any Bidder may use the approved
equal in place of the specified item.

(h) The MWSB has published an “Approved Products List” to assist Bidders in determining
whether a particular product will conform to the requirements of the Specifications or
Page 4 of 10
 MWSB PART 1

Drawings. A copy of the Approved Products List is available on the MWSB’s website at
http://www.mbwaterservicesboard.ca/pubs/specs/listing-of-approved-products-rev.pdf. If
a particular product falls into a category included in the Approved Products List, only those
specified approved products identified in the Approved Products List shall be permitted to be
used.

9. Opening of Bids

(a) Bids will not be opened publicly. The unofficial bid results (including the Bidder’s name,
address and total Bid price) will be posted on the e-Bidding Platform, following the
Submission Deadline.

10. Bid Submission

(a) The electronic Bid submission must consist of the following components:
(i) Schedule of Prices ;
(ii) Bid Security – Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond; and
(iii) Bid Form.

11. Schedule of Prices

(a) The Bidder must submit the Schedule of Prices, using the electronic form provided on the e-
Bidding Platform. The Bidder must quote:
(i) a unit price for each item for which a quantity is given; and
(ii) a lump sum price for each lump sum item given.

(b) Prices shall be quoted in Canadian funds. All mandatory fields in the electronic Schedule of
Prices must be completed.

(c) The unit or lump sum prices quoted shall be all inclusive, and shall include: (i) the cost of the
various items of Work as set forth in the Contract; (ii) the cost to furnish all Material (except
as otherwise provided in the Contract); (iii) the cost to furnish all Plant, labour, transportation
and incidentals necessary for the proper completion of the Work which the Contractor is
required to do in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract; and (iv) all
insurance, Worker’s Compensation, vacation pay, custom duties, Provincial Sales Tax (PST)
and all other charges, costs and assessments. Government Sales Tax (GST) will be calculated
separately in the Schedule of Prices by the e-Bidding Platform. The e-Bidding Platform will
also calculate the Bidder’s total Bid price in the Schedule of Prices.

(d) Bidders acknowledge that the quantities shown on the Schedule of Prices are estimates only.
The MWSB will use the quantities for the purpose of comparing Bids. The actual quantities
may be considerably greater or considerably less than the quantities shown on the Schedule
of Prices. Separate prices must be submitted for each item set forth on the Schedule of Prices.

(e) The quantities for which payment will be made will be based on the Work actually performed
and completed by the Contractor, as measured and determined by the MWSB Engineer in
accordance with the applicable Specifications, Measurement and Payment provisions and the
General Conditions.
Page 5 of 10
 MWSB PART 1

(f) The MWSB reserves the right to include an Extra Work Allowance in the Schedule of Prices
in an amount specified by the MWSB. If an Extra Work Allowance is included, Bidders shall
include it in the total Bid price. The Extra Work Allowance shall be used to account for
payment for Changes in the Work, if any, in accordance with GC:5.18 of the General
Conditions.

(g) Where a Provisional Item is included in the Schedule of Prices, the MWSB reserves the right
to delete the Provisional Item from the Work and reduce the total Bid price on all responsive
Bids by the corresponding amount. No penalties, fees or reimbursements will be paid to the
Bidder for deletion of the Provisional Item from the Work.

12. Bid Security

(a) The Bidder must submit a Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond, using the electronic forms
provided on the e-Bidding Platform. The forms may be put on the Bidder’s letterhead and a
different font may be used but must not otherwise be modified.

(b) The amount of the Bid Bond shall be ten percent (10%) of the total Bid price, expressed as a
percentage. The Bid Bond must be irrevocable for the period of time indicated on the Bid
Form.

(c) The Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond shall be issued by a surety that is licenced and
registered to conduct business of a surety in the Province of Manitoba.

(d) The Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond shall be digitally verifiable through a third party digital
certification service provider that can maintain integrity of the electronic Bid Bond and
Agreement to Bond content and provide secure access to the bid security.

(e) Without limiting the generality of Section 12(d), the Bid Bond and Agreement to be Bond
must meet the following criteria:
(i) The version submitted by the Bidder must be verifiable by the MWSB with respect to
the totality and wholeness of the bond form, including the content, all digital
signatures, all digital seals, with the surety, or an approved third party digital
certification service provider;
(ii) The version submitted must be viewable, printable and sortable in standard electronic
file formats acceptable to the MWSB, and in a single file. Allowable formats include
PDF;
(iii) The verification may be conducted by the MWSB immediately after the Submission
Deadline or any time during the Bid validity period and at the discretion of the MWSB
with no requirement for passwords or fees;
(iv) The results of the verification must provide a clear, immediate and printable indication
of pass or fail regarding the requirements of this Section.

(f) Bid security failing the verification process will NOT be considered to be valid, and the
consequence will be rejection of the Bid. Bid security passing the verification process will
be treated as original and authentic.

Page 6 of 10
 MWSB PART 1

(g) Bidders are required to upload the electronic Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond as per
instructions through the e-Bidding Platform prior to the Submission Deadline. It is the
Bidder’s responsibility to ensure that their electronic Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond is
properly submitted to the e-Bidding Platform prior to the Submission Deadline.

(h) Bidders may review the Annual Report of the Superintendent of Insurance at website
http://www.gov.mb.ca/firb/reports.html for a list of sureties that are registered to conduct
business in the Province of Manitoba.

(i) The Bid Bonds and Agreements to Bond of the unsuccessful Bidders will not be returned to
Bidders unless requested in writing.

13. Bid Form

(a) The Bidder must submit the Bid Form, using the electronic form provided on the e-Bidding
Platform. All mandatory fields in the electronic Bid Form must be completed.

14. Qualification of Bidders

(a) As part of its evaluation of the Bids, the Construction Manager may require Bidders to submit
the following information:
(i) proof that the Bidder is incorporated or otherwise properly registered to carry on
business in the Province of Manitoba, or if the Bidder does not carry on business in the
Province of Manitoba, in the jurisdiction where the Bidder does carry on business;
(ii) proof that the Bidder is financially capable of carrying out the terms of the Contract;
(iii) proof that the Bidder has successfully carried out works of a similar nature or is fully
capable of performing the Work in accordance with the Contract;
(iv) a list of equipment in good working condition the Bidder is prepared to use in order to
undertake the Work;
(v) a list of Subcontractors who the Bidder proposes to engage to perform the Work;
(vi) a work plan stating the Bidder’s proposed approach to the various phases of the Work;
(vii) a list of references, preferably from parties for whom works comparable in scope,
nature and complexity to the Work were provided in the last five (5) years. For each
reference, the following information should be provided:
A. description of the project;
B. name of the entity for whom the project was done;
C. name of the primary contact;
D. telephone number and email for the primary contact and entity.
(viii) any other information requested by the MWSB.

(b) Bidders must be prepared to submit, within three (3) Business Days of a request by the
Construction Manager, proof satisfactory to the MWSB of the qualifications of the Bidder as
listed above.

(c) Failure to provide the information requested by the Construction Manager within time frame
set out in Section 14(b) may result in the Bid being considered non-responsive in accordance
with Section 17.

Page 7 of 10
 MWSB PART 1

(d) The MWSB specifically reserves the right to contact not only any of the references provided
by the Bidder, but also other references provided to the MWSB from other owners and
consultants without prior notice to the Bidder.

15. Irrevocable Bids

(a) Bids shall be irrevocable and open for acceptance for the time period specified on the Bid
Form.

(b) The acceptance by the MWSB of any Bid shall not release the Bids of the other responsive
Bidders and these Bidders shall be bound by their Bids on such Work for the time period
specified on the Bid Form.

16. Cost of Bid

(a) Costs incurred in the preparation, presentation and submission of a Bid shall be borne entirely
by the Bidder.

17. Evaluation of Bids

(a) Bids will be evaluated based on the following evaluation criteria:

(i) compliance by the Bidder with the
requirements of the Tender Documents pass / fail
(ii) qualifications of the Bidder pass / fail
(iii) total Bid price

(b) Further to Section 17(a):

(i) the MWSB may reject a Bid as being non-responsive if the Bid submission is
incomplete, obscure or conditional, or contains additions, deletions, alterations or
other irregularities;
(ii) the MWSB shall reject a Bid from a Bidder who does not demonstrate in the Bid
submission or in other information required to be submitted, that the Bidder is
responsible and qualified;
(iii) the MWSB may waive technical requirements or minor informalities or irregularities,
or reject all or part of any Bid if, in the sole discretion of the MWSB, it is considered
to be in the best interests of the MWSB to do so.

(c) Bids will be ranked on the basis of total Bid price quoted for the Work. The Bidder who
submitted the lowest evaluated responsive Bid will be top-ranked Bidder.

18. Negotiations

(a) The MWSB reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to negotiate details of the price (and
project scope and timelines where it may impact price) with the top-ranked Bidder. Bidders
are advised to present their best price proposals, not a starting point for negotiations in their
Bids.

(b) If, in the course of the negotiations pursuant to Section 17(a), the Bidder amends or modifies
Page 8 of 10
 MWSB PART 1

their Bid after the Submission Deadline, the MWSB may consider the amended Bid as an
alternative to the Bid already submitted without releasing the Bidder from their Bid as
originally submitted.

(c) If the negotiations described above fail, Bidders acknowledge and agree that the MWSB may,
but is not obligated to, negotiate with the remaining Bidders in the order of their ranking, on
the same terms and conditions as noted above. Each party to the negotiations is required to
bear its own costs incurred in the course of such negotiations.

19. Acceptance of Bid and Contract Award

(a) If the MWSB decides to accept a Bid, it will accept the Bid from the Bidder who submitted
the lowest evaluated responsive Bid, as amended based on negotiations, if any.

(b) The MWSB has no obligation to accept any Bid, even where one or all of the Bidders have
been determined to be responsive and qualified, and the Bids are determined to be responsive.
Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the MWSB will have no obligation to accept
a Bid where:
(i) the prices exceed the available funds for the Work;
(ii) the prices are materially in excess of the prices received by the MWSB for similar work
in the past;
(iii) the prices are materially in excess of the MWSB’s cost to perform the Work, or a
significant portion thereof, with its own forces;
(iv) the prices are unbalanced; or
(v) only one Bid is received; or
(vi) in the judgment of the MWSB, the interests of the MWSB would best be served by not
accepting a Bid.

(c) If the MWSB decides to accept a Bid, the MWSB will send a notice of conditional acceptance
letter to the Bidder by e-mail in PDF format.

(d) The MWSB’s acceptance of a Bid is conditional upon the MWSB obtaining all necessary
internal approvals, and the Bidder submitting the following documents within eight (8)
calendar days from the date of the conditional acceptance letter:
(i) evidence of Insurance;
(ii) evidence of Workers Compensation Board coverage;
(iii) Performance Security;
(iv) Contractor’s Certification Form – Legislative and Safety Requirements;
(v) evidence of COR, SECOR or COR equivalency;
(vi) Construction Schedule; and
(vii) Site Safety Plan.

See Insurance, Performance and Safety Requirements – MWSB PART 2 for further
instructions for the above documents.

(e) Subject to the foregoing conditions having been met, the MWSB will prepare a PDF copy of
the agreement (substantially in the form set out in MWSB PART 4) for signing, and send an
e-mail to the Bidder with further instructions for signing with electronic signatures using
Page 9 of 10
 MWSB PART 1

Xenex Enterprises Inc. “SignatureMasterTM”. The Bidder shall sign the agreement within
seven (7) calendar days from the date of this e-mail. Thereafter, the MWSB will sign the
agreement and return a fully signed copy to the Bidder for its records.

(f) The MWSB will accept electronic signatures using Xenex Enterprises Inc.
“SignatureMasterTM”. If the Bidder chooses to sign the agreement PART 4 with hand
signatures and seals, they must inform MWSB within two (2) Business Days from the date
of the conditional acceptance letter.

(g) The Contract shall consist of the fully signed agreement all the documents described in
GC:1.1(i) of the General Conditions.

(h) If the Bidder fails to comply with the above noted conditions, or fails or refuses to sign the
agreement, the MWSB may, in its sole discretion, cancel its conditional acceptance. In such
an event, the MWSB shall be entitled to retain the bid security accompanying the Bid as
liquidated damages, and the MWSB may accept the Bid of the next-best-ranked Bidder.

(i) The Bidder shall not start any work until the above noted conditions have been fulfilled and
the MWSB has signed the agreement and authorized the commencement of the Work.

(j) The name of the successful Bidder will be posted on the e-Bidding Platform after the MWSB
has signed the agreement.

(k) If no Contract is awarded, the MWSB will give written notification to all Bidders that no
Contract award will be made, and will post a notice on the e-Bidding Platform that the Tender
has been cancelled.

20. Bid Conditions

By submitting a Bid, the Bidder agrees, to the following terms and conditions:

(a) Conflict of Interest

No Bid will be considered from a Bidder where the MWSB, in its sole discretion, determines
that a potential conflict of interest exists.

(b) Right to Cancel and Reissue Tender

The MWSB may cancel this Tender at any time, with no liability whatsoever to any Bidder.

(c) Governing Law

The Tender Documents shall be interpreted, performed and enforced in accordance with the
laws of the Province of Manitoba and the laws of Canada, as applicable.

Page 10 of 10
 MWSB PART 2

INSURANCE, PERFORMANCE SECURITY AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

In accordance with Section 19(d) of the Instructions to Bidders – MWSB PART 1, the Bidder must provide
the Construction Manager with the documents as described herein, within eight (8) calendar days from
the date of the conditional acceptance letter:

1. Insurance: Except as otherwise expressly provided in the Tender Documents, the Contractor shall,
at the Contractor’s expense, provide and maintain the following insurance:

(a) Wrap-Up Liability Insurance

(i) This policy shall provide for coverage against claims for personal injury, bodily injury
or death, or damage to third party property as a result of the construction of the project,
with minimum limits of coverage of $5,000,000 per occurrence.
(ii) This policy shall be project specific (i.e. provide single project coverage), and provide
coverage for the MWSB, the Owner, the Contractor, all Subcontractors, the Engineer
and its sub-consultants (if the Engineer is a third party consultant) and their directors,
officers, employees and agents, engaged to provide goods or services in connection
with the Project. The Government of Manitoba, and its Ministers, officers, employees
and agents shall be added as additional insured to this policy.
(iii) This policy shall be endorsed as necessary to cover products; completed operations;
contingent employer’s liability, and including shoring, blasting, excavating,
underpinning, demolition, pile driving and caisson work, work below ground surface,
tunneling and grading, as applicable. The coverage shall also include cross liability,
premises and operations, blanket contractual, extended bodily injury, broad form
property damage and non-owned automobile liability. The policy shall include, as a
sublimit, ‘sudden and accidental’ environmental impairment liability coverage in the
minimum amount of $1,000,000. The policy shall also include twenty-four (24)
months completed operations coverage.

(b) Builders’ Risk Insurance

(i) This policy shall provide for all risks coverage at full replacement cost for all project
assets and property relating to the project (including testing and commissioning, and
including coverage for any equipment, and boiler and machinery insurance, as
applicable) for an amount not less than the total estimated construction cost of the
project.
(ii) This policy shall remain in effect until ten (10) calendar days after Substantial
Performance.
(iii) This policy shall be in the joint names of the Contractor and all Subcontractors
involved in the Work, MWSB, the Owner, the Engineer and its sub-consultants (if the
Engineer is a third party consultant) and their respective officers, employees and
agents; and
(iv) This policy shall provide that, in the case of a loss or damage, payment shall be made
to the MWSB, the Government of Manitoba, the Owner and the Contractor, as their
respective interests may appear.

Page 1 of 5
 MWSB PART 2

(c) Automobile Liability Insurance

(i) This insurance shall provide coverage for automobile public liability and property
damage on all licensed vehicles owned or operated by the Contractor, its
Subcontractors, or any of their officers, employees or agents under the Contract and
used in the performance of the Work, with minimum limits of coverage of
$10,000,000 per vehicle.

(d) Contractor’s Equipment Liability Insurance

(i) The Contractor shall be responsible for insuring construction machinery and
equipment used by the Contractor in the performance of the Work. Said coverage to
include waiver of subrogation in favour of The Manitoba Water Services Board, the
Owner, The Government of Manitoba and their respective employees.

(e) Owned and Non-Owned Aircraft and Watercraft Liability Insurance

(i) In the event aircraft or watercraft are used on the project, the Contractor shall provide
and maintain liability coverage with limits of not less than $10,000,000 inclusive per
occurrence. Liability coverage on aircraft to include passenger liability as required.

(f) Unmanned Aerial Vehicle Liability Insurance

(i) In the event unmanned aerial vehicles are used on the project, the Contractor shall
provide and maintain liability coverage with limits of not less than $5,000,000
inclusive per occurrence.

(g) Professional Liability Insurance

(i) Where applicable, the Contractor shall ensure that all consultants, architects or
engineers engaged by the Contractor to provide professional services in connection
with the Work, included but not limited to design services, carry professional liability
insurance with limits not less than $5,000,000 per occurrence or claim made, and an
annual aggregate of not less than $5,000,000. Such insurance shall provide coverages
for acts, errors and omissions arising from their professional services performed under
the Contract..

Insurers: The insurance must be underwritten by insurers licensed in Canada and be reputable and
financially creditworthy insurers with an A.M. Best financial strength rating of “A-“or higher, or
equivalent rating by alternate insurance credit rating agency.
Period of Insurance: Unless otherwise stipulated, the policies shall be effective from the date of
commencement of Work and shall be maintained until the day of issue of the Engineer’s
certification of Final Completion, and in the case of completed operations coverage and
claims-made based policies for a period of at least twenty-four (24) months following completion
of all Work under the Contract.

Notification: The insurance policies must include a provision that thirty (30) days prior written
notice shall be given by the insurer to the MWSB in the event of any material change in, cancellation
of, expiration of coverage or amendment restricting coverage specific to the Contract.

Indemnification: The insurance coverage required shall in no way limit the Contractor’s obligations
Page 2 of 5
 MWSB PART 2

under the Contract. Any additional coverage the Contractor may deem necessary to fulfill the
Contractor’s obligations under the Contract shall be at the Contractor’s own discretion and expense.

Evidence of Insurance: The Bidder shall provide the Construction Manager with Certificates of
Insurance or certified copies of the above policies as evidence of the required insurance.

2. Workers Compensation
Workers Compensation Board of Manitoba: The Contractor shall be registered with the Workers
Compensation Board of Manitoba (even when such registration is not required by The Worker’s
Compensation Act (Manitoba). The Contractor shall maintain such coverage in good standing
throughout the term of the Contract.

Evidence of Workers Compensation Board Coverage: The Bidder shall provide a clearance letter
from the Worker’s Compensation Board of Manitoba as written evidence that the Bidder is
registered and in good standing with the Workers Compensation Board of Manitoba.

A clearance letter may be obtained online at the Worker’s Compensation Board of Manitoba
website at: http://www.wcb.mb.ca/clearances.

The clearance letter must be dated no earlier than the issue date of the Request for Tenders.

3. Performance Security
Obligation to Provide Performance Security: The Contractor shall, at its own expense, provide and
maintain performance security until the expiration of the warranty period in the form of:

(a) a performance bond of a company registered to conduct the business of a surety in Manitoba,
in the form attached to the Tender Documents, in the amount of fifty percent (50%) of the
Contract Price; and

(b) a labour and materials payment bond of a company registered to conduct the business of surety
in Manitoba, in the form attached to the Tender Documents, in the amount of fifty percent
(50%) of the Contract Price.

Evidence of Performance Security: The Bidder shall provide the Construction Manager with the
required performance bond and labour and material payment bond as evidence of the required
performance security.

The MWSB will only accept digitally verifiable electronic format (e-Bonds) of the performance
bond and the labour and materials payment bond. The MWSB will no longer accept original paper
bonds, unless the MWSB has instructed otherwise in writing.

The e-Bonds shall be digitally verifiable through a third party digital certification service provider
that can maintain integrity of the electronic bond content and provide secure access to the bid
security. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the e-Bonds must meet the following
criteria:
(i) The version submitted by the Bidder must be verifiable by the MWSB with respect to
the totality and wholeness of the bond form, including the content, all digital
Page 3 of 5
 MWSB PART 2

signatures, all digital seals, with the surety, or an approved third party digital
certification service provider;
(ii) The version submitted must be viewable, printable and sortable in standard electronic
file formats acceptable to the MWSB, and in a single file. Allowable formats include
PDF;
(iii) The verification may be conducted by the MWSB immediately after it is submitted to
the MWSB or any time during the validity period of the performance security and at
the discretion of the MWSB with no requirement for passwords or fees;
(iv) The results of the verification must provide a clear, immediate and printable indication
of pass or fail regarding the requirements of this Section.

Performance security failing the verification process will NOT be considered to be valid.
Performance security passing the verification process will be treated as original and authentic.

4. Government Wide Contract Policy - Legislative and Safety Requirements

(a) The Province of Manitoba’s Government Wide Contract Policy – Legislative and Safety
Requirements requires contractors and subcontractors engaging in Government of Manitoba
contracts (subject to the scope of this policy) to declare compliance with certain legislative and
safety requirements, including The Apprenticeship and Certification Act (Manitoba), The
Employment Standards Code (Manitoba), The Construction Industry Wages Act (Manitoba),
The Workplace Safety and Health Act (Manitoba), and certification in a CORTM or SECORTM
safety program in Manitoba (or equivalent, where applicable).

(b) The Policy requires all contractors and subcontractors to submit a “Contractor’s Certification
Form – Legislative and Safety Requirements” declaring that they meet the legislative and safety
requirements (or indicate the applicable exemption).

(c) The Bidder must complete and submit the “Contractor’s Certification Form – Legislative and
Safety Requirements” prior to contract award as evidence of the required declaration. The
Bidder must also submit a copy of a valid COR certificate, SECOR certificate or COR
equivalency (as applicable) as evidence that the Bidder meets the COR safety program
requirements.

(d) The successful Bidder shall ensure that all its applicable Subcontractors provide a fully executed
“Contractor’s Certification Form – Legislative and Safety Requirements” to the successful
Bidder before the Subcontractor begins work on the Project. The successful Bidder agrees to
provide these fully executed forms to the Construction Manager upon request.

(e) For further information regarding the Policy go to: https://www.gov.mb.ca/wd/contractpolicy/

5. Construction Schedule
The Bidder shall provide a construction schedule which outlines the Bidder’s plan for completing
the Work. The Bidder should include details about the sequencing and timing of the major activities
of the Work in the schedule.

All dates and time periods in the construction schedule shall be consistent with the dates and time
Page 4 of 5
 MWSB PART 2

periods as specified in the Bid Form and the Special Provisions.

6. Site Safety Plan

The Bidder shall prepare and submit a site safety plan that meets the requirements of The Workplace
Safety and Health Act. This plan shall include but is not limited to all items listed below:

(a) Hazard/Risk Assessment Practices and Procedures, including planned site safety inspections
and accident/incident investigation procedures; and
(b) Emergency Response Plan and Procedures.

Page 5 of 5
 MWSB PART 3A

BID FORM

Project No. MWSB 1758

Project Name RM of Headingley Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse

Submission Date: August 1, 2025

Deadline (also Time: Before 11:00:00 a.m. prevailing Brandon time
known as “Closing
Date”)
Definitions All capitalized terms used in the Tender Documents shall have the meanings
ascribed to them as set out in the General Conditions.

Offer The Bidder has carefully examined the Tender Documents and has a clear
and comprehensive understanding of the Work required. The Bidder hereby
offers to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract for the price
quoted by the Bidder, as set out in the Schedule of Prices.

Tender Documents The Bidder agrees that the Tender Documents in their entirety shall be
deemed to be incorporated in and shall form a part of this Bid
notwithstanding that not all parts are necessarily attached to or accompany
these Tender Documents.

Bid Validity Period This Bid shall be open for acceptance, binding and irrevocable for a period
of thirty (30) calendar days after the Submission Deadline.

Time to Complete In accordance with GC:10 of the General Conditions, the Bidder agrees to
the Work achieve Substantial Performance:

On or before: February 26, 2027

Liquidated In accordance with GC:10.6 of the General Conditions, the Bidder

Damages acknowledges and agrees that if it fails to achieve Substantial Performance
in accordance with the dates specified in the Contract, the Bidder will be
required to pay the MWSB the following amounts per Working Day as
liquidated damages for each and every Working Day which the failure
continues:
Liquidated Damages: $2,500 per working day.

Addenda The Bidder has reviewed all addenda posted on the MWSB’s e-Bidding
Platform, and agrees they shall be deemed to form part of the Contract. The
Bidder is required to acknowledge all addenda in the space provided in the
Bid Form before submitting their Bid through the e-Bidding Platform.
Failure to acknowledge addenda will result in the Bid being deemed
“incomplete” and will not be accepted by the e-Bidding Platform.
1 of 2
 MWSB PART 3A

Authority and I/WE represent and warrant that the Bidder has the full power and authority
Certification to enter into and agree to the terms and conditions of this Request for
Tenders, and that the person submitting this Bid on behalf of the Bidder is
properly authorized to do so. I/WE certify that all statements and
representations made in this Bid are true and accurate.

Conflict of Interest
The Bidder shall declare any potential or actual conflict of interest that could arise
from bidding on this Bid on the Bids & Tenders Website. The MWSB may reject
any Bid if the MWSB, in its sole discretion, determines that an actual or potential
conflict of interest exists.

2 of 2
 MWSB PART 3A

SCHEDULE OF PRICES
PROJECT NO. MWSB #1758

ESTIMATED
DESCRIPTION OF WORK UNIT UNIT PRICE TOTAL
QUANTITIES

A.1 – General Conditions 1 L.S.

A.2 - Site Works 1 L.S.
A.3 – Substructure 1 L.S.
A.4 – Superstructure 1 L.S.
A.5 - Process Mechanical 1 L.S.
A.6 - Building Mechanical 1 L.S.
A.7 -Electrical 1 L.S.
A.8 - Instrumentation and Controls 1 L.S.
A.9 - Commissioning,
1 L.S.
Demonstration and Training
B.1 - Extra Work Allowance 1 L.S. $400,000 $400,000
Subtotal
Notes:
- Where required, PST to be included in Unit Prices
- GST will be calculated by the e-Bidding Platform

1 of 1
 MWSB PART 3A

BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT:

(hereinafter called the “Principal”) and

(hereinafter called the “Surety”)

are held and firmly bound unto THE MANITOBA WATER SERVICES BOARD (the “MWSB”) in
the sum of ten percent (10%) of the total Bid price set out in the Bid submission hereinafter described, for
the payment of which sum the Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS the Principal has submitted a Bid to the MWSB for

Project No.: MWSB #1758

Project Name: RM of Headingley Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse
Project Description: Construction of a new 3,855 m3 below ground reservoir, 210 m2 pre-engineered
pumphouse building, and associated process mechanical, building mechanical,
electrical instrumentation and controls.

as more fully set out in the Specifications referred to in the Tender Documents.

NOW THEREFORE the condition of this obligation is such that if the Bid of the Principal is not accepted,
or if the said Bid is accepted and the Principal, in accordance with the terms of the Tender, enters into a
Contract with the MWSB and furnishes the required Performance Bond and Labour and Materials
Payment Bond, this obligation shall be void, but otherwise shall remain in full force and effect.

SIGNED AND SEALED this ____________ day of _____________________________ , 20 ______ .

Name of Principal ______________________________________

Address ______________________________________
Email ______________________________________
Phone Number ______________________________________

Per: _________________________________

Per: ___________________________ (Seal)

Page 1 of 2
 MWSB PART 3A

Name of Surety ______________________________________

Address ______________________________________
Email ______________________________________
Phone Number ______________________________________

Per: ___________________________ (Seal)

(Attorney-in-Fact)

Page 2 of 2
 MWSB PART 3A

AGREEMENT TO BOND
(to be attached to and to form part of the Bid Bond)

The Surety on the attached Bid Bond hereby undertakes and agrees with THE MANITOBA WATER SERVICES
BOARD to become bound as Surety for the Principal,
of
(Name of Bidder)

(Place)

The Bidder to you on ____________________________ , 20 ______ for

Project No.: MWSB #1758

Project Name: RM of Headingley Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse

The Surety agrees to issue for the Principal;

1. a Performance Bond in an amount equal to fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Price for the due and proper
performance of the Work shown and described in the Bid; and
2. a Labour and Material Payment Bond in an amount equal to fifty percent (50%) of the Contract Price for
the payment of all labour, service and material used or reasonably required for use in the performance of
the Work shown and described in the Bid;

If our Principal’s Bid is accepted by you, such Performance Bond and Labour and Material Payment Bond (the
“Bonds”) to be maintained and continue in full force and effect until the expiration of the warranty period.

It is a condition that this Agreement to Bond shall become null and void if the Bonds mentioned above are not
required from our Principal within the thirty (30) calendar days after the Submission Deadline.

AND IT IS HEREBY DECLARED AND AGREED that the Surety shall be liable as Principal, and that nothing of
any kind or matter whatsoever that will not discharge the Principal shall operate as a discharge or release of liability
of the Surety, any law or usage relating to the liability of Sureties to the contrary notwithstanding.

SIGNED AND SEALED this _________ day of __________________________ , 20 ______ .

Name of Surety ______________________________________

Address ______________________________________
Email ______________________________________
Phone Number ______________________________________

Per: ___________________________ (Seal)

(Attorney-in-Fact)

Page 1 of 1
 MWSB PART 3B

PERFORMANCE BOND

BOND NO. _____________________________

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT

_______________________________________ of __________________________________________
(Name of Principal) (Place)
(the “Principal”)
and

_______________________________________ of __________________________________________
(Name of Surety) (Place)
(the “Surety”),
are held and firmly bound unto The Manitoba Water Services Board (the “MWSB”) in the sum of
____________________________________________________ Dollars ($______________________),
of lawful money of Canada to be paid to the MWSB or its successors or assigns, for the payment of which
the Principal and the Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns,
jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS the Principal has entered into a written contract with the MWSB dated the _____ day of
_____________, 20___ , for:

MWSB Tender for:

Project No.: MWSB #1758
Project Name: RM of Headingley Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse
Project Description: Construction of a new 3,855 m3 below ground reservoir, 210 m2 pre-engineered
pumphouse building, and associated process mechanical, building mechanical,
electrical instrumentation and controls

which is by reference made part hereof and is hereinafter referred to as the “Contract”.

NOW THEREFORE, the Condition of the above obligation is such that if the Principal shall:

(a) carry out and perform the Contract and every part in the manner and within the times set forth in
the Contract and in accordance with the terms and conditions specified in the Contract;
(b) perform the Work in a good, proper workmanlike manner;
(c) make all the payments whether to the MWSB or to others as therein provided;
(d) in every respect comply with the obligations and perform the covenants contained in the Contract;
and
(e) indemnify and save harmless the MWSB against and from any and all loss, damages, costs, claims
and demands of every description as set forth in the Contract, and from all penalties, assessments,
claims, actions for loss, damages or other compensation whether arising under The Workers
Compensation Act, or any other Act or otherwise arising out of or in any way connected with the
performance or non-performance of the Contract or any part thereof during the term of the Contract
and the warranty period provided for therein.

Page 1 of 2
 MWSB PART 3B

THEN THIS OBLIGATION SHALL BE VOID, but otherwise shall remain in full force and effect. The

Surety shall not, however, be liable for a greater sum than the sum specified above.

AND IT IS HEREBY DECLARED AND AGREED that the Surety shall be liable as Principal, and that
nothing of any kind of matter whatsoever that will not discharge the Principal shall operate as a discharge
or release of liability of the Surety, any law or usage relating to the liability of sureties to the contrary
notwithstanding.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have signed and sealed this bond on this
____ day of _________________, 20___.

SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED in the presence of

Name of Principal ______________________________________ (seal)

Address ______________________________________
Email ______________________________________
Phone Number ______________________________________

_______________________________
Witness

Name of Surety ______________________________________ (seal)

Address ______________________________________
Email ______________________________________
Phone Number ______________________________________

______________________________
Witness

Page 2 of 2
 MWSB PART 3B

LABOUR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND

BOND NO. _____________________________ $___________________________________

Note: This Bond is issued simultaneously with another Bond in favour of the MWSB conditioned for the
full and faithful performance of the Contract.

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that ___________________________________________

as principal (hereinafter called the “Principal”), and __________________________________________,
as surety (hereinafter called the “Surety”), are held and firmly bound unto The Manitoba Water Services
Board, as the Trustee (hereinafter called the “MWSB”) for the use and benefit of the Claimants (as defined
herein), and each of their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, in the sum of
____________________________________ Dollars ($______________________) of lawful money of
Canada, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, the Principal and the Surety bind
themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, by these
presents.

WHEREAS the Principal has entered into a written contract with the MWSB, dated the _______ day of
_________________, 20___, for:

MWSB Tender for:

Project No.: MWSB #1758
Project Name: RM of Headingley Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse
Project Description: Construction of a new 3,855 m3 below ground reservoir, 210 m2 pre-engineered
pumphouse building, and associated process mechanical, building mechanical,
electrical instrumentation and controls

which is by reference made part hereof and is hereinafter referred to as the “Contract”.

NOW THEREFORE the condition of this obligation is such that, if the Principal shall promptly make
payment to all Claimants, for all labour and material used or reasonably required for use in the
performance of the Contract, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and
effect, subject, however, to the following conditions:

(1) A Claimant for the purpose of this Bond is defined as one having a direct contract with the
Principal for labour, material, or both, used or reasonably required for use in the performance
of the Contract, labour and material being construed to include that part of water, gas, power,
light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental of equipment directly applicable to the
Contract provided that a person, firm or corporation who rents equipment to the Principal to be
used in the Performance of the Contract under a contract which provides that all or any part of
the rent is to be applied towards the purchase price thereof, shall only be a Claimant to the extent
of the prevailing industrial rental value of such equipment for the period during which the
equipment was used in the performance of the Contract. The prevailing industrial value of
equipment shall be determinate, insofar as it is practical to do so, in accordance with and in the
manner provided for in the latest revised edition of the publication of the Manitoba Heavy
Construction Association titled “Annual Directory and Equipment Rental Rates Guide”
published prior to the period during which the equipment was used in the performance of the
Page 1 of 3
 MWSB PART 3B

Contract;

(2) The Principal and the Surety, hereby jointly and severally agree with the MWSB, as Trustee, that
every Claimant who has not been paid as provided for under the terms of their contract with the
Principal before the expiration of a period of ninety (90) days after the date on which the last of
such Claimant's work or labour was done or performed or materials were furnished by such
Claimant, may as a beneficiary of the trust herein provided for, sue on this bond, prosecute the suit
to final judgement for such sum or sums as may be justly due to such Claimant under the terms of
their contract with the Principal, and have execution thereon. Provided that the MWSB is not
obliged to do or take any act, action or proceeding against the Surety on behalf of the Claimants, or
any of them, to enforce the provinces of this Bond. If any act, action or proceeding is taken either
in the name of the MWSB or by joining the MWSB as a party to such proceeding, then such act,
action or proceeding, shall be taken on the understanding and basis that the Claimants or any of
them, who take such act, action or proceeding shall indemnify and save harmless the MWSB against
all costs, charges and expenses or liabilities incurred thereon and any loss or damage resulting to
the MWSB by reason thereof. Provided still further that, subject to the foregoing terms and
conditions, the Claimants, or any of them, may use the name of the MWSB to sue on and enforce
the provisions of this bond;

(3) No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any Claimant:

(a) unless such Claimant shall have given written notice within the time limits hereinafter set
forth to each of the Principal, the Surety and the MWSB, stating with substantial accuracy
the amount claimed. Such notice shall be served by mailing the same by registered mail to
the Principal, the Surety and the MWSB, at any place where an office is regularly maintained
for the transaction of business by such persons, or served in any manner in which legal process
may be served in the Province of Manitoba. Such notice shall be given:
(i) in respect of any claim for the amount or any portion of thereof, required to be held
back from the Claimant by the Principal, under either the terms of the Claimant’s
contract with the Principal, or under The Builders’ Liens Act applicable to the
Claimant’s contract with the Principal, whichever is the greater, within one hundred
and twenty (120) days after such Claimant should have been paid in full under the
Claimant’s contract with the Principal;
(ii) in respect of any claim other than for the holdback, or portion thereof, referred to above,
within one hundred and twenty (120) days after the date upon which such Claimant
did, or performed, the last of the work or labour or furnished the last of the materials
for which such claim is made under the Claimant’s contract with the Principal;

(b) after the expiration of one (1) year following the date on which the Principal ceased work on
the Contract, including work performed under the guarantees provided in the Contract; and

(c) other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the Province of Manitoba and not elsewhere,
and the parties hereto agree to submit to the jurisdiction of such court.

Page 2 of 3
 MWSB PART 3B

(4) Any material change in the contract between the Principal and the MWSB shall not prejudice the
rights or interest of any Claimant under this bond, who is not instrumental in bringing about or has
not caused such change;

(5) The amount of this bond shall be reduced by, and to the extent of any payment or payments made
in good faith, and in accordance with the provisions hereof, inclusive of the payment by Surety of
Builders’ Liens which may be filed on record against the subject matter of the Contract, whether or
not claim for the amount of such lien be presented under and against this bond;

(6) The Surety shall not be liable for a greater sum than the specified penalty of this bond.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have signed and sealed this bond on the
________ day of __________________, 20____.

SIGNED, SEALED AND DELIVERED in the presence of

Name of Principal ______________________________________ (seal)

Address ______________________________________
Email ______________________________________
Phone Number ______________________________________

_______________________________
Witness

Name of Surety ______________________________________ (seal)

Address ______________________________________
Email ______________________________________
Phone Number ______________________________________

______________________________
Witness

Page 3 of 3
 MWSB PART 3B

CONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION FORM

LEGISLATIVE AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

PART ONE

___________________________________________________________________________________________
(Contractor or Subcontractor to insert its name above)

declares and certifies that, while employed in the work of:

Tender MWSB #1758 – RM of Headingley Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse (the “Work”):

Trades

1. At all times during the Contract, it will abide by all applicable requirements of The Apprenticeship and
Certification Act and the regulations thereunder.

2. Without limiting the generality of Item 1 above,

a. it will abide by the compulsory certification trade requirements as set out in The Apprenticeship and
Certification Act and the applicable trade regulations under that Act; and

b. it will abide by supervision ratios as set out in applicable trade regulations under The Apprenticeship
and Certification Act and under The Construction Industry Wages Act.

Note to Bidder: For a list of trades, including compulsory certification trades and supervision ratios,
please refer to the Government of Manitoba’s website at www.gov.mb.ca.

Employment Standards and Wage Rates

3. At all times during the Contract, it will abide by all applicable requirements of The Employment Standards
Code and The Construction Industry Wages Act and regulations thereunder.

4. If requested by the MWSB before the Contract is awarded, it will provide MWSB with a signed copy of
the minimum wage rates applicable to the trades performing any part of the Work of this Tender.

5. It will post a copy of such minimum wage rates as are applicable from time-to-time during the Contract to
the trades performing any part of the Work of this Tender in a conspicuous place at the Site.

Workplace Safety and Health

6. At all times during the Contract, it will comply with all applicable requirements of The Workplace Safety
and Health Act and regulations thereunder, specifically 7.4(8) regarding the responsibility to co-ordinate
the safety programs of all employers at a construction site where the contractor has been designated as the
Prime Contractor.

Page 1 of 3
 MWSB PART 3B

PART TWO

The Contractor or Subcontractor further declares and certifies that (must choose one):

a. It has a valid Certificate of Recognition (CORTM) issued in accordance with the Canadian
Federation of Construction Safety Associations CORTM program, by either the Manitoba Heavy
Construction Association Safety Program or by the Construction Safety Association of Manitoba.
The CORTM number is _________________________ and was issued on
____________________________ (date).

OR

b. It has a valid Small Employer Certificate of Recognition (SECORTM), issued in accordance with
the Canadian Federation of Construction Safety Associations CORTM program, by either the
Manitoba Heavy Construction Association or by the Construction Safety Association of Manitoba.
The SECORTM number is ___________________________ and was issued on
____________________________ (date).

OR

c. It has a current CORTM equivalency issued in accordance with the Canadian Federation of
Construction Safety Associations COR program, and verified by either the Manitoba Heavy
Construction Association or by the Construction Safety Association of Manitoba. The equivalency
document is dated _____________________________.

OR

d. The requirement for a CORTM certificate, SECORTM certificate or equivalency, or in (a) through
(c) above does not apply because the value of the contract (or in the case of a subcontractor, the
subcontract) is less than $100,000 CAD.

OR

e. The CORTM safety program requirements do not apply because the work activities or class of
contract is specifically exempt as indicated in the Government Wide Contract Policy – Legislative
and Safety Requirements.

OR

f. The CORTM safety program requirements do not apply as indicated in the contract.

For more information about this policy and form, please contact:

Website: http://www.gov.mb.ca/wd/contractpolicy/
Phone: (204) 945-0575
1-866-332-5077 (toll free)
Email: [email protected]

Page 2 of 3
 MWSB PART 3B

PART THREE
(only applies to the Contractor)

The Contractor understands that this Certification forms part of the Contract. The Contractor also understands that
the consequences of failing to comply with a commitment made or making an untrue statement in this Certification,
or failing to provide additional information satisfactory to the MWSB regarding anything in this Certification, may
(among other things) disqualify the Contractor from participating in future tenders or result in the Contract being
terminated.

SIGNATURE

In witness whereof, the Contractor or Subcontractor has signed this Certification on the date noted below:

________________________________ ______________________________________
Witness Signature of Contractor or Subcontractor

______________________________________
Date

Page 3 of 3
 MWSB PART 4

FORM OF AGREEMENT

THIS AGREEMENT made effective as of the _____ day of ____________, 20___. For MWSB

BETWEEN:

THE MANITOBA WATER SERVICES BOARD,

(the “MWSB”),

- and -

___________________________________,

(the "Contractor").

WITNESSETH THAT:

The MWSB and the Contractor mutually covenant and agree with each other as follows:

1. The Contractor will, at its own cost, charge and expense, furnish all and every kind of labour,
machinery and other Plant, tools, Materials and all things whatsoever necessary or proper for the
purpose, and in a good, substantial and workmanlike manner, perform the following Work:

CONSTRUCTION OF ___________________________

in accordance with this Agreement and the following schedules attached hereto:

SCHEDULES:

“A” Notice of Conditional Acceptance Letter dated _______________, 20___;

“B” Bid submission from Contractor dated ____________, 20___;
“C” Tender Documents including:
i. Part 1 - Bidding Instructions
ii. Part 2 – Insurance, Performance Security and Safety Requirements
iii. MWSB Standard Construction Specifications, including without
limitation, DIVISION 1 – General, MWSB 1000 General
Conditions
iv. Specifications identified in the Tender Documents
v. Drawings identified in the Tender Documents

Page 1 of 3
 MWSB PART 4

“D” Addendum No. 1 dated _______________, 20___.

Addendum No. 2 dated _______________, 20___.
Addendum No. 3 dated _______________, 20___.

2. The Schedules attached hereto and any other plans, drawings, specifications or provisions referred
to in the Schedules, together with any further plans or drawings prepared or to be prepared for the
purpose of the Work are hereby made and are to be read as part of this Agreement.

3. In accordance with GC:10 of the General Conditions, the Bidder agrees to achieve Substantial
Performance on or before:________________________________________________

4. Subject to the conditions contained in this Agreement, the total estimated price to be paid by the
MWSB to the Contractor shall be:

<ESTIMATED PRICE (in words) ($___________) in Canadian funds>.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the total amount which the MWSB covenants to pay to the
Contractor hereunder shall be the sums certified in the interim and final progress estimates as
provided for in the General Conditions. Such sums shall be fixed and determined upon the basis
of the prices for work and materials contained or referred to in the Schedules attached hereto and
in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. The total price paid by the MWSB shall be
the sole consideration for the covenants of the Contractor and shall be accepted by it in full
satisfaction and payment of its whole claim under this Agreement.

The Contractor covenants to assume, pay and discharge all sums of money payable for and in
respect of all claims, actions, proceedings, assessments or awards for loss, damages or
compensation (whether at common law, under The Workers Compensation Act, The Builders
Liens Act or any other statute or otherwise) arising out of or in any way connected with the
execution or non-execution of the Work, and to reimburse the MWSB for all payments made by
it in settlement of any such claims or proceedings unless the same be shown not to have been
made by the MWSB in good faith.

5. For the purposes of Section 19 (Notices) of DIVISION 1 – General, MWSB 1000 General
Conditions, the respective addresses of the parties are:

(a) The MWSB’s address:

Manitoba Water Services Board

Unit 1A – 2010 Currie Blvd.
Brandon, MB R7B 4E7
Fax: (204) 726-7196
Attention: Brad DeGraeve, C.E.T., Construction Manager
Email: [email protected]

Page 2 of 3
 MWSB PART 4

(b) Contractor’s address:

Insert Contractor’s name
Insert Address
Insert Fax number
Insert name of contact person
Insert Email

6. This Agreement may be executed by the parties in one or more counterparts and each of such
counterparts will be deemed to be an original, and all such counterparts when taken together will
constitute one and the same agreement. A handwritten or electronically signed counterpart of
this Agreement delivered by email (“PDF” format) , or using the electronic signature platform
acceptable to the MWSB (Xenex Enterprises Inc. “SignatureMasterTM”), shall be treated in all
manner and respects as an original agreement and should be considered to have the same binding
legal effect as if it were the original signed version thereof delivered in person.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have executed this Agreement in the manner
appropriate to each, as of the day and year first above written.

THE MANITOBA WATER SERVICES BOARD

Per:

_________________________________
General Manager

Signed, Sealed and Delivered ) <NAME OF CONTRACTOR>

In the presence of: )
)
)
Witness (if no corporate seal) ) (signature of authorized officer) & Date
)
)
Print name & address of witness ) (Print name and Title)
)

Page 3 of 3
 Section 00 01 05
CERTIFICATION PAGE
Page 1 of 1

CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS

FOR

MWSB No. 1758

RM of Headingley

Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse

Brett Ransom, P.Eng.

CONFIDENTIALITY AND © COPYRIGHT

These documents are for the sole use of the Engineer, and the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers having a Contract for the execution
of the Work covered in the Contract Documents, in whole or in part. The Contract Documents contain proprietary and confidential information that
shall not be reproduced in any manner or disclosed to or discussed with any other parties without the express written permission of the Engineer.
Information in these documents is to be considered the intellectual property of the Engineer in accordance with Canadian copyright law.

MWSB 1758 RM of Headingley - Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse

DIVISION 01

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 01 00 10
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 FURNISHING OF DOCUMENTS

.1 Upon award of the Contract, the Contractor will be provided five (5) complete sets of the
Drawings and Specifications. If the Contractor requires additional sets, they will be
provided to him at cost.

1.2 SUBCONTRACTOR LIST

.1 In addition to the requirements of MWSB 1000, Section 4.23, the contractor shall provide
the Engineer with a complete list of the sub-contractors prior to the pre-construction
meeting.

1.3 DELETION AND ADDITION OF WORK

.1 The Owner reserves the right to increase or decrease any or all quantities in this Contract.
If quantities are increased or decreased, Contract Unit Bid Prices shall remain unchanged.

1.4 PRECEDENCE
.1 In the event of conflicts between these Special Provisions and the Plans or the other
sections of the Specifications, the Special Provisions shall govern. In case of a conflict
with the specifications and plans, the specifications shall take precedence.
.2 The Contractor shall take note that The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard
Construction Specifications, March 2022 version with reference made to specific
Divisions and Sections outlined in the Table of Contents shall apply to and be part of the
Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a copy and
maintain the most recent update to the MWSB Standard Construction Specifications,
March 2022 version for the proper execution of the Contract.
.3 In case of conflicts with the specification sections that are bound to this document and the
Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications, May 2022
version, the specification sections that are bound to this document shall take precedence.
.4 Refer to Clause 1.5 (i)
Process and instrumentation drawings shall govern over process plan drawings.

1.5 MWSB PART 2 – INSURANCE, PERFORMANCE SECURITY AND SAFETY

REQUIREMENTS
.1 Refer to Clause 6 – Construction Schedule
In addition to the requirements of Clause 7, the Bidder is required to also meet the
requirements of Section 01 32 16 – Construction Schedule bound to this document.

1.6 REFER TO MWSB 1000 – GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 Refer to Section 1 and add Clause 1.1 (cc) as follows:
“Owner” means the Rural Municipality of Headingley

01 00 10.docx Stantec SPECIAL PROVISIONS

RM of Headingley Section 01 00 10
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
Page 2 of 2

.2 Refer to Section 4, Clauses 4.40 and 4.41 – Construction Schedule and add the following:
The Bidder shall also meet the requirements stated in Section 01 32 16 – Construction
Schedule, bound to this document.
.3 Refer to Section 4, Clause 4.42 – Shop Drawings and add the following:
The Bidder shall also meet the requirements stated in Section 01 33 00 – Submittals,
bound to this document.
.4 Refer to Section 4, Clause 4.52 to 4.55 – Manuals, Commissioning and Training and add
the following:
The Bidder shall also meet the requirements stated in Section 01 78 00 Close out
Submittals, Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training, and Section 01 91 13 –
General Commissioning Requirements.
.5 Refer to Section 4, Clauses 4.7 to 4.10 – Regulatory Requirements and add the following:
The Bidder shall also meet the requirements stated in Section 01 41 00 Regulatory
Requirements bound to this document.
.6 Refer to Section 5, Clause 5.13 – Valuation of Change in Work and add the following:
.1 For valuation methods 5.13 (a) and 5.13 (c) the Contractor shall submit detailed
breakdown of quantities, prices and fees, together with substantiating
documentation from all Subcontractors and Suppliers associated with the change
in work.
.2 The Contractor’s quotation shall remain open for acceptance for forty-five (45)
calendar days from the date of submission of the quote to the Engineer.
.7 Refer to Section 1, Clause 1.5 (i) and add subclause (iiv): “Process and instrumentation
drawings govern over plan and section drawings”

1.7 MATERIAL IN CONTACT WITH POTABLE WATER

.1 All material in contact with potable water shall be NSF 61 certified and all chemicals
shall be NSF-60 certified.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

01 00 10.docx Stantec SPECIAL PROVISIONS

RM of Headingley Section 01 00 20
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COORDINATION
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION

.1 Although the Tender Documents set forth the work of various trades under separate
Divisions, it is not intended that the work of that trade is limited to or includes all work
set forth in that particular Division. The Bidder shall delegate the extent of the Work to
be done by the various trades and shall coordinate execution of the Work by all trades.
.2 Although the specifications are separated into titled Divisions, neither the Engineer nor
the Owner will be an arbitrator to establish limits of any agreements between the
Contractor and his Subcontractor.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 All other specification sections

1.3 MECHANCIAL, ELECTRICAL AND CONTROLS COORDINATION

.1 The Contractor shall examine the electrical, mechanical, structural and architectural
drawings before beginning the Work and report to the Engineer any discrepancies or
interferences.
.2 Electrical and mechanical system layouts shown on the drawings may be diagrammatic
and locations of outlets, fittings and equipment are approximate. Exact routing of
conduits, wiring, pipes and tables shall be determined and coordinated by the Contractor
to provide minimum interference and maximum usable space and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations for safety, access and maintenance.
.3 Obtain the Engineer's approval for locations of outlets, fittings and equipment.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 CUTTING AND PATCHING

.1 The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching of the Work that may be required
to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received by
work of other Contractors shown in, or reasonably implied by, the Contract Documents.
.2 Any cost caused by cutting and patching due to ill-timed work shall be borne by the
Contractor.
.3 The Contractor shall not endanger any adjacent property or portion of the Work by
cutting, digging or any other method, and shall be responsible for any damages caused by
him.
01 00 20.docx Stantec COORINDATION
RM of Headingley Section 01 00 20
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COORDINATION
Page 2 of 2

.4 Where new work connects with existing work, and where existing work is altered, cut
and patch as required.
.5 Coordinate the Work to minimize the amount of cutting and patching required.
.6 Do no cutting that may impair the strength of structures. Obtain the Engineer’s approval
before cutting, boring or sleeving load-bearing members.
.7 Make cuts clean and smooth and make patches equivalent to new work.
.8 Provide openings, holes and sleeves as required for process mechanical, building
mechanical, electrical and all other components of the Work. Provide openings in pre-
cast work and cast-in-place work.
.9 Drill or field cut smaller openings or holes and cast openings larger than 100 mm
diameter.

3.2 CONCEALMENT
.1 Conceal pipes, ducts, conduits within walls and ceilings of finished areas, as required by
the Tender Documents.

END OF SECTION

01 00 20.docx Stantec COORINDATION

RM of Headingley Section 01 00 30
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GEOTECHNICAL REPORTS
Page 1 of 1

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 A geotechnical report has been prepared for the Engineer’s use in design and it is
provided in Appendix A of this Tender Document for information only.
.2 The geotechnical report was prepared by Stantec Consulting Ltd.
.3 Any information pertaining to soils and borehole logs is furnished by the Owner as a
matter of general information only and borehole descriptions or logs are not to be
interpreted as descriptive of conditions at locations other than those of the boreholes
themselves. Neither the Owner nor the Engineer warrants or makes any representation
with respect to data or interpretations of data or opinions expressed in any geotechnical
report available for the perusal of the Bidder, whether or not such report is included as
part of the Tender or Contract Documents.
.4 The Bidder should familiarize himself with the purpose and limitations of the
geotechnical report when interpreting subsurface conditions for Bid preparation purposes.
.5 It is recommended that Bidders visit the site and examine site conditions.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 00 30.docx Stantec GEOTECHNICAL REPORT

RM of Headingley Section 01 11 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 A new 3,885 m3 below ground concrete storage reservoir, 210 m² pre-engineered metal
pumphouse building, process mechanical, building mechanical, electrical,
instrumentation, controls and associated works as described in the Tender Documents.

1.2 REFERENCES AND CODES

.1 Perform Work in accordance with the latest edition of National Building Code of Canada
(NBC) including all amendments up to tender closing date and other codes of provincial
or local application provided that in case of conflict or discrepancy, more stringent
requirements apply.
.2 Meet or exceed requirements of:
.1 Contract documents.
.2 Specified standards, codes and referenced documents.
.3 Wherever codes, standards, regulations are referenced throughout the Tender Documents
they shall mean the latest editions including amendments, supplements and revisions as
of the date of bid closing.

1.3 WORK SEQUENCE

.1 Construct new reservoir, pumphouse and associated works.
.2 Connection to existing infrastructure may have to be completed at night or outside of
normal peak flow times to minimize service disruptions to the RM of Headingley.
.3 Complete testing of the new reservoir, pumhouse and associated works individual
components.
.4 Disinfect the new reservoir and all components in contact with potable water.
.5 Commission the new reservoir, pumphouse and associated works.
.6 Coordinate with the Owner to put the new reservoir, pumphouse and associated works
into service following approval from the Office of Drinking Water.
.7 Note that the proposed work sequence is to be a guideline only. The Contractor may
change the proposed work sequence as they see fit, provided the supply of water to the
RM of Headingley is always maintained during the entire duration of the project.

1.4 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE

.1 Limit use of site for Work, for storage, and for access.
.2 Confine construction activities to designate construction areas as indicated on the
drawings.
.3 Co-operate with Owner in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate
Owner usage.

01 11 00.docx Stantec SUMMARY OF WORK

RM of Headingley Section 01 11 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 2 of 3

.4 Do not obstruct access to parking lots and building entrances indicated to remain open for
Owner and delivery of supplies and chemicals.
.5 Repair or replace portion of existing work which have been altered during construction
operations to match existing or adjoining work as directed by Engineer. Restoration may
commence once weather conditions are favorable.
.6 At completion of project the condition of existing work shall be equal to or better than
that which existed before new work started.

1.5 OWNER OCCUPANCY

.1 Owner will occupy the reservoir and pumphouse once the reservoir is put into service for
maintaining water supply operations.
.2 Cooperate with Owner in scheduling operations to minimize conflict and to facilitate
Owner usage.

1.6 EXISTING SERVICES

.1 Notify, Engineer and utility companies of intended interruption of services and obtain
required permission.
.2 Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, give Owner at
least 5 working days notice for necessary interruption of mechanical or electrical service
throughout course of work. Minimize duration of interruptions. Carry out work at times
as mutually agreed with the Owner and the Engineer to minimize disturbance to adjacent
housing and Owner operations.
.3 Provide alternative routes for pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
.4 Establish location and extent of service lines in area of work before starting Work. Notify
Engineer of findings.
.5 Submit schedule to and obtain approval from Engineer for any shut-down or closure of
active service or facility including power and communications services. Adhere to
approved schedule and provide notice to affected parties.
.6 Provide temporary services when directed by Engineer to maintain critical building
systems.
.7 Provide adequate bridging over trenches which cross sidewalks or roads to permit normal
traffic.
.8 Where unknown services are encountered, immediately advise Engineer and confirm
findings in writing.
.9 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When inactive services are
encountered, cap off in manner approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
.10 Record locations of all maintained, re-routed and/or abandoned service lines.
.11 Construct all temporary barriers in accordance with Section 01 56 00 - Temporary
Barriers and Enclosures.
.12 Further to General Conditions, no responsibility will be assumed by the Owner or the
Engineer for accuracy or completeness of the drawings with respect to existing utilities,
pipes or other objects either underground or on the surface and neither, the Owner nor the
Engineer shall be liable for the accuracy thereof. It shall be the responsibility of the
01 11 00.docx Stantec SUMMARY OF WORK
RM of Headingley Section 01 11 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SUMMARY OF WORK
Page 3 of 3

Contractor to determine the location of all such utilities, pipes and other objects and make
good any damage done to them.

1.7 ALTERATIONS, ADDITIONS OR REPAIRS TO EXISTING BUILDING

.1 Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to operations and normal use
of premises. Arrange with Engineer to facilitate execution of work.

1.8 DOCUMENTS REQUIRED

.1 Maintain at job site, one copy each document as follows:
.1 Change Orders.
.2 Other Modifications to Contract.
.3 Field Test Reports.
.4 Copy of Approved Work Schedule.
.5 Health and Safety Plan and Other Safety Related Documents.
.6 Other documents as specified.
.7 Manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 11 00.docx Stantec SUMMARY OF WORK

RM of Headingley Section 01 14 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WORK RESTRICTIONS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 Division 01 – General Requirements (Stantec)
.3 Section 01 14 16 – Contractor’s Use of the Premises

1.2 ACCESS AND EGRESS

.1 Design, construct and maintain temporary “access to” and “egress from” work areas,
including stairs, runways, ramps or ladders, and scaffolding, independent of finished
surfaces and in accordance with relevant municipal, provincial and other regulations.

1.3 USE OF SITE AND FACILITIES

.1 Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to normal use of premises.
Make arrangements with the Owner to facilitate work as stated.
.2 Maintain existing services to building and provide for personnel and vehicle access.
.3 Where security is reduced by work provide temporary means to maintain security.
.4 Make arrangements to provide sanitary facilities for use by Contractor’s personnel. Keep
facilities clean.
.5 Closures: protect work temporarily until permanent enclosures are completed.

1.4 ALTERATIONS, ADDITIONS OR REPAIRS TO EXISTING

INFRASTRUCTURE
.1 Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to building operations,
operations staff and normal use of premises. Arrange with the Owner’s staff to facilitate
execution of work.

1.5 EXISTING SERVICES

.1 Notify the Owner of intended interruption of services and obtain required permission.
.2 Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, give the Owner’s
staff 5 days of notice for necessary interruption of mechanical or electrical service
throughout course of work. Keep duration of interruptions minimum. Carry out
interruptions after normal working of hours of occupants, preferably on weekends.
.3 Construct barriers in accordance with Section 01 56 00 – Temporary Barriers and
Enclosures.

1.6 BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT

.1 Comply with smoking restrictions.

01 14 00.docx Stantec WORK RESTRICTIONS

RM of Headingley Section 01 14 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WORK RESTRICTIONS
Page 2 of 2

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 14 00.docx Stantec WORK RESTRICTIONS

RM of Headingley Section 01 14 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF THE PREMISES
Page 1 of 1

Part 1 General

1.1 THE WORKSITE

.1 The Owner will provide the lands upon which the work related to the new infrastructure
are to be constructed.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 Division 01 – General Requirements (Stantec)
.3 Section 01 14 00 – Work Restrictions

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF THE WORKSITE

.1 The Contractor shall have exclusive use and control of the Worksite, but permit access to
the Owner, the Engineer and other Contractors on the Worksite for purposes of existing
plant operations, inspections, reviews, tests and carrying out the activities related to the
work.
.2 The Owner shall have unfettered use of thoroughfares, streets, lanes and other areas
within the Worksite until the Contractor requires those areas for execution of the Work,
and after the Contractor has finished the portions of the Work in those areas.
.3 Unless otherwise agreed with the Owner, the Contractor shall give Forty-eight (48) hours
notice to the Owner before entering a particular Area of the Worksite to execute the
Work.
.4 Only after achieving Substantial Performance, the Owner and Cartier Regional Water
Cooperative (Owner’s operators) shall have use of the area and shall be responsible for
Health and Safety Requirements and security of the area.
.5 During the Contractor’s use of a particular area of the Worksite to execute the Work, the
Contractor shall be responsible primarily for security and for ensuring compliance with
Health and Safety Regulations.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 14 16.docx Stantec CONTRACTOR’S USE OF THE PREMISES

RM of Headingley Section 01 23 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ALTERNATIVES
Page 1 of 1

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 Acceptance of Alternatives is at the sole discretion of the Owner.
.2 Where Bid Documents stipulate a particular product, substitutions will be considered by
Engineer up to five (5) calendar days before the tender closing date.
.3 When a request to substitute a product is made, the Engineer may approve substitution
and will issue an Addendum to known bidders.
.4 If the Contractor elects to supply and/or install an alternative material/product to that
specified or shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for making all
consequent adjustments and design changes, at the Contractors cost to make the
alternative fit into the work. The consequent cost shall be deemed to be included in the
price bid for the alternate.
.5 Include in each Alternative costs by Work of Subcontractors whose Work is affected,
including costs for modifications to their Work as may be required should the Alternative
be accepted.
.6 Claims for extras to the Contract because of the acceptance of an Alternative will not be
accepted.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 General Requirements (Stantec) – Division 01

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 23 00.docx Stantec ALTERNATIVES

RM of Headingley Section 01 26 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
Page 1 of 2

1.1 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

.1 General: immediately upon discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract
Documents, prepare and submit a Request for Information (RFI) to the Engineer in the
form specified herein.
.1 Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in the
Work.
.2 Keep each RFI to one specific item only. Do not combine several items requiring
interpretation into one RFI.
.3 RFIs to be submitted via Procore (www.procore.com).

.2 Engineer will only consider RFIs submitted by the prime Contractor. Engineer will not
accept, review, or reply to RFIs submitted by Subcontractors, Suppliers or other entities
under Contract with the Contractor.
.3 Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation
and include the following:
.1 Project name.
.2 Project number.
.3 Date.
.4 Name of Contractor.
.5 Name of Engineer.
.6 RFI reference number, numbered sequentially starting with “001”.
.7 A subject line that briefly describes the RFI.
.8 Full description of the item requiring interpretation.
.9 References to specification Section number and title, including related Articles
and Paragraphs, as appropriate.
.10 Reference drawing number and details, as appropriate.
.11 Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.
.12 Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts
the Contract Time or the Contract Price, state the impact in the RFI.
.13 Contractor’s signature or the signature of his designated representative.
.14 Attachments:
.1 Include detail drawings, sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos,
Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other
information necessary to describe items requiring interpretation.
.2 Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details
of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached drawings
and sketches.

1.2 NUISANCE OR REDUNDANT RFI

.1 Engineer will not respond to nor reply to the following Contractor-generated nuisance or
redundant RFI’s.
.1 Requests for approval of submittals.
.2 Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.
.3 Requests for the Engineer to provide a remedial action plan for deficient Work
.4 Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract
Documents.
.5 Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Price.
.6 Requests for interpretation of Engineer's response on submittals.
01 26 13.docx Stantec REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
RM of Headingley Section 01 26 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
Page 2 of 2

.7 Incomplete or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

.2 Do no list nuisance and redundant RFI’s in the RFI log.

1.3 ENGINEER'S RESPONSE

.1 Engineer will review each RFI, determine action (or no action) required, and submit his
reply back to the Contractor.
.2 Allow 10 working days for Engineer's response time for each RFI. RFl’s that are
received by the Engineer after 2:00 pm on working days will be considered as have been
received on the next working day.
.3 Engineer’s failure to reply to any RFI within the time period specified above or within a
reasonable time period, as determine by the Engineer, will not be considered a reason for
a delay claim by the Contractor.
.4 The Engineer may extend the response time for any RFI at his discretion. Reasons may
include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
.1 Too many RFIs submitted on the same day or within a short time period.
.2 RFI’s which require extensive review and research by the Engineer, which may
include requests for additional information from other sources, the timing of
which the Engineer has no control.
.3 RFIs which, in the Engineer’s opinion, will have no significant impact on the
construction progress schedule and therefore may be deferred for a reasonable
period of time.
.5 Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case
Engineer's response time will be re-adjusted to the date when the additional information
is received by the Engineer.
.6 If Contractor believes the Engineer’s RFI response warrants a change in the Contract
Time or the Contract Price, notify the Engineer in writing within 10 days of receipt of the
Engineer’s RFI response.

1.4 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSE

.1 On receipt of Engineer’s response to an RFI:
.1 Update RFI log as specified herein.
.2 Review response and, submit a reply to the Engineer, within 10 working days of
receipt of Engineer response, stating whether the Engineer’s response is either
acceptable or not acceptable.
.2 If Engineer’s response is acceptable:
.1 Distribute the response to affected parties and proceed accordingly.
.3 If Engineer’s response is considered not acceptable:
.1 Resubmit the RFI and include reason(s) for disagreement.
.2 Engineer will review and submit a reply to the Contractor within 10 working
days of receipt of resubmittal, notwithstanding the Engineers extension of
response time as specified herein.

END OF SECTION

01 26 13.docx Stantec REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

RM of Headingley Section 01 29 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 Payments will be made on the basis of the lump sum prices bid and the unit prices bid in
the Tender.
.2 Payments for the Lump Sum items will be made on the basis of the following:
.1 Lump Sum items based on the Schedule of Breakdown Prices offered by the
Contractor for use as a basis for progress payment. The Contractor should note
that the Owner may refuse to accept any breakdown which he considers to be
unbalanced and may require an adjustment to correct any such imbalance,
without changing the Total Tender Price.
.2 For each Lump Sum item in the Schedule of Prices, the Engineer will, in
cooperation with the Contractor estimate the percentage of the item completed at
the end of the payment period.
.3 The prices bid for various items of work, unless specifically noted otherwise, shall
include the supply of all labor, Plant, Material, Product and equipment necessary to
construct the Work in accordance with the plans and specifications.
.4 The prices bid for supply and installation shall be full compensation for supplying,
hauling, installing, cleaning, testing, commissioning, operator training and placing in
service together with all other work subsidiary and incidental thereto for which separate
payment is not provided elsewhere.
.5 The method of measurement of the quantities for payment and the basis for payment will
be in accordance with the items described in section 1.3. All measurement will be done
by the Engineer using generally accepted field survey methods.
.6 Other materials on site, whether existing structures, vegetation, topsoil, gravel, sand or
other excavated or piled materials, are the property of the Owner or of the owner of the
land on which the Work is located. Only those materials specifically noted in the
specification or on drawings as belonging to the Contractor shall become the Contractor's
property.
.7 Where there are excess excavated materials, unsuitable materials excavated or materials
of any kind that are excavated but not used in the Work, such materials are not the
property of the Contractor unless authorized in writing by the Engineer or specified to be
disposed of by the Contractor.
.8 Progress payments will not be made for Material and Product unless they are
incorporated into the Work or approved by the Engineer.
.9 Restoration of existing surfaces disturbed by construction to pre-construction or better
condition is incidental to the Work.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000.
.2 General Requirements (Stantec) – Division 01
.3 All sections of the Technical Specifications (Div 02 to Div 46)
01 29 00.docx Stantec MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
RM of Headingley Section 01 29 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Page 2 of 4

1.3 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT

.1 Reservoir and Pumphouse (Item A)

.1 General Requirements (A.1)
The lump sum price for General Requirements shall not exceed 10% of the total
contract bid price and shall include costs related to insurance, bonding, permits,
mobilization, demobilization, temporary signage, temporary fencing, traffic
control and general administrative costs for which payment is not specified
elsewhere.
Measurement: Measurement shall be based on the percentage (%) complete of
the Contract price for General Requirements completed.
Payment: 25% of the lump sum price for General Requirements shall be paid
upon completion of mobilization to the site by the Contractor. The remaining
75% shall be paid in equal monthly amounts from the second payment through to
the date of Substantial Performance.
.2 Site Works (A.2)
Work shall include supply and installation of materials and services associated
with topsoil stripping, sub-grade compaction, geotextile, excavation, granular,
grading, topsoil, seeding, corrugated steel pipe, ditches, compaction, bollards,
trenching, backfilling, shoring, dewatering, disposal of excavated material, septic
tank, weeping tile pump station, and associated underground site piping and all
associated works required by all applicable MWSB Standard Specifications, Div
01, Div 31 to Div 33 (inclusive) and for which payment is not specified.
Measurement: Field verification of the percentage of work completed.
Payment: Contract Lump Sum Price

.3 Substructure (Item A.3)

Substructure includes all works related to working base, reinforcement, water-
stop, concrete foundation, pillars, columns, beams, slabs, curbs, pads (interior
and exterior) as required by Div 01, Div 03 and all associated works for the
Reservoir for which payment is not specified elsewhere.
Measurement: Field verification of the percentage of work completed.
Payment: Contract Lump Sum Price

.4 Superstructure (Item A.4)

Superstructure includes all works related to metal building system, architectural
components, finishes, miscellaneous metals, equipment and accessories as
required by Div 01, Div 05 to Div 12 (inclusive) and all associated work for the
pumphouse which payment is not specified elsewhere.
Measurement: Field verification of the percentage of work completed.
Payment: Contract Lump Sum Price

.5 Process Mechanical (Item A.5)

Process Mechanical includes the supply, installation, start-up of all process
mechanical components, process piping, valves, miscellaneous equipment and
01 29 00.docx Stantec MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
RM of Headingley Section 01 29 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Page 3 of 4

services as required by Div 01, Div 40, Div 41, Div 43 and associated works for
the reservoir and pumphouse for which payment is not specified elsewhere.
Measurement: Field verification of the percentage of work completed.
Payment: Contract Lump Sum Price

.6 Building Mechanical (Item A.6)

Building Mechanical includes the supply, installation, start-up, testing and
balancing of fire suppression, building plumbing, HVAC components as required
by Div 22 to Div 23 (inclusive) and associated works for the pumphouse for
which payment is not specified elsewhere.
Measurement: Field verification of the percentage of work completed.
Payment: Contract Lump Sum Price

.7 Electrical (Item A.7)

Work includes the supply, installation, loop-checks and start-up of all electrical
components including electric heating (Section 238200), building security access,
stand-by power and miscellaneous components and services required by Div 01,
Section 23 82 00, Div 26, Div 27, Div 28 and associated works for the
pumphouse for which payment is not specified elsewhere.
Measurement: Field verification of the percentage of work completed.
Payment: Contract Lump Sum Price

.8 Instrumentation and Controls (Item A.8)

Work includes the supply, installation, loop-checks, start-up of all
instrumentation and control components and miscellaneous components and
services required by Div 01, Div 25 and associated works for the pumphouse for
which payment is not specified elsewhere.
Measurement: Field verification of the percentage of work completed.
Payment: Contract Lump Sum Price

.9 Commissioning, Demonstration and Training (Item A.9)

Work includes commissioning, acceptance testing, demonstration and operator
training, associated works and services related to Process Mechanical, Building
Mechanical, Plumbing, Electrical, Instrumentation and Controls, Building
Systems, Equipment and Specialties as required by the Contract Documents (Div
01 to Div 43 inclusive) for the reservoir, pumphouse and associated works for
which payment is not specified elsewhere.
Measurement: Field verification of the percentage of work completed.
Payment: Contract Lump Sum Price

.2 Extra Work (Item B)

.1 As defined by MWSB 1000 – General Conditions, Manitoba Water Services
Board, Standard Construction Specification, March, 2022.
01 29 00.docx Stantec MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
RM of Headingley Section 01 29 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Page 4 of 4

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 29 00.docx Stantec MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

RM of Headingley Section 01 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 COLLABORATIVE SOFTWARE

.1 This project will utilize Procore’s (www.procore.com) project management and
collaboration system to submit, track, distribute and collaborate on project documentation
and action items. The Engineer will maintain ownership of the Project within Procore.
The Contractor will be required to utilize the Engineers Procore Project for RFI’s and
Submittals. The Contractor may utilize their own collaborative software to manage their
own work.
.2 The intent of utilizing a web-based construction management application is to reduce cost
and schedule risk, improve quality and safety, and maintain a healthy team dynamic by
improving information flow, reducing non-productive activities, reducing rework and
decreasing turnaround times.
.3 The contractor will have access to the following:
.1 Drawings
.2 Specifications
.3 Meetings
.4 Site instructions
.5 RFI’s
.6 Schedule
.7 Submittals
.8 Punchlist

1.2 PROCEDURES
.1 RFIs and Submittals
.1 The Contractor will be responsible for submitting all RFIs and Submittals
through the software and assigning them to the appropriate parties.
.2 The Engineer will be responsible for posting all responses to these items via the
software, including all relevant attachments.
.3 The Contractor will distribute responses to all affected subcontractors.
.2 Construction Documentation
.1 The Engineer will manage Drawings, Specifications and Documents in the
software to ensure that the current version of all applicable construction
documentation is available to the entire team via web and mobile.
.2 The Engineer will record and distribute meeting minutes and action items via the
software.
.3 Punchlist
.1 All punchlist items will be managed through the software.
.2 Punchlist items will be created by the Engineer.

01 30 00.doc Stantec ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 01 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 2

1.3 AVAILABILITY & TRAINING

.1 Procore can be made available to the members of the Contractors team. The Contractor is
to provide the names and contact information of any team member they wish to have
added to this Project.
.2 Applicable team members of this project are required to complete a free, one-hour
training certification course located at http://learn.procore.com/procore-certification-
subcontractor.
.3 There will be no cost to the Contractor for use of Procore.

END OF SECTION

01 30 00.doc Stantec ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 01 31 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROJECT MEETINGS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 All other specification Sections.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE
.1 The Engineer in discussions with the Contractor will schedule meetings. The Contractor
is responsible for coordinating with his sub-contractors, to attend.
.2 The Engineer with prepare agenda, chair meetings, record minutes, and distribute minutes
to all attending parties within five (5) working days after meetings.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

.1 Within 15 calendar days after award of Contract, request a meeting with Engineer and
Owner to discuss and resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities.
.2 The preconstruction meeting will be held in Winnipeg at Stantec’s office located at 500-
311 Portage Avenue, Winnipeg, MB R3B 2B9.
.3 The Owner, Engineer, Contractor, sub-contractors, field inspectors and supervisors will
be in attendance.
.4 The Engineer will establish the time of the meeting and notify the Contractor a minimum
of 5 business days before meeting.
.5 Agenda to include:
.1 Appointment of official representative of participants in the Work.
.2 Schedule of Work: in accordance with Section 01 32 16 – Construction
Schedules.
.3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings. Submit submittals in accordance with
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities,
fences in accordance with Section 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities.
.5 Delivery schedule of specified equipment in accordance with Section 01 32 16 –
Construction Schedules.
.6 Site security in accordance with Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and
Enclosures.
.7 Proposed changes, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up
percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, administrative requirements.
.8 Record drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.9 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, hold backs.
.10 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms.
.11 Insurances, transcript of policies.

01 31 19.docx Stantec PROJECT MEETINGS

RM of Headingley Section 01 31 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROJECT MEETINGS
Page 2 of 2

1.4 PROGRESS MEETINGS

.1 After award of Contract and signing of Agreement, Progress Review Meetings will be
held on-site every three (3) weeks in the Contractor’s site office to ensure proper
coordination of work.
.2 Progress meetings will be chaired by the Engineer.
.3 Contractor, major Subcontractors as required, Engineer and Owner will be in attendance.
.4 Agenda to include the following:
.1 Health and Safety
.2 Construction Schedule
.3 Shop Drawings
.4 Delivery Schedules
.5 Request for Information Status Updates
.6 Construction Issues
.7 Progress Claim Status Update
.8 Potential Change Notices and Change Order Update
.9 Round Table of Issues / Comments.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 31 19.docx Stantec PROJECT MEETINGS

RM of Headingley Section 01 32 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 MSWB 1000 – General Conditions
.2 All other specification sections

1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1 Activity: element of Work performed during course of Project. Activity normally has
expected duration, and expected cost and expected resource requirements. Activities can
be subdivided into tasks.
.2 Bar Chart (GANTT Chart): graphic display of schedule-related information. In typical
bar chart, activities or other Project elements are listed down left side of chart, dates are
shown across top, and activity durations are shown as date-placed horizontal bars.
Generally, Bar Chart should be derived from commercially available computerized
project management system.
.3 Baseline: original approved plan (for project, work package, or activity), plus or minus
approved scope changes.
.4 Construction Workdays: To be identified and shown as part of Bar (GANTT) Chart
submission.
.5 Duration: number of workdays (not including holidays or other nonworking periods)
required to complete activity or other project element.
.6 Project Schedule: planned dates for performing activities and the planned dates for
meeting milestones. Dynamic, detailed record of tasks or activities that must be
accomplished to satisfy Project objectives. Monitoring and control process involves
using Project Schedule in executing and controlling activities and is used as basis for
decision making throughout project life cycle
.7 Master Plan: summary-level schedule that identifies major activities and key milestones.
.8 Milestone: significant event in project, usually completion of major deliverable.

1.3 REQUIREMENTS
.1 Ensure Project Schedule and associated Master Plan are practical and remain within
specified Contract dates.
.2 Plan to complete Work in accordance with prescribed milestones and specified Contract
dates.
.3 Limit scheduled task durations to maximum of ten (10) Construction Workdays, to allow
for progress reporting and monitoring.
.4 Ensure that it is understood that Award of Contract or time of beginning, rate of progress,
Substantial Performance and Total Performance as defined times of completion are of
essence of this contract.

01 32 16.docx Stantec CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

RM of Headingley Section 01 32 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Page 2 of 4

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals
.2 Submit to Engineer, within eight calendar days of Conditional Award of Contract, Bar
(GANTT) Chart as Master Plan for planning, monitoring and reporting of project
progress.
.3 Submit Project Schedule to Engineer within ten (10) working days of receipt of
acceptance of Master Plan.
.4 Update the schedule for each progress meeting.
.5 The Owner will not approve any Progress Payment until the Project Schedule is
submitted to the Engineer for review.

1.5 MASTER PLAN

.1 Structure schedule to allow orderly planning, organizing and execution of Work as Bar
Chart (GANTT).
.2 Engineer will review and return submitted Master Plan within ten (10) working days.
.3 If submitted Master Plan is indicated as “revise and resubmit” resubmission required
within ten (10) working days.
.4 Accepted Master Plan is to be used as basis for providing the Project Schedule.

1.6 PROJECT SCHEDULE

.1 Submit for review detailed Project Schedule based on accepted Master Plan.
.2 Structure schedule to allow orderly planning, organizing and execution of Work as Bar
Chart (GANTT).
.3 Engineer will review and return submitted Project Schedule within ten (10) working
days.
.4 If submitted Project Schedule is indicated as “revise and resubmit” resubmission required
within ten (10) working days.
.5 Accepted Project Schedule is to be used as the baseline for monitoring and reporting on
the Work.
.6 Ensure detailed Project Schedule includes as minimum milestone and activity types as
follows:
.1 Milestones
.1 Contract Award
.2 Mobilization
.3 Civil Work Start
.4 Civil Work Complete
.5 Concrete Work Start
.6 Concrete Work Complete
.7 Key Equipment Delivery
.8 Process Mechanical Start

01 32 16.docx Stantec CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

RM of Headingley Section 01 32 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Page 3 of 4

.9 Process Mechanical Complete

.10 Building Construction Start
.11 Building Construction Complete
.12 Building Mechanical Start
.13 Building Mechanical Complete
.14 Electrical Start
.15 Electrical Complete
.16 Commissioning Start
.17 Commissioning Complete
.18 Demobilization
.2 Civil
.1 Excavation
.2 Water Supply
.3 Water Distribution
.4 Septic Tank
.5 Weeping Tile Pump Station
.6 Backfill
.7 Road and Parking Lot
.8 Fencing
.9 Topsoil and Seeding
.3 Pumphouse Building and Associated Works.
.1 Substructure
.1 Base Slab Pours
.2 Walls Pours
.3 Main Floor Slab Pours
.2 Superstructure
.1 Building Frame
.2 Interior Architecture (walls, floor, ceiling)
.3 Exterior Finishes (roof, siding)
.3 Process Mechanical
.1 Embeds
.2 Distribution Pumps
.3 Process Piping and Valves
.4 Building Mechanical
.1 Air handling equipment
.2 Ducting
.5 Electrical
.1 MCC
.2 PLC
.3 Generator
.4 Wiring
.5 I/O Checks
.4 Consult with Owner and accommodate work by Owner in overall Project
Schedule.

01 32 16.docx Stantec CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

RM of Headingley Section 01 32 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
Page 4 of 4

1.7 PROJECT SCHEDULE REPORTING

.1 Prepare and submit for review at the planned Progress Meeting a three (3) week look
ahead schedule detailing work to be completed in the next three weeks.
.2 Update and resubmit the Master Project Schedule on a monthly basis that coincides with
the monthly progress payment application.
.3 No Progress Payment will be made without an updated Project Schedule.

1.8 PROGRESS MEETINGS

.1 Discuss Project Schedule at regular site meetings, identify activities that are behind
schedule and provide measures to regain slippage. Activities considered behind schedule
are those with projected start or completion dates later than current approved dates shown
on baseline schedule.

Part 1 Products

1.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 2 Execution

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 32 16.docx Stantec CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

RM of Headingley Section 01 33 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 Shop drawings.
.2 Product data, test reports, certificates.
.3 Manufacturer’s instructions and field reports.
.4 Samples.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 All other specification sections.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE
.1 Submit to Engineer submittals listed for review. Submit promptly and in orderly
sequence to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered
sufficient reason for extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of
such default will be allowed.
.2 Do not proceed with Work affected by submittal until review is complete.
.3 Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups in SI Metric units.
.4 Where items or information is not produced in SI Metric units converted values are
acceptable.
.5 Review submittals prior to submission to Engineer. This review represents that necessary
requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has
been checked and coordinated with requirements of Work and Contract Documents.
Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific project will be
returned without being examined and considered rejected.
.6 Notify Engineer, in writing at time of submission, identifying deviations from
requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations.
.7 Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are coordinated.
.8 Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by
Engineer's review of submittals.
.9 Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract
Documents is not relieved by Engineer review.
.10 Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site

1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

.1 Refer to General Conditions, MWSB 1000 and Special Provisions – Section 01 00 10.
.2 Submission of Shop Drawings shall be in electronic format via Procore project
management and collaboration system (www.procore.com).
.3 Submit shop drawings bearing stamp and signature of qualified professional engineer
registered or licensed in Province of Manitoba, Canada where specifically requested in
01 33 00.docx Stantec SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RM of Headingley Section 01 33 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 2 of 5

the specifications. Shop drawings not bearing the required Engineer's stamp will be
rejected and returned without being examined.
.4 The Contractor shall provide Shop Drawings to the Engineer to review in orderly
sequence of the dates for provision, review and return of Shop Drawings.
.5 The Contractor shall prepare a schedule of the dates for provision, review and return of
Shop Drawings.
.6 The Contractor shall review all Shop Drawings before providing them to the Engineer.
The Contractor represents by this review that:
.1 The Contractor has determined and verified all applicable field measurements,
field construction conditions, product requirements, catalogue numbers and
similar data, or will do so, and
.2 The Contractor has checked and coordinated each Shop Drawing with the
requirements of the Work and of the Contract documents.
.7 Shop drawings that do not include the stamp, date, and signature of the person
responsible for reviewing the shop drawings on behalf of the Contractor before submittal
to the Engineer will be rejected and returned without being examined.
.8 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection
diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion
of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment,
indicate that such items have been coordinated, regardless of Section under which
adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings
and specifications.
.9 Adjustments made on shop drawings by the Engineer are not intended to change the
Contract Price. If it is deemed that such adjustments affect the value of Work, state such
in writing to the Engineer prior to proceeding with fabrication or the Work.
.10 Make changes in shop drawings that the Engineer may require, consistent with Contract
Documents. When resubmitting, notify the Engineer in writing of any revisions other
than those requested.
.11 Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, containing:
.1 Date.
.2 Project title and number.
.3 Contractor's name and address.
.4 Identification and quantity of each shop drawing, product data, and samples.
.5 Other pertinent data.
.12 Submissions include:
.1 Date and revision dates.
.2 Project title and number.
.3 Name and address of:
.1 Subcontractor.
.2 Supplier.
.3 Manufacturer.

01 33 00.docx Stantec SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

RM of Headingley Section 01 33 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 3 of 5

.4 Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorized representative certifying

approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with
Contract Documents.
.5 Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable:
.1 Fabrication.
.2 Layout, showing dimensions, including identified field dimensions, and
clearances.
.3 Setting or erection details.
.4 Capacities.
.5 Performance characteristics.
.6 Standards.
.7 Operating weight.
.8 Wiring diagrams.
.9 Single line and schematic diagrams.
.10 Relationship to adjacent work.
.13 Submit product data sheets or brochures electronically for requirements requested in
specification Sections and as requested by Engineer where shop drawings will not be
prepared due to standardized manufacture of product.
.14 Submit electronic copies of test reports for requirements requested in specification
Sections and as requested by Engineer.
.1 Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that material, product or
system identical to material, product or system to be provided has been tested in
accord with specified requirements.
.2 Testing must have been within three years of date of contract award for project.
.15 Submit electronic copies of certificates for requirements requested in specification
Sections as requested by Engineer.
.1 Statements printed on manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible
officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that product,
system or material meets specification requirements.
.2 Certificates must be dated after award of project contract, complete with project
name.
.16 Submit electronic copies of manufacturers’ instructions for requirements requested in
specification Sections and as requested by Engineer.
.1 Pre-printed material describing installation of product, system or material,
including special notices and Material Safety Data Sheets concerning
impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
.17 Submit electronic copies of Manufacturer's Field Reports for requirements requested in
specification Sections and as requested by Engineer.
.1 Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's
representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or
instructions.
.18 Delete information not applicable to project.

01 33 00.docx Stantec SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

RM of Headingley Section 01 33 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 4 of 5

.19 Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project.

.20 If upon review by the Engineer, no errors or omissions in compliance with the Contract
Documents are discovered or if only minor corrections are made, copies will be returned
and fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If, however, shop drawings are
rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings,
through the same procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and
installation of Work may proceed.
.21 No extension of Contract Time will be allowed for delays in the Work that may be caused
for Engineer's rejection of shop drawings.
.22 Shop drawings that contain deviations from the Contract Documents that are not
presented to the Engineer in writing as specified in General Condition GC 3.10 will be
rejected and returned without being examined.
.23 Allow 10 business days for Engineer’s review of each submission.
.24 The Engineer’s review shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors or
omissions in the Shop Drawings or for meeting all requirements of the Contract
Documents.

1.5 SAMPLES
.1 Submit for review samples for each requirement requested in specification sections and
as the Engineer may request.
.2 Label samples as to identify material, manufacturer, make or model number, origin and
intended use in the Work.
.3 Deliver samples prepaid to Engineer's business address or as directed.
.4 Notify the Engineer in writing, at the time of submission of deviations in samples from
requirements of Contract Documents.
.5 Adjustments made on samples by the Engineer are not intended to change the Contract
Price. If adjustments affect the value of Work, state such in writing to the Engineer prior
to proceeding with the Work.
.6 Make changes in samples that the Engineer may require, consistent with Contract
Documents.

1.6 MOCK-UPS
.1 Erect mock-ups in accordance with 01 45 00 – Quality Control.

1.7 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

.1 Submit electronic copy of color digital photography in .jpg format, standard resolution
monthly with progress statement if directed by Engineer.
.2 Project identification: name and number of project and date of exposure indicated.
.3 Number of viewpoints: 8 locations.

1.8 CERTIFICATES AND TRANSCRIPTS

.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, provide evidence of compliance with worker's
compensation legislation at the Place of the Work, including payments due thereunder.
01 33 00.docx Stantec SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
RM of Headingley Section 01 33 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Page 5 of 5

.2 Submit transcription of insurance immediately after award of Contract.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 33 00.docx Stantec SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

RM of Headingley Section 01 35 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION

.1 Health and safety considerations required to ensure that Contractor shows due diligence
towards health and safety on construction sites and meets the requirements of the local
Provincial and National legislation.
.2 The Contractor shall be the Prime Contractor and shall serve as and have the duties of the
Prime Contractor in accordance with the Workplace Safety and Health Act (Manitoba).

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 Division 01 – General Requirements (Stantec)
.3 All other specification sections

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 Canada Labour Code, Part 2, Canada Occupational Safety and Health Regulations
.2 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.3 Province of Manitoba
.1 The Workplace Safety and Health Act, C.C.S.M.e. W210 November 2015 or
latest edition.
.4 All Contractors bidding on this project must possess a valid Certificate of Recognition
(COR™) for an accredited occupational health and safety program in accordance with
The Workplace Safety and Health Act. Subcontractors with employees doing
construction work on this site must show safety program registration verified by either
the Manitoba Heavy Construction Association or by the Construction Safety Association
in Manitoba.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit site-specific Health and Safety Plan, and signed attestation within 7 days after
Award and prior to commencement of Work. Health and Safety Plan must include:
.1 Results of site-specific safety hazard assessment.
.2 Results of safety and health risk or hazard analysis for site tasks and operation.
.3 Submit 3 copies of Contractor's authorized representative's work site health and safety
inspection reports to Engineer weekly.
.4 Submit copies of reports or directions issued by Federal, Provincial and Territorial health
and safety inspectors.
.5 Submit copies of incident and accident reports.
.6 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets to the Engineer.
01 35 29.docx Stantec HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 01 35 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 4

.7 Engineer will review Contractor's site-specific Health and Safety Plan and provide
comments to Contractor within 3 days after receipt of plan. Revise plan as appropriate
and resubmit plan to Engineer within 3 days after receipt of comments from Engineer.
.8 Engineer's review of Contractor's final Health and Safety plan should not be construed as
approval and does not reduce the Contractor's overall responsibility for construction
Health and Safety.
.9 Medical Surveillance: where prescribed by legislation, regulation or safety program,
submit certification of medical surveillance for site personnel prior to commencement of
Work, and submit additional certifications for any new site personnel to Engineer.
.10 On-site Contingency and Emergency Response Plan: address standard operating
procedures to be implemented during emergency situations.

1.5 FILING OF NOTICE

.1 File Notice of Project with Provincial authorities prior to beginning of Work.

1.6 SAFETY ASSESSMENT

.1 Perform site specific safety hazard assessment related to project.

1.7 MEETINGS
.1 Schedule and administer Health and Safety meeting with Engineer prior to
commencement of Work.

1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Do Work in accordance with Section 01 41 00 - Regulatory Requirements.

1.9 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Develop written site-specific Health and Safety Plan based on hazard assessment prior to
beginning site Work and continue to implement, maintain, and enforce plan until final
demobilization from site. Health and Safety Plan must address project specifications.
.2 Engineer may respond in writing, where deficiencies or concerns are noted and may
request re-submission with correction of deficiencies or concerns.

1.10 RESPONSIBILITY
.1 Be responsible for health and safety of persons on site, safety of property on site and for
protection of persons adjacent to site and environment to extent that they may be affected
by conduct of Work.
.2 Comply with and enforce compliance by employees with safety requirements of Contract
Documents, applicable federal, provincial, territorial and local statutes, regulations, and
ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan.

1.11 COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with Manitoba Workplace Safety and Health requirements.
.2 Comply with Canada Labour Code, Canada Occupational Safety and Health Regulations.

01 35 29.docx Stantec HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 01 35 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 4

1.12 UNFORSEEN HAZARDS

.1 When unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition occur during
performance of Work, follow procedures in place for Employee's Right to Refuse Work
in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction and advise
Engineer verbally and in writing.

1.13 HEALTH AND SAFETY CO-ORDINATOR

.1 Employ and assign to Work, competent and authorized representative as Health and
Safety Co-ordinator. Health and Safety Co-ordinator must:
.1 Have site-related working experience specific to activities associated with the
Work.
.2 Have working knowledge of occupational safety and health regulations.
.3 Be responsible for completing Contractor's Health and Safety Training Sessions
and ensuring that personnel not successfully completing required training are not
permitted to enter site to perform Work.
.4 Be responsible for implementing, enforcing daily and monitoring site-specific
Contractor's Health and Safety Plan.
.5 Be on site during execution of Work and report directly to and be under direction
of site supervisor.

1.14 POSTING OF DOCUMENTS

.1 Ensure applicable items, articles, notices and orders are posted in conspicuous location on
site in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province having jurisdiction, and in
consultation with Engineer.

1.15 CORRECTION OF NON-COMPLIANCE

.1 Immediately address health and safety non-compliance issues identified by authority
having jurisdiction or by Engineer.
.2 Provide Engineer with written report of action taken to correct non-compliance of health
and safety issues identified.
.3 Engineer may stop Work if non-compliance of health and safety regulations is not
corrected.

1.16 POWDER ACTUATED DEVICES

.1 Use powder actuated devices only after receipt of written permission from Engineer.

1.17 WORK STOPPAGE

.1 Give precedence to safety and health of public and site personnel and protection of
environment over cost and schedule considerations for Work.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used
01 35 29.docx Stantec HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 01 35 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 4

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used

END OF SECTION

01 35 29.docx Stantec HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 01 41 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 Division 01 - General Requirements (Stantec)

1.2 REFERENCES AND CODES

.1 The Laws and Regulations of the Province of Manitoba shall govern.
.2 Perform Work in accordance with National Building Code of Canada (NBC) including
amendments up to tender closing date and other codes of provincial or local application
provided that in case of conflict or discrepancy, more stringent requirements apply.
.3 The Bidder shall ensure compliance on his part and on the part of all of this
Subcontractors with the Manitoba Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations
thereunder.
.4 Meet or exceed requirements of:
.1 Contract documents.
.2 Specified standards, codes and referenced documents.
.5 The attention of the Bidder is drawn to the requirements of the Manitoba Builders’ Lien
Act and Regulations thereunder.
.6 Where the Work under this Contract is carried out within the requirements of the
Manitoba Public Works Act, the Manitoba Public Works Act shall apply.
.7 The Fisheries Act (latest edition) and work restrictions noted in Section 01 14 00.

1.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL DISCOVERY

.1 Asbestos: demolition of spray or trowel-applied asbestos is hazardous to health. Stop
work immediately when material resembling spray or trowel-applied asbestos is
encountered during demolition work. Notify the Engineer immediately in writing.
.2 PCB: Polychlorinated Biphenyl: stop work immediately when material resembling
Polychlorinated Biphenyl is encountered during demolition work. Notify the Engineer
immediately in writing.
.3 Mould: stop work immediately when material resembling mould is encountered during
demolition work. Notify the Engineer immediately.

1.4 BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT

.1 Comply with smoking restrictions and municipal by-laws.

1.5 BURNING
.1 Comply with restrictions of federal, provincial and municipal authorities and obtain
permits from authorities having jurisdictions.

1.6 PERMITS
.1 The Bidder is required to obtain all applicable permits including Building Permits,
Plumbing Permit and Electrical Permit from local Municipal and Provincial authorities
having jurisdictions.
01 41 00.docx Stantec REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 01 41 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 2

.2 The Bidder is required to pay and obtain a Building Permit from the Rural Municipality
of Headingley prior to the start of Construction. The Engineer will provide the support
information for the application related to stamped engineering drawings related to this
Project and the Letters of Assurance from various Disciplines. Prior to Occupancy, the
Engineer will provide a Letter of Certification.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

01 41 00.docx Stantec REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 01 45 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 QUALITY CONTROL
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION

.1 Inspection and testing, administrative, and enforcement requirements.
.2 Tests and mix designs.
.3 Mock-ups.
.4 Mill tests.
.5 Equipment/system adjust and balance.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Submission of samples to confirm product quality, Section 01 33 00 – Submittals
Procedures.
.2 Material and workmanship quality, reference standards, Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements.

1.3 REVIEW OF THE WORK

.1 Refer to General Condition MWSB 1000.

1.4 INDEPENDENT TESTING AGENCIES

.1 Independent Testing Agencies will be engaged by the Contractor for the purpose of
quality control and/or testing portions of the Work.
.2 Costs for independent testing agencies shall be included in the bid price.
.3 Provide all necessary equipment required for executing quality control and testing by the
appointed agencies.
.4 Employment of quality control/testing agencies does not relax the responsibility to
perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
.5 If defects are revealed during quality control and/or testing, the appointed agency will
request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct
defects and irregularities as advised by Engineer at no cost to the Owner. Pay costs for
retesting and re-inspection.

1.5 ACCESS TO WORK

.1 Allow inspection/testing agencies access to the Work, offsite manufacturing, and
fabrication plants.
.2 Cooperate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.

1.6 PROCEDURES
.1 Notify the appropriate agency and Engineer in advance of the requirement for tests, in
order that attendance arrangements can be made.

01 45 00.docx Stantec QUALITY CONTROL

RM of Headingley Section 01 45 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 QUALITY CONTROL
Page 2 of 3

.2 Submit samples and/or materials required for testing as specifically requested in

specification Sections or as may be requested by Engineer. Submit with reasonable
promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in the Work.
.3 Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide
sufficient space to store and cure test samples.

1.7 DEFECTIVE WORK

.1 Refer to General Condition MWSB 1000.
.2 Remove defective Work, whether a result of poor workmanship, use of defective
products or damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by
the Engineer as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or re-execute in
accordance with Contract Documents.
.3 Make good other Contractor’s work damaged by such removals or replacements
promptly.
.4 If in opinion of the Engineer is it not expedient to correct defective Work or Work not
performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner will deduct from Contract
Price difference in valve between Work performed and that called for by Contract
documents, amount of which will be determined by Engineer.

1.8 REPORTS
.1 Submit four copies of quality control and test reports promptly to the Engineer.
.2 Provide copies to Subcontractor of work being inspected/tested and
manufacturer/fabricator of material being inspected/tested.

1.9 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS

.1 Furnish test results and mix designs as requested. Cost associated with the mix design
should be included in the bid price.
.2 The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in the Contract Documents or
beyond those required by the Law of the Place of Work shall be appraised by the
Engineer and may be authorized as recoverable.

1.10 MILL TESTS

.1 Submit mill test certificates as required of the specification Sections and as may be
requested.

1.11 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

.1 Submit four copies of adjustment and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical
building equipment.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

01 45 00.docx Stantec QUALITY CONTROL

RM of Headingley Section 01 45 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 QUALITY CONTROL
Page 3 of 3

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 45 00.docx Stantec QUALITY CONTROL

RM of Headingley Section 01 51 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Temporary utilities.

1.2 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 Provide temporary utilities controls in order to execute work expeditiously.
.2 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedure.

1.4 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 Provide temporary utilities controls in order to execute work expeditiously.
.2 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.5 DEWATERING
.1 Provide temporary drainage and pumping facilities to keep excavations and site free of
standing water.
.2 Do not discharge drainage water into sewers or ditches without written approval from
governing authorities.
.3 Do not discharge drainage water containing silt into sewage lines.

1.6 WATER SUPPLY

.1 Provide continuous supply of potable water for construction use.
.2 Arrange for connection with Owner and pay all costs for installation, maintenance and
removal and for the cost of water used during construction.
.3 The rate for water is $X.XX per cubic meter.

1.7 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION

.1 Provide temporary heating required during construction period, including attendance,
maintenance and fuel.
.2 Construction heaters used inside building must be vented to outside or be non-flameless
type. Solid fuel salamanders are not permitted.
.3 Provide temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas as required to:
.1 Facilitate progress of Work.
.2 Protect Work and products against dampness and cold.
.3 Prevent moisture and condensation on surfaces.

01 51 00.docx Stantec TEMPORARY UTILITIES

RM of Headingley Section 01 51 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Page 2 of 3

.4 Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for storage, installation and
curing of materials.
.5 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working
environment.
.4 Maintain temperatures of minimum 10°C in areas in which construction is in progress.
.5 Ventilating:
.1 Prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapours or gases in areas occupied
during construction.
.2 Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulation of hazardous
substances into atmosphere of occupied areas.
.3 Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to
persons.
.4 Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials.
.5 Ventilate temporary sanitary facilities.
.6 Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of
work process to assure removal of harmful contaminants.
.6 Permanent heating system of the building may be used when available. If use is
permitted:
.1 Be responsible for damage to heating system if use is permitted.
.2 On completion of Work for which permanent heating system is used, replace
filters, replace damaged or worn components, clean equipment, service, lubricate
and adjust to new condition.
.3 Pay costs for manufacturer's representative to facilitate repairs and maintenance
necessary to equipment in order that manufacturer's guarantee period will
commence on date of Owner's take-over, and not when temporary heating is
started.
.7 Ensure Date of Substantial Performance and Warranties for heating system do not
commence until entire system is in as near original condition as possible and is certified
by Engineer.
.8 Pay costs for maintaining temporary heat, when using permanent heating system.
.9 Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilating equipment
to:
.1 Conform with all applicable codes and standards.
.2 Enforce safe practices.
.3 Prevent abuse of services.
.4 Prevent damage to finishes.
.5 Vent direct-fired combustion units to outside.
.10 Be responsible for damage to Work due to failure in providing adequate heat and
protection during construction.

01 51 00.docx Stantec TEMPORARY UTILITIES

RM of Headingley Section 01 51 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Page 3 of 3

1.8 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT

.1 Provide and pay for temporary power required during construction for temporary lighting
and the operating of power tools.
.2 Arrange for connection with appropriate utility company. Pay all costs for installation,
maintenance and removal.
.3 Temporary power required for new construction shall be an independent service separate
from electrical service for existing buildings.
.4 Temporary power for electric cranes and other equipment requiring in excess of the
supply required for temporary lighting and power tools is the responsibility of Contractor.
.5 Provide and maintain temporary lighting throughout project. Ensure level of illumination
on all floors and stairs is not less than 162 lx.
.6 Electrical power and lighting systems installed under this Contract may be used for
construction requirements only with prior approval of Engineer provided that guarantees
are not affected. Make good damage to electrical system caused by use under this
Contract. Replace lamps which have been used for more than 3 months.

1.9 TEMPORARY COMMUNICATION FACILITIES

.1 Provide and pay for temporary telephone, fax and data (Internet) hook up, lines and
equipment necessary for own use.

1.10 FIRE PROTECTION

.1 Provide and maintain adequate temporary fire protection equipment during performance
of Work, as required by local municipal requirement, insurance companies having
jurisdiction and governing Codes, regulations and By-Laws.
.2 Burning rubbish and construction waste materials is not permitted on site.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 51 00.docx Stantec TEMPORARY UTILITIES

RM of Headingley Section 01 52 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION

.1 Temporary facilities.
.2 Construction aids.
.3 Office and sheds.
.4 Parking.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1 CAN/CSA-Z321, Signs and Symbols for the Occupational Environment.
.2 CSA-A23.1/A23.2-04, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete.
.3 CAN/CSA-S269.2-M1987(R2003), Access Scaffolding for Construction
Purposes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

1.4 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 Prepare site plan indicating proposed location and dimensions of area to be fenced and
used by Contractor, number of trailers to be used, avenues of ingress/egress to fenced
area and details of fence installation.
.2 Identify areas which have to be gravelled to prevent tracking of mud.
.3 Indicate use of supplemental or other staging area.
.4 Provide construction facilities in order to execute work expeditiously.
.5 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.5 SCAFFOLDING
.1 Provide and maintain scaffolding, ramps, ladders, swing staging, platforms, temporary
stairs, and other construction aids.

1.6 HOISTING
.1 Provide, operate and maintain hoists and cranes required for moving of workers,
materials and equipment. Make financial arrangements with Subcontractors for use
thereof.
.2 Hoists and cranes shall be operated by qualified operator.

01 52 00.docx Stantec CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

RM of Headingley Section 01 52 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Page 2 of 4

1.7 SITE STORAGE/LOADING

.1 Confine work and operations of employees by Tender Documents. Do not unreasonably
encumber premises with products.
.2 Do not load or permit to load any part of Work with a weight or force that will endanger
the Work.

1.8 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

.1 Provide and maintain adequate access to project site.
.2 Build and maintain temporary roads, sidewalk crossings, ramps and construction runways
to maintain access, and snow removal during period of Work.
.3 Maintain and protect traffic on affected roads during construction period expect as
otherwise specifically directed by Owner or Engineer.
.4 The Contractor is solely responsible for providing temporary signage, barricades, flag
persons or other measures deemed necessary to provide safe movement of vehicular and
pedestrian traffic.
.5 Verify adequacy of existing roads and allowable load limit on these roads. Contractor is
responsible for maintaining existing access roads and parking lot for the duration of the
Contract and repair of damage to roads cause by construction operations. Maintain a
detailed photographic record of road conditions prior to commencement of work.
.6 Provide snow removal during the period of work.

1.9 CONSTRUCTION PARKING

.1 Parking will be permitted on site within construction area provided it does not disrupt
performance of Work.

1.10 SECURITY
.1 Site security personnel (watchmen), is the Contractor’s option.

1.11 SITE OFFICE

.1 Provide office heat to 22 degrees C and cooling to 15 degrees C lighted 750 lx and
ventilated, of sufficient size to accommodate site progress meetings with up to 5
members from the Owner’s team and furnished with drawing laydown table.
.2 Provide marked and fully stocked first-aid case in a readily available location.
.3 Provide access to potable water cooler for consumptions.
.4 Provide access to hand washing station.
.5 Subcontractors to provide their own offices as necessary. Direct location of these office.
.6 Maintain offices in clean condition. Clean at a minimum on a weekly basis.
.7 The Contractor shall be responsible for all installation and removal costs, all operating
costs, and the general maintenance of the office facilities.
.8 Dedicated office space is not required for the Engineer so long as the Engineer can use
the progress site meeting space while on-site.

01 52 00.docx Stantec CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

RM of Headingley Section 01 52 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Page 3 of 4

.9 Provide wi-fi network access to the Engineer’s use while onsite.

1.12 EQUIPMENT, TOOL AND MATERIAL STORAGE

.1 Provide and maintain, in a clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof sheds for
storage of tools, equipment and materials.
.2 Locate materials not required to be stored in weatherproof sheds on site in a manner to
cause least interference with work activities.

1.13 SANITARY FACILITIES

.1 Provide sanitary facilities for work force in accordance with governing regulations and
ordinances.
.2 Post notices and take such precautions as required by local health authorities. Keep area
and premises in sanitary condition.
.3 When permanent water and drain connections are completed, provide temporary water
closets and urinals complete with temporary enclosures, inside building. Permanent
facilities may be used on approval of Engineer.
.4 Sanitary facilities within existing buildings will not be used by construction workers.

1.14 CONSTRUCTION SIGNAGE

.1 Provide and erect project sign, within three weeks of signing Contract, in a location
designated by the Engineer.
.2 Project sign size to be approved by Engineer and shall be constructed of wood frame and
plywood construction painted with exhibit lettering produced by a professional sign
painter.
.3 Indicate on sign, name of Owner, Funding Agencies, Engineer, Contractor and
Subcontractors.
.4 Erect a project funding sign provided by the Owner in a location designated by the
Engineer.
.5 No other signs or advertisements, other than health and safety signs, are permitted on site.
.6 Maintain approved signs and notices in good condition for duration of project, and
dispose of off site on completion of project or earlier if directed by Engineer.

1.15 CLEAN-UP
.1 Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material from work site daily.
.2 Clean dirt or mud tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways to maintain roadway in clean
condition.
.3 Store materials resulting from demolition activities that are salvageable.
.4 Stack stored new or salvaged material not in construction facilities.
.5 Meet the requirements stated in Section 01 74 11 – Cleaning shall also apply.

01 52 00.docx Stantec CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

RM of Headingley Section 01 52 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Page 4 of 4

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

.1 Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion
and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff for works near waterways.
.2 Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
.3 Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed
during removal.

END OF SECTION

01 52 00.docx Stantec CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

RM of Headingley Section 01 56 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION

.1 Barriers.
.2 Environmental Controls.
.3 Traffic Controls.
.4 Fire Routes.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 General Requirements (Stantec) – Division 01
.3 All Technical specification sections

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1 CSA-O121, Douglas Fir Plywood.
.2 CAN/CSA O141 - Softwood Lumber.
.3 CSA O151 - Canadian Softwood Plywood.

1.4 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

.1 Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously.
.2 Remove from site all such work after use.

1.5 HOARDING AND SITE FENCING

.1 Erect temporary site fence enclosure around construction areas using wire mesh or chain
link fencing, minimum 1.8 m (6’-0”) high with posts at not more than 2.4 m (8’-0”) on
centre.
.2 Provide lockable truck entrance gate(s) conforming to applicable traffic restrictions on
adjacent streets. Equip gates with locks and keys.
.3 Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to remain. Protect from damage by
equipment and construction procedures.

1.6 GUARD RAILS AND BARRICADES

.1 Provide secure, rigid guard railings and barricades around deep excavations, open shafts,
open stairwells, open edges of floors and roofs.
.2 Provide as recommended by local governing authorities.

01 56 00.docx Stantec TEMPORARY BARRIERS

AND ENCLOSURES
RM of Headingley Section 01 56 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
Page 2 of 3

1.7 WEATHER ENCLOSURES

.1 Provide temporary weather tight closures to unfinished door and window openings, tops
of shafts and other openings in floors and roofs.
.2 Close off floor areas where walls are not finished; seal off other openings; enclose
building interior work for temporary heat.
.3 Design enclosures to withstand wind pressure and snow loading.

1.8 DUST TIGHT SCREENS

.1 Provide dust tight screens or partitions to localize dust generating activities, and for
protection of workers, finished areas of Work and public.
.2 Maintain and relocate protection until such work is complete.
.3 Confirm locations and installation with Engineer at least 3 days prior to installation.
.4 Where screens restrict access to emergency exits review security requirements with
Engineer prior to erection.

1.9 ACCESS TO SITE

.1 Provide and maintain access roads, sidewalk crossings, ramps and construction runways
as may be required for access to Work.

1.10 TRAFFIC FLOW

.1 Provide and maintain competent signal flag operators, traffic signals, barricades and
flares, lights, or lanterns as required to perform Work.

1.11 FIRE ROUTES

.1 Maintain access to property including overhead clearances for use by emergency
response vehicles.

1.12 PROTECTION FOR OFF-SITE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY

.1 Protect adjacent private and public property from damage during the performance of
work.
.2 Be responsible for all damage incurred.

1.13 PROTECTION OF BUILDING FINISHES

.1 Provide protection for finished and partially finished building finishes and equipment
during the performance of work.
.2 Provide necessary screens, covers and hoardings.
.3 Confirm locations and installation with Engineer at least 3 working days prior to
installation.
.4 Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection.

01 56 00.docx Stantec TEMPORARY BARRIERS

AND ENCLOSURES
RM of Headingley Section 01 56 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
Page 3 of 3

1.14 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Meet requirements stated in Section 01 74 21 – Construction / Demolition Waste
Management and Disposal.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 56 00.docx Stantec TEMPORARY BARRIERS

AND ENCLOSURES
RM of Headingley Section 01 61 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION

.1 Product quality, availability, storage, handling, protection, and transportation.
.2 Procedures for product substitution.
.3 Manufacturer's instructions.
.4 Quality of Work, coordination and fastenings.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 General Requirements (Stantec) – Division 01
.3 All Technical specifications sections

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Within text of each specifications section, reference may be made to reference standards.
.2 Conform to these reference standards, in whole or in part as specifically requested in
specifications.
.3 If there is question as to whether any product or system is in conformance with applicable
standards, Engineer reserves right to have such products or systems tested to prove or
disprove conformance.
.4 Cost for such testing will be borne by Owner in event of conformance with Contract
Documents or by Contractor in event of non-conformance.
.5 Conform to latest date of issue of referenced standards in effect on date of submission of
Bids, except where specific date or issue is specifically noted.

1.4 QUALITY
.1 Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as products throughout
specifications) incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best
quality (compatible with specifications) for purpose intended. If requested, furnish
evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.
.2 Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected,
regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility but is
precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own
expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.
.3 Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests strictly with
Engineer based upon requirements of Contract Documents.
.4 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any
particular or like item throughout building.

01 61 00.docx Stantec COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 01 61 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 5

.5 Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are not acceptable in

prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in
mechanical or electrical rooms.

1.5 AVAILABILITY
.1 Immediately upon signing Contract, review product delivery requirements and anticipate
foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of materials, equipment or
articles are foreseeable, notify Engineer of such in order that substitutions or other
remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of
Work.
.2 In the event of failure to notify the Engineer at commencement of Work, and should it
subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, the Engineer reserves the
right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in
Contract Price or Contract Time.

1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
.1 The Work is based on the Materials and methods specified in the specifications.
.2 Should substitutions be required because of unavailability, the Engineer will consider
proposals to substitute specified products/materials with alternate products/materials.
.3 Substitutions are not allowed unless application has been made to and prior approval has
been granted by the Engineer in writing.
.4 Each proposal must:
.1 Include sufficient information in the form of product data, specifications,
drawings, and other manufacturer's data to enable the Engineer to properly
evaluate the proposal.
.2 Identify changes required in the applicable Work which would become necessary
to accommodate the substitute.
.5 The Engineer reserves the right to accept or reject any proposal without prejudice for any
reason whatsoever and reserves the right to disclose or not to disclose his reasons for
such rejection.
.6 In submittal of a request for substitution it is hereby understood that the person or entity
submitting the request is certifying that the proposed substitute will fully perform the
functions called for by the general design, be of equal or superior substance to that
specified, is suited to the same use and capable of performing the same function as that
specified and can be incorporated into the Work, strictly in accordance with the proposed
work schedule.

1.7 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

.1 Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and
soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable.
.2 Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamaged condition with
manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until
required in Work.
.3 Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

01 61 00.docx Stantec COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 01 61 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 5

.4 Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls.
.5 Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on wooden
platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather.
.6 Store sheet materials, lumber and panels on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground.
Slope to shed moisture.
.7 Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other
combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent
spontaneous combustion.
.8 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Engineer.
.9 Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Engineer's satisfaction. Use touch-up
materials to match original. Do not paint over name plates.
.10 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

1.8 TRANSPORTATION
.1 Pay the costs of transportation of products required in the performance of Work.
.2 Transportation costs of products supplied by the Owner will be paid for by Owner, unless
specified otherwise. Unload, handle and store such products, unless otherwise specified.

1.9 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Unless otherwise indicated in the specifications, install or erect all products in accordance
with manufacturer’s recommendations. Do not rely on labels or enclosures that are
provided with products. Obtain instructions directly from manufacturers.
.2 Notify Engineer in writing of any conflicts between the Specifications and manufacturer's
instructions so that the Engineer may establish the course of action to follow.
.3 Improper installation or erection of products due to failure in complying with these
requirements authorizes the Engineer to require any removal and re-installation that may
be considered necessary, at no increases in Contract Price or Contract Time.

1.10 QUALITY OF WORK

.1 Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced and
skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Engineer if
required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results.
.2 Enforce discipline and good order among workers.
.3 Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Engineer reserves right to
require dismissal from site, workers deemed incompetent or careless.
.4 Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with
Engineer, whose decision is final.

1.11 COORDINATION
.1 Ensure cooperation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous
supervision.

01 61 00.docx Stantec COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 01 61 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 5

.2 Ensure Work of various Subcontractors does not conflict or create interference.

.3 Be responsible for the proper coordination and placement of openings, sleeves, and
accessories.
.4 Supply all items required to be built in as and when required, together with templates,
measurements and shop drawings.
.5 Ensure all workers examine the drawings and specifications covering the Work of others
that may affect the performance of their own Work. Examine the Work of others and
report to the Engineer, in writing, any defects, or deficiencies that may affect the Work.
In the absence of any report, the Contractor shall be held to have waived all claims for
damage to or defects in such Work.
.6 Ensure that components requiring foundations or openings that are required for the
installation of Work is coordinated. Furnish the necessary information to the Sections
concerned in ample time to permit allowance for such items. Failure to comply with this
requirement does not relieve the party at fault of the cost of cutting or drilling at a later
date and subsequent patching.

1.12 CONCEALMENT
.1 In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in floors, walls, and ceilings, except
where indicated otherwise.
.2 Before installation, inform Engineer if there is interference. Install as directed by
Engineer.

1.13 REMEDIAL WORK

.1 Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts or portions of Work identified
as defective or unacceptable. Coordinate adjacent affected Work as required.
.2 Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materials affected. Perform in a
manner to neither damage nor put at risk any portion of Work.

1.14 LOCATION OF FIXTURES

.1 Consider the location of fixtures, outlets and other mechanical and electrical items
indicated on drawings as approximate.
.2 Inform the Engineer of an impending installation. Install as directed.

1.15 FASTENINGS
.1 Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour, and finish as adjacent
materials, unless otherwise indicated.
.2 Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metal and materials.
.3 Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized fasteners and anchors for securing exterior Work,
unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in the affected
Specification Section.
.4 Space anchors within their load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive
permanent anchorage. Plugs of wood or any other organic material are not acceptable.
.5 Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly, and install neatly.

01 61 00.docx Stantec COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 01 61 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Page 5 of 5

.6 Fastenings, which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are
not acceptable.

1.16 FASTENINGS - EQUIPMENT

.1 Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and finish suitable
for service.
.2 Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use No. 304
stainless steel for exterior areas.
.3 Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts.
.4 Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers
where vibrations occur. Use resilient washers with stainless steel.

1.17 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS

.1 Protect Work completed or in progress.
.2 Prevent overloading of any part of the building. Do not cut, drill, or otherwise sleeve any
load bearing structural member unless specifically indicated on drawings or in
Specifications without written approval of the Engineer.

1.18 EXISTING UTILITIES

.1 When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute Work at times
directed by local governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to Work, and/or
building occupants and pedestrian and vehicular traffic.
.2 Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap
off in manner approved by authority having jurisdiction. Stake and record location of
capped service.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 61 00.docx Stantec COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 01 74 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CLEANING
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 MWSB 1000 – General Conditions
.2 Division 01 – General Requirements (Stantec)
.3 All Technical specification sections

1.2 PROJECT CLEANLINESS

.1 Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris,
other than that caused by City or other Contractors not associated with this project.
.2 Reuse and recycle the maximum amount of waste as possible.
.3 Remove waste materials from site at daily regularly scheduled times or dispose of as
directed by Engineer. Do not burn waste materials on site.
.4 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for
disposal of waste and debris.
.5 Provide on-site a minimum of 2 dump containers for collection of waste materials and
debris. Dispose of waste materials and debris off site.
.6 Clean interior/exterior Work areas prior to start of finishing work, and maintain areas free
of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.
.1 The Owner will not perform any cleaning operations prior to the Contractor
starting the Work or at any time during the progress of the Work. The Contractor
is responsible for all cleaning operations.
.7 Store volatile waste in anti- spill covered metal containers, and remove from premises at
end of each working day.
.8 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. Use of building
ventilation systems is not permitted for this purpose.
.9 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and
as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
.10 Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust, debris and other contaminants will
not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces nor contaminate building systems.

1.3 FINAL CLEANING

.1 When Work is Substantially Performed remove surplus products, tools, construction
machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work.
.2 Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by others, and leave Work
clean and suitable for occupancy.
.3 Prior to final review remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and
equipment.

01 74 00.docx Stantec CLEANING

RM of Headingley Section 01 74 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CLEANING
Page 2 of 3

.4 Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by City or other Contractors not
associated with the project.
.5 Clean existing interior building work areas affected by construction dust and debris.
Clean existing piping and building areas that are affected by carry over of construction
dust and debris.
.6 Clean stainless steel piping with approved cleaner to minimize corrosion.
.7 Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed
by Engineer. Do not burn waste materials on site.
.8 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for
disposal of waste and debris.
.9 Pay all disposal / dumping/ recycling/ tipping fees for waste disposal.
.10 Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain
enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, and mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace
broken, scratched or disfigured glass.
.11 Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical
fixtures, furniture fitments, walls, and floor.
.12 Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces. Clean dust and dirt from the
interior of electrical power and control panels.
.13 Replace filters for the HVAC system.
.14 Vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens.
.15 Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by manufacturer.
.16 Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and
operation.
.17 Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of
grounds.
.18 Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces.
.19 Clean and sweep roofs, gutters, areaways, and sunken wells.
.20 Sweep and wash clean paved areas. Clean debris and dirt from catch basins and
manholes.
.21 Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition; clean or replace filters of mechanical
equipment.
.22 Clean roofs, downspouts, and drainage systems.
.23 Remove debris and surplus materials from crawl areas and other accessible concealed
spaces.
.24 Remove snow and ice from access to building.
.25 Remove dirt, dust and paint droplets from process piping and equipment. Clean stainless
steel piping to manufacturers recommendation to prevent corrosion.

01 74 00.docx Stantec CLEANING

RM of Headingley Section 01 74 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CLEANING
Page 3 of 3

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Meet the requirements stated in Section 01 74 21 – Waste Management and Disposal.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION

01 74 00.docx Stantec CLEANING

RM of Headingley Section 01 74 21
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES

.1 Of the inevitable waste that is generated, the waste materials designated in this
specification shall be salvaged for recycling. Waste disposal in landfills or incinerators
shall be minimized. This means careful recycling of job site waste.
.2 The Contractor shall:
.1 Institute construction waste reduction practices.
.2 Effect optimum control of construction waste.
.3 Transport and dispose of waste materials that are not identified to be recycled at
permitted landfill facilities.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 All specification sections

1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

.1 Waste Management Plan: The Contractor is required to implement a waste management
plan to maximize recycling of construction wastes. As a minimum, recycling of the
following designated materials are required.
.1 Old corrugated cardboard, paper and packaging.
.2 Clean dimensional wood, palette wood.
.3 Concrete/Concrete Block/Asphalt.
.4 Scrap metals.
.5 Unpainted gypsum wallboard.
.6 Glass and plastics.
.7 Beverage containers.
.8 Land clearing debris.
.9 Paint (to be returned to Paint Depot).

1.4 HAZARDOUS WASTE

.1 Separate waste defined as hazardous from recyclable and reusable materials. Place
hazardous materials in designated containers.
.2 Handle, transport and dispose hazardous materials not scheduled for reuse or recycling in
accordance with applicable local, Provincial/Territorial and National regulations.
.3 Unused chemicals, admixtures, additives, sealants, caulking, and surface coating
materials must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or
in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard.

01 74 21.docx Stantec CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE

MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
RM of Headingley Section 01 74 21
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Page 2 of 3

.4 Divert hazardous materials from landfill and dispose of at official hazardous material
collections site.
.5 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
.6 Unused or damaged glazing materials are not recyclable. These materials must not be
disposed of with materials destined for recycling.
.7 Plastic containers from toxic and hazardous materials are not recyclable and must not be
diverted for recycling with other plastic materials. Do not dispose of empty containers
with plastic materials destined for recycling.

1.5 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION

.1 Store, materials to be reused, recycled and salvaged in locations as directed by Engineer.
.2 Protect, stockpile, store and catalogue salvaged items.
.3 Separate non-salvageable materials from salvaged items. Transport and deliver
non-salvageable items to licensed disposal facility.
.4 Protect structural components not removed for demolition from movement or damage.
.5 Support affected structures. If safety of building is endangered, cease operations and
immediately notify Engineer.
.6 Protect surface drainage, mechanical and electrical from damage and blockage.
.7 Separate and store materials produced during dismantling of structures in designated
areas.
.8 Prevent contamination of materials to be salvaged and recycled and handle materials in
accordance with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities.
.1 On-site source separation is recommended.
.2 Remove co-mingled materials to off-site processing facility for separation.

1.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTES

.1 Do not bury rubbish or waste materials.
.2 Do not dispose of waste or volatile materials into waterways, storm, or sanitary sewers.
.3 Haul excess material off site. Should the site be within the RM of Headingley, the
Contractor or property owner will be required to apply for a development permit and will
require a lot grading plan to be approved the RM of Headingley.

1.7 USE OF SITE AND FACILITIES

.1 Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to normal use of premises.

1.8 SCHEDULING
.1 Co-ordinate Work with other activities at site to ensure timely and orderly progress of
Work.

01 74 21.docx Stantec CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE

MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
RM of Headingley Section 01 74 21
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE
MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Page 3 of 3

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 APPLICATION
.1 Handle waste materials not reused, salvaged, or recycled in accordance with appropriate
regulations and codes.

3.2 CLEANING
.1 Remove tools and waste material on completion of Work, and leave work area in clean
and orderly condition.
.2 Clean-up work area as work progresses.
.3 Source separate materials to be reused/recycled into specified sort areas.

END OF SECTION

01 74 21.docx Stantec CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE

MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
RM of Headingley Section 01 77 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CLOSE OUT PROCEDURES
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION

.1 Administrative procedures preceding preliminary and final inspections of Work.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 MWSB 1000 - General Conditions.
.2 Division 01 – General Requirements (Stantec)
.3 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 MWSB 1000 – General Conditions

1.4 INSPECTION AND DECLARATION FOR SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF

THE WORK
.1 Contractor's Inspection: prior to application for Certificate of Substantial Performance of
the Work, the Contractor and all Subcontractors shall conduct an inspection of Work,
identify deficiencies and defects, and repair as required to conform to Contract
Documents.
.1 Notify Engineer in writing of satisfactory completion of Contractor's Inspection
and that corrections have been made and that the building is clean and in
condition ready for occupancy.
.2 Request Engineer's Inspection.
.2 Engineer's Inspection: Engineer and Contractor will perform inspection of Work to
identify obvious defects or deficiencies. Engineer shall prepare a list of defects
deficiencies and provide a signed copy to the Contractor.
.3 Contractor shall correct Work accordingly.
.4 Declaration of Substantial Performance: when Engineer considers deficiencies and
defects have been corrected and it appears requirements of Contract have been
substantially performed, make application for certificate of Substantial Performance of
the Work. Refer to MWSB 1000 – General Conditions.
.5 Commencement of Lien and Warranty Periods: date of Owner's acceptance of submitted
declaration of Substantial Performance shall be date for commencement for warranty
period and commencement of lien period unless required otherwise by lien statute of
Place of Work.
.6 Payment of Holdback: After issuance of certificate of Substantial Performance of Work,
submit an application for payment of holdback amount in accordance with MWSB 1000
– General Conditions.

1.5 SITE CLEANUP

.1 Refer to requirements in Section 01 52 00 – Construction Facilities and Section 01 74 11
– Cleaning.

01 77 00.docx Stantec CLOSE OUT PROCEDURES

RM of Headingley Section 01 77 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CLOSE OUT PROCEDURES
Page 2 of 2

1.6 INSPECTION AND DECLARATION FOR FINAL COMPLETION

.1 When satisfied that the entire work is complete, make a final inspection of the Work to
ensure that it is complete.
.2 Completion: submit written certificate that following have been performed:
.1 Work has been completed and inspected for compliance with Contract
Documents.
.2 Defects have been corrected and deficiencies have been completed.
.3 Equipment and systems have been tested, adjusted and balanced and are fully
operational.
.4 Certificates required by local Municipal authorities having jurisdiction, Fire
Commissioner, Utility companies have been submitted.
.5 Operation of systems have been demonstrated to Owner's personnel.
.6 Building and premises are clean and ready for occupancy.
.7 Work is complete and ready for Final Inspection.
.3 Final Inspection: when items noted above are completed, request final inspection of
Work by Owner, Engineer, and Contractor. The Engineer’s final review of the Work will
be completed within 10 working days of the Engineer’s receipt of the written request
from the Contractor. The final review will constitute the review precedent to the issuance
of the Final Certificate for Payment.
.4 Engineer will list defects or deficiencies determined by this review, and will provide a
copy to the Contractor. The list will be recognized as a final list for acceptance of the
Work under the Contract. If Work is deemed incomplete by Engineer, complete
outstanding items and request re-inspection, in writing.
.5 If a re-inspection is required Engineer shall conduct the re-inspection within seven days
of date of the request. If Work is deemed incomplete by Engineer, complete outstanding
items and request re-inspection. If Work is deemed complete by the Engineer submit
invoice for final payment.
.6 Final Payment: When Engineer considers final deficiencies and defects have been
corrected and it appears requirements of Contract have been totally performed, make
application for final payment. Refer to MWSB 1000 – General Conditions.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

END OF SECTION
01 77 00.docx Stantec CLOSE OUT PROCEDURES
RM of Headingley Section 01 78 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS
Page 1 of 4

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 Record drawings, samples, and specifications.
.2 Test reports on equipment and systems.
.3 Product data, materials and finishes, and related information.
.4 Operation and maintenance data.
.5 Spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials.
.6 Warranties and bonds.
.7 Manufacturer’s contact information

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control
.2 Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.

1.3 SUBMISSION
.1 Prepare instructions and data using personnel experienced in maintenance and operation
of described products.
.2 Copy will be returned after final inspection. Submit two (2) draft copies for Engineer's
comments.
.3 Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal.
.4 Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Engineer, four
final copies of operating and maintenance manuals in English.
.5 Ensure spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools provided are new,
undamaged or defective, and of same quality and manufacture as products provided in
Work.
.6 If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.
.7 Defective products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Replace products
at own expense.
.8 Pay costs of transportation.

1.4 RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Record information on a set of drawings and a copy of the specifications.
.2 Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for
recording information.
.3 Record documents shall be neat, legible and accurate.
.4 Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work until
required information is recorded.
.5 Contract Drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual
construction, including:
.1 Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.

01 78 00.docx Stantec CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS

RM of Headingley Section 01 78 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS
Page 2 of 4

.2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
.3 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible
and accessible features of construction.
.4 Field changes of dimension and detail.
.5 Changes made by change orders.
.6 Details not on original Contract Drawings.
.7 References to related shop drawings and modifications.
.6 Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including:
.1 Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually
installed, particularly optional items and substitute items.
.2 Changes made by Addenda and change orders.
.7 Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field
test records, required by individual specifications sections.

1.5 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

.1 Prepare operation and maintenance manuals and submit one (1) hard copies to the
Engineer 30 calendar days before the Start of Commissioning. Commissioning will not
be initiated and Progress Payment will not be made unless O&M Manuals are
available and reviewed by the Consultant.
.2 Following the Engineer’s review of the draft operation and maintenance manual, submit
two (2) hard copies and two (2) digital copies on USB Memory Stick to the Consultant.
.3 Operation and maintenance manuals are specified in general in this section, with regard
to numbers of binders, preparation, marking, general arrangement, format and general
contents.
.4 Provide the services of qualified and experienced personnel to prepare manuals.
.5 Prepare sets of manuals for various divisions using identical bindings, and the same
indexing system and format for all manuals.
.6 Provide 215 x 280 mm extension type catalogue binders. Accopress, Cerlox or similar
light weight or special hole binders are not acceptable.
.7 Letter each binder as follows:
Front Face
- Full identification of title of project
- Prime Engineer - full identification title
- Sub Engineer - full identification title
- Contractor - full identification title
- Sub contractors - full identification title
Spine
- full identification of title of project
- copy number

01 78 00.docx Stantec CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS

RM of Headingley Section 01 78 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS
Page 3 of 4

.8 Arrange each individual binder as follows, using coloured divider tabs which shall be
laminated mylar plastic and which shall be coloured according to section of the manual.
.9 Each manual shall be organized as follows:
.1 Index
.2 Technical literature describing products
.3 List of spare parts and replacement parts
.4 Names, address and phone number of all suppliers and distributors for parts,
services and repairs
.5 Operating instructions
.6 Maintenance instructions
.7 Warranties

1.6 AS-BUILTS AND SAMPLES

.1 In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Consultant one
record copy of:
.1 Contract Drawings.
.2 Specifications.
.3 Addenda.
.4 Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
.5 Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
.6 Field test records.
.7 Inspection certificates.
.8 Manufacturer's certificates.
.2 Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for
construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage.
.3 Label record documents and file in accordance with Section number listings in List of
Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat,
large, printed letters.
.4 Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record
documents for construction purposes.
.5 Keep record documents and samples available for review by Consultant.

1.7 MATERIALS AND FINISHES

.1 Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: include product data, with catalogue
number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations. Provide information for
re-ordering custom manufactured products.
.2 Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and
methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
.3 Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: include manufacturer's
recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental
agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.
.4 Additional Requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.

1.8 SPARE PARTS

.1 Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

01 78 00.docx Stantec CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS

RM of Headingley Section 01 78 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS
Page 4 of 4

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.

.3 Deliver to site in location as directed; place and store.
.4 Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing of all spare parts to Engineer.
.5 Obtain sign off from Owner’s staff on inventory list to confirm turn over of all spare
parts.

1.9 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LOOSE EQUIPMENT

.1 Provide special tools, and loose equipment not physically incorporated into the Work in
quantities specified in individual specification section.
.2 Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment.
.3 Deliver to site in location as directed; place and store.
.4 Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Consultant. Include approved
listings in Maintenance Manual.
.5 Obtain sign off from Owner’s staff on inventory list to confirm turn over of all tools and
loose equipment.

1.10 WARRANTIES
.1 Separate each warranty with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing.
.2 List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone
number of responsible principal.
.3 Obtain warranties, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers,
within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work.
.4 Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of
warranty until the Date of Substantial Performance is determined.
.5 Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
.6 Co-execute submittals when required.
.7 Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

1.11 DEFICIENCY HOLDBACKS

.1 A deficiency holdback shall be applied for non-compliance, submission of incomplete or
inaccurate information (as determined by the Engineer) prior to Substantial Performance
for the following:
.1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: $20,000
.2 Record Drawings/Red-line markups: $20,000

END OF SECTION

01 78 00.docx Stantec CLOSE OUT SUBMITTALS

RM of Headingley Section 01 79 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Page 1 of 6

Part 1 General

1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION

.1 This section outlines requirements for conducting operator training for the Owner’s staff,
by persons retained by the Contractor specifically for the purpose of proper operation and
maintenance of all systems and equipment supplied and installed under this Contract.
.2 The Contractor is to provide the minimum number of hours of operation / maintenance
training for Owner’s staff for each equipment or system noted in Clause 3.2.
.3 The Engineer shall have the authority to determine if the training is sufficient based on
the lesson plan submitted by the Contractor.
.4 Demonstration and Training shall include both classroom sessions at a location to be
finalized prior to commissioning and on-site demonstrations at the location of the
equipment or system installed.
.5 Training shall not take place until the equipment has been successfully commissioned.
.6 The Contractor is required to coordinate with all Suppliers for undertaking the Operator
Training sessions and co-ordinating/cooperating with a videographer retained by the
Owner to record these sessions.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section 01 32 16 – Construction Schedules
.2 Section 01 33 00 – Submittals
.3 Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals
.4 Section 01 90 00 – Equipment Installation
.5 Section 01 98 13 – General Commissioning Requirements
.6 Division 11 – Equipment
.7 Division 25 – Integrated Automation
.8 Division 26 – Electrical
.9 Division 40 – Process Integration
.10 Division 43 – Process Gas and Liquid Handling, Purification and Storage Equipment

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit and overall training plan with the following information to the Engineer at least
thirty (30) days prior to the first training session. The material will be returned as either
“Reviewed”, “Reviewed as Modified” or “Revise and Resubmit”.
.1 Lesson plan and supplemental training manuals, handouts, visual aids and other
reference material required for each training session.
.2 Training schedule that indicates the date, time and subject of each training
sessions. Concurrent classes will not be allowed.
.3 Subject of each training session and qualifications of individuals to be
conducting the training.

01 79 00.docx Stantec DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

RM of Headingley Section 01 79 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Page 2 of 6
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1 Training sessions to be conducted by qualified factory-trained representatives of the
various equipment suppliers and system with a minimum of two years’ experience.

Part 2 Products

2.1 General
.1 Where specified, the Contractor shall conduct training sessions for the Owner's personnel
to instruct the staff on the proper operation, care, and maintenance of the equipment and
systems installed under this contract. Training shall take place at the site of the work and
under the conditions specified herein this section. Approved operation and maintenance
manuals shall be available at least 30 days prior to the date scheduled for the individual
training session.

2.2 LOCATION
.1 The Contractor in discussions with the Owner and Engineer shall finalize the location for
conducting the classroom training sessions.
.2 Field training sessions shall take place at the respective equipment location.

2.3 LESSON PLANS

.1 Formal written lesson plans shall be prepared for each training session. Lesson plans shall
contain an outline of the material to be presented along with a description of visual aids
to be utilized during the session. Each plan shall contain a time allocation for each
subject.
.2 One complete set of originals of the lesson plans, training manuals, handouts, visual aids,
and reference material shall be the property of the Owner and shall be suitably bound for
proper organization and easy reproduction.
.3 The Contractor shall provide one (1) paper copy and two (2) electronic copies (in PDF
format) on USB flash drive of necessary training manuals, handouts, visual aids and
reference materials at least 10 days prior to each training session.

2.4 FORMAT AND CONTENT

.1 The training session shall be comprised of both classroom training (if specified) and field
training. As a minimum, cover the following topics for each item of equipment or
system:
.1 Familiarization
.1 Review catalog, parts list, and drawings etc., which have been
previously, submitted for the project and operation and maintenance
manuals.
.2 Check out the installation of the specific equipment items.
.3 Demonstrate the unit and indicate how all parts of the specifications are
met.
.4 Answer questions.
.2 Safety

01 79 00.docx Stantec DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

RM of Headingley Section 01 79 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Page 3 of 6
.1 Using material previously provided, review safety requirements
.2 Discuss appropriate precautions around equipment
.3 Operation
.1 Using material previously provided, review reference literature
.2 Explain all modes of operation (including emergency)
.3 Demonstrate to the Owner's personnel on proper use of the equipment.
.4 Troubleshooting
.1 Discuss potential operation problems and their solution
.2 Reference troubleshooting guides in the operation and maintenance
manuals
.5 Preventive maintenance
.1 Using material previously provided, review preventive maintenance (PM)
lists including:
.1 Reference material.
.2 Daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semi-annual, and annual jobs.
.2 Show how to perform PM jobs.
.3 Show Owner's personnel what to look for as indicators of equipment
problems.
.6 Corrective maintenance
.1 List of possible problems.
.2 Discuss repairs--point out special problems.
.3 Open up equipment and demonstrate procedures, where practical.
.7 Spare Parts
.1 Show how to use previously provided parts list and order parts.
.2 Check over spare parts on hand. Make recommendations regarding
additional parts that should be available.
.8 Local representation
.1 Name and location of the local representative as provided in the
operation and maintenance manuals
.2 Where to order parts: name, address, telephone.

.3 Service problems:
.1 Who to call.
.2 How to get emergency help.
.9 Operations and Maintenance Manuals
.1 Review any other material submitted.
.2 Update material, as required.

01 79 00.docx Stantec DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

RM of Headingley Section 01 79 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Page 4 of 6
Part 3 Execution

3.1 General
.1 Training can be conducted in conjunction with the acceptance testing and after successful
commissioning and operational testing period.
.2 Classes shall be scheduled such that classroom sessions are interspersed with field
instructions in logical sequence.
.3 The Contractor shall arrange to have the training conducted on consecutive days.
Concurrent classes shall not be allowed.
.4 Approved operation and maintenance manuals for the specific equipment or system shall
be provided to the Owner’s personnel prior to the start of any training.

3.2 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS TRAINING SCHEDULE

.1 Training is to be provided for the equipment and systems listed in the following table as a
minimum requirement.
Equipment / System Specification Minimum Minimum Field
Reference Classroom Training Session
Training Session Hours
Hours
1. Laboratory Equipment 11 53 00 - Two (2)
2. HVAC Equipment Division 23 One (1) Four (4)
3. Integrated Automation:

a. Field Equipment Panels 25 14 23 - Two (2)

b. Process Controllers 25 30 01 - Two (2)

c. Instruments 25 30 02 Two (2) Two (2)

d. SCADA System 25 90 01 - Four (4)

4. Motor Control Centre 26 24 19 - Two (2)
5. Motor Starters to 600 V 26 2910 - One (1)
6. Variable Frequency Drive 26 29 23 - One (1)
7. Back-up Generator 26 32 13 One (1) One (1)
8. UPS 26 33 53 - One (1)
9. Transfer Switches 26 36 23 - One (1)
10. Emergency Lighting 26 52 00 - One (1)
11. Electronic Safety and Security Division 28 - One (1)
12. Package Pump Station 33 32 13 - One (1)
13. Septic Tank 33 36 00 - One (1)
12. Process Valves 40 05 23 One (1) Three (3)
13. Monorail Hoists 41 22 23 - One (1)
14. Vertical Turbine Pumps 43 21 50 One (1) Two (2)

3.3 TRAINING COMPLETION FORMS

.1 The Contractor must ensure that Form T1 is to be signed by the trainer and the Owner’s
Staff representative after each training session has been completed.
.2 Use one (1) form for each equipment or system for which training has been provided.
.3 Submit a copy of the signed forms to the Engineer once the respective training sessions
are completed for verification and progress tracking purpose.

01 79 00.docx Stantec DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

RM of Headingley Section 01 79 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Page 5 of 6
.4 Include completed and signed Form T1 in the final project manual as required by Section
01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

01 79 00.docx Stantec DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

RM of Headingley Section 01 79 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Page 6 of 6
CERTIFICATE OF SATISFACTORY DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

FORM T1

We certify that the undersigned has instructed the Owner’s operating personnel in the proper operation
and maintenance of the equipment/system designated herein and in accordance to the minimum
requirements stated in the Specifications.

PROJECT: POPLAR BLUFF INDUSTRIAL PARK, RESERVOIR, PUMPHOUSE AND

ASSOCIATED WORKS

ITEM OF EQUIPMENT:

TAG No.:

REFERENCE
SPECIFICATION:

COMMENTS: __________________________________

(Name, Company and Signature of Trainer) Date

(Name, Company and Signature of Authorized Representative of Contractor) Date

As an authorized representative of the Owner’s Operating staff, we are

satisfied with the demonstration and training provided for safe and
appropriate operation of the stated equipment/system

(Name, Company and Signature of Authorized Representative of Owner) Date

END OF SECTION

01 79 00.docx Stantec DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

RM of Headingley Section 01 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Page 1 of 6

Part 1 General

1.1 WORK DESCRIPTION

.1 This section describes general requirements for process mechanical, HVAC, electrical
and instrumentation equipment relating to supply, installation, testing, and
commissioning; and the verification thereof.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1 Supplier: The Supplier is the person, partnership, or corporation responsible for the
fabrication of equipment provided to the Contractor for the completion of the Work.
.2 Supplier’s Representative: An Equipment Supplier’s Representative is a trained
serviceman empowered by the Supplier to provide installation inspection, testing, and
commissioning assistance to the Contractor in his performance of these functions.

1.3 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training
.2 Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements
.3 Division 22 – Plumbing
.4 Division 23 – Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
.5 Division 25 – Integrated Automation
.6 Division 26 – Electrical
.7 Division 40 – Process Integration
.8 Division 41 – Bulk Material Processing Equipment
.9 Division 43 – Process Gas and Liquid Handling, Purification and Storage Equipment

1.4 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY

.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for receiving, unloading, and safe storage of
equipment.
.2 The Contractor shall ensure that he has fully informed him of precautions to be taken in
the unloading of equipment and its subsequent storage.
.3 The Contractor shall inspect the contents of any equipment delivery to satisfy himself of
the contents thereof and damage, which may have occurred during transport.
.4 The Contractor shall coordinate with the supplier and jointly complete Form 101
appended to this specification section and submit it to Engineer.

1.5 INSTALLATION ASSISTANCE AND INSPECTIONS

.1 The Contractor shall coordinate with the various equipment Suppliers for the provision of
the Supplier services for all Divisions specified herein. The Contractor shall
coordinate and expedite the provision of these services and include all the related
costs in the bid price.

01 90 00.docx Stantec EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

RM of Headingley Section 01 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Page 2 of 6

.2 The Contractor shall ensure that skilled servicemen from the equipment suppliers have
instructed the Contractor in the proper installation of the equipment and the Contractor
has obtained and understands all necessary written installation instructions. These shall
include but not limited to methods, techniques, precautions and any other information
relevant to the successful installation of the equipment.
.3 When the Supplier satisfies the Contractor with all the requirements for installation
of the equipment the Contractor shall obtain a signed and certified Form 102
appended to this specification section from the Supplier
.4 Towards the end of the installation period, after informing the Engineer, notify the
equipment supplier to send his skilled servicemen to check over the completed
installation of equipment specified. The servicemen shall make a detailed check of the
installation including alignment, belt tension, bolt tensions, running clearances,
lubrication and workmanship and all other items as required to ensure proper operation of
the equipment. Promptly remedy any defects to the satisfaction of the Supplier’s skilled
servicemen. The equipment shall then be run and tested in the presence of the
serviceman, the Contractor and the Engineer.
.5 The Supplier’s skilled serviceman shall then certify that the installation is
satisfactory. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a signed copy of the Form
103 attached to this specification from the Supplier and forward a copy to the
Engineer.
.6 Tag the equipment with a 100mm by 200mm card stating "Equipment Checked. Do Not
Run." stenciled in large black letters. Sign and date each card.

1.6 EQUIPMENT START-UP

.1 Equipment will be subjected to a demonstration, running test, and performance tests after
the installation has been verified and any identified deficiencies have been remedied.
.2 Have the Supplier send a skilled serviceman to the site. The site visit may be concurrent
with the check of satisfactory installation if mutually agreed by the Supplier, the
Contractor and the Engineer, if requested.
.3 The Supplier’s skilled serviceman shall make all necessary checks to equipment and, if
necessary, advise the Contractor as to any further checking, flushing or cleaning required
prior to confirming that the equipment is ready to run.
.4 The Contractor and the Supplier’s skilled representative shall then operate the equipment
for at least four (4) hours to demonstrate to themselves the operation of the equipment
and controls and shall take all necessary remedial steps to ensure satisfactory operation.
.5 The Contractor and the Supplier shall then demonstrate to Engineer’s satisfaction that the
equipment is properly installed and aligned and is operating satisfactorily with no stress
as per the specifications.
.6 Should the demonstration reveal any defects then such shall be promptly rectified by the
Contractor and the demonstration of the equipment repeated to the satisfaction of the
Engineer at no extra costs to the Owner.

1.7 SERVICES FOR CONTRACTOR SUPPLIED EQUIPMENT

.1 The Contractor shall include in the Bid Price the cost to cover the provision of the
specialized services by the Contractor and the respective equipment Supplier’s of
equipment and systems to be installed.

01 90 00.docx Stantec EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

RM of Headingley Section 01 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Page 3 of 6

.2 Minimum number of days must be allowed to meet the requirements of installation

assistance, start-up assistance, commissioning and operator training. The Contractor
shall co-ordinate trips for installation inspection, start-up assistance, commissioning and
training of Owner’s personnel.

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 FORMS 101, 102 AND 103

.1 The following equipment requires Forms 101, 102 and 103 to be completed, signed and
submitted to the Engineer
.1 Flow Control Valve (01-FCV-210)
.2 Distribution Pumps (02-P-110, 02-P-210A/B, 02-P-310A/B/C)
.3 HVAC Fans and Unit Heaters
.4 Main Control PLC
.5 Instrumentation
.6 SCADA System
.7 Generator and Automatic Transfer Switch
.8 Harmonic Filter
.9 Weeping Tile Pump Station
.10 Septic Tank
.11 Security System

END OF SECTION

01 90 00.docx Stantec EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

RM of Headingley Section 01 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Page 4 of 6

CERTIFICATE OF SATISFACTORY DELIVERY

FORM 101

The Installation Contractor has inspected the equipment delivered and unloaded at the site and has
confirmed that delivery and unloading is satisfactory except as noted below. The Equipment Supplier has
also informed the Installation Contractor of the storage requirement for the equipment at the site.

PROJECT:

ITEM OF EQUIPMENT:

TAG NO:

REFERENCE SPECIFICATION:

CONTRACTOR , Name, Signature DATE

EQUIPMENT Supplier, Name, Signature DATE

01 90 00.docx Stantec EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

RM of Headingley Section 01 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Page 5 of 6

CERTIFICATE OF READINESS TO INSTALL

FORM 102

I/We have familiarized the installer of the specific installation requirements related to the equipment
listed below and am satisfied that he understands the required procedures.

PROJECT:

ITEM OF EQUIPMENT:

TAG NO:

REFERENCE SPECIFICATION:

CONTRACTOR , Name, Signature DATE

EQUIPMENT Supplier, Name, Signature DATE

01 90 00.docx Stantec EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

RM of Headingley Section 01 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
Page 6 of 6

CERTIFICATE OF SATISFACTORY INSTALLATION

FORM 103

I/We have completed my check and inspection of the installation listed below and confirm that it is
satisfactory and that defects have been remedied to my satisfaction except any as noted below:

PROJECT:

ITEM OF EQUIPMENT:

TAG NO:

REFERENCE SPECIFICATION:

OUTSTANDING DEFECTS:

CONTRACTOR, Name, Signature DATE

EQUIPMENT Supplier, Name, Signature DATE

01 90 00.docx Stantec EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

RM of Headingley Section 01 91 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
Page 1 of 8

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 This section describes the Contractor’s responsibilities in commissioning and handover of
a complete functioning reservoir, pumphouse and associated process mechanical,
electrical, controls, integrated automation, building mechanical, sub-systems and
associated works provided as part of this Contract.
.2 Commissioning is a planned program of tests; procedures and checks carried out
systematically on systems and integrated systems of the finished Project. Commissioning
shall be performed after systems and integrated systems are completely installed,
functional and Contractor's Performance Verification responsibilities have been
completed and approved.
.3 Commissioning Objectives:
.1 Verify installed equipment, systems and integrated systems operate in accordance
with contract documents and design criteria and intent.
.2 Ensure appropriate documentation is compiled into the Project Manual.
.3 Training of Owner’s operations staff shall not be undertaken during the
Commissioning period.
.4 Contractor must assist various equipment suppliers under this Contract in the
Commissioning process, operating equipment and systems, troubleshooting and making
adjustments as required.
.1 Systems to be operated at full capacity under various modes to determine if they
function correctly and consistently at peak efficiency. Systems to be integrated
and interactive with each other as intended in accordance with Contract
Documents and design criteria.
.2 During these checks, adjustments to be made to enhance performance to meet
environmental or user requirements.
.5 Design Criteria: as per Engineer’s requirements to meet Project functional and
operational requirements.
.6 For commissioning purposes the term “Reservoir, Pumphouse and Associated Works”
shall mean the work of this Contract entirely.
.7 The Contractor is responsible for all chemicals, power, consumables and incidental costs
during Commissioning, Performance Verification and Acceptance Testing unless
otherwise noted.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1 System: For the purpose of this specification section, a system shall be defined as the
equipment, piping, controls, ancillary devices, electrical power, etc. which together
perform a specific function at the facility.

01 91 13.docx Stantec GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 01 91 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
Page 2 of 8

.2 Commissioning: For the purpose of this specification section, commissioning shall be

defined as the successful operation of the Reservoir, Pumphouse and Associated Works
in accordance with its Contract Documents and design criteria.
.3 Performance Verification: This encompasses performance tests which includes the
following but not limited to pressure, leakage, loop check verification, calibration,
balancing, meeting pump performance curves, process capacities etc. for all process
mechanical, electrical, instrumentation and controls and building mechanical systems to
demonstrate compliance with performance requirements of this specifications.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS:

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 All other specification sections.

1.4 COMMISSIONING OVERVIEW

.1 A proposed sequencing of work is provided. The Contractor is required to submit a
formal plan for approval by the Engineer:
.1 Complete installation of all equipment. Complete Form 103 for all equipment
identified in Section 01 90 00.
.2 Provide I/O check sheets to Engineer
.3 Test all equipment individually to confirm they are functioning and controlled as
per the specification and process narrative.
.4 Drain the reservoir / pump chamber, undertake cleaning, if there is any
debris/deposition and disinfection in accordance with the Contract Document.
.5 Fill the reservoir with treated water and collect samples for approval by the
Office of Drinking Water (ODW).
.6 Upon receipt of disinfection results the Engineer will write a letter to the ODW
requesting approval for the Owner to put the new reservoir and treatment process
into service.
.7 Operate the entire reservoir and pumphouse as a complete system. Troubleshoot
any operational and/or control issues.
.8 The Contractor must demonstrate a trouble-free operation of the reservoir,
pumphouse and associated works for a consecutive period of three (3) days.
Trouble free operation will be defined by no component of the system being off-
line due to mechanical, electrical or controls issues.
.9 Following 3 days of trouble-free operating, complete Form 104 for the equipment
listed in Section 1.33.
.2 Engineer will consider Substantial Performance Certificate provided:
.1 Completed Commissioning documentation has been received, reviewed for
suitability and approved by Engineer.
.2 Equipment, building systems and associated controls has been commissioned and
Form 104 has been completed for all equipment.

01 91 13.docx Stantec GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 01 91 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
Page 3 of 8

.3 Building air balancing has been completed, HAVC system operation

demonstrated to perform in accordance to intended seasonal operation, overall
HVAC system reviewed for suitability and approved by the Engineer.
.4 Specified Operator training has been completed and signed off by the Owner and
Form T1 has been completed for all equipment.
.5 Manitoba Builder’s Lien Act requirements have been met.
.3 The Contractor will be responsible for operation of the reservoir, pumphouse and
associated works including all power, incidental costs, chemicals, and consumables until
the issuance of Substantial Completion.

1.5 STARTING AND TESTING

.1 Every individual item of equipment shall be tested by itself and in combination with
related items to ensure that the item and the subsystem are in perfect operating condition,
comply with specified requirements and are ready for operation.
.2 The Contractor shall arrange for the simulation of the control sequences of key
equipment and processes. Every effort shall be made to ensure that the commissioning
period provides for the full and comprehensive operation of the equipment under all
anticipated normal and adverse operating conditions.
.3 All testing, checking, calibration, adjustments, making of connections, setting, lubrication
and other requirements shall be documented in writing and submitted to the Engineer for
each item tested individually.
.4 Temporary equipment will be installed and tested as necessary to ensure that it functions
reliably and consistently through the commissioning period.
.5 Other sections of the specification may contain specific testing, cleaning, disinfecting,
balancing and operation requirements that are to be followed in conjunction with this
Section.
.6 Inspection and testing shall include, but shall not be limited to:
.1 Soundness – without damaged parts,
.2 Completeness in all details as specified,
.3 Correctness of setting, alignment and arrangements of parts,
.4 Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubrication.
.7 Contractor assumes liabilities and costs for inspections. Including disassembly and re-
assembly after approval, starting, testing and adjusting, including supply of testing
equipment.

1.6 NON-CONFORMANCE TO PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

REQUIREMENTS
.1 Should equipment, system components, and associated controls be incorrectly installed or
malfunction during Commissioning, correct deficiencies, re-verify equipment and
components within the non-functional system, including related systems as deemed
required by Engineer, to ensure effective performance.

01 91 13.docx Stantec GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 01 91 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
Page 4 of 8

.2 Costs for corrective work, additional tests, inspections, to determine acceptability and
proper performance of such items to be borne by Contractor. Above costs to be in form of
progress payment reductions or hold-back assessments.

1.7 COMMISSIONING TEAM

.1 A team comprised of personnel from the Contractor, Contractor’s sub-trades and
representatives from various equipment Suppliers/manufacturers will conduct the work of
commissioning.
.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for overall co-ordination and direction of the work
with input/approval from the Engineer and the Owner.
.3 Provide competent, experienced, factory trained technical personnel to supervise the
installation, inspection, testing and commissioning of the work supplied and installed
under this Contract.
.4 The Contractor shall provide and pay for all such personnel, regardless of the length of
time required to commission the Work.
.5 The Contractor shall provide personnel representing the appropriate trades, including
control and instrumentation personnel during the commissioning. These personnel shall
be skilled workmen, able to expedite any minor repairs, adjustments, etc. as required to
complete commissioning with as few delays as possible.

1.8 COMMISSIONING PLAN

.1 The Commissioning Team shall develop a detailed methodology for the commissioning
of each system at least thirty (30) calendar days prior to planned start of commissioning.
The plan shall be drafted by the Contractor and include the following:
.1 Detailed sequencing and schedule of events,
.2 Method for demonstrating performance of distribution pumps
.3 Description of how the process narrative and HVAC narrative will be
demonstrated.
.4 Attendance schedule for manufacturer's representatives.
.5 Contingency plans in the event of a process malfunction.
.6 List of all personnel on the Contractor’s Commissioning Team and their
qualifications for this work.
.2 The Commissioning Plan shall be reviewed and agreed by the Engineer / Owner prior to
its implementation. The Contractor shall organize a pre-commissioning meeting
following submission of the detailed methodology for commissioning.

1.9 CONFLICTS
.1 Report conflicts between requirements of this section and other sections to Engineer
before start-up and obtain clarification.
.2 Failure to report conflict and obtain clarification will result in application of most
stringent requirement.

01 91 13.docx Stantec GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 01 91 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
Page 5 of 8

1.10 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit Draft Commissioning and Final Commissioning Plan
.3 The Contractor will not undertake any Commissioning activities without the written
approval of the Final Commissioning Plan from the Engineer.

1.11 WITNESSING OF STARTING AND TESTING

.1 Provide 14 calendar days’ notice prior to commencement.
.2 Engineer to witness of start-up and testing.
.3 Contractor's Commissioning Agent to be present for tests performed and documented by
sub-trades, suppliers and equipment manufacturers.

1.12 MANUFACTURER'S INVOLVEMENT

.1 Factory testing: Arrange for manufacturer to:
.1 Coordinate time and location of testing.
.2 Provide testing documentation for approval by Engineer.
.2 Obtain manufacturers installation, start-up and operations instructions prior to start-up of
components, equipment and systems and review with Engineer:
.1 Compare completed installation with manufacturer's published data, record
discrepancies, and review with manufacturer.
.2 Modify procedures detrimental to equipment performance and review same with
manufacturer before start-up.
.3 Integrity of warranties:
.1 Use manufacturers trained start-up personnel where specified elsewhere in other
divisions or required to maintain integrity of warranty.
.2 Verify with manufacturer that testing as specified will not void warranties.
.4 Qualifications of manufacturer's personnel:
.1 Experienced in design, installation and operation of equipment and systems.
.2 Ability to interpret test results accurately.
.3 To report results in clear, concise, logical manner.

1.13 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

.1 All controls which are the responsibility of this Contractor shall be installed and tested
prior to commissioning.

1.14 TEST RESULTS

.1 If start-up, testing and/or Performance Verification produce unacceptable results, repair,
replace or repeat specified starting and/or Performance Verification procedures until
acceptable results are achieved.
.2 Provide workforce and materials, assume costs for re-commissioning.

01 91 13.docx Stantec GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 01 91 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
Page 6 of 8

1.15 WITNESSING COMMISSIONING

.1 Engineer to witness activities and verify results.

1.16 EXTRAPOLATION OF RESULTS

.1 Where Commissioning of weather, occupancy, or seasonal-sensitive equipment or
systems cannot be conducted under near-rated or near-design conditions, extrapolate part-
load results to design conditions when approved by Engineer in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's instructions, using manufacturer's data, with manufacturer's
assistance and using approved formulae.

1.17 REPEAT VERIFICATIONS

.1 Assume costs incurred by Engineer for third and subsequent verifications where:
.1 Verification of reported results fails to receive Engineer's approval.
.2 Repetition of second verification again fails to receive approval.
.3 Engineer deems Contractor's request for second verification was premature.

1.18 DEFICIENCIES, FAULTS, DEFECTS

.1 Correct deficiencies found during start-up and Commissioning to satisfaction of
Engineer.
.2 Report problems, faults or defects affecting Commissioning to Engineer in writing. Stop
Commissioning until problems are rectified. Proceed with written approval from
Engineer.

1.19 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS, SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS

.1 Supply, deliver, and document maintenance materials, spare parts, and special tools as
specified in contract.
.2 Commissioning will not be undertaken if Operation and Maintenance Manuals are not
available to the Engineer.

1.20 OCCUPANCY
.1 Cooperate fully with Engineer during stages of acceptance and occupancy of facility.

1.21 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION TOLERANCES

.1 Application tolerances:
.1 Specified range of acceptable deviations of measured values from specified
values or specified design criteria. Except for special areas, to be within +/- 5%
of specified values.
.2 Instrument accuracy tolerances:
.1 To be of higher order of magnitude than equipment or system being tested.
.3 Measurement tolerances during verification:
.1 Unless otherwise specified actual values to be within +/- 2 % of recorded values.

01 91 13.docx Stantec GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 01 91 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
Page 7 of 8

1.22 COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING

.1 Upon completion of Commissioning leave systems in normal operating mode.
.2 Complete Form 104 – Certificate of Satisfactory Commissioning for each
equipment, controls, instrument and sub-system.
.3 Commissioning to be considered complete when contract Commissioning deliverables
including Form 104 have been submitted and accepted by Engineer.
.4 When changes are made to baseline components or system settings established during
Commissioning process, provide updated Commissioning form for affected item.
.5 Form 104 is required for the following items:
.1 Flow Control Valve (01-FCV-210)
.2 Distribution Pumps (02-P-110, 02-P-210A/B, 02-P-310A/B/C)
.3 HVAC Fans and Unit Heaters
.4 Main Control PLC
.5 Instrumentation
.6 SCADA System
.7 Generator and Automatic Transfer Switch
.8 Harmonic Filter
.9 Weeping Tile Pump Station
.10 Septic Tank
.11 Security System

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

01 91 13.docx Stantec GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 01 91 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
Page 8 of 8

CERTIFICATE OF SATISFACTORY COMMISSIONING

FORM 104

Commissioning has been completed in accordance with the specification, except as noted below:

PROJECT:

ITEM OF EQUIPMENT:

TAG NO.:

REFERENCE
SPECIFICATION:

OUTSTANDING DEFECTS:

(Contractor, Name, Signature) Date

(Equipment Supplier, Name, Signature) Date

END OF SECTION

01 91 13.docx Stantec GENERAL COMMISSIONING

REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 03

CONCRETE
RM of Headingley Section 03 10 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 This section specifies requirements for concrete formwork, falsework, and accessories for
concrete construction.
.2 The Work includes design, construction, erection, and removal of concrete formwork,
falsework, and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Current editions of reference standards shall be applicable.
.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA):
.1 CSA A23.1-14/CSA A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete.
.2 CSA S269.1-16, Falsework and Formwork.
.3 American Concrete Institute (ACI):
.1 ACI 315, ACI Detailing Manual - 2004.
.2 ACI 347R-14, Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

1.3 DESIGN
.1 Design of concrete formwork and falsework are the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 Submittals and CSA A23.1.
.2 Submit shop drawings of proposed formwork and/or falsework for review if requested.
.3 Show material sizes and grades and spacing of members.
.4 Indicate rate and sequence of concrete placing used in design of formwork.
.5 Shop drawings shall bear the stamp of a qualified Professional Engineer registered in the
Province of Manitoba.
.6 Submit for review shoring and reshoring provisions and removal schedules.
.7 Submit for review proposed hoarding and heating methods for cold weather concreting.

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Comply with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.

03 10 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 03 10 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
Page 2 of 5

Part 2 Products

2.1 FORMS
.1 Use material of suitable strength and quality to produce the specified surface finish.
.2 Use forms which are watertight, non-warped, non-absorbent, and non-staining.
.3 Formwork lumber: plywood and wood formwork materials to CSA A23.1.
.4 Falsework materials: to CSA S269.1, Table 1 - materials shall bear grade marks or be
accompanied with certificates, test reports, or other proof of conformity.

2.2 FORM TIES

.1 Form ties for all water retaining walls shall be cone-fast coil type or SHE bolt type as
manufactured by Dywidag, to provide a 50 mm deep cone pocket for grouting after use.
The portion of the form tie that remains in the concrete wall shall be non-plated and shall
use two O-ring waterstops at midspan 25 mm apart.
.2 Form tie systems using plastic or steel sleeves to be left in place are not acceptable for
water retaining structures. Through wall taper ties are also not acceptable for water
retaining structures.
.3 Form ties for non-water retaining walls shall be removable snap off metal type, fixed
length, minimum working strength of 13 kN when assembled; free of defects that will
leave holes deeper than 25 mm from concrete surface. Use plastic cone snap type or
screw type and light grey concrete plugs on exposed surfaces. Wire ties are not permitted.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
.1 Form release agent: chemically reactive release agents containing compounds that react
with free lime present in concrete to provide water insoluble soaps, preventing set of film
on concrete in contact with forms. Agent to not stain concrete or impair natural bonding
or colour characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.
.2 Fillets for chamfered corners: unless otherwise indicated 25 x 25 mm. Special sizes,
shapes, and profiles as indicated on Drawings.
.3 Void forms:
.1 Paper forms: corrugated paper forms with cellular core, thickness as indicated on
drawings, minimum compressive strength 69 kPa. Protected all four sides by wax
coated moisture protection. Shearmat or VF VoidForm.
.2 Location: structural slabs over grade where indicated on Drawings.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Notify the Engineer to permit inspection of formwork at least 72 hours before concreting.
Inspection by Engineer of formwork shall be for conformance to project specifications,
but not for structural strength and stability, which is the sole responsibility of the
Contractor.

03 10 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 03 10 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
Page 3 of 5

.2 Obtain approval from Engineer prior to placing concrete.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION AND CONTRACTION JOINT LAYOUTS

.1 Construction and contraction joints shall be constructed where required as shown on the
Drawings, as specified and/or according to CSA A23.1. The Contractor shall prepare and
submit for review, a location diagram and proposed details for all planned construction
joints, and for layout of construction and contraction joints in slabs on grade, sidewalks,
and other concrete paved areas.
.2 Construction joints shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
.3 Prepare and clean all construction joint surfaces that will be inaccessible after the
erection of formwork. Refer to Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
.4 Construct falsework to CSA S269.1.

3.3 FORMS
.1 Fabricate and erect formwork in accordance with CSA-S269.1 to produce finished
concrete conforming to shape, dimensions, locations, and levels indicated on Drawings
within tolerances required by CSA A23.1.
.2 Allow for deflection of the formwork due to the weight of concrete.
.3 Make all form joints watertight.
.4 Make form surfaces smooth and flat.
.5 Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning
and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
Close temporary ports or openings with tight-fitting panels, flush with inside face to
forms, neatly fitted so those joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
.6 Clean formwork in accordance with CSA A23.1 before placing concrete.
.7 Form release agent:
.1 Apply on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded parts.
.3 Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are to receive special
finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of
untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing concrete.
.4 Take precautions to keep form release agent from contacting reinforcing steel.
.8 Provide chamfers at all vertical and horizontal exposed exterior corners.
.9 Provide access for cleaning prior to concreting.
.10 Do not use temporary removable spacers or blocks to support reinforcement or other
items unless acceptable to the Engineer.
.11 Finished concrete exhibiting evidence of excessive form displacement, and/or excessive
deflection shall be cause for rejection of the work and its removal and replacement at the
Contractor’s own expense.
.12 Obtain Engineer’s approval before framing openings not indicated on Drawings.

03 10 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 03 10 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
Page 4 of 5

3.4 TOLERANCES
.1 Construct formwork to maintain the tolerances of concrete work in accordance with
CSA A23.1.
.2 Provide cambers to beam and slab forms as indicated on the Drawings, as directed, or in
accordance with the following:
.1 Beams - 5 mm per 3000 mm of span.
.2 Slabs - 8 mm per 3000 mm of span.

3.5 PLACING OF CONCRETE

.1 Inform Engineer when formwork is complete and has been cleaned to allow for
inspection. Obtain approval prior to placing concrete.
.2 Make a final inspection and ensure that forms are satisfactory and no deleterious
materials are present inside the area to be concreted.
.3 Observe forms during concreting operations and correct any displacement of the form.

3.6 FORM REMOVAL

.1 Remove forms so that no damage occurs to the concrete. Loosen forms carefully. Do not
wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against concrete surfaces.
.2 Consider the location, character of the structure, weather, and other conditions
influencing the curing of concrete, in determining the time for removal of forms. Refer to
Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete and CSA A23.1.
.3 Leave shores in place until concrete has attained sufficient strength to adequately support
its own weight together with construction loads likely to be imposed. Leave formwork in
place for the minimum periods of time after placing concrete as shown on the Drawings.
.4 Reshore structural members where required due to design requirements or construction
conditions and as required to permit progressive construction. Remove forms supporting
loads only when concrete has attained 75% of required compressive strength, provided
construction is reshored.
.5 Remove formwork progressively and in accordance with Building and Safety Code
requirements and so that no shock loads or unbalanced loads are imposed on structure.
.6 Concrete curing procedures shall commence immediately after form removal. Refer to
Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete for leaving some forms in place as part of
curing procedures.
.7 Re-use of formwork and falsework subject to requirements of CSA A23.1.

3.7 VOID FORM INSTALLATION

.1 Install void forms where indicated, level, and to proper elevation.
.2 Where void form is to be placed in areas that will be above existing grade elevations the
placement, leveling, and compaction of backfill materials shall be completed before void
form is placed.
.3 Wrap paper type forms with polyethylene film to protect from moisture. Cover paper type
void form with 6 mm thick hardboard.

03 10 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 03 10 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
Page 5 of 5

.4 Provide minimum 300 x 300 mm sections of hardboard at bolster and chair locations.
.5 Protect from damage until concrete placement. Replace crushed, damaged, or wet void
form before placing concrete.

END OF SECTION

03 10 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 03 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 This section specifies requirements for the supply, fabrication, and placing of reinforcing
steel, including necessary supports, spacers, and related accessories.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Current editions of reference standards shall be applicable.
.2 CSA A23.1-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction.
.3 CSA A23.3-14, Design of Concrete Structures.
.4 CSA G30.18-09 (R2014), Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
.5 ASTM A1064/A1064M-16b, Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded
Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete.
.6 CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
.7 ACI 315, ACI Detailing Manual - 2004.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals, at least 10 days
before fabrication.
.2 Submit bending schedules and placing drawings.
.3 Show bar size, spacing, location, and quantities to permit correct placement without
reference to Drawings.
.4 Provide details to show placement of reinforcing where special conditions occur.
.5 Details shall be in accordance with ACI 315.
.6 Submit certificates and mill tests for the material supplied as requested by the Engineer.
.7 Design and detail lap lengths and bar development lengths to CSA A23.3 unless
otherwise indicated.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Ship bar reinforcement in standard bundles, easily identifiable, and marked in accordance
with the bar lists.
.2 Store reinforcement to prevent deterioration or contamination by dirt, detrimental rust,
loose scale, paint, oil, or other foreign substances that will destroy or reduce bond.
.3 Do not straighten or re-bend reinforcement in any manner.
.4 Do not use bars kinked or bent by improper handling or storage.

1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Comply with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.

03 20 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

RM of Headingley Section 03 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Page 2 of 3

Part 2 Products

2.1 REINFORCING STEEL

.1 Reinforcing steel: to CSA G30.18. Steel grade to be 400 MPa.
.2 Welded steel wire fabric: to ASTM A1064 / A1064M-15, provide in flat sheets only.

2.2 CHAIRS, BOLSTERS, BAR SUPPORTS, AND SPACERS

.1 Provide adequate support of reinforcement (according to CRSI Manual of Standard
Practice).
.2 For exposed or architectural concrete surfaces use accessories that are plastic coated,
stainless steel, or as indicated on the Drawings.
.3 Precast concrete block supports must be equal in strength and quality to the concrete in
the structure and with a maximum plan dimensions of 50x50mm.
.4 Chairs, bolster bar supports, and spacers shall have sufficient strength to support the
reinforcing under normal construction conditions. Brick shall not be used for bar
supports.
.5 Side form spacers to be non-corrosive PVC spacers, purpose made. Steel bar chairs,
galvanized bar chairs, PVC chairs, concrete bricks, broken concrete blocks, or wood
supports are not acceptable.

2.3 FABRICATION
.1 Fabricate reinforcing steel from bar sizes and grades indicated within the following
tolerances:
.1 Sheared length: plus 0, minus 25 mm.
.2 Stirrups, ties, and spirals: plus 0, or minus 13 mm.
.3 Location of bends: plus 0, or minus 25 mm.
.2 Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate in accordance with CSA A23.1.
.3 Obtain Engineer’s approval for location of reinforcing splices other than as shown on
reviewed reinforcing steel placing drawings.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Notify Engineer to permit inspection after placement is completed. Reinforcing for all
concrete pours shall be inspected after placing and prior to concreting.
.2 Provide minimum of 72 hours notice of scheduled pours to facilitate inspection of
reinforcement.

3.2 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT

.1 Place reinforcement as shown on the reviewed shop drawings and in accordance with
CSA A23.1.

03 20 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

RM of Headingley Section 03 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Page 3 of 3

.2 Support reinforcement in position as follows:

.1 Beams, walls, and columns - laterally support reinforcement with supports in
pairs on opposite faces.
.2 Do not use supports that will be forced into the supporting formwork or soil by
the weight of the reinforcement or other construction loads.
.3 Separate layers of bars by precast mortar blocks, bars, or equally suitable
devices. Do not use pebbles, pieces of broken stone or brick, metal pipe, or
wooden blocks.
.4 Do not place bars on layers of fresh concrete as the work progresses or install
bars during placing of concrete.
.3 Provide concrete cover as detailed on the Drawings.

3.3 WELDING OF REINFORCEMENT

.1 Welding of reinforcing bars is not permitted.

3.4 SPLICING OF REINFORCEMENT

.1 Splice bars only as shown on the Drawings or as acceptable to the Engineer.
.2 Bar splices shall conform to CSA A23.3, Type B, unless noted.
.3 Lap adjacent sheets of wire fabric to provide an overlap of at least one cross wire spacing
plus 50 mm, measured between outermost cross wires of each sheet.

3.5 DETAILS
.1 Corner bars: install corners bars in walls and beams to match the larger size of normal
reinforcement unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.
.2 Openings in slabs or walls: unless otherwise noted on Drawings, install two additional
bars, size to match main reinforcing bars, on all sides of every opening, one near each
concrete face or the number of bars intercepted, divided equally between the two sides,
whichever is greater. Bars to extend minimum one lap length past each side of the
opening.

END OF SECTION

03 20 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

RM of Headingley Section 03 25 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse July 2025
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 This section specifies requirements for concrete joint materials including ribbed
waterstop and joint filler.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Current editions of reference standards shall be applicable.
.2 CSA A23.1-14/CSA A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete.
.3 CSA S269.1-16, Falsework and Formwork.
.4 ASTM D1751-04(2013), Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous
Types)

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings of all concrete accessories.
.2 Show material sizes and installation methods.
.3 Submit samples of waterstop and joint filler to be used.
.4 Submit documentation indicating Contractor’s experience in installing products and
acceptance by the manufacturer that the Contractor has retained a certified installer.

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Comply with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Waterstop:
.1 Flexible PVC waterstop for new construction: to conform to US Corp of
Engineers standard CRD-C 572-74 Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop. Ribbed
waterstop with centerbulb for moving and non-moving joints.
.1 Acceptable products are Wirestop CR-6316 by Paul Murphy, Sika
Greenstreak 779, and JP Specialties Earth Shield PVC.
.2 Manufacturer factory fabricated and tested PVC waterstop vertical and
horizontal cross, L, and T shaped junction sections are to be used.
.3 Use manufacturer supplied hog rings, or optional factory installed
eyelets, and tie wire to secure waterstop to reinforcing steel.
.4 PVC waterstop in potable water retaining structures shall be
independently certified per NSF/ANSI Standard 61. Third-party certified
documentation to be provided by the manufacturer.

03 25 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 03 25 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse July 2025
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
Page 2 of 4

.2 Expandable waterstop: SikaSwell S-2 by Sika or Volclay RX by Cetco to be used

if specific locations are indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
.2 Joint fillers: pre-moulded expansion joint filler (for joints associated with slabs on grade
such as pads at doors): asphalt impregnated vegetable or cane fibreboard, conforming to
ASTM D1751, sizes indicated on Drawings. Acceptable products: W. R. Meadows
Sealtight Fibre Expansion Joint Filler complete with Snap-Cap and Sealtight #164, Hi-
Spec, or Cold Applied SOF-Seal sealant; or Fosroc Fibreboard complete with Plastiseal
adhesive and Colpor 200PF sealant.
.3 Backer rod: closed cell vinyl foam.
.4 Non-ferrous pre-mixed non-shrink grout: Master Builders 713, SikaGrout-212, CPD Non
Shrink Grout, Steel C1 Grout, minimum 35 MPa compressive strength.
.5 Anchoring adhesive: Hilti HIT HY-200 Adhesive; use Hilti HIT-ICE for cold weather
applications.
.6 Moisture retention film: Master Builders Confilm, Sika Film, or TK Products Tri Film.
.7 Repair mortar: Xypex Megamix-II.
.8 Epoxy injection system to be NSF 61 certified: Specton Flex F1000, NSF 61 approved
Water Activated Polyurethane Urethane Grout.
.9 Sealants: as per Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealing.
.10 Dampproofing: as per Section 07 11 13 – Bituminous Dampproofing.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

.1 Pre-installation meeting for waterstopping, epoxy injection, and sealant: one week prior
to installation of the above products into the Works, the Contractor shall conduct a
meeting with applicator, installers of Work adjacent to or that penetrates the waterstop or
sealant products, and the Engineer to review the following:
.2 General project requirements.
.3 Manufacture’s product data sheets and installation guides.
.4 Substrate conditions and procedures for substrate preparation and product installations.
.5 Responsibility and costs associated with verification and correlation of field dimensions,
fabrication processes, techniques of construction, and installation and coordination for all
parts of the Work rests with the Contractor. Provide agenda and meeting minutes.
Distribute agenda to the attendees four days prior to the pre-installation meeting.
Distribute pre-installation meeting minutes within four days after the meeting.
.6 Pay for all costs associated with the pre-installation meeting excluding the Engineer cost.

3.2 PVC WATERSTOPS

.1 Install waterstops to provide continuous water seal. Do not distort or pierce waterstop to
hamper performance. Do not displace reinforcement when installing waterstops. Use
equipment to manufacturer’s requirements to field splice waterstops.

03 25 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 03 25 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse July 2025
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
Page 3 of 4

.2 Only straight heat sealed butt joints permitted in field. Use factory welded corners and
intersections.
.3 Waterstop field butt joints shall be heated and spliced with a thermal splicing unit
designed for that specific purpose. All field splices shall be tested for a complete seal by
use of a corona discharge unit; costs for testing to be paid for by Contractor.
.4 Take particular care to correctly position the waterstop during installation. Tie the
waterstop adequately for support in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, but at
spacing no greater than 300 mm to ensure proper embedment, symmetry about the joint,
and to prevent displacement during concrete placement. Fully compact the concrete in the
region of the waterstop during the placing of concrete.

3.3 EXPANSIVE WATERSTOP

.1 Apply expansive waterstop where and if specifically indicated on the Drawings or as
directed by the Engineer.
.2 Prepare surfaces, and apply adhesive as applicable, and apply beads to manufacturer’s
instructions. Size beads to manufacturer’s instructions.
.3 Protect expansive waterstop from contact with water prior to concrete placement. Replace
waterstop if it has come in contact with water and has begun to absorb water.
.4 Do not place concrete until expansive waterstop has been reviewed by the Engineer.

3.4 REPAIR MORTAR

.1 Apply repair mortar for defective concrete where directed by the Engineer.
.2 Prepare surfaces and apply repair mortar to manufacturer’s instructions. Use pea gravel to
extend the mixture in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.5 EPOXY INJECTION

.1 Repair dry temperature and shrinkage cracks of water retaining structures using NSF 61
approved epoxy injection system.
.2 Allow Engineer to review dry temperature and shrinkage cracks prior to injection.
.3 Inject all dry temperature and shrinkage cracks as required to complete the hydrostatic
testing in accordance with Section 03 90 00.
.4 Clean the crack using the manufacturer’s approved cleaning agent and procedures prior to
injection of resin.
.5 Injection to be completed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions.
.6 Remove any cured injection resin from the surface of the structure.
.7 Allow minimum 24 hours for the injection resin to cure prior to removal and patching of
the packer holes.

3.6 JOINT FILLERS

.1 Use 13 mm thick joint filler to separate slabs and beams from existing vertical surfaces
and extend joint filler from bottom of slab and beams to finished slab surfaces unless
indicated otherwise.

03 25 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 03 25 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse July 2025
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
Page 4 of 4

.2 Use adhesive to secure joint filler to prevent displacement during concrete placement.
.3 Use 13 mm removable material at top or cut back top 13 mm and fill with sealant after
new concrete has sufficiently cured.

END OF SECTION

03 25 00.docx Stantec CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 03 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 1 of 10

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 This section specifies requirements for design and preparation of the concrete mix,
handling, placing, finishing, and curing of cast-in-place concrete.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Current editions of reference standards shall be applicable.
.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA):
.1 CSA A23.1-14/CSA A23.2-14, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete.
.2 CSA A23.3-14, Design of Concrete Structures.
.3 CAN/CSA-A3000-13, Cementitious Materials Compendium.
.3 American Concrete Association (ACI):
.1 ACI 306R-16, Guide to Cold Weather Concreting.
.2 ACI 350-06, Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete
Structures.
.4 ASTM International (ASTM):
.1 ASTM C94/C94M-16a, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.
.2 ASTM C260/C260M-10a(2016), Standard Specification for Air-Entraining
Admixtures for Concrete.
.3 ASTM C494/C494M-16, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
Concrete.
.4 ASTM C1017/C1017M-13e1, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures
for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete.
.5 Have available on site one copy of CSA A23.1/CSA A23.2. These shall form the basis
for acceptable standards of concrete practice and methods.

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

.1 Cast-in-place concrete shall conform to the CSA A23.1. Concrete shall be delivered
under the Performance Alternative as outlined in CSA A23.1, Table 5.
.2 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for quality control of all aspects of production,
pre-placement, placement, and post-placement of concrete and related testing.
.3 Concrete testing shall be performed by a CSA A23.1 certified third party testing agency.
Testing shall conform to CSA A23.1/A23.2. Third party testing shall be paid for by the
Contractor.
.4 Distribute the third party testing agency test data to the Engineer and Owner immediately
upon receiving.

03 30 00.docx Stantec CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

RM of Headingley Section 03 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 2 of 10

.5 Submit and implement a Quality Control Plan a minimum of four weeks prior to first
scheduled concrete casting; the Quality Control Plan shall, as a minimum, include:
.1 Identify the Quality Control Manager.
.2 Concrete supplier certification with Concrete Manitoba.
.3 Qualifications of construction supervisory personnel.
.4 Quality Control testing plan for concrete.
.5 Pre-placement procedures, checklists, and project specific finishing procedures
for concrete.
.6 During placement contingency plans and procedures.
.7 Post-placement procedures and checklists for concrete.
.6 Submit mix design statement for each type of concrete:
.1 Mix design statements shall be sealed and signed by a Professional Engineer
registered in the Province of Manitoba experienced in preparing concrete mix
designs.
.2 Submit documentation a minimum of four weeks prior to the first scheduled
concrete casting demonstrating that the proposed mix designs and materials will
achieve the required strength, durability, and performance requirements.
.3 The mix design statements shall clearly correlate to the concrete specifications in
the Controlled Concrete Table shown on the Drawings.
.4 The mix design statements shall incorporate the requirements of Section 07 16 16
– Crystalline Waterproofing.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Checklists supplied by the Contractor will be used for reviewing the work.
.2 Notify the Engineer at least 72 hours before complete formwork, embedded items, and
concrete reinforcement is ready for review. Contractor shall schedule review of
embedded items and reinforcing in walls prior to closing forms.
.3 Allow ample time for review, and corrective work, if required, before scheduling
concrete placement.
.4 The Owner reserves the right to arrange and pay for a CSA A23.1 certified third party
testing agency to test the concrete works. Provide unencumbered access to all portions of
the Work and cooperate with appointed third party testing agency.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Store all material in accordance with CSA A23.1, Storage of Materials, except as
otherwise noted.
.2 Store each shipment of cement separately to provide access to identification and
inspection of each shipment.
.3 Clean stockpile areas of foreign materials.

03 30 00.docx Stantec CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

RM of Headingley Section 03 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 3 of 10

.4 Do not use stockpiled material within 150 mm of the ground surface if the stockpile is
placed directly on the ground.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Comply with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.

Part 2 Products

2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS

.1 Portland Cement: Type GU or GUb and Type HS or HSb conforming to CAN/CSA
A3000.
.2 Supplementary cementing materials: conforming to CAN/CSA A3000.
.3 Fine aggregate: conforming to Normal-Density Fine Aggregate, CSA A23.1, Tables 10
and 12.
.4 Coarse aggregate: conforming to Normal-Density Coarse Aggregate, CSA A23.1, Table
11 and 12.
.5 Water: potable, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter, or
other deleterious matter, meeting requirements of CSA A23.1, Table 9.
.6 Materials are to be obtained from the same supplier or manufacturer for the duration of
the project.

2.2 ADMIXTURES
.1 Air entrainment: to ASTM C260/C260M. No other air entraining mixture shall be used
regardless of the type of cement selected, unless approved by the Engineer.
.2 Chemical admixtures, water-reducing agent, superplasticizer: to ASTM C494/C494M
and ASTM C1017/C1017M.
.3 Crystalline waterproofing: to Section 07 16 16 – Crystalline Waterproofing.
.4 Admixtures containing chlorides will not be permitted.

2.3 CONCRETE MIXES

.1 Provide concrete mixed in accordance with requirements of CSA A23.1 and this
specification Section. Pay all costs for the mix designs.
.2 Concrete design compressive strength and class of exposure as indicated on the Table on
the Drawings. Concrete mixes are to be designed to mitigate dry and plastic temperature
and shrinkage cracks.
.3 Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when accepted by the Engineer. If
accepted, the use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. Do
not use calcium chloride.
.4 Use set-retarding admixtures during hot weather only when accepted by the Engineer.

03 30 00.docx Stantec CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

RM of Headingley Section 03 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 4 of 10

.5 All admixtures are subject to acceptance by the Engineer. List all proposed admixtures in
mix design statement submission. Do not change or add admixtures to accepted design
mixes without the Engineer’s review and acceptance.
.6 Concrete delivered to site must be accompanied by a delivery slip in accordance with
CSA A23.1.
.7 Self-consolidating concrete mixes will not be permitted for use on this project.

2.4 CONCRETE CURING COMPOUND

.1 Chlorinated rubber type compound: conforming to CSA A23.1, Type 1.
.2 On coloured floors, wax-free curing, and sealing compound, acceptable product: Floor
Coat as manufactured by Master Builders Co. Ltd.
.3 Where waterproofing is to be applied, ensure adequate surface preparation of the concrete
for proper bonding.
.4 Concrete curing compounds shall be compliant to NSF/ANSI/CAN 61requirements for
potable water.
.5 Acceptable curing compounds include Dyton Superior Clear Cure VOC J7WB, ATLAS
Quantum-Cure NSF, and SpecChem E-Cure.

2.5 SLURRY MIX

.1 Slurry mix to have an excess of mortar omitting 20 to 50 percent of coarse aggregate
from the normal mix to achieve good flowing characteristics.

2.6 MIXING
.1 Ready-mixed concrete:
.1 Mix premixed or transit-mixed concrete according to CSA A23.1 and to ASTM
C94/C94M.
.2 Ensure that the concrete supplier has sufficient plant capacity and transporting
apparatus to provide delivery so that the interval between successive loads does
not exceed 15 minutes.
.2 Site-mixed concrete shall be in accordance with CSA A23.1.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

.1 Pre-installation meeting for cast-in-place concrete: at least one week prior to installation
of concrete works, the Contractor shall conduct a meeting with mix designer, batch plant
Quality Control Manager, Third Party Testing Agency Representative, concrete installers,
concrete finishers, waterstop installers, concrete curing applicators, concrete sealer
technical representative, reinforcing steel installers, floor coating applicators, installers of
work adjacent to or that penetrates the concrete works, and the Engineer to review the
following:

03 30 00.docx Stantec CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

RM of Headingley Section 03 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 5 of 10

.1 General project requirements.

.2 Contractor’s Quality Control Plan for each class of concrete.
.3 Contractor’s procedures prior, during, and following concrete placements.
.2 Provide agenda and meeting minutes. Distribute agenda to the attendees four days prior
to the pre-installation meeting. Distribute pre-installation meeting minutes within four
days of the meeting.
.3 Pay for all costs associated with the pre-installation conference excluding the Engineer
cost.

3.2 INSPECTION
.1 Immediately before concrete is placed, Contractor shall carefully inspect all forms in
accordance with Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forming and Accessories, to ensure that
they are properly placed, sufficiently rigid and tight, and that all reinforcing steel and
embedded parts are in the correct position and secured against movement during the
placing operation. All forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and material removed.
.2 The Engineer will inspect forms, foundations, reinforcing steel, construction joints,
mixing, conveying, placing equipment, and curing preparations before concreting.

3.3 PREPARATION
.1 Do not place concrete on soil that has been softened by mechanical disturbance or
moisture.
.2 Retighten forms at construction joints.
.3 Roughen, thoroughly remove foreign matter and laitance, and saturate the hardened
concrete at construction joints with water prior to concreting.
.4 Make suitable arrangements to prevent damage to fresh concrete by adverse weather
conditions, such as rain, wind, or extreme temperatures.
.5 Concrete shall not be cast against frozen ground, frozen concrete, or into frosted
formwork.
.6 Prepare all sleeves and ducts to be cast into concrete at the same time as the concrete
formwork to ensure that correct assembly, fit, and location is obtained.
.7 Check architectural, mechanical, and electrical Drawings for sleeves, inserts, etc.
.8 Set sleeves, ties, anchor bolts, pipe hangers, and other inserts and openings in concrete
floors and walls as required.

3.4 INSERTS
.1 Set hatch and sump frames, pipe, sleeves, ties, anchor bolts, pipe hangers, and other
inserts and openings in concrete floors and walls as required by other trades. Sleeves,
openings, etc., greater than 100 x 100 mm not indicated on Drawings must be approved
by the Engineer.
.2 No sleeves, ducts, pipes, or other openings shall pass through beams except where
expressly detailed on structural Drawings or approved by the Engineer.

03 30 00.docx Stantec CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

RM of Headingley Section 03 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 6 of 10

.3 Do not eliminate or displace reinforcement to accommodate hardware. If inserts cannot

be located as specified, obtain approval from the Engineer of all modifications before
placing of concrete.
.4 Check locations and sizes of sleeves, openings, etc., shown on structural Drawings and
on architectural, mechanical, and electrical Drawings.

3.5 PLACING OF CONCRETE

.1 Place concrete in accordance with CSA A23.1, and as specified herein.
.2 All formwork shall be cleaned of all debris, loose material, snow, and ice immediately
prior to pouring.
.3 Ensure proper placement and support of reinforcement and embedded material
immediately ahead of a pour.
.4 Do not temporarily displace reinforcement for convenience in placing concrete.
.5 Do not use wood or other temporary spreaders and spacers.
.6 Do not insert reinforcement into fresh concrete.
.7 Confine concrete in a suitable vertical drop pipe to within 1.0 m or less of the concrete in
place.
.8 Set screeds accurately for level surfaces or to maintain cambers as required.
.9 Ensure that concrete is adequately consolidated in the forms.
.10 Place concrete in such a manner that the concrete in the form is still plastic and can be
integrated with fresh concrete.
.11 To prevent segregation, deposit concrete in approximately horizontal layers of 300 to
450 mm thickness, as near as possible to its final position.

3.6 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

.1 Deliver, place, and cure concrete in hot or cold weather in accordance with the
requirements in CSA A23.1.

3.7 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCE

.1 Concrete work shall be carefully and accurately set out; true to the positioning, levels,
slopes, and dimensions shown on the Drawings and conforming to the following
tolerances:
.1 Sizes of member or thickness of slabs: + 6 mm, - 0 mm.
.2 Cover of concrete over reinforcement: ±3 mm.
.3 Variations from plumb: 6 mm in 3.0 m, 10 mm maximum.
.4 Variations from flat: 3 mm in 3.0 m, 6 mm maximum.
.2 If these tolerances are exceeded the Contractor may, at the discretion of the Engineer, be
required to remove and replace or to modify the placed concrete before acceptance. The

03 30 00.docx Stantec CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

RM of Headingley Section 03 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 7 of 10

costs incurred by the Engineer for such investigation, testing, or review of reconstruction
and the cost of reconstruction shall be borne by the Contractor.

3.8 JOINTS
.1 Construction and control joints shall be provided where required and as shown on the
Drawings or according to CSA A23.1.
.2 For joints in water retaining structures, the surface of hardened concrete shall be
thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter and laitance by sand blasting or bush hammer, and
shall be thoroughly wetted with water, but not saturated, and the forms shall be re-
tightened against the face of the hardened concrete before depositing additional concrete.
Any concrete splatter on reinforcing bars shall be removed by sand blasting.
.3 Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) waterstop shall be protected with suitable 12 mm thick
protection boards on both sides secured firmly together by mechanical clamps (i.e. c-
clamps) or other method acceptable to the Engineer during the sand blast cleaning
operations.
.4 Carefully finish all face edges exposed to view true to line and elevation. Apply
crystalline waterproofing agent to the hardened concrete immediately in advance of the
fresh concrete; see Section 07 16 16 – Crystalline Waterproofing.
.5 For horizontal construction joints, the concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by hand
trowel in and around the reinforcing bars and along both sides of the PVC waterstops.
.6 Make all construction and control joints in accordance with details shown on the
Drawings, layout to be submitted by Contractor for review by Engineer.
.7 For all walls joints to the base slab a slurry mix shall be placed over hardened concrete to
a depth of approximately 150 mm and shall be well vibrated to achieve maximum bond.
.8 Place beams monolithically with the floor system, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
.9 Allow at least two hours after placing concrete in supporting columns or walls before
placing in beams, girders, or slabs above.
.10 See typical details on the Drawings for isolation joints at columns and other locations.
.11 Maximum spacing between vertical wall joints shall not be more than 9.0 m and
maximum joint spacing for slabs shall not be more than 25.0 m.
.12 Construction joint layouts shown on the Drawings take precedence over above
requirements.

3.9 FINISHING
.1 Finishing to conform to CSA A23.1 and as specified herein.
.2 Finishing wall surfaces:
.1 Finish wall surfaces in accordance with CSA A23.1, Clause 7.9, Finishing
formed surfaces.
.2 Finishes of water retaining structures: smooth-form finish.

03 30 00.docx Stantec CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

RM of Headingley Section 03 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 8 of 10

.3 Finishes exposed to public view: smooth-form finish.

.4 Finishes not exposed to public view: rough-form finish.
.5 Patch surface defects in accordance with CSA A23.1, Clause 7.9.2.4, Surface
defects; for surfaces of water retaining structures also fill bugholes per note (2).
.3 Finishing concrete slab surfaces:
.1 Screeding, floating, and troweling shall be performed in accordance with CSA
A23.1, Clause 7.6, Finishing of concrete floor surfaces.
.2 Floor surfaces shall be finished to CSA A23.1, Table 21, Slab and Floor Finish
Classification, Class A.
.3 Walkways, driveways, landings, and slabs on grade shall receive a broomed
finish with regular corrugations not more than 3 mm deep.
.4 Troweled finish for service area floor slabs:
.1 After completion of floated surface finish, trowel to produce a dense
smooth finish.
.2 Follow with additional steel troweling to produce smooth burnished
surface.
.5 Workmanship for floor slabs:
.1 Steel trowel concrete slabs to be left exposed (Pumphouse main floor
slab).
.2 Smooth bull float finish for reservoir base slab and reservoir main floor
slab to be covered with green roof. Ridges created through finishing are
to be ground smooth.
.3 Where floor drains occur, floors shall be level around walls and have a
minimum 1% uniform pitch to drains, unless indicated otherwise on
Drawings.
.4 Concrete slabs to receive protective coating to be screeded off to true
lines and levels shown and left ready to receive finish.
.5 Concrete that is to receive protective coating shall be cleaned free of dirt,
oil, loose material, and laitance to the manufacturer’s requirements.

3.10 CURING
.1 Cure and protect freshly placed concrete in accordance with CSA A23.1 and as specified
herein.
.2 The following shall receive extended wet curing for a period of at least 7 calendar days:
.1 Floor slabs of water retaining structures: surface covered with canvas or other
satisfactory material and kept thoroughly and continuously wet with soaker
hoses.
.2 Walls of water retaining structures: leave forms in place and keep concrete wet
by pouring water between concrete and forms.

03 30 00.docx Stantec CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

RM of Headingley Section 03 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 9 of 10

.3 All other concrete shall receive moist curing for a period of at least seven calendar days.
One of the following methods shall be used as soon as the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent marring:
.1 Surface covered with canvas or other satisfactory material and kept thoroughly
and continuously wet with soaker hoses.
.2 A liquid membrane forming curing sealer, applied at the rate recommended by
the manufacturer. Curing sealer shall not be used on a surface where bond is
required for the finishes.
.3 Surfaces of concrete that are protected by formwork that is left in place for seven
calendar days, shall not require any additional curing (except as specified for hot
or cold weather). If the formwork is removed in less than seven calendar days,
the concrete shall receive moist curing as above.
.4 No concreting will be allowed until all materials required for the curing phase are on site
and ready for use.
.5 Concrete that is allowed to freeze or attain insufficient curing conditions shall be subject
to all necessary investigations and testing as deemed necessary by the Engineer and all
such concrete shall be removed and the portion reconstructed as directed by the Engineer,
at the Contractor’s cost.
.6 Supply and arrange for water for curing concrete.

3.11 FORM REMOVAL

.1 Forms shall not be removed until removal operations will cause no damage to concrete
surfaces.
.2 At the end of the curing and protection period, the temperature of the concrete shall be
reduced gradually at a rate meeting both the requirements of CSA A23.1 Table 20 for
allowable differential temperature in the concrete and ACI 306R, Table 5.1, for the
allowable rate of temperature change of the edges of the concrete until the outside air
temperature has been reached.
.3 Beam and slab soffit forms shall not be removed until sufficient strength has been
attained for support of the applied dead and live loads and to minimize deflections.
.4 See CSA A23.1, Clause 6.5, Forms, for specific requirements.

3.12 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

.1 Concrete not meeting the requirements of the specifications and Drawings will be
considered defective concrete.
.2 Concrete not conforming to the lines, details, and grades specified herein or as shown on
the Drawings shall be modified or replaced at the Contractor's expense and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. Finished lines, dimensions, and surfaces shall be correct and
true within tolerances specified herein and in Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Forming and
Accessories.
.3 Concrete not properly placed resulting in honeycombing and other defects shall be
repaired or replaced at the Contractor's expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

03 30 00.docx Stantec CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

RM of Headingley Section 03 30 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Page 10 of 10

3.13 REPAIR
.1 Allow Engineer to review concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of all formwork.
.2 Remove all exposed metal form ties, nails, and wires, break off fins and remove all loose
concrete.
.3 Any imperfect joints, voids, stone pockets, or other defective areas and tie holes, as
specified, shall at once be patched before the concrete is thoroughly dry. Defective areas
shall be chipped away to a depth of not less than 40 mm with sawcut edges perpendicular
or dovetail to the surface. The area to be repaired and a space at least 150 mm wide
entirely surrounding it shall be wetted to prevent absorption of water from the repair
mortar.
.4 Cure all repairs thoroughly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.5 Cracks in walls and floors of water retaining structures shall be repaired by epoxy
injection. Refer to Section 03 25 00, Concrete Accessories.

3.14 DAMPPROOFING AND WATERPROOFING

.1 Preparation of concrete surfaces for dampproofing and waterproofing shall conform to
CSA A23.1 and Section 07 11 13 – Bituminous Dampproofing.
.2 Waterproofing for water retaining structures shall be as per Section 07 16 16, Crystalline
Waterproofing.
.3 Application shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations.

3.15 CONCRETE SPECIALTIES

.1 Provide and install all concrete specialties as shown on the Drawings and as necessary to
complete the concrete work.
.2 Included are fibreboard expansion joint covers, water stop, and bond breakers.

END OF SECTION

03 30 00.docx Stantec CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

RM of Headingley Section 03 35 05
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE FLOOR HARDENING – DRY SHAKE
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: concrete placement, curing and finishing.
.2 Section 03 35 00 - Concrete Floor Sealing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Product data: manufacture's product data sheets identifying material, performance
characteristics, surface preparation, installation instructions.

1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Ensure work area is protected against rain and detrimental weather conditions.
.2 Maintain ambient temperature of not less than 10°C from 7 days before installation to at
least 48 hours after completion of work and maintain relative humidity not higher than
40% during same period. Maintain substrate temperature at 10°C minimum.
.3 Moisture: ensure concrete substrate is within moisture limits prescribed by flooring
manufacturer.
.4 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials.
.5 Ventilation:
.1 Provide continuous ventilation during and after coating applications.
.2 Ventilate enclosed spaces as required.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Non-metallic hardener (plain): premixed, dry shake surface hardener.
.1 Acceptable material: Sika Diamag 7; Target Non-Metallic; CPD Floor Hardener
Pre-Mix (Standard); Master Builders Mastercron; Sonneborn Harcol Redi-Mix;
Euclid Surflex TR..

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Verify that slab surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.2 APPLICATION
.1 Apply hardener in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2 Apply floor hardener aggregate at rate of 4.88 - 6.1 kg/m² for a "medium duty" hardened
surface.

03 35 05.docx Stantec CONCRETE FLOOR HARDENING

- DRY SHAKE
RM of Headingley Section 03 35 05
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE FLOOR HARDENING – DRY SHAKE
Page 2 of 2

.3 Protect finished installation until floor treatment has cured.

.4 Apply sealer coat as per manufacturer recommendations.

3.3 SCHEDULE
.1 Provide concrete floor hardener on all exposed concrete floors in rooms:
.1 Process Room
.2 Chemical Room
.3 Electrical Room
.2 Concrete hardener is not required on housekeeping pads / concrete curbs throughout plant
unless otherwise noted.

END OF SECTION

03 35 05.docx Stantec CONCRETE FLOOR HARDENING

- DRY SHAKE
RM of Headingley Section 03 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 This section specifies requirements for hydrostatic testing and disinfection for the below
ground concrete storage reservoir.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Current editions of reference standards shall be applicable.
.2 ACI 350.1-22, Specification for Tightness Testing of Environmental Engineering
Concrete Structures.
.3 AWWA-C652-11, Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities.

Part 2 Products

2.1 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY THE CONTRACTOR

.1 All equipment and material required for testing, flushing, and disinfection shall be
supplied by the Contractor as part of the work. This includes water for testing, flushing,
and disinfection.

2.2 CHLORINE
.1 Use liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite, or calcium hypochlorite.
.2 Refer to AWWA-B300 and B301, Standards for Hypochlorites and Liquid Chlorine.

2.3 WATER
.1 Water for hydrostatic testing and flushing/cleaning shall be:
.1 Hydrostatic testing before cleaning interior of reservoir tanks which will contain
potable water: water can be either potable water or clean water, not containing
chemicals or any substances likely to harm the work.
.2 Hydrostatic testing after cleaning interior of reservoir tanks which will contain
potable water: water shall be clean potable water.
.3 Water for flushing and cleaning of reservoir tanks which will contain potable
water shall be clean potable water.
.2 Potable water may be purchased from the Owner at the bulk water rate in effect at the
time of purchase. The bulk water rate for 2025 is $2.51 per cubic metre.

2.4 SAFETY
.1 The toxicity of any product should be investigated by the Contractor. The need for
ventilation when installing and required protective equipment, such as gloves, goggles,
and masks also should be checked prior to application.

03 90 00.docx Stantec HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION

RM of Headingley Section 03 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION
Page 2 of 3

Part 3 Execution

3.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTING

.1 Below ground concrete water retaining structures shall be subjected to hydrostatic testing
following installation.
.2 Each water retaining structure and compartment shall be watertight and all precautions
shall be taken, especially joint treatment, to construct watertight structures.
.3 Prior to filling compartments with water, ensure penetrations such as pipes, gates, and
below water level openings are watertight. All penetrations shall be completely watertight
prior to start of the hydrostatic testing.
.4 Hydrostatic testing shall be performed prior to dampproofing, backfilling of materials
against the walls, and prior to the installation of any specialty concrete coatings.
.5 Perform hydrostatic testing for each water retaining compartment. Hydrostatic testing
shall be performed in accordance with ACI 350.1, except as described in the following
clauses.
.6 Notify the Engineer at least two working days before commencing the hydrostatic test.
.7 Filling the structures in preparation of the hydrostatic test shall be performed only after
the floor, walls, and roof concrete have attained 100% of the design strength.
.8 Fill the structure to level indicated on the Drawings, the invert of the overflows, or to 300
mm from the top of the walls, whichever is greater, for a minimum of 72 hours prior to
the hydrostatic test to allow for full saturation of the concrete. Monitor water retaining
structure for visible leaks.
.9 Repair all leaking dry temperature and shrinkage cracks and dry temperature and
shrinkage cracks that appear damp and transfer moisture from the structures exterior
surfaces to a dry hand so as to stop all leakage and dampness to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Epoxy injection is an acceptable repair method; see Section 03 25 00 –
Concrete Accessories.
.10 The hydrostatic test duration shall be at least 48 hours. The rate of loss of water shall not
exceed 1/10 of 1% of the total volume per 24-hour period. There shall be no visible
moisture or wetness on areas that will be seen or backfilled.
.11 The Contractor shall supply, install, and remove a liquid level measuring device with a
sharp pointed metal probe with a locking or clamping screw. The device shall have a
scale graduated in millimetres.
.12 Locate and repair all leaks until all leakage is remedied and repeat the hydrostatic test for
the duration indicated following each repair operation, at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 DISINFECTION
.1 Disinfection on the below ground concrete storage reservoirs shall be in accordance with
AWWA-C652.
.2 Use AWWA Chlorination Method #1, #2, or #3 and submit details of proposed method to
the Engineer.

03 90 00.docx Stantec HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION

RM of Headingley Section 03 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION
Page 3 of 3

.3 De-chlorinate disinfection water and obtain approvals from the RM or local authorities
having jurisdiction before disposing of disinfection water.

END OF SECTION

03 90 00.docx Stantec HYDROSTATIC TESTING & DISINFECTION

DIVISION 05

METALS
RM of Headingley Section 05 12 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 This section specifies requirements for supply, fabrication, and installation of structural
steel.
.2 The work includes design, installation, and removal of any bracing or other measures
necessary to ensure stability of the steel framework during construction.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Canadian Government Standards Board (CGSB):
.1 CAN/CGSB 1.40, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer.
.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA):
.1 CSA S16-14, Design of Steel Structures.
.2 CSA W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
.3 CSA G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steels.
.3 ASTM International (ASTM):
.1 ASTM A123/A123M-17, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
.2 ASTM A153/A153M-16a, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware.
.3 ASTM F3125/F3125M-15a, Standard Specification for High Strength Structural
Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040
MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions.
.4 ASTM F1554-17e1, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and
105-ksi Yield Strength.
.5 ASTM A563-15, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
.6 ASTM F436/F436M-16, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
Inch and Metric Dimensions.
.7 ASTM A108-13, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-
Finished.
.4 Canadian Institute of Steel Construction (CISC)/Canadian Paint Manufacturer's
Association (CPMA):
.1 CISC/CPMA 1-73a, A Quick-Drying One-Coat Paint for Use on Structural Steel.
.2 CISC/CPMA 2-75, A Quick-drying primer for Use on Structural Steel.

1.3 DESIGN
.1 Design in accordance with Standards in Article 1.3.

05 12 00.docx Stantec STRUCTUAL STEEL FRAMING

RM of Headingley Section 05 12 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
Page 2 of 5

.2 Design all the temporary systems to maintain stability of the work at all phases of
construction.
.3 Design of all members and connections not detailed on Drawings to be detailed on a shop
drawing bearing the seal and signature of a Professional Engineer registered in the
Province of Manitoba.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit certificates for material supplied as requested by Engineer.
.2 Submit erection diagram and shop details for review by Engineer at least 10 days in
advance of fabrication.
.3 Complete shop fabrication and erection drawings shall be provided for all Work and
items.
.4 Provide separate layout plans and setting details for all bearing and attachment devices
supplied under this Section.
.5 Shop drawings to include details of all temporary bracing systems required for stability
during construction and shall show extent of prior work that is required to be in place for
temporary bracing system.
.6 Bracing and stability systems as shown on Drawings are for stability of the completed
structure and shall not be assumed as adequate for the various stages of construction.
.7 Before the placing of material orders, the Contractor shall submit for review by Engineer
sketch drawings showing general description of proposed fabrication scheme. This to
include general arrangement of plates or shapes, location of all shop and field splices, and
such other information as may be required by Engineer to permit an assessment of
acceptability of proposal.
.8 Shop drawings showing all details tp be prepared by Contractor and submitted for review
by Engineer prior to fabrication. Refer to Section 01300 – Submittals.
.9 Fabrication executed before review of shop drawings to be at Contractor's own risk.
.10 In addition to specific details, shop drawings to include the following items:
.1 Details of connections designed by Contractor.
.2 All dimensions shall be correct at 20°C unless otherwise shown.
.3 Weld procedure identification.
.4 All material splice locations.

1.5 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Refer to Section 01400 – Quality Control.

Part 2 Products

2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL

.1 Unless noted otherwise, steel to conform to the following.

05 12 00.docx Stantec STRUCTUAL STEEL FRAMING

RM of Headingley Section 05 12 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
Page 3 of 5

.2 Wide flange sections: to CSA G40.21, 350 W.

.3 Hollow structural sections: to CSA G40.21, 350W, Class C.
.4 Other steel sections and plates: to CSA G40.21, 300W.

2.2 BOLTS
.1 Bolts: to ASTM F3125.
.2 Anchor bolts: to ASTM F1554, Grade 36.
.3 Nuts: to ASTM A563.
.4 Washers: to ASTM F436.
.5 Studs: to ASTM A108.

2.3 WELDING
.1 All welding material: to CSA W59.

2.4 PRIMER
.1 Ensure compatibility of primer paint to Section 09 91 00 – Painting.
.2 Shop primer paint: to CISC/CPMA 1-73a for surfaces not to be top coated, to
CISC/CPMA 2-75 for surfaces to be top coated.

2.5 HOT DIP GALVANIZING

.1 Steel shapes: to ASTM A123M.
.2 Fasteners: to ASTM A153M.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Notify the Engineer in advance as required to allow inspection of fabrication (including
welding) and erection.
.2 Provide access to allow inspection of fit, welding, bolting and other aspects of the work.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION, PRIMING, AND PAINTING

.1 Unless otherwise noted, all steel components to be sandblast cleaned after fabrication in
accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Standard (SSPC) No. SP6. Essentially
this is a surface from which all oil, grease, dirt, rust, scale and foreign matter have been
completely removed except for slight shadows, streaks, or discolorations caused by rust
stain or mill scale oxide binder.
.2 Painting: to Section 09 91 00.
.3 Splice areas and areas in contact with concrete shall be sandblast cleaned but not painted
and shall be kept free from overspray.

05 12 00.docx Stantec STRUCTUAL STEEL FRAMING

RM of Headingley Section 05 12 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
Page 4 of 5

.4 Application conditions: to Section 09 91 00. Application of primer or paint must be at

temperature of not less than 5C for a period of not less than 12 hours to dry the paint.
During primer application and curing, all necessary means to be provided to assure that
members are protected against effects of weather. Primer not to be applied upon damp or
frosted surfaces.

3.3 FABRICATION
.1 Take field measurements as necessary to ensure that items fabricated in shop will fit
structure.
.2 Reinforce hanger holes or openings for pipes or ducts with steel plates sized and welded
in place to restore member to original design strength.
.3 Provide holes for attachment of other work only as acceptable to Engineer.

3.4 WELDING
.1 Shop Qualifications: Contractor to be fully approved by Canadian Welding Bureau
(CWB) as per CSA W47.1. Welding procedures shall be submitted for each type of weld
used in structure. Procedures to bear approval of Canadian Welding bureau and must also
be acceptable to Engineer prior to use on structure.
.2 Welder qualifications: only welders, welding operators, and tackers approved by
Canadian Welding Bureau in particular category are permitted to perform weldments.
Their qualifications must be current and be available for examination by Engineer.
.3 Welding Code: except as otherwise noted on the Drawings, all welding, cutting and
preparation to be to CSA W59.
.4 Cleaning: all weld areas must be clean and free of mill scale, dirt, grease, paint, etc., prior
to welding.
.5 Preheat material and enclose heated enclosures as required for all field welding or cutting
to maintain steel at temperatures above 10°C.
.6 Filler metals: low hydrogen filler, fluxes, and low hydrogen welding practices are to be
used throughout. Low hydrogen covering and flux to be protected and stored as specified
by CSA W59.
.7 Automatic welding process: all flanges and web butt joints and all stiffener to web fillet
welds shall be made by an approved semi or fully automatic submerged arc process. All
webs to flange fillet welds shall be made by an approved fully automatic submerged
process. These weld areas to be clean, free of mill scale, dirt, grease, etc., and be
preheated as required, just prior to welding.
.8 Tack and temporary welds: tack and temporary welds are not allowed unless they are to
be incorporated in final weld.
.9 Methods of weld repair: repair procedures for unsatisfactory welds must be submitted for
acceptance by Engineer prior to work commencing.
.10 Arc strikes: arc strikes shall not be permitted. In event of accidental arc strikes,
Contractor to submit to Engineer for review his/her proposed repair procedure. Repair
procedure shall include complete grinding out of crater produced by arc strike. These
areas to be examined by Engineer to ensure complete removal of metal in affected area.

05 12 00.docx Stantec STRUCTUAL STEEL FRAMING

RM of Headingley Section 05 12 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
Page 5 of 5

.11 Grinding of welds: welds at web members to chord members to be ground flush in all
locations exposed to view. All other welds ground to CSA W59.

3.5 MATERIAL SPLICES

.1 Additional splices, other than those shown on details, will require review by Engineer.
Contractor shall bear the cost of inspection of these splices.

3.6 HANDLING AND STORAGE

.1 All lifting and handling shall be done using devices that do not mark damage, or distort
assemblies or members in any way. Girders shall be stored upright, supported on
sufficient skids and safely shored to maintain proper section without buckling, twisting,
or in any damage or misalign material.

3.7 APPROVAL OF ERECTION SCHEME

.1 Before starting Work of erection, Contractor shall inform Engineer fully in writing as to
method of erection he/she proposes to follow and amount and character of equipment
he/she proposes to use which shall be subject to review by Engineer. Engineer's review
shall not be considered as relieving Contractor of responsibility for safety of his/her
methods or equipment, nor from carrying out work in full accordance with plans and
specifications. No work to be done until such review by Engineer has been performed.
.2 Erect to CSA S16.
.3 Touch up prime painting for complete coverage including all field connections.
.4 Provide details of blocking for bearings, where necessary to restrain movements due to
horizontal forces and/or gravity effects.
.5 Provide details of grouting procedures including design mix and aggregate gradation of
grout, or specifications for other materials, proposed for setting anchor bolts and/or
constructing grout pads. Non-metallic non-shrink grout shall be used.
.6 Carry out field measurements of constructed substructure.
.7 Bearing and anchorage:
.1 Bearing plates shall not be placed upon bearing areas that are improperly
finished, deformed, or irregular.
.2 Bearing plates shall be set level and in exact position.
.3 Contractor to accurately set anchor bolts, except where bolts are cast into
concrete; coordinate correct locations.
.4 When bearings are employed in conjunction with grout pockets in substructure,
bearings to be set accurately on steel shims and grouted as detailed on Drawings
after erection has been completed.

END OF SECTION

05 12 00.docx Stantec STRUCTUAL STEEL FRAMING

RM of Headingley Section 05 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 1 of 7

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 This section specifies requirements for design, supply, fabrication, finishing, and
installation of miscellaneous steel items.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
.1 ASTM A36/A36M-14, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
.2 ASTM A53/A53M-12, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless.
.3 ASTM A108-13, Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-
Finished.
.4 ASTM A123/A123M-17, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
.5 ASTM A153/A153M-16a, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware.
.6 ASTM A167-
.7 ASTM A209-03 (2017), Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon-
Molybdenum Alloy-Steel Boiler and Superheater Tubes.
.8 ASTM A307-14e1, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi
Tensile.
.9 ASTM A563-15, Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
.10 ASTM A780/A780M 09 (2015), Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-
Dip Galvanized Coatings.
.11 ASTM B221-14, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.
.12 ASTM B632/B632M-15, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Rolled
Tread Plate.
.13 ASTM F436/F436M-16, Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers
Inch and Metric Dimensions.
.14 ASTM F1554-17e1, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and
105-ksi Yield Strength.
.15 ASTM F3125/F3125M-15a, Standard Specification for High Strength Structural
Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040
MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions.
.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):
.1 CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ready-Mixed, Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA):
.1 CSA S16-14, Design of Steel Structures.
.2 CSA G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steels.
.3 CSA W48-18, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding.
.4 CSA W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
.5 CSA S157-17/S157.1-17, Strength design in aluminum / Commentary on CSA
S157-17, Strength design in aluminum.

05 50 00.docx Stantec METAL FABRICATIONS

RM of Headingley Section 05 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 2 of 7

.5 National Building Code of Canada 2015 (NBC).

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Details and specifications are intended to indicate the general character and extent of
metal fabrications and do not attempt to indicate all methods of construction.
.2 Fabricate and install metal fabrications to withstand all stresses encountered in normal
use. Unless specified or noted otherwise, all imposed live loads shall be in accordance
with NBC.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Employ tradesmen skilled in this trade and proficient in use of various materials
specified.
.2 Perform work in accordance with material manufacturer’s instructions.
.3 Refer to Section 01 45 00 - Quality Assurance.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit detailed shop drawings for all metal fabrications, showing fabrication and
erection details. Design all connections required. Shop drawings to bear seal and
signature of a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Manitoba.
.3 Shop drawings: indicate materials, core thickness, finishes, connections, joints, method of
anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details and accessories. Indicate
field measurements on shop drawings.
.4 Submit certificates for materials supplied if requested by Engineer.
.5 Submit samples of grating, handrail, and ladders for review by Engineer.
.6 Submit details and shop drawings for review by Engineer at least 10 days in advance of
fabrication.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING

.1 Deliver items on site in a safe manner.
.2 Deliver items in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work.
.3 Deliver products to the site in the largest practical sections. Tag and mark items for
identification.
.4 Deliver items to be built in adjoining construction at proper time.
.5 Store items on site under cover in positions to ensure that no bending, warping, or
marring takes place.
.6 Prevent staining by concrete, mortar, plaster, oil, grease, or other foreign substances.
.7 Do not paint or place crayon or other markings on exposed surfaces.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Give timely and accurate instructions to other trades for locations, levels, holes,
connections of anchors, sleeves, and frames.
05 50 00.docx Stantec METAL FABRICATIONS
RM of Headingley Section 05 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 3 of 7

.2 Examine site conditions and take site measurements to ensure accurate and proper fitting,
clear of obstructions.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Steel sections and plates: to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W.
.2 Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M, Type S, Grade B, weight class specified by item,
galvanized finish, of sizes indicated.
.3 Steel hollow structural sections: to CSA G40.21 grade 350 W.
.4 Stainless steel plates, sheet and strip: to ASTM A167, Type 316 with AISI No.4 finish
unless otherwise indicated.
.5 Welding materials: to CSA W59.
.6 Welding electrodes: to CSA W48 Series.
.7 Bolts and anchor bolts: to ASTM A307.
.8 Epoxy grout: multi-component epoxy grout with high bond strength for anchoring bolts,
in concrete and masonry.
.9 Aluminum extruded bars and shapes: ASTM B221, alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 for bearing
bars of gratings and shapes and 6061-T6 for grating cross bars.
.10 Aluminum-alloy rolled tread plate: ASTM B632, alloy 6061-T4 for treads and 6061-T6
for platforms; conform to ASTM A209.

2.2 FASTENINGS AND ANCHOR BOLTS

.1 Nuts, bolts, washers, rivets, and screws to be stainless steel: Type 316 ELC.
.2 For structural steel use high strength nuts, bolts, washers, etc.: to ASTM F3125M.
.3 All fasteners submerged in water: stainless steel Type 316 ELC.
.4 For anchors or fastening required to fix equipment after concrete has been poured, use
anchorage in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.
.5 Provide angles, brackets, inserts, bolts, frames, and all other items required to fasten
metalwork to concrete, to metal framing, or other parts of the structure.

2.3 CORROSION PROTECTION

.1 Conform to Section 099100 - Painting, for shop priming.
.2 Hot dip galvanize all ferrous metal fixings and miscellaneous parts, including hangers,
bolts, nuts and washers.
.1 Shapes: to ASTM A123M.
.2 Fasteners: to ASTM A153M.

2.4 GROUT
.1 Use pre-mixed non-shrink non-metallic grout.

05 50 00.docx Stantec METAL FABRICATIONS

RM of Headingley Section 05 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 4 of 7

2.5 ALUMINUM HATCHES

.1 Interior and exterior hatches to be as detailed on the Drawings, A-Post A-Series Hatches
or approved equal.
.2 Exterior hatch covers to be as detailed on the Drawings.

2.6 ALUMINUM HANDHOLDS

.1 Aluminum removable ladder handholds to be as detailed on the Drawings.

2.7 STEEL CHECKERPLATE

.1 Covers and frames: hot dip galvanized to ASTM A123M.
.2 Checkerplate: raised diamond pattern.
.3 Construct the frames with steel structural angles or channels, mitred at the corners,
complete with anchor lugs, and flat surround. Fit covers with lifting handles, padlock,
shackle, and limit chain.
.4 Design tread plates for loads and limitation of deflection as specified for steel grating.
.5 Design loads as per the Drawings.
.6 Minimum thickness 6 mm not including raised diamond lugs.

2.8 STEEL HAND RAILINGS

.1 Circular (steel) pipe: to CSA G40.21, 300W).
.2 Hot dip galvanized steel construction to ASTM A123M.
.3 Top and bottom rails 42 mm diameter I.P.S. Schedule 40, 4 mm wall thickness.
.4 Post 42 mm diameter steel tubing, 4 mm wall thickness.
.5 Submit shop drawings of handrails.

2.9 SAFETY CHAINS

.1 Removable 5 mm proof chain 13 mm x 29 mm center to center oval shaped 316 SS
stainless steel links, snaphooks, and eyes unless noted otherwise.

2.10 LIFTING HOOKS AND RAIL SUPPORTS

.1 According to details on Drawings.
.2 Hot dip galvanized steel construction to ASTM A123M and ASTM A153M.
.3 Submit shop drawings.

2.11 FABRICATION
.1 Fabricate work square, true, straight, and accurate to required size, with joints closely
fitted and properly secured.
.2 Use self-tapping shake-proof flat headed screws on items requiring assembly by screws
or as indicated.
.3 Where possible fit work and shop assemble ready for erection.

05 50 00.docx Stantec METAL FABRICATIONS

RM of Headingley Section 05 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 5 of 7

.4 Ensure exposed welds are continuous and smooth for length of each joint; file or grind
exposed welds smooth and flush as required.
.5 Remove and grind smooth burrs, filings, sharp protrusions, and other projections from
metal fabrications to prevent possible injury. Correct dangerous or potentially harmful
installations.

2.12 FINISHES
.1 Galvanizing: hot dipped galvanizing to ASTM A123M for shapes and ASTM A153 for
fasteners.
.2 Zinc primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181.

2.13 BOOT SCAPER

.1 Refer to detail on drawings.

2.14 PIPE BOLLARDS

.1 Schedule 40 steel pipe.
.2 Yellow HDPE bollard cover with white reflective tape.

2.15 ALL OTHER MISCELLANEOUS

.1 All other miscellaneous items as shown on Drawings shall be hot dip galvanized steel
unless otherwise specified or shown.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 ERECTION
.1 Do steel welding work in accordance with CSA W47 & W59 unless specified otherwise.
.2 Erect metalwork in accordance with reviewed shop drawings, square, plumb, straight,
and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections.
.3 Provide suitable means of anchorage acceptable to Engineer such as dowels, anchor clips,
bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, and toggles.
.4 Secure wall mounted items securely and rigidly in place as follows:
.1 Stud walls: screws into solid backing. Do not use toggle bolts for stud walls.
.2 Hollow masonry: toggle bolts.
.3 Solid masonry, concrete, and stone: bolts and expansion anchors.
.5 Grout under base plates with non-shrink gout.
.6 Exposed fastening devices to match finish and be compatible with material through
which they pass.
.7 Provide components for building by other sections in accordance with shop drawings and
schedule.
.8 Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades
together with setting templates.
.9 Make field connections with bolts or welds to CSA S16.

05 50 00.docx Stantec METAL FABRICATIONS

RM of Headingley Section 05 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 6 of 7

.10 Ensure exposed welds are continuous and smooth for length of each joint; file or grind
exposed welds smooth and flush as required.
.11 Touch-up rivets, field welds, bolts, and burnt or scratched surfaces after completion of
erection with primer.
.12 Touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc primer where burned by field welding.

3.2 PIPE BOLLARDS

.1 Set pipe level and plumb into reinforced concrete footing. Fill pipe with concrete and
round over concrete at top of pipe.
.2 Concrete: exposure class F-2 to Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete; reinforcing to
Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing.

3.3 PIT COVERS AND FRAMES

.1 Set top of frame flush with adjacent concrete surface.
.2 Install covers.

3.4 INSPECTION
.1 Notify Engineer to allow inspection of fit, welding, bolting, and other items.
.2 Take field measurements as necessary to ensure proper fit of miscellaneous metal items
into structures.

3.5 FABRICATION
.1 Perform steel welding according to CSA W47 & W59.
.2 Trim and bevel ends and other items to enable satisfactory welding.
.3 Keep painting back from areas requiring welding after fabrication.

3.6 FINISHING
.1 Apply touch up paint for galvanized metal.
.2 Clean and touch up shop primer after installation.
.3 Painting for finishing details: refer to Section 09 90 00.

3.7 FASTENING AND ANCHORING

.1 Cast anchor bolts in concrete as shown on Drawings.
.2 Do not use self-drilling anchors where cast-in anchor bolts are specified.

3.8 INSTALLATION OF HANDRAIL

.1 Fix welded steel handrailing to the locations shown on Drawings.
.2 Anchor post base plates to concrete floor with self-drilling S.S. anchor bolts. Adjust
alignment and elevation of posts and grout in bases with specified grout.
.3 Provide continuous top rail across top of posts and fit bottom rail between posts.
Maximum spacing between posts 1.4 m. Set top rail 1050 mm above concrete and bottom
rail 525 mm above concrete unless otherwise indicated. Joint railings as required.
05 50 00.docx Stantec METAL FABRICATIONS
RM of Headingley Section 05 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL FABRICATIONS
Page 7 of 7

.4 Grind, polish, and buff welds to a smooth even finish. Ensure overall finish of
handrailing is even prior to painting. Restrict face width of weld and grinding to 30 mm.
.5 Provide handrailing as detailed on Drawings and provide handrail posts at every change
in direction.
.6 Where posts are to be supported on metal members such as beams or plates, weld posts to
steel plates and secure plates with stainless steel bolts. Place a neoprene gasket between
ferrous and non-ferrous components.
.7 Removable posts and handrail sections as detailed on Drawings.
.8 Set posts vertical and in line, one with others, both in line of railings and structure. Erect
rails horizontal without wave or bend in any direction to configuration exactly fitting
supporting structures.
.9 Handrail: protect steel handrailing during fabrication, wrap with kraft paper during
transportation and installation. Maintain protection until completion of project. Replace
damaged handrail at Contractor's expense.

3.9 INSTALLATION OF GRATING

.1 Clip panels together with sufficient clips to prevent differential movement panel to panel
when subjected to moving loads.
.2 Where appropriate, support gratings on framing angles set into concrete.
.3 Where a number of panels are laid side by side, line up the carrier or spacer bars to
preserve a continuous appearance.
.4 Provide cut outs required for pipes, conduits, valves, and other equipment and band with
bars having same thickness as bearing bars. Arrange cut outs to allow any grating section
to be removed without disturbing item passing through or adjacent to grating sections.

3.10 CHECKERPLATE
.1 Provide checkerplate covers and frames where shown on Drawings.
.2 Frames to consist of angle mitred at corners, complete with anchors and packing bars.
Covers to be fitted with lifting handles and neoprene gaskets.

3.11 REMOVABLE SAFETY CHAINS

.1 Removable safety chains shall be complete with approved snap hooks fastened at each
end to posts, all in stainless steel 316.
.2 Provide 20 mm diameter eyes fixed on posts.

END OF SECTION

05 50 00.docx Stantec METAL FABRICATIONS

RM of Headingley Section 05 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL STAIR NOSINGS
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY
.1 Section includes:
.1 Single and two component (replaceable) safety stair nosing’s.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete

1.3 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Shop Drawings/Product Data:
.1 Submit shop drawings or manufacturer's product data sheets for all items.
.2 Indicate manufacturer, product description or model/catalogue numbers, sizes,
quantities, materials and finishes, accessories, options and installation details.
Indicate requirements for related work.
.3 For items required mechanical or electrical services indicated location of service
rough-ins.
.4
.3 Samples:
.1 Submit samples for individual products as specified in this section.
.2 Submit samples for items requiring colour selection by Consultant. Submit two
representative samples indicating manufacturer's full colour range for colour
selection by Consultant.
.4 Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2 Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data for each specified item for
incorporation into maintenance manual.
.3 Warranties: Submit manufacturer's warranties.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section [01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements] [and] [with manufacturer's written instructions].
.2 Store products in manufacturer's labeled packaging until ready for installation.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Comply with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.

05 55 00.docx Stantec METAL STAIR NOSINGS

RM of Headingley Section 05 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL STAIR NOSINGS
Page 2 of 3

Part 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
.1 Acceptable Manufacturers:
.1 Wooster Products Inc.; 100 Spruce Street, PO Box 6005, Wooster, Ohio 44691;
Tel.: 800-321-4936; URL: http://www.woosterproducts.com

2.2 SAFETY STAIR NOSING’S

.1 Single stage, heat treated, corrosion resistant, extruded aluminum base with inset
diamond hard aluminum oxide non-slip filler, with colour as selected by Consultant from
manufacturers full range.
.2 Acceptable Products:
.1 For Cast-In-Place Concrete or Steel Pan Concrete Filled Stairs:
.1 Single Component Supergrit, Type 630B
.3 Material:
.1 6063-T5 extruded aluminum.
.2 Filler: ≥ 65% virgin grain Aluminum Oxide (AL2O3) abrasive.
.4 Finish (Aluminum): Satin lacquered.
.5 Colour (Grit): SY-1 Safety yellow.
.6 Attachment:
.1 Fresh Poured Concrete: Concealed, concrete anchors for setting in concrete.
.2 Cured Concrete: Tapcon screws or screw and expansion shield.
.3 Wood: Wood machine screws for attaching to wood.
.4 For screw attachment provide safety treads/strips with factory drilled and
countersunk holes located 75 mm in from each end and at approximately 300 mm
centres.
.7 Nosing Lengths:
.1 Cast-in-place concrete stairs: full length of tread less 75 mm each end.
.2 Concrete Filled Steel Pan Stairs: Full length of tread (stinger to stringer) less 3
mm clearance each side.
.3 Provide in one piece up to 2 440 mm to 3 050 mm lengths.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including
product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.
.2 Verify site conditions prior to installation.
.4 Install and secure items rigidly in place in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and
manufacturers printed instructions and templates, except where indicated otherwise.
.5 File smooth or burr smooth exposed sharp edges and corners.
.6 Finish safety nosing flush with scheduled finish of traffic surface.

05 55 00.docx Stantec METAL STAIR NOSINGS

RM of Headingley Section 05 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL STAIR NOSINGS
Page 3 of 3

3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

.1 At completion of installation test and adjust specialties for proper function.
.2 Clean materials of dust, dirt and other markings using cleaning agents recommended by
manufacturer.

3.3 SCHEDULE
.1 Safety Stair Nosing’s:
.1 Single Component Type: As indicated on Drawings.

END OF SECTION

05 55 00.docx Stantec METAL STAIR NOSINGS

DIVISION 06

WOOD, PLASTICS, AND

COMPOSITES
RM of Headingley Section 06 10 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 This section specifies requirements for supply and installation of rough carpentry items.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA):
.1 CSA B111-1974 (R2003), Wire Nails, spike, and Staples.
.2 CSA O141-05 (R2014), Softwood Lumber.
.3 CSA O151-17, Canadian Softwood Plywood.
.2 National Lumber Grades Authority (NLGA):
.1 Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Lumber identification: by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber
Standards Accreditation Board.
.2 Plywood in accordance with CSA standards.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Lumber: unless specified otherwise, softwood, S4S, moisture content 19% (S-dry) or less
in accordance with CSA O141 and NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber.
.1 Furring, blocking, nailing strips: SPF species, "Standard" or better grade.
.2 Canadian softwood plywood (CSP): to CSA 0151, standard construction.
.3 Nails, spikes, and staples: to CSA B111 and NBC requirements, hot dip galvanized
finish.
.4 Proprietary fasteners: toggle bolts, expansion shields and lag bolts, and screws and lead
plugs, as recommended for purpose by manufacturer, corrosion resistant finish.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Comply with requirements of NBC, Part 9. Install members true to line, levels, and
elevations. Space uniformly. Construct continuous members from pieces of longest
practical length.
.2 Frame, anchor, fasten, tie, and brace members to provide necessary strength and rigidity.
.3 Countersink bolts where necessary to provide clearance for other work. Use fastenings of
following types, except where specific type is indicated:
.1 To hollow masonry, panel surfaces use toggle bolt.
.2 To solid masonry and concrete use expansion shield with lag screw, lead plug
with wood screw.

06 10 00.docx Stantec ROUGH CARPENTRY

RM of Headingley Section 06 10 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ROUGH CARPENTRY
Page 2 of 2

.3 To structural steel use bolts through drilled hole, welded stud-bolts or power
driven self-drilling screws, welded stud-bolts, or explosive actuated stud-bolts.

3.2 EQUIPMENT BACKBOARDS

.1 Plywood backboards: CSP, veneer core, G1S grade, square edge, 16 mm thick.
.2 Install plywood backboards on 38 mm x 38 mm wood strapping along vertical edges and
at 600 mm on centre for large boards.

END OF SECTION

06 10 00.docx Stantec ROUGH CARPENTRY

RM of Headingley Section 06 80 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LADDERS
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY
.1 Provide fabricated fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ladders, complete and in place, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.2 REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS, REGULATIONS, CODES, AND

STANDARDS
.1 Reference Specifications
.1 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
.2 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
.2 Reference Code and Regulations
.1 The Manitoba Building Code and Manitoba Workplace Safety and Health
Regulations apply to this work.
.3 Reference Standards
.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
.1 ANSI 14.3, Standard for Ladders – Fixed – Safety Requirements
.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1 ASTM D570, Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
.2 ASTM D638, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
.3 ASTM D 696, Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal
Expansion of Plastics Between −30°C and 30°C with a Vitreous Silica
Dilatometer
.4 ASTM D790, Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of
Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials
.5 ASTM D2344, Standard Test Method for Short-Beam Strength of
Polymer Matrix Composite Materials and Their Laminates
.6 ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics
of Building Materials
.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CAN/CGSB-41.22-93, Fibreglass-Reinforced Plastic Corrosion-
Resistant Equipment.
.4 NSF International (NSF)
.1 NSF/ANSI/CAN 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health
Effects
.5 Office of Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
.1 OSHA 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards

1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS

.1 Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00– Submittal Procedures

06 80 00.docx Stantec FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LADDERS

RM of Headingley Section 06 80 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LADDERS
Page 2 of 5

.2 Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings for every FRP item. Include plans, elevations, and
profiles that clearly show material sizes, types, styles, part or catalog numbers. Drawings
shall include complete details for the fabrication and erection of components, including
location, dimensions, lengths, joining method, type and size of fasteners, clip angles,
member sizes, and connection details.
.3 Layout drawings for grating shall show the direction of span, type and depth of grating,
size and shape of grating panels, seat angle details, and details of grating hold down
fasteners.
.4 Product Literature: Manufacturer's published literature including structural design data,
structural properties, and load and deflection tables for each style and depth of grating,
corrosion resistance tables, certificates of compliance, test reports (as applicable),
anchoring system allowable load tables and ICBO reports.
.5 Calculations: Structural calculations shall be submitted for stairs, stair support systems,
handrails, railing systems, brackets, support flanges, ladders, and fasteners or anchors.
Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the
Province of Manitoba.
.6 Samples: Samples of each type of product shall be submitted if requested by the
Engineer.
.7 Certification: The Contractor shall certify on the Shop Drawings that items and
fabrications have been manufactured of materials suitable for potable water usage per
NSF 61, and that fabricated items are of sufficient strength to serve their intended
function without undue distortion or deflection.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Manufacturer's Qualifications: Items provided under this Section shall be furnished only
by manufacturers having experience in the manufacture of similar products, with a record
of 5 similar successful installations in the last 5 years.
.2 Manufacturer shall offer a 3-year limited warranty on all FRP products against defects in
materials and workmanship.
.3 Manufacturer shall submit an Inspection and Test Plan for approval to the engineer
.4 Quality: Fiberglass items shall be constructed of new, first-class, commercial-quality,
fiberglass fabric-reinforced polyester or vinyl ester resin laminate material of the
strength, thickness, and dimensions indicated, using the matched die-molded method.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 FRP items shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in quantities,
qualities, properties, arrangements, and dimensions as necessary to meet the design
requirements and dimensions indicated.
.2 Fiberglass reinforcement shall be continuous roving, continuous strand mat, and
surfacing veil or a combination thereof in sufficient quantities for the application and
physical properties required.

06 80 00.docx Stantec FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LADDERS

RM of Headingley Section 06 80 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LADDERS
Page 3 of 5

.3 Unless indicated otherwise, a polyester resin shall be utilized that meets ANSI/NSF
Standard 61 certified for potable water applications and with chemical formulations as
necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and other physical properties as
required. A synthetic surface veil shall be the outermost layer covering the exterior
surface.
.4 Finished surfaces of FRP items and fabrications shall be smooth, resin-rich, free of voids,
and without dry spots, cracks, crazes, or unreinforced areas. Glass fibers shall be well
covered with resin to protect against exposure from wear or weathering.
.5 Resin shall include an ultraviolet (UV) inhibitor additive. FRP products located in
exterior locations exposed to the weather or in UV facilities shall also have an additional
1-mil UV-resistant coating applied.
.6 All FRP products shall have a tested flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E84 -
Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
.7 Supports and Fasteners: The Contractor shall provide bolts, anchor bolts, nuts, washers,
and supports as required for the Work of this Section in accordance with the requirements
of the manufacturers of the items. Bolts, anchor bolts, washers, and supports shall be
Type 316 stainless steel. Concrete anchor systems shall be in accordance with Section 05
50 00 – Metal Fabrications.
.8 Cut or machined edges, holes, scratches, gouges, and abrasions shall be sealed with a
resin compatible with the resin matrix used in the original item.

2.2 LADDERS
.1 All ladder side rails, rungs, ladder mounting brackets are to be FRP structural shapes
manufactured by the pultrusion process. Wall Brackets are of FRP Molded Construction
using the hand layup process in accordance with CAN/CGSB 41.22-93 or shall be
constructed out of 316 Stainless Steel.
.2 The side rails shall be 2” x 2” x 0.156” (50 x 50 x 4mm) square tube. The rungs shall be
pultruded 1-1/4” (32 mm) diameter FRP fluted tube to provide a non-slip surface. Rungs
that are gritted as a secondary operation shall not be permitted.
.3 All structural shapes shall be composed of fiberglass reinforcement and resin in qualities,
quantities, properties, arrangements and dimensions as necessary to meet the design
requirements and dimensions as specified in the Contract Documents.
.4 All ladder components are to be integrally pigmented yellow. All wall and floor mount
brackets shall be gray.
.5 All metal fasteners and components shall be 316 stainless steel without exception.
.6 Type 316 stainless steel bolts shall be provided for attaching ladder wall brackets to the
ladder.
.7 All rungs shall penetrate the wall of the tube side rails and shall be connected to the rails
with both epoxy and rivets to provide both a chemical and mechanical lock, respectively.
.8 Pultruded structural shapes used in the ladder system are to have the minimum
longitudinal mechanical properties listed below:

Property ASTM Method Minimum Value Units

Tensile Stress D638 30,000 psi

06 80 00.docx Stantec FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LADDERS
RM of Headingley Section 06 80 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LADDERS
Page 4 of 5

Tensile Modulus D638 2.5 x 106 psi

Flexural Stress D790 30,000 psi

Flexural Modulus D790 1.8 x 106 psi

Flexural Modulus (Full Section) N/A 2.8 x 106 Psi

Short Beam Shear (Traverse) D2344 4,500 psi

Shear Modulus (Traverse) N/A 4.5 x 105 psi

Coefficient of Thermal Expansion D696 8.0 x 10-6 in/in/°F

Flame Spread E84 25 or less N/A

.9 Wall brackets connecting the ladder to the wall shall be spaced at a maximum of 5-feet
(1525 mm) on centers.
.10 Loading Criterion: The completed ladder and cage installation shall meet the load
requirements as set forth in OSHA 1910 (latest edition) with a minimum factor of safety
on loading of 2.0. The ladder shall also be capable of supporting an ultimate concentrated
vertical load of 1,200 pounds applied at the mid-span of the rung. The ladder
manufacturer shall be required to provide supporting test data for rung capacity.
.11 The design and construction of the ladder shall meet the requirements of ANSI Standard
14.3, Standard for Ladders – Fixed – Safety Requirements.
.12 Manufacturers:
.1 Structural Composite Technologies Ltd.
.2 Strongwell
.3 Fibergrate Composite Structures Inc.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1 Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken
pallets, packages, containers, or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturer.
Adhesives, resins, catalysts, and hardeners shall be crated or boxed separately.
.2 Storage of Products: Materials shall be carefully handled to protect them from abrasion,
cracking, chipping, twisting, deformations, and other types of damage. Store items in an
enclosed area and free from contact with soil and water. Store adhesives, resins, catalysts,
and hardeners in dry indoor storage facilities between 70 and 85 degrees F (21 to 29
degrees C). There shall be labels on the outside of the boxes indicating that the products
shall be stored as described above.

3.2 GENERAL
.1 FRP products shall meet the dimensional requirements and tolerances indicated. The
Contractor shall verify measurements and determine correct size and locations of
required holes or cutouts from field dimensions before fabrication.
.2 FRP products shall be fabricated free from warps, twists, or other defects that affect
appearance and serviceability.

06 80 00.docx Stantec FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LADDERS

RM of Headingley Section 06 80 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LADDERS
Page 5 of 5

.3 The Contractor shall give ample notice prior to the beginning of any fabrication work so
that the Engineer can perform shop inspections.
.4 The Contractor shall install FRP structures in accordance with the manufacturer’s
assembly drawings. Field cut and drill FRP products with carbide or diamond tipped bits
and blades. Seal cut or drilled surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
Follow manufacturer’s instructions when cutting or drilling fiberglass products or using
resin products.
.5 Bonding of FRP items shall be through the use of an epoxy adhesive recommended by
the manufacturer of the particular item. The surfaces to be bonded shall be solvent
cleaned and abraded sufficiently to remove the surface gloss and to remove any mold
release agent or other contaminants which may interfere with proper bonding. The
adhesive manufacturer's instructions and recommendations shall be followed. The items
bonded shall not be stressed until at least 48 hours have passed.

3.3 LADDERS
.1 All ladders shall be designed and laid out in strict accordance with the Manitoba Building
Code, Manitoba Workplace Safety and Health Regulations, and OSHA 1910.
.2 Ladders shall be fully shop assembled.
.3 All cut or machined edges, holes and notches shall be sealed to provide maximum
corrosion resistance. All field fabricated cuts shall be coated similarly by the contractor in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION
.1 The contractor shall install the ladder in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
assembly drawing and installation manual.
.2 The manufacturer’s safety data sheets (SDS) shall be followed when cutting or drilling
fiberglass products or using resin products and adequate ventilation shall be provided.

END OF SECTION

06 80 00.docx Stantec FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC LADDERS

DIVISION 07

THERMAL AND MOISTURE

PROTECTION
RM of Headingley Section 07 11 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 31 23 33 - Excavating and Backfilling: backfilling at perimeter foundations and
grade beams.
.2 Section 07 21 13 - Board Insulation: insulation on perimeter foundations and grade
beams below grade.
.3 Section 07 21 14 - Concrete Faced Board Insulation: insulation on perimeter foundations
and grade beams above grade.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1 ASTM D41, Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and
Waterproofing.
.2 ASTM D1227, Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for Roofing.
.3 ASTM D4479, Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos-Free.
.4 ASTM D4586, Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos Free.
.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CGSB 37-GP-9, Primer, Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing, Dampproofing
and Waterproofing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets WHMIS acceptable to Labour
Canada, and Health and Welfare Canada.
.3 Product data: submit product data sheets for bituminous dampproofing products. Include
manufacturer and product name, product characteristics, performance criteria, application
methods, product limitations.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING

.1 Deliver, handle, store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.

1.5 PROJECT/SITE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Temperature, relative humidity, moisture content:
.1 Apply dampproofing materials only when surfaces and ambient temperatures are
within manufacturers' prescribed limits.
.2 Do not proceed with work when wind chill effect would tend to set bitumen
before proper curing takes place.
.3 Maintain air temperature and substrate temperature at dampproofing installation
area above 5 °C for 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after installation.
.4 Do not apply dampproofing in wet weather.

07 11 13.docx Stantec BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

RM of Headingley Section 07 11 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
Page 2 of 3

.2 Safety: Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information

System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of asphalt, sealing
compounds, primers and caulking materials.
.3 Provide continuous ventilation of enclosed spaces buy use of portable supply and exhaust
fans during and after dampproofing application.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ASPHALTIC MATERIALS

.1 Bituminous dampproofing for application temperatures above 5ºC:
.1 To ASTM D1227 Type II, cold applied, asbestos free, clay emulsified asphalt
compound, fibred.
.2 Acceptable material: WR Meadows Sealmastic Emulsion; Bakor 700-01; Henry
HE789; Insulmastic 7101 Waterproofing Emulsion.
.2 Bituminous dampproofing for application temperatures below 5ºC:
.1 To ASTM D4479 Type I, cold-applied, asbestos-free, solvent-based asphalt
compound, brush on grade fibred.
.2 Acceptable material: WR Meadows Sealmastic Solvent; Bakor 710-11; Henry
HE794, Insulmastic 7103 Fibrated Waterproofing Foundation Coating.
.3 Asphalt primer: to ASTM D41 Type I; CGSB 37-GP-9.
.4 Sealing Mastic: ASTM 4586 Type I.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or
application of dampproofing system.
.2 Ensure concrete and masonry surfaces are fully cured and dry, clean and free from scale,
frost, dirt, dust, oil, grease and other foreign matter.
.3 Verify items which penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed.

3.2 PREPARATION
.1 Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing.
.2 Seal exterior joints between foundation walls and footings, joints between concrete floor
slab and foundation, and around penetrations through dampproofing with sealing
compound. Make watertight.

3.3 APPLICATION
.1 Dampproofing to be applied to exterior of all below concrete walls below finished grade.
.2 Prime surfaces and apply bituminous dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions, in one coat, continuous and uniform, at manufacturer's recommended rate of
application as applicable for porous or dense substrates.

07 11 13.docx Stantec BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

RM of Headingley Section 07 11 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
Page 3 of 3

.3 Apply additional coats of dampproofing to vertical corners and construction joints for a
minimum width of 230 mm on each side, and all around and for 230 mm along pipes
passing through walls.

END OF SECTION

07 11 13.docx Stantec BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING

RM of Headingley Section 07 16 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 This section refers to cement based interior waterproofing for below ground concrete
water retaining structures.
.2 Crystalline waterproofing to be used as a concrete admixture. Refer to Section 03 30 00 -
Cast-in-Place Concrete.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Product data:
.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications, and datasheets.
.2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
.1 Indicate VOC's for crystalline waterproofing materials.
.3 Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.
.4 Submit manufacturer’s field reports.
.5 Submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
.6 Submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Examination for defects: do not conceal concrete with repair material before it has been
observed by the manufacturer’s representative and Engineer. Concrete shall be examined
for structural defects such as faulty construction joints, cold joints, and cracks. Such
defects to be repaired to manufacturer’s repair procedures.
.2 Observance of leaks: leaks that occur through poorly consolidated concrete or large
cracks to be repaired to the manufacturer’s repair instructions.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver materials to concrete batching plant or site in original unopened packaging with
all labels intact.
.2 Provide and maintain dry off-ground weatherproof storage. Protect from humidity or
moisture contamination at all times.
.3 Remove only in quantities required for same day use.

1.5 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 For mixing, transporting, and placing concrete containing crystalline waterproofing under
conditions of high temperature or low temperature, follow concrete practices in
accordance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. For flatwork being placed in
hot, dry, or windy conditions, surface humidity to be maintained by fogging or use of
07 16 16.docx Stantec CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
RM of Headingley Section 07 16 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
Page 2 of 3

moister retention film (evaporation retardant); see Section 03 25 00 – Concrete

Accessories.
.2 For crack or joint filler: apply in dry conditions. Application temperature to be 10°C to
40°C. Apply to cast-in-place concrete that has been cured as per Section 03 30 00 – Cast-
in-Place Concrete. Apply to manufacturer’s instructions.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Waterproofing admixture: KRYSTOL Internal Membrane (KIM) by Kryton, XYPEX
Admix C-500/C-500 NF, C-2000/C-2000 NF by XYPEX Chemical Corporation, or
Masterlife 300 Series. Apply waterproofing admixture to all concrete water retaining
spaces as follows:
.1 Base slab.
.2 All walls for water retaining structures.
.2 Crack and joint filler: Krystol Plug, Krystol Waterstop Grout and Krystol Waterstop
Treatment by Kryton, XYPEX Patch and Plug.
.3 Material in contact with potable water to be NSF61.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 CONCRETE BATCHING AND MIXING

.1 The following description is based on Kryton products; all products to be applied as per
manufacturer’s product information.
.2 Admixture to be added to the concrete at the time of batching at the concrete plant.
Dosage to be properly supervised and a record kept of quantities and lot numbers.
.3 Contractor to coordinate concrete supplier and water proofing material supplier to
achieve concrete mix designs conforming to requirements of CSA A23.1 and Section
03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete with respect to, but not limited to, the following:
.1 Timing and rate of addition of waterproofing admixture to the concrete batch.
.2 Addition of waterproofing admixture in relation to other admixtures.
.3 Mixing rate and duration.
.4 Procedures for the addition of superplasticizer.
.5 Maintaining specified air content.

3.2 CONCRETE PLACING

.1 Place concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete. Special
attention to consolidation to be given, especially to joint locations, to achieve the
intended purpose of the waterproofing admixture to ensure a watertight structure.

3.3 CURING
.1 Reducing shrinkage cracking: wet cure concrete to Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place
Concrete.
07 16 16.docx Stantec CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
RM of Headingley Section 07 16 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING
Page 3 of 3

3.4 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS, PENETRATIONS, AND TIE-HOLES

.1 All products to be applied as per manufacturer’s product information.
.2 Construction joints and control joints to be designed and spaced to isolate and control
shrinkage cracking to CSA A23.1. Any joints not shown on Drawings to be reviewed by
Engineer.
.3 The crystalline waterproofing to be installed in all non-moving construction joints and
shrinkage control joints to manufacturer’s instructions.
.4 All pipe penetrations to be treated as per the manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION

07 16 16.docx Stantec CRYSTALLINE WATERPROOFING

RM of Headingley Section 07 21 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BOARD INSULATION
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 07 21 14 - Concrete Faced Board Insulation.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1 CAN/ULC-S701, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Coverings.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
.1 Abbreviations and Acronyms typically used in this section:
.1 XPS - Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation
.2 EPS - Expanded Polystyrene Board Insulation
.3 ISO - Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation
.4 MFB - Mineral Fibre Board Insulation

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Board insulation: extruded polystyrene (XPS) or expanded polystyrene (GPS): to
CAN/ULC-S701, Type 3 or 4, compressive strength ≥ 210 kPa (30 psi), board size 610 x
2438 mm x thickness indicated, shiplapped edge. To Clarify: this applied to the reservoir
roof insulation in addition to the reservoir side wall insulation.
.2 Protection board: insulating fibreboard to CAN/ULC-S706, Type II, Grade 4, board size
1219 x 2438 mm x thickness indicated.
.3 Concrete/masonry anchors: purpose made plastic anchors with integral large head for
attaching insulation boards.
.1 Acceptable material: Hilti IDP Insulation Anchor System.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Examine substrates and immediately inform Engineer in writing of defects.
.2 Prior to commencement of work ensure substrates are firm, straight, smooth, dry, free of
snow, ice or frost, and clean of dust, debris, oil, grease, or foreign materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install insulation after building substrate materials are cured and dry.
.2 Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and
spaces.
.3 Coordinate installation with work of other trades.
.4 Fit insulation tight around electrical boxes, plumbing and heating pipes and ducts, around
exterior doors and windows and other protrusions.

07 21 13.docx Stantec BOARD INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 07 21 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BOARD INSULATION
Page 2 of 3

.5 Keep insulation minimum 75 mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light
fixtures, and sidewalls of chimneys and vents.
.6 Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces.
.7 Install insulation boards in parallel rows. Butt joints tightly, offset vertical joints.
.8 Offset both vertical and horizontal joints in multiple layer applications.
.9 Interlock boards at corners.
.10 Use only insulation boards free from chipped or broken edges. Use largest possible
dimensions to reduce number of joints.
.11 Fasteners application:
.1 Install fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Provide a minimum of four anchors per 600 x 1200 mm of insulation board.
.3 Provide additional anchors spaced at 300 mm on centre around perimeter of
openings, corners and abutments.
.4 Ensure fasteners are solidly set with discs and washer heads flush with insulation.
.5 Replace loose or improperly seated anchors.
.6 Concrete/masonry anchors:
.1 Position insulation and drill pilot hole through insulation into substrate
using properly sized drill bits.
.2 Insert anchor through insulation and into pilot hole and tap with hammer
until securely seated with washer head flush with insulation.

3.3 PROTECTION BOARD

.1 Install protection board over board insulation where indicated.
.2 Ensure insulation and protection board is not displaced or damaged during backfilling.
.3 Provide tight butt joints.
.4 Install protection board below grade without fasteners or adhesives. Install protection
board during backfilling operations to allow backfill to hold boards tight against
insulation.
.5 Loose lay protection board over frost barrier ensuring boards remain in place during
backfilling..

3.4 SCHEDULE
.1 Grade Beams:
.1 Insulation: XPS.
.2 Installation: Fasteners and nailing discs.
.3 Cover with loose laid protection board.
.2 Foundation Walls:
.1 Insulation: XPS.
.2 Installation: Fasteners and nailing discs.
.3 Cover with loose laid protection board
.3 Roof (R2) Concrete Slab:
.1 Insulation: XPS.
.2 Installation: Panel Ties.

07 21 13.docx Stantec BOARD INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 07 21 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BOARD INSULATION
Page 3 of 3

END OF SECTION

07 21 13.docx Stantec BOARD INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 07 21 14
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE FACED BOARD INSULATION
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 07 11 13 - Bituminous Dampproofing.
.2 Section 07 21 13 - Board Insulation: below grade board insulation.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1 CAN/ULC-S701, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Coverings.

1.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Store panels on pallets placed over flat, level surface. Protect panels from weather by
storing in indoor dry area or with tarps until required for installation.
.2 Protect panels from damage during transportation, storage, and handling.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Extruded polystyrene insulation: to CAN/ULC-S701, Type 4.
.2 Concrete faced insulated (CFI) panels: extruded polystyrene board insulation faced with
factory applied 8 mm thick latex modified concrete facing. Panel size 610 x 1229 mm
with tongue-and-groove edge along 1229 mm edge. Insulation thickness as indicated.
.1 Acceptable material: Concrete Faced Insulated (CFI) Wall Panels as
manufactured by T. Clear Corporation, Tech-Crete, or approved equal.
.3 Mounting clips: purpose made of galvanized sheet steel, for concealed fastening of
panels. As supplied by panel manufacturer.
.4 Ledger: galvanized steel angle, of sufficient width and thickness to support panels. As
supplied by panel manufacturer.
.5 Sheet metal flashings: fabricated of galvanized sheet steel, manufacturer's standard
profiles.
.6 Screw fasteners: type recommended by panel manufacturer, corrosion resistant.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Examine substrates and immediately inform Engineer in writing of defects.
.2 Prior to commencement of work ensure substrates are firm, straight, smooth, dry, free of
snow, ice or frost, and clean of dust, debris, oil, grease, or foreign materials.
.3 Remove irregularities or jagged surfaces.

07 21 14.docx Stantec CONCRETE FACED BOARD INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 07 21 14
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONCRETE FACED BOARD INSULATION
Page 2 of 2

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install panel after building substrate materials are cured and dry.
.2 Install panels to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and
spaces.
.3 Coordinate installation with work of other trades.
.4 Install CFI panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using only
manufacturer recommended mounting clips, fasteners, flashings and other accessories.
.5 Use only sound undamaged panels free from cracks, chips, soiling or other damage
detrimental to appearance or performance.
.6 Perimeter foundations and grade beams:
.1 Install CFI panels vertically or as per manufacturer recommendations.
.2 Install steel angle ledger at base of lowest panel to establish level line.
.3 Install first panel on ledger and subsequent panels with concealed mounting clips,
spaced to manufacturer's specifications.
.7 Install panels plumb, level, straight and aligned. Fit panel joints snug and flush.
.8 Use full sized panels as much as possible.
.9 Where partial panels are required cut panels with masonry saw providing neat, clean
edge.
.10 Secure partial panels with surface fasteners. Keep fasteners minimum 50 - 75 mm from
panel edges.
.11 Fit panels tight to electrical boxes, pipes, other penetrations, and around openings. Caulk
or flash to seal.
.12 Interlock boards at corners. Install metal flashing at outside corners to conceal exposed
core.
.13 Install cap flashing where panels terminate. Ensure positive drainage of moisture.
.14 Use only panels free from chipped or broken edges.
.15 Do not continue panels over building expansion joints. Terminate panels both sides of
joint and flash or caulk to seal panel edges.

3.3 INSPECTION AND REPAIR

.1 Inspect completed installation to ensure panels have been properly installed and solidly
secured to building structure.
.2 Replace panels that show cracks, chips, soiling or other damage with new undamaged
panels.

END OF SECTION

07 21 14.docx Stantec CONCRETE FACED BOARD INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 07 21 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FOAMED IN PLACE INSULATION
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1 Can4-S214, Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Protective Coverings
for Foamed Plastics.
.2 Canadian Urethane Foam Contractors’ Association Inc. (CUFCA)
.3 Green Seal Environmental Standards
.1 Standard GC-03, Anti-Corrosive Paints
.2 Standard GS-11, Architectural Paints
.4 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)
.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
.5 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD)
.1 California State SCAQMD Rule 1113, Architectural Coatings
.6 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada, (ULC)
.1 CAN/ULC-S101, Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials
.2 CAN/ULC-S102, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials and Assemblies
.3 CAN/ULC-S705.1, Standard for Thermal Insulation – Spray Applied Rigid
Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Material Specification
.4 CAN/ULC-S705.2, Standard for Thermal Insulation – Spray Applied Rigid
Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Application.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Product Data:
.1 Submit manufacturer’s printed product literature, specifications, datasheets, and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
.2 Submit two (2) copies WHMIS MSDS – Material Safety Data Sheets.

1.3 QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit quality control submittals in accordance with Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.
.2 Test reports: submit certified test reports for insulation from approved independent
testing laboratories, indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
.3 Submit test reports in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101 for fire endurance and
CAN/ULC-S102 for surface burning characteristics.
.4 Manufacturer’s Instructions: submit manufacturer’s installation instructions and special
handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.
.5 Manufacturer’s Field Reports: submit to manufacturer’s written report within (3) three
days of review, verifying compliance of Work, as described in PART 3 – FIELD
QUALITY CONTROL.

07 21 19.docx Stantec FOAMED IN PLACE INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 07 21 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FOAMED IN PLACE INSULATION
Page 2 of 3

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Applicators to conform to CUFCA Quality Assurance Program.
.2 Qualifications:
.1 Installer: person specializing in sprayed insulation installations with five (5)
years documented experience approved by manufacturer.
.2 Manufacturer: company with minimum five (5) years’ experience in producing of
material used for work required for this project, with sufficient production
capacity to produce and deliver required units without causing delay in work.
.3 Health and Safety Requirements: worker protection:
.1 Protect workers as recommended by CAN/ULC-S705.2 and manufacturer’s
recommendations.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 – Common
Product Requirement.
.2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written
instructions.

1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Comply with Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.
.2 Dispose of waste foam daily in location designated by Contractor and decontaminate
empty drums in accordance with foam manufacturer’s instructions and CAN/ULC-
S705.2.
.3 Divert metal drums from landfill to metal recycling facility and to CAN/ULC-S705.2.

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Ventilate area in accordance with Section 01 51 00 – Temporary Utilities.
.2 Ventilate area to receive insulation by introducing fresh air and exhausting air
continuously during and 24 hours after application to main non-toxic, unpolluted, safe
working conditions.
.3 Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray and noxious vapours from contaminating
air beyond application area.
.4 Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by over spray, fall-out, and dusting
of insulation materials.
.5 Apply insulation only when surfaces and ambient temperatures area within
manufacturers’ prescribed limits.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Insulation: spray polyurethane to CAN/ULC-S705.1.
.2 Primers: in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for surface conditions.
.1 Maximum VOC limit to CAN/ULC-S774: Pass.

07 21 19.docx Stantec FOAMED IN PLACE INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 07 21 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FOAMED IN PLACE INSULATION
Page 3 of 3

.3 Foamed-in-place Insulation:
.1 Medium Density closed cell spray polyurethane to CAN/ULC-S705.1.
.2 Acceptable Material:
.1 Foamsulate Closed Cell.
.2 Elastochem Insultahne Extreme.
.3 BASF CM01.
.4 Huntsman Soya.
.5 Carlisle Sealtite One, Insulthane Extreme.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacture’s written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.

3.2 APPLICATION
.1 Apply insulation to clean surfaces in accordance with CAN/ULC-S705.2.
.2 Use primer where recommended by manufacturer.
.3 Apply sprayed foam insulation in 5/8” to 2” thick increments to provide total thermal
resistance value of R-27.5.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Manufacturer’s Field Services:
.1 Provide manufacturer’s field surfaces consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.

3.4 CLEANING
.1 Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning.
.2 On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools, and equipment.

END OF SECTION

07 21 19.docx Stantec FOAMED IN PLACE INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 07 41 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS
Page 1 of 6

Part 1 General

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

.1 Pre-insulated metal standing seam roof with foamed-in-place polyurethane foam core,
including flashings, trim and other accessories to make the system complete, as indicated
on the drawings and specified herein.
.1 Steel faced factory foamed-in-place profiled panels with compatible joinery.
.2 Sealants between panels and their intersection.
.3 Mechanically closed single lock standing seam at exterior side joint and single
tongue and groove interlock at interior side joint.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Section 07 41 15 – Double Skin Insulated Wall Panel.
.3 Section 07 62 00 – Flashing and Trim
.4 Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealing

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International)
.1 ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
.2 ASTM E1646 – Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by
Static Air Pressure Difference.
.3 ASTM E1680 – Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal Roof Panel
Systems.
.4 ASTM A653 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
by the Hot-Dip Process.
.5 ASTM A792 – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy
Coated Steel by the Hot-Dip Process.
.6 ASTM E72 – Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for
Building Construction.
.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CGSB 19-GP-14M-76, Sealing Compound, One Component,
Butyl-Polyisobutylene Polymer Base, Solvent Curing.
.3 Factory Mutual: FM Approval Standard 4471 Class 1 Roof Panels
.4 Canadian Certifications
.1 CAN/ULC S126 – Fire Spread Under Roof-Deck Assemblies
.2 CAN/ULC S138 – Fire Growth of Insulated Building Panels in a Full-Scale
Room Configuration

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design metal roof cladding system to provide for thermal movement of component
materials caused by ambient temperature range of 80oC without causing buckling, failure
of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects. Design for all wind
loads, snow load and dead loads in accordance with the National Building Code of
Canada and referenced standards therein.
07 41 13.docx Stantec DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS
RM of Headingley Section 07 41 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS
Page 2 of 6

.2 Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected panels: 1 to 1000.
.3 Design of metal roof to be done by a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of
Manitoba. All shop drawings to be stamped by a Professional Engineer and indicate
snow, live and dead load calculations.
.4 All insulated metal roof panels by same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by
Engineer.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Complete shop drawings, including elevations, fastening patterns and sections of each
condition shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication. Such drawings shall also
include material type, metal thickness, paint finish and manufacturer’s installation
suggestions.

1.6 SAMPLES
.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit duplicate 2’ x 2’ (610 x 610 mm) samples of roof system, representative of
materials, finishes, texture and colours (both interior and exterior).
.3 Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:
.1 Preparation instructions and recommendations.
.2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
.3 Material type, metal thickness and finish.
.4 Installation methods.

1.7 WARRANTY
.1 Submit manufacturer’s written two (2) year limited warranty providing panels to be free
from defects in materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial
completion, excluding coil coatings (paint finishes) that are covered under a separate
warranty.
.2 The installation contractor shall issue a separate one (1) year warranty against defects in
installed materials and workmanship, beginning from the date of substantial completion
of the installation.
.3 Submit Manufacturer’s forty (40) year limited warranty on the exterior paint finish for
adhesion to the metal substrate and thirty (30) year limited warranty on the exterior paint
finish for chalk and fade.

1.8 QUALIFICATION

.1 Installer Qualifications:
.1 Installed by a contractor with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience with this
type of construction, and documentation indicating successful completion of
contracts for projects of similar size, scope and materials.
.2 Manufacturer’s Qualifications: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten
(10) years’ experience in production of factory foamed-in-place insulated metal
panels.
.3 When requested, provide a list of the last 3 comparable jobs, including job name
& location, specifying authority and project manager.
07 41 13.docx Stantec DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS
RM of Headingley Section 07 41 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS
Page 3 of 6

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Protect products of metal roof panel system during shipping, handling, and storage to
prevent staining, denting, deterioration of components or other damage.
.2 Deliver, unload, store, and erect metal roof panel system and accessory items without
misshaping panels or exposing panels to surface damage from weather or construction
operations.
.3 Store in accordance with Manufacturer's written instruction.
.4 Shield foam insulated metal roof panels from direct sunlight until installation.
.5 Store products off the ground, with panels sloped for drainage and covered to protect
factory finishes from damage. Stack bundles no more than two (2) high.

1.10 PERFORMANCE TESTING REQUIREMENTS

.1 Structural and Wind Load Tests:
.1 The design load/deflection criteria shall be verified from tests per ASTM E72
“Chamber Method” using a 20 psf (0.96 kPa) simulated wind load. A deflection
limit of L/240 for roof panels shall apply.
.2 FM Approval Standard 4471: The panel shall meet windstorm Class 1A [90] and
hailstorm Class 1-SH classifications.
.3 Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Uplift Tests for Roof Assemblies: Roof
Assemblies shall be UL Class 90 rated in accordance with UL 580 and shall
withstand static uplift load of 140 psf when tested on 7 ft purlin spacing and 166
psf when tested on 5 ft. purlin spacing.
.2 Thermal Performance:
.1 When tested in accordance with ASTM C518, “measurement of steady state
thermal transmission”, the panels shall provide a K-factor of .14 btu/sf/hr./deg F
at a 75°F (23°C) mean temperature.
.3 Fire:
.1 Surface Burning Characteristics: The insulated core shall have been tested in
accordance with ASTM E 84 for surface burning characteristics. The core shall
have a maximum flame spread of 25 and a maximum smoke developed rating of
450.
.2 Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FMRC) Standard 4880, 50 foot (15.24 m)
High Corner Test for Unlimited Height Structures: The panel assembly shall not
support a self-propagating fire which reaches any limits of the 50 foot (15.24 m)
high corner test structure as evidenced by flaming or material damage of the
ceiling of the assembly.
.3 Canadian Certifications – Flame Spread: Evaluation of fire spread over panel’s
exterior surface shall be conducted and in compliance with CAN/ULC S138 Fire
Growth of Insulated Building Panels in a Full-Scale Room Configuration and
CAN/ULC S126 Fire Spread Under Roof-Deck Assemblies.
.4 IBC Chapter 26: Panel performance under the above test methods, shall meet the
requirements of IBC, Chapter on foam plastics.
.4 Vapour Barrier:
.1 Air Infiltration: Air infiltration shall not exceed .06 cfm per square foot of roof
area when tested in accordance with ASTM E1680 at a static pressure of 12 psf
(0.576 kPa)

07 41 13.docx Stantec DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 07 41 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS
Page 4 of 6

.2 Water Penetration: There shall be no uncontrolled water penetration through the

panel joints at a static pressure of 12 psf (0.576 kPa) when tested in accordance
with ASTM E1646.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Composite roof panels as indicated on drawings as:
.1 Panel Type R1 (TYPE-R1)
.1 Thickness: 6” (152 mm).
.2 Core: continuously foamed-in-place, zero ODP and zero VOC closed cell
polyurethane.
.3 Basis of Design Product:
.1 Kingspan Kingseam and all accessories.
.4 Exterior Thickness: 22 gauge, G-90 galvanized steel conforming to
ASTM A-653 and/or prefinished AZ-50 aluminum-zinc coated steel
conforming to ASTM A-792, minimum grade 50, with an embossed
texture, or acrylic coated AZ-55 unpainted with an embossed texture.
.1 Exterior Finish and Colour: Nominal 0.2 mil (5 microns) base
primer, followed by a nominal 0.7 mil (17.5 microns) finish coat
of full strength 70% PVDF fluoropolymer:
.1 Kingspan colour: Regal White.
.5 Interior Thickness: 24 gauge, stucco embossed finish, G-90 galvanized
steel conforming to ASTM A-653 minimum grade 33 with a stucco
embossed texture.
.1 Interior Finish and Colour: Nominal 0.2 mil (5 microns) primer
followed by a nominal 0.7 (17.5 microns) polyester coating.
.1 Kingspan colour Imperial White from Standard Colours
.2 Concealed sealants: one-component, butyl-polyisobutylene polymer base, solvent curing
to CGSB 19-GP-14M.
.3 Exposed sealants: All sealants shall be field applied to ensure maximum water tightness.
.4 Panel Joint Gasket: ¼” (6 mm) thick butyl rubber gasket installed between trimless
panels at vertical joint locations at locations shown on drawings.
.5 Accessories:
.1 Fasteners: concealed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Flashing and trim shall be brake-formed sheet metal in the same thickness and
finish to match the panels.
.3 Flashings: purpose made base flashing, support flashing, drip flashing, parapet
cap flashing, corner cap flashing, window and door trims of prefinished steel to
match panel face gauge. Flashing shapes to panel manufacturer’s standards.
Colour of exposed flashings at parapet to be selected from manufacturer’s
standard range.
.7 Side Joint Configuration:
.1 The side joint of the roof panel shall have a tongue and groove interlock at the
base of the panel and a 2" high (5.08 cm) mechanically closed standing seam at
the exterior surface of the panel. The roof panel shall be attached to the structure
with a clip and fasteners concealed within the side joint of the panel and the
installation shall be completely from the exterior side of the building envelope.

07 41 13.docx Stantec DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 07 41 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS
Page 5 of 6

.2 Through fasteners into the ribs or flat areas of the panel from the exterior side are
not acceptable.

2.2 FABRICATION
.1 Composition: two sheets of prefinished metal sandwiching a core of foamed in place
polyurethane insulation formed in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives.
.2 Construction: Pre-insulated metal roof panels shall have roll-formed exterior and interior
faces chemically bonded to a continuously foamed-in-place, polyurethane core. The steel
faces shall have a stucco embossed texture. Laminated panels shall not be accepted.
.3 The roof panels shall be factory notched and swaged to facilitate end lapping of the
panels, and the end lap extensions shall be factory cut and have all foam removed. End
laps shall also have factory installed backer plates to ensure proper fit-up of the exterior
faces for maximum water tightness. Field notching, swaging and cutting of end lap
extensions shall not be accepted.
.4 Tolerances:
.1 Overall rake to rake tolerances +/- 2” or +/- 1” at each rake.
.2 Overall eave to ridge tolerance +/- 1” or +/- ½” at the eave, end lap and ridge.
.3 Vertical deviation from the nominal roof plane of +/- 1/8” in any 5’ length, +/-
¼” in any 20’ length and +/- ½” over the entire roof area.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Panel installer shall examine all structural steel before beginning installation to insure
that all supporting members are straight, level, plumb and satisfactory for panel
installation.
.2 Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
.3 Beginning of installation shall signify the structure and adjacent conditions as being
proper and acceptable.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Installation of panels shall be made in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended
procedures, approved shop drawings, installation guide book and manufacturer’s
handbook of construction details. Flashing and trim shall be installed true and in proper
alignment. Sealant shall be installed where indicated, without skips and voids, to insure
weather tightness and integrity of the vapor barrier.
.2 Install double bead of sealant to mating edges of panel joint to form continuous
air/vapour barrier seal.
.3 Install flashings at all openings, window head and sill, to dissimilar materials and at
parapets as detailed.
.4 Provide bolted connections at all fasteners exposed from the interior.
.5 Maintain following installation tolerances:
.1 Maximum variation from plane or location shown on shop drawings: 3/8” / 30 ft.
(10 mm/10 m) of length and up to 3/4” / 300 ft. (20 mm/100 m).
.2 Maximum deviation for vertical member: 1/16” in a 28’ run (3 mm in an 8.5m
run).
07 41 13.docx Stantec DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS
RM of Headingley Section 07 41 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS
Page 6 of 6

.3 Maximum deviation for a horizontal member: 1/16” in a 28’ run (3 mm in an

8.5 m run).
.4 Maximum offset from true alignment between two adjacent members abutting
end to end, in line: 1/64” (0.75 mm).

3.3 DAMAGED MATERIAL

.1 Replace damaged panels and other components of work, which cannot be repaired by
finish touch-up or similar minor repair.
.2 The panel installer shall inspect and approve each completed roof area and shall be
responsible for protection of completed work from damage by other trades.
.3 Use of touch-up paint is only recommended if the scratch goes through the bare metal
and should only be limited to small areas and is inconspicuous from 5 feet.

3.4 CLEAN-UP
.1 Leave work areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains
.2 Wipe finished surfaces of filings caused by drilling or cutting to prevent rust staining.
.3 Replace damaged panels and other components of work, which cannot be repaired by
finish touch-up or similar minor repair.
.4 Protective film on trim should be removed before exposure to sunlight.

END OF SECTION

07 41 13.docx Stantec DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED ROOF PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 07 41 15
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED WALL PANELS
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Section 07 41 15 – Double Skin Insulated Roof Panels
.3 Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
.4 Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealing

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International)
.1 ASTM D523-89 (R1999), Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.
.2 ASTM D822-01, Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc
Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings.
.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CGSB 19-GP-14M-76 (R1984), Sealing Compound, One Component,
Butyl-Polyisobutylene Polymer Base, Solvent Curing.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design metal wall cladding system to provide for thermal movement of component
materials caused by ambient temperature range of 80oC without causing buckling, failure
of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects. Design for all wind
loads in accordance with the National Building Code of Canada and referenced standards
therein.
.2 Maximum deviation from vertical and horizontal alignment of erected panels: 1 to 1000.
.3 Design of metal cladding to be done by a Professional Engineer registered in the Province
of Manitoba. All shop drawings to be stamped by a Professional Engineer.
.4 All insulated metal wall panels by same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by
architect.

1.4 PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 30 00 – Submittals.
.2 Submit product data sheets for cladding system materials. Include product characteristics,
performance criteria, limitations and colours.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 30 00 – Submittals.
.2 Indicate dimensions and thickness of panels, fastening and anchoring methods, detail and
location of joints and gaskets, thermal movement provision, wall openings, head, jamb
and sill details, materials and finish, compliance with design criteria and requirements of
related work.

1.6 SAMPLES
.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 30 00 – Submittals.

07 41 15.docx Stantec DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED WALL PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 07 41 15
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED WALL PANELS
Page 2 of 4

.2 Submit duplicate 4” x 4” (100 x 100 mm) samples of wall system, representative of

materials, finishes, texture and colours (both interior and exterior).

1.7 WARRANTY
.1 Provide a two (2) year manufacturer’s warranty on the wall cladding system and panel
delamination.

1.8 QUALIFICATION
.1 Installation of double skin metal wall cladding shall be by installers certified by
manufacturer of system used, with a minimum of 5 years of experience. When requested,
provide a list of the last 3 comparable jobs, including job name & location, specifying
authority and project manager.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Store and protect material in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations.

Part 2 Product

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Composite wall panels as indicated on drawings as:
.1 Panel Type 1 – Field Panels
.1 Thickness: 5” (127 mm).
.2 Core: Foamed in place, Blister Free, Non CFC polyurethane.
.3 Type: vertically installed wall panels in standard 42” (1066 mm) widths
and various lengths as noted on drawings with standard 1/8” (6 mm)
reveal.
.4 Basis of Design Product:
.1 Kingspan KS Azteco.
.5 Prefinished G-90 galvanized steel face sheets for wall panels:
.1 Exterior Thickness: 26 gauge (0.63 mm), stucco embossed
finish.
.2 Exterior Finish and Colour: Solid Fluropon® PVDF finish,
.1 Colour: Category 3 – Tahoe Blue.
.3 Interior Thickness: 26 gauge (0.63 mm), stucco embossed finish.
.4 Interior Finish and Colour: Silicone Modified Polyester finish
.1 Kingspan colour Imperial White from Standard Colours
.2 Galvanized steel backing sheets:
.1 Thickness: 26 gauge (0.63 mm) Minor rib profile, stucco embossed textured
finish.
.2 Colour: White
.3 Concealed sealants: one-component, butyl-polyisobutylene polymer base, solvent curing
to CGSB 19-GP-14M.
.4 Exposed sealants: one-component, silicone base, solvent curing, colour to match panel.
.5 Panel Joint Gasket: ¼” (6 mm) thick butyl rubber gasket installed between trimless
panels at vertical joint locations at locations shown on drawings.

07 41 15.docx Stantec DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED WALL PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 07 41 15
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED WALL PANELS
Page 3 of 4

.6 Accessories:
.1 Support Angles: 18 gauge galvanized angles concealed in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Fasteners: concealed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.3 Flashings: purpose made base flashing, support flashing, drip flashing, parapet
cap flashing, corner cap flashing, window and door trims of prefinished steel to
match panel face gauge. Flashing shapes to panel manufacturer’s standards.
Colour of exposed flashings at parapet to match adjacent panel.

2.2 FABRICATION
.1 Composition: two sheets of prefinished metal sandwiching a core of foamed in place
polyurethane insulation formed in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives.
.2 Factory fabricated.
.3 Corner panels shall be Field Folded in locations as shown on drawings. Provide
galvanized reinforcing angle backing at Field Folds. Corner trim is acceptable at
locations on drawings not shown with Field Folds.
.4 Tolerances:
.1 Panel bow: maximum 0.8% of panel dimension in width and length.
.2 Panel dimensions: where final dimensions cannot be established by field
measurement before completion of panel manufacturing, make allowance for
field adjustments as recommended by manufacturer.
.3 Panel lines, breaks and angles: sharp, true and surfaces free from warp or buckle.

2.3 PAINTED FINISHES

.1 Prefinished sheet with factory applied finish.
.1 Coating thickness: total thickness not less than 1.0 mil, comprised of 0.2 mil
primer and 0.8 mil finish.
.2 Resistance to accelerated weathering for chalk rating of 8, colour fade 5 units or
less and erosion rate less than 20% to ASTM D822 as follows:
.1 Outdoor exposure period 2500 hours.
.2 Humidity resistance exposure period 5000 hours.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Before installation, examine alignment of substrate and notify Consultant in writing if
substrate does not comply with requirements of panel installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install composite wall panels in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
shop drawings. Fasteners shall be concealed in vertical side panel seams. Allow for
thermal movement.
.1 Install double bead of sealant to mating edges of panel joint to form continuous
air/vapour barrier seal.
.2 Install flashings at all openings, window head and sill, to dissimilar materials and
at parapets as detailed.
.3 Form outside and inside panel corners as detailed.

07 41 15.docx Stantec DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED WALL PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 07 41 15
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED WALL PANELS
Page 4 of 4

.4 Provide bolted connections at all fasteners exposed from the interior and located
between 0-1800mm above finished floor level.
.5 Provide bolted connections at all fasteners exposed in the stairwells.
.2 Maintain following installation tolerances:
.1 Maximum variation from plane or location shown on shop drawings: 3/8” / 30 ft.
(10 mm/10 m) of length and up to 3/4” / 300 ft. (20 mm/100 m).
.2 Maximum deviation for vertical member: 1/16” in a 28’ run (3 mm in an 8.5m
run).
.3 Maximum deviation for a horizontal member: 1/16” in a 28’ run (3 mm in an
8.5 m run).
.4 Maximum offset from true alignment between two adjacent members abutting
end to end, in line: 1/64” (0.75 mm).

3.3 CLEAN-UP
.1 Leave work areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stain

END OF SECTION

07 41 15.docx Stantec DOUBLE SKIN INSULATED WALL PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 07 42 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL WALL PANELS
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section 07 21 13 - Board Insulation: exterior wall insulation.
.2 Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
.3 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1 ASTM A653/A653 M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.2 Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI)
.1 Manufacturers’ Standard Gauge (MSG)
.2 CSSBI Steel Sheet Facts No. 10 - Steel Gauges and Thicknesses.
.3 National Building Code of Canada (NBC)

1.3 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Product data: manufacturer’s product data sheets for system and materials including
product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and colours.
.3 Shop Drawings:
.1 Indicate dimensions, wall openings, head, jamb, sill and mullion detail, materials
and finish, sub-framing components, anchor details, compliance with design
criteria and requirements of related work.
.2 Indicate locations of panel of differing profiles, finishes, and colours.
.3 Indicate site dimensions on shop drawings.
.4 Samples:
.1 Submit colour samples of coil coatings in manufacturer’s full colour selection for
colour selection by Consultant.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Performance Requirements: provide components that have been manufactured, fabricated
and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects,
damage or failure.
.2 Qualifications fabricator/installer: approved by manufacturer and experienced in
performing work of similar type and scope. When requested, provide a list of the last 3
comparable jobs, including job name & location, specifying authority and project
manager.
.3 Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the place where
the Project is located.
.4 Pre-installation meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements,
substrate conditions, manufacturer’s installation instructions and manufacturer’s warranty
requirements.
07 42 13.docx Stantec METAL WALL PANELS
RM of Headingley Section 07 42 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL WALL PANELS
Page 2 of 5

Part 2 Products

2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

.1 Zinc coated steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A 653M, commercial quality, with Z275
designation zinc coating, mill phosphatized for site-applied paint finish, minimum base
metal thickness as specified by item.

2.2 PREFINISHED STEEL SHEET

.1 Acceptable finish:
.1 Coated steel sheet with factory applied polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) coil
coating. Colour, minimum base metal thickness specified by item.
.1 Colour to be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s Standard colour
chart. Include for minimum four (4) colours.
.2 Expressence - PVDF and SMP Coating Finish: Colour as selected by Consultant
from manufacturer’s range.
.1 Acceptable Products: Sherwin Williams Expressence.

2.3 METAL WALL PANELS

.1 Basis of Design Products:
.1 Bellara – Plank Steel Siding by Vicwest Inc.
.2 Prefinished Steel Siding and soffit, concealed fastener system for exterior application and
as follows:
.1 Metal sheet: Zinc coated (galvanized) sheet steel to the requirements of ASTM
A653/A653M with a minimum metallic coating designation Z275 (G90).
.3 Preformed metal thickness: 0.59 mm (24 gauge) nominal steel thickness.
.4 Exposed preformed steel profile:
.1 Siding Length: 3657.6 mm (12’)
.5 Plank 135:
.1 Coverage Width: 135.5mm (5.34”)
.2 Profile Total Size: 185.7 mm x 15.5 mm (7.31” x 0.61”)
.3 Siding pieces per carton: 10 pieces
.4 Perforated Pattern at soffit: 3.175mm x 12.7mm (0.125” x 0.5”) @ 19.05 mm
(0.75”). Shop-applied, pre-punched as spacing indicated.
.6 Colour:
.1 Classic Woods finishes (Expressence), colour Natural Maple – 18-0255.
.7 Wood finishes pattern variation:
.1 Each product type will contain a minimum of 4 pattern variations with different
shades.
.8 Slotted fastening track:

07 42 13.docx Stantec METAL WALL PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 07 42 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL WALL PANELS
Page 3 of 5

.1 Fastening slots: 4.76 mm (3/16”) x 16 mm (5/8”) spaced at 51 mm (2”) c/c, to

allow for thermal expansion and adjustability during construction.

2.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Base steel thicknesses of sheet steel:
.1 Base metal thicknesses for sheet steel specified in this section are based on
Manufacturers Standard Gauge (MSG) system. The minimum thickness shall be
the design thickness (nominal base steel thickness) minus the maximum
allowable under-tolerance as specified by CSA-S136. Thicknesses (gauge)
specified are for uncoated steel.
.2 Design thicknesses are in accordance with CSSBI Sheet Steel Facts No. 10,
Table 1 - MSG Sheet Steel Gauge Numbers and Thicknesses
.2 Design metal panel wall to provide for thermal movement of component materials caused
by ambient temperature range of -35°C to 75°C without causing buckling, failure of joint
seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects.
.3 Design metal panel wall to accommodate movement in wall system and between wall
system and building structure, caused by structural movements, without permanent
distortion, damage to infills, racking of joints, breakage of seals, or water penetration.
.4 Design members to withstand dead load and wind loads calculated in accordance with
NBC and applicable local regulations, to maximum allowable deflection of 1/180 of span.
.5 Provide for positive drainage of condensation occurring behind panels and water entering
at joints, to exterior face of panels in accordance with NRC “Rain Screen Principles”.

2.5 ACCESSORIES
.1 Accessories and hardware: As required to meet specified requirements.
.2 Fasteners:
.1 #10 Self-drilling, Pancake head screws to steel subgirts
.2 #10 Self-tapping, Pancake head screws (fully threaded) to wood supports
.3 Screw length as required:
.1 Minimum 9.5 mm (3/8”) below wood substrate, or,
.2 Minimum 3 thread past the steel support material.
.3 Do not over torque fastener.
.3 Trim and Flashing: 0.47 mm (26 gauge) material. Finish and colour to match prefinished
metal siding and soffit.
.4 Provide standard Bellara trims and flashings as per manufacturer.
.5 Provide additional flashing complying with Section 07 62 00 where indicated.
.6 Exterior corners: of same profile, material and finish as adjacent siding material, shop cut
built and brake formed to required angle, concealed corner brace, hairline exposed joint,
pop rivet connections with painted head to match metal wall panels.
.7 Exposed joint (perpendicular to profile): ends of siding sheet shop cut clean and square,
backed with tight fitting filler lapping back of joint, exposed components colour matched
to siding.
.8 Accessories: cap flashings, drip flashings, internal corner flashings, copings and closures
for head, jamb, sill and corners, of same material, base metal thickness, and finish as
metal wall panels, brake formed to shape.

07 42 13.docx Stantec METAL WALL PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 07 42 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL WALL PANELS
Page 4 of 5

.9 Fasteners: screws, purpose made steel, zinc plated, dished steel/neoprene washers, size
and type recommended by manufacturer. Exposed fasteners head colour to match exterior
sheet.
.10 Sealants: as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing.
.11 Touch-up paint: as recommended by panel manufacturer.

2.6 FABRICATION
.1 Form individual pieces in maximum lengths to reduce number of joints. Make allowances
for expansion at joints.
.2 Fabricate wall panels in single full-length piece running full height of wall.
.3 Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects
detrimental to appearance or performance.

2.7 WORKMANSHIP
.1 Protect surrounding surfaces against damage from wall panel work.
.2 Ensure all debris, standing water, dust, dirt, etc. is cleaned off prior to accepting the
surfaces.
.3 Ensure items projecting through walls are solidly set.

2.8 PREPARATION
.1 Protect metal surfaces in contact with concrete, masonry mortar, plaster or other
cementitious surface with isolation coating.
.2 Isolate sheet metal work from direct contact with cementitious materials, dissimilar
metals, and pressure-preservative treated wood.

2.9 INSTALLATION: WALL PANELS

.1 Install strapping, furring and alignment bars. Secure to building with screws. Ensure
flatness and alignment to specified tolerances.
.2 Install wall panels horizontally, on support framing using exposed fasteners (sealed), to
patterns indicated.
.3 Provide notched and formed top closures, sealed to arrest direct weather penetration at
vertical profiles for exterior siding. Ensure continuity of "pressure equalization" of rain
screen principle.
.4 Provide alignment bars, brackets, clips, inserts, shims as required to securely and
permanently fasten wall system to building structure.
.5 Install head, jamb and sill flashings, closures, and trims pieces as required for complete
installation.
.6 Install wall panels over sill flashings; install cap coping flashings and ensure completed
installation is continuously sealed at perimeter.

2.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

.1 Construct expansion joints as indicated.

07 42 13.docx Stantec METAL WALL PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 07 42 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL WALL PANELS
Page 5 of 5

.2 Use cover sheets, of brake formed profile, of same material and finish as adjacent
material.
.3 Use mechanical fasteners to secure sheet materials.
.4 Assemble and secure wall system to structural frame so stresses on sealants are within
manufacturers' recommended limits.

2.11 TOLERANCES
.1 Maintain following construction tolerances:
.1 Maximum variation from plane or location: 10 mm/10 m (0.375”/30 ft) of length
and up to 20 mm/100 m (0.75”/330 ft).
.2 Maximum offset from true alignment between two adjacent members abutting
end to end, in line: 0.75 mm (0.030”).

2.12 CLEANING
.1 Wash down exposed interior and exterior surfaces using solution of mild domestic
detergent in warm water, applied with soft clean wiping cloths. Wipe interior surfaces
clean as part of final clean up.
.2 Remove excess sealant with recommended solvent.

END OF SECTION

07 42 13.docx Stantec METAL WALL PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 07 52 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
MEMBRANE ROOFING
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 This section applies to the insulation and moisture protection of the reservoir roof.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 07 21 13 – Board Insulation

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

Part 2 Products

2.1 VAPOUR RETARDER, ROOF AND FLASHING MEMBRANES

.1 Modified bituminous sheets: to CGSB 37-GP-56, Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS)
elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheets. Reinforcement, thickness, surface treatment
as specified below.
.2 Vapour retarder: modified bituminous sheet, 3.5 mm thick, non-woven polyester
reinforcement, fully adhered, torch-on. Top face sanded bottom fact thermofusible
plastic film.
.1 Acceptable material: Soprema Sopralene 180 SP 3.5 mm.
.3 Base sheet: modified bituminous sheet, 2.2 mm thick, non-woven polyester
reinforcement, fully adhered, hot asphalt. Top face thermofusible plastic film, bottom
face sanded.
.1 Acceptable material: Soprema Elastophene 180 PS.
.4 Cap sheet: modified bituminous sheet, 4.0 mm thick, non-woven polyester
reinforcement, fully adhered, torch-on. Top face granules, bottom face thermofusible
plastic film.
.1 Acceptable material: Soprema Sopralene Flam 250 GR.

2.2 FIBREBOARD
.1 To CAN/CSA-A247, Type 1-roof board, multi-ply, surface coated, thickness indicated.

2.3 BITUMEN
.1 Asphalt: to CSA A123.4, of Type recommended by roof membrane manufacture for hot
mopping modified bituminous membranes.

2.4 PRIMERS AND SEALERS

.1 Deck primer: Soprema Elastocol 300/500/700.

07 52 00.doc Stantec MODIFIED BITUMINOUS

MEMBRANE ROOFING
RM of Headingley Section 07 52 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
MEMBRANE ROOFING
Page 2 of 4
.2 Plastic cement: asphalt, to CAN/CGSB-37.5.
.3 Sealing compound to CAN/CGSB-37.29, rubber asphalt type.

2.5 METAL FLASHING

.1 As specified in Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
.2 Sealants: in accordance with Section 07 92 00.
.3 Fasteners: of same material as sheet metal, Robertson screws of length and thickness suitable for
application.
.4 Touch up paint: as recommended by prefinished material manufacturer.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 WORKMANSHIP
.1 Do roofing work in accordance with applicable, standard in Canadian Roofing
Contractors Association (CRCA) Roofing Specification manual, except where specified
otherwise.
.2 Do priming in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-15.
.3 Install roof membranes in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications.
.4 Place sheets in position taking care to avoid trapped air, creases, fishmouths, tears and
other defects. Ensure full bond to substrate.

3.2 PROTECTION
.1 Cover walls and adjacent work where materials hoisted or use.
.2 Use warning signs and barriers. Maintain in good order until completion of work.
.3 Clean off drips and smears of bituminous material immediately.
.4 Dispose or rainwater off roof and away from face of building until roof drains or hoppers
installed and connected.
.5 Protect roof from traffic and damage. Comply with precautions deemed necessary by
Consultant.
.6 At end of each day’s work or when stoppage occurs due to inclement weather, provide
protection for completed work and materials out of storage.

3.3 EXAMINATION OF ROOF DECKS

.1 Examine roof decks and immediately inform Engineer in writing of defects.
.2 Prior to commencement of work ensure:
.1 Decks are firm, straight, smooth, dry, and free of snow, ice or frost, and swept
clean of dust and debris.
.2 Lumber nailer plates have been installed to deck, walls and parapets as indicated.

07 52 00.doc Stantec MODIFIED BITUMINOUS

MEMBRANE ROOFING
RM of Headingley Section 07 52 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
MEMBRANE ROOFING
Page 3 of 4
3.4 PRIMING
.1 Prime dissimilar surfaces to which asphalt or membrane will come in contact, at recommended
rate of application.
.2 Prime metal flashings and fascia that will come in contact with membranes.

3.5 VAPOUR RETARDER

.1 Modified bituminous vapour retarder sheet:
.1 Torch on application.
.2 Starting at low point install sheets perpendicular to roof slope, overlapping minimum 50
mm in direction of water flow.
.3 End laps minimum 1500 mm. Stagger end laps in adjacent rows.
.4 Flash and seal around openings and penetrations. Cut and fit membrane neatly and snug
fitting, leaving no gaps. Seal and make air and watertight.
.5 Seal difficult detail areas that do not allow easy installation of membrane with mastic
sealant. Make air and watertight.
.6 Coordinate with other trades for overlapping and sealing roof vapour retarder with other
vapour barriers. Leave sufficient material to allow for overlap with other membranes.
.7 Overlap and seal roof vapour retarder to other vapour barrier membranes installed by
other trades. Ensure continuity of vapour barrier membranes over building envelope.

3.6 INSULATION AND FIBREBOARD

.1 Place boards in parallel rows with ends staggered, and in firm contact with one another.
Offset joints between each layer. Cut end boards to suit.
.2 Fully adhered, bitumen application.
.1 Adhere insulation and fibreboard in mopping of hot asphalt applied at rate of 1.2
kg/m2.
.2 Apply hot asphalt at proper temperature to ensure foam insulation is not melted,
but hot enough to ensure bond strength.
.3 Tape joints in fibreboard to prevent hot asphalt from leaking through joints to underlying
insulation board.

3.7 EXPOSED MEMBRANE ROOFING APPLICATION

.1 Starting at low point of roof, perpendicular to slope, unroll base and cap sheets, align and
re-roll from both ends.
.2 Base sheet application –
.1 Starting at low point of roof, perpendicular to slope, unroll base sheets, align and
re-roll from both ends.

.2 For hot asphalt application, unroll and embed sheet in uniform coating of asphalt
applied at rate of 1.2 kg/m2, at 230oC.

07 52 00.doc Stantec MODIFIED BITUMINOUS

MEMBRANE ROOFING
RM of Headingley Section 07 52 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
MEMBRANE ROOFING
Page 4 of 4
.3 For torch application, unroll and torch base sheet onto substrate taking care not to
burn membrane or its reinforcement.
.4 Lap sheets 75 mm for side and 150 mm for end laps.
.5 Application to be free of blisters, wrinkles and fishmouths.
.3 Cap sheet application –
.1 Starting at low point on roof, perpendicular to slope, unroll cap sheet, align and
reroll from both ends.
.2 Unroll and torch cap sheet onto base sheet taking care not to burn membrane or
its reinforcement.
.3 Lap sheets 75 mm minimum for side laps and 150 mm minimum for end laps.
Offset joints in cap sheet 300 mm minimum from those in base sheet.
.4 Application to be free of blisters, fishmouths and wrinkles.
.5 Do membrane application in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
.4 Roof penetrations: install roof drain pans, vent stack covers and other roof penetration
flashings and seal to membrane in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
and details.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Inspection of roofing application will be carried out by independent inspection agency.
.2 Contractor shall pay inspection agencies fees.

END OF SECTION

07 52 00.doc Stantec MODIFIED BITUMINOUS

MEMBRANE ROOFING
RM of Headingley Section 07 62 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
.2 Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: wood blocking, curbs, nailing strips, fascia backing.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1 ASTM A653/A653 M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.2 ASTM A792/A792M, Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
.3 ASTM B32, Specification for Solder Metal.
.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1 CSA A123.3, Asphalt or Tar Saturated Roofing Felt.
.2 CSA B111, Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples.
.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CAN/CGSB-37.5, Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement.
.2 CAN/CGSB-51.32, Sheathing, Membrane, Breather Type.
.4 Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA).
.1 Roofing Specifications Manual.
.5 Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI)
.1 CSSBI Sheet Steel Facts No. 10, Table 1 - MSG Sheet Steel Gauge Numbers and
Thicknesses

1.3 SAMPLES
.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit colour samples of prefinished sheet metal for colour selection by Consultant.

Part 2 Products

2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Base steel thicknesses of sheet steel:
.1 Base metal thicknesses of sheet steel specified herein are based on the
Manufacturers Standard Gauge (MSG) system. The minimum thickness shall be
the design thickness (nominal base steel thickness) minus the maximum
allowable under-tolerance as specified by CSA-S136. Thicknesses (gauge)
specified are for uncoated steel.
.2 Design thicknesses are in accordance with CSSBI Sheet Steel Facts No. 10,
Table 1 - MSG Sheet Steel Gauge Numbers and Thicknesses, summarized as
follows:

Sheet Steel
Gauge No. (MSG) SI Metric (mm) Imperial (inches)
10 3.416 0.1345
12 2.657 0.1046
07 62 00.docx Stantec SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
RM of Headingley Section 07 62 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Page 2 of 4

Sheet Steel
Gauge No. (MSG) SI Metric (mm) Imperial (inches)
14 1.897 0.0747
16 1.519 0.0598
18 1.214 0.0478
20 0.912 0.0359
22 0.759 0.0299
24 0.607 0.0239
26 0.455 0.0179
28 0.378 0.0149

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

.1 Zinc coated steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A653M, commercial quality, with Z275
designation zinc coating. Regular spangle surface, chemically treated (passivated) for
unpainted finish, minimum base metal thickness specified by item.
.2 Aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel sheet: to ASTM A792/A792M, commercial quality,
grade 33 with AZ180 coating, regular spangle surface, chemically treated for unpainted
finish, minimum base metal thickness specified by item.

2.3 PREFINISHED STEEL SHEET

.1 Zinc or Aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel sheet with factory applied silicone modified
polyester (SMP) coil coating , minimum base metal thickness specified by item. Colour
selected by Consultant from manufacturer's standard range.
.1 Acceptable material: Baycoat 8000+ Series Coil Coating; Valspar WeatherX.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
.1 Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint.
.2 Plastic cement: to CGSB 37-GP-5.
.3 Underlay for metal flashing: dry sheathing to CAN/CGSB-51.32; asphalt laminated 3.6 to
4.5 kg kraft paper; No. 15 perforated asphalt felt to CSA A123.3.
.4 Sealants: as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing.
.5 Cleats (continuous hook strips): of same material, and temper as sheet metal, minimum
2” (50 mm) wide. Base metal thickness 1 gauge more than sheet metal being secured.
.6 Fasteners: of same material as sheet metal, to CSA B111, ring thread flat head roofing
nails of length and thickness suitable for metal flashing application.
.7 Washers: of same material as sheet metal, 1 mm thick with rubber packings.
.8 Solder: to ASTM B32, 50% tin and 50% lead.
.9 Flux: rosin, cut hydrochloric acid, or commercial preparation suitable for materials to be
soldered.
.10 Touch-up paint: as recommended by metal flashing and trim manufacture.

2.5 FABRICATION
.1 Fabricate metal flashings and other sheet metal work in accordance with applicable
CRCA 'FL' series specifications and as indicated.
07 62 00.docx Stantec SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
RM of Headingley Section 07 62 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Page 3 of 4

.2 Form pieces in 8’ (2400 mm) maximum lengths. Make allowance for expansion at joints.
.3 Hem exposed edges on underside ½” (12 mm). Miter and seal corners with sealant.
.4 Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects
detrimental to appearance or performance.
.5 Apply isolation coating to metal surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar.

2.6 METAL FLASHINGS

.1 Form parapet flashings, cap flashings, copings and fascias to profile from prefinished
steel sheet, minimum base metal thickness 22 MSG.
.2 Form counter flashings, curb flashings to profile from prefinished steel sheet, minimum
base metal thickness 24 MSG.
.3 Form air/vapour barrier transition flashing at roof/wall junction to profile from zinc
coated or aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel sheet, minimum base metal thickness 26
MSG.

2.7 PANS
.1 Form plastic pans from zinc coated or aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel sheet, minimum
base metal thickness 24 MSG, with minimum 3” (75 mm) upstand above finished roof
and 4” (100 mm) continuous flanges with no open corners. Solder joints. Make pans
minimum 2” (50 mm) wider than member passing through roof membrane.

2.8 REGLETS AND CAP FLASHINGS

.1 Form reglets and metal cap flashing of prefinished steel sheet, minimum base metal
thickness 24 MSG, to be built-in work for base flashings as detailed and in accordance
with CRCA FL series details.
.2 Provide slotted fixing holes and steel/plastic washer fasteners. Cover face and ends with
plastic tape.

2.9 EAVESTROUGH AND DOWNSPOUTS

.1 Eavestrough and downspouts shall be 22 ga.
.2 Eavestrough and downspouts shall be 100 x 150 mm.
.3 Colour: Chosen from Manufacturers standard range.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install sheet metal work in accordance with CRCA details and as indicated.
.2 Use concealed fastenings except where approved before installation.
.3 Provide underlay under sheet metal. Secure in place and lap joints 4” (100 mm).
.4 Isolate sheet metal work from direct contact with cementitious materials, dissimilar
metals, and pressure-preservative treated wood.
.5 Counterflash bituminous flashings at intersections of roof with vertical surfaces and
curbs. Flash joints using S-lock forming tight fit over hook strips.

07 62 00.docx Stantec SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

RM of Headingley Section 07 62 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Page 4 of 4

.6 Lock end joints and caulk with sealant.

.7 Install surface mounted reglets true and level, and caulk top of reglet with sealant.
.8 Insert metal flashing under cap flashing to form weathertight junction.
.9 Caulk flashing at cap flashing with sealant.

3.2 FLASHING AT ROOF/WALL JUNCTION

.1 Install flashing at roof/wall junction as component of building envelope air and vapour
barrier system.
.2 Overlap joints minimum 2” (50 mm) and seal with joint sealant to provide air and vapour
seal.
.3 Secure in place with flat head nails or screws and seal fastener heads with joint sealant to
provide air and vapour seal.

END OF SECTION

07 62 00.docx Stantec SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

RM of Headingley Section 07 84 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIRE STOPPING
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 Products

1.1 MATERIALS
.1 Fire stopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with ULC S115.
.1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier
against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of ULC-S115
and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended and conforming to
special requirements specified.
.2 Firestop system rating: meeting requirements in ULC-S115.
.2 Service penetration assemblies: certified by ULC in accordance with ULC S115 and
listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.
.3 Service penetration fire stop components: certified by ULC in accordance with ULC-
S115 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No. 40 U19.15 under the
Label Service of ULC.
.4 Fire-resistance rating of installed fire stopping assembly in accordance with NBC.
.5 Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables:
elastomeric seal.
.6 Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and
other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: elastomeric seal.
.7 Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use.
.8 Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious
substances.
.9 Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer's
recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
.10 Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging.
.11 Identification plate: warning plate or self-adhesive sticker, containing the following
information:
.1 The words “Fire Rated Assembly” or similar warning that the opening has been
firestopped.
.2 Fire stop system used (ULC or cUL).
.3 Fire stop system rating.
.4 Product(s) used.
.5 Name and phone number of initial installer.
.6 Date of initial installation.
.7 Date, name and phone number of person or company responsible for
repenetration of assembly (allow several lines).

Part 2 Execution

2.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.

07 84 00.docx Stantec FIRE STOPPING

RM of Headingley Section 07 84 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIRE STOPPING
Page 2 of 3

2.2 PREPARATION
.1 Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thickness and
installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free.
.2 Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's
instructions.
.3 Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation without
interruption to vapour barrier.
.4 Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces.
Remove stains on adjacent surfaces.

2.3 INSTALLATION
.1 Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC
certification and manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and
unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are
maintained.
.3 Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have
gained sufficient strength and after initial curing.
.4 Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish.
.5 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
.6 Install identification plate or sticker adjacent to each fire stop system assembly. Complete
all information using non-erasable ink.

2.4 SCHEDULE
.1 Fire stop and smoke seal at:
.1 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated masonry, concrete, and gypsum board
partitions and walls.
.2 Top of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.
.3 Intersection of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.
.4 Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board
partitions and walls.
.5 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs.
.6 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations.
.7 Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations.
.8 Rigid ducts: greater than 129 cm² (20 in²): fire stopping to consist of bead of fire
stopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and between
retaining angle and duct, on each side of fire separation.
.2 Smoke seals for smoke separations:
.1 Use elastomeric sealant (fire stop caulking) to provide smoke seals in smoke
separations at:
.1 Penetrations (pipes, ducts, conduit, wiring and other penetrations).
.2 Intersection of smoke separations and adjacent walls, partitions, floors
and ceilings.
.3 Perimeter seal around door and window frames in separations.

07 84 00.docx Stantec FIRE STOPPING

RM of Headingley Section 07 84 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIRE STOPPING
Page 3 of 3

.2 Apply sealant on both sides of separation where applicable. Elastomeric sealant

does require a fire stop system rating, but is required to effectively seal smoke
separations form passage of smoke in the event of a fire.

2.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Location of special requirements for fire stopping and smoke seal materials at openings
and penetrations in fire resistant rated assemblies are as follows:
.1 Non dust generation: at all locations.
.2 Movement: 25% at building expansion and control joints.
.3 Designed for re-entry, removable at: cable trays.
.4 L-rated fire stopping systems at non-fire resistance rated smoke separations.

2.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Prior to Substantial Performance of the Work inspect fire stopping work, prepare a
deficiency list and submit to Engineer. Repair deficiencies and request Engineer’s review
of the Work.
.2 Notify Engineer when ready for review and prior to concealing or enclosing fire stopping
materials and service penetration assemblies.
.3 Exploratory investigations:
.1 The Engineer may request random exploratory investigations of designated fire
stopping installation during course of the Work.
.2 Allow for one exploratory review of each fire stop system installed on project.
.3 Cut or open up designated assemblies to allow Engineer’s review.
.4 Once the investigation is complete and is acceptable to Engineer, replace the fire
stop system with new materials that meet specification requirements.
.5 If an installation is deemed unacceptable to the Engineer, the Engineer may
request additional investigations on similar installations.
.6 If additional investigations are found deficient Engineer will determine the
degree of remedial measures allowed by Contractor to correct similar
installations. Remedial work may include complete removal and replacement of
fire stopping at similar installations.
.4 Include costs for initial exploratory investigations in Contract, including cutting, removal
and replacement of materials.
.5 Additional investigations and remedial work, if required, are to be borne by the
Contractor at no additional cost to the Contract.

2.7 CLEAN UP
.1 On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
.2 Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.

END OF SECTION

07 84 00.docx Stantec FIRE STOPPING

RM of Headingley Section 07 92 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 JOINT SEALING
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1 ASTM C834, Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
.2 ASTM C920, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CGSB 19-GP-5M, Sealing Compound, One Component, Acrylic Base, Solvent
Curing.
.2 CAN/CGSB-19.13, Sealing Compound, One-component, Elastomeric, Chemical
Curing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Provide samples of:
.1 Each type of sealant, expansion foam sealant and joint filler material used on
project.
.2 Colour charts for colour selection by Engineer.
.3 Product data: for each type of sealant listing manufacturer, sealant type, applicable
consensus standards.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver and store materials in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer's
seals and labels, intact. Protect from freezing, moisture, water and contact with ground or
floor.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of hazardous materials; and
regarding labeling and provision of material safety data sheets acceptable to Labour
Canada.
.2 Conform to manufacturer's recommended temperatures, relative humidity, and substrate
moisture content for application and curing of sealants including special conditions
governing use.
.3 Ventilate area of work as directed by Engineer by use of approved portable supply and
exhaust fans.

Part 2 Products

2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS

.1 Locations of each type of sealant as specified in Table 07 92 00 (1) appended to this
Section.
.2 Urethane One Part, Non-Sag: to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25;
CAN/CGSB-19.13, Type 2. Joint movement: ±25%.
.1 Acceptable material: Sikaflex 1a, DyMonic, Chem-Calk 900, Vulkem 931.

07 92 00.docx Stantec JOINT SEALING

RM of Headingley Section 07 92 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 JOINT SEALING
Page 2 of 5

.3 Urethanes One Part, Non-Sag: To ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25;
CAN/CGSB-19.13, Type 2. Joint movement: -50% + 100%
.1 Acceptable material: Sikaflex 15M, DyMonic.
.4 Urethane, One Part, Self-Leveling: To ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25;
CAN/CGSB-19.13, Type 1. Joint movement: ±25%
.1 Acceptable material: Sikaflex 1C SL, Chem-Calk 950, Vulkem 45; Sealtight
Pourthane.
.5 Acrylic, One Part: To CGSB 19-GP-5M.
.1 Acceptable material: Tremco Mono 555, Sternson Acryflex, PRC PR 12-100,
Mulco 20 Year Acrylic, Chem-Calk 600, GE RCS 20.02 Acrylic Latex.
.6 Silicone, One Part, Mildew Resistant: To ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
.1 Acceptable material: Dow Corning 786, GE Sanitary 1702.
.7 Acoustical Sealant: To ASTM C 834.
.1 Acceptable material: Tremco Tremflex 834, Chem-Calk 600.

2.2 SEALANT COLOURS

.1 Selected by Engineer from manufacturers’ standard colours. Generally matching the
predominant material to which sealant is applied.

2.3 EXPANDING FOAM SEALANTS

.1 Locations of each type of expanding foam sealant as in Table 07 92 00 (2) appended to
this Section.
.2 Expanding foam sealant - Type 1:
.1 High-density open cell polyurethane foam, pre-compressed, impregnated with
water-based, polymer-modified asphalt. Three part system with foam seal, epoxy
adhesive and topcoat (where used as primary seal).
.2 Acceptable material: Emseal 20H System.
.3 Expanding foam sealant - Type 2:
.1 High-density open cell polyurethane foam, pre-compressed, impregnated with
water-based, polymer-modified asphalt, self-adhesive.
.2 Acceptable material: Emseal 25V.
.4 Expanding foam sealant - Type 3:
.1 High-density open cell polyurethane foam, pre-compressed, impregnated with
water-based, stabilized acrylic, self-adhesive.
.2 Acceptable material: Emseal Backerseal/Greyflex.
.5 Expanding foam sealant - Type 4:
.1 High-density open cell polyurethane foam, pre-compressed, impregnated with
water-based, stabilized acrylic, self-adhesive. Factory applied external colour
facing of Dow Corning 790 silicone in colour selected by Engineer.
.2 Acceptable material: Emseal Colorseal.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
.1 Foam backer rods: extruded polyethylene foam, compressible, oversized 30 to 50%.
.2 Adhesives: type recommended by expanding foam sealant manufacturer.
.3 Bond breaker tape: polyethylene bond breaker tape that will not bond to sealant.

07 92 00.docx Stantec JOINT SEALING

RM of Headingley Section 07 92 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 JOINT SEALING
Page 3 of 5

.4 Primers: type recommended by sealant manufacturer, for appropriate sealant and

corresponding substrate.
.5 Joint cleaner: non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming
materials and sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PROTECTION
.1 Protect installed work of other trades from staining or contamination.

3.2 PREPARATION OF JOINT SURFACES

.1 Before commencing application of sealants test materials for indications of staining or
poor adhesion.
.2 Ascertain that sealers and coatings applied to sealant substrates are compatible with
sealant used and that full bond between the sealant and substrate is attained. Request
samples of the sealed or coated substrate from their fabricators for testing of
compatibility and bond, if necessary.
.3 Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for
installation of backup materials and sealants.
.4 Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including dust, rust, oil grease,
and other matter that may impair work.
.5 Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water
repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of
materials. Remove coatings as required.
.6 Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free.
.7 Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

3.3 PRIMING
.1 Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and
caulking.
.2 Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions immediately
prior to caulking.

3.4 BACKUP MATERIAL

.1 Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Install foam backer rod to achieve correct joint depth and shape, with approximately 30%
compression.

3.5 EXPANDING FOAM SEALANTS

.1 Install expanding foam sealants in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.2 Coordinate installation with work of other trades to ensure foam sealants are installed
before building joints are covered.
.3 For expansion joints below grade in foundation walls and grade beams install as primary
seal.

07 92 00.docx Stantec JOINT SEALING

RM of Headingley Section 07 92 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 JOINT SEALING
Page 4 of 5

.4 For expansion joints above grade in foundation walls, grade beams, exterior walls install
as secondary seal with wet caulking as primary seal.
.5 Where used as a secondary seal together with field applied wet caulking provide bond
breaker tape or backer rod between foam sealant and caulking.
.6 Size preformed foam sealant to suit joint depth and width allowing for proper
compression of the material:
.1 Horizontal expansion and control joints below grade: 20%
.2 Vertical and horizontal joints in building façade: 25%
.3 Watertight joints: 20%.
.7 Use adhesives recommended by manufacturer, suitable for substrate and application.
.8 Install in longest possible lengths. Keep number of joints to a minimum. Join individual
strips by means of scarfe joint, cut at approximately 30°.

3.6 APPLICATION
.1 Apply non-paintable sealants after surfaces are painted and paint is fully cured and dry.
.2 Apply paintable sealant before surfaces are painted.
.3 Sealant:
.1 Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2 Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to
provide neat joint.
.3 Apply sealant in continuous beads.
.4 Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle.
.5 Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid.
.6 Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags,
air pockets, embedded impurities.
.7 Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to give slightly concave shape.
.8 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
.4 Curing.
.1 Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place.
.5 Cleanup.
.1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave work neat and clean.
.2 Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work progresses.
.3 Remove masking tape after initial set of sealant.

07 92 00.docx Stantec JOINT SEALING

RM of Headingley Section 07 92 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 JOINT SEALING
Page 5 of 5

Table 07 92 00 (1)
Sealant Types and Locations

Type Location
Perimeters of exterior openings where frames meet exterior facade of
building (i.e. concrete, masonry, wall cladding)
Urethane One Part,
Coping joints and coping-to-facade joints
Non-Sag
Control and expansion joints in exterior facade of building.
Under door threshold plates
Urethane One Part,
Interior control and expansion joints in floor surfaces
Self-leveling
Perimeters of exterior openings on interior of building where frames meet
interior finishes
Perimeters of interior frames
Interior masonry vertical control joints (block-to-block, block-to-concrete,
Acrylic One Part. and intersecting masonry walls)
Joints at tops of non-load bearing masonry walls at the underside of poured
concrete
Exposed interior control joints in drywall
At junction of suspended gypsum board ceilings and adjacent walls
Silicone Mildew
Perimeter of plumbing fixtures, countertops and splashbacks
Resistant
As itemized in other specification sections

Table 07 92 00 (2)
Expanding Foam Sealant Types and Locations

Type Location
Primary or secondary seal for vertical and horizontal joints below grade. Provide primary
1
seal of wet sealant where used as secondary seal.

2 Primary seal for vertical and horizontal joints above grade concealed in final assembly.

Secondary seal for vertical and horizontal joints above grade exposed in final assembly.
3
Provide primary seal of wet sealant. For joints less than 20 mm (3/4") wide only.
Primary seal for vertical and horizontal joints above grade exposed in final assembly. Seal
4
edges with wet sealant. For joints 20 mm (3/4") or more in width.

END OF SECTION

07 92 00.docx Stantec JOINT SEALING

DIVISION 08

DOORS AND OPENINGS

RM of Headingley Section 08 06 71
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Page 1 of 3

Hardware Sets

Set: 1.0

3 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4" US32D MK

1 Storeroom or Closet Lock AUR 8805FL 626 YA
1 Surface Closer 210 HDN 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" US32D RO
1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE
1 Gasketing 2891AS PE
1 Sweep 315CN PE
1 Astragal 3572SP PE

Set: 2.0

3 Hinge TA2314 4-1/2" x 4" US32D MK

1 Passage Latch AU 4701LN 626 YA
1 Surface Closer 210 TPN 689 NO
1 Kick Plate K1050 10" US32D RO
1 Floor Stop 441/443 US26D RO

Set: 3.0

3 Hinge TA2314 4-1/2" x 4" US32D MK

1 Privacy Lock AU 4602LN 626 YA
1 Surf Overhead Stop 55-X36 652 RF

Set: 4.0

3 Hinge TA2314 4-1/2" x 4" US32D MK

1 Entry Lock AU 4607LN 626 YA
1 Floor Stop 441/443 US26D RO

08 06 71_hw sets.doc Stantec DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

RM of Headingley Section 08 06 71
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Page 2 of 3

Set: 5.0

6 Hinge TA2314 4-1/2" x 4" US32D MK

2 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO
1 Passage Latch AU 4701LN 626 YA
2 Surf Overhead Stop 55-X36 652 RF
2 Kick Plate K1050 10" US32D RO

Set: 6.0

3 Hinge TA2314 4-1/2" x 4" US32D MK

1 Passage Latch AU 4701LN 626 YA
1 Floor Stop 441/443 US26D RO

Set: 7.0

6 Hinge TA2314 NRP 4-1/2" x 4" US32D MK

2 Flush Bolt 555 US26D RO
1 Dust Proof Strike 570 US26D RO
1 Storeroom or Closet Lock AUR 8805FL 626 YA
1 Surface Closer 210 HDH 689 NO
2 Kick Plate K1050 10" US32D RO
1 Check Chain Heavy Duty to Suit 626 OT
1 Threshold 252x3AFG PE
1 Gasketing 2891AS PE
2 Sweep 315CN PE
1 Astragal By Door Supplier OT

Notes: Closer for use on active leaf.

Set: 8.0

6 Hinge TA2314 4-1/2" x 4" US32D MK

2 Single Dummy Trim AU 4655LN 626 YA
2 Roller Latch 592 US26D RO
1 Surf Overhead Stop 55-X36 652 RF
1 Wall Stop 406 US32D RO

08 06 71_hw sets.doc Stantec DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

RM of Headingley Section 08 06 71
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
Page 3 of 3

08 06 71_hw sets.doc Stantec DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

RM of Headingley Section 08 11 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 1 of 7

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Division 4 - Masonry: building-in and setting frames in masonry.
.2 Section 09 22 16 - Non-structural Metal Framing: framed openings.
.3 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing: sealants.
.4 Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
.5 Section 09 91 00 - Painting: field painting.
.6 Section 13 34 19 - Metal Building Systems: rough openings.
.7 Division 26 - Electrical: power supply for electric and electronic door hardware.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1 ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.2 ASTM E152, Methods for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB).
.1 CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
.2 CGSB 41-GP-19, Rigid Vinyl Extrusions for Windows and Doors.
.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1 CSA-G40.20/G40.21, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural
Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
.2 CSA W59, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
.4 Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association, (CSDFMA):
.1 CSDFMS, Recommended Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and
Frames.
.2 CSDFMA, Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial Steel Doors.
.5 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
.1 NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives.
.2 NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
.6 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1 CAN/ULC-S701, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe
Covering.
.2 CAN/ULC-S702, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.
.3 CAN4-S104, Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
.4 CAN4-S105, Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the
Performance Required by CAN4-S104.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 Design Requirements:
.1 Design exterior frame assembly to accommodate to expansion and contraction
when subjected to minimum and maximum surface temperature of -35°C to
35°C.

08 11 13.docx Stantec HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

RM of Headingley Section 08 11 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 2 of 7

.2 Maximum deflection for exterior steel entrance screens under wind load of 1.2
kPa not to exceed 1/175th of span.
.2 Regulatory Requirements:
.1 Steel fire rated doors and frames: labeled and listed by an organization accredited
by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN4-S104, and NFPA
252 for ratings indicated.
.2 Provide fire labeled doors and frames for openings requiring fire protection
ratings.
.3 Test products in conformance with CAN4-S104 ASTM E152 or NFPA 252 and
listed by nationally recognized agency having factory inspection service and
construct as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection
Manuals issued by listing agency to individual manufacturers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Shop drawings:
.1 Indicate each type door and frame, materials, core thickness, mortises,
reinforcements, glazed and louver opening, glazing stops, arrangement of
hardware, location and methods of anchors, exposed fastenings and reinforcing,
fire ratings, and finishes.
.2 Indicate details of jamb and head, frame types, meeting and stiles on pairs of
doors, field splices.
.3 Indicate special features, junction boxes and conduit for electrical and electronic
door hardware.
.4 Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to
numbering on drawings and door schedule.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Hot dipped galvanized steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A653M, coating designation for
locations as follows:
.1 Interior doors and frames: ZF75 (A25).
.2 Exterior doors and frames: Z275 (G90) with factory applied primer as specified
in this Section.
.2 Minimum base steel thickness (gauge) in accordance with CSDFMA Table 1, except as
follows:
.1 Door face sheets: 1.2 mm (18 gauge).
.2 Frames: 1.6 mm (16 gauge).
.3 Astragals: 1.9 mm (14 gauge).
.4 Floor anchors: 1.6 mm (16 gauge).
.5 Jamb anchors:
.1 "T" strap type: 1.6 mm (16 gauge).
.2 "L" type: 1.2 mm (18 gauge).
.3 Stirrup-strap type: 15 x 250 x 1.6 mm (16 gauge).
.4 Stud type: 1.2 mm (18 gauge).
.5 Wire type: 4.0 mm (9 gauge).
.6 Reinforcing steel:
.1 Locks, strikes: 1.6 mm (16 gauge).

08 11 13.docx Stantec HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

RM of Headingley Section 08 11 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 3 of 7

.2 Butts, hinges: 3.4 mm (10 gauge).

.3 Surface mounted hardware: 2.7 mm (12 gauge).
.7 Flush bolts: 3.4 mm (10 gauge).
.8 Glazing stops: 0.9 mm (20 gauge). ULC approved for fire rated doors and
frames.
.9 Channel reinforcement for glazed and louvre openings: 0.9 mm (20 gauge).
.10 Mortar guard boxes: 0.8 mm (22 gauge).
.11 Jamb spreaders: 1.2 mm (18 gauge).
.3 Reinforcement channel: to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Type 44W, coating designation same as
specified for door materials.

2.2 DOOR CORE MATERIALS

.1 Honeycomb construction:
.1 Structural small cell, 25 mm maximum kraft paper 'honeycomb', weight: 36.3 kg
per ream minimum, density: 16.5 kg/m3 minimum sanded to required thickness.
.2 Stiffened: face sheets laminated, insulated core.
.1 Fibreglass: to CAN/ULC-S702, semi-rigid Type 1 density 24 kg/m3.
.2 Expanded polystyrene: CAN/ULC-S701, Type 1, density 16 to 32 kg/m3.
.3 Temperature rise rated (TRR): core composition to limit temperature rise on unexposed
side of door to 250°C at 30 or 60 minutes where indicated. Core to be tested as part of a
complete door assembly, in accordance with CAN4-S104, ASTM E 152 or NFPA 252,
covering Standard Method of Tests of Door Assemblies and listed by nationally
recognized testing agency having factory inspection service.

2.3 ADHESIVES
.1 Honeycomb cores and steel components: heat resistant, spray grade, resin reinforced
neoprene/rubber (polychloroprene) based, low viscosity, contact cement.
.2 Polystyrene cores: heat resistant, epoxy resin based, low viscosity, contact cement.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
.1 Primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.181.
.2 Door silencers: single stud rubber/neoprene type.
.3 Top caps: rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC) extrusion conforming to CGSB 41-GP-19M.
.4 Glazing stops: fabricate as formed channel, minimum 16 mm height, accurately fitted,
butted at corners and fastened to frame sections with countersunk oval head sheet metal
screws, except use tamper proof screws for exterior glazing.
.5 Make provisions for glazing as indicated and provide necessary glazing stops.
.1 Provide removable stainless steel glazing beads for use with glazing tapes and
compounds and secured with countersunk stainless steel screws.
.2 Design exterior glazing stops to be tamperproof.
.6 Sealant (caulking): as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing.
.7 Foam sealant: spray-applied polyurethane foam sealant, CFC and urea formaldehyde free,
non-shrinking after cure, low expanding. For sealing frames at exterior openings.
.1 Acceptable material: Ener-Foam; Insta-Seal or equivalent.
.8 Metallic paste filler: to manufacturer's standard.
08 11 13.docx Stantec HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
RM of Headingley Section 08 11 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 4 of 7

.9 Fire labels: metal riveted.

2.5 FRAMES FABRICATION GENERAL

.1 Fabricate frames in accordance with CSDFMA specifications.
.2 Fabricate frames to profiles and maximum face sizes as indicated.
.3 Provide frames with double (drywall) returns at throat openings.
.4 Exterior frames: thermally broken type construction.
.5 Interior frames: welded type construction.
.6 Blank, mortise, reinforce, drill and tap frames and reinforcements to receive hardware
and electronic hardware using templates provided by door hardware supplier. Reinforce
internally for surface mounted hardware.
.7 Top hinge reinforcement: weld in top hinge reinforcement with 20 mm leg to hinge
reinforcement, 25 mm leg to frame.
.8 Reinforce head of frames wider than 1200 mm.
.9 Protect mortised cutouts with steel guard boxes for frames installed in masonry and
concrete walls.
.10 Prepare frame for door silencers, three for single door, and two at head for double doors.
.11 Manufacturer's nameplates on frames and screens are not permitted.
.12 Conceal fastenings except where exposed fastenings are indicated.
.13 Insulate enclosed sections of exterior frame components with fibreglass batt insulation or
spray foam insulation.

2.6 FRAME ANCHORAGE

.1 Provide appropriate anchorage to floor and wall construction.
.2 Locate each wall anchor immediately above or below each hinge reinforcement on hinge
jamb and directly opposite on strike jamb.
.3 Provide 2 anchors for rebate opening heights up to 1520 mm and one additional anchor
for each additional 760 mm of height or fraction thereof.
.4 Locate anchors for frames in existing openings not more than 150 mm from top and
bottom of each jambs and intermediate at 660 mm on centre maximum.
.5 Where frames are installed in prepared openings, countersink frame at screw anchor
location.

2.7 FRAMES: WELDED TYPE

.1 Welding in accordance with CSA W59.
.2 Accurately mitre or mechanically joint frame product and securely weld on inside of
profile. Spot welding not acceptable.
.3 Cope accurately and securely weld butt joints of mullions, transom bars, centre rails and
sills.
.4 Grind welded joints and corners to a flat plane, fill with metallic paste and sane to
uniform smooth finish.

08 11 13.docx Stantec HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

RM of Headingley Section 08 11 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 5 of 7

.5 Securely attach floor anchors to inside of each jamb profile.

.6 Fabrication frame assemblies in largest sections possible. Where field splices are required
provide welded joints, ground smooth. Make field splices and joints inconspicuous after
assembly. Exposed fasteners not permitted.
.7 Weld in two temporary jamb spreaders per frame to maintain proper alignment during
shipment.

2.8 FRAMES: THERMALLY BROKEN TYPE

.1 Fabricate thermally broken frames using insulated core and separating exterior parts from
interior parts with continuous interlocking thermal break.
.2 Thermal break: rigid polyvinylchloride (PVC) extrusion conforming to CGSB 41-GP-
19Ma.
.3 Manufacture frames in a manner to provide adequate integral strength to ensure trouble
free operation. Do not fix together frame sections with screws or other fastening devices.
.4 Fill closed frame sections with fibreglass insulation.

2.9 DOOR FABRICATION GENERAL

.1 Doors: swing type, flush, with provision for glass and/or louvre openings as indicated.
.2 Exterior doors: steel stiffened, insulated core construction.
.3 Interior doors: honeycomb construction.
.4 Fabricate doors with longitudinal edges welded. Seams: grind welded joints to a flat
plane, fill with metallic paste filler and sand to a uniform smooth finish.
.5 Construct rail and stile doors, and matching panels in same manner as flush doors.
.6 Blank, reinforce, drill doors and tap for mortised, templated hardware and electronic
hardware.
.7 Reinforce doors where required, for surface mounted hardware.
.8 Make provision for glazing and door louvers where indicated and provide stops.
.9 Provide astragals for pairs of doors in accordance with ULC requirements but only where
specified in Door Schedule and Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
.10 Where pairs of doors are fitted with top and bottom rod exit devices, doors are to be ULC
approved without the use of an astragal.
.11 Provide inverted, recessed, spot welded channels to top and bottom of interior doors.
.12 Provide flush PVC top caps to top channels of exterior doors.
.13 Manufacturer's nameplates on doors permitted on hinge side of door concealed from
view.

2.10 DOORS: HONEYCOMB CORE CONSTRUCTION

.1 Form each face sheet for interior doors from sheet steel of base metal thickness specified
in Article 2.1 above, with honeycomb core laminated under pressure to face sheets.

08 11 13.docx Stantec HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

RM of Headingley Section 08 11 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 6 of 7

2.11 DOORS: HOLLOW STEEL CONSTRUCTION

.1 Form each face sheet for exterior doors from sheet steel of base metal thickness specified
in Article 2.1 above.
.2 Reinforce doors with vertical stiffeners, securely laminated to each face sheet at 150 mm
on centre maximum.
.3 Fill voids between stiffeners of exterior doors with fibreglass or polystyrene core.

2.12 SHOP PRIMING

.1 Provide touch-up primer at areas where zinc coating has been removed during fabrication
or installation.
.2 For doors and frames fabricated of steel sheet with Z275 (G90) designation galvanized
coating apply in factory one coat of zinc-rich primer CAN/CGSB-1.181 to all exposed
surfaces. Properly pre-treat and prepare surfaces before application of primer to ensure
good primer adhesion.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.

3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL

.1 Install doors and frames to CSDFMA Installation Guide.
.2 Install labeled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80 except where specified
otherwise.

3.3 FRAME INSTALLATION

.1 Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation.
.2 Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction.
.3 Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal wood
spreader at third points of door opening to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support
at centre of head for openings over 1200 mm wide. Remove temporary spreaders after
frames are built-in.
.4 Make allowances for deflection of structure to ensure structural loads are not transmitted
to frames.
.5 Maintain continuity of air barrier and vapour retarder at exterior openings.
.6 Coordinate installation with Electrical Subcontractor for installation of junction boxes
and conduit for electric hardware, wiring, and controls for electronic hardware.

3.4 DOOR INSTALLATION

.1 Install doors and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's
instructions and Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

08 11 13.docx Stantec HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

RM of Headingley Section 08 11 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Page 7 of 7

.2 Provide even margins between doors and jambs and doors and finished floor and
thresholds as follows.
.1 Hinge side: 1.0 mm.
.2 Latch side and head: 1.5 mm.
.3 Finished flooring and thresholds: 13 mm, except where doors are fitted with exit
rod devices margin shall be 6 mm.
.3 Adjust operable parts for correct function.

3.5 CAULKING AND SEALING

.1 At exterior openings, fill head and jamb frame sections with insulating foam sealant. Fill
shim space around perimeter of frames with foam sealant.
.2 For both interior and exterior frames seal joint between frames and adjacent construction
with sealant (caulking). Apply sealant around full perimeter of frames, on both sides of
opening.
.3 For frames at exterior openings provide foam backer rod or bond breaker tape behind
sealant.
.4 Apply sealants in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing. Provide smooth, neat
bead, tooled to slight concave profile.

3.6 FINISH REPAIRS

.1 Touch up with primer finishes damaged during installation.
.2 Fill exposed frame anchors and surfaces with imperfections with metallic paste filler and
sand to a uniform smooth finish. Apply primer on sanded surfaces.

END OF SECTION

08 11 13.docx Stantec HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

RM of Headingley Section 08 44 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Page 1 of 9

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section 07 27 00 - Air Barriers: Exterior wall air barrier membrane tied into curtain wall
frames for continuity of building air and vapour barrier system.
.2 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing: For system perimeter sealant and backup materials.
.3 Section 08 80 50 - Glazing.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Aluminum Association (AA)
.1 AA DAF-45-2003 (R2009), Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
.2 Fenestration & Glazing Industry Alliance (FGIA)
.1 AAMA CW-DG-1:1996, Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual
.2 AAMA CWG 1:1989, Installation of Aluminum Curtain walls
.3 AAMA 501.2-15, Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check
of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems
.3 ASTM International
.1 ASTM A36/A36M-14, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
.2 ASTM A123/A123M-17, Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings
on Iron and Steel Products
.3 ASTM A653/A653M-17, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
.4 ASTM B221-14, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Profiles, and Tubes
.5 ASTM E331 - 00(2016), Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior
Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference
.6 ASTM E283-04(2012), Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage
Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure
Differences Across the Specimen
.7 ASTM E330/E330M-14, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of
Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform Static Air
Pressure Difference
.8 ASTM E331-00(2009), Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior
Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform Static Air Pressure
Difference
.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1 CAN/CSA-A440.2-14/A440.3-14, Fenestration Energy Performance / User
Guide to CSA A440.2-14, Fenestration Energy Performance
.2 CAN/CSA-S157/S157.1-05 (R2015), Strength Design in
Aluminum/Commentary on CAN/CSA-S157, Strength Design in Aluminum
.5 National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC)
.1 ANSI/NFRC 100-2017, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-
factors

08 44 13.docx Stantec GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

RM of Headingley Section 08 44 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Page 2 of 9

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this Section.
.2 Coordination: Coordinate work of this section with installation of firestopping, air barrier
placement, vapour retarder placement, flashing placement, and exterior wall components
or materials.

1.4 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Action Submittals:
.1 Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within
assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details and
water flow drainage diagrams.
.2 Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and
tolerances, anticipated deflection under load, affected related Work, weep
drainage network, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field
welding required.
.3 Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls, provide shop
drawings, including analysis data, signed and sealed by the qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
.4 Samples: Submit samples of aluminum finishes on aluminum base metal.
.3 Informational Submittals:
.1 Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics,
dimensional limitations.
.2 Manufacturer's compatibility statement that materials in contact with sealants and
gaskets are compatible.
.3 Manufacturer's verification that sealants and gaskets are suitable for purpose
intended, and are suitable for temperature, humidity and weather conditions at
time of application.
.4 Manufacturer's field reports.
.5 Test Results: Submit substantiating engineering data, test results of previous tests
by independent laboratory which purport to meet performance criteria, and other
supportive data.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78
00 – Project Closeout. Include:
.1 Manufacturer’s printed instructions for maintenance of installed work, including
methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under
anticipated use conditions and precautions against materials and methods which
may be detrimental to finishes and performances.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Perform Work in accordance with AAMA CW-DG-1.
.2 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products
specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
.3 Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section
with minimum three years documented experience and approved by the manufacturer.

08 44 13.docx Stantec GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

RM of Headingley Section 08 44 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Page 3 of 9

.4 Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional

Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the place where
the Project is located.
.5 Provide glazed aluminum curtain walls for all locations by same manufacturer.
.6 Perform welding Work in accordance with CSA W59.2.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

.1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 -
Common Product Requirements.
.2 Handle work of this Section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
.3 Protect prefinished aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive
papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Comply with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees C.
.2 Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.

1.10 WARRANTY
.1 Provide manufacturer's warranty for aluminum curtain wall against leakage, defects and
malfunction under normal usage for two years from date of Substantial Performance of
the Work.
.2 Warranty to include labour and materials for correcting defective work or materials.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS

.1 Acceptable Products:
.1 ThermaWall 2600 as manufactured by Alumicor.
.2 1600 UT.as manufactured by Kawneer

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 Curtain Wall System: Tubular aluminum sections with self-supporting framing, 64 mm
profile (sight line), factory prefinished, vision glass; related flashings, anchorage and
attachment devices.
.2 Four-sided captured system with fibreglass pressure plates and extruded aluminum caps.
.3 System Assembly: Site assembled.
.4 Assembled system to permit re-glazing of individual glass units from exterior without
requiring removal of structural mullions sections.

08 44 13.docx Stantec GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

RM of Headingley Section 08 44 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Page 4 of 9

2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 System Design: Design and size components, by a Professional Engineer registered in the
Province of Manitoba to withstand dead loads and live loads caused by positive and
negative wind loads acting normal to plane of wall as calculated in accordance with
National Building Code as measured in accordance with ASTM E330.
.2 Design and size components to withstand:
.1 Dead loads and live loads caused by positive and negative wind loads acting
normal to plane of wall to a design pressure of 0.95 kPa as measured in
accordance with ASTM E330, and in accordance with NBCC.
.2 Seismic loads and sway displacement as calculated in accordance with NBCC.
.3 Limit mullion deflection to L/175; with full recovery of glazing materials.
.4 Design curtain wall to AAMA CW-DG-1.
.5 Design aluminum components to CAN/CSA S157.
.6 Thermal Expansion: Ensure curtain wall system can withstand temperature differential of
85 degrees C and is able to accommodate interior and exterior system expansion and
contraction without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
.7 Provide system to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals:
.1 Movement within system.
.2 Movement between system and perimeter framing components.
.3 Dynamic loading and release of loads.
.4 Deflection of structural support framing.
.5 Shortening of building concrete structural columns.
.6 Creep of concrete structural members.
.7 A mid-span slab edge deflection as indicated on structural drawings.
.8 Design vertical expansion joints with baffled overlaps and compressed resilient air seal
laid between mullion ends.
.9 Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.03 L/s/sq m of wall area,
measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 720 Pa when tested in
accordance with ASTM E283.
.10 Vapour seal with interior atmospheric pressure of 25 mm sp, 22 degrees C, 40% HR: no
failure.
.11 Air and Vapour Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout
assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
Position thermal insulation on exterior surface of air barrier and vapour retarder.
.12 Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at differential
pressure across assembly of 720 Pa.
.13 Condensation Resistance (CRF): When tested to AAMA 1503, the condensation
resistance factor shall not be less than 66 frame and 60 glass, based on 25 mm clear
insulating glass, (1/4” glass, 1/2" air space, 1/4" glass).
.14 Overall thermal transmittance (U-factor): Maximum 2.0 W/(m2•K).
.1 The overall thermal transmittance value of the aluminum window wall assembly
shall be determined for the reference sizes listed in accordance with:
.1 CSA A440.2/A440.3 Fenestration Energy Performance/User Guide to
CSA A440.2 Fenestration Energy Performance, or
.2 NRFC 100, Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors.
08 44 13.docx Stantec GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
RM of Headingley Section 08 44 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Page 5 of 9

.3 Overall thermal transmittance shall be based on geographic location

Zone 7a, Brandon, Manitoba in accordance with the National Energy
Code.
.15 Expansion / Contraction: System to provide for expansion and contraction within system
components caused by a cycling temperature range of 95 degrees C over a twelve-hour
period without causing detrimental effect to system components.
.16 System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing
channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep
drainage network.
.17 Maintain continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout assembly, primarily in
line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
.18 Ensure no vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement,
thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or
fracturing of attachments or components of system occur.
.19 Design glazed aluminum curtain wall to rain screen principles.
.1 Ensure horizontal members are sealed to vertical members to form individual
compartments in accordance with rain screen principles.
.2 Ventilate and pressure equalize air spaces outside exterior surface of insulation to
exterior.

2.4 MATERIALS
.1 Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221, 6063-T5 6063-T6 alloy and temper
.2 Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209
.3 Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M; galvanized with Z275 zinc coating
.4 Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; shaped to suit mullion sections
.5 Zinc Coated Steel Sheet: Commercial quality to ASTM A653/A653M, with Z275
designation zinc coating.
.6 Anchors: Three-way adjustable hot-dip galvanized cast iron.
.7 Fasteners: Stainless steel or aluminum, finish to match curtain wall.
.8 Isolation Coating: MPI EXT 5.4D Bituminous Coating.
.9 Vertical Glass Units: Insulating glass units as specified in Section 08 80 50 - Glazing.
.10 Sealants:
.1 Sealant Used Within System (not used for Glazing): Type recommended by
curtain wall manufacturer.

2.5 COMPONENTS
.1 Mullion Profile:
.1 Vertical and Horizontal Members: 64 mm sight line, nominal dimensions
indicated, thermally broken with interior tubular section insulated from exterior
pressure plate.
.2 Matching stops and pressure plate of sufficient size and strength to provide bite
on glass

08 44 13.docx Stantec GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

RM of Headingley Section 08 44 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Page 6 of 9

.3 Drainage holes, deflector plates and internal flashings to accommodate internal

weep drainage system; internal mullion baffles to eliminate "stack effect" air
movement within internal spaces.
.2 Corners: Provide manufacturer’s factory made 90-degree compatible inside and outside
corners.
.3 Sheet Metal Flashings: Closures and Trim: Sheet aluminum, minimum 0.635 mm thick
(22 gauge), formed to sizes and profiles indicated. Finish to match curtain wall mullion
sections. Secure with concealed fastening method.
.4 Sheet Metal Air Barrier: Sheet aluminum, minimum 0.508 mm thick (24 gauge) formed
to sizes and profiles indicated. Form sheet metal air barrier in maximum 2 400 mm
lengths. Mill finish.

2.6 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

.1 Glazing Materials: Insulating glass units as specified in Section 08 80 50 - Glazing.
.2 Glazing Materials: Glazing gaskets, spacer, shims, glazing sealants of type to suit
application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration requirements.

2.7 SEALANT MATERIALS

.1 Perimeter Sealant and Backing Materials: As specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint
Sealing.
.2 Sealant Used Within System (not used for glazing): Of type recommended by
manufacturer.
.3 Glazing Sealants: Of type recommended by manufacturer.

2.8 FABRICATION
.1 Fabricate system components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around
perimeter of assembly yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
.2 Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints hairline, flush.
.3 Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
.4 Arrange fasteners and attachments to ensure concealment from view.
.5 Reinforce framing members for external imposed loads.
.6 Visible manufacturer's identification labels not permitted.

2.9 FINISHES
.1 Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum components in accordance with DAF-45 -
Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
.1 Exterior Aluminum Surfaces:
.1 AA DAF-45-M10C21A44, Architectural Class I, champagne anodic
finish.
.2 AA DAF-45-M10C21A44, Architectural Class I, dark anodic finish.
.3 Locations: As indicated on Drawings.
.2 Interior Aluminum Surfaces:
.1 AA DAF-45-M12C22A31, Class II, clear anodic finish.

08 44 13.docx Stantec GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

RM of Headingley Section 08 44 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Page 7 of 9

.2 Finish brake formed or cold rolled sheet aluminum after forming to prevent cracking of
finishes. Only minor bending and forming to fit pieces on site will be permitted. Replace
components that show cracking, peeling or other damage to finished surfaces at no
additional cost to the Contract.

2.10 STEEL FINISHES

.1 Shop and Touch-up Primer for Steel Components: As recommended by manufacturer.
.2 Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: As recommended by manufacturer.
.3 Concealed Steel Items: Hot-dip galvanized, minimum coating thickness Grade to
ASTM A123/A123M, coating thickness appropriate grade for type and size of steel
material indicated.
.4 Isolate Aluminum from Following Components, by Means of Isolation Coating:
.1 Dissimilar metals except stainless steel, zinc, or white bronze of small area.
.2 Concrete, mortar and masonry.
.3 Wood

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
.2 Verify wall openings and adjoining air barrier and vapour retarder materials are ready to
receive work of this section.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install curtain wall system to manufacturer instructions.
.2 Install wall system in accordance with AAMA CWG-1 and ASTM E2112.
.3 Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction
tolerances and other irregularities.
.4 Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building
structure.
.5 Clean weld surfaces; apply protective primer to field welds and adjacent surfaces.
.6 Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances and align with adjacent work.
.7 Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
.8 Install sill flashings closure flashings, and other flashing indicated. Conceal fastening.
.9 Sheet Metal Air Barrier:
.1 Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier materials. Maintain
continuity of building envelope air barrier.
.2 Install sheet metal air barrier directly into shoulder of frame with stainless steel
screws, anti-rotation spacers, and butyl tape to provide air and vapour seal.
Secure into glazing pocket with spacer block and pressure plate.
.3 Overlap end joints minimum 75 mm and seal joints with non-hardening sealant.

08 44 13.docx Stantec GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

RM of Headingley Section 08 44 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Page 8 of 9

.10 Shim Spaces: Shim spaces are defined as joints or spaces between perimeter frames and
adjacent construction. Fill shim spaces with non-expanding spray foam sealant to
maintain continuity of building thermal barrier.
.11 Provide foamed-in-place insulation to shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain
continuity of thermal barrier.
.12 Install glass in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, to glazing method required
to achieve performance criteria.
.13 Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria, backing
materials, and installation criteria in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing.
.14 Isolation Coating:
.1 Apply isolation coating to properly prepared concealed unpainted surfaces in
contact with dissimilar materials. Coat surfaces with two coats for a minimum of
16 mils dry film thickness (DFT) or as recommended by coating manufacturer.
Dipping of aluminum into coating is not permitted. Allow coating to dry prior to
installation of aluminum component.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

.1 Maximum variation from plumb: 1.5 mm/m non-cumulative or 12 mm/30 m, whichever
is less.
.2 Maximum misalignment of two adjoining members abutting in plane: 0.8 mm.
.3 Maximum sealant space between curtain wall and adjacent construction: 13 mm.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Comply with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.
.2 Manufacturer's Field Services:
.1 Have manufacturer of products, supplied under this section, review Work
involved in the handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning, of its
products and submit written reports, in acceptable format, to verify compliance
of Work with Contract.
.2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
.3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed:
.1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work, or
other Work, on which the Work of this Section depends, is complete but
before installation begins.
.2 Minimum twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60% complete.
.3 Upon completion of the Work, after cleaning is carried out.
.4 Notify Construction Manager, Consultant 48 hours in advance of date
and time of visits.
.5 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work,
in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and
submit Manufacturer's Field Reports
.4 Prepare inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING
.1 Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces.
08 44 13.docx Stantec GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
RM of Headingley Section 08 44 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
Page 9 of 9

.2 Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft,
clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
.3 Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to
sealant manufacturer.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

.1 Protect finished Work from damage.

END OF SECTION

08 44 13.docx Stantec GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

RM of Headingley Section 08 51 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing: system perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
.2 Section 08 80 50 - Glazing: insulating glass units.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Aluminum Association (AA), Designation System for Aluminum Finishes
.2 American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
.1 AAMA 609 & 610, Cleaning and Maintenance Guide for Architectural Finished
Aluminum (Combined Document)
.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CAN/CGSB-1.40, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer.
.4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA) International
.1 CSA-A440/A440.1, A440, Windows / Special Publication A440.1, User
Selection Guide to CSA Standard A440, Windows.
.2 CAN/CSA-G164, Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Shop drawings. Indicate materials and details in full size scale for head, jamb and sill,
profiles of components, interior and exterior trim, junction between combination units
elevations of unit, anchorage details, location of isolation coating, description of related
components and exposed finishes fasteners, and caulking. Indicate location of
manufacturer's nameplates.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Site verification: verify site conditions and rough openings prior to window fabrication.
.2 Installer qualifications: minimum five (5) years Canadian experience in successful
installation of work of type and quality indicated. Submit proof of experience upon
Consultant's request.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide maintenance data for windows for incorporation into manual specified in Section
01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.6 WARRANTY
.1 Provide manufacturer's warranty for aluminum curtain wall against leakage, defects and
malfunction under normal usage for two years from date of project completion.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Materials: to CSA-A440/A440.1 supplemented as follows:
.2 All windows by same manufacturer.

08 51 13 Stantec ALUMINUM WINDOWS

RM of Headingley Section 08 51 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Page 2 of 5
.3 Main frame: extruded aluminum, thermally broken.
.4 Exterior metal sills: brake formed aluminum sheet metal of type and size as detailed;
minimum .813 mm (20 GA) thick, complete with joint covers, jamb drip deflectors,
chairs, anchors. Same finish and colour as frames.
.5 Aluminum flashings and trim: brake formed aluminum sheet metal of type and size as
detailed; minimum 0.813 mm (20 GA) thick. Same finish and colour as frames.
.6 Fasteners: stainless steel, 300 or 400 Series, of sufficient size and quantity to perform
their intended function. Head colour matched to frames where exposed. Use stainless
steel fasteners for frame assembly and installation.
.7 Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint.
.8 Joint sealants: as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing.
.9 Primer for steel: to CAN/CGSB-1.40

2.2 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

.1 Glass and insulating glass units: as specified in Section 08 80 50 - Glazing.
.2 Glazing accessories (lock strip gaskets, splines, tapes, setting blocks): type recommended
by window manufacturer.

2.3 WINDOW TYPE AND CLASSIFICATION

.1 Type: fixed with insulating glass.
.1 Acceptable material: Kawneer Isoport 516; Alumicor TrueLine 900 Series or
approved equal.
.2 Classification rating: to CSA-A440/A440.1: fixed:
.1 Air tightness: Fixed.
.2 Water tightness: B7.
.3 Wind load resistance: C5.
.4 Condensation resistance: Temperature Index, If 71.4.
.3 Condensation resistance values listed above are derived from test procedures conducted
in accordance with CSA-A440/A440.1 using 25 mm thick dual glazed insulating glass
units, clear float glass, Low E coating on No. 2 surface, thermal spacers and argon gas
fill.

2.4 FABRICATION
.1 Fabricate in accordance with CSA-A440/A440.1 supplemented as follows:
.2 Fabricate units square and true with maximum tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 mm for
units with a diagonal measurement of 1800 mm or less and plus or minus 3 mm for units
with a diagonal measurement over 1800 mm.
.3 Face dimensions detailed are maximum permissible sizes.
.4 Brace frames to maintain squareness and rigidity during shipment and installation.
.5 Make allowances for deflection of structure. Ensure that structural loads are not
transmitted to aluminum work.
.6 Provide structural steel reinforcement for strength, stiffness and connections.
.7 Fit intersecting members to flush hairline weather tight joints and mechanically fasten
together except where indicated otherwise.

08 51 13 Stantec ALUMINUM WINDOWS

RM of Headingley Section 08 51 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Page 3 of 5
.8 Conceal fastenings from view. Exposed fastenings where indicated.
.9 Allow for drainage to the exterior, any moisture entering joints and/or any condensation
occurring within frame construction using pressure-equalization “Rainscreen Principal”.
.10 Glazing pockets vented, pressure equalized and drained to exterior of frame.
.11 Glass stops: lock-in screwless type.
.12 Manufacturer's nameplates on exposed locations not permitted.

2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES

.1 Finish exposed surfaces of aluminum components in accordance with DAF-45 -
Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.
.1 Clear anodic finish: designation AA-M12C22A41, Class I.
.2 Finish all brake formed or cold rolled sheet aluminum after forming to prevent cracking
of paint finishes. Only minor bending and forming to fit pieces on site will be permitted.
Replace components that show cracking, peeling or other damage to finished surfaces at
no additional cost to the Contract.

2.6 STEEL FINISHES

.1 Finish steel members and reinforcement with shop coat primer to CAN/CGSB-1.40 or
380 g/m2 zinc coating to CAN/CSA-G164.

2.7 ISOLATION COATING

.1 Isolate aluminum from following components, by means of isolation coating: dissimilar
metals except stainless steel, zinc, or white bronze of small area; concrete, mortar and
masonry; wood.

2.8 GLAZING
.1 Glaze windows in accordance with CSA-A440/A440.1 and manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Glaze windows with flexible glazing gaskets, heat welded at corners, allowing glass
replacement without putty or other glazing compounds.
.3 Glaze windows with insulating glass units specified in Section 08 80 50 - Glazing.

2.9 AIR BARRIER

.1 Equip window frames with factory installed air barrier material for sealing to building air
barrier as follows:
.1 Material: to provide required air tightness and vapour diffusion control
throughout exterior envelope assembly.
.2 Material width: adequate to provide required air tightness and vapour diffusion
control to building air barrier from interior.
.2 Where windows are installed from exterior (before cladding, masonry veneer) window
manufacturer, at their option, may equip windows with aluminum nailing flange allowing
sealing of building air barriers to perimeter frames from exterior side of openings.
Coordinate with Contractor for installation sequence with adjacent work and wall
finishes.

08 51 13 Stantec ALUMINUM WINDOWS

RM of Headingley Section 08 51 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Page 4 of 5
Part 3 Execution

3.1 WINDOW INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with CSA-A440/A440.1, and manufacturer's instructions.
.2 Arrange components to prevent abrupt variation in colour.
.3 Install windows in prepared openings plumb, level, free of warp, twist or superimposed
loads. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
.4 Anchor securely to adjacent construction without causing detrimental effects to
appearance or performance.
.5 After installation touch up all scratched or damaged finishes with materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer.

3.2 SILL INSTALLATION

.1 Install metal sills with uniform wash to exterior, level in length, straight in alignment
with plumb upstands and faces.
.2 Use one piece length at each location.
.3 Cut sills to fit window opening.
.4 Secure sills in place with anchoring devices located at ends, joints of continuous sills and
evenly spaced 400 mm on centre in between.
.5 Fasten expansion joint cover plates and drip deflectors with self-tapping stainless steel
screws.
.6 Maintain 6 to 9 mm space between butt ends of continuous sills. For sills over 1200 mm
in length, maintain 3 to 6 mm space at each end.

3.3 SHIM SPACES:

.1 Shim spaces defined a joints or spaces between perimeter frames and adjacent
construction.
.2 Fill shim spaces with non-expanding spray foam sealant to maintain continuity of
building thermal barrier.

3.4 SEALING
.1 Seal joints between perimeter frames and adjacent construction. Apply sealant around full
perimeter of frame, on both the interior and exterior of building. Provide weather tight
seal at outside and air/vapour seal at inside.
.2 Seal joints between windows and window sills with sealant. Bed sill expansion joint
cover plates and drip deflectors in bedding compound. Caulk between sill upstand and
window-frame. Caulk butt joints in continuous sills.
.3 Apply sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing. Conceal sealant within
window units except where exposed use is permitted by Consultant.

3.5 CLEANING
.1 Perform cleaning of aluminum components in accordance with AAMA 609 & 610.
.2 Perform cleaning as soon as possible after installation to remove construction and
accumulated environmental dirt.

08 51 13 Stantec ALUMINUM WINDOWS

RM of Headingley Section 08 51 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Page 5 of 5
.3 Clean aluminum with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner.
.4 Remove traces of primer, caulking, epoxy and filler materials; clean doors and frames.
.5 Clean glass and glazing materials with non-abrasive glass cleaner.

END OF SECTION

08 51 13 Stantec ALUMINUM WINDOWS

RM of Headingley Section 08 71 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOOR HARDWARE
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 08 06 71 - Door Hardware Schedule.
.2 Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
.3 Division 26 - Electrical: electrical service for electric and electronic hardware.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufactures' Association (CSDFMA)
.1 Canadian Manufacturing Specification for Steel Doors and Frames.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Hardware List: vertical form hardware list indicating manufacturer, model, material,
function, finish and other pertinent information for each different type of hardware item
proposed for use.
.3 Shop Drawings:
.1 Submit shop drawings for electrified hardware. Identify manufacturer, model,
function, finish, options and other pertinent information. List each item
separately.
.2 Provide description of operation for each different hardware set or function.
.3 Include schematic wiring diagrams, electrical service requirements,
interconnection diagrams.
.4 Include parts lists and part numbers for each item.
.4 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2 Maintenance data: provide maintenance data and for door closers, door holders, locksets,
fire exit hardware, electrified hardware, for incorporation into maintenance manual.
Include manufacturer, make and model number, parts list, and information of proper care,
cleaning, and general maintenance of door hardware.
.3 Spare parts and maintenance materials: supply two sets of wrenches for door closers,
locksets, and fire exit hardware.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Regulatory Requirements: hardware for doors in fire separations and exit doors certified
by a Canadian Certification Organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Store finishing hardware in locked, clean and dry area.
.2 Package each item of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of
hardware. Label each package as to item definition and location.
.3 Maintain inventory list with hardware schedule.
08 71 00.docx Stantec DOOR HARDWARE
RM of Headingley Section 08 71 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOOR HARDWARE
Page 2 of 4

Part 2 Products

2.1 HARDWARE ITEMS

.1 Door hardware: as specified in Section 08 06 71 - Door Hardware Schedule.
.2 Use one manufacturer's products for all similar items.
.3 Supply hardware as specified. No substitutions will be permitted without prior written
approval of the Engineer.

2.2 TEMPLATES AND REINFORCING UNITS

.1 Supply all necessary templates, blueprints and reinforcing units to Subcontractors
requiring such items for completion of their portion of the Work.

2.3 LOCKSETS
.1 Bring in locksets from factory properly itemized as to keying and location.
.2 Except where indicated otherwise provide locksets with backsets as follows:
.1 Lever handles: 70 mm
.2 Knobs: 127 mm, except where door design doesn’t allow deep backset use 70
mm or as specified in Door Hardware Schedule.

2.4 BUTTS
.1 Provide doors up to and including 2150 mm in height and 900 mm in width with 1½ pair
butts, unless indicated otherwise.
.2 Provide doors over these sizes with two pair butts or as may be specified in Door
Hardware Schedule.

2.5 KICKPLATES
.1 Material: Type 304 stainless steel, satin finish, unless indicated otherwise. Metal
thickness (gauge) as specified.
.2 Sizes: width of plate less 40 mm on push side of door and 25 mm on pull side. Height of
plate as specified.
.3 Fasteners: oval head screws of same material and finish as kickplate being fastened.
.4 Provide on one side of door, unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 FASTENINGS
.1 Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for
satisfactory installation and operation of hardware.
.2 Use fasteners supplied by manufacturers with each specific hardware item only. No
substitutions will be permitted.
.3 Exposed fastening devices to match material and finish of hardware.
.4 Where pull is required on one side of door and push plate on other side provide fastening
devices so pull can be secured through door from reverse side. Install push plates to cover
fasteners.
.5 Include provisions for drilling push/pull plates to accept lock cylinder where both items
occur on the same door.
08 71 00.docx Stantec DOOR HARDWARE
RM of Headingley Section 08 71 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOOR HARDWARE
Page 3 of 4

.6 Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass.

2.7 KEYING
.1 Key all door locks alike to one master key.
.2 Provide four keys for every lock in this Contract.
.3 Stamp keying code numbers on keys and cylinders.
.4 Stamp “DO NOT DUPLICATE” on all keys.
.5 Deliver all keys to Engineer via registered mail.
.6 Package all keys in key gathering envelope with all information typed thereon.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical
bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation
instructions, and data sheets.
.2 Furnish door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for
preparation of their work to receive hardware.
.3 Furnish manufacturers' instructions for proper installation of each hardware component.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install hardware to standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with CSDFMA
Canadian Manufacturing Specification for Steel Doors and Frames.
.2 The following dimensions are only to be used as a general guide in the placement of
hardware. Where special items are concerned, or uncertainty exists, check with the
Engineer before fitting. Dimensions indicated are from finish floor to centre line of item,
except as noted.
.1 Knob Locksets: ........................ 1024 mm
.2 Push/Pull Plates: ...................... 1067 mm
.3 Guard Bars: .............................. 1092 mm
.4 Deadlock: ................................ 1220 mm
.5 Exit Device (to cross bar): ........ 1024 mm
.3 Push and pull plates: install 127 mm from edge of door to centre of plate, unless indicated
otherwise. Where pulls are mounted back-to-back use #5 mounting.

3.3 THRESHOLDS
.1 Install threshold plates level over entire length and width to ensure door bottom seals seal
properly to thresholds.
.2 Grout under thresholds with non-shrink grout to ensure solid and secure installation.
.3 At exterior openings provide two beads of urethane or silicone sealant under threshold
plates as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing.

3.4 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

.1 After work is complete adjust hardware for proper function.

08 71 00.docx Stantec DOOR HARDWARE

RM of Headingley Section 08 71 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOOR HARDWARE
Page 4 of 4

.2 After work is complete clean and polish hardware finishes. Remove dust, dirt, smudges
and other markings.

3.5 FINAL INSPECTION AND CERTIFICATION

.1 The hardware supplier shall, upon completion of the work, visit the job site, check the
installation of hardware, and certify in writing to the Engineer that the hardware, as
specified, has been correctly installed and is in proper working order.

END OF SECTION

08 71 00.docx Stantec DOOR HARDWARE

RM of Headingley Section 08 80 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZING
Page 1 of 9

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY
.1 Section Includes:
.1 Glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections
where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
.1 Windows.
.2 Doors.
.3 Glazed curtain wall framing.
.4 Aluminum interior windows.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants
.2 Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: For vision panels in steel doors and
frames.
.3 Section 08 44 13 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall: For insulated glazing units in curtain
wall.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
.1 ANSI/ASTM E330, Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
.2 ASTM International
.1 ASTM C542, Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets
.2 ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants
.3 ASTM D2240-15e1, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer
Hardness
.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CAN/CGSB-12.1, Glass, Safety, Tempered or Laminated
.2 CAN/CGSB-12.3, Glass, Polished Plate or Float, Flat, Clear
.3 CAN/CGSB-12.8, Insulating Glass Units
.4 CAN/CGSB-12.9, Glass, Spandrel
.5 CAN/CGSB-12.20-M89 Structural Design of Glass for Buildings
.4 Canadian Standards Group (CSA)
.1 CSA A500-16 (R22021), Building Guards
.5 Glass Association of North America (GANA)
.1 GANA Glazing Manual
.2 GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual

1.4 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Action Submittals:
.1 Product Data:

08 80 50.docx Stantec GLAZING

RM of Headingley Section 08 80 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZING
Page 2 of 9

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data

sheets for glass, sealants, and glazing accessories and include product
characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.2 Samples:
.1 Submit duplicate 300 by 300 mm size samples of insulating glass units
spandrel glass.
.2 Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with
performance and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
Delegated Design Professional, responsible for their preparation.
.4 Informational Submittals:
.1 Certificates: Submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying
materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and
physical requirements.
.2 Test Reports:
.1 Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
.2 Provide design stress analysis
.3 Submit testing and analysis of glass under provisions of Section 01 40 00
- Quality Requirements
.4 Submit shop inspection and testing for glass.
.5 Letters of Assurance: Delegated Design Professional who sealed the Shop Drawings must
submit to the Consultant, with the initial Shop Drawing submission, a Letter of
Assurance for “Structural Design” and a commitment for “Field Review”.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance data including cleaning
instructions for incorporation into maintenance manual.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with
specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.2 Mock-ups:
.1 Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality
Requirements.
.2 Build mock-ups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
.3 Provide mock-up at locations identified by Building Envelope Commissioning
Authority in Section 09 08 00 - Commissioning of Interior Conditioned Spaces.
.4 Do not continue with work of this Section until Building Envelope
Commissioning Authority has approved mock-up.
.5 Approval of mock-ups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mock-ups unless Consultant specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
.6 Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mock-ups may become part
of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

08 80 50.docx Stantec GLAZING

RM of Headingley Section 08 80 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZING
Page 3 of 9

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labeled with manufacturer's name and address.
.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1 Store materials off ground, indoors, in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
.2 Store and protect glazing and frames from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3 Protect prefinished aluminum surfaces with wrapping or strippable coating.
.4 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Comply with Section 07 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.

1.9 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Ambient Requirements:
.1 Install glazing when ambient temperature is 10°C minimum. Maintain ventilated
environment for 24 hours after application.
.2 Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after
installation of glazing compounds.

1.10 WARRANTY
.1 Provide warranties in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.
.2 Provide a written ten-year warranty from date of manufacture for insulating glass.
Warranty covers deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling,
installing, protecting and maintaining practices contrary to the glass manufacturer’s
published instructions.
.3 Provide a written twelve-year warranty from date of manufacture for insulating glass
thermal spacer. Warranty covers deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to
handling, installing, protecting and maintaining practices contrary to the glass
manufacturer’s published instructions.

Part 2 Products

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Performance Requirements:
.1 Provide continuity of building enclosure vapour and air barrier using glass and
glazing materials as follows:
.1 Utilize inner light of multiple light sealed units for continuity of air and
vapour seal.
.2 Size glass to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loads, dead loads and
positive and negative live loads as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM
E330 including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following:
.1 Defective manufacture, fabrication or installation.
.2 Failure of sealants.

08 80 50.docx Stantec GLAZING

RM of Headingley Section 08 80 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZING
Page 4 of 9

.3 Gaskets to remain watertight and airtight.

.4 Deterioration of glazing materials.
.5 Other defects in construction.
.3 Design glass units to withstand thermal stresses created by solar heat gain,
shadowing of exterior components or assemblies (soffits, sunshades, buildings,
trees) and elevated interstitial space temperatures and from solar heat gain.
.4 Reference 1/50 hourly wind for the location of the project, NBC.
.5 Solar Heat Gain Coefficient to triple plane units not higher than 0.30, for double
pane units not higher than 0.39.
.6 Limit glass deflection to L/175, flexural limit of glass with full recovery of
glazing materials
.7 Thermal Performance: According to NFRC 100, target U-Value: 2.0 W/(m2·°K).
.8 Delegated Design:
.1 Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to
CAN/CGSB-12.20 and NBCC by a qualified professional engineer.
.2 Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.
.3 Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
.4 Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and
surface temperature changes acting on glass framing member and glazing
components.
.5 Temperature Change: 85 deg C ambient.
.6 Design: Verify maximum glass sizes, thickness, strength, for glass types
specified to support design and maximum allowable uniform static loads
using design factor of 2.5 in accordance with CAN/CSGB 12.20.
.7 Design glass as guards where indicated to CSA A500.

2.2 MATERIALS: FLAT GLASS

.1 General:
.1 Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain coated float glass, and insulating glass from
single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
.2 Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-
strengthened heat-treated float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to
comply with "Performance Requirements" article. Where heat-strengthened
glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float
glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" article. Where
fully tempered glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.
.3 Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that
complies with performance requirements and is not less than thickness indicated.
.2 Float Glass: CAN/CGSB-12.3, Glazing quality, thickness as specified by item.
.3 Safety Glass: CAN/CGSB-12.1:
.1 Type 1 - Laminated.
.1 Made up of two lights of glass bonded together with minimum 0.76 mm
thick coloured PVB interlayer
.1 Acceptable Products:
.1 Vanceva Colours by Saflex.
.2 Outer Light: Float glass, 3 mm thick.
.3 Inner Light: Float glass, 3 mm thick.
.4 Overall Thickness: 6.76 mm.
.2 Type 2 – Tempered / Rockglass:
.1 Class B - float.
08 80 50.docx Stantec GLAZING
RM of Headingley Section 08 80 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZING
Page 5 of 9

.2 Category 1.
.3 Edge Treatment for Exposed Edges: Ground.
.4 Edge Profile for Exposed Edges: Square with eased edges.
.4 Spandrel Glass: CAN/CGSB-12.9.
.1 Type 1 - Tempered.
.2 Class B - Sheet.
.3 Style 1 - Ceramic coated.
.4 Form: I - Insulating glass unit.
.5 Colour: Custom to match RGB 129, 78, 87.
.6 Acceptable Products: Vitro Architectural Glass.
.5 Low Emissivity (Low E) Glass:
.1 Metallic Coating: Soft, sputtered.
.2 Visible Light Transmittance: 56%.
.3 Shading Co-efficient: 0.35.
.4 U-Value: Winter 0.6 maximum.
.5 Acceptable Product: SunGuard SNX-L 62/34.

2.3 MATERIALS: INSULATING GLASS UNITS

.1 Fabricate insulating glass units to CAN/CGSB-12.8.
.2 Sealed units shall be certified by Glass Association of North America (GANA).
.3 Thermal spacers for insulating glass units: triple seal design consisting of thermoset foam
spacer with integral desiccant, pre-applied adhesive, captive polyisobutylene primary
seal; with silicone perimeter seal. Standard colour black.
.1 Acceptable Products: Edgetech Super Spacer TriSeal.
.4 Edge delete coated glass in contact with spacers to ensure maximum spacer to glass seal.
.5 Interior Insulated Double-Glazed Units (IGU-1):
.1 To CAN/CGSB-12.8, double unit, 25 mm overall thickness.
.2 Glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.3 all lights.
.3 Glass thickness: 6 mm each light.
.4 Inter-cavity space thickness: 13 mm.
.5 Glazing Colour: Both Lites Clear, tempered
.6 Exterior Insulated Double-Glazed Units (IGU-2):
.1 To CAN/CGSB-12.8, double unit, 25 mm overall thickness.
.2 Glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.3 all lights.
.3 Glass thickness: 6 mm each light.
.4 Inter-cavity space thickness: 13 mm.
.5 Glass coating: surface number 3, low "E".
.6 Thermal spacers: Edgetech Super Spacer Architectural Series or equivalent.
.7 Inert gas fill: argon
.8 Glazing Colour:
.1 Exterior Lite: Energy Select 25 Pure Grey, PPG Solarban 60, Rockglass
tempered.
.2 Interior Lite: Clear, tempered.
.7 Exterior Insulated Double-Glazed Units (IGU-3 / Spandrel):
.1 Double unit, spandrel, 24.7 mm overall thickness.
.2 Glass:
.1 Outer Light: Rockglass tempered.

08 80 50.docx Stantec GLAZING

RM of Headingley Section 08 80 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZING
Page 6 of 9

.1 Glass Coating: Low-E on surface number 2.

.2 Inner Light: Heat-strengthened.
.3 Glass thickness: 6 mm minimum each light.
.4 Inter-cavity space thickness: 12.7 mm with low conductivity spacers.
.5 Inert Gas Fill: 90% argon, 10% air.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
.1 Insulated Back Pan:
.1 20-gauge galvanized sheet.
.2 Mineral Wool Rigid Insulation:
.1 Non-combustible, semi-rigid, water repellent, mineral wool insulation
board to ASTM C612, Type IVB.
.1 Acceptable Product: Rockwool Curtainrock 40.
.2 Thickness: To match depth of curtain wall back section.
.2 Sealant Compound: ASTM C920, non-sag, gun-grade, compatible with edge sealants of
insulating glass units, colour black.
.3 Primer-Sealers and Cleaners: Glass manufacturer's standard.
.4 Setting Blocks: Silicone, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, length of
25 mm for each one square meter of glazing, minimum length 100 mm x width of glazing
rabbet space less 1.5 mm by height to suit glazing method, glass light weight and area.
Compatible with edge sealants on insulating glass units.
.5 Spacer Shims: Silicone, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, 75 mm
long x one half height of glazing stop x thickness to suit application. Self-adhesive on one
face. Compatible with edge sealants on insulating glass units.
.6 Glazing Splines: Resilient silicone, extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot,
colour as selected by Consultant.
.7 Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
.8 Lock-strip Gaskets: ASTM C542.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: Comply with man manufacturer's written data, including product technical
bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation
instructions, and data sheets.

3.2 EXAMINATION
.1 Verify openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
.2 Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready
to receive glazing.
.3 Verification of Conditions: Verify conditions of substrates previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for glazing installation in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.1 Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
.2 Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of
obstructions, and ready to receive glazing.
08 80 50.docx Stantec GLAZING
RM of Headingley Section 08 80 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZING
Page 7 of 9

.3 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Construction Manager.

.4 Inform Consultant of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
.5 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Construction Manager

3.3 PREPARATION
.1 Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
.2 Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
.3 Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

3.4 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR – DRY METHOS (PREFORMED GLAZING)

.1 Perform work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation
methods.
.2 Cut glazing spline to length; install on glazing light. Seal corners by butting spline and
sealing junctions with sealant.
.3 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners.
.4 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to
attain full contact.
.5 Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full
continuous contact.
.6 Trim protruding tape edge.

3.5 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND

SEALANT)
.1 Perform work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation
methods.
.2 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 6 mm below sight line. Seal
corners by butting tape and dabbing with sealant.
.3 Apply heel bead of sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full
perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete continuity of air and vapour seal.
.4 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners.
.5 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel head of sealant with
sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of light or glass unit.
.6 Install removable stops with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops 6
mm below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing light or unit with tape 16 mm below
sight line.
.7 Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing,
maximum 9 mm below sight line.
.8 Apply cap head of sealant along void between stop and glazing, to uniform line, flush
with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

3.6 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR – WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT)

.1 Perform work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods.

08 80 50.docx Stantec GLAZING

RM of Headingley Section 08 80 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZING
Page 8 of 9

.2 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing light or unit.
.3 Install removable stops with glazing centred in space by inserting spacer shims both sides
at 600 mm intervals, 6 mm below sight line.
.4 Fill gaps between glazing and stops with sealant to depth of bite on glazing, maximum 9
mm below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue air and vapour seal.
.5 Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

3.7 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR – DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)

.1 Perform work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation
methods.
.2 Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above sight
line.
.3 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners.
.4 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of light
or unit.
.5 Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described in above.
.6 Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full
continuous contact.
.7 Knife trim protruding tape.

3.8 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)

.1 Perform work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation
methods.
.2 Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above
sight line.
.3 Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners.
.4 Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of
light or unit.
.5 Install removable stops, with spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at
600 mm intervals, 6 mm below sight line.
.6 Fill gaps between light and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to
uniform and level line.
.7 Trim protruding tape edge.

3.9 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR WET METHOD (COMPOUND AND

COMPOUND)
.1 Perform work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation
methods.
.2 Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and centre light by use of
spacer shims at 600 mm centres, 6 mm below sight line.
.3 Locate and secure glazing light using glazers' clips.

08 80 50.docx Stantec GLAZING

RM of Headingley Section 08 80 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GLAZING
Page 9 of 9

.4 Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line.
Tool surface to straight line.

3.10 CLEANING
.1 Progress Cleaning: Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.2 Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
.1 Remove traces of primer, caulking.
.2 Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
.3 Remove labels.
.4 Clean glass and mirrors using approved non-abrasive cleaner in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
.3 Final Cleaning: Upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.

3.11 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

.1 Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
.2 After installation, mark each light with an "X" by using removable plastic tape or paste.
.1 Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.
.3 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by glazing installation.

3.12 SCHEDULE
.1 Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
.1 Interior Doors and Frames - Not Fire Rated:
.1 Glass: Safety glass tempered, 6 mm thick.
.2 Glazing Method: As specified in this Section.
.2 Interior Doors and Frames - Fire Rated:
.1 Glass: Fire-resistant glass as specified in Section 08 88 13.
.2 Glazing Method: As specified in Section 08 88 13.
.2 Section 08 44 13 – Exterior Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall
.1 Glass - Vision Lights: IGU-2 insulating glass units.
.1 Glazing Method: As specified in this section.
.2 Glass - Vision Lights: IGU-3 insulating spandrel glass units.
.1 Glazing Method: As specified in this section.
.2 Complete with insulated back pan.
.3 Section 08 51 13 – Interior Aluminum Windows
.1 Glass - Vision Lights: IGU-1 insulating glass units.
.1 Glazing Method: As specified in this section.

END OF SECTION

08 80 50.docx Stantec GLAZING

DIVISION 09

FINISHES
RM of Headingley Section 09 21 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Page 1 of 7

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 09 22 16 - Non-structural Metal Framing.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1 ASTM C475/C475M, Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for
Finishing Gypsum Board.
.2 ASTM C840, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum
Board.
.3 ASTM C1002, Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for
the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs
or Steel Studs.
.4 ASTM C1047, Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard
and Gypsum Veneer Base.
.5 ASTM C1178/C1178M, Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-
Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel.
.6 ASTM C1396/C1396M, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CAN/CGSB-51.34, Vapour Barrier, Polyethylene Sheet, for Use in Building
Construction.
.2 CAN/CGSB-71.25, Adhesives, for Bonding Drywall to Wood Framing and
Metal Studs.
.3 Gypsum Association (GA)
.1 GA-214, Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Product data: provide manufacturer’s technical data and brochures for specified
materials, including detail drawings and installation instructions.
.3 Certificates: provide a letter of certification from the gypsum board manufacturer
indicating that the products supplied for this project do not contain hydrogen sulphide,
sulphur dioxide, sulphur or any sulphur byproducts.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing manufacturers
brand name and identification.
.2 Store materials inside, level, under cover. Keep dry. Protect from weather, other elements
and damage from construction operations and other causes.
.3 Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. Protect metal
accessories and trim from being bent or damaged.

09 21 16.docx Stantec GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

RM of Headingley Section 09 21 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Page 2 of 7

1.5 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Maintain temperature minimum 10º C, maximum 21º C for 48 hours prior to and during
application of gypsum boards and joint treatment, and for at least 48 hours after
completion of joint treatment.
.2 Apply board and joint treatment to dry, frost free surfaces.
.3 Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove excess moisture that would
prevent drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Gypsum board materials supplied for use on this project shall not contain hydrogen
sulphide, sulphur dioxide, sulphur or any sulphur byproducts.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 The following manufacturers of gypsum board are deemed to be acceptable for the
supply of gypsum board for this project:
.1 Canadian Gypsum Company (US Gypsum).
.2 Certainteed Gypsum Canada Inc.
.3 Georgia Pacific.
.4 Westroc Inc.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD

.1 Standard board: to ASTM C1396/C1396M, regular and Type X, thickness indicated,
1200 mm wide x maximum practical length, ends square cut, edges bevelled.
.2 Backing board and coreboard: to ASTM C1396/C1396M, regular and fire-rated,
thickness indicated, squared edges.
.3 Water resistant board: to ASTM C1396/C1396M, regular and fire-rated, thickness
indicated, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length.

2.3 METAL FURRING AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

.1 Metal furring, runners, hangers, tie wires, inserts, anchors: to ASTM C1280, galvanized.
.2 Drywall furring channels: 25 gauge galvanized steel channels for screw attachment of
gypsum board.
.3 Wire hangers: minimum 12 gauge galvanized mild steel.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
.1 Steel drill screws: to ASTM C1002, corrosion resistant for water resistant board, tile
backer board, exterior sheathing.
.2 Stud adhesive: to CAN/CGSB-71.25, ASTM C557.
.3 Laminating compound: as recommended by manufacturer, asbestos free.
.4 Casing beads, corner beads fill type: to ASTM C1047, 25 gauge commercial grade sheet
steel, zinc coated, perforated flanges; one piece length per location. Plastic casing bead
and corner beads not acceptable.

09 21 16.docx Stantec GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

RM of Headingley Section 09 21 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Page 3 of 7

.5 Cornice cap: 12 mm deep x partition width, of 16 gauge galvanized sheet steel, prime
painted. Include splice plates for joints.
.6 Joint compound and paper joint tape: to ASTM C475/C475M, asbestos free.
.7 Acoustical sealant: as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing.
.8 Polyethylene: to CAN/CGSB-51.34, 0.15 mm.
.9 Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant, 3 mm thick closed cell neoprene strip, 12
mm wide, with self sticking permanent adhesive on one face, lengths as required.

2.5 SOUND ATTENUATION BATT INSULATION

.1 To ASTM C665 Type 1, CAN/ULC-S702 Type 1, unfaced mineral fibre.
.2 Acceptable products: Owens Corning Sound Attenuation Fire Batts/ Mineral Wool, Johns
Mansville Sound-Shield, CGC Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets; Rockwool
AFB.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 ERECTION
.1 Do application and finishing of gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 except
where specified otherwise.
.2 Install ceiling boards in direction that will minimize number of end-butt joints. Stagger
end joints at least 250 mm.
.3 Install gypsum board on walls vertically to avoid end-butt joints. At stairwells and similar
high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs, except where
local codes or fire-rated assemblies require vertical application.
.4 Install gypsum board with face side out.
.5 Do not install damaged or damp boards.
.6 Locate edge or end joints over supports. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on
opposite sides of wall.

3.2 SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS

.1 Erect hangers and runner channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings in accordance
with ASTM C840, except where indicated or specified otherwise.
.2 Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm
of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture.
.3 Install work level to tolerance of 1:1200
.4 Provide additional ceiling suspension hangers to support all items suspended from
ceilings such as grilles, diffusers, etc. Refer to drawings and specifications and co-
ordinate with other trades for specific items.
.5 Frame with furring channels, perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures,
diffusers, grilles.
.6 Install 20 mm x 64 mm furring channels parallel to, and at exact locations of steel stud
partition header track.

09 21 16.docx Stantec GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

RM of Headingley Section 09 21 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Page 4 of 7

.7 Provide casing beads around perimeter of suspended gypsum board ceilings and adjacent
walls. Make joint tight fitting to wall.
.8 Furr for gypsum board faced vertical bulkheads within or at termination of ceilings.

3.3 WALL FURRING

.1 Install wall furring for gypsum board wall finishes in accordance with ASTM C840,
except where indicated otherwise.
.2 Frame openings and around built-in equipment on four sides. Extend furring into reveals.
Check clearances with equipment suppliers.
.3 Furr duct shafts, beams, columns, pipes and exposed services where indicated.

3.4 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION

.1 Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, anchors, blocking, sound attenuation, electrical
and mechanical work are approved.
.2 Apply single layer gypsum board to furring or framing using screw fasteners. Apply
double layer gypsum board to furring or framing using screw fasteners for first layer,
laminating adhesive for second layer. Maximum spacing of screws 300 mm on centre.
.1 Single-Layer Application:
.1 Apply gypsum board on ceilings prior to application of walls in
accordance with ASTM C840.
.2 Apply gypsum board vertically or horizontally, providing sheet lengths
that will minimize end joints.
.2 Double-Layer Application:
.1 Install gypsum board for base layer and exposed gypsum board for face
layer.
.2 Apply base layer to ceilings prior to base layer application on walls;
apply face layers in same sequence. Offset joints between layers at least
250 mm.
.3 Apply base layers at right angles to supports unless otherwise indicated.
.4 Apply base layer on walls and face layers vertically with joints of base
layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 250 mm with base
layer joints.
.3 Apply single and double layer of gypsum board to concrete and concrete block surfaces,
where indicated, using laminating adhesive.
.1 Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Brace or fasten gypsum board until fastening adhesive has set.
.3 Mechanically fasten gypsum board at top and bottom of each sheet.
.4 Install gypsum board full height of stud framing where studs extend to underside of
overhead structures, floors or roof decks, except where otherwise indicated.
.5 Where gypsum board is installed above finished ceilings, fit work tight to all items
penetrating through gypsum board. Seal around full perimeter of items with sealant. For
fire rated assemblies and smoke barriers use fire stopping in accordance with Section 07
84 00 - Fire Stopping, and acoustical sealant elsewhere.

3.5 FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES

.1 Construct fire rated assemblies where indicated

09 21 16.docx Stantec GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

RM of Headingley Section 09 21 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Page 5 of 7

.2 Apply Type X (fire rated) gypsum board where indicated, to obtain fire ratings as
indicated or required.
.3 For fire rated partitions and ceilings apply first and second layers with screw fasteners.
No adhesives permitted. Screw spacing as follows:
.1 Ceilings: 150 mm on centre around perimeter and 300 mm on centre in field of
sheet.
.2 Walls: 200 mm on centre around perimeter and 300 mm on centre in field of
sheet.
.4 At door and window openings in fire rated walls and partitions install gypsum board filler
full width and length of opening to cover stud header as specified in National Building
Code.
.5 Install ceiling boards in direction that will minimize number of end-butt joints. Stagger
end joints at least 250 mm.
.6 Install gypsum board on walls vertically to avoid end-butt joints. At stairwells and similar
high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs, except where
local codes or fire-rated assemblies require vertical application.
.7 Install gypsum board with face side out.
.8 Do not install damaged or damp boards.
.9 Locate edge or end joints over supports. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on
opposite sides of wall.

3.6 WATER RESISTANT GYPSUM BOARD

.1 Provide water resistant gypsum board where indicated and in the following locations:
.1 Behind and adjacent to mop sinks, janitor sinks, floor sinks, washrooms and
showers.
.2 Use corrosion resistant fasteners and accessories for installation of water resistant
gypsum board.
.3 Seal exposed edges, ends, and cut outs that expose gypsum core with waterproof flexible
sealant.
.4 Fill and seal around openings for pipes, fittings and fixtures with waterproof flexible
sealant.

3.7 ACCESSORIES
.1 Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces
wherever possible. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit
corners accurately, free from rough edges.
.2 Secure casing beads, corner beads and trim with screws. Staples and crimping not
permitted. Secure at 300 mm on centre.
.3 Install casing beads around perimeter of suspended ceilings and bulkheads, around
openings and where gypsum board abuts a dissimilar material.
.4 Install casing beads where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim concealing
junction and elsewhere indicated.
.5 Seal joints with acoustic sealant.

09 21 16.docx Stantec GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

RM of Headingley Section 09 21 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Page 6 of 7

.6 Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board and casing beads abutting
metal window and exterior door frames, to provide thermal break.

3.8 CONTROL JOINTS

.1 Construct control joints set in gypsum board facing and supported independently on both
sides of joint.
.1 For joints moving in only one plane use preformed units.
.2 For joints moving in multiple planes use back-to-back casing beads.
.2 Install continuous 6 mil polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints.
.3 Install control joints, plumb, straight and true with not more than 1 mm gap.
.4 Use gypsum board with tapered edges on both sides of control joint. Tape, fill and sand
casing beads flush with adjacent surface.
.5 Locate control joints where indicated, and at the following locations:
.1 where partitions or furring abuts a structural element or dissimilar wall or ceiling.
.2 where a ceiling or bulkhead abuts a structural element or dissimilar wall or other
vertical penetration.
.3 construction changes within plane of the partition or ceiling.
.4 partition or furring runs exceed 9 m.
.5 wings of “L”, “U” and “T” shaped ceiling areas are joined.
.6 ceiling dimensions exceed 15 m for gypsum board in either direction
.7 expansion or control joints occur in structural elements of the building.
.6 On walls locate control joints over door and window openings wherever possible. Align
control joint with corner of frames.

3.9 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Install access doors to electrical and mechanical fixtures specified in respective Sections.
.2 Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems

3.10 GYPSUM BOARD FINISHING

.1 Do taping and filling to ASTM C840, except where indicated otherwise.
.2 Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint
compound, joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's
directions and feathered out onto panel faces.
.3 Finish corner beads, control joints and trim as required with two coats of joint compound
and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces.
.4 Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent
surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after painting is completed.
.5 Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent
surface of board.
.6 Sanding not require behind solid finishes and above finished ceilings.
.7 Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects
and ready for painting or other thin finish coating including fabric wall coverings.

09 21 16.docx Stantec GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

RM of Headingley Section 09 21 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Page 7 of 7

3.11 GYPSUM BOARD FINISH LEVELS

.1 Finish gypsum board in accordance with the following finish levels for specific areas
indicated.
.2 Finish levels as defined in GA-214.
.3 Where a fire resistance rating is required for the gypsum board assembly, details of
construction and finishing shall be in accordance with reports of fire tests of assemblies
that have met the fire-rating requirement, regardless of the finish level specified below.
.4 Level 4:
.1 All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and
shall be immediately wiped with a joint knife or trowel, leaving a thin coating of
joint compound over all joints and interior angles. In addition, two separate coats
of joint compound shall be applied over all flat joints and one separate coat of
joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall
be covered with three separate coats of joint compound. All joint compounds
shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
.2 Locations: where gypsum board is to be painted.

END OF SECTION

09 21 16.docx Stantec GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

RM of Headingley Section 09 22 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 09 21 16 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1 ASTM C645, Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners
(Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board.
.2 ASTM C754, Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members
to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.
.2 The Association of Wall and Ceiling Contractors of British Columbia (AWCC)
.1 Wall and Ceiling Specification Standards Manual.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Non-loadbearing channel stud framing: to ASTM C645, roll formed from hot dipped
galvanized steel sheet, for screw attachment of gypsum board. Knock-out service holes at
460 mm centres.
.1 Minimum base steel thickness (gauge) as follows:
.1 General interior framing: 0.46 mm (25 gauge).
.2 Jamb studs: 0.84 mm (light duty 20 gauge).
.2 Stud widths: 64 mm, 92 mm, 152 mm as indicated on the drawings.
.2 Floor and ceiling tracks: to ASTM C 645, in widths to suit stud sizes, 32 mm flange
height. Same base steel thickness as studs being fastened to tracks.
.3 Metal channel stiffener: 38 x 20 mm x 1.5 mm (16 gauge) base steel thickness, cold
rolled steel, galvanized.
.4 Angle clips: for attachment of channel stiffeners, roll formed steel angles, 38 x 38 mm x
0.84 mm.
.5 Acoustical sealant: as specified in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing.
.6 Insulating/acoustic strip: rubberized, moisture resistant 6 mm thick PVC closed cell foam
strip, 19 mm width, with self sticking adhesive on one face.
.7 Ceiling clips: purpose made steel clips for attaching top tracks to underside of exposed T-
bar suspension systems without causing damage to T-bar.
.1 Acceptable material: Revoe Partition Ceiling Clip.

2.2 STUD LIMITING HEIGHTS

.1 Calculate limiting heights of metal studs in accordance with AWCC Wall and Ceiling
Specification Manual, Table 9.7/5 based on a lateral pressure of 240 Pa and deflection
limit of L/360.
.2 Increase stud spacing and/or base steel thickness (gauge) where limiting heights are
exceeded.

09 22 16.docx Stantec NON-STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING

RM of Headingley Section 09 22 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING
Page 2 of 3

Part 3 Execution

3.1 ERECTION
.1 Install non-loadbearing wall framing to ASTM C754.
.2 Erect metal studding to tolerance of 1:1000.
.3 Align partition tracks at floor and ceiling and secure at maximum 600 mm on centre.
.4 Install continuous insulating strip under stud shoe tracks of partitions on slabs on grade.
.5 Install continuous insulating strips to isolate studs from non-insulated surfaces.
.6 Place studs vertically at 400 mm on centre, except where indicated otherwise, and not
more than 50 mm from abutting walls, and at each side of openings and corners.
.7 Extend studs to underside of structure, floor or roof decks, except where indicated
otherwise.
.8 Where partitions extend to underside of suspended acoustical tile ceiling systems secure
top tracks to T-bar grid members with ceiling clips. Do not secure fasteners directly
through top tracks into T-bar grid components.
.9 Coordinate simultaneous erection of studs with installation of service lines. When
erecting studs ensure web openings are aligned.
.10 Coordinate erection of studs with installation of door/window frames and special
supports or anchorage for work specified in other Sections.
.11 Attach studs to bottom and ceiling track using screws.
.12 Expansion control:
.1 Maintain clearance under beams, structural slabs, floor and roof decks to avoid
transmission of structural loads to studs.
.2 Use slotted track as indicated on Structural Drawings. Allow for minimum 25
mm clearance.
.13 Provide two 0.84 mm (20 gauge) jamb studs at door, window and other openings. Extend
jamb studs full height of partition.
.14 Erect track at head of door/window openings and sills of sidelight/window openings to
accommodate intermediate studs. Secure track to studs at each end, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Install intermediate studs above and below openings in same
manner and spacing as wall studs.
.15 Frame openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on four sides.
Extend framing into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers.
.16 Provide stud secured between studs for attachment of fixtures behind lavatory basins,
toilet and bathroom accessories, and other fixtures including grab bars and towel rails,
attached to steel stud partitions. Use same size stud as wall framing.
.17 Provide steel studs or furring channel between studs for attaching electrical and other
boxes.
.18 Install studs secured between studs for attachment of wall hung cabinets attached to steel
stud partitions. Use same size stud as wall framing, minimum size 90 mm.
.19 Cross brace steel studs as required to provide rigid installation to manufacturer's
instructions.

09 22 16.docx Stantec NON-STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING

RM of Headingley Section 09 22 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING
Page 3 of 3

.20 Install steel channel stiffeners above door/window openings, extending 800 mm (two
studs) beyond both sides of opening. Attach stiffeners to each stud with bridging clips
using self-tapping sheet metal screws.

3.2 SOUND INSULATED/ACOUSTICALLY RATED PARTITIONS

.1 Install foam gasket acoustic tape behind top and tracks of sound insulated and
acoustically rated partitions. Compress in joint between track and floor and ceiling.
Apply gasket to top of track before placing in position.
.2 Install foam gasket acoustic tape behind end studs of sound rated partitions.
.3 Compress tape between in joint between track and stud and floor, wall or ceiling before
placing in position.

END OF SECTION

09 22 16.docx Stantec NON-STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING

RM of Headingley Section 09 51 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED WORK

.1 Mechanical and electrical fixtures in acoustical tile ceilings.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1 ASTM C635, Specifications for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile
and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.
.2 ASTM C636, Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels.

1.3 DESIGN CRITERIA

.1 Maximum deflection of L/360 of span to ASTM C635 deflection test
.2 Finished ceiling suspension systems shall be square with adjoining walls and level within
1:1000
.3 Complete suspension systems shall support all superimposed loads, such as lighting
fixtures, diffusers grilles and speakers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Product data: manufacturers' product data for each specified acoustical tile describing
physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns, colours.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Do not commence installation until after building enclosed and dust generating activities
completed.
.2 Permit wet work to dry before commencement of installation.
.3 Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15°C humidity of 20 - 40% before and during
installation.
.4 Allow materials to acclimatize to local ambient conditions before installation.

1.6 UNUSED TILES

.1 All unused tiles from open cartons become the property of the Owner. Package and store
on site where directed.

Part 2 Products

2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

.1 Intermediate duty system to ASTM C635.
.2 Basic materials for suspension system: commercial quality cold rolled steel.
.3 Suspension system: non-fire rated, made up as follows:
.1 Two directional, exposed tee bar grid.

09 51 00.docx Stantec ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

RM of Headingley Section 09 51 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
Page 2 of 3

.4 Exposed tee bar grid components:

.1 Components dye cut.
.2 Main tee with double web, rectangular bulb and rolled cap on exposed face.
.3 Exposed face width: nominal 25 mm.
.4 Cross tee with rectangular bulb, exposed face same width as main tees, web
extended to form positive interlock with main tee webs, lower flange extended
and offset to provide flush intersection.
.5 Finish: shop painted satin sheen white.
.5 Accessories: splices, clips, wire ties, retainers to complement suspension system
components, as recommended by system manufacturer.
.6 Hanger wire: galvanized soft annealed steel wire, minimum 2.6 mm diameter.
.7 Hanger inserts: purpose made.

2.2 PERIMETER TRIM SYSTEM

.1 Fabricated of sheet steel, factory finished, complete with accessories and mounting
hardware.
.1 Trim height: nominal 152 mm.
.2 Colour: white.
.3 Acceptable material: CGC Compasso.

2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES

.1 Acoustical Ceiling Tiles: wet-formed mineral fibre lay-in panels, size 610 x 610 x 16
mm, square edge, colour white.
.1 Acceptable material: Armstrong Dune; CGC Radar; CertainTeed Baroque.
.2 Provide the following minimum requirements: NRC (0.50), CAC (35), Class A Fire
Rating, Light Reflectance (0.85).

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Do not install acoustical units until work above ceilings is complete, and is reviewed by
Engineer.

3.2 INSTALLATION: SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

.1 Install suspension systems in accordance with ASTM C636, except where indicated
otherwise.
.2 Install suspension system to manufacturer's instructions and Certification Organizations
tested design requirements.
.3 Do not erect ceiling suspension system until work above ceilings is complete.
.4 Secure hangers to overhead structures using attachment methods acceptable to Engineer.
Do not secure grid systems from ductwork, piping, conduit or other equipment above
ceilings.
.5 Install hangers spaced at maximum 1200 mm centres and within 150 mm from ends of
main tees.
.6 Lay out system in accordance with reflected ceiling plans, parallel to building lines.

09 51 00.docx Stantec ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

RM of Headingley Section 09 51 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS
Page 3 of 3

.7 Coordinate installation of suspension system components with location of related

components.
.8 Install to correct ceiling height.
.9 Support light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, etc. with additional suspension hangers within
150 mm of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture.
.10 Interlock cross members to main runner to provide rigid assembly.
.11 Frame at openings for light fixtures, air diffusers, speakers, and other items installed in
ceilings, and at changes in ceiling heights.

3.3 INSTALLATION: PERIMETER TRIM SYSTEM

.1 Install perimeter trim system in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, straight,
aligned and level to tolerance of 1:1000.
.2 Layout trim system to sizes and profiles indicated. Provide tight, hairline joints.

3.4 INSTALLATION: ACOUSTICAL CEILING TILES

.1 Install acoustic units in ceiling suspension system.
.2 Do not use scratched, damaged, broken, or soiled units. Replace as required and as
directed.
.3 Co-ordinate ceiling work to accommodate components of other sections, such as light
fixtures, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads, to be built into acoustical ceiling
components.
.4 Scribe acoustic units to fit suspension grid and adjacent work. Cut out neatly and tight to
sprinklers heads and other fixtures within ceiling system. For tegular, reveal, or moulded
edge units scribe to match factory edge and paint exposed edge to match panel face.

3.5 CLEANING AND TOUCH UP

.1 Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in finished surfaces to satisfaction
of Engineer.
.2 Replace broken, scratched, damages, or soiled components with new materials as
directed.

END OF SECTION

09 51 00.docx Stantec ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

RM of Headingley Section 09 91 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING
Page 1 of 9

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Shop priming:
.1 Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications.
.2 Section 13 34 19 – Metal Building Systems: exposed structural steel.
.2 Section 08 11 14 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
.3 Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assembles.
.4 Section 40 05 00 – Common Work Results for Process Integration

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Master Painters Institute (MPI)
.1 Architectural Painting Specifications Manual.
.2 Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)
.1 Systems and Specifications Manual, SSPC Painting Manual, Volume Two.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Qualified journeymen who have a "Tradesman Qualification Certificate of Proficiency"
shall be engaged in painting work. Apprentices may be employed provided they work
under the direct supervision of a qualified journeyman in accordance with trade
regulations.
.2 Conform to latest MPI requirements for painting work including preparation and priming.
.3 Materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, solvents,
etc.) shall be in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual "Approved Product"
listing and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
.4 Other paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, etc. shall be the highest
quality product of an approved manufacturer listed in MPI Painting Specification Manual
and shall be compatible with other coating materials as required.
.5 Retain purchase orders, invoices and other documents to prove conformance with noted
MPI requirements when requested by Engineer.
.6 Standard of Acceptance:
.1 Walls: no defects visible from a distance of 1 m at 90° to surface.
.2 Ceilings: No defects visible from floor at 45° to surface when viewed using final
lighting source.
.3 Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full
surface area.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures.
.2 Product data: manufacturer's technical data sheets and application instructions for each
paint and coating product to be used, including:
.1 Product name, type and use.
.2 Manufacturer's product number.
.3 Colour numbers.
09 91 00.docx Stantec PAINTING
RM of Headingley Section 09 91 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING
Page 2 of 9

.4 MPI Environmentally Friendly classification system rating.

.5 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

1.5 SAMPLES
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit 200 x 300 mm sample panels of each paint with specified paint or coating in
colours, gloss/sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Specification Manual
standards submitted on the following substrate materials:
.1 3 mm plate steel for finishes over metal surfaces.
.2 13 mm gypsum board for finishes over gypsum board and other smooth surfaces.
.3 50 mm concrete block for finishes over concrete or masonry surfaces.
.3 When approved, sample panels shall become acceptable standard of quality for
appropriate on-site surface with one of each sample retained on-site.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

.1 Provide one - four litre can of each type and colour of finish coating applied on project.
Identify colour and paint type in relation to established colour schedule and finish system.
.2 Deliver to Contractor and store where directed.

1.7 DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

.1 Labels shall clearly indicate:
.1 Manufacturer's name and address.
.2 Type of paint or coating.
.3 Compliance with applicable standard.
.4 Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule.
.2 Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site.
.3 Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage.
.4 Observe manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling.
.5 Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices.
.6 Store materials and equipment in a well ventilated area with temperature range 7°C to
30°C.
.7 Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as recommended by
manufacturer.
.8 Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation, clean and orderly to approval of
Engineer. After completion of operations, return areas to clean condition to approval of
Engineer.
.9 Remove paint materials from storage only in quantities required for same day use.
.10 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System
(WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous materials.
.11 Fire Safety Requirements:
.1 Provide one 9 kg Type ABC dry chemical fire extinguisher adjacent to storage
area.

09 91 00.docx Stantec PAINTING

RM of Headingley Section 09 91 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING
Page 3 of 9

.2 Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to
spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from
site on a daily basis.
.3 Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in
accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada.

1.8 SITE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Heating, Ventilation and Lighting:
.1 Ventilate enclosed spaces.
.2 Perform no painting work unless adequate and continuous ventilation and
sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate
temperatures above 10 °C for 24 hours before, during and after paint application
until paint has cured sufficiently.
.3 Where required, provide continuous ventilation for seven days after completion
of application of paint.
.4 Coordinate use of existing ventilation system with Engineer and ensure its
operation during and after application of paint as required.
.5 Provide temporary ventilating and heating equipment where permanent facilities
are not available or supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation
and heating from existing system is inadequate to meet minimum requirements.
.6 Perform no painting work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux is
provided on surfaces to be painted. Adequate lighting facilities shall be provided
by General Contractor.
.2 Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels:
.1 Unless specifically pre-approved by applied product manufacturer, perform no
painting work when:
.1 Ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10°C.
.2 Substrate temperature is over 32°C unless paint is specifically formulated
for application at high temperatures.
.3 Substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI
or paint manufacturer's prescribed limits.
.4 The relative humidity is above 85% or when the dew point is less than
3°C variance between the air/surface temperature.
.5 Rain or snow is forecast to occur before paint has thoroughly cured or
when it is foggy, misty, raining or snowing at site.
.2 Perform no painting work when the maximum moisture content of the substrate
exceeds:
.1 12% for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick/block).
.2 12% for plaster and gypsum board.
.3 Conduct moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter,
except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test".
.4 Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.
.3 Surface and Environmental Conditions:
.1 Apply paint finish only in areas where dust is no longer being generated by
related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such
that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface.
.2 Apply paint only to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture
limits noted herein.
.3 Apply paint only when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured.

09 91 00.docx Stantec PAINTING

RM of Headingley Section 09 91 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING
Page 4 of 9

.4 Additional Interior Application Requirements:

.1 Apply paint finishes only when temperature at location of installation can be
satisfactorily maintained within manufacturer's recommendations.
.5 Additional Exterior Application Requirements:
.1 Apply paint finishes only when conditions forecast for entire period of
application fall within manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Do not apply paint when:
.1 Temperature is expected to drop below 10°C before paint has thoroughly
cured.
.2 Substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI
or paint manufacturer's limits.
.3 Surface to be painted is wet, damp or frosted.
.3 Provide and maintain cover when paint must be applied in damp or cold weather.
Heat substrates and surrounding air to comply with temperature and humidity
conditions specified by manufacturer. Protect until paint is dry or until weather
conditions are suitable.
.4 Schedule painting operations such that surfaces exposed to direct, intense
sunlight are scheduled for completion during early morning.
.5 Remove paint from areas which have been exposed to freezing, excess humidity,
rain, snow or condensation. Prepare surface again and repaint.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Paint materials listed in the MPI Approved Products List (APL) are acceptable for use on
this project.
.2 Paint materials for paint systems shall be products of a single manufacturer.

2.2 COLOURS
.1 Engineer will provide Colour Schedule after receipt of product data and samples.
.2 Engineer will select colours and determine total number of colours to be used on project
and their locations.
.3 Selection of colours may be from several different paint manufacturers. Match colour
samples exactly regardless of manufacturer.
.4 Allow for 25% of all painted surfaces to be deep to medium tone colours.
.5 Second coat in a three coat system to be tinted slightly lighter colour than top coat to
show visible difference between coats.

2.3 MIXING AND TINTING

.1 Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. On-site tinting of
painting materials is allowed only with Engineer's written permission.
.2 Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.
.3 Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations.
Do not use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.

09 91 00.docx Stantec PAINTING

RM of Headingley Section 09 91 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING
Page 5 of 9

.4 Thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's
instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from
manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Engineer.
.5 Re-mix paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps,
complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.

2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS

.1 Paint gloss is defined as sheen rating of applied paint.
.2 Gloss levels in accordance with MPI Architectural Painting Specifications Manual,
defined as follows:

Gloss Level Description Gloss @ 60º Sheen @ 85º

G1 traditional matte finish - flat Max. 5 units Max. 10 units
G2 high hide sheet flat - 'velvet-like' Max.10 units 10 - 35 units
G3 traditional 'eggshell-like' 10 - 25 units 10 - 35 units
G4 'satin-like' 20 - 35 units Min. 35 units
G5 traditional semi-gloss 35 - 70 units
G6 traditional gloss 70 - 85 units
G7 high gloss < 85 units
.3 Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces are specified by item.

2.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS

.1 Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Architectural Painting
Specification Manual requirements:
.2 Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: columns, beams, joists, etc.
.1 INT 5.1DD - Alkyd dry fall (over quick dry shop primer), G3 gloss/sheen. For
overhead structures beams and joists.
.2 INT 5.1E - Alkyd premium grade, G3 gloss/sheen.
.3 Steel - High Heat: (boilers, furnaces, heat exchangers, breeching, pipes, flues, stacks, etc.,
with temperature range as noted)
.1 INT 5.2A - Heat resistant enamel , maximum 205 C.
.2 INT 5.2B - Heat resistant aluminum paint , maximum 427 C.
.3 INT 5.2C - Inorganic zinc rich coating, maximum 400 C.
.4 INT 5.2D - High heat resistant coating, maximum 593 C.
.4 Galvanized Metal: doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, pipe supports, overhead
decking, ducts, etc.
.1 INT 5.3C - Alkyd (over cementitious primer) premium grade, G3 gloss/sheen.
.2 INT 5.3F - Alkyd dry fall, G3 gloss/sheen. For overhead decking, ducts.
.5 Gypsum Board:
.1 INT 9.2B - High performance architectural latex premium grade, G3 gloss/sheen.
.6 Bituminous Coated Surfaces: cast iron pipe, concrete, etc.
.1 INT 10.2A - Latex premium grade, G3 gloss/sheen.

2.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS

.1 Paint exterior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Specification
Manual requirements.
09 91 00.docx Stantec PAINTING
RM of Headingley Section 09 91 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING
Page 6 of 9

.2 Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications:

.1 EXT 5.1D - Alkyd premium grade, G5 gloss/sheen.
.3 Galvanized Metal: not chromate passivated
.1 EXT 5.3B - Alkyd premium grade, G5 gloss/sheen.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL
.1 Perform preparation and operations for interior painting in accordance with MPI Painting
Specifications Manual except where specified otherwise.
.2 Apply paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturers’ written application
instructions.
.3 Paint all new work, except prefinished items or where indicated otherwise.

3.2 EXISTING CONDITIONS

.1 Investigate existing substrates for problems related to proper and complete preparation of
surfaces to be painted. Report to Engineer damages, defects, unsatisfactory or
unfavourable conditions before proceeding with work.
.2 Conduct moisture testing of surfaces to be painted using a properly calibrated electronic
moisture meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test"
and report findings to Engineer.
.3 Do not proceed with work until conditions fall within acceptable range as recommended
by manufacturer.

3.3 PROTECTION
.1 Protect existing building surfaces and adjacent structures from paint spatters, markings
and other damage by suitable non-staining covers or masking. If damaged, clean and
restore such surfaces as directed by Engineer.
.2 Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames.
.3 Protect factory finished products and equipment.
.4 Protect building occupants and general public in and about the building.
.5 Remove electrical cover plates, light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, signs and
signage, bath accessories and other surface mounted equipment, fittings and fastenings
prior to undertaking any painting operations. Store items and re-installed after painting is
completed.
.6 As painting operations progress, place "WET PAINT" signs in occupied areas.

3.4 CLEANING AND PREPARATION

.1 Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual
requirements. Refer to MPI Manual in regard to specific requirements and as follows:
.1 Remove dust, dirt, and other surface debris by vacuuming, wiping with dry, clean
cloths.
.2 Wash surfaces with a biodegradable detergent and clean warm water using a stiff
bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface contaminants.

09 91 00.docx Stantec PAINTING

RM of Headingley Section 09 91 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING
Page 7 of 9

.3 Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from
surface.
.4 Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly.
.5 Prepare surfaces for water-based painting, water-based cleaners should be used in
place of organic solvents.
.6 Use trigger operated spray nozzles for water hoses.
.7 Many water-based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. However,
minimize the use of kerosene or any such organic solvents to clean up water-
based paints.
.2 Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other corrosive
chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before prime coat is applied and between applications
of remaining coats. Apply primer, paint, or pretreatment as soon as possible after
cleaning and before deterioration occurs.
.3 Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and
to remove visible defects.
.4 Clean metal surfaces to be painted by removing rust, loose mill scale, welding slag, dirt,
oil, grease and other foreign substances in accordance with MPI requirements. Remove
traces of blast products from surfaces, pockets and corners to be painted by brushing with
clean brushes or vacuum cleaning.
.5 Touch up of shop primers with primer as specified in applicable section. Major touch-up
including cleaning and painting of field connections, welds, rivets, nuts, washers, bolts,
and damaged or defective paint and rusted areas, shall be by supplier of fabricated
material.
.6 Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been reviewed by Engineer.

3.5 APPLICATION
.1 Method of application shall be acceptable to Engineer.
.2 Apply paint by brush, roller, sprayer. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions
unless specified otherwise.
.3 Brush and Roller Application:
.1 Apply paint in a uniform layer using brush and/or roller of types suitable for
application.
.2 Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners.
.3 Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using spray, daubers and/or
sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush,
daubers or sheepskins.
.4 Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces shall be
free of roller tracking and heavy stipple.
.5 Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint.
.4 Spray application:
.1 Provide and maintain equipment that is suitable for intended purpose, capable of
properly atomizing paint to be applied, and equipped with suitable pressure
regulators and gauges.
.2 Keep paint ingredients properly mixed in containers during paint application
either by continuous mechanical agitation or by intermittent agitation as
frequently as necessary.
.3 Apply paint in a uniform layer, with overlapping at edges of spray pattern.

09 91 00.docx Stantec PAINTING

RM of Headingley Section 09 91 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING
Page 8 of 9

.4 Brush out immediately all runs and sags.

.5 Use brushes to work paint into cracks, crevices and places which are not
adequately painted by spray.
.5 Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers only when no other method is practical in places of
difficult access.
.6 Apply coats of paint as a continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare
areas before next coat of paint is applied.
.7 Painting coats specified are intended to cover surface completely. If necessary apply
additional coats until satisfactory coverage is obtained. Provide additional coats at not
additional cost to Contract.
.8 Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for
minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer.
.9 Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects.
.10 Finish surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces.
.11 Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms.
.12 Doors and frames:
.1 Finish surfaces of doors and frames behind protective plates and coverings.
.2 For exterior doors and frames indicated for painting/staining, use exterior quality
paint/stain on both interior and exterior sides of door and frame.
.3 For doors and frames to receive epoxy paint, finish both sides of doors and
frames with same finish formula.
.13 Finish wall surfaces concealed behind wall hung fixtures and equipment.
.14 Do not paint door and miscellaneous hardware, unless indicated otherwise.
.15 Do not paint nameplates, signage, fire labels, or other markers or signs indicated to
remain.
.16 Do not paint copper, bronze, chromium plate, nickel, stainless steel, aluminum, lead and
other bright metals, unless specified otherwise.
.17 Clean shop applied paint surfaces that become marked. Touch up with primer and paint
as required.

3.6 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

.1 Interior painting:
.1 Unless otherwise specified, paint finished area exposed piping, floor supports,
hangers, ductwork and other mechanical equipment with colour noted in Section
40 05 00.

.2 Exterior painting:
.1 Paint exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork, and other mechanical
equipment unless indicated otherwise. Colour and texture to match adjacent
surfaces except where indicated otherwise.
.3 Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as
supplied by manufacturer of equipment.
09 91 00.docx Stantec PAINTING
RM of Headingley Section 09 91 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING
Page 9 of 9

.4 Do not paint over nameplates.

.5 Keep sprinkler heads free of paint.
.6 Paint fire protection piping red.
.7 Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
.8 Paint natural gas piping yellow.
.9 Do not paint interior transformers and substation equipment.

3.7 RESTORATION
.1 Clean and re-install all hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations.
.2 Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations
cease.
.3 Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove smears and
spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent.
.4 Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust. Avoid scuffing newly
applied paint.
.5 Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition.

3.8 STEEL PAINTING SCHEDULE

.1 Main steel members to be primed grey and all welds and scrapes to be touched up at
completion of work.
.2 Galvanized roof purlins and wall girts to remain galvanized.
.3 Hand rails to remain galvanized.

END OF SECTION

09 91 00.docx Stantec PAINTING

DIVISION 10

SPECIALTIES
RM of Headingley Section 10 06 80
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse October 2024
MWSB No.1758 Schedule for Other Specialties
PAGE: 1 OF 2

SPEC FINISH DESCRIPTION PRODUCT / MANUFACTURER / SPECIAL COLOUR SAMPLE

SECTION CODE INSTRUCTIONS

09 51 00 ACT-1 ACOUSTIC TILE & Distributor and Contact Info: Winroc, Ian Hutchinson
SUSPENSION SYSTEM Manufacturer: Armstrong
Style: Dune
Colour: White
Tile Dimension: metric Grid 610 x 610 (24" x 24)
Tile Edge Profile: Square Lay-in
Acoustics: 0.5
Fire Resistance: Class A
Sag Resistance: 50
Light Reflectance: 0.85
Grid Manufacture: Armstrong
Grid Profile and Model No.: Prelude 15/16" standard T
Grid Colour: White

09 91 00 PT-1 PAINT Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore

Colour Name and Number: Gray Owl (OC-52)
Location: Washroom

09 91 00 PT-2 PAINT Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore

Colour Name and Number: Gray Owl (OC-52)
Location: Vestibule

09 91 00 PT-3 PAINT Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore

Colour Name and Number: Gray Owl (OC-52)
Location: Office / Lab

10 90 00 FE-1 FIRE EXTINGUISHER Manufacturer: Portable Fire Extinguisher - Class A

PORTABLE Dimension: Minimum 5 BC C02 fire extinguisher
Capacity: Pull ht to be mounted at 1000 aff
Colour: Red
Cabinet Wall mount hardware
Location: As located on plan
Quantity: As per plan

LOCK-1 LOCKERS Distributor & Contact Info. Shanahans

Manufacturer: SML - Deluxe
Dimension: 12" w x 18 " d x 72" h - full locker
Compartments: single tier
Thickness: 16 gauge reinforced bottom
Colour: TBD
Base: 4" high - black colour
Top: sloped top
Location: Vestibule

12 21 23 ROL-1 ROLLER BLINDS Manufacturer: Silent Gliss

Fabric 1 semi-transparaent
Fabric 2 blackout
Operation commerical unit, chain operated - SS chain
Hem Bar: weighted aluminum - fabric wrapped
End cap: polycarbonate plastic neutral
Mounting Brackets: Universal mount
Non-motorized: yes
Colour submit sample for approval
Location: Office / Lab Window

WKST-1 WORKSURFACE Manufacturer: Bush 300 Series

Desk Dimension 60"w x 22"d x 29"h
Desk Description Double Pedestal
Product Code 300S035-MC
Glides Adjustable leveling
Grommet 1 per surface
Quantity: 1
Location: Office/Lab

FILE: 10 06 80-V-02.xls DATE PRINTED: 11/27/2024 8:59 AM

STANTEC ARCHITECTURE 500-311 Portage Avenue, Winnipeg, MB R3B 2B9
RM of Headingley Section 10 06 80
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse October 2024
MWSB No.1758 Schedule for Other Specialties
PAGE: 2 OF 2

SPEC FINISH DESCRIPTION PRODUCT / MANUFACTURER / SPECIAL COLOUR SAMPLE

SECTION CODE INSTRUCTIONS

CH-1 TILTER CHAIR Manufacturer: Horizon Seating

System: Active Mesh
Product Code: A-43-1
Back & Seat Material: mesh fabric - black
Quantity: 1
Location: Office / Lab

WKBN-1 WORKBENCH Manufacturer: McTavish Steelworks

Dimension: 30" x 72"
Product Code: 6 ft workbench w/stainless steel workbench top,
black drawers - 4-drawer, 4-drawer, 3-drawer

Quantity: 1
Location: Process Room

CAB-1 WASHROOM CABINET Manufacturer:

Dimension: 48" x 48" x 16" deep
Product Code: 4 ft enclosed storage cabinet
Quantity: 1
Location: Washroom

FILE: 10 06 80-V-02.xls DATE PRINTED: 11/27/2024 8:59 AM

STANTEC ARCHITECTURE 500-311 Portage Avenue, Winnipeg, MB R3B 2B9
RM of Headingley Section 10 28 10
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
.1 CAN/CSA-B651, Barrier-Free Design.

Part 2 Products

2.1 COMPONENTS
.1 Mirrors: stainless steel angle frame, 6 mm float glass mirror, concealed wall hanger. Size
457 x 762 mm.
.1 Acceptable material: Bobrick B-290 1830, or approved equal.
.2 Soap Dispensers: high impact polymer, surface mounted.
.1 Acceptable material: Bobrick B-5050, or approved equal.
.3 Paper Towel Dispensers: stainless steel housing, for C-fold or multifold towels, surface
mounted.
.1 Acceptable material: Bobrick B-2620, or approved equal.
.4 Toilet Paper Dispensers: double roll, cast aluminum, surface mounted.
.1 Acceptable material: Bobrick B-2740, or approved equal.
.5 Coat Hooks: stainless steel, satin finish, surface mounted.
.1 Acceptable material: Bobrick B-6827, or approved equal.
.6 Grab Bars: 32 mm diameter x 18 gauge stainless steel tube welded to 3 mm concealed
flange with snap-on cover. Satin finish. Concealed anchor plate and mounting kit.
Lengths and profiles indicated.
.1 Acceptable material: Bobrick B-5806 Series, or approved equal.

2.2 FASTENERS
.1 Screws and bolts: Type 304 stainless steel tamper proof design.
.2 Expansion shields fibre, lead or rubber as recommended by fixture manufacturer for
component and its intended use.

2.3 FABRICATION
.1 Weld and grind joints of fabricated components flush and smooth. Use mechanical
fasteners only where approved.
.2 Wherever possible form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.
.3 Brake form sheet metal work with 1.5 mm radius bends.
.4 Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
.5 Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent
electrolysis.
.6 Hot dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices to CSA G164.
.7 Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to job site at appropriate time for building-in. Provide
templates or rough-in measurements as required.

10 28 10.docx Stantec TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 10 28 10
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
Page 2 of 2

.8 Provide steel anchor plates and components for installation on studding and building
framing.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product
catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data
sheets.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and templates.
.2 Mounting heights to CAN/CSA-B651, except where indicated otherwise.
.3 Coordinate installation of anchors, brackets and hangers with other Work. Ensure furring,
blocking, and framing is in place.
.4 Supply drawings and templates for building in to other work.
.5 Install and secure fixtures rigidly in place as follows:
.1 Stud walls: install steel back-plate to stud prior to gypsum board finish. Provide
plate with threaded studs or plugs.
.2 Hollow masonry units: use toggle bolts drilled into cell/wall cavity.
.3 Solid masonry or concrete: use bolt with lead expansion sleeve set into drilled
hole.
.4 Toilet/shower compartments: use male/female through bolts.
.6 Install components on built-in anchors and backing plates provided by manufacturer.

3.3 SUPPLIES
.1 Fill units with necessary supplies shortly before Substantial Performance of the Work.
.2 Unused supplies from opened cartons remain the property of the Purchaser.

END OF SECTION

10 28 10.docx Stantec TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 10 40 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SAFETY SPECIALTIES
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 This section specifies requirements for fall arrest safety equipment, and WHMIS hazard
signs.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Shop drawings/product data:
.1 Submit shop drawings or manufacturer’s product data sheets for all items.
.2 Indicate manufacturer, product description or model/catalogue numbers, sizes,
quantities, materials and finishes, accessories, options and installation details.
Indicate requirements for related work.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.
.2 Maintenance data: submit operation and maintenance data for each specified item for
incorporation into maintenance manual.
.3 Spare parts: provide spare parts and extra materials as specified by items.
.4 Warranties: submit manufacturer’s warranties. All warranties shall be on the
manufacturer’s letterhead.

Part 2 Products

2.1 FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT

.1 Type 1 Davit Socket – flush mount floor socket, hot dip galvanized. Tuff Built 30043, or
approved equal. Three (3) required. Provide 304SS sleeve cap Tuff Built 30069, 1 per
davit socket.
.2 Fall Arrest Davit Arm, adjustable 500mm-750mm offset mast with adjustable mast height
from 1.94m-2.17m. Tuff Built Davit 30106 or approved equal.
.1 Include recovery winch with 60 m 5mm (3/16”) galvanized cable and associated
mounting brackets to secure to davit. Winch and mounting bracket to be from
same manufacturer as the davit arm. Tuff Built 60224 winch or approved equal.
.3 Provide self-retracting lifeline to CSA Z259.2.2-14, c/w 10 m of 5mm (3/16”) galvanized
steel cable, Include double locking carabiner. Tuff Built 60349 or approved equal.
.4 Provide a SRL/Winch Carrying Bag from same equipment manufacturer.

2.2 HAZARD SIGNS

.1 Confined Space Entry Signs

10 40 00.docx Stantec SAFETY SPECIALTIES

RM of Headingley Section 10 40 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SAFETY SPECIALTIES
Page 2 of 2

.1 Provide confined entry signs to be fixed to the access hatches. The signs shall
have the following characteristics:
.1 Signs to be 4 mm Aluminum
.2 Letters and border to be black, sign to be yellow.
.3 Dimensions to be 200 mm x 250 mm
.4 Signs to read “Confined Space Entry”

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PREPARATION
.1 Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result.
.2 Coordinate the location of the fall arrest anchors and davit sockets with the Engineers
onsite representative prior to the main floor concrete pour.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.2 Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight joints. For all connections
ensure final connections are secure and confirmed.
.3 Perform cutting, and fitting required for installation of walkways and guardrails. Set
walkways and guardrails accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from
established lines and levels.

3.3 PROTECTION
.1 Protect installed products until completion of project.
.2 Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

10 40 00.docx Stantec SAFETY SPECIALTIES

RM of Headingley Section 10 51 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL LOCKERS
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CAN/CGSB-44.40, Steel Clothing Locker.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Product Data: provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets for metal
lockers and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
.3 Shop drawings: Indicate sizes, types, locations, assembled banks of lockers, fabricating
methods, thicknesses of metal components, sloped tops, filler panels, end/back panels,
trim, number plates.
.4 Samples: submit colour samples of metal finishes for colour selection by Engineer.
Samples shall represent manufacturer's full colour range.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common
Product Requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
.1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with
manufacturer's name and address.

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Comply with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
.1 Acceptable material:
.1 Shanahan's SML Deluxe.
.2 GSS Décor Tri-Lock Corona.
.3 Hadrian Emperor.
.4 Duralife Lockers
.2 Provide metal lockers from same manufacturer.

2.2 METAL LOCKERS

.1 Fabricate lockers from cold rolled sheet steel. Assemble with bolts and spring washers,
burr all bolts.
.2 Locker sizes:
.1 Single tier: 12” wide x 18” deep x 72” high.
.3 Doors: flush type, welded box construction honeycomb core. Outer panels 20 gauge steel.
Inner panels 24 gauge steel. Minimum two rubber door bumpers.
10 51 13.docx Stantec METAL LOCKERS
RM of Headingley Section 10 51 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL LOCKERS
Page 2 of 3

.4 Frames: 16 gauge, all welded construction. Continuous full height door stops, heavy duty
padlock hasp.
.5 Body: 24 gauge. Back and sides continuous lock formed, full height of locker to provide
rigid assembly when bolted together. Top and bottom flanged on all four sides. Sides
double ribbed entire length to insure stiff rigid construction.
.6 Ventilation: louvers in top and bottom of frame and slots in top and bottom of inner door
panels.
.7 Hinges: 14 gauge - 5 knuckle steel hinges. Single tier lockers three hinges per door;
multi-tier lockers two hinges per door.
.8 Shelves 24 gauge steel, flanged on all four sides with a channel formation at the front
edge.
.9 Filler panels, end panels, wall trim: minimum 24 gauge steel.
.10 Sloped tops: minimum 24 gauge steel. Provide sloped tops for all lockers without furred
bulkheads.
.11 Locking system: recessed handle and lock pockets chrome plated steel, with padlock
hasp. Padlocks supplied by others.
.12 Numbering system: number plate on each locker; with numbered sequence as later
provided by Consultant.
.13 Metal base: 4” high, colour black.
.14 Coat hooks: zinc plated metal, round tipped.
.15 Interior equipment:
.1 Single tier (full height) lockers less than 18” deep: one shelf 14" below top.
Three coat hooks.
.2 Single tier (full height) lockers 18" and deeper: one shelf 14” below top. One
coat rod in lieu of coat hooks.
.3 Two, three and four tier lockers: three coat hooks.
.4 Six tier lockers: none.

2.3 FINISH
.1 All parts thoroughly cleaned, etched, and spray coated with high quality alkyd baked
enamel.
.2 Colours: selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full colour range.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Do not install lockers until finish flooring has been installed under locker bases.
.2 Install lockers in assembled banks.
.3 Install wall trim around recessed locker banks with removable fasteners.
.4 Install filler panels (false fronts), end panels where obstructions occur. Use removable
fasteners.
.5 Install finished end and back panels to exposed ends and backs of locker banks. Use
removable fasteners.
10 51 13.docx Stantec METAL LOCKERS
RM of Headingley Section 10 51 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL LOCKERS
Page 3 of 3

.6 Install sloped tops on assembled banks.

.7 After confirmation of locker numbering system install number plates.
.8 At completion of installation touch-up all scratched or damaged surfaces.

END OF SECTION

10 51 13.docx Stantec METAL LOCKERS

RM of Headingley Section 10 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The Contractor shall furnish all labour, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to
supply and install all manufactured specialties as shown, specified and required to
complete the work of this Contract.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Section 09 21 16 – Gypsum Board Assemblies: furring, blocking, rough openings in stud
walls.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Shop drawings/product data:
.1 Submit shop drawings or manufacturer’s product data sheets for all items.
.2 Indicate manufacturer, product description or model/catalogue numbers, sizes,
quantities, materials and finishes, accessories, options and installation details.
Indicate requirements for related work.
.3 Samples:
.1 Submit samples for individual products as specified in this section.
.2 Submit samples for items requiring color selection by Engineer. Submit two (2)
representative samples indicating manufacturer’s full colour range for colour
selection by Engineer.
.4 Submit manufacturer’s installation instructions.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.
.2 Maintenance data: submit operation and maintenance data for each specified item for
incorporation into maintenance manual.
.3 Spare parts: provide spare parts and extra materials as specified by items.

1.5 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit shop drawings or catalogue illustrations of all items. Clearly indicate model
numbers, sizes, quantities, locations, finishes, optional features. Indicate mounting and
installation details, anchorage, fasteners and relationship to building components.

1.6 WARRANTIES
.1 Warranties shall be in accordance with the General Conditions for each item. All
warranties shall be on the manufacturer’s letterhead.

10 90 00.docx Stantec MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

RM of Headingley Section 10 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
Page 2 of 3

1.7 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Verify all site dimensions prior to fabrication. Indicate site dimensions on shop drawing.

1.8 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Submit operating instructions and maintenance data for miscellaneous items for
incorporation into Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 78 00 –
Closeout Submittals.

Part 2 Products

2.1 PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASHPADS

.1 Splashpads: hydraulically pressed precast concrete.
.2 Acceptable material: Barkman 45-41001, 51” x 14 ½” x 5”, natural finish.
.3 Splashpads from other manufacturers that meet or exceed the specifications are
acceptable.

2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

.1 Provide 4.5 KG ULC labelled cartridge operated multipurpose dry chemical fire
extinguishers.
.2 Size and locate as directed by local Fire Marshall as per NFPA 10:
.1 Over 18 kg – not more than 1000 mm off floor
.2 Under 18 kg – not more than 1500 mm off floor
.3 Mount fire extinguishers as indicated on the drawings.
.3 Conformance to NFPA Standard No. 10-2013, “Standard for Portable Fire
Extinguishers”.

2.3 ALUMINUM DOOR SIGN

.1 Fix to the doors identified – front incised white coloured letters on plain black
background for metal doors.
.2 Fix to adjacent wall where doors include glazing.
.3 Aluminum minimum 3 mm thick x 75 mm thick x length required for the word. Adhere
to the doors with adhesive.
.1 Electrical Room
.2 Washroom
.3 Office / Lab
.4 Pump Room
.5 Vestibule

2.4 PORTABLE INDUSTRIAL DEHUMIDIFIER

.1 Provide one (1) portable dehumidifier with AHAM rating of 80 litres per day.
Dehumidifier shall include humidistat, automatic high temperature mode, auto restart

10 90 00.docx Stantec MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

RM of Headingley Section 10 90 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES
Page 3 of 3

after loss of power, and defrost system. Pipe dehumidifier drain line to nearest building
drain. Dri-Eaz LGR 3500i or approved equal
.2 Provide twenty-four (24) replacement filters, model F421

Part 3 Execution

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheets.

3.2 SITE VERIFICATION

.1 Verify all dimensions on site prior to fabrication. Fabricate items in accordance with
sizes, profiles, finishes required and indicated.

3.3 INSTALLATION
.1 Install and secure items rigidly in place in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and
manufacturers printed instructions and templates, except where indicated otherwise.
.2 Coordinate installation of anchors, brackets and hangers with work of other trades.
.3 File smooth or burr smooth exposed share edges and corners.
.4 Install and secure fixtures rigidly in place as follows:
.1 Stud walls: screws in solid backing. Toggle bolts not acceptable.
.2 Solid concrete: bolts and expansion anchors.
.5 Install equipment as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.4 PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASHPADS

.1 Set splashpads on minimum 100 mm gravel bed, with positive slope away from building.

3.5 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

.1 At completion of installation test and adjust specialties for proper function.
.2 Clean materials of dust, dirt and other markings using cleaning agents recommended by
manufacturer. Clean and polish glass, chrome and other bright polished or glossy
surfaces.

END OF SECTION

10 90 00.docx Stantec MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 11

EQUIPMENT
RM of Headingley Section 11 13 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LOADING DOCK BUMPERS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 01 74 21 – Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal
.2 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
.3 Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: provision of opening and installation of
anchor inserts.
.4 Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications: steel dock edging.
.5 Section 09 91 00 – Painting: field painting.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
.1 ASTM D624, Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional
Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers.
.2 ASTM D1171, Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration-Surface Ozone
Cracking Outdoors or Chamber.
.3 ASTM D2632, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Resilience by Vertical
Rebound.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Product data: submit manufacturer’s product data sheets for each item.
.3 Shop drawings: indicate dimensions and required clearances, fastening methods for dock
bumpers.
.4 Samples: submit duplicate 12” long sections of dock bumpers.

1.4 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Comply with Section 01 74 21 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and
Disposal.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

.1 Manufacturers:
.1 Rite-Hite Dok-Saver Loading Dock Bumper.
.2 Pentalift PL VB420SF and Pentalieft PL VB520SF.
.3 Substitutions: Refer to Section 00 26 00 - Procurement Substitution Procedures.
.2 Components:
.1 Steel Face Dock Bumper
.1 Rubberized fabric truck tires cut to uniform size pads 18” x 12” with 6”
overall projection. Pads punched to receive 3/4" steel supporting rods.
.2 Bumper faced with 1/2” thick steel plate equal width to rubber surface
dimensions. Plate welded to slotted steel support plates which extend
back to the 3/4” supporting rods. Brackets punched with elongated slots
to allow steel face to float on impact. Flat black enamel finish.
11 13 13.docx Stantec LOADING DOCK BUMPERS
RM of Headingley Section 11 13 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LOADING DOCK BUMPERS
Page 2 of 2

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 No assembly required for pre-manufactured unit. Install dock bumper as indicated.
.1 Steel Face Dock Bumper: Provide bolting through steel for structural mounting
angles as per manufacturer’s instructions.

END OF SECTION

11 13 13.docx Stantec LOADING DOCK BUMPERS

RM of Headingley Section 11 53 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The work shall consist of supply, installation and organizing all laboratory equipment,
glassware and accessories as detailed in this section and as shown on the drawings.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 General Requirements (Stantec) – Division 01
.3 Section 12 35 53 - Laboratory Casework
.4 Division 46 – Water and Wastewater Treatment Equipment (Stantec)

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals
Procedures.

Part 2 Products

2.1 STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE

.1 All laboratory equipment included in this specification shall be made by a manufacturer
who is a specialist in the design and manufacture of scientific laboratory equipment.
.2 The laboratory equipment shall be supplied by HACH or approved equal.

2.2 WATER QUALITY MONITORING

.1 Provide one (1) Hach DR 900 handheld colorimeter c/w with printed instrument manual,
25.4 mm (1 inch) glass sample cells and AA batteries, Hach Catalog # 9385100.
.2 Provide sets of Hach test reagents as follows:
.1 Free Chlorine (DPD method), Catalog # 2105569, provide 2 sets, 100 tests per
set
.2 Total Chlorine (DPD method), Catalog # 2105669, provide 2 sets, 100 tests per
set

2.3 LABORATORY GLASSWARE

.1 Laboratory Glassware: Provide the following laboratory glassware:
Number Item Hach Catalog #

12 50 ml beaker # 500 – 41H

6 250 ml beaker # 500 – 46H
2 Wash bottles # 62011
4 10 ml graduated cylinder # 20886-38

11 53 00.docx Stantec LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

RM of Headingley Section 11 53 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
Page 2 of 3

Number Item Hach Catalog #

4 25 ml graduated cylinder # 50840

4 50 mL graduated cylinder # 50841
4 500 ml Erlenmeyer flask # 50549
1 Tensette Pipette, 1.0 - 10mL # 1970010
1 Tensette Pipette tips, 50/pkt for 1.0 – # 2199796
10mL

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

.1 Provide the following:
.1 Two (2) non-mercury thermometers, dual range: -10°C to 110°C, Hach Catalog #
2676400.
.2 One (1) cleaning brush, for each of the following: Hach Catalog # 22414-00,
687-00, and 689-00.
.3 Provide 2 jugs, each 4 L capacity of deionized water, Hach Catalog # 272-56.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL
.1 Obtain approved Supplier’s drawings and instructions prior to the installation of the
equipment.
.2 The Contractor shall replace any chemical reagents and test kits used during the initial
operation of the pumphouse or during Acceptance Testing.

3.2 DELIVERY
.1 Deliver laboratory equipment items in properly packaged containers, identified suitably
as to content and quality.

3.3 STORAGE
.1 Store items in original packaging in a manner to prevent any damage or breakage until
plant start-up and commissioning.

3.4 INSTALLATION
.1 Install all equipment in accordance with Supplier’s instructions.
.2 Assemble and install supplied equipment and components and fittings as required as per
Supplier’s instructions.
.3 The laboratory equipment and glassware shall be unpacked and neatly organized in the
laboratory cabinets and shelving in discussions with the Engineer and Owner’s
representative.
.4 Meet requirements stated in Section 01 90 00 – Equipment Installation.

11 53 00.docx Stantec LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

RM of Headingley Section 11 53 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
Page 3 of 3

3.5 TRAINING
.1 Training must be provided by a Hach factory certified trainer.
.2 Co-ordinate all training seminars for the Owner’s operators.
.3 Meet the requirements of Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training.

END OF SECTION

11 53 00.docx Stantec LABORATORY EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12

FURNISHINGS
RM of Headingley Section 12 21 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ROLLER BLINDS
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Indicate site dimensions in relation to window jambs, operator details, anchorage details,
hardware and accessories details.
.3 Provide schedule indicating location of each blind in relation to room numbers on
drawings. Indicate sizes and dimensions, location of different types and fabric colours of
blinds.

1.2 MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 -
Closeout Submittals.
.2 Include information regarding cleaning and maintenance, properties of stain resistance,
maintenance procedures, and recommended procedures for removal of stains.

1.3 SITE CONDITIONS

.1 Verify all site dimensions prior to fabrication. Indicate site dimensions on shop drawings.
.2 Check site conditions that may affect proper installation and operation of roller blinds.
Report any defects or unusual site condition to Engineer and await remedial measures.
.3 Check heat/ventilation grilles and appliances with regard to installation of blinds to
prevent possible scorching, billowing or damage.

1.4 EXTENDED WARRANTY

.1 Provide manufacturer's warranty against defects in materials, components and
workmanship in accordance with General Conditions, but for five years.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ROLLER BLINDS

.1 All roller blinds by same manufacturer.
.2 Roller blinds chain operated, double roller type with both semi-transparent and total
blackout fabrics.
.1 Acceptable manufacturers: Silent Gliss; Mecho Shade; Sun Projects;
Solarfective.
.3 Chain operator: pre-assembled unit requiring only minor on site adjustment. Factory
preset for travel length of blind. Drive chain #10 stainless steel, strength 41 kg test.
Automatic braking system. Blind not operable by pulling on hem bar. Left or right hand
operation.
.4 Shade tube assembly: top roller axle of one piece extruded aluminum, sized for maximum
allowable deflection of 0.75 mm in 300 mm. Spline and slot to retain shade fabric and
operating system.

12 21 23.docx Stantec ROLLER BLINDS

RM of Headingley Section 12 21 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ROLLER BLINDS
Page 2 of 3

.5 Fascia: extruded aluminum, size to house shade and roller assembly. Designed to
accommodate mounting brackets without use of exposed fasteners.
.6 Hem bar: aluminum, sized to weight requirements and keep shade fabric straight and flat.
Hem bar pocket to accommodate shade fabric. Closed ends.
.7 Blackout Channels: extruded aluminum channels sized to fit hem bar and shade fabric, to
provide total blackout of shades. Provide on sides only.
.8 Aluminum finish: exposed aluminum components clear anodized to AA-M12C22A21.

2.2 SHADE FABRIC

.1 All shade fabrics by same manufacturer.
.2 Blackout fabric fabricated of 25% fibreglass and 65% PVC:
.1 Mesh/in 42 warp, 22 weft.
.2 Openness factor: total blackout.
.3 Colour fastness to light: excellent except on white.
.4 Fabric thickness: 0.3 mm (0.12”).
.5 Breaking strength: warp 82 kg (180 lbs.), weft 68 kg (150 lbs.).
.6 Non-flammable.
.7 Colours: selected by Engineer.
.3 Shade fabric: openness factory 3%, Silent Gliss Suncreen 650, SheerWeave or
equivalent.
.4 Colours: selected by Engineer from manufacturer's standard selection.

2.3 FABRICATION
.1 Fabricate and assemble components to suit custom installation techniques to suit project
requirements.
.2 Complete assembles to be square, true to size and free from distortion, twist or other
defects that could effect strength, operation or appearance.
.3 Shade fabric one piece for each blind without horizontal or vertical seams. Cut fabric to
eliminate glare and reverberation from shining surfaces. Secure top and bottom of fabric
securely in roller assembly and hem bar without exposed fasteners.
.4 Fabricate each blind to size and dimension to fit properly for each location.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install roller blinds in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer’s
written instructions.
.2 Securely mount components using appropriate brackets, fasteners, hardware and tools.
.3 Install components plumb, square, securely anchored maintaining uniform clearances and
accurate alignment levels and parallel with window plane.
.4 After completion of installation test and adjust components to ensure smooth and trouble
free operation without binding or other defects.

12 21 23.docx Stantec ROLLER BLINDS

RM of Headingley Section 12 21 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ROLLER BLINDS
Page 3 of 3

.5 Clean all surfaces of dirt or dust. Touch-up or replace damaged or soiled surfaces.

3.2 SCHEDULE
.1 Roller blinds are to be installed on Windows W3 and W5.

END OF SECTION

12 21 23.docx Stantec ROLLER BLINDS

RM of Headingley Section 12 35 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LABORATORY CASEWORK
Page 1 of 6

Part 1 General

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

.1 This section specifies the supply and installation of laboratory furniture, tops of laminate,
etc. as detailed in this section and as shown on the drawings.
.2 Provide all necessary cut-outs and openings for plumbing and electrical services as well
as all filler panels and scribe strips as required where equipment abuts to walls and
corners to ensure a dust-tight assembly.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Division 22

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 All laboratory furniture included in this specification shall be made by a manufacturer
who is a specialist in the design and manufacture of scientific laboratory furniture.
.2 All materials used and work performed must conform to the laws and ordinances of the
Province, Municipality or other political subdivision within which work under this
contract is to be performed.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop Drawings
.1 The successful bidder shall submit drawings showing plans, elevations, location
and type of service fixtures, rough-in locations and power requirements for
electrical services.
.2 Conform to Section 013300.

1.5 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

.1 Deliver laboratory items in properly packaged containers, identified suitably as to content
and quality.
.2 Store items in original packings in manner to prevent any damage.

1.6 SUPPLIER
.1 The equipment shall be supplied by CiF Furniture, Mott Lab, Alliance Scientific Inc. or
approved equal.

1.7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

.1 All cost for the work and material specified in this section shall be included in the lump
sum bid for the project.

12 35 53.docx Stantec LABORATORY CASEWORK

RM of Headingley Section 12 35 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LABORATORY CASEWORK
Page 2 of 6

Part 2 Products

2.1 CASEWORK FABRICATION

.1 Fabricate, assemble and prefinish all units prior to shipping
.2 Provide a 175 mm pipe space behind all casework.
.3 Pre-drill, cut all mounting holes for sinks, faucets, gas cocks and electrical outlets.
.4 Metal cabinets shall be constructed from sheet steel which shall be prime grade furniture
stock, stretcher and / or roller levelled, meeting the requirements of ASTM-A366. Steel
shall be US Standard 1.6 mm, generally except as otherwise specified, and be free from
scale, ragged edges, deep scratches, and other injurious defects. All steel shall have been
cleaned and phosphatized before application of finish.
.1 1 mm: Drawer assembly, door assemblies, adjustable shelves, intermediate
horizontal front rails.
.2 1.6 mm: Top horizontal front and rear rails and table aprons, table lets 50 mm
square.
.3 2 mm: Drawer channels, case channels, hinge reinforcements, table let gussets.
.4 2.7 mm: Corner gussets for levelling bolts, corner apron braces.
.5 Each sectional unit shall be completely fabricated, ready for replacement in the
laboratory furniture and equipment assembly and shall be a complete, rigid
integral unit in itself to permit relocation at any subsequent time.
.6 The door and drawer heads must be removable for purposes of decontamination
and/or cleaning. Pulls shall be attached to door or drawer with machine screws.
Cast pulls shall have adequate cross section to ensure against breakage under
rough usage and a chrome finish. Recessed pulls shall have black label area
which will accept standard 13 mm wide magnetic label tape up to 203 mm long.
Two (2) pulls shall be furnished on drawers wider than 711 mm.
.7 Doors and drawers shall be sound-deadened and readily removable with door
hinges easily replaceable.
.8 All hinges shall be applied to case and door bodies as specified. Hinges shall be
of stainless steel and shall be institutional type with five-knuckle, bullet-type
barrel. Hinges shall be attached to both door and case with three (3) heavy steel
screws through each leaf. Welding to doors or case is not acceptable.
.9 Where units are joined together in assemblies, they shall be fastened by bolting
through side panels with 6 mm bolts through predrilled holes.
.10 All component parts shall be die-formed, insuring uniformity and inter-
changeability, and shall be assembled in jigs for accurate alignment.
.11 All cabinet parts shall not only be electrically welded, but also shall be notched,
keyed, and overlapped forming interlocking joint construction. The electro-
welding shall comprise of spot-welding, arc welding, and heliarc-welding.
.12 Any notching, piecing, bending or framing not specifically called for in the
construction specifications and/or on the drawings will not be permitted.
.13 All construction shall ensure a smooth, cleanable interior of all units.
.14 All die-pierced slots and perforations, required for mounting of case channels,
hinges or shelf brackets shall not be visible from the exterior of the assembled
cabinet. Screws shall not be used in the construction of the unit proper and shall
12 35 53.docx Stantec LABORATORY CASEWORK
RM of Headingley Section 12 35 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LABORATORY CASEWORK
Page 3 of 6

only be used where backs, pans and panels are required to be removed for
accessibility.
.15 Standard cabinet units shall be so constructed that they will permit quick and
easy changes, after installation, from drawers to doors or vice-versa, or a
substitution of two half-depth drawers in place of a standard depth drawer
without the use of drills or machinery with only the purchase of the necessary
parts.
.16 All sectional units to be located on the laboratory floor shall be equipped with
levelling devices easily adjustable from within the units, to compensate for
unevenness in the laboratory floor.
.5 Tall case doors, where shown on drawings, shall be split height. Each door shall be half
height, for additional strength and ease of operation,
.6 Full height tall case doors, where shown on drawings, shall be one piece, full height of
the cabinet.
.7 Provide two hinges on all doors up to 36" in height and a minimum of three hinges on
any doors exceeding this height.
.8 Hinged glass doors shall have 5mm thick double strength safety grade glass on wall and
floor cases. Glass shall be free from aberrations and imperfections.
.9 Glass shall be held in place with a removable retainer to facilitate change of damaged
glass.
.10 Sliding doors shall be fabricated as hinged door cabinets except doors shall slide in top
channels and with a nylon wheel operating on an inset plastic track.
.11 All tables shall come equipped with levelling devices and black PVC shoes.

2.2 CABINETS AND HARDWARE

.1 Recessed metal pulls shall be CiF # A001N. For both hinged doors and sliding doors and
drawers, pulls shall be mounted horizontally, except in framed sliding doors which shall
be vertical.
.2 Self closing drawer slides shall be integral to the epoxy coated metal drawer side and
shall operate on a nylon roller with ball-bearing wheel. Provide a mechanism for
horizontal and vertical adjustment of drawer faces. When fully extended, a double stop
shall prevent accidental removal.

2.3 MATERIALS
.1 Counter Tops:
.1 Provide Chemsurf Plastic Laminate (1.3mm thick) countertop or approved
alternative.
.2 Colour to be black with a crystal finish.
.3 Provide 45 lb. particleboard core with plastic laminate backing sheet for overall
thickness of 1-1/4” (32mm).
.4 Provide drip groove at all exposed edges.
.5 Provide splashbacks and return splashbacks where required.
.6 Provide on all exposed edges, 3mm black PVC edging, installed on top by an
edge banding machine with heat, pressure and glue.
12 35 53.docx Stantec LABORATORY CASEWORK
RM of Headingley Section 12 35 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LABORATORY CASEWORK
Page 4 of 6

.7 Underside shall be sealed.

.8 Where joints occur, provide mechanical locktite fasteners and splines for a
hairline joint. Seal joint with silicone.

2.4 BASE UNITS

.1 Bottom front horizontal toe space rail shall be formed to provide a rectangular recessed
toe space fully enclosed, having a chancel formation at the face and bottom. Toe space
shall be integral with cabinet 75mm deep x 125mm high and dust-proof.
.2 Vertical and horizontal intermediates shall be readily removable as a unit for complete
and unhindered access to base unit interior. The frame shall have a cushioning neoprene
gasket against which all drawers and doors will close to prevent dust gaps, to provide
sound-deadening and to seal out spillage from the cabinet frame, are not acceptable. The
frame shall be designed so that all drawers and doors are separated by concealed
horizontal support rails.
.3 Cupboard bottom shall be full depth and width in all cases to prevent dirt from entering
the cabinet. Four 2mm diameter holes shall be punched in the cupboard bottom directly
over and for access to unit leveling bolts located in case corner gussets to provide ease of
installation.
.4 Backs of all units except any solvent-storage cabinets, shall be designed with a top and
bottom rail, and the section between the rails shall be left open for simple access to
plumbing lines without disassembling entire unit. All units shall be supplied with
removable backs (removable without the use of tools) to close this space between the top
and bottoms rails.
.5 Shelves shall rest on adjustable shelf clips.
.6 Drawer assembly shall consist of a drawer back, drawer body, inner drawer head and
outer drawer head. Drawers shall operate quietly and smoothly on a wheel set into the
drawer channel and rear rollers set into the drawer. No steel-to-steel contact shall be
permitted. The suspension system shall maintain alignment of drawer and be equipped
with integral drawer stops to eliminate inadvertent removal of the drawer. Removal of
the drawer shall be possible without the use of tools. All drawers shall be assisted in self-
closing during approximately the last 75mm of travel and shall lock in fully open
position. All drawers shall be sound-deadened and shall close against neoprene-coated
urethane foam gasket on the unit frame.
.7 Door assembly shall consist of an inner and outer door pan. All parts of the door
assembly, which will be concealed after door is assembled, shall be painted completely
before assembly of door. Doors are to be so assembled, that they may be readily taken
apart for decontamination when necessary. Each door shall be provided with a waffle-
type sound-deadener, cut to correct size and thickness and installed before door assembly.
All doors, when mounted on the case shall swing 180° and will support, without sagging,
an 80 kg weight suspended at the outer edge of the door while it is being swung. The
door catches shall be magnetic strips so that no turning of handles is needed to open the
door. All doors shall close against the cushioning neoprene-coated urethane foam gasket
on the unit frame.

2.5 SINKS
.1 Refer to Division 22 – Plumbing.

12 35 53.docx Stantec LABORATORY CASEWORK

RM of Headingley Section 12 35 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LABORATORY CASEWORK
Page 5 of 6

2.6 SERVICE FITTINGS

.1 Shall be Cambridge Brass laboratory service fittings or approved equal.
.2 Provide all fixtures complete with shanks, coupling lock nuts, tailpieces and coloured
plastic index buttons.
.3 Finish shall be chrome plated.
.4 Water faucets shall be WaterSaver Faucet Co. L414-110 (domestic hot and cold) &
WaterSaver Faucet Co. L614VB-TP (Supply Water Sample Tap).
.5 Provide vacuum breakers for all faucets.
.6 Serrated hose ends shall be provide on all water fixtures. Serrations shall be so designed
to hold hoses securely.

2.7 COLOURED INDEX BUTTONS

.1 Index buttons shall be provided to designate type of service on all mechanical service
fixtures, and both color and lettering shall be provided in button screw-on type, which
shall be located in handles of fixtures. Buttons shall not be held in place with a metal
retainer.
.2 Color designations shall be as follows:
Cold Water BLUE
Hot Water RED
Supply Water GREEN

2.8 CASEWORK FINISHES

.1 Colours: To be selected by the Owner / Engineer from Standard available colours.
Include black countertop.
.2 Submit pallet of available colours.

2.9 LABORATORY FURNITURE SCHEDULES

.1 Refer to drawings for location.
.2 Description of items numbered and referred to on the drawings include but are not limited
to the schedule as follows:

2.10 LABORATORY FURNITURE SCHEDULE

.1 Refer to drawings.
.2 Base cabinet depth to be 559 mm
.3 Wall cabinet depth to be 457 mm
.4 Cabinet heigh and width per drawing elevation
.5 Allow for 179 mm pipe space behind base cabinets
.6 Countertop depth to be 762 mm

12 35 53.docx Stantec LABORATORY CASEWORK

RM of Headingley Section 12 35 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LABORATORY CASEWORK
Page 6 of 6

2.11 PEGBOARD
.1 Provide 600 mm wide x 600 mm high epoxy resin pegboard drying rack with stainless
steel drip tray. CiF #SP550 or approved equal.
.2 Provide flexible drain hose to sink.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required, using
concealed shims. Where laboratory furniture abuts other finished work scribe and apply
filler strops for accurate fit with all fasteners concealed where practicable.
.2 Set base cabinets straight, plumb and level. Adjust within 1 mm of a single plane.
Where required, assemble units into one integral unit with joints flush, tight and uniform.
Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1.6 mm. Coordinate work
with mechanical and electrical works.
.3 Provide mechanical Stainless Steel fastening devices such as nails, screws and bolts
required for fastening components. Unless permitted, provide concealed fastening of
components.
.4 Install counter tops using concealed fastening devices.
.5 Where access is required to valves and other mechanical and electrical components
located behind cabinetwork, provide removable access panels of size required.
.6 Adjust laboratory equipment and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly
without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
.7 Upon completion of installation inspect work of this Section and touch-up, where
required, minor damaged surface finish to restore it to original condition. Badly damaged
components shall be replaced.
.8 Furnish and install soft cove molding on all laboratory casework.
.9 Provide cut-out in countertop for plumbing sink. Coordinate with Division 22 –
Plumbing.

NOTE: To clarify upper cabinets to be painted steel to match lower cabinets.

END OF SECTION

12 35 53.docx Stantec LABORATORY CASEWORK

DIVISION 13

SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
RM of Headingley Section 13 34 19
Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 7

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 This section specifies requirements for supply and installation of steel building systems.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 Double Skin Insulated Roof Panels – Section 07 41 15
.2 Double Skin Insulated Wall Panels – Section 07 42 13
.3 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames – Section 08 11 13

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM):
.1 ASTM A123/A123M-17, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hop-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
.2 ASTM A153/A153M-16a, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on
Iron and Steel Hardware.
.3 ASTM A475-03 (2014), Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Wire
Strand.
.4 ASTM A653/A653M-17, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.5 ASTM A792/A792M10 (2015), Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55%
Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
.6 ASTM F1554-17e1, Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and
105-ksi Yield Strength.
.7 ASTM F3125 F3125M-15a, Standard Specification for High Strength Structural
Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040
MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions.
.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):
.1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer.
.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1 CSA A660-10 (2014), Certification of Manufacturers of Steel Building Systems.
.2 CSA G40.20-13/G40.21-13, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
.3 CSA S16-14, Limit States Design of Steel Structures.
.4 CSA W59-13, Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
.5 CSA S136-16, Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
.4 Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI):
.1 CSSBI 30M-17, Standard for Steel Building Systems.

13 34 19.docx Stantec METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 13 34 19
Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 7

.2 CSSBI SSF 03-17, Care and Maintenance of Prefinished Sheet Steel Building
Products.
.5 Factory Mutual Research (FM):
.1 Approval Guide.
.6 Canadian Institute of Steel Construction (CISC)/Canadian Paint Manufacturer's
Association (CPMA):
.1 CISC/CPMA 1-73a, A Quick-Drying One-Coat Paint for Use on Structural Steel.
.2 CISC/CPMA 2-75, A Quick-drying primer for Use on Structural Steel.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 Type: rigid frame or beam and column, used in combination to form total building
systems with single span or multi-span bay spacing and layout as indicated.
.2 Columns, beams, and rafters may be tapered or uniform width but minimum overhead
clearances indicated on the Drawings to be maintained throughout.
.3 Primary structural framing to include transverse rigid frames, end wall columns and
beams, end wall posted frames, and wind bracing.
.4 Secondary structural steel framing to include purlins, girts, sub-girts, fascia and eave
struts, flange bracing, purlin bracing, torsion bars, box struts, sill supports, clips, framed
wall and roof openings, and other miscellaneous structural components.
.5 Roof slopes: as indicated.

1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 Design steel building system to NBC, Part 4 to withstand dead loads and live loads for
the locality concerned, including ceilings, mechanical and electrical systems, cranes,
material handling systems, impact loads, and additional requirements as indicated on
Drawings.
.2 Design all supporting beams and brackets back to main rigid frames for suspended crane
and equipment as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate loads with crane and equipment
suppliers.
.3 Design includes overhead monorail beams at locations noted on the drawings with load
rating clearly marked on beam.
.4 Maximum deflection:
.1 Roof cladding under full design load: 1/180 of clear span.
.2 Wall cladding under specified wind effects: 1/180 of clear span.
.3 The maximum total drift per storey under specified wind and gravity loads not to
exceed 1/240 of storey height. This limit also applies to end wall columns
supporting suspended floor levels.
.4 The following deflection criteria applies:

Item Deflection Criteria

13 34 19.docx Stantec METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 13 34 19
Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 7

Item Deflection Criteria

End Wall Column 180
End Wall Rafter (live) 180
End Wall Rafter (wind) 180
Girt (wind) 180
Purlins (total loads) 240
Purlins (wind) 180
Wall Panel 180
Roof Panel (live) 180
Roof Panel (wind) 180
Frame Horizontal 240
Frame Horizontal (Crane) 240
Frame Vertical 240
Wind Framing 180

.5 Design building walls and roof to allow for thermal movement of component materials
caused by ambient temperature range of 85C without causing buckling, failure of joint
seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects.
.6 Ensure total absence of condensation on interior surfaces under following minimum
condition:
.1 Interior: 22C, 30 % relative humidity (RH), still air.
.2 Exterior: -25C, 25 km/h wind.
.7 Design building enclosure elements to accommodate, by means of expansion joints, any
movement in element itself and between element and building structure caused by
structural and thermal movements without permanent distortion, damage to infills,
racking of joints, breakage of seals, water penetration, or glass breakage.
.8 Design of building assembly to allow for ease of replacement of components. Design
building components for field bolting. Field welding of building components not
permitted.
.9 Size anchor rods to resist shear, uplift, and bending loads induced. Anchor rods shall be
unprimed to ensure bond with concrete.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit shop drawings and erection drawings sealed and signed by a qualified
Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Manitoba.
.3 Indicate plans and grid lines, structural members and connection details, bearing and
anchorage details, framed openings, accessories, schedule of materials and finishes,
camber, loads and reaction forces, fasteners, and welds.

13 34 19.docx Stantec METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 13 34 19
Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
Page 4 of 7

.4 Indicate shop and erection details including cuts, copes, connections, holes, threaded
fasteners, rivets and welds. Indicate welds by CSA welding symbols.
.5 Submit erection drawings fully describing methods and sequence of erection and type of
equipment proposed for use in erecting structural frame.
.6 Indicate related provisions required for mechanical, electrical, and other work.
.7 Certificates: submit following documents in accordance with CSSBI 30M:
.1 Erection drawings showing foundation loads, anchor bolt setting details part
numbers, connections, and assembly details.
.2 Provide certification that building meets contract requirements.
.3 Provide structural analysis certification of building system.
.4 Provide certification stating design criteria used and loads assumed in design,
which places sole responsibility for design of building components with steel
building systems manufacturer.
.8 Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to Engineer manufacturer's written report, within
three days of review, verifying compliance of Work, as described in PART 3 - FIELD
QUALITY CONTROL.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Provide certification from steel building systems manufacturer that erector is qualified to
erect system to requirements of CSA A660.
.2 Erector retained by manufacturer shall provide written documentation showing a
minimum of five years experience in erection of pre-engineered steel buildings of similar
size and complexity to the building described in Contract Documents.
.3 Site Meetings: as part of Manufacturer's Services described in PART 3 - FIELD
QUALITY CONTROL, schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed.
.1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory work is complete
but before installation begins.
.2 Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60% complete.
.3 Upon completion of Work, after cleaning is carried out.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Protect prefinished steel sheet during fabrication, transportation, site storage, and
installation to CSSBI SSF 03.
.2 Handle and protect galvanized materials from damage to zinc coating.
.3 During storage, space surfaces of galvanized materials to permit free circulation of air.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
.1 Behlin Industries Flex-Systems

13 34 19.docx Stantec METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 13 34 19
Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
Page 5 of 7

.2 Steelway Building Systems

.3 Varco Pruden
.4 Nucor Building Systems
.5 Robertson Building Systems

2.2 MATERIALS
.1 Structural steel: to CSA G40.20/G40.21, shop primed.
.2 Interior liner panel: factory preformed steel sheet, minimum 0.5 mm base metal
thickness, zinc coated or aluminum zinc alloy coated prefinished, 914 mm width
coverage, 15 mm thick. Acceptable product Behlen 936 liner panel or approved equal.
Colour to be prefinished white.
.3 Bolts: to ASTM F3125M complete with nuts and washers. Coated or plated for corrosion
resistance.
.4 Anchor bolts: to ASTM F1554 Grade36 complete with nuts and washers, galvanized for
corrosion resistance.
.5 Welding materials: to CSA W59.
.6 Cable: to ASTM A475 - Extra High Strength.
.7 Screws: corrosion resistant purpose made, head colour to match attached sheet.
.8 Shop primer paint: to CISC/CPMA 1-73a for surfaces not to be top coated, to
CISC/CPMA 2-75 for surfaces to be top coated.

2.3 FABRICATION
.1 Fabricate structural members in accordance with shop drawings and to CSA S16 or CSA
S136 as applicable.
.1 Tolerance not to exceed those specified in CSSBI 30M.
.2 Provide holes for attachment of other work, as indicated.
.3 Reinforce openings to maintain design strength.
.4 Shear, form, punch and weld structural members in shop.
.5 Cut ends of sheets square and clean.
.6 Bolt primary building frame connections.
.7 Shop fabricate building components for field bolting. Field welding of building
components not permitted.
.8 Prefabricated curbs and equipment supports:
.9 Fabricated curbs and equipment supports from structural aluminum or aluminum-zinc
alloy coated sheet steel, welded construction unless two-piece curb is required.
.10 Fabricate curbs to compliment standing seam roof system components. Prefabricated
curbs shall match finish and colour as roof panels.

13 34 19.docx Stantec METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 13 34 19
Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
Page 6 of 7

.11 Fabricate and install roof curbs to match roof slope with level mounting surface required
by equipment manufacturer.
.12 Obtain equipment manufacturers' shop drawings for review prior to commencing
fabrication.
.13 Provide for differential thermal movement between curb and roof system.

2.4 FINISHES
.1 Clean, prepare surfaces and shop prime structural steel to CSA S16 except where
members are zinc coated or zinc-aluminum alloy coated or are to be encased in concrete.
.2 Ensure compatibility of all finishes to Section 09 91 00 – Painting.
.3 Shop primer paint: to CISC/CPMA 1-73a for surfaces not to be top coated, to
CISC/CPMA 2-75 for surfaces to be top coated.
.4 Galvanizing: hot dipped galvanizing to ASTM A123 for shapes and ASTM A153 for
hardware for exterior items and items in moist or wet environments.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 ERECTION
.1 Do work to CSSBI 30M except where specified otherwise.
.2 Erect structural frame to shop drawings and to CSA S16.
.1 Erection tolerances not to exceed those specified in CSSBI 30M.
.3 Prepare galvanized structural steel surfaces for field welding by removing zinc before
welding.
.1 After welding, chip away flux and prime with shop coat primer.
.4 Obtain written permission from Engineer prior to field cutting or altering of structural
members.
.5 Touch up with shop primer bolts, rivets, welds, and burned or scratched surfaces where
exposed at completion of erection.
.6 Install equipment and curb supports, flashed, and sealed to prevent water penetration into
roof system.
.7 Installation tolerances:
.1 Vertical position: +/- 3 mm
.2 Horizontal position: +/- 3 mm
.3 Deviation from plumb: 3 mm maximum each plane
.4 Racking of face: 6 mm maximum
.5 Racking in elevation: nil

13 34 19.docx Stantec METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 13 34 19
Field Way Reservoir & Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS
Page 7 of 7

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Manufacturer's Services:
.1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in
handling, installing, applying, protecting, and cleaning of product and submit
Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.
.2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations
and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation to manufacturer's
instructions.
.3 Schedule site visits to review Work as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY
ASSURANCE.

END OF SECTION

13 34 19.docx Stantec METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

DIVISION 22

PLUMBING
RM of Headingley Section 22 05 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
Page 1 of 6

Part 1 General

1.1 INTENT
.1 This section applies to Divisions 22 and 23 and Comply with all requirements of other
discipline’s specifications.
.2 Provide complete, fully tested and operational mechanical systems to meet requirements
described herein and in complete accord with applicable codes and ordinances include
provincial, municipal, bylaws and authorities having jurisdiction.
.3 Obtain all permits and pay for all applicable fees and charges, including inspection
charges by the authorities that issue the permits. Arrange and coordinate all related
inspections to provide certificates indicating Final Approval.
.4 Contract documents of the Specifications and Drawings are generally diagrammatic and
approximately to scale unless detailed otherwise. They establish scope, material and
installation quality and are not detailed installation instructions.
.5 Follow manufacturer's recommended installation details and procedures for equipment,
supplemented by requirements of Contract Documents. Provide adequate access space
for maintenance and service.
.6 Install material and equipment generally in locations and routes shown, close to building
structure with minimum interference with other services or free space. Remove and
replace improperly installed equipment as determined by the Engineer.
.7 Connect to equipment specified in other Sections and to equipment supplied and installed
by other Contractors or by the Owner. Uncrate equipment, assemble, move in place and
install complete; start-up and test.

1.2 WARRANTY
.1 Furnish a written guarantee stating that all work executed in this contract will be free
from defective workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from the date of
substantial performance of work. The Contractor shall repair and replace any work
which fails or becomes defective during the term of the guarantee/warranty, providing the
operating and maintenance instructions have been complied with. The period of
guarantee specified shall not, in any way, supplant any other guarantees of a longer
period provided by Manufacturers or as called for in the project documents.
.2 Refer to Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.

1.3 OWNER REQUIREMENTS DURING WARRANTY

.1 Unless specified otherwise the Owner shall be responsible for all routine maintenance
requirements as required in the manufacturers instructions.

1.4 COORDINATION OF WORK

.1 Cooperate and coordinate with other trades on the project.
.2 Make reference to electrical, mechanical, structural and architectural drawings when
setting out work. Consult with respective Divisions in setting out locations for ductwork,
equipment, and piping, so that conflicts are avoided and symmetrical even spacing is
22 05 01.docx Stantec GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
RM of Headingley Section 22 05 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
Page 2 of 6

maintained. Jointly work out all conflicts on site before fabricating or installing any
materials or equipment.
.3 Where dimensional details are required, work with the applicable architectural and
structural drawings.

1.5 REFERENCES
.1 Conform to all referenced codes and standards to their latest edition.

1.6 MATERIALS
.1 Materials and equipment installed shall be new, full weight and of quality specified. Use
same brand or manufacturer and model for each specific application.
.2 Each major component of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name, address, catalog
and serial number in a conspicuous place.
.3 Replace materials or workmanship below specified quality and relocate work wrongly
placed to satisfaction of the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner.
.4 Install materials and equipment in a quality manner providing good workmanship by
competent tradesmen.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
.2 Refer to Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.

1.8 AVAILABILITY OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

.1 Make known in writing to the Engineer ten (10) days prior to the tender closing date any
materials specified that are required to complete the work which are not currently
available or will not be available for use as called for herein. Failing to do so, it will be
assumed that the most expensive alternate has been included in the tender price.

1.9 ALTERNATE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

.1 The price submitted for this contract shall be based on the use of materials and equipment
as specified or as contained within the acceptable equivalent manufacturers listed in each
section.
.2 Approved equivalents for specified products shall be equal or better to the specified
product in every respect, `which include materials and performance to meet the space,
capacity, and noise requirements outlined in schedules on drawings and specifications.
.3 Requests for approval for tendering purposes of equivalent materials or equipment shall
be submitted in duplicate, to the Engineer no later than ten (10) working days prior to the
closing date of tender for mechanical trade. Approval of requests shall only be given by
addendum.
.4 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs for work or materials required by
the trades or other contractors to accommodate use of other than specified materials or
equipment.

22 05 01.docx Stantec GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
Page 3 of 6

1.10 METRIC CONVERSION

.1 All units in this division are expressed in SI units. Soft metric conversions are used
throughout.
.2 Submit all shop drawings and maintenance manuals in SI units.
.3 On all submittals use the same SI units as stated in the specification.
.4 Equivalent Nominal Diameters of Pipes - Metric and Imperial
.1 Where pipes are specified with metric dimensions and only Imperial sized pipes
are available, provide equivalent nominal Imperial sized pipe as indicated in the
table, and provide adapters to ensure compatible connections to all metric sized
fittings, equipment and piping.
.2 When CSA approved SI Metric pipes are available and are provided, the
contractor shall provide adapters to ensure compatible connections between the
SI Metric pipes and all new and existing pipes, fittings, and equipment.
.3 Record accurately on "as-built" drawings the type of pipe (i.e., Metric or
Imperial) installed.
.4 EQUIVALENT NOMINAL DIAMETERS OF PIPES

mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches

3 1/8 65 2-1/2 375 15

6 1/4 75 3 450 18
10 3/8 100 4 500 20
15 1/2 125 5 600 24
20 3/4 150 6 750 30
25 1 200 8
30 1-1/4 250 10
40 1-1/2 300 12
50 2

.5 Metric Duct Sizes

.1 The metric duct sizes are expressed as 25 mm = 1 inch.

1.11 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

.1 Drawings and specifications are complementary each to the other, and what is called for
by one shall be binding as if called for by both.
.2 Should any discrepancy appear between drawings and specifications which leaves the
Contractor in doubt as to the true intent and meaning of the plans and specifications,
obtain a ruling from the Engineer in writing or by Addendum, before submitting tender.
If this is not done, it will be assumed that the most expensive alternate has been included.
.3 Prior to construction start, examine all contract documents, including all drawings and
specifications, and work of other trades to ensure that work can be satisfactorily carried
out without changes to building.

22 05 01.docx Stantec GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
Page 4 of 6

1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Refer to Section 01 33 00 Submittals procedures.

1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING

.1 Provide inserts, holes and sleeves, cutting and fitting required for mechanical work.
Relocate improperly located holes and sleeves.
.2 Provide inserts or drill for expansion bolts, hanger rods, brackets, and supports.
.3 Obtain written approval from Engineer before drilling, coring, cutting or burning
structural members. Ensure post tensioned or pre-stressed strands are located accurately
and avoid with an adequate margin of safety.
.4 Provide openings and holes required in precast concrete members for mechanical work.
Cast holes larger than 100 mm (4”) in diameter. Field-cut holes smaller than 100 mm
(4”) if location is approved.
.5 Patch and make good building where damaged from equipment installation, improperly
located holes etc. Work to be performed by the trade or contractor responsible for that
type of work.

1.14 ACCESS DOORS

.1 Provide access doors for maintenance or adjustment purposes for all mechanical system
components including:
.1 Valves
.2 Volume and splitter dampers
.3 Fire dampers
.4 Cleanouts and traps
.5 Controls, coils and terminal units
.6 Expansion joints
.7 Filters
.8 Strainers
.2 Steel frame access panel with stainless steel piano-type hinge, channel reinforced steel
door panel, three "Symmons" fasteners per door. Door panel recessed to receive ceiling
or wall material to give finished appearance showing only hinge and fasteners. Provide
acoustic gasket between door panel perimeter and steel frame. Rated access doors shall
be UL-listed.
.3 Sizes to be 200 mm x 200 mm for cleanout, 300 mm x 300 mm for hand
600 mm x 600 mm for body access minimum.
.4 Provide ULC-listed fire rated access doors installed in rated wall and ceilings.

1.15 FIRE-STOPPING AND SEALING

.1 Fire-stop all pipe, duct, conduit and wire penetrations through floors and walls,
designated as fire and/or smoke separations. The contractor is required to coordinate with
the architectural drawings to contractual rated wall types and installation details.
.2 Refer to Section 07 84 00 Fire Stopping.

22 05 01.docx Stantec GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
Page 5 of 6

.3 Refer to Section 07 92 00 Joint sealing.

1.16 PIPE SLEEVES

.1 Pipe sleeves through exterior walls shall be of SCH 40 304 stainless steel pipe and shall
be, unless detailed otherwise, one size larger than the penetrating pipe for 100 mm and
larger pipe, and two sizes larger for pipe smaller than 100 mm.
.2 Process pipes passing through concrete walls shall be SCH 40 304 stainless steel with a
diameter equal to the process pipe. These sleeves shall be puddle flanged and be flanged
for a bolted pipe connection each end as indicated on the Drawings.
.3 Pipe sleeves shall have a 50 mm by 10 mm thick steel ring continuously welded all
around the middle of the pipe length.
.4 Special sleeves shall be as shown on the drawings.

1.17 PIPES THROUGH FLOORS AND WALLS

.1 Provide stainless steel pipe sleeves where pipes pass through floors and walls (PVC, tin,
or blocked out sleeves are only acceptable where indicated on the drawing).
.2 Install sleeves flush at walls and projecting at floors as detailed or 50 mm above floor
surfaces and flush with bottom.
.3 Provide continuously welded rings on pipes passing through walls below grade or where
walls are watertight. The thrust/seepage rings shall be as detailed on the drawings.
.4 Coat surfaces of stainless steel in contact with concrete with bitumastic.
.5 Where electrical insulation from concrete rebar is required, use link seals with pipe
sleeves where shown on drawings.
.6 Where thrust restraint is required design according to AWWA Manual M11 or as
detailed.
.7 There shall be no direct contact between structural steel and stainless steel.
.8 Seal space between sleeves and pipes with non-hardening mastic -Duraseal-A or
approved alternative.

1.18 ESCUTCHEON AND PLATES

.1 Provide escutcheon and plates on piping and ductwork passing through finished walls,
floors and ceilings.
.2 Escutcheons shall be split type, stainless or chrome plated steel.

1.19 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

.1 Protect equipment and materials in storage on site during and after installation until final
acceptance. Leave factory covers in place. Take special precautions to prevent entry of
foreign material into working parts of piping and duct systems.
.2 Protect equipment with polyethylene covers and crates.
.3 Thoroughly clean piping and equipment of dirt, cuttings and other foreign substances.

22 05 01.docx Stantec GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS
Page 6 of 6

.4 Ensure that existing equipment to be turned over to the Owner or reused is carefully
dismantled and not damaged or lost. Do not reuse existing materials and equipment
unless specifically indicated.
.5 Refer to Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.

1.20 TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE

.1 Temporary or trial usage requested by the Owner of mechanical equipment supplied
under contract shall not represent acceptance. Operate and maintain all equipment and
systems during trial usage.
.2 Repair or otherwise rectify damage caused by defective materials or workmanship during
temporary or trial usage.

1.21 SITE UTILITY SERVICES

.1 Maintain liaison with the Owner to interrupt, re-route or connect to water, sewer, heating,
or gas systems, with minimum interruption of services.
.2 Contractor shall confirm all elevations and locations of existing services prior to and
during excavation.
.3 Contractor shall provide as-builts of site services. As-Builts to be dimensioned to grid
lines or building exterior walls.

1.22 ELECTRICAL MOTORS

.1 Supply mechanical equipment complete with electrical motors. Provide a complete
listing of all motors required on the project within twenty (20) days of contract award.
List kW, Voltage, Phasing, efficiency etc. Provide list to Engineer and Electrical
Contractor for review.
.2 Refer to Section 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.

Part 2 Products
Not used.

Part 3 Execution
Not used.

END OF SECTION

22 05 01.docx Stantec GENERAL MECHANICAL PROVISIONS

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METERS AND GAUGES
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Entire Specification – All areas of common work.
.2 This section applies to Division 22, 23.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
.1 ASME B40.100-2022, Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.
.2 ASME B40.200-2008(R2013), Thermometers, Direct Reading and Remote
Reading.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit data sheets on thermometers and pressure gauges indicating service, and
temperature or pressure ranges, to the Engineer for review.
.3 Submit list of all meters, including location, service, flow and corresponding reading for
flow.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Thermometers: Western, Marsh, Ashcroft, Winters, Trerice, Weksler, Tel-Tr.
.2 Pressure gauges: Western, Marsh, Ashcroft, Winters, Trerice, Weksler.
.3 Static pressure gauges: Dwyer Magnehelic Series.

2.2 THERMOMETERS
.1 Dial Thermometers: 75 mm diameter dial in drawn stainless steel case, bimetallic helix
actuated, brass separable socket of flange and bushing, glass cover, adjustable pointer.
Western Gauges Master-Temp 200/300 Bimetal Thermometers.

2.3 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE TAPS

.1 Fitting to allow a 3 mm (12 gauge) O.D. plug-in gauge to measure temperature or
pressure.
.1 Maximum pressure: 3450 kPa (500 psi).
.2 Maximum temperature: 135°C (275°F).
.2 Fitting constructed of:
.1 6 mm (¼”) NPT stainless steel body with hex head screw cap and gasket.
.2 Protective screw cap to have retaining strap.
.3 Two self-closing valves constructed of nordel.

22 05 19.docx Stantec METERS AND GAUGES

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METERS AND GAUGES
Page 2 of 3

.3 Test kit including the following:

.1 One 63 mm (2½”) diameter pressure gauge with 3 mm (12 gauge) O.D. plug-in
stem.
.2 Two 45 mm (1¾”) diameter temperature gauges with 3 mm (12 gauge) O.D. x
125 mm (5”) plug-in stem, range 0 to 110°C (32 to 230°F).
.3 All above in protective carrying case with operating instructions.
.4 Installation:
.1 Install pressure/temperature taps into threaded pipe nipples welded to wall of
pipe. Locate fittings in accessible spaces.
.2 Provide one pressure/temperature taps test kit.

2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 100 mm (4”) diameter, drawn stainless steel case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube, brass
movement, extruded brass socket, front calibration adjustment, black figures on white
background. Pressure gauges shall be liquid filled with ½% accuracy in locations
subject to vibration (on pumps, air handling units, and chillers), and 1% accuracy in all
other locations. Provide needle valve and syphon for steam service, pulsating damper
and ball valve for water service.

2.5 STATIC PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Dial Gauge: 100 mm (4”) dial, diaphragm actuated, suitable for positive, negative, or
differential pressure measurement. Accuracy within ±2% of full scale, complete with
static pressure tips and mounting accessories.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install positive displacement meters with isolating valves. Provide valved bypass for
liquid service meters.
.2 Install flow meters in uninterrupted straight pipe, minimum 3 pipe diameters
downstream and 5 pipe diameters upstream, or according to manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.3 Provide one pressure gauge per pump installing taps before strainers and on suction and
discharge of pump. Pipe all three locations to the gauge c/w isolation valves.
.4 Select gauges so that normal operating point is approximately mid-point of instrument
range.
.5 On pipes 63 mm (2½”) and smaller, place well in tee used in lieu of an elbow to
accommodate well.

3.2 METERS AND GAUGES INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

.1 Thermometers:
.1 Where shown on drawings
.2 Pressure/Temperature Taps:
.1 All control sensor tappings

22 05 19.docx Stantec METERS AND GAUGES

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 METERS AND GAUGES
Page 3 of 3

.2 Where shown on drawings

.3 Pressure Gauges:
.1 Domestic Cold Water to Standpipe and/or Sprinkler
.2 And where shown on drawings
.4 Static Pressure Gauges:
.1 Where shown on drawings
.5 Positive Displacement Meter:
.1 Domestic Cold Water
.2 And where shown on drawings.
.6 Flow Meters:
.1 Where shown on drawings

END OF SECTION

22 05 19.docx Stantec METERS AND GAUGES

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL DUTY VALVES AND STRAINERS
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 This section applies to Divisions 22 and 23.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS).
.1 MSS SP-25-2018, Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and
Unions.
.2 MSS SP-80-2013, Bronze Gate Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
.3 MSS SP-110-2010, Ball Valves, Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint,
Grooved and Flared Ends.

1.3 GENERAL
.1 Provide valves of the same type by the same manufacturer throughout.
.2 Provide valves with manufacturer's name and pressure rating clearly marked on outside
of body.
.3 All valves shall meet the requirements of the Manufacturers Standardization Society,
Standard Practice standards, latest edition.
.4 Ball valves to be ULC listed, MSS SP. 110 Standard.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Products shall be product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of such units
who issues complete catalogue data on such products.

Part 2 Products

2.1 BALL VALVES

.1 For Steel Pipe:
.1 Full port
.2 2760 kPa (400 psi) WOG, 1035 kPa (150 psi) WST
.3 Stainless Steel
.4 Locking lever handle
.5 Blow out proof stem
.6 Acceptable manufacturer’s Kitz, Flowtek, Mueller, Crane, Jenkins, or approved
equal.

22 05 23.docx Stantec GENERAL DUTY VALVES

AND STRAINERS
RM of Headingley Section 22 05 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL DUTY VALVES AND STRAINERS
Page 2 of 4

.2 For PVC / CPVC Pipe:

.1 Meets NSF 61 standards for contact with drinking water
.2 PVC or CPVC body, to match pipe
.3 Seal material: EPDM
.4 12 mm to 50 mm sizes to 1586 kPa working pressure and larger sizes to 1035
kPa working pressure
.5 All valve stems shall have blow out proof design and double O-rings for safety
.6 Full port and two-way blocking
.7 Socket ends to be Schedule 80 conforming to ASTM D-2467
.8 PVC / CPVC compound shall have an ASTM D1784 cell classification 12454 /
23567 or 23447
.9 Chemline Type 21 true union, IPEX VXE Series true union, or approved equal

2.2 CHECK VALVES

.1 Swing Check Valves up to 50 mm (2”): Bronze body screw-in cap, renewable no. 125
composition disc, threaded ends 860 kPa (125 psi) steam. Red-White Model 236T,
Toyo #236T or approved equal.
.2 Inline Check Valves up to 50 mm (2”): Forge brass body, spring loaded, threaded ends
for horizontal and vertical installation. Pressure rated for 1380 kPa (200 psi) WOG water.
Red-White Model 232 or approved equal
.3 Inline Check Valves 50 mm (2”) and over: Cast iron body, dual plate bronze discs,
stainless steel spring. Pressure rated for 1035 kPa (150 psi) WOG water. Red-White
Model 442 or approved equal.
.4 CPVC and PVC Ball Check Valves up to 50 mm (2”): PVC/CPVC body to match pipe,
true union, EPDM seals, socket ends. Suitable for horizontal or vertical installation.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical installation. Pressure rated for minimum 689 kPa (100
psi). Chemline BT True Union Ball Check Valves or approved equal.

2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTER

.1 Lead free construction c/w cast copper silicon alloy body and shutoffs.
.2 Pipe diameter >50 mm to be flanged ends to ANSI-B 16.1, Class125.
.3 Pipe diameter 50 mm or less – threaded ends
.4 Maximum working pressure 1035 kPa.
.5 Valve to be ASSE listed 1013 and to meet AWWA-C510/C511 for Reduced Pressure
Backflow Preventer – Include repair kit option.
.6 Watts LF909, Zurn Wilkins 375XL or 975XL2U.

2.4 VALVE OPERATORS

.1 Provide suitable hand wheels for gate, globe or angle, radiation and drain valves and
inside hose bibbs.

22 05 23.docx Stantec GENERAL DUTY VALVES

AND STRAINERS
RM of Headingley Section 22 05 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL DUTY VALVES AND STRAINERS
Page 3 of 4

.2 Provide one plug cock wrench for every ten plug cocks sized 50 mm and smaller,
minimum of one. Provide each plug cock sized 65 mm and larger with a wrench, with set
screw.
.3 Provide valves larger than 100 mm located more than 2,100 mm from floor in equipment
rooms with chain operated sheaves. Extend chains to 1,500 mm above floor and hook to
clips to arrange to clear walking aisles.

2.5 STRAINERS
.1 Meeting NSF 61
.2 Minimum 700 kPa, Y type with 20 mesh, monel, bronze or stainless steel removable
screen.
.3 50 mm and under, bronze body, screwed ends with 0.75 mm (22 gauge) stainless steel
perforated screen and brass cap.
.4 65 mm and over, cast iron body, flanged ends, with 1 mm (20 ga) stainless steel
perforated screen and bolted cap.
.5 Size 125 mm and larger: Flanged iron body, Y pattern with 3 mm (11 ga) stainless steel
perforated screen.
.6 Screen free area shall be minimum three times area of inlet pipe.
.7 Zurn Wilkins SXL or approved equal.

2.6 BACKWATER VALVES

.1 For 100 mm and smaller
.1 Backwater valve to be Zurn Wilkins Z-1091, Mifab BV1280, or approved equal
with epoxy coated cast iron body, flapper that hangs closed when not in
operation, and suitable for installation at end of a drainage line.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION

.1 Install valves with stem upright or horizontal, not inverted.
.2 Install valves for shut-off and isolating service, to isolate all equipment, parts of systems,
or vertical risers.
.3 Install backflow preventers at 1200 mm above finished floor to allow access for
maintenance.
.4 Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus and
terminal units.
.5 Size drain lines and drain valves equal to size of apparatus drain connection.
.6 For pipe sizes 19 mm (¾”) and over, minimum drain size to be 19 mm (¾”).
.7 Provide hose thread connection with cap and chain for 19 mm (¾”) drain valves located
in ceiling and public areas.

22 05 23.docx Stantec GENERAL DUTY VALVES

AND STRAINERS
RM of Headingley Section 22 05 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GENERAL DUTY VALVES AND STRAINERS
Page 4 of 4

.8 Provide male NPT nipples with threaded pipe cap for drain sizes over 19 mm (¾”) where
not piped directly to floor drains.
.9 Provide valved drain and hose connection off the bottom of all strainers.

END OF SECTION

22 05 23.docx Stantec GENERAL DUTY VALVES

AND STRAINERS
RM of Headingley Section 22 05 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Page 1 of 6

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 This section applies to Divisions 22 and 23.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Pipe supports shall meet the requirements of ASME B31.
.2 Duct hangers shall follow the recommendations of the current edition of the SMACNA
Duct Manuals.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Provide hangers and supports to secure equipment in place, prevent vibration, maintain
grade, and provide for expansion and contraction.
.2 Install supports of strength and rigidity to suit loading without unduly stressing building.
Locate adjacent to equipment to prevent undue stresses in piping and equipment.
.3 Select hangers and supports for the service and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended maximum loading. Hangers shall have a safety factor of 5 to 1.
.4 Fasten hangers and supports to building structure or inserts in concrete construction.
.5 Provide and set sleeves or block-outs required for equipment, including openings
required for placing equipment.
.6 Provide sleeves for all piping and ductwork penetration through walls, ceilings, floors
and footings. Sleeves to be sized to allow insulation to pass through and to project
through both sides of wall.
.7 Do not weld piping, ductwork or equipment supports to building metal decking or
building structural steel supports unless prior written approval has been obtained from the
structural engineer.
.8 Obtain approval prior to drilling for inserts and supports for piping system and ductwork.
Discuss and obtain approval for hanging systems and methods with Structural Engineer.
.9 Obtain approval prior to using percussion type fastenings.
.10 Use of piping, ductwork or equipment for hanger supports and use of perforated band
iron, wire or chain as hangers is not permitted.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings of each factory fabricated component in accordance with Section
01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

22 05 29.docx Stantec HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Page 2 of 6

Part 2 Products

2.1 INSERTS
.1 Inserts shall be malleable iron or galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded
connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, and lugs for attaching to
forms.
.2 Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 Hangers, Pipe Sizes 15 mm (½”) to 40 mm (1½”): Adjustable wrought steel ring.
.2 Hangers, Pipe Sizes 50 mm (2”) and over: Adjustable wrought steel clevis.
.3 Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. Cast
iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes 150 mm (6”) and over. Cup washers for hot piping
below 150 mm (6”).
.4 Wall Support, Pipe Sizes to 75 mm (3”): Cast iron hook.
.5 Wall Support, Pipe Sizes 100 mm (4”) and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp, adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 150 mm (6”) and over.
.6 Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.
.7 Floor Support, Pipe Sizes to 100 mm (4”) and All Cold Pipe Sizes: Cast iron adjustable
pipe saddle, locknut nipple, floor flange and concrete pier or steel support.
.8 Floor Support, Hot Pipe Sizes 125 mm (5”) and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and
stand, steel screws and concrete pier to steel support.
.9 Design hangers so they cannot become disengaged by movements of supported pipe.
.10 Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
.11 Provide galvanized hangers and supports for galvanized and PVC piping.
.12 Support all piping below grade and under floor slabs in 3.2 mm (10 gauge) continuous
cadmium plated channel. Support channel with cadmium plated clevis hangers and rods.
Install supports on centers as specified in 3.2. Extend cadmium plated hanger rods
450 mm (18”) above slab rebar and bend back over rebar so as to provide a minimum of
450 mm (18”) of support in slab. Do not stress rod when bending.

2.3 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 Conform to current edition of SMACNA handbooks.

2.4 HANGER RODS

.1 Provide steel hanger rods, threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

2.5 SPRING HANGERS

.1 Springs: alloy steel to ASTM A125, shot peened, magnetic particle inspected, with +/-
5% spring rate tolerance, tested for free height, spring rate, loaded height.

22 05 29.docx Stantec HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Page 3 of 6

.2 Load adjustability: 15% minimum adjustability each side of calibrated load. Adjustment
without special tools. Adjustments not to affect travel capabilities. Total travel to be
actual travel + /- 20%. Difference between total travel and actual travel 25 mm minimum.
.3 Vertical movement: 13 mm minimum, 50 mm maximum, use single spring pre-
compressed variable spring hangers.
.4 Vertical movement greater than 50 mm: use double spring pre-compressed variable
spring hanger with 2 springs in series in single casing.

2.6 HOUSE-KEEPING PADS FOR EQUIPMENT

.1 Provide minimum 100 mm high concrete housekeeping pads for base-mounted
equipment; size pads 50 mm larger than equipment; chamfer pad edges.
.2 Provide reinforced concrete housekeeping pads poured directly on structural floor slab
100 mm (4”) thick minimum, extended 100 mm (4”) minimum beyond machinery
bedplates and chamfer pad edges. Provide templates, anchor bolts and accessories
required for mounting and anchoring equipment.
.3 Construct supports of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten
with flanges bolted to structure.
.4 Provide rigid anchors for ducts and pipes immediately after vibration isolation
connections to equipment unless spring hangers are specified.

2.7 FLASHING
.1 Steel Flashing: 0.5 mm (26 gauge) galvanized steel.
.2 Lead Flashing: 24.4 kg/m² (5 lb/ft2 sheet lead for waterproofing, 4.88 kg/m² (1 lb/ft2
sheet lead for soundproofing.
.3 Safes: 24.4 kg/m² (5 lb/ft2 sheet lead or 0.5 mm (26 gauge) neoprene.
.4 Caps: Steel, 0.8 mm (22 gauge) minimum, 1.6 mm (16 gauge) at fire resistance
structures.

2.8 SLEEVES
.1 Pipes through floors and walls: Form with stainless steel pipe or as indicated on
construction drawings.
.2 Pipes through Floors: Form with steel pipe or approved PVC sleeves.
.3 Pipes through Beams, Walls, Fire Proofing, Footings, Potentially Wet Floor: Form with
steel pipe.
.4 Size large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and to provide for continuous
insulation.

2.9 SEALS
.1 Provide modular mechanical type seals between pipes and sleeves where passing through
perimeter walls below grade (basement). These to consist of interlocking synthetic
rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and sleeve
when linking bolts are tightened in sequence. Equal to "Link-seal" by Thunderline,
Model S-316.

22 05 29.docx Stantec HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Page 4 of 6

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSERTS
.1 Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced
concrete beams wherever practicable.
.2 Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in concrete
for inserts carrying pipe over 100 mm (4”) or ducts over 1500 mm (60”) wide.
.3 Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface.
.4 Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide rod with
recessed 100 mm (4”) minimum square steel plate and nut above slab.

3.2 PIPE HANGERS SPACING

.1 Plumbing piping: to Canadian Plumbing Code, Provincial Code and/or authority having
jurisdiction.
.2 Fire protection: to applicable fire code.
.3 Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with table below, but not less than one
hanger at joints.
.4 Support horizontal steel and copper piping as follows:
Maximum Hanger
Maximum Pipe Maximum Maximum
Spacing Rod
Size UP to: Spacing Steel Spacing Copper
PVC Diameter
up to 30 2.1 m 1.8 m 1.8 m 10 mm
40 2.7 m 2.4 m 1.8 m 10 mm
50 3.0 m 2.7 m 2.4 m 10 mm
65 3.6 m 3.0 m 2.4 m 10 mm
75 3.6 m 3.0 m 3.0 m 15 mm
100 4.2 m 3.6 m 3.0 m 20 mm
150 5.0 m 4.0 m 4.0 m 20 mm
200 5.5 m 25 mm
Over 250 6.0 m 25 mm
.5 Install hangers to provide minimum 15 mm (½”) clear space between finished covering
and adjacent work.
.6 Use oversize hangers to accommodate pipe insulation thickness. For pipes up to 50 mm
(2”) use high density rigid pipe insulation at hanger location, with an insulation
protection shield. For pipes 65 mm (2½”) and over use insulation protection saddle.
.7 Ensure that rod is vertical under operating conditions at equalize loads.
.8 Place a hanger within 300 mm (12”) of each horizontal elbow.
.9 Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 40 mm (1½”) minimum after piping is
erected.
.10 Support cast iron horizontal drainage pipe near each hub and on each side of gasket and
clamp joints, with 1500 mm (60”) maximum spacing between hangers.

22 05 29.docx Stantec HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Page 5 of 6

.11 Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support vertical soil pipe at each floor at
hub.
.12 Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or
trapeze hangers.
.13 Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

3.3 LOW VELOCITY DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 Hanger Minimum Sizes:
.1 Up to 750 mm wide: 25 mm x 1.6 mm (16 ga) at 3,000 mm spacing.
.2 790 to 1,200 mm wide: 40 mm x 1.6 mm (16 ga) at 3,000 mm spacing.
.3 Over 1,200 mm wide: 40 mm x 1.6 mm (16 ga) at 2,400 mm spacing.
.2 Horizontal Duct on Wall Supports Minimum Sizes:
.1 Up to 450 mm wide: 40 mm x 1.6 mm (16 ga) or 25 x 25 x 3 mm (11 ga) at
2,400 mm spacing.
.2 475 mm to 1,000 mm wide: 40 mm x 40 mm x 3 mm (11 ga) at 1200 mm
spacing.
.3 Vertical Duct on Wall Supports Minimum Sizes at 3600 mm spacing:
.1 Up to 600 mm wide: 40 mm x 1.6 mm (16 ga).
.2 625 mm to 900 mm wide: 25 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm (11 ga).
.3 925 mm to 1,200 mm wide: 30 mm x 30 mm x 3 mm (11 ga).
.4 Over 1,200 mm wide: 50 mm x 50 mm x 3 mm (11 ga).
.4 Vertical Duct Floor Supports Minimum Sizes, Riveted or Screwed to Ducts:
.1 Up to 1,500 mm wide: 40 mm x 40 mm x 3 mm (11 ga).
.2 Over 1,500 mm wide: 50 mm x 50 mm x 3 mm (11 ga).

3.4 FLASHING
.1 Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through weather or
waterproofed walls, floors and roofs.
.2 Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 75 mm (3”) minimum above finished roof surface
with lead worked 25 mm (1”) minimum into hub, 200 mm (8”) minimum clear on sides
with minimum 600 mm (24”) x 600 mm (24”) sheet size. For pipes through outside
walls, turn flange back into wall and caulk.
.3 Flash floor drains over finished areas with lead 250 mm (10”) clear on sides with
minimum 900 mm (36”) x 900 mm (36”) sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp
device.
.4 Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 200 mm (8”) minimum high. Flash and
counterflash with galvanized steel, soldered and made waterproof.

3.5 SLEEVES
.1 Set sleeves in position in advance of concrete work. Provide suitable reinforcing around
sleeve.

22 05 29.docx Stantec HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Page 6 of 6

.2 Extend sleeves through potentially wet floors 25 mm (1”) above finished floor level.
Caulk sleeves full depth and provide floor plate.
.3 Piping passing through floor, ceiling or wall, close off space between duct and sleeve
with non-combustible insulation. Caulk both sides.
.4 Sleeves provided through walls or floors where liquids could potentially pass from one
side to the other, provide sleeves with a 25 mm (1”) 'flange' welded to the external face of
the sleeve at the mid point of the thickness of the structure to provide a water stop.
.5 Install chrome plated escutcheons where piping passes through finished surfaces.

3.6 FINISHES ON HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 All hanger rods, hangers and supports shall be galvanized or factory primed with alkyd
red oxide primer to CAN/CGSB-1.40.

END OF SECTION

22 05 29.docx Stantec HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 This section applies to Divisions 22 and 23.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CAN/CGSB 1.60-97, Interior Alkyd Gloss Enamel.
.2 CAN/CGSB 24.3-12, Identification of Piping Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings of each factory fabricated component in accordance with Section
01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

1.4 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Color code mechanical equipment, piping and exposed ductwork. Refer to color
schedule at end of this section.
.2 Legend and direction of flow arrows shall consist of adhesive backed labels, yellow
color, with minimum 20 mm (¾”) high black lettering equal to Brady System B-500,
vinyl cloth labels for non insulated surfaces; and Brady B946 for insulated surfaces.

1.5 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

.1 Ensure that equipment and surfaces are carefully covered with tarping, or heavy-duty
plastic. Ensure that spills and splatter on finishes and equipment are cleaned up totally
and promptly.

Part 2 Products
.1 Comply with Section 09 91 00 – Painting.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL
.1 Identify piping with labels, color bands, and flow arrows. On all systems, provide
identification at 15 m (50 ft) maximum intervals, before and after pipes passing through
walls, at all sides of tees, behind access doors and in equipment rooms as required.
.2 Apply color bands at both ends of the label with primary color bands used to secure both
ends of individual labels. Refer to color schedule at end of this section.
.3 Provide 20 mm (¾”) diameter brass, lamacoid or metal photo black numbers, secured to
valve stem with key chain.
.4 Provide neat, typewritten directories, giving valve number, services and location. Frame
one copy under glass for wall mounting as directed. Include copies in O & M Manuals.
22 05 53.docx Stantec PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION
RM of Headingley Section 22 05 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION
Page 2 of 3

.5 Identify all equipment excluding pipe and duct with screwed down lamacoid plates
having 6 mm (¼”) minimum letter size. Identification to match as built drawings
equipment name and number.
.6 Identify electric starting switches, thermostats controlling motors, remote push button
stations, and controls equipment supplies under this division with lamacoid plates having
6 mm (¼”) minimum letter size. Identification to state equipment controlled and match to
control shop drawing identification numbers.
.7 Identify the purpose of duct access panels with self adhesive Brady stick-on colored
labels. Apply labels conforming to the following schedule:
Color Letters

Cleaning and service access yellow CA

Controls, including heat sensors black C
Dampers (backdraft, balance and control) blue D
Fire dampers red FD
Note: Provide black lettering in all cases.

.8 Identify the location of the following items of equipment which are concealed above a
ceiling with Avery "Data Dots". The colors shall conform to the following schedule:

Concealed equipment and cleaning access yellow

Control equipment, including control and valves black

Pipe mounted equipment with the exception

of fire, smoke, sprinkler and control equipment green

When T-bar ceilings are installed, adhere "Data Dots" on T-bar framing adjacent to panel
to be removed.

3.2 COLOUR CODE SCHEDULE

.1 Identification Symbols and Colours for Piping

Pipe Colour Stripe Colour Symbol

Carbon Dioxide (Fire Red CO2

Extinguisher)
Domestic Cold Water Light Blue None Cold PW
Domestic Hot Water* Orange None Hot PW
Domestic Hot Water Orange None Hot PW R
Recirculation*
Raw Water Green None RW
Drains Aluminum Red or Orange DR

22 05 53.docx Stantec PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION

RM of Headingley Section 22 05 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION
Page 3 of 3

Pipe Colour Stripe Colour Symbol

Vent Aluminum Red or Orange VT

Natural Gas Yellow Red Natural Gas
Motor Guards Red machinery Enamel
Hangers, Brackets, & Black Machinery Enamel
Supports

* For insulated pipe sections painting is not required, apply labels only.
.2 Ductwork
All ductwork to be identified as follows, complete with directional arrows:

Supply Air S/A

Return Air R/A
Mixed Air M/A
Outside Air O/A
Exhaust Air E/A
Transfer Air T/A
Relief Air Rel/A

.3 Equipment Bases/Housekeeping Pads to match floor finish.

3.3 MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS

.1 Conduit pull boxes, terminal boxes and junction boxes - GREY Covers - GREY with
black ‘C’.
.2 Main and secondary control panels, factory finish acceptable - control Contractor to
install company label to identify.

END OF SECTION

22 05 53.docx Stantec PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION

RM of Headingley Section 22 07 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PIPING INSULATION
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 This section applies to Divisions 22 and 23.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International)
.1 ASTM C335-17ae1, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Transfer
Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.
.2 ASTM C411-19, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-
Temperature Thermal Insulation.
.3 ASTM C449-07 (2019), Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-
Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
.4 ASTM C533-17, Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe
Thermal Insulation.
.5 ASTM C547-17, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
.6 ASTM C553-13, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
.7 ASTM C612-14, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board
Thermal Insulation.
.8 ASTM C795-08 (2018), Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in
Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
.9 ASTM C921-10 (2015), Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of
Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CGSB 51-GP-52MA-89, Vapor Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe,
Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation.
.2 CAN/CGSB 51.53-95, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Jacketing Sheet, for Insulated
Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts.
.3 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC)
.1 National Insulation Standards 1992 (R1999).

1.3 SCOPE
.1 Piping insulation.
.2 Adhesives, tie wires, tapes.
.3 Recovery Jackets.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Insulation shall be installed by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work.
.2 Materials shall meet or exceed fire and smoke hazard ratings as stated in this section and
defined in applicable building codes.
22 07 19.docx Stantec PIPING INSULATION
RM of Headingley Section 22 07 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PIPING INSULATION
Page 2 of 4

1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit shop drawings which indicate complete material data, "K" value, temperature
rating, density, finish, recovery jacket of materials proposed for this project and indicate
thickness of material for individual services.
.3 Submit samples of proposed insulating and recovering materials.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Deliver material to job site in original non-broken factory packaging, labeled with
manufacturer's density and thickness.
.2 Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer. Make good separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal
movement or poor workmanship.

1.7 ALTERNATIVES
.1 Alternative insulations are subject to approval. Alternatives shall provide the same
thermal resistance within 5% at normal conditions as material specified.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Owen's Corning/Fiberglas Canada Inc., Manson, Knauf Fiberglass.

2.2 GENERAL
.1 Insulation Materials, Recovery Jackets, Vapor Barrier Facings, Tapes and Adhesives
shall be In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102:
.1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25.
.2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.
.2 All insulation materials shall meet Building Code Standards, and packages or containers
of such materials shall be appropriately labeled.
.3 Insulate fittings and valve bodies with preformed insulated fittings.

2.3 MATERIALS
.1 Cold Piping: Formed fine fibrous glass or formed mineral fiber pipe insulation, with
factory applied vapor barrier jacket, factory molded to conform to piping, “K" value
maximum 0.035 W/m. °C at 24°C (0.24 btu in/hr/ft2 at 75°F). Service temperature: 4°C
(40°F) to 100°C (212°F).
.2 Hot Piping: Formed fine fibrous glass or mineral fiber pipe insulation, with factory
applied general purpose jacket, factory molded to conform to piping, "K" value
maximum 0.035 W/m. °C, at 24°C (0.24 btu in/hr/ft2 at 75°F). Service temperature up to
150° C (300°F).

22 07 19.docx Stantec PIPING INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 22 07 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PIPING INSULATION
Page 3 of 4

.3 Refrigerant Piping: Foamed plastic of closed cell structure or closed cell elastomer, "K"
value maximum 0.04 W/m. °C at 24°C (0.28 btu in/hr/ft2 at 75°F). Maximum water
vapor transmission rating of 0.1 perms unjacketed, 0.1 perms jacketed.
.4 Recovery Jackets:
.1 ULC listed canvas 220 g/m2 (0.044 lbs/ft2) plain weave cotton fabric with ULC
listed dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): One-piece molded type and sheet to CAN/CGSB
51.53 with pre-formed shapes. All PVC jacket joints shall be sealed with CFIA
compliant sealants.

2.4 INSULATION SECUREMENTS AND SEAL

.1 Tape: Self-adhesive, aluminum 50 mm wide minimum.
.2 Contact adhesive: Quick setting adhesive, Washable.
.3 Tie wire: 1.5 mm diameter stainless steel.
.4 Bands: Stainless steel, 20 mm wide and 0.5 mm thick.
.5 Waterproof Caulking to all outdoor pipe:

2.5 VAPOUR RETARDER

.1 Lap adhesive: Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation.
.2 Indoor finish: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.
.3 Outdoor: Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.
.4 Reinforcing fabric: Fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m2.

Part 3 Execution
.1 Do not install covering before piping and equipment has been tested and approved.
.2 Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before and
during application. Finish with systems at operating conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Ensure insulation is continuous through inside walls. Pack around pipes with fire proof
self-supporting insulation material, properly sealed.
.2 Insulate complete system including piping, fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers. Do
not insulate flexible connections and expansion joints. Terminate insulation neatly with
plastic material trowelled on a bevel.
.3 Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions.
.4 Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations. Locate seams on piping in
ceiling spaces on the underside of the pipe.
.5 Provide recovering jackets on exposed insulation throughout, including equipment
rooms. Insulation located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts and suspended ceiling spaces is not
considered exposed. Make smooth uneven insulated surfaces before recovering.

22 07 19.docx Stantec PIPING INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 22 07 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PIPING INSULATION
Page 4 of 4

.6 Cover insulation exposed to outdoors with aluminum jacket secured with aluminum
bands on 200 mm (8”) centre. Lap circumferential joints 75 mm (3”) minimum and seal
with compatible waterproof lap cement. Lock form longitudinal joints and seal.
.7 Cold Piping: Seal lap joints with 100% coverage of vapor barrier adhesive. Seal butt
joints with 50 mm (2”) wide strips of vapor barrier sealed with vapor barrier adhesive.
For fittings and valves, apply hydraulic insulating cement; or apply factory fabricated
insulation half shells, seal all laps and joints.
.8 Flare out staples may be used to secure jacket laps on hot systems. Staples are to be
applied on 100 mm (4”) centers.
.9 Hot Piping: For fittings and valves, apply hydraulic insulating cement; or apply factory
fabricated insulation half shells.
.10 Refrigerant Piping: Cover fittings and valves with equivalent thickness of pipe insulation
material. Apply with edges tightly butted. Seal joints with sealer.
.11 Engine Exhaust and Muffler: Tightly butt insulation with staggered joints secured with
metal bands or wire. Cover fittings with equivalent thickness of insulation.

3.3 INSULATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE

Insulation Recovery
Piping Pipe Sizes mm (in) Thickness mm Jacket
(in)
Domestic Hot Water Piping 15 (½”) to 50 (2”) 25 (1”) White PVC
Over 50 (2”) 40 (1 1/4”)

Refrigerant Piping Up to 25 (1”) 25 (1”) Aluminum

Over 25 (1”) 40 (1 1/4”)

Condensate Drains from All Size 15 (1/2”) White PVC

Air Handling Units
Vents within 3 m (10’-0”) All Size 25 (1”) White PVC
of Roof Outlet
NOTE: Pipe insulation for piping installed in 40 x 90 mm (2” x 4”) wall cavity can be
reduced to 15 mm (½”), for pipe sizes 40 mm (1½”) to 65 mm (2½”). Install
insulation to thickness specified for piping outside the wall cavity.

.1 Do not insulate exposed runouts to plumbing fixtures, chrome plated piping, valves,
fittings.

END OF SECTION

22 07 19.docx Stantec PIPING INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 22 11 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 1 of 7

Part 1 General

1.1 SCOPE
Piping and Fittings
Backflow Preventers
Hose Bibbs
Wall Hydrants
Hose Reels
Expansion Tank
Unions, Flanges, and Couplings

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

Section 22 33 00 – Electric Domestic Hot Water Heater.
Section 22 42 00 – Plumbing fixtures.

1.3 REFERENCES
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).
.1 ASTM D2564-12, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl-
chloride)
American Water Works Association (AWWA).
.1 ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11-17, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure
Pipe and Fittings.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1 CSA B137.3-13, Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Pipe and fittings for pressure
applications.
.2 CSA 13.37.6-13 Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipe and fittings for hot
and cold water distribution systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
Submit shop drawings of each factory fabricated component in accordance with Section
01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Provide materials, equipment and labor to install plumbing as required by Provincial and
Local Codes as specified herein.
Provide water connections to equipment furnished in other sections of this specification
and by the Purchaser.
Provide and include charges for connections to Municipal and Utility Company services,
including costs to maintain temporary water supply pending acceptable water quality
tests, where applicable.
22 11 16.docx Stantec DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
RM of Headingley Section 22 11 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 2 of 7

Provide an approved water meter and bypass installation conforming to Local Codes and
Standards.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Domestic Water, Piping: Federal, Provincial and Municipal codes.
Non specified pipe joining and pipe fitting methods such as T-drill and Press Fit are not
permitted in any piping system covered under Division 22.

Part 2 Products

2.1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING AND FITTINGS

Domestic cold water pipe above ground (inside building)
.1 Piping:
.1 PVC Schedule 80
.2 Fittings:
.1 PVC Schedule 80 with solvent weld joints.
.3 IPEX AquaRise Hot & Cold Potable Water Distribution Systems
Domestic hot water pipe above ground (inside building)
.1 Piping:
.1 CPVC Schedule 80
.2 Fittings:
.1 CPVC Schedule 80 with solvent weld joints.
.3 IPEX AquaRise Hot & Cold Potable Water Distribution Systems

2.2 HOSE BIBBS

Hose Bibb (Interior)
.1 Hose Bibb: Zurn Z1341-RC. Hose bibb with vacuum breaker. Bronze
construction, chrome finish, 19 mm male hose connection.
.2 Zurn Z1341XL. Lead free hose bibb with vacuum breaker. Bronze construction,
chrome finish, 19 mm male hose connection.

2.3 WALL HYDRANT

Non-freeze key operated wall hydrant with chrome plated or stainless steel face, integral
vacuum breaker, 20mm hose connection, 20mm female x 19 mm male pipe connection,
all bronze head, seat casing and internal working parts, bronze wall casting and loose
key.
Zurn 21321, Watts HY-420 or approved equal.

2.4 HOSE REEL

Retraction regulated spring driven rewind heavy duty safety hose reel with following:
.1 13mm hose with 15 m length for 2070 Ka pressure
.2 Auto rewind easily wraps, stores and protects hose.
22 11 16.docx Stantec DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
RM of Headingley Section 22 11 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 3 of 7

.3 Heavy gauge steel base and support post.

.4 Factory-matched cartridge-style spring motor.
.5 Solid machined brass swivel.
.6 Guide arm adjusts to wall, floor and overhead positions.
.7 Multi-position lock ratchet hose at desired length.
.8 Non corrosive stainless steel spring, pawl and zinc plated ratchet.
.9 Supplied with matched nozzle
Cox Reel model EZ-SH-450, T&S B-7143-01 or approved equal.

2.5 EXPANSION TANK

Conforms to ASME Section VIII standards and NSF 61 compliant.
Minimum 3.3 L (0.88 USG) acceptance volume.
Steel shell with FDA approved heavy duty butyl bladder.
Max operating temperature of minimum 115°C (240°F).
Max operating pressure of minimum 1035 kPa (150 psi).
Watts DETA series or approved equal.

2.6 UNIONS
Size 50 mm and under: 1035 kPa PVC joint unions for solvent weld PVC piping.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PREPARATION
Ream pipes and tubes. Clean off scale and dirt, inside and outside, before assembly.
Remove welding slag or other foreign material from piping.
Use Victaulic roll grooving tools to groove pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s
specifications. Use copper rolls for copper pipe as provided by Victaulic.

3.2 CONNECTION
Make screwed joints will full cut standard taper pipe threads with approved non-toxic
joint compound applied to male threads only.
Make joints for plain end pipe with gasket and clamp type mechanical fastener.
Use grooved mechanical couplings and mechanical fasteners only in accessible locations.
Use galvanized couplings with galvanized pipe.
Make connections to equipment, speciality components, and branch mains with unions or
flanges.
Provide dielectric type connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals in open systems.
Brass adapters and valves are acceptable.

22 11 16.docx Stantec DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

RM of Headingley Section 22 11 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 4 of 7

3.3 ROUTE AND GRADES

Route piping in orderly manner and maintain proper grades. Install to conserve headroom
and interfere as little as possible with use of space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls.
Group piping wherever practical at common elevations. Install concealed pipes close to
the building structure to keep furring to a minimum.
Slope water piping 0.2% and provide hose bibb drains at low points.
Provide air collection chambers with manual air vent at all high points of system.
Collection chambers to be 25 mm (1”) dia or line size whichever is greater and 150 mm
(6”) high minimum. Square tees may only be used to assist with complete venting and
draining.
Make reductions in water and steam pipes with eccentric reducing fittings installed to
provide drainage and venting. Top flat for water.
Grade horizontal drainage and vent piping 2% minimum.
Pipe the discharge from all relief valves, safety valves, vents, drains, equipment
blowdowns, water columns, and overflows to the nearest building drain.

3.4 INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with the current version of the Manitoba Plumbing Code.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without unduly stressing pipe or
equipment connected.
Provide clearance for proper installation of insulation and for access to valves, air vents,
drains and unions.
Install DCW piping below and away from DHW and DHWR and other hot piping so as
to maintain temperature of cold water as low as possible.
Install in accordance with drawings and with manufacturer's most current published
technical guidelines.

3.5 ESCUTCHEONS
Install on pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in finished areas.
Construction: One piece type with stainless steel set screws.
Sizes: Outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve. Inside diameter to fit around pipe or
outside of insulation if so provided.

3.6 VALVES
Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with ball valves.

3.7 EXTERIOR HOSE BIBBS

Install 900 mm above finished grade or as indicated on drawings.
Install a shut off valve inside of wall before the wall hydrant.

3.8 HOSE BIBBS

Install at bottom of risers, at low points to drain systems, and as indicated.
22 11 16.docx Stantec DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
RM of Headingley Section 22 11 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 5 of 7

3.9 BACK FLOW PREVENTERS

Install in accordance with CSA-B64 Series, where indicated and elsewhere as required by
code.
.1 Drains
.2 Backwater Valves
.3 Interceptors
Pipe discharge to terminate over nearest drain.

3.10 PRESSURE TESTS

Test pressure: greater of one (1) times maximum system operating pressure or 862 kPa
(125 psi).

3.11 FLUSHING AND CLEANING

Flush entire system for eight (8) hours. Ensure outlets flushed for two (2) hours. Let stand
for 24 hours, then draw one (1) sample off longest run. Submit to testing laboratory to
verify that system is clean to Provincial potable water guidelines. Let system flush for
additional two (2) hours, then draw off another sample for testing.

3.12 DISINFECTION
Flush out, disinfect and rinse system to requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
Coordinate with Section 33 11 16.01 - Incoming Site Water Utility Distribution Piping.
Upon completion, provide laboratory test reports on water quality for Engineer’s
approval.

3.13 START-UP
General:
.1 In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements,
supplemented as specified herein.
Timing: start-up only after:
.1 Pressure tests have been completed.
.2 Disinfection procedures have been completed.
.3 Certificate of static completion has been issued.
Provide continuous supervision during start-up.
Start-up procedures:
.1 Establish circulation and ensure that air is eliminated.
.2 Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and to prevent water hammer,
flashing and/or cavitation.
.3 Bring DHW storage tanks up to design temperature slowly.
.4 Monitor piping DHW and DHWR piping systems for freedom of movement,
pipe expansion as designed.
.5 Check control, limit, safety devices for normal and safe operation.
Rectify start-up deficiencies

22 11 16.docx Stantec DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

RM of Headingley Section 22 11 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 6 of 7

3.14 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

General:
.1 Test and adjust plumbing specialties and accessories in accordance with Section
01 91 13- General Commissioning Requirements, supplemented as specified.
Timing:
.1 After start-up deficiencies rectified.
.2 After certificate of completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction.
Adjustments:
.1 Verify that flow rate and pressure meet design criteria.
.2 Make adjustments while flow rate or withdrawal is (1) maximum and (2) 25%
of maximum and while pressure is (1) maximum and (2) minimum.
Backflow preventers:
.1 Test tightness, accessibility for O M of cover and of valve.
.2 Simulate reverse flow and back-pressure conditions to test operation of
backflow preventers.
.3 Verify visibility of discharge from open ports.
Hose bibbs:
.1 Check for leaks, replace compression washer if required
.2 Verify complete drainage, freeze protection.
.3 Verify operation of vacuum breakers
Strainers:
.1 Clean out repeatedly until clear.
.2 Verify accessibility of cleanout plug and basket.
.3 Verify that cleanout plug does not leak

3.15 CLEANING
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
.1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment
in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for recycling in accordance with Section 01
74 21 - Waste Management and Disposal.

3.16 PROTECTION
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.
Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by plumbing specialties and accessories
installation.

3.17 REPORTS
In accordance with Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements, using
report forms as specified in Section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements.

22 11 16.docx Stantec DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

RM of Headingley Section 22 11 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 7 of 7

END OF SECTION

22 11 16.docx Stantec DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

RM of Headingley Section 22 13 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 Generalw

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 22 42 00 – Plumbing fixtures.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).
.1 ASTM D2564-20, Standard Specifications for Solvent Cements for Poly (vinyl-
chloride).
.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1 CSA B181.2-11, PVC Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
.2 CAN/CSA B125-18, Plumbing Supply Fittings.

1.3 SCOPE
.1 Piping and Fittings
.2 Cleanouts
.3 Floor Drains
.4 Vacuum Breakers
.5 Trap Seal Primers
.6 Backflow Valves

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings of each factory fabricated component in accordance with Section
01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Provide materials, equipment and labor to install sanitary system as required by
Provincial and Local Codes as specified herein.
.2 Provide drainage connections to equipment furnished in other sections of this
specification and by the Purchaser.
.3 Provide and include charges for connections to Municipal and Utility Company services.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

Cleanouts, Floor Drains: Roto Tech Smith, Zurn, Ancon, Mifab, Watts

2.2 PIPING AND FITTINGS

.1 Sanitary drainage, and vent, inside building, above ground

22 13 19.docx Stantec SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

RM of Headingley Section 22 13 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
Page 2 of 5

.1 Piping:
.1 PVC Schedule 40
.2 DWV
.2 Fittings:
.1 PVC Schedule 40 with solvent weld joints.
.2 PVC Schedule 40 or DWV with solvent weld joints, to match piping.
.2 Sanitary drainage, and vent, inside building, below ground
.1 Piping:
.1 PVC Schedule 40
.2 DWV
.2 Fittings:
.1 PVC Schedule 40 with solvent weld joints.
.2 PVC Schedule 40 or DWV with solvent weld joints, to match piping.
.3 Equipment drains and overflows
.1 Piping:
.1 PVC Schedule 40
.2 DWV
.2 Fittings:
.1 PVC Schedule 40 with solvent weld joints.
.2 PVC Schedule 40 or DWV with solvent weld joints, to match piping.

2.3 CLEANOUTS
.1 Cleanout Plugs: heavy cast iron male female with brass screws and threaded brass or
bronze plug. Sealing-caulked lead seat or neoprene gasket.
.2 Access Covers: face or wall type, polished stainless steel round cover with flush head
securing screws, bevelled edge frame complete with anchoring lugs.
.3 Floor Clean-outs: Adjustable floor clean-out. Dura-coated cast iron upper and lower
bodies, neoprene flex gasket, bronze plug, isolation ferrule with polished bronze top.
.4 Wall Clean-outs: Wall clean-out, dura-coated cast iron body, bronze plug, and round,
smooth stainless steel access cover with securing screw.
.5 On-line Clean-outs: PVC clean-out and with gasketed PVC plug.

2.4 FLOOR DRAINS

.1 FD-1:
.1 Size 127 mm epoxy coated cast iron body with bottom outlet, anchor flange,
reversible clamping collar and adjustable collar with seepage slots and nickel
bronze strainer.
.2 Epoxy coated, cast iron body, reversible flashing clamp with primary and
secondary weepholes, trap primer connection with plug, 90o side outlet body
assembly w/ clamp collar or no-hub. 127ø (5"), nickel bronze, adjustable round
strainer.

22 13 19.docx Stantec SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

RM of Headingley Section 22 13 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
Page 3 of 5

.3 Mifab F1100-C-7-90NH, Zurn, or approved equal

.2 FD-2:
.1 Epoxy coated, cast iron body, reversible flashing clamp with primary and
secondary weepholes, 90o threaded side outlet body assembly w/ clamp collar or
no-hub. 152ø (6"), nickel bronze, adjustable round strainer, 102 mm x 229 mm
(4" x 9") oval cast iron funnel.
.2 Mifab F1100-C-90NH-G, Zurn, or approved equal.

2.5 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 Electronic type:
.1 Electronic automatic trap primer complete with slow closing 24 VAC solenoid
valve, 120-24 VAC transformer, sediment strainer, brass ball type stop valve,
brass atmospheric vacuum breaker, union and access door/mounting box for
concealed installations.
.2 15mm PEX tubing connections between primer valve and floor drains. Only one
outlet shall be used for each drain.
.3 Electronic program shall provide a six second water injection to traps every
twenty-four hours.
.2 Mechanical type:
.1 Lead-free brass, with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 1/2 solder ends, NPS 1/2
drip line connection.
.2 Temperature range 40° to 450°F suitable for installation anywhere on the supply
line to a frequently used plumbing fixture.

2.6 VACUUM BREAKERS

.1 Breakers to CSA-B64 Series and current AWWA requirements.
.2 Pressure type assembly:
.1 Assembly complete with shut-off valves before and after check valves and test
cocks.
.2 Assembly shall consist of one (1) positive sealing check valve and one (1)
atmospheric vent disk with stainless steel or bronze seats complete with shut-off
valves before and after check valves and test cocks.
.3 Standard of acceptance: Watts No. 800.
.3 Atmospheric type assembly:
.1 Complete with shut-off valve before assembly.
.2 Assembly shall consist of one (1) free floating poppet to seal the atmospheric
vent under flow conditions.
.3 Standard of acceptance:
.1 Watts No. 288A.
.2 For bottom inlet and outlet, Watts No. 388ASC.
.4 Hose connection type assembly:
.1 Complete with check valve disc assembly
.2 Vandal proof and drainable.
.3 Standard of acceptance:
.1 Watts No. 8A.
22 13 19.docx Stantec SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
RM of Headingley Section 22 13 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
Page 4 of 5

.2 For freezing conditions, Watts No. NF8.

2.7 BACKFLOW VALVES

.1 Backwater valves shall be injection molded solvent weld Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV)
fittings. They shall be:
.1 Manufactured in accordance with ASTM D2665, F1866, F2135, and CSA
B181.2.
.2 Injection molded solvent weld DWV fittings shall be certified by the Canadian
Standards Association (CSA) to meet CSA B181.2.
.3 Injection molded solvent weld Drain, Waste, and Vent (DWV) fittings shall be
manufactured from PVC with cell class of 12454 in accordance with ASTM
D1784.
.2 Acceptable Product: Napco/Westlake Part # D0112 or approved equal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
data sheet.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install in accordance with the Manitoba Plumbing Code, and the local authority having
jurisdiction.
.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
.3 Bury outside drainage pipe minimum 2450 mm (8’-0”).
.4 Lubricate cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Prior to building
turnover, remove cleanout plugs, re-lubricate and re-install using only enough force to
ensure permanent leakproof joint.
.5 Drainage lines shall grade 2% for size equal or smaller than 75mm unless otherwise
noted on drawings.
.6 Plumbing vents shall be located minimum 5 m (16’-0”) from air intakes.
.7 Pipe that discharge from all relief valves, safety valves, vents, drains, equipment
blowdowns, water columns, and over flows to the nearest building drain.

3.3 SERVICE CONNECTION

.1 Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations
required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly
connected with sufficient slope for drainage and adequate cover to avoid freezing.

3.4 CLEANOUTS
.1 Install cleanouts at base of soil and waste stacks, at locations required by code, and as
indicated.
22 13 19.docx Stantec SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
RM of Headingley Section 22 13 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
Page 5 of 5

.2 Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor.
.3 Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS 4.
.4 Ensure ample clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. Verify that cleanout
rods can probe as far as the next cleanout, at least.

3.5 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS

.1 Install for floor drains and elsewhere, as indicated.
.2 Install flexible tubing from trap primer to floor drain trap connections.
.3 Install manifold for electronic trap primers in mechanical room, service closet or other
inconspicuous location within the building.
.4 Install mechanical trap primers on cold water supply to nearest frequently used plumbing
fixture, in concealed space.
.5 Install plastic tubing to floor drain.

END OF SECTION

22 13 19.docx Stantec SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

RM of Headingley Section 22 14 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SUMP PUMPS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 22 05 01 – General Mechanical Provisions.
.2 Section 22 13 19 – Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties.

1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals Procedures.
.2 Submit shop drawings indicating capacity rating, physical dimensions, wiring diagrams,
materials of construction, code compliance, etc. As indicated on schedules.
.3 Provide operating and maintenance manuals with complete description of product for
incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

Part 2 Products

2.1 DRY PIT EFFLUENT SUMP PUMP PACKAGE (04-P-201)

.1 Simplex completely submersible for effluent and drain water.
.2 Integral vertical mechanical float switch for maximum draw down.
.3 Cast Iron Construction motor housing and volute case with stainless steel hardware.
.4 Vortex style engineered polymer impeller with unitized ceramic/carbon seals
.5 7.6 m (25 ft) Power cord.
.6 0.5 HP, 208 V, 1 phase motors.
.7 Liberty 287HV, Bell & Gossett or approved equal.

2.2 SEPTIC TANK PUMP STATION PUMP PACKAGE (04-P-301)

.1 Simplex completely submersible for septic tank effluent.
.2 Cast Iron Construction motor housing and volute case with stainless steel hardware.
.3 Vortex style engineered polymer impeller with unitized ceramic/carbon seals.
.4 0.5 HP, 208 V, 1 phase motors.
.5 NEMA 4X simplex control panel with three float switches and high-water alarm.
.1 Reliable for operation of single pump 0.5HP, 208V, 1 phase.
.2 Red beacon and horn with exterior test/silence switch
.3 Green pump run and float indicators
.4 Three (3) PVC float switches
.5 Terminal block design for easy service and maintenance
.6 Control/alarm fuse and circuit breakers (Pump Disconnect and Brack Circuit)
.7 Thermal overload protection
.8 Aux. Contacts w/ Automatic Reset for general alarm/ high level
.9 cUL listed.

22 14 29.docx Stantec SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

RM of Headingley Section 22 14 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SUMP PUMPS
Page 2 of 2

.10 Manufacturer: Liberty Pumps SX-Series, Alderton FLEX Series or approved

equal.
.6 Liberty FLH61M or approved equal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 DRY PIT EFFLUENT SUMP PUMP INSTALLATION

.2 Install in accordance with national and local plumbing codes and manufacturer's
recommendations.
.3 Install SP-2 on a 300x300x38 concrete pad to allow delayed start of standby/backup
pump.
.4 Sump pit to be clean of debris prior to start-up of pumps.

3.2 SEPTIC TANK PUMP INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
.2 Set float heights per drawings. Include anti-sway rings or float weights to limit movement
within the station and prevent entanglement.
.3 Septic pump tank to be clean of debris prior to start-up of pumps.

END OF SECTION

22 14 29.docx Stantec SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS

RM of Headingley Section 22 33 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures
.2 Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1 CSA B51-24, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code.
.2 ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Indicate:
.1 Equipment, including connections, fittings, control assemblies and ancillaries,
identifying factory and field assembled.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in
Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Electric Domestic Water Heaters shall be the product of manufacturer regularly engaged
in production of such units who issues complete catalogue data on such products.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATER

.1 Provide 23 litre (6 US gallon) commercial electric water heater meeting ASHRAE 90.1
requirements.
.2 3 kW, 208 V, 1 phase
.3 A CSA Certified and ASME Rated T&P Relief Valve shall be furnished and installed by
the manufacturer.
.4 1035 kPa working pressure
.5 The tank shall be insulated with rigid polyurethane foam insulation. The tank interior
shall be coated with a high temperature porcelain enamel and furnished with a

22 33 00.docx Stantec ELECTRIC DOMESTIC

HOT WATER HEATERS
RM of Headingley Section 22 33 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Page 2 of 2

magnesium anode rod rigidly supported. Fully illustrated instruction manual and parts list
to be included.
.6 Provide optional wall mount kit.
.7 Standard of acceptance: Rheem CEGSP6 or approved equal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
.2 Provide insulation between tanks and supports.

3.2 START-UP
.1 The domestic hot water tank shall be set to maintain the hot water at a setpoint of 60 °C
(140 °F).

END OF SECTION

22 33 00.docx Stantec ELECTRIC DOMESTIC

HOT WATER HEATERS
RM of Headingley Section 22 42 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 SCOPE
.1 Lavatory
.2 Mop Sinks
.3 Water Closets

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 22 11 16 – Domestic Water Piping.
.2 Section 22 13 19 – Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties.

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International).
.1 CAN/CSA B45 SERIES-02 (R2018), Plumbing Fixtures.
.2 CSA B125.1-2018, Plumbing Supply Fittings.
.3 CSA B651-2018 (R2020), Accessible Design for the Built Environment.
.2 Provincial Plumbing Code, Latest edition.

1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Provide new fixtures, CSA approved, free from flaws and blemishes with finished
surfaces clear, smooth and bright.
.2 Provide CSA approved plumbing fittings. Visible parts of fixture brass and accessories
shall be heavily chrome plated.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Check millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings
before rough-in and installation.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit shop drawings indicating capacity rating, physical dimensions, materials of
construction, code compliance, etc. As indicated on schedules.
.3 Provide operating and maintenance manuals with complete description of product for
incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

Part 2 Products

2.1 PIPING
.1 Hot and cold water supplies to fixtures:

22 42 00.docx Stantec PLUMBING FIXTURES

RM of Headingley Section 22 42 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 2 of 3

.1 Chrome plated flexible supply pipes with handwheel stop, reducers, and
escutcheon.
.2 Waste:
.1 Brass ‘p’ Trap with clean out on fixtures not having integral trap.
.2 Chrome plated in exposed places.

2.2 LAVATORY
.1 Counter mounted lavatory, engineered stone top with undermount sink. Supply openings
on 100 mm centers, with storage under sink. Size 940 mm wide x 559 mm deep x 883
mm high (984 mm high with backsplash). Glacier Bay Rocara 37-inch with Vanity
Combo Model #ROCVGY3722D or approved equal.
.2 Trim: chrome plated brass combination supply and waste, mixing spout, non-
compression, pop-up waste, aerator, metal indexed handles. Kohler K-7401-5a, Crane P
1120 with Decorator Lever Handle (Model BAL2), Delta Commercial, American
Standard, or Moen. Provide DAHL 211-13-XX mini ball stops and stainless braided flex
supplies for water connection.
.3 Trap: Crane C-1169 or equal.
.1 Sewer Connection Coupling

2.3 LABORATORY SINK

.1 Franke Model D6410-316PCB-1 Lab sink, no ledge, double compartment topmount sink.
Type 316 stainless steel, 460 x 794 x 254 mm deep. Undercoated, include waste fittings,
factory rim seal, cutout template, factory installed fasteners, crumb cup strainers and
tailpieces.

2.4 MOP SINK

.1 600 mm x 600 mm x 250 mm deep molded high density composite basin with PVC drain
body and stainless steel strainer. Zurn Model #Z1996-24, Fiat MSB 2424.
.2 Accessories:
.1 Faucet: 200 mm adjustable wall mounted chrome plated solid cast brass lead-free
body with 1.4 turn ceramic disc valve cartridges, cast brass level handles, body
mounted vacuum breaker, integral stops, pail hook and wall brace. Kohler K-
8908-CP or Moen Commercial Model 8124 (Chrome).
.2 Stainless steel bumper guards.
.3 Stainless steel wall guard
.4 Mop hanger

2.5 WATER CLOSET

.1 Floor mounted, flush tank.
.2 Bowl: vitreous china, siphon jet, close-coupled closet combination, elongated rim bowl
and bolt caps.
.3 Closet tank: vitreous china flapper type flush valve assembly, 13.25 L volume, tank liner,
bolted cover. Crane Radcliffe 3254, American Standard, Kohler K-3998-U / K-3999-U
or approved equal.
22 42 00.docx Stantec PLUMBING FIXTURES
RM of Headingley Section 22 42 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Page 3 of 3

.4 Seat: white, open front, molded, solid plastic, with cover, SS hinge and solid brass insert
post. Olsonite No. 46, Beneke, Kohler K-4650-AO or equal.
.5 Angle stop: 12 mm O.D. compression not with sleeve. Finish: Polished chrome provide
chrome plated estruchaeon at wall. Provide stainless braided flex supply for water
connection.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install each fixture with its own trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. At
completion thoroughly clean plumbing fixtures and equipment.
.2 Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with screw driver stops,
reducers and escutcheons.
.3 Caulk gap between water closet, and floor with silicone sealant.
.4 Provide pressure reducing valves on water lines to fixtures which are not rated for the
system operating pressures.
.5 Mop Sink:
.1 Mount mop sink with 6 mm clearance between mop service basin and building
wall. Provide 15 mm mortar for entire area between basin and building floor and
lever the basin.
.2 Provide 600 W x 250 H stainless steel plate to protect building wall around the
mop basin.

3.2 ADJUSTING
.1 Conform to water conservation requirements specified this section.
.1 Adjustments:
.1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates.
.2 Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures.
.2 Checks:
.1 Aerators: operation, cleanliness.
.2 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: operation under all conditions.
.3 Thermostatic controls:
.4 Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.

END OF SECTION

22 42 00.docx Stantec PLUMBING FIXTURES

DIVISION 23

HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR

CONDITIONING
RM of Headingley Section 23 05 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 REFERENCES
.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
.1 ASHRAE 90.1-2004, Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise
Residential Buildings (IESNA cosponsored; ANSI approved; Continuous
Maintenance Standard).
.2 Electrical Equipment Manufacturers' Association Council (EEMAC)

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Electrical motors, drives and guards for mechanical equipment and systems.
.2 Supplier and installer responsibility indicated in Motor, Control and Equipment Schedule
on electrical drawings and related mechanical responsibility is indicated on Mechanical
Equipment Schedule on mechanical drawings.
.3 Control wiring and conduit is specified in Division 26 except for conduit, wiring and
connections below 50 V which are related to control systems specified in Division 22 and
23. Refer to Division 26 for quality of materials and workmanship.

1.3 STANDARDS
.1 All motors shall be in accordance with NEMA Standard MG-1, CSA C3900-1993, or the
latest revision insofar as it is applicable. Motors also shall comply with the applicable
portions of the Canadian Electric Code. Motors designed to IEC Standards are not
acceptable.
.2 Motors driven by VFD equipment shall be 100% compatible to drive manufacturer’s
data.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit shop drawings indicating motor manufacturer, frame size, voltage, full load amps,
insulation class, motor grade, and dimensions.
.3 Submit manufacturer’s recommended maintenance tasks for a one year period, based on
application of the motor. Include maintenance schedules and lubrication products.
.4 Submit a copy of typical Warranty Certificate.

1.5 GENERAL
.1 Supply mechanical equipment complete with electrical motors. The motors shall be
designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest edition of the following
codes and standards: NEMA, EEMAC, CSA, CEC Part 1, IEEE and ANSI. All motors
to be CSA labeled.
.2 All motors to be approved for use in the designated area classification by the Authority
having Jurisdiction.

23 05 13.docx Stantec COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
RM of Headingley Section 23 05 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Page 2 of 4
.3 Unless specified otherwise, provide motors for full voltage starting, EEMAC Design B.
Motors driving high torque or high inertia loads may be EEMAC design C or D.
.4 Provide motors rated for continuous duty with 1.15 service factor unless specified
otherwise in the driven equipment specifications. Provide all motors with thermal
overload protection. Motors 30 kW and larger shall have thermistor protection.
.5 Provide motors with complete nameplate data.
.6 Provide motors with grease or oil lubricated anti-friction type ball or roller bearings.

1.6 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Voltage and Frequency
Motors will be rated for operation on a 3-phase, 60 Hz power supply at 575 Volts or
208 Volts. All motors shall be designed and manufactured to operate with 10% voltage
and ±5% frequency variations of the nameplate ratings. Combined voltage and frequency
variation shall not exceed ±10%. Confirm voltage for all motors with Division 26.

.2 Operating Characteristics
.1 Torques
Motors shall meet or exceed the locked rotor (starting) and minimum breakdown
torques specified in NEMA standard for Design B for the ratings specified.

.2 Currents
Locked rotor (starting) currents shall not exceed NEMA Design B maximum
values for the specified rating. Motors shall be capable of a 20 second stall at six
times full load current without injurious heating to the motor components.

.3 Efficiency
Motors shall be Premium Efficient design and have a minimum and nominal full
load efficiency which will meet or exceed the values listed in NEMA MG1-12.55
Table 12-6B when tested in accordance with NEMA test standard MG1-12.54.1,
IEEE Test Procedure 112, Method B using accuracy improvement by segregated
loss determination including stray load loss measurements. The minimum
efficiency shall be guaranteed.

.4 Power Factor
The power factor of 3600 and 1800 rpm, 3 through 186.5 kW (250 HP) ratings at
full load, at full voltage shall be a minimum of 85%. Six-pole ratings will be
excluded from this requirement.

Service Factor and Ambient

Standard motors will be rated for a 1.15 service factor in a 40°C (104°F)
ambient.

.3 Insulation
.1 Standard motors shall have a full Class F non-hygroscopic insulation system.
.2 Standard motors shall be dipped and baked in polyester varnish to consolidate the
winding.

23 05 13.docx Stantec COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
RM of Headingley Section 23 05 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Page 3 of 4
1.7 MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
.1 Frame Size
.1 Horsepower/frame relationship shall conform to the latest NEMA standard for T-
frame motors.
.2 Motors covered by this specification will be 143T-449T frame sizes.
.2 Motor Type
.1 TEFC Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled: The motor shall be designed so as to
prevent the free exchange of air between the inside and outside of the motor
housing. An integral fan shall be provided to direct cooling air over the exterior
surface of the frame. The fan shall be one piece constructed of a corrosion-
resistant material. The fan covers shall be constructed of pressed steel for frames
140T-400T and of Cast iron for 440T frames. The motor frame and end brackets
shall be cast iron construction and shall have a stainless steel nameplate. Two
drains shall be provided in the lowest point in the frame.

.3 Bearings
.1 All motors shall have anti-friction bearings, sized for L-10 life of at least 50,000
hours under minimum V belt heave sizes for maximum loading conditions (see
NEMA Standard MG1-14.41 Table 14-1) or 150,000 hours L-10 life for a direct
connected load.
.2 Bearings shall be double-shielded, vacuum degassed steel ball bearings selected
for electric motor service.
.3 Bearing housings shall be re-greasable with provisions for purging old grease.
.4 Bearings shall be lubricated with a premium moisture resistant grease of a
temperature range of -29°C (-20°F) to + 149°C (300°F).
.5 Cast iron inner bearing caps.
.6 All fasteners and motor hardware shall be zinc cadmium plated.
.7 Conduit box shall be cast iron, diagonally split and rotatable in 90 degree
increments.
.1 Four (4) hex head bolts shall be used to secure conduit box to frame.
.2 Four (4) hex head bolts shall be used for the conduit box cover.
.8 External hardware shall be zinc cadmium plated to resist corrosion.
.9 External full gloss epoxy enamel paint shall withstand industrial environments.
.10 Nameplates shall be of stainless steel and stamped per NEMA Standard MG1-
10.40. Nameplate information shall include the nominal efficiency value per
standard MG1-12.54.2.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 General Electric, US Motor, Baldor Century E Plus (VAV), Reliance XE
.2 Siemens PE-21, Westinghouse Optim HE, Marathon.

2.2 FACTORY QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Production Tests: Each motor shall receive a routine commercial test per NEMA MG-
1.12. Prototype test reports shall be for each rating.

23 05 13.docx Stantec COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
RM of Headingley Section 23 05 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Page 4 of 4
.2 Sound Level: The noise level of each motor shall comply with NEMA MG-1.12.49.
.3 Vibration Level: The vibration level of each motor shall not exceed those values listed in
NEMA MG-1.12.05.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 WARRANTY
.1 All motors shall be warranted three (3) years against defects in material and
workmanship from date of final acceptance.

END OF SECTION

23 05 13.docx Stantec COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
RM of Headingley Section 23 05 92
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 COORDINATION WITH BALANCING AGENCY
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Prepare the facility for balancing.

1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

.1 Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC Systems

.2 Section 23 08 00 - Commissioning of HVAC Systems

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Bring the work to an operating state and ready for balancing, including:

.1 Clean equipment and ductwork.

.2 Install air terminal devices.

.3 Provide temporary filters in air handling equipment and carry out a rough air
balance to ensure all equipment performs required function.

.4 Replace filters with specified filters prior to final balancing.

.5 Verify lubrication of equipment.

.6 Install permanent instrumentation.

.7 Complete the "start-up" of equipment.

.8 Check rotation and alignment of rotating equipment and tension of belted drives.

.9 Set control points of automatic apparatus, check-out sequence of operation.

.10 Make available control diagrams and sequence of operation.

.11 Clean work, remove temporary tags, stickers, and coverings.

.12 Make available one (1) copy of Maintenance Manuals especially for use in
balancing.

23 05 92.docx Stantec COORINDATION WITH BALANCING AGENCY

RM of Headingley Section 23 05 92
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 COORDINATION WITH BALANCING AGENCY
Page 2 of 2

.13 Provide Balancing Agency a complete set of mechanical drawings and

specifications.

.2 Cooperate with the Balancing Agency as follows:

.1 Make corrections as required by Balancing Agency.

.2 Coordinate site visits to provide seasonal adjustments for Summer and Winter
operation.

.3 Allow Balancing Agency free access to site during construction phase. Inform
Balancing Agency of any major changes made to systems during construction
and provide a complete set of record drawings for their use.

.4 Provide and install any additional balancing valves, dampers, and other materials
requested by the balancing agency and/or necessary to properly adjust or correct
the systems to design flows.

.5 Provide and install revised pulleys and sheaves for rotating equipment, if/as
required, to properly balance the systems to design flows. Provide VFD
frequency setpoint programming to achieve the required airflows. Obtain
requirements from balancing agency (Refer to Section 23 05 93, Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC Systems).

.6 Operate automatic control system and verify/modify set points during Balancing.

END OF SECTION

23 05 92.docx Stantec COORINDATION WITH BALANCING AGENCY

RM of Headingley Section 23 05 93
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC SYSTEM
Page 1 of 6

Part 1 General

1.1 QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB PERSONNEL

.1 Work specified in this section shall be performed by an Independent Agency by provide
documentation confirming qualifications and successful experience in air and hydronic
system balancing.
.2 TAB: performed in accordance with the requirements of standard under which TAB
Firm's qualifications are approved:
.1 Associated Air Balance Council, (AABC) National Standards for Total System
Balance, MN-1 – 2002.
.2 National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) TAB STANDARDS,
Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental
Systems – 1998.
.3 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association
(SMACNA), SMACNA 1780, HVAC Systems – Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing – 2002.
.3 Recommendations and suggested practices contained in the TAB Standard: mandatory.
.4 Use TAB Standard provisions, including checklists, and report forms to satisfy Contract
requirements.
.5 Use TAB Standard for TAB, including qualifications for TAB Firm and Specialist and
calibration of TAB instruments.
.6 Where instrument manufacturer calibration recommendations are more stringent than
those listed in TAB Standard, use manufacturer's recommendations.
.7 TAB Standard quality assurance provisions such as performance guarantees form part of
this contract.
.1 For systems or system components not covered in TAB Standard, use TAB
procedures developed by TAB Specialist.
.2 Where new procedures, and requirements, are applicable to Contract
requirements have been published or adopted by body responsible for TAB
Standard used (AABC, NEBB, or TABB), requirements and recommendations
contained in these procedures and requirements are mandatory.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Balance, adjust, and test air systems and equipment and submit reports using identical
units to those shown on contract documents.
.2 Provide balancing and reports for summer and winter operations (minimum 6 ACH and 3
ACH conditions for ERV-1).

1.3 DEFINITION
.1 TAB is used throughout this Section to describe the process, methods and requirements
of testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC system.
.2 TAB means to test, adjust and balance to perform in accordance with requirements of
Contract Documents and to do other work as specified in this section.

23 05 93.docx Stantec TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 23 05 93
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC SYSTEM
Page 2 of 6
1.4 APPROVED AGENCIES
.1 CAABC (Canadian Associated Air Balance Council)

1.5 SITE VISITS

.1 Site visits shall be made to correspond with the general monthly site meetings held by the
Contractor. After each site visit, a written report shall be submitted to the Contractor and
Engineer. Site visits shall commence after the start of air distribution work and be spread
over the construction period to the start of the balancing work.
.2 A review of the installation and access to all dampers, and equipment shall be made at the
specified site visits and any additional dampers or valves required for proper balancing
shall be forwarded in writing to be reviewed by the Engineer.
.3 Begin balancing after equipment start-up and testing and after systems have been
completed and are in full working order. Place systems and equipment into full operation
and continue operation during each working day of balancing.
.4 Provide site visits for work required for seasonal operational conditions.

1.6 BALANCING AGENDA

.1 General: Submit balancing agenda to the Engineer and commissioning contractor for
review at least thirty (30) days prior to the start of balancing work. Start balancing work
only after agenda has been approved. Include descriptive data, procedure data, and
sample forms in agenda.
.2 Descriptive Data: General description of each system including associated equipment
and different operation cycles, listing of flow and terminal measurements to be
performed.
.3 Procedure Data: Procedures for converting test measurements to establish compliance
with requirements, specify type of instrument to be used, method of instrument
application (by sketch) and correction factors.
.4 Sample Forms: Form showing application of procedures to typical systems.

1.7 BALANCE REPORT

.1 Submit (2) copies of rough balancing reports to the Engineer for review, prior to on-site
verification and acceptance of Project.
.2 Provide four (4) copies of final reports to contractor for inserting in Purchaser's Operating
and Maintenance Manuals as described in Section 23 05 05, Documentation for HVAC
Systems.
.3 Include types, serial number, and dates of calibration of instruments in the reports.

1.8 SYSTEM DATA

.1 Air Handling Equipment
.1 Designed Data:
.1 Fan total static pressure;
.2 System static pressure;
.3 Motor kW (HP), r/min, amps, Volts, Phase;
.4 Outside air flow rate L/s (cfm);
23 05 93.docx Stantec TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 23 05 93
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC SYSTEM
Page 3 of 6
.5 Fan wheel r/min;
.6 Fan/kW (HP);
.7 Inlet and outlet, dry and wet bulb temperatures.
.2 Installation Data:
.1 Manufacturer and model;
.2 Size;
.3 Arrangement discharge and class;
.4 Motor type, kW (HP), r/min, voltage, phase, cycles, and load amperage;
.5 Location and local identification data.
.3 Recorded Data:
.1 Supply/Return Fan
.1 Air flow rate when fan @ 100% Outside Air
.2 Air flow rate when fan @ Designed minimum Outside Air
.3 Fan total static pressure;
.4 System static pressure;
.2 Fan wheel rpm with drive motor @ 60Hz;
.3 For Axial Fans, note blade pitch angle
.4 Motor operating amperage;
.5 Inlet and outlet, dry and wet bulb temperatures.
.2 Duct Air Quantities - All mains supplying air more than 10% of Volume, outside air and
exhaust (maximum and minimum) major return air openings back to duct shafts.
.1 Duct sizes;
.2 Number of pressure readings;
.3 Sum of velocity measurements;
.4 Average velocity;
.5 Duct recorded air flow rate;
.6 Duct design air flow rate.
.3 Air Inlet and Outlets:
.1 Outlet identification location and designation;
.2 Manufacturers catalogue identification and type;
.3 Design and recorded velocities;
.4 Design and recorded air flow rates;
.5 Deflector vane or diffuser cone settings.
.6 Sound Level in "A" scale reading at each octave band frequency at 1m from inlet
and outlet.
.4 Fans
.1 Designed Data:
.1 Fan total static pressure;
.2 Motor kW (HP), r/min, amps, Volts, Phase;
.3 Air flow rate L/s (cfm);
.4 Fan wheel r/min;
.5 Fan/kW (HP);
.2 Installation Data:
.1 Manufacturer and model;
.2 Size;
.3 Arrangement discharge and class;
.4 Motor type, kW (HP), r/min, voltage, phase, cycles, and load amperage;
.5 Location and local identification data.

23 05 93.docx Stantec TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 23 05 93
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC SYSTEM
Page 4 of 6
.3 Recorded Data:
.1 Fan
.1 Air flow rate
.2 Fan total static pressure;
.2 Fan wheel rpm with drive motor @ 60Hz;
.3 For Axial Fans, note blade pitch angle
.4 Motor operating amperage;

Part 2 Products

2.1 INSTRUMENTS
.1 Provide calibration histories for each instrument. Recalibration or use of other
instruments may be requested when accuracy of readings is questionable.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL PROCEDURE

.1 Permanently mark, by stick-on labels and/or fluorescent paint, settings on valves,
splitters, dampers, and other adjustment devices.
.2 Subsequent to correctional work, take measurements to verify balance has not been
disrupted or that any such disruption has been rectified.
.3 Where vane anemometer is used to measure supply, return or exhaust air grilles, AK
factors shall be determined as follows:
.1 Determine and tabulate similar sized grilles being balanced for AK schedule.
.2 Traverse all ducts serving grilles (outlined in AK schedule) to verify AK factors.
.3 AK factor from schedule, must be approved by Engineer during initial review
with balancer on site. (Balancer shall include written procedure for
determination of AK factors).
.4 No flow hoods are to be used for measurement of exhaust or return air grilles.
.4 Balancing shall be performed to the following accuracies:
.1 Air - terminal outlets ±10% (outlets less than 200 L/s (425 cfm)
.2 Air - terminal outlets ±5% (outlets greater than 200 L/s (425 cfm)
.3 Air - central equipment ±5%

.5 A “closed” damper position is defined by the ‘relief’ damper being in the fully-closed
position and the supply damper slightly open to allow the space to be slightly positive to
the adjacent process room. Slightly positive is determined by a smoke-pencil test with
the door closed in the summer and winter conditions. Smoke will move from the
electrical room to the process room in all conditions.

.6 Balancing contractor shall advise mechanical contractor of required revised pulleys,

sheaves and impeller shavings to allow proper balancing of systems.
.7 Where axial fans require blade pitch changes, this shall be the responsibility of the
balancing contractor.
.8 Provide TAB and a balance report for each of the summer season operation and winter
season operations.

23 05 93.docx Stantec TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 23 05 93
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC SYSTEM
Page 5 of 6
3.2 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE
.1 Perform balancing, adjusting, and testing with building doors and windows in their
normal operation position.
.2 The following procedure shall be adopted for central systems:
.1 Ensure dampers or volume control devices are in fully open position.
.2 Balance central apparatus to ±5% air flow.
.3 Balance branches and mains in accordance with 3.1.4.
.4 Recheck central apparatus.
.5 Balance all terminal air outlets in accordance with 3.1.4.
.6 Re-balance central apparatus to ±5%.
.7 Recheck all air outlets.
.1 When balancing air outlets:
.1 Rough balance furthest outlets and then balance sequentially
back to source.
.2 Fine balance furthest outlet back to source.
.3 Make air quantity measurements in ducts by "Pitot Tube" traverse of entire cross
sectional area. Take minimum of 16 for rectangular ducts, and 10 on each vertical and
horizontal axis for round ducts, traverse readings. If readings are inconsistent across
duct, try to obtain straight run of six (6) diameters widths upstream and re-do traverse.
.4 Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments do
not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control only by duct
internal devices such as dampers and splitters.
.5 Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Vary branch air quantities
by damper regulation.
.6 Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme
conditions. (Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate - full cooling,
and at minimum air flow rate - full heating).
.7 Verify all terminal unit factory settings for maximum air flow (and minimum if
applicable). Adjust terminal unit controller if required. Record adjusted units.
.8 The final balanced condition of each area shall include testing and adjusting of pressure
conditions. Test and record building pressurization levels in variable volume systems
throughout full range of fan delivery rates (Summer and Winter modes), under both
heating and cooling conditions. Front doors and exits should be checked for air flow so
that exterior conditions do not cause excessive or abnormal pressure conditions.
Document abnormal building leakage conditions noted.
.9 Complete balancing to achieve positive building pressure unless otherwise instructed. A
positive pressure relative to outside of 10 Pa (0.04”WG) minimum and 20 Pa (0.08”WG)
maximum shall be achieved, measured with negligible outside wind velocity.

3.3 BALANCING REPORT

.1 Submit draft copies of rough balancing reports prior to final acceptance of project.
.2 Include types, serial number and dates of calibration of instruments.
.3 Record test data on a sepia made from the latest available revised set of mechanical
drawings and submit three (3) copies upon completion of the balancing contract for
inclusion in equipment and maintenance manuals.
23 05 93.docx Stantec TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 23 05 93
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC SYSTEM
Page 6 of 6
.4 Submit with report, fan and pump curves, as applicable, with operating conditions
plotted. Submit grille and diffuser shop drawings and diffusion factors.
.5 Report shall be indexed as follows:
.1 Air
.1 Summary
.2 Procedure
.3 Instrumentation
.4 Drawings
.5 Equipment Summary
.6 Fan Sheets
.7 Fan Curves

.8 Fan Profile Data

.9 Static Data
.10 Traverse Data and Schedule
.11 Terminal Unit Summary
.12 Outlet Data Summary and Schematics (per system)
.13 Building Schematic
.14 Weather Conditions at Time of Test
.15 Diagnostic
.2 Rooms
.1 Summary
.2 Procedure
.3 Instrumentation
.4 Drawings
.5 Overall Building Pressurization Data for each seasonal setting
.6 Room Pressurization at each seasonal setting
.1 Relative to atmosphere
.2 Relative to adjacent space

END OF SECTION

23 05 93.docx Stantec TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 23 07 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 DUCT INSULATION
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Entire Specification – All areas of common work.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM International)
.1 ASTM C335-05ae1, Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Transfer
Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.
.2 ASTM C411-05, Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-
Temperature Thermal Insulation.
.3 ASTM C449-07, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting
Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.
.4 ASTM C533-07, Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe
Thermal Insulation.
.5 ASTM C547-07e1, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
.6 ASTM C553-08, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal
Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
.7 ASTM C612-04e1, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board
Thermal Insulation.
.8 ASTM C795-08, Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in
Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.
.9 ASTM C921-03a, Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing
Materials for Thermal Insulation.
.2 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)
.1 CGSB 51-GP-52MA-89, Vapor Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe,
Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation.
.2 CAN/CGSB 51.53-95, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Jacketing Sheet, for Insulated
Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts.
.3 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC)
.1 National Insulation Standards 1992 (R1999).
.4 Manitoba Energy Code for Buildings (MECB)

1.3 SCOPE
.1 Duct thermal insulation.
.2 Duct acoustic insulation.
.3 Adhesives, tie wires, tapes.
.4 Recovery Jackets.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Insulation shall be installed by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work.
.2 Materials shall meet or exceed fire and smoke hazard ratings as stated in this section and
defined in applicable building codes.

23 07 13.docx Stantec DUCT INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 23 07 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 DUCT INSULATION
Page 2 of 4

1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings which indicate complete material data, "K" value, temperature
rating, density, finish, recovery jacket of materials proposed for this project and indicate
thickness of material for individual services.
.2 Submit samples of proposed insulating and recovering materials.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Deliver material to job site in original non-broken factory packaging, labeled with
manufacturer's density and thickness.
.2 Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures as recommended by the adhesive
manufacturer. Make good separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal
movement or poor workmanship.

1.7 ALTERNATIVES
.1 Alternative insulations are subject to approval. Alternatives shall provide the same
thermal resistance within 5% at normal conditions as material specified.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Owen's Corning/Fiberglas Canada Inc., Manson, Knauf Fiberglass for administrative
spaces.
.2 Mineral wool: Owen's Corning, Manson, Knauf, Roxul for process and outdoor spaces

2.2 GENERAL
.1 Insulation Materials, Recovery Jackets, Vapor Barrier Facings, Tapes and Adhesives
shall be In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102:
.1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25.
.2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.
.2 Insulating materials and accessories shall withstand service temperatures without
smoldering, glowing, smoking or flaming.
.3 All insulation materials shall meet Building Code Standards, and packages or containers
of such materials shall be appropriately labeled.

2.3 MATERIALS
.1 Exposed Rectangular Ducts: Rigid fibrous glass or mineral fiberboard insulation, "K"
value maximum 0.035 W/m. °C at 24°C (0.24 Btu in/hr/ft2 at 75°F). Factory applied
reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier for cold ducts. Hot duct service temperature 20°C
(68°F) to 65°C (149°F). Cold ducts service temperature -40°C (-40°F) to 65°C (149°F).
Insulation density for outdoor duct insulation: minimum 96 kg/m3 (6 PCF).
.2 Round Ducts and Concealed Rectangular Ducts: Flexible fibrous glass or mineral fiber
insulation, "K" value maximum 0.035 W/m. °C at 24°C (0.24 Btu in/hr/ft2 at 75°F).
Factory applied reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier for cold ducts. Hot duct service
temperature 20°C to 65°C (68°F to 149°F). Cold duct service temperature -40°C (-40°F)
to 65°C (149°F).
23 07 13.docx Stantec DUCT INSULATION
RM of Headingley Section 23 07 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 DUCT INSULATION
Page 3 of 4

.3 Acoustic Lining: Fibrous glass or mineral fiberboard insulation with "K" value
maximum 0.035 W/m. °C, at 24°C (0.24 Btu in/hr/ft2 at 75°F). Absolute roughness of
exposed surface not to exceed 0.58 mm (26 gauge), coated to prevent fiber erosion at air
velocities up to 25.4 m/s, 24 kg/m2 (5000 ft/m, 5 lb/ft2 ) minimum density for ductwork
and plenums. Substrate must not be dark in color. Service temperature -40°C (-40°F) to
65°C (149°F).

.4 Recovery Jackets:
.1 ULC listed canvas 220 g/m2 (0.044 lbs/ft2) plain weave cotton fabric with ULC
listed dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
.2 Foil Reinforced Kraft (FRK).
.3 Aluminum jacket/cladding thickness for exposed/outdoor insulation: 0.61 mm
(0.024”) for widths greater than 900 mm (36”) and 0.41 mm (0.016”) for widths
less than 900 mm (36”).

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PREPARATION
.1 Do not install covering before ductwork and equipment has been sealed, tested and
approved.
.2 Ensure surface is clean and dry prior to installation. Ensure insulation is dry before and
during application. Finish with systems at operating conditions, where possible.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Ensure insulation is continuous through floor and wall etc. Pack around ducts with
fireproof self-supporting insulation materials, properly sealed.
.2 Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions.
.3 Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations. Locate seams on ductwork in
ceiling spaces on the underside of the duct.
.4 Provide recovering jackets on exposed insulation throughout, including equipment
rooms. Insulation located in crawl spaces, shafts and suspended ceiling spaces is not
considered exposed. Make smooth any uneven insulated surface before recovering.
.5 Cover insulation exposed to outdoors with aluminum jacket secured with aluminum
bands on 200 mm (8”) centre. Longitudinal slip joints, lap circumferential joints 75 mm
(3”) minimum and seal all joints with compatible waterproof lap cement.
.6 Exposed Rectangular Ducts: Secure rigid insulation with galvanized anchors, or weld
pins on 400 mm (16”) centre. Secure in place with retaining clips. Seal all insulation
joints and breaks with joint tape. Use vapor barrier tape for insulation joints or breaks on
cold ducts.

23 07 13.docx Stantec DUCT INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 23 07 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 DUCT INSULATION
Page 4 of 4

.7 Round Ducts and Concealed Rectangular Ducts: Adhere flexible insulation to ductwork
with adhesive applied in 150 mm (6”) wide strips on 400 mm (16”) centers. Provide
annealed tie wire tied at 400 mm (16”) centers for securing duct insulation. Butt
insulation and seal joints and breaks with lap seal adhesive; cover joints with joint tape.
Use vapor barrier tape for cold ducts.
.8 Acoustic Lining: Apply to interior of ducts where shown. Secure to ductwork with
adhesive using 50% coverage and anchors or glue-faced weld pins on 400 mm (16”)
centers. Secure in place with retaining clips. Cut off excess fastener length and cover
with brush coat of mastic over protrusions and all raw edges. Use 25 mm (1”) thick
insulation unless otherwise noted. Provide vapor barrier located on the warm side for
outside air intakes. Bevel corners at joints and butt together. Install acoustic gauze over
all cut corners and joints and brush coat with lap seal adhesive.
.9 Where duct velocities exceed 10 m/s (2000 ft/min), cover insulation with 0.8 mm
perforated galvanized steel with 24% free area.
.10 Fasten aluminum recovery jacket in place with aluminum banding on 200 mm (8”) centre
or screws or rivets on 150 mm (6”) centre. Longitudinal slip joints and 50 mm (2”) lap
joints.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION THICKNESS SCHEDULE

Insulation Recovery
Ducts & Equipment Thickness mm Jacket
(in)

.1 Relief Duct 50 (2”) FRK

.2 Exhaust Ducts within 3 m (10’-0”) of 25 (1”) FRK

Exterior Walls or Openings.

.3 Outside Air Intake Ducts 50 (2”) FRK

.4 Ductwork exposed to outdoors To match wall Aluminum

insulation

.5 Supply Ducts (Heating / Cooling System)* 25 (1”) FRK

.6 Acoustic Lining (where indicated) 25 (1”) -

* Upstream of electric duct heater within the space (none required on heating ducts exposed to
the space). Ducts containing cooling coils.

END OF SECTION

23 07 13.docx Stantec DUCT INSULATION

RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:

1. General requirements for Commissioning of HVAC equipment and systems.

.2 Related Sections:

.1 Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC

.2 Section 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems
.3 Acronyms:
.1 Cx - Commissioning.
.2 CxA - Commissioning Agent

1.2 INTENT
.1 Provide commissioning of HVAC equipment and systems in accordance with this, Section
01 91 13 and related sections.

.2 All items noted in this document are the responsibility of the contractor supplying and
installing the equipment, unless noted otherwise.

1.3 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE ON SITE

.1 Arrange and pay for qualified Manufacturer's representatives to supervise starting and
testing of the following mechanical equipment and systems (if applicable):

.1 Air Handling Unit (ERV)

.2 Fan-coil / Condensing Unit
.3 Variable Frequency Drives

Provide a Factory Acceptance Test report of the installed unit(s) signed by the
manufacturer’s representative.

.2 Use manufacturers factory trained personnel where required to maintain manufacturer's

warranty.

.3 Maintain documentation of all equipment start-up and commissioning and provide to

Commissioning Agent and Mechanical Engineer.

1.4 AIR SYSTEM TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING

.1 The Contractor will hire a Certified Balancing Agent for completion of the testing,
adjusting and balancing of all air handling systems as per Section 23 05 93.

23 08 00.docx Stantec COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
Page 2 of 5

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL
.1 Commission all equipment and systems installed as part of this contract. Typical
required information or actions are listed below for each equipment or system.
.2 Provide check sheets for equipment not listed in this section.
.3 Document the commissioning process by completing the Component Verification Forms,
System (functional) Tests and Integrated System Tests.

3.2 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS – MISCELLANEOUS

.1 Check that installation is in accordance with drawings, specifications and Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.2 Complete Manufacturer’s installation and start-up check sheets and include the
following:
.1 Confirm all gauges and thermometers can be read from the floor level or
operators control panel and are installed and calibrated as recommended by
Manufacturer.

3.3 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS - AIR HANDLING UNITS

.1 Check that installation is in accordance with drawings, specifications and Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.2 Complete Manufacturer’s installation and start-up check sheets and include the
following:
.1 Fresh, exhaust and recirculation air motorized dampers, operation and size.
.2 Filters.
.3 Check that fan base vibration isolation and flexible connections to ductwork are
properly installed.
.4 Special features, access doors, liners, inlet vanes and labels.
.5 Lubricate bearings on fans as recommended by Manufacturer. Ensure fan wheels
rotate in correct direction without binding. Adjust belts to proper alignment and
tension.
.6 Ensure temporary filters are installed. NEVER operate system without filters
installed.
.7 Ensure all balancing and fire dampers are open and ductwork is complete.
.8 Ensure electrical connections are complete and system disconnects are within
sight of unit.
.9 Ensure controls are operational.
.10 Ensure inlet and discharge duct geometry is correct.
23 08 00.docx Stantec COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
Page 3 of 5

.3 Start the system in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations.

.1 Check for correct static deflection of unit vibration isolators and that start-up and
shut down deflection is within resilience limits.
.2 Run for one day and check filters for bypass. Seal as required.
.4 Provide performance testing to ensure equipment meets specifications.
.1 Verify operation of the Heat Recovery Unit.
.2 Confirm that unit is performing as per specifications.
.3 Check controls operation and tune operating parameters to optimize air handling
unit performance.
.4 Tune system for energy efficient operation
.5 Provide maintenance services.
.1 Check that bearings are not overheating.
.2 Replace temporary filters with permanent filters.
.3 Wash heating, cooling and steam injected humidifier coils.
.4 Lubricate bearings.
.5 Check belts for tension and wear if present.
.6 Ensure that coils can be drained and that the drainage system is functioning
properly.
.7 Ensure that all equipment is serviced prior to owner takeover.
.8 Ensure that all equipment is installed to provide easy access for maintenance and
removal.

3.4 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS – FANS

.1 Check that installation is in accordance with drawings, specifications and Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.2 Complete Manufacturer’s installation and start-up check sheets and include the
following:
.1 Backdraft dampers.
.2 Accessories.
.3 Special features.
.4 Check that fan base vibration isolation and flexible connections to ductwork are
properly installed.
.5 Lubricate bearings on fans as recommended by Manufacturer.
.6 Ensure fan wheels rotate in correct direction without binding.
.7 Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension.
.8 Ensure ductwork and fan casing is free of dirt or foreign material.
.9 Ensure electrical connections are complete and disconnect is within sight of fan.
.10 Ensure inlet and discharge duct geometry is correct.
.3 Follow Manufacturer’s recommendations for starting

23 08 00.docx Stantec COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
Page 4 of 5

.1 Check for correct static deflection of unit vibration isolators, and that start-up and
shut down deflection is within resilience limits.
.4 Provide performance testing to ensure fan performance meets or exceeds performance
outlined in the specifications.
.5 Provide maintenance services.
.1 Check that bearings are not overheating.
.2 Lubricate bearings.
.3 Check belts for tension and wear.
.4 Confirm that all equipment is easily accessible for maintenance purposes.

3.5 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS – ERV UNITS

.1 Check that installation is in accordance with drawings, specifications and Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.2 Complete Manufacturer’s installation and start-up check sheets and include the
following:
.1 No physical damage to the unit has occurred.
.2 Unit is free of foreign debris.
.3 All bolts and screws are tight.
.4 All ducting connections are properly installed.
.5 Takeoffs for future installations are provided.
.6 Controls and damper actuators are installed in a neat and tidy manner.
.7 Control’s points list and flowcharts are completed.
.8 Equipment is labelled.
.9 Check insulation installation for specified thickness and quality of installation.
.10 Unit is clean and free from debris.
.3 Provide performance testing to ensure that dampers perform as per specifications.
.4 Ensure that all equipment is installed to provide easy access for maintenance and
removal.
.5 Ensure the equipment can be changed over between summer and winter operation both
automatically and manually via control.

3.6 AIR HANDLING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS – DISTRIBUTION

.1 Check that installation is in accordance with drawings, specifications and Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
.2 Complete Manufacturer’s installation and start-up check sheets.
.3 Inspect air systems including ductwork layout, support, and vibration isolation before
pressure testing any section of ductwork.
.4 Contractor to keep all new ducts clean. Cover all open ducts during construction.
.5 Pressure test sections of ductwork prior to application of insulation or concealment.
Include pressure testing of ductwork on commissioning schedule and notify Owner prior
to any system pressure tests.
23 08 00.docx Stantec COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
Page 5 of 5

.6 Check that insulation is installed as per specifications and is neat and tidy.
.7 Check that insulation has not been damaged during construction and note any sections
that require repair.
.8 Check that all distribution ductwork is labelled.
.9 Provide Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for all Air Handling Equipment and Systems
by a Certified Independent Agent.
.10 Provide performance testing to ensure that air handling equipment and systems perform
as per specifications.
.11 Provide maintenance services.
.1 Ensure all equipment is serviced prior to take-over.
.2 Ensure all equipment is installed to provide easy access for maintenance and
removal.

3.7 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS TESTING, ADJUSTING AND

BALANCING
.1 Provide Testing, Adjusting and Balancing in accordance with Section 23 05 93.

3.8 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS DEMONSTRATION AND

INSTRUCTION
.1 Provide demonstrations and instruction in accordance with Section 01 91 13.

END OF SECTION

23 08 00.docx Stantec COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
Page 1 of 7

General

SCOPE
.1 Temperature Sensors
.2 Control Panels
.3 Wire
.4 Conduit and Cables
.5 Control Dampers
.6 Electric Control Damper Operators
.7 Zone Controls
.8 Related Accessories

GENERAL
.1 Complete and fully operational system by PLC integrator of automatic controls, including
all materials and labor.
.2 Submissions of technical system data.
.3 Demonstration of proposed installed controls system.
.4 All components within process spaces to be NEMA 4X rated or to be provided with a
NEMA 4X enclosure.
.5 Devices as specified herein otherwise defer to Section 25 30 02 INSTRUMENTS as
primary specification for devices found in both specification sections.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1 Install all components in accordance with the latest regulations of the Canadian Electrical
Code, applicable Municipal and Provincial Codes and Regulations, and latest CSA
Electrical Bulletins.
.2 The equipment manufacturer shall have trained service representatives resident in the
Province where project is located.

SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Provide operating and maintenance manuals with complete description of installation and
operation specified in Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

Products

GENERAL
.1 Provide control system components consisting of temperature sensors, control valves,
dampers, actuators, indicating devices, and interface equipment required to operate
mechanical equipment and perform functions specified.

23 09 13.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTATION AND

CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
Page 2 of 7

.2 Provide all materials and labor required to connect control components.

.3 Provide electric devices as part of this contract.
.4 No splicing or extending of wiring will be accepted.

TEMPERATURE SENSORS
.5 General: Including room sensors to be resistance or thermocouple type to the following
requirements:
.1 Thermocouples: limit to temperature range of 200 degrees C.
.2 100 or 1000 ohm at 0 degrees C (plus or minus 0.2 ohms) platinum element with
strain minimizing construction, 3 integral anchored leadwires. Coefficient of
resistivity: 0.00385 ohms/ohm degrees C.
.3 Sensing element: hermetically sealed.
.4 Stem and tip construction: copper or type 304 stainless steel.
.5 Time constant response: less than 3 seconds to a temperature change of 10
degrees C.
.6 Range of device to be selected so as to provide reasonable representation of
process being controlled.
.6 Immersion wells: NPS 3/4, stainless steel spring loaded construction, with heat transfer
compound compatible with sensor. Insertion length 100 mm as indicated.
.7 The sensor shall be constructed in a manner that will prevent the sensor from becoming
dysfunctional or failed when used in direct contact with moisture droplets that may occur
in the air stream in which it is applied.
.1 Room temperature sensors.
.2 Temperature sensing wall module.
.3 Buttons for occupant selection of temperature set-point and occupied/unoccupied
modes. (OFFICE ONLY).
.4 Jack connection for plugging in laptop personal computer contractor supplied
zone terminal unit for access to zone bus.
.5 Integral thermistor sensing element 10,000 ohm at 24 degrees C.
.6 Accuracy 0.2 degrees C over range of 0 to 70 degrees C.
.7 Stability 0.02 degrees C drift per year.
.8 Separate mounting base for ease of installation.
.9 Room temperature sensors.
.10 Wall mounting, in slotted type covers.
.11 Element 10-50 mm long RTD with ceramic tube or equivalent protection or
thermistor, 10,000 ohm, accuracy of plus or minus 0.2 degrees C.
.8 Duct temperature sensors:
.1 General purpose duct type: suitable for insertion into ducts at various
orientations, insertion sensor length shall be selected to traverse the width or
height of the duct without extending the sensor past the dimensions of the duct or
distorted from a forced fit.
.2 Averaging duct type: shall provide one indication representative of the average
temperature measured across the entire length of the sensing element.
.3 Both rigid and serpentine style sensors shall be installed in accordance to
manufacturer recommendations

23 09 13.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTATION AND

CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
Page 3 of 7

.4 Devices installed on ductwork in process areas with potential of high humidity

must meet NEMA 4X.

.9 Outdoor air temperature sensors:

.1 Outside air type: complete with probe, non-corroding sun shield to minimize
solar and wind effects, threaded fitting for mating to 13 mm conduit,
weatherproof construction in NEMA 4X enclosure.
.10 Immersion temperature sensors:
.1 General Purpose immersion type: suitable for insertion into an immersion well
and supplied with thermal conductivity improving and sealing compound to be
applied to the sensor before setting in place in immersion well. To be provided
with a protection pocket and a matched stainless steel immersion sensing well.

CONTROL PANELS.
.1 Control panels are to be of unitized cabinet type construction, fabricated from 2.5 mm
rolled sheet metal sheet with baked enamel finish, flush fitting, gasketed doors hung on
piano type hinges and three point latches and locking handles. CSA approved for line
voltage applications.
.2 Mount pressure gauges, pilot lights, push buttons and switches flush on cabinet panel
face.
.3 Mount panels on vibration free walls or free standing angle iron supports. Provide
engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and on cabinet
face.
.4 Provide pans and rails for mounting terminal blocks, relays, wiring and other necessary
devices.
.5 Provide an individual switch for disconnection and a fuse for isolation of all panel
mounted instruments requiring a 120 volt supply.
.6 Make all wiring connections in the shop from the equipment mounted on the panel to
numbered terminal blocks conveniently located in the panel, including the power supply
for all instruments.
.7 Identify all wiring by means of stamped markings on heat shrinkable tubing that is
permanently fastened to wiring. Install all wiring neatly and laced or bunched into cable
form using plastic wire clips, where practical, contained in plastic wiring channels with
covers. Maximum 25 conductors to each wire bundle.
.8 Provide terminal blocks, tabular clamp, 300 V, complete with track. Each terminal shall
be clearly indelibly marked with the wire number connection to it. Each field connecting
conductor shall be served by one terminal. Provide 20% spare unit terminals, with a
minimum of two spare terminals. Provide all necessary terminal block accessories such
as manufacturer jumpers and marking tape.
.9 Install "Hand-Off-Auto" selector switches such that safety controls and electrical over
current protection are not overridden when selector switch is in the "Hand" position.
"Hand-Off-Auto" selector switches shall be provided for all ventilation fans and sump
pumps.

23 09 13.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTATION AND

CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
Page 4 of 7

.10 Control Power for control panel shall be 120 Volts A.C. from panel circuits provided by
Division 26. Identify power and circuit with lamicoid label on panel face.
.11 Install bonding conductor between main control and auxiliary panels complete with
grounding lugs, in addition to CSA grounding requirements.
.12 Where components in control panels require cooling and the panel construction includes
a fan, the panel is to be located in a non-classified space or space with a relative humidity
less than 65% (electrical room, office, etc). Alternatively, cooling air can be ducted to
/from a panel located in a process space with air from a non-classified space.
.13 When fabrication of first panel is completed arrange for inspection and approval by
Engineer before proceeding with further panel construction.

WIRE
.1 Control wiring for digital functions shall be 16 AWG minimum with 300 Volt insulation.
.2 Control wiring for analog functions shall be 16 AWG minimum with 300 Volts
insulation, twisted and shielded, 2 or 3 wire to match analog function hardware.
.3 Sensor wiring shall be 16 AWG minimum twisted and shielded, 2 or 3 wire to match
analog function hardware or 16 AWG as required by code.
.4 Transformer current wiring shall be 16 AWG minimum.
.5 Identify all wiring and cabling by means of stamped markings on heat shrinkable tubing
that is permanently fastened to wiring.

CONDUITS AND CABLES

.1 All wiring shall be in conduit or trays. Flexible conduit may be used for final connection
of control devices. Maximum length of flexible conduit to be 1 m. Conform to Division
26 requirements for conduit and trays specifications.
.2 Seal conduit where such conduit leaves heated areas and enters unheated area.
.3 In the field panel, run low level signal lines in separate conduit from high level signal and
power transmission lines.
.4 Identify each cable and wire at every termination point by means of stamped markings on
heat shrinkable tubing that is permanently fastened to wiring.
.5 Provide instrumentation complete with standard electrical conduit box for termination
unless otherwise noted.
.6 Separate conduits shall be provided for pneumatic tubing and electrical wiring runs.
.7 Color code all conductors and conduits by permanently applied color bands. Color code
shall follow base building schedule.
.8 All wiring for terminal equipment controllers including network communications, sensors
and actuator wiring must be in conduit.
.9 Sensor and actuator wiring for room controllers run within enclosed ceiling spaces or
walls of drywall construction may be installed without conduit, provided that it adheres to
the following installation requirements:
.1 Plenum rated cabling is used;

23 09 13.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTATION AND

CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
Page 5 of 7

.2 Cabling is run perpendicular to building lines and is supported using proper tie-
wraps either to the building structure or to conduit and intervals of no more than
two (2) feet;
.3 Cabling follows ductwork where practical and is installed on top of ductwork;
.4 all splices and terminations are made within junction boxes; and
.5 Strain relief is provided for all wiring entering junction boxes.
.6 The use of plaster rings for mounting of space sensors on drywall will be an
acceptable alternative to junction boxes when splices and terminations can be
made within the sensor enclosures.

CONTROL DAMPERS
.1 Refer to Section 23 33 00 – Air Duct Accessories.

ELECTRONIC CONTROL DAMPER ACTUATORS

.1 Provide electronic proportional damper actuators with spring return to “fail-safe” in
normally open or normally closed position.
.2 Damper operator’s spring return shall have sufficient torque to provide tight shut off in
the most extreme expected operating condition.
.3 Two-position dampers shall accept a 24 VDC signal and have end switches.
.4 Provide sufficient damper motors to achieve unrestricted movement, with a minimum of
one damper operator per damper section. The damper area driven by each damper
operator shall not exceed 1.6 meters.
.5 Positioning time for full closed to full open not to exceed 90 seconds.
.6 Positioning time for full open to full closed not to exceed 45 seconds.
.7 Where possible do not mount actuators outdoors or in the air stream.
.8 Where damper operators are located in battery rooms and OWSB, an explosion proof
enclosure shall be provided.
.9 Standard of Acceptance – Belimo.

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER (SPACE)

.1 Differential Pressure Transmitter to sense very low pressures of air and non-combustible,
compatible gases and sends a standard 4-20 mA output signal.
.2 Service: Air and non-combustible, compatible gases.
.3 Accuracy: ±0.50% FS, display accuracy ±0.5%.
.4 Stability: ±1% FS/yr.
.5 Temperature Limits: 0 to 140°F (-17.8 to 60°C).
.6 Compensated Temperature Limits: 20 to 120°F (-6.67 to 48.9°C).
.7 Pressure Limits: 60-0-60 Pa.
.8 Thermal Effect: ±0.02% FS/°F (0.036% FS/°C).
.9 Power Requirements: 12-30 VDC (2-wire).

23 09 13.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTATION AND

CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
Page 6 of 7

.10 Output Signal: 4 to 20 mA Positive, negative, and differential pressures can be measured
within a full span accuracy of ±0.50%.
.11 Weatherproof unit, enclosed in a polycarbonate case, designed to meet (IP66/NEMA 4X).
.12 Internal digital push button zero and span allow for quick and simple field calibration.
.13 Standard of Acceptance – Dwyer 616WL-32-LCD

ZONE CONTROLS
.1 Manufacturer to provide technical on-site technical support of products during
commissioning process.
.2 Controls contractor is responsible to provide installation and wiring of all loose control
components supplied by zone controllers to make a complete operational system.
Controls contractor to coordinate with manufacturer all installation requirements for a
complete and operational system.
.3 All zone controllers shall be provided with LCD thermostats.

RELATED ACCESSORIES
.1 Provide and install all necessary transducers, interposing relays, interface devices,
contactors, starters and EP's to perform control functions required.
.2 It is the responsibility of the Contractor to identify, at the time of proposal submission, all
additional items not specified that are required to meet the operational intent specified.
.3 Items required but not identified at the time of proposal acceptance shall be the
Contractor's responsibility.

Execution

INSTALLATION
.1 Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with drawings before
installation. Locate thermostats 1500 mm above floor.
.2 Install damper motors on outside of ducts.
.3 Wire "hand/off/auto" selector switches such that only automatic operating controls and
not safety controls and electrical over current protection shall be overridden when switch
is in the "hand" position.
.4 Fans that are to be sequenced with intake or discharge dampers through a single output
point shall be wired such that operation of damper end switch alone will not start fan.
I.E. The end switch command must both be required to start the fan when the
"hand/off/auto" selector switch is in the auto position.
.5 Unless specified otherwise, install all outdoor air sensors on the north exposure of the
building.
.6 Install all safety limits at the operator’s level.
.7 Safety devices including but not limited to freeze stats and pressure switches shall be
hardwired to trip fan starters on alarm condition.

23 09 13.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTATION AND

CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
Page 7 of 7

.8 Provide hardwire interlocking capability for all mechanical systems operated from the
fire alarm system. Capability shall include damper control as well as freezestat override
on operating air systems.
.9 Differential pressure transmitters to be installed on walls adjacent to doors of rooms.
Tubes to be run in conduits for protection where exposed and terminated in wall or
ceiling plates.

END OF SECTION

23 09 13.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTATION AND

CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 93
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

.1 The control sequences contain a general description of the intent of the operation of the
systems to be controlled. The Contractor shall review individual systems to ensure
equipment and life safety interlocks are not overridden.

.2 Consult with the Engineer during the shop drawing stage to finalize the control sequences
for each system.

.3 HVAC controls are to operate controlled by the water treatment plant PLC system.

.4 The HVAC controls shall be designed to incorporate all required thermostats, sensors,
actuators, wiring, controllers, and control panels to provide fully functioning control
systems.

.5 Components to be rated NEMA 4.

Part 2 Products

2.1 SEE 23 09 13 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL

.1 Coordinate work with PLC integrator for the successful execution of all control and
monitoring points in the system for operation of the equipment to meet the intent of the
building HVAC operations.

.2 Provide data base for all hardware points listed for system operation to meet specification
operating sequences.

.3 All fans and motors are to be equipped with current sensing relays and alarms.

.4 All equipment to be set up to fail safe.

.5 Sequence of operation at start-up of entire mechanical system and post power failure: stage
individual motors to reduce initial current draw.

.6 The user is intended to have full manipulation of adjustable control points via connectivity
of the HVAC controller to the SCADA system or the SCADA system alone if no HVAC
controller. Where manufacturer proprietary controls are utilized (ex, air handler Energy
Recovery/free cooling changeover, fan coil/condensing unit control, etc.) the PLC may
only monitor status per the control point list.

.7 Work with the balancing Contractor and allow for seasonal setpoint adjustments.

3.2 AIR SYSTEMS

.1 Administrative Spaces
23 09 93_PLC.docx Stantec SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
FOR HVAC CONTROLS
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 93
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Page 2 of 5

.1 Ventilation system consisting of:

.1 Passive ERV

.2 Supply Fan

.3 Exhaust Fan

.4 Filter Bank

.5 Electric Duct Heater

.6 Supply and exhaust duct distribution with associated dampers,

grilles, louvers, hood

.7 Split system heat pump for the office space

.2 Process Room

.1 Ventilation system consisting of:

.1 Supply Fan

.2 Filter bank

.3 Electric Duct Heater

.4 Chemical resistant exhaust fan

.5 Gas-fired unit heaters

.6 Duct distribution systems with associated dampers, grilles,

louvers, hood

.7 Destratification fans

.3 Electrical Room

.1 Ventilation system consisting of:

.1 Supply fan

.2 Filter Bank

.3 Duct distribution systems with associated dampers, grilles, hood

.4 Split system air conditioner

23 09 93_PLC.docx Stantec SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

FOR HVAC CONTROLS
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 93
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Page 3 of 5

3.3 ADMINISTRATIVE SPACES

.1 The supply fan F(S)-3 and exhaust fan F(E)-2 provides constant filtered and heated
ventilation air to the space. It also provides positive pressurization to the office and
vestibule relative to the process room.

.2 The motorized damper upstream of the supply fan is interlocked with the supply fan and
spring closes during a loss of power.

.3 Duct heater EDH-2 conditions the incoming air utilizing SCR control and remote
thermostat to maintain the ERV intake temperature to above -15°C (minimum, adjustable).

.4 The motorized damper downstream of the exhaust fan is interlocked with the supply fan
and spring closes during a loss of power.

.5 Energy Recovery Ventilator ERV-1 is used to reclaim heat and cooling to precondition air
for the administrative spaces.

.6 A wall-mounted thermostat controls the heat pump to provide heating and cooling to the
office.

.7 Supplemental heating is provided via forced flow and base-board heaters in the Vestibule,
Office, and Washroom (supplied and installed by electrical trade).

.8 Note: The intent is the door to the washroom is weather-stripped to control air movement,
to be from the adjacent administrative spaces (isolate from process room).

3.4 PROCESS ROOM

.1 Heat is provided to the space via two gas-fired unit heaters GFUH-1 and GFUH-2
controlled via a single wall-mounted thermostat.

.2 Ventilation is intermittently provided via supply fan F(S)-1 and exhaust fan F(E)-1. The
air is filtered and heated and operates to operate with a de-humidistat to mitigate excessive
humidity and a reverse-acting thermostat to help remove heat.

.3 F(S)-1 and F(E)-1 are interlocked.

.4 Dampers at the wall are interlocked with their respective fans.

.5 Destratification fans are controlled via a speed controller to be located in the process room
inside a NEMA 4X enclosure.

3.5 ELECTRICAL ROOM

.1 Constant ventilation is provided to the space via supply fan F(S)-2.

.2 Cooling is provided via a split DX system, controlled via a signal from the PLC with
feedback from the local temperature sensor.

23 09 93_PLC.docx Stantec SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

FOR HVAC CONTROLS
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 93
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Page 4 of 5

.3 Fan FS(S)-2 shall operate to maintain the space at about 25 °C (adjustable) , only when the
outside temperature is <10 °C (adjustable). At this time, the DX cooling system shall be
locked out. The intent is, if the space is still too warm to be cooled by F(S)-2 at the setpoint,
the setpoint must be lowered to allow the DX cooling system to operate until a suitable
outdoor temperature is determined.

.4 When the DX system is in operation during summer, or during winter when cooling is not
required, F(S)-2 shall operate at 25% of the rated flow to provide positive airflow in the
space.

.5 The DX system room cooling setpoint shall be 25 °C (adjustable).

.6 The outdoor temperature sensor is to be located on the north wall and complete with a sun
shield.

3.6 CONTROL / ALARM POINTS

.1 Administrative Spaces
− EDH-2 discharge temperature
− F(S)-3 status
− F(E)-2 status
− Filter differential pressure status
− Filter differential pressure alarm

.2 Process Room Building

− Space temperature
− EDH-1 discharge temperature
− Space humidity
− Supply fan F(S)-1 status
− Supply fan damper status
− Exhaust fan F(E)-1status
− Exhaust fan damper status
− Filter differential pressure status
− Filter differential pressure alarm
− Space low temperature alarm

.3 Electrical Room
− Space temperature
− Space high temperature alarm (set at 30 °C)
− Supply fan F(S)-2 status
− DX Cooling system Status (monitor condensing unit)
23 09 93_PLC.docx Stantec SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
FOR HVAC CONTROLS
RM of Headingley Section 23 09 93
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 SEQUENCES OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Page 5 of 5

− Filter differential pressure status

− Filter differential pressure alarm

END OF SECTION

23 09 93_PLC.docx Stantec SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

FOR HVAC CONTROLS
RM of Headingley Section 23 23 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB #1758 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS REFRIGERANT
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY
.1 Section Includes:
.1 Materials and installation for copper tubing and fittings for refrigerant.
.2 Related Sections:
.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
.1 ASME B16.22-01, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder - Joint Pressure
Fittings.
.2 ASME B16.24-02, Cast Copper Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Class 150,
300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500.
.3 ASME B16.26-88, Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
.4 ASME B31.5-01, Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components.
.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)
.1 ASTM A307-04, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.
.2 ASTM B280-03, Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air
Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
.3 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1 CSA B52-99, Mechanical Refrigeration Code.
.4 Environment Canada (EC)
.1 EPS 1/RA/1-96, Environmental Code of Practice for the Elimination of
Fluorocarbon Emissions from Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.3 Closeout submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into
manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

Part 2 Products

2.1 TUBING
.1 Processed for refrigeration installations, deoxidized, dehydrated and sealed.

23 23 00.docx Stantec COPPER TUBING AND

FITTINGS REFRIGERANT
RM of Headingley Section 23 23 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB #1758 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS REFRIGERANT
Page 2 of 3

.1 Hard copper: to ASTM B280, type ACR B.

.2 Annealed copper: to ASTM B280, with minimum wall thickness as per CSA B52
and ASME B31.5.

2.2 FITTINGS
.1 Service: design pressure 2070 kPa and temperature 121 degrees C.
.2 Brazed:
.1 Fittings: wrought copper to ASME B16.22.
.2 Joints: silver solder, 15% Ag-80% Cu-5%P and non-corrosive flux.
.3 Flanged:
.1 Bronze or brass, to ASME B16.24, Class 150 and Class 300.
.2 Gaskets: suitable for service.
.3 Bolts, nuts and washers: to ASTM A307, heavy series.
.4 Flared:
.1 Bronze or brass, for refrigeration, to ASME B16.26.

2.3 PIPE SLEEVES

.1 Hard copper or steel, sized to provide 6 mm clearance around between sleeve and
uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation.

2.4 VALVES
.1 22 mm and under: Class 500, 3.5 MPa, globe or angle non-directional type, diaphragm,
packless type, with forged brass body and bonnet, moisture proof seal for below freezing
applications, brazed connections.
.2 Over 22 mm: Class 375, 2.5 MPa, globe or angle type, diaphragm, packless type,
back-seating, cap seal, with cast bronze body and bonnet, moisture proof seal for below
freezing applications, brazed connections.

2.5 INSULATION
.1 Insulate all liquid and suction refrigerant piping lines with 12mm (1/2”) Armstrong
Armaflex AP sealed with Armstrong 520 adhesive. Refinish with Armstrong WB
Armaflex finish.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications,
including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and
datasheet.

23 23 00.docx Stantec COPPER TUBING AND

FITTINGS REFRIGERANT
RM of Headingley Section 23 23 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB #1758 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS REFRIGERANT
Page 3 of 3

3.2 GENERAL
.1 Install in accordance with CSA B52, EPS1/RA/1 and ASME B31.5 Section 23 05 01 -
Installation of Pipework.

3.3 BRAZING PROCEDURES

.1 Bleed inert gas into pipe during brazing.
.2 Remove valve internal parts, solenoid valve coils, sight glass.
.3 Do not apply heat near expansion valve and bulb.

3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION

.1 General:
.1 Soft annealed copper tubing: bend without crimping or constriction Hard drawn
copper tubing: do not bend. Minimize use of fittings.

3.5 PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING

.1 Close valves on factory charged equipment and other equipment not designed for test
pressures.
.2 Leak test to CSA B52 before evacuation to 2MPa and 1MPa on high and low sides
respectively.
.3 Test Procedure: build pressure up to 35 kPa with refrigerant gas on high and low sides.
Supplement with nitrogen to required test pressure. Test for leaks with electronic or
halide detector. Repair leaks and repeat tests.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION
.1 Instructions:
.1 Post instructions in frame with glass cover in accordance with Section
01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals and CSA B52.

3.7 CLEANING
.1 Perform cleaning operations as specified in Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning and in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.

END OF SECTION

23 23 00.docx Stantec COPPER TUBING AND

FITTINGS REFRIGERANT
RM of Headingley Section 23 31 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 METAL DUCTS
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Duct Insulation - Section 23 07 13
.2 Air Duct Accessories - Section 23 33 00

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE).
.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).
.1 ASTM A480/A480M-08b, Standard Specification for General Requirements for
Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
.2 ASTM A635/A635M-08, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,
Heavy-Thickness Coils, Carbon, Hot Rolled.
.3 ASTM A653/A653M-08, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
.3 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
.1 NFPA (Fire) 90A-2009, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
.2 NFPA (Fire) 90B-2009, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and
Air-Conditioning Systems.
.3 NFPA (Fire) 96-2008, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of
Commercial Cooking Operations.
.4 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).
.1 SMACNA 1966-2005, HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and
Flexible, 3rd Edition.
.2 SMACNA 1143-1985, HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1st Edition.
.3 IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction 2007, 2nd Edition.

1.3 SCOPE
.1 Ductwork and plenums.
.2 Fasteners.
.3 Sealants.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
.1 Low Pressure: Static pressure in duct less than 500 Pa (2 in WG) and velocities less than
10 m/s (2000 fpm).
.2 Duct sizes shown on plans are inside clear dimensions. For acoustically lined or
internally insulated ducts, maintain sizes inside ducts.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Ductwork shall meet the requirements of NFPA No. 90A - Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems; NFPA No. 90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating
and Air Conditioning Systems.

23 31 13.docx Stantec METAL DUCTS

RM of Headingley Section 23 31 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 METAL DUCTS
Page 2 of 4
.2 Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA duct manuals and ASHRAE handbooks as a
minimum where more stringent requirements are not identified in the contract documents.
Straight tap fittings and dovetail joints are not permitted.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit shop drawings and samples of duct fittings for approval, including particulars
such as gauge sizes, welds and configurations prior to start of work.

1.7 ALTERNATIVES
.1 Obtain written permission from the Mechanical Engineer prior to making variations in
duct configuration or sizes. Size alternatives using ASHRAE table for circular
equivalents of rectangular ducts.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Ducts: Galvanized steel to ASTM A653/A653M zinc coating and stainless steel
(Chemical Room and Chlorine Room) to ASTM A480/A480M Type 304. Ducts shall
have lock forming quality to meet SMACNA Standards. Note: plastic ductwork is
considered a viable option in room storing chemicals.
.2 Fasteners: Use rivets and bolts throughout; sheet metal screws accepted on low pressure
ducts. Chemical rooms to be stainless steel fasteners.
.3 Sealant: Water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials.
.4 Gauges as per SMACNA for pressure rating.
.5 Joints: to ASHRAE and SMACNA and/or proprietary manufactured duct joint.
Proprietary manufactured flanged duct joint to be considered to be a class a seal.

2.2 DUCTWORK
.1 Construction – round:
.1 Ducts: factory fabricated, spiral wound, with matching fittings and specials to
SMACNA.
.2 Transverse joints up to 900 mm: slip type with tape and sealants.
.3 Transverse joints over 900 mm: Vanstone.
.4 Fittings:
.5 Elbows: smooth radius. Centreline radius: 1.5 x diameter.
.1 Branches: conical transition with conical branch at 45 degrees and 45
degrees elbow.
.2 Construction – rectangular:
.1 Ducts: to SMACNA.
.2 Transverse joints: SMACNA seal Class A and B.
.3 Fittings:
.1 Elbows: smooth radius; centreline radius 1.5 x width of duct without
vanes or rectangular connection with turning vanes.
.2 Branches: with conical branch at 45 degrees and 45 degrees elbow.

23 31 13.docx Stantec METAL DUCTS

RM of Headingley Section 23 31 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 METAL DUCTS
Page 3 of 4
2.3 PLENUM GAUGES
.1 Fabricate fan plenums and plenums downstream of fan in accordance with SMACNA
manual.
.2 Fabricate plenums between fan and upstream apparatus of 1.6 mm (16 ga) thick material.
.3 Fabricate plenums between filters and upstream apparatus of 1.3 mm (18 ga) thick
material.

2.4 DUCT SEALING

.1 All supply, return and exhaust duct joints, longitudinal as well as transverse, shall be
sealed using,
.1 Low Pressure Ductwork:
.1 Slip Joints: Apply heavy brush-on high pressure duct sealant. Apply
second application after the first application has completely dried out.
Where metal clearance exceeds 1.5 mm (16 gauge) use heavy mastic
type sealant.
.2 Flanged Joints: Soft elastomer butyl or extruded form of sealant between
flanges followed by an application of heavy brush-on high pressure duct
sealant.
.3 Other Joints: Heavy mastic type sealant.
.2 Medium and High Pressure Ductwork: Combination of woven fabrics and
sealing compound followed by an application of high pressure duct sealant.
.2 Duct tapes as sealing method are not permitted.
.3 Surfaces to receive sealant should be free from oil, dust, dirt, moisture, rust and other
substances that inhibit or prevent bonding.
.4 Prior to sealing all ductwork, demonstrate sealing of a section of each type of duct and
obtain approval from the engineer.
.5 Do not insulate any section of the ductwork until it has been inspected and approved of
duct sealant application.
.6 Seal classification as follows:
Maximum Pressure Pa SMACNA Seal Class
2500 A
1500 A
1000 A
750 B
500 C
250 C
125 C

.1 Class A: longitudinal seams, transverse joints, duct wall penetrations and

connections made airtight with sealant and tape.
.2 Class B: longitudinal seams, transverse joints and connections made airtight with
sealant and tape.
.3 Class C: transverse joints and connections made air tight with gaskets, sealant
and tape. Longitudinal seams unsealed.

23 31 13.docx Stantec METAL DUCTS

RM of Headingley Section 23 31 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 METAL DUCTS
Page 4 of 4
Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Fabricate ductwork from field measurements and not from plans and shop drawings
exclusively. Failure to do so will not constitute an extra to the Contract.
.2 Complete metal ducts within themselves with no single partition between ducts. Where
width of duct exceeds 450 mm (18”) cross-brace for rigidity. Open corners are not
acceptable.
.3 Construct tees, bends and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on
centre line. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are specified, provide
double wall air foil type turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is provided, provide
turning vanes of perforated metal type with fiberglass inside.
.4 Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 deg. divergence wherever possible.
Maximum divergence upstream of equipment to be 30 deg. and 45 deg. convergence
downstream.
.5 Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight, substantially airtight, braced
and stiffened so as not to breathe, rattle, vibrate or sag. Caulk duct joints and connections
with sealant as ducts are being assembled. Seal seams on fresh air and exhaust ducts
watertight with mastic or high velocity duct sealant.
.6 Set plenum doors 150 mm (6”) above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static holds
door in closed position.
.7 Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operation and
maintenance activities.
.8 Interrupt duct linings at fire, balancing, backdraft and smoke dampers so as not to
interfere with operation of devices. Provide sheet metal edge protection over linings on
both side of damper device.
.9 Shield ductwork from dust and construction material during construction. Clean any
ductwork found to be dirty at no extra cost to the Contract.
.10 Install ducts associated with fans subject to forced vibration with flexible connections
immediately adjacent to equipment. Refer to Section 23 33 13 "Air Duct Accessories".
.11 Do not use flexible duct to change direction. Provide a minimum of three (3) duct
diameters of straight metal duct between box inlet and flexible connector.
.12 Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with 300 mm (12”) maximum stretched length of
flexible duct. Hold in place with caulking compound and strap or clamp.
.13 Prove that ductwork is substantially air tight before covering or concealing.
.14 Lap metal ducts in direction of air flow. Hammer down all edges and slips to leave
smooth duct interiors.
.15 Clean duct systems and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated
dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which
may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass during cleaning.

END OF SECTION

23 31 13.docx Stantec METAL DUCTS

RM of Headingley Section 23 33 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Entire Specification – All areas of common work.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).
.1 SMACNA 1966-2005, HVAC Duct Construction Standards – Metal and
Flexible, 3rd Edition.
.2 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
.1 NFPA (Fire) 90A-2009, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems.
.2 NFPA (Fire) 90B-2009, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and
Air-Conditioning Systems.

1.3 SCOPE
.1 Access doors.
.2 Dampers
.3 Flexible connections.
.4 Backdraft dampers.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Access doors shall be ULC labeled.
.2 Accessories shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A, Air Conditioning and Ventilating
Systems. Fabricate in accordance with ASHRAE Handbooks and SMACNA Duct
Manuals.
.3 Products shall be product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of such items
who issues complete catalogue data on such products.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Closeout submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into
manual specified in Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Access Doors : Controlled Air, Nailor, Air-O-Metal, Titus.
.2 Dampers : Tamco, Alumavent, Ventex, Nailor
.3 Flexible Connections : Thermaflex M-HKE

23 33 00.docx Stantec AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 23 33 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 2 of 4
2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
.1 Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and
suitable quick fastening locking devices. Duct access panels with screws are not
acceptable. Install minimum 25 mm (1”) thick insulation with suitable sheet metal cover
frame for insulated ductwork.
.2 Fabricated with two butt hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 450 mm (18”), two
hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles for sizes up to
600 mm x 1200 mm (24” x 48”) and an additional hinge for larger sizes.

2.3 DAMPERS
.1 Extruded 100 mm (4") deep aluminum frame with lower leak polystyrofoam insulated
blades on four sides. Entire frame shall be thermally broken by means of polyurethane
resin pockets, complete with thermal cuts.
.2 Blade and frame seals shall be of extruded silicone and be secured in an integral slot
within the aluminum extrusions.
.3 Bearings are to be composed of a Celcon inner bearing fixed to aluminum hexagon blade
pin, rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in the frame, resulting in no
metal-to-metal or metal-to-plastic contact.
.4 Linkage hardware shall be installed in the frame side and constructed of aluminum and
corrosion-resistant, zinc-plated steel, complete with cup-point trunnion screws for a slip-
proof grip.
.5 Dampers are to be designed for operation in temperatures ranging between -40°C (-40°F)
and 85°C (185°F).
.6 Dampers shall be available with either opposed blade modulating action or parallel blade
open/close action.
.7 Standard acceptance: Tamco series 9000BF or Alumavent.
.8 Stainless Steel Damper for chemical rooms: Johnson Control VD-1640 low leakage with
DuroDyne flexible duct connector.
.9 Operator: Refer to Section 23 09 13 – Instrumentation and Control Devices For HVAC.

2.4 BALANCING DAMPERS

.1 Fabricate of galvanized steel, minimum 1.6 mm (16 gauge). Full blade-length shafts of
hollow square construction with blades rigidly fastened along entire blade length.
.2 Lockable quadrant type operating mechanism with end bearings on accessible rectangular
ducts up to 400 mm (16”) deep and on accessible round ducts.
.3 Wide pitch screw operating mechanism with crank operator and end bearings on
accessible rectangular ducts 425 mm (17”) and over in depth and on all inaccessible
rectangular and round ducts.
.4 On rectangular ducts up to 275 mm (11”) deep construct of single blade (butterfly) type.
.5 On rectangular ducts 300 mm to 400 mm (12” x 16”) deep construct of two opposed
blades mechanically interlocked with pivots at quarter points.
.6 On rectangular ducts over 425 mm (17”) deep construct of multiple opposed blades,
mechanically interlocked with blades no greater than 200 mm (8”) deep and pivots
equally spaced.

23 33 00.docx Stantec AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 23 33 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 3 of 4
.7 On round ducts construct of single blade (butterfly) type. On 500 Pa (2 in WG) class and
on all dampers over 300 mm (12”) diameter fabricate with full blade-length shaft.
.8 Construct damper blades for medium and high pressure systems to block air passage 70%
maximum. Provide complete with locking type handles.
.9 Provide over-ride limiting stops on all operating mechanisms.
.10 Identify the air flow direction and blade rotation and open and close positions on
operating mechanism.
.11 On round ductwork, install operating mechanism on a steel mounted base firmly secured
to the ductwork.
.12 On externally insulated ductwork, install operating mechanisms on a steel bridge type
mounting base to permit continuity of insulation under the mechanism.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

.1 Fabricate of ULC approved neoprene coated flameproof glass fabric approximately
150 mm (6”) wide tightly crimped into metal edging strip and attached to ducting and
equipment by screws or bolts at 150 mm (6”) intervals. Flexible connection airtight at
500 Pa (2 in WG).
.2 Fasteners: Use rivets and bolts throughout; sheet metal screws accepted on low pressure
ducts.
.3 Sealant: Water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials.

2.6 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

.1 Construct of minimum 1.3 mm (18 gauge) galvanized steel channel frame.
.2 Construct of minimum 0.6 mm (26 gauge) aluminum blades, complete with stiffeners
along trailing edge. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 240 mm (9”),
multiblade dampers for ducts greater than 240 mm (9”).
.3 Provide full blade-length shafts complete with brass or nylon bearings.
.4 Provide neoprene anti-clatter blade strips on pivot side of blades.
.5 Construct blade connecting linkage of minimum 2.0 mm (14 gauge) aluminum rod with
eyelet, pin bearings, and adjustable counter weight to assist blade opening action.
.6 Maximum blade length of 750 mm (30”).
.7 Backdraft damper suitable for 10 m/s (2000 fpm) face velocity.

2.7 BAROMETRIC DAMPERS

.1 Blade Type: 2V
.2 Pressure Relief: 0.1 in. wg to 2 in. wg
.3 Back Pressure: 5 - 8½ in. wg
.4 Velocity: Up to 5150 fpm
.5 304 SS construction
.6 16 ga blade thickness
.7 Temperature: -20°F to 200°F with seals; -20°F to 250°F without seals

23 33 00.docx Stantec AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 23 33 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Page 4 of 4
Part 3 Execution

3.1 APPLICATION
.1 Provide access door minimum 450 mm x 350 mm or 50 mm (18” x 14” or 2”) smaller
than duct dimension for cleaning and inspection at positions indicated by drawings and as
follows:
.1 At 6.0 m (20’-0”) intervals on all horizontal ducts.
.2 At 12.0 m (40’-0”) intervals in all vertical duct systems.
.3 At the base of all duct risers.
.4 Both sides of turning vanes in all ducts.
.5 At each side of all heating or cooling coils.
.6 At all locations of internally duct mounted devices including automatic dampers,
damper motors, duct mounted smoke detectors and heat detectors, and control
sensors and devices.
.2 Coordinate with the General Contractor for correct size openings and proper fire guard
sleeving for fire damper penetration.
.3 At each point where ducts pass through partitions, the opening around the duct shall be
sealed with non-combustible material.
.4 Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return and exhaust systems
where branches are taken from larger ducts.
.5 Provide balancing dampers on medium and high pressure systems where indicated.
Splitter dampers shall not be used on medium and high pressure system.
.6 Install ducts associated with fans and equipment subject to forced vibration with flexible
connections, immediately adjacent to equipment and/or where indicated on drawing.
.7 For connections to medium and high pressure fans, install 15 mm (½”) thick neoprene
pad over fabric and hold in place with additional metal straps.

END OF SECTION

23 33 00.docx Stantec AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

RM of Headingley Section 23 33 46
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Flexible ducts.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

.1 Low Pressure: Static pressure in duct less than 500 Pa (2 in WG) and velocities less than
10 m/s (2000 fpm).

.2 Duct sizes shown on plans are inside clear dimensions. For acoustically lined or
internally insulated ducts, maintain sizes inside ducts.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Ductwork shall meet the requirements of NFPA No. 90A - Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems; NFPA No. 90B, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating
and Air Conditioning Systems.

.2 Flexible air duct shall conform to NFPA90A and UL181 standard for factory made air
duct materials and air duct connectors. Flexible duct shall have a Fire Rating of at least
½ hour as measured by UL Standard.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Fasteners: Use rivets and bolts throughout; sheet metal screws accepted on low pressure
ducts.

.2 Sealant: Water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials.

.3 Flexible Duct - Low Pressure: Flexible air duct shall be used where shown on drawings.
Length of flexible duct shall not exceed 900 mm (36”). Flexible duct shall be polymetric
liner banded to a steel wire helix, wrapped with fiberglass insulation and outer fiberglass
reinforced metalized vapour barrier jacket. Flexible duct rated for 12 m/s (2360 fpm)
velocity and pressure rated for 500 Pa (2 in WG) positive and 500 Pa (2 in WG) negative.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Thermaflex M-KE

.5 Standards of Acceptance Un-insulated: - Thermaflex S-TL

Insulated: Thermaflex M-KC

23 33 46.docx Stantec FLEXIBLE DUCTS

RM of Headingley Section 23 33 46
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Page 2 of 2

Part 3 Execution

3.1 DUCT SEALING

.1 All supply, return and exhaust duct joints, longitudinal as well as transverse, shall be
sealed using,

.1 Low Pressure Ductwork:

.1 Joints: Heavy mastic type sealant.

.2 Duct tapes as sealing method are not permitted.

.3 Surfaces to receive sealant should be free from oil, dust, dirt, moisture, rust and other
substances that inhibit or prevent bonding.

3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Do not use flexible duct to change direction.

.2 Connect diffusers or troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 900 mm (36”) maximum
stretched length of flexible duct. Hold in place with caulking compound and strap or
clamp.

.3 Flexible ducts shall be installed as per SMACNA standards.

END OF SECTION

23 33 46.docx Stantec FLEXIBLE DUCTS

RM of Headingley Section 23 34 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 HVAC FANS AND VENTILATORS
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 In-line Centrifugal Duct Fans

.2 Energy Recovery Ventilators

.3 Destratification Fans

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Conform to AMCA Bulletins regarding construction and testing. Fans shall bear AMCA
certified rating seal for performance and sound ratings.

.2 Fans shall bear CSA label.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit with shop drawings acoustical data and fan curves showing fan performance with
fan and system operating point plotted on curves.

.2 Comply with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Do not operate fans for any purpose, temporary or permanent until ductwork is clean, filters
are in place and bearings are lubricated.

1.5 ALTERNATES

.1 Equivalent fan selections shall not increase motor kilowatts, increase rpm, increase noise
level, increase tip speed by more than 10%, or increase inlet air velocity by more than 20%,
from that of the specified fan.

1.6 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

.1 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment Section 23 05 13

Part 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Fan Coils: LG, Mitsubishi, Daikin, Samsung, or approved equal.

.2 In Line Centrifugal Duct Fans: Greenheck, Loren Cook, ACME, Penn (with variable
speed motors and controllers), Twin City.

.3 Energy Recovery Ventilators: Price SolutionAir, Tempeff, BPE, or approved equal.

.4 Interior Motorized Dampers: Alumavent/Nailor

23 34 00.docx Stantec HVAC FANS AND VENTILATORS

RM of Headingley Section 23 34 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 HVAC FANS AND VENTILATORS
Page 2 of 4

.5 Plastic Fans: MK Plastics, Plastec

.6 Fire Dampers: Nailor or approved equal

2.2 GENERAL

.1 Statically and dynamically balance fans so no objectionable vibration or noise is

transmitted to occupied areas of the building.

.2 For motors without VFDs, provide balanced variable sheaves for motors 11.2 kW (15 HP)
and under and fixed sheave for 15 kW (20 HP) and over.

.3 Fans are to be capable of accommodating static pressure variations of ±10% with no

objectionable operating characteristics.

.4 For motors without VFDs, supply replacement pulleys and sheaves for fans as required to
properly balance the system to design flows at actual job site static pressure conditions.
Obtain requirements from balancing agency (Refer to Section 23 05 93, Testing, Adjusting
and Balancing for HVAC Systems.) Provide three sets of spare belts for each size where
belt driven fans are provided (ie. a fan driven by two belts requires six spares).

.5 External static pressure means external to the fan cabinet and all accessories such as
backdraft dampers, mixing boxes, filters and coils, etc. These accessories if supplied as
part of the unit are considered as internal losses for fan.

.6 Fan motors to be TEFC. Two speed motors shall have separate winding for each speed.

2.3 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

.1 Fabricate with multi-blade wheels in heavy gauge steel housing reinforced for service
encountered.

.2 Provide heavy duty, self-aligning, anti-friction bearings with external lubrication.

.3 Provide access door and drain connection to scroll.

.4 Unless noted otherwise, centrifugal fans over 425 mm (17”) diameter shall have die formed
air foil blades welded to side and back plate.

.5 Provide fan cabinets lined with minimum 25 mm (1”) sound absorbing insulation, unless
noted otherwise elsewhere in the specifications.

.6 Provide matching wall vents, goosenecks or roof jacks all c/w backdraft dampers as
required.

.7 Variable speed control for balancing.

23 34 00.docx Stantec HVAC FANS AND VENTILATORS

RM of Headingley Section 23 34 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 HVAC FANS AND VENTILATORS
Page 3 of 4

2.4 ENERGY RECOVERY VENTILATORS (ERV)

.1 Unit Construction: Unit shall be fabricated with galvanized sheet metal. The core shall be
a polymer fixed plate configuration for resistance to chemicals, bases, and acids as well as
the growth of mold or formation of frost.

.2 Energy Recovery: The core shall be designed for heat and humidity energy transfer. The
unit shall be minimum 80% efficient at the required airflow in winter. It shall also provide
up to 45% latent recovery. Maximum allowable face velocity across heat exchangers shall
be 450 fpm. A stainless steel drain-pan under each core section will be provided.

.3 Local maintenance available within three days of service call.

2.5 PLASTIC EXHAUST FANS

.1 UL 507 listed with matching UL listed solid state controls.

.2 One piece polypropylene casing

.3 Temperature handling minimum 140 °F

.4 Forward curved polypropylene fan with stainless steel shaft

.5 TEFC motor with enamel-coated galvanized stand

.6 Stainless steel fasteners

2.6 DESTRATIFICATION FANS

.1 Canarm Bucket Fan 1460

.2 UL 507 listed with matching UL listed solid state controls.

.3 Steel housing with corrosion resistant coating

.4 Aluminum blade

.5 Variable speed controller

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s installation and maintenance instructions.

.2 Where inlet or outlet is exposed, provide safety screen.

.3 Supply and install sheaves as necessary for final air balancing.

23 34 00.docx Stantec HVAC FANS AND VENTILATORS

RM of Headingley Section 23 34 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 HVAC FANS AND VENTILATORS
Page 4 of 4

.4 Do not operate ERV’s for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is clean,
filters are in place, bearings lubricated and fan has been test run under observation.

3.2 PRIMING

.1 Prime coat fan wheels and housing factory inside and outside. Prime coating on aluminum
parts is not required.

.2 Provide two additional coats of paint on fans.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

.1 Fan performance based on sea level conditions.

END OF SECTION

23 34 00.docx Stantec HVAC FANS AND VENTILATORS

RM of Headingley Section 23 37 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 SCOPE
.1 Grilles and Diffusers
.2 Door Grilles
.3 Outside Louvers

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Entire Specification – All areas of common work.

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE).

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Air flow tests and sound level measurement shall be made in accordance with applicable
ADC equipment test codes, ASHRAE Standards and AMCA Standards.
.2 Unit rating shall be approved by ADC and AMCA.
.3 Manufacturer shall certify catalogued performance and ensure correct application of air
outlet types.
.4 Outside louvers shall bear AMCA seal for free area and water penetration.

1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

.1 Review requirements of outlets as to size, finish and type of mounting prior to submitting
shop drawings and schedules of outlets.
.2 Positions indicated are approximate only. Check locations of outlets and make necessary
adjustments in position to conform to Architectural features, symmetry and lighting
arrangement.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit color selection charts of finishes, for approval prior to fabrication.
.3 Submit shop drawings with complete catalogue information, materials of construction,
dimensions and accessories for all air outlets, louvers and components in this
specification section, and as scheduled.

Part 2 Products

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Diffusers, Grilles: Titus, Price, Nailor, Ventex or approved equal

23 37 00.docx Stantec AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

RM of Headingley Section 23 37 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Page 2 of 3

.2 Outside Louvers: Greenheck, Ruskin, Ventex or approved equal

2.2 GENERAL
.1 Refer to Grille and Diffuser Schedule on drawings.

2.3 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS

.1 Base air outlet application on space noise level of NC 30 maximum.
.2 Provide grilles with sponge rubber seal around the edge.
.3 Provide baffles to direct air away from walls, columns or other obstructions within the
radius of diffuser operation.
.4 Provide plaster frame for diffusers located in plaster surfaces.
.5 Provide anti-smudge frames or plaques on diffusers located in rough textured surfaces
such as acoustical plaster.
.6 To meet capacity, pressure drop, terminal velocity, throw, noise level, neck velocity as
indicated.
.7 Frames: Full perimeter gaskets or plaster frames where set into plaster or gypsum board
and as specified.
.8 Concealed fasteners: manual volume control damper operators
.9 Color: standard or as indicated on the drawings.

2.4 DOOR GRILLES

.1 Fabricate of V-shaped louvers of 1.0 mm (20 gauge) steel, 25 mm (1”) deep on 15 mm
(½”) centers.
.2 Provide 1.0 mm (20 gauge) steel frame with auxiliary frame to give finished appearance
on both sides of door.
.3 Factory finish in prime and standard coating.
.4 Provide fire rated door grilles as indicated on the drawings. Contractor to verify door
rating with Architectural.

2.5 OUTSIDE LOUVERS

.1 Louvers 100 mm (4”) deep with blades on 35° slope with double drainable blade and
drainable heavy channel frame with 20 mm (3/4”) expanded, flattened aluminum
birdscreen in removable frame.
.2 Fabricate of 2.0 mm (14 gauge) extruded aluminum blades and frame. Where openings
exceed 1800 mm (72”) in height, jamb frames shall be 2.0 mm (14 gauge). Provide
welded assembly.
.3 Finish in factory baked enamel finish. Color shall be selected by the Architect.

23 37 00.docx Stantec AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

RM of Headingley Section 23 37 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
Page 3 of 3

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including
product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheet.
.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.3 Install with oval head, cadmium plated screws in countersunk holes where fastenings are
visible, if required.

END OF SECTION

23 37 00.docx Stantec AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

RM of Headingley Section 23 55 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 DUCT HEATERS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY
.1 Section includes:
.1 Materials and application of duct heaters.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 Codes and standards referenced in this section refer to the latest edition thereof.
.2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International)
.1 CSA C22.2 No. 46, Electric Air-Heaters
.3 Department of Justice Canada (Jus.)
.1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA)
.4 Transport Canada (TC)
.1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA)

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Submit product data and include:
.1 Element support details
.2 Heater: total kW rating, voltage, phase
.3 Heat output control (Number of stages, SCR)
.4 Rating of stage: rating, voltage, phase
.5 Heater element watt/density and maximum sheath temperature
.6 Maximum discharge temperature
.7 Physical size
.8 Unit support
.9 Performance limitations
.10 Clearance from combustible materials
.11 Internal components wiring diagrams
.12 Minimum operating airflow
.13 Pressure drop, operating and minimum airflow

Part 2 Products

2.1 DUCT HEATERS (ELECTRIC)

.1 Duct heaters: flange type or insert type.
.2 To carry CSA approval.

23 55 01.docx Stantec DUCT HEATERS

RM of Headingley Section 23 55 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 DUCT HEATERS
Page 2 of 2

.3 Elements:
.1 Open coil elements of nickel-chrome resistance wire.
.2 Coils machine crimped into stainless steel terminals extending at least 25 mm
into the air stream.
.3 All terminal hardware shall be stainless steel.
.4 Coils shall be supported by ceramic bushings staked into the supporting brackets.
.4 Frames: Heater frames and boxes shall be corrosion resistant steel and/or stainless steel.
.5 Terminal box:
.1 NEMA 4X enclosure
.2 Hinged, latching cover.
.3 Multiple concentric knockouts to accept field wiring.
.4 Terminal blocks to accommodate field wiring.
.5 All internal wiring to be complete with safety features
.6 Ratings:
.1 Heaters to be rated for voltage, phase, and KW capacity as indicated in schedule
on drawings.
.2 All three phase heaters to have equal, balanced, three phase stages.
.3 Supply heaters with size and quantity of fixed and proportional heating stages as
indicated in schedule.
.7 Controls:
.1 Factory mounted and wired in control box. Use terminal blocks for power and
control wiring.
.2 Controls to include:
.1 Magnetic contactors.
.2 Fixed differential pressure switch.
.3 Airflow switch
.4 Manual and automatic reset high limit.
.5 Control transformers.
.6 Solid state relays.
.7 HRC load fuses.
.8 Electronic step controller.
.3 Performance: see schedule.
.4 Provide heater complete with protective screens on inlet/outlet.
.5 Acceptable Product: Thermolec, E.H. Price, Greenheck, Neptronic, or approved
equal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Make power and control connections in accordance with CSA C22.2 No. 46. Install in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
.2 Duct heaters are to be interlocked with the fan operation which is supplying air to the
unit.
END OF SECTION

23 55 01.docx Stantec DUCT HEATERS

RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 1 of 13

Part 1 General

1.1 SUMMARY
.1 Air Cooled Split System Heat Pump Unit

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Entire Specification – All areas of common work.

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
(ASHRAE).
.2 Conform to requirements of CSA, UL, CETL, Provincial and Municipal Codes.
.3 Test and rate cooling system to ARI Standard 210.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Units shall be products of manufacturers who provide local service personnel from
factory representative, franchised dealer or certified maintenance service shop.
.2 The unit shall be fully assembled, wired and tested prior to shipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Shop drawings shall include all of the following information but not limited:
.1 Product characteristics.
.2 Performance criteria.
.3 Mounting methods.
.4 Physical size.
.5 kW rating, voltage, phase.
.6 Color and finish.
.3 Provide operating and maintenance manuals with complete description of installation and
operation specified in Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

Part 2 Products

2.1 AIR COOLED HEAT PUMP UNIT

.1 The outdoor unit shall be capable of the following operating ambient range:
.1 Cooling: 5°F DB to 118°F DB <with optional low ambient kit from 0°F DB to
118°F DB if identified in schedule>
.2 Heating: 0°F WB to 64°F WB.
.3 General
.1 The air-conditioning system shall use R410A refrigerant.
.2 Each system shall have one air source outdoor unit.
.3 The refrigerant circuit shall be field piped to a single matching indoor unit to
effectively and efficiently control the heating or cooling operation of the system.
23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 2 of 13

.4 All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be field insulated.
.5 Factory installed microprocessor controls in the outdoor unit and indoor unit
shall perform functions to efficiently operate the single zone system and
communicate via minimum 18 AWG, 4 conductor, stranded, shielded or
unshielded power/communication cable. If shielded, it must be grounded to
chassis at ODU only.
.6 The outdoor unit shall be internally assembled, wired and piped from the factory.
.7 The factory assembled system shall have the outdoor unit fitted with refrigerant
strainer, check valves, oil separator, accumulator, 4-way reversing valve,
electronic expansion valve, high side and low side refrigerant charging ports, and
a service port.
.4 Piping Capabilities
.1 The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at an elevation of 98.4 feet above
or below the indoor unit.
.2 The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating with up to 164 feet
<LUU187~247HV> or 246 feet <LUU367~427HV> of total equivalent
refrigerant piping length.
.5 Defrost Operation
.1 The outdoor unit shall be capable of auto defrost operation to melt accumulated
ice off the outdoor unit heat exchanger. The defrost cycle control shall be based
on outdoor ambient temperatures and outdoor unit heat exchanger temperatures.
.6 Oil Management
.1 The outdoor unit shall have an oil injection mechanism to ensure a consistent
film of oil on all moving compressor parts at low speed.
.2 The outdoor unit shall have an oil separator to separate oil mixed with the
refrigerant gas during compression and return oil to the compressor.
.7 Cabinet
.1 The outdoor unit cabinet shall be made of pre-coated metal (PCM).
.2 The front/side panels of the outdoor unit shall be removable type for access to
internal components.
.3 Outdoor unit cabinet shall be tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 salt spray
test procedure for a minimum of 1000 hours.
.8 Fan Assembly
.1 Each 1.5 to 2 ton outdoor unit <LUU187~247HV> shall be equipped with one
direct drive variable speed propeller fan with Brushless Digitally Controlled
(BLDC) motor with a horizontal air discharge.
.2 Each 3 to 3.5 ton outdoor unit <LUU367~427HV> shall be equipped with two
direct drive variable speed propeller fans with BLDC motors with a horizontal air
discharge.
.3 The fan blades shall be made of Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) material.
.4 The fan(s) shall be equipped with permanently lubricated bearings.
.5 The fan motor(s) shall have variable speed to a maximum of 950 RPM.
.6 The fan(s) shall have a raised guard to help prevent contact with moving parts.
.9 Outdoor Coil
.1 The outdoor unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded on copper tubing.
.2 The aluminum fins shall have factory applied corrosion resistant material.
23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 3 of 13

.3 Coil coating shall be tested in accordance with ASTM B-117 salt spray test
procedure for a minimum of 1000 hours.
.4 The outdoor unit coil shall be factory tested to a pressure of 600 psig.
.5 The coil for each outdoor unit shall have a minimum of 14 Fins per Inch (FPI).
.6 The coil for each outdoor unit shall have a 2 row heat exchanger.
.7 The outdoor unit cabinet shall have a coil guard.
.10 Compressor
.1 The outdoor unit shall be equipped with one hermetically sealed, digitally
controlled, inverter driven twin-rotary compressor.
.2 The inverter driven, digitally controlled compressor shall be capable of operating
in a frequency range from 20 Hz to 100 Hz with control in 1 Hz increments.
.3 The compressor shall be mounted on vibration attenuating rubber grommets.
.4 The compressor shall use a factory charge of Polyvinyl Ether (PVE) oil.
.5 The compressor bearing(s) shall have Teflon™ coating.
.6 The compressor shall be equipped with over-current protection.
.11 Sound Levels
.1 The outdoor unit shall have sound levels not exceeding 54 dB(A) tested in an
anechoic chamber under ISO1996 standard.
.12 Sensors
.1 The outdoor unit shall have
.1 Suction temperature sensor
.2 Discharge temperature sensor
.3 High pressure sensor
.4 Low Pressure sensor
.5 Outdoor temperature sensor
.6 Outdoor unit heat exchanger temperature sensor

2.2 INDOOR FAN COIL UNIT

.1 Wall Mounted – Standard
.1 General
.1 Unit shall be manufactured by LG.
.2 Unit shall be factory assembled, wired, piped and run tested.
.3 Unit shall be designed to be installed for indoor application.
.4 Unit shall be attached to an installation plate/bracket that secures
unit to the wall.
.5 The depth of the unit shall not exceed 10 inches.
.2 Casing/Panel
.1 Unit case shall be manufactured of heavy duty Acrylonitrile
Butadiene Styrene (ABS) and High Impact Polystyrene (HIPS)
plastic.
.2 Unit case shall have a pearl white finish.
.3 The front surface of the unit shall have an architectural curved
panel with pearl white finish.
.3 Cabinet Assembly
.1 Unit shall have one supply air outlet and one return air inlet.
.2 Unit shall be equipped with factory installed temperature
thermistors for
.3 Return air
.4 Refrigerant entering coil
23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 4 of 13

.5 Refrigerant leaving coil

.6 Unit shall have a built-in control panel to communicate with the
outdoor unit.
.7 Unit shall have the following functions as standard
.8 Self-diagnostic function
.9 Auto restart function
.10 Auto changeover function
.11 Auto clean function
.12 Dehumidifying function
.13 Hot Start
.14 Sleep mode
.15 Unit shall be capable of refrigerant piping in 4 different
directions.
.16 Unit shall be capable of drain piping in 2 different directions.
.4 Fan Assembly
.1 The unit shall have a direct drive, cross flow fan made of high
strength ABS plastic.
.2 The fan motor is Brushless Digitally controlled (BLDC) with
permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings.
.3 The fan/motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration
attenuating rubber grommets.
.4 The fan speed shall be controlled using microprocessor based
direct digitally controlled algorithm.
.5 In cooling mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings:
Low, Med, High, Power Cool, and Auto.
.6 In heating mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings:
Low, Med, High, Power Heat, and Auto.
.7 The Auto fan setting shall adjust the fan speed to most
effectively achieve the set-point.
.8 Unit shall have factory installed motorized louver to provide
flow of air in up and down direction for uniform airflow.
.9 Unit shall have factory installed motorized guide vane to control
the direction of flow of air from side to side.
.5 Filter Assembly
.1 The return air inlet shall have a factory supplied primary
removable, washable filter.
.2 The unit shall be equipped with factory supplied secondary 3M
HAF Filter.
.3 The filter access shall be from the front of the unit.
.6 Coil Assembly
.1 Unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded on copper tubing.
.2 Unit shall have minimum of 2 rows of coils.
.3 Unit shall have a factory supplied condensate drain pan below
the coil.
.4 Unit shall be designed for gravity drain.
.5 Unit shall have a factory insulated drain hose to handle
condensate.
.6 Unit shall have provision of 45° flare refrigerant pipe
connections
23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 5 of 13

.7 The coil shall be factory pressure tested at a minimum of 551

psig.
.8 All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be
field insulated.
.7 Condensate Sensor Connection
.1 The unit shall include a factory installed condensate sensor
connection and condensate sensor.
.8 Microprocessor Control
.1 The unit shall have a factory installed microprocessor controller
capable of performing functions necessary to operate the system.
.2 The unit shall be able to communicate with the outdoor unit
using a field supplied minimum of 18 AWG, 4 conductor,
stranded, shielded or unshielded power/communication cable. If
shielded, it must be grounded to chassis at ODU only.
.3 Central control shall be available through an optional control
board for the outdoor unit.
.4 The unit shall be capable of setting Cooling Only operation.
.5 The unit controls shall operate the indoor unit using one of the
five operating modes:
.6 Auto changeover
.7 Heating
.8 Cooling
.9 Dry
.10 Fan only
.9 Electrical
.1 The unit electrical power shall be 208-230/1/60 (V/Ph/Hz)
.2 The unit shall be capable of operating within voltage limits of +/-
10% of the rated voltage.
.10 Controls
.1 The indoor unit shall be supplied with a wireless handheld
controller.
.2 A wired controller shall be provided as an additional accessory.

.2 Wall Mounted – Long Pipe

.1 General
.1 Unit shall be manufactured by LG.
.2 Unit shall be factory assembled, wired, piped and run tested.
.3 Unit shall be designed to be installed for indoor application.
.4 Unit shall be attached to an installation plate/bracket that secures
unit to the wall.
.5 The depth of the unit shall not exceed 10-1/2 inches.
.2 Casing/Panel
.1 Unit casing shall be manufactured of heavy duty Acrylonitrile
Butadiene Styrene (ABS) and High Impact Polystyrene (HIPS)
plastic.
.2 Unit case shall have a grace dark gray finish.
.3 The front surface of the unit shall have an architectural flat panel
with smoked charcoal mirror finish.
.3 Cabinet Assembly
.1 Unit shall have one supply air outlet and one return air inlet.
23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 6 of 13

.2 Unit shall be equipped with factory installed temperature

thermistors for
.3 Return air
.4 Refrigerant entering coil
.5 Refrigerant leaving coil
.6 Unit shall have a built-in control panel to communicate with the
outdoor unit.
.7 Unit shall have the following functions as standard
.8 Self-diagnostic function
.9 Auto restart function
.10 Auto changeover function
.11 Auto clean function
.12 Dehumidifying function
.13 Hot Start
.14 Sleep mode
.15 Unit shall be capable of refrigerant piping in 4 different
directions.
.16 Unit shall be capable of drain piping in 2 different directions.
.4 Fan Assembly
.1 The unit shall have a direct drive, cross flow fan made of high
strength ABS plastic.
.2 The fan motor is Brushless Digitally controlled (BLDC) with
permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings.
.3 The fan/motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration
attenuating rubber grommets.
.4 The fan speed shall be controlled using microprocessor based
direct digitally controlled algorithm.
.5 In cooling mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings:
Low, Med, High, Power Cool, and Auto.
.6 In heating mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings:
Low, Med, High, Power Heat, and Auto.
.7 The Auto fan setting shall adjust the fan speed to most
effectively achieve the set-point
.8 Unit shall have factory installed motorized louver to provide
flow of air in up and down direction for uniform airflow.
.9 Unit shall have factory installed motorized guide vane to control
the direction of flow of air from side to side.
.5 Filter Assembly
.1 The return air inlet shall have a factory supplied primary
removable, washable filter.
.2 The unit shall be equipped with factory supplied secondary 3M
HAF filter.
.3 The filter access shall be from the front of the unit.
.6 Coil Assembly
.1 Unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded on copper tubing.
.2 Unit shall have minimum of 2 rows of coils.
.3 Unit shall have a factory supplied condensate drain pan below
the coil.
.4 Unit shall be designed for gravity drain.
23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 7 of 13

.5 Unit shall have a factory insulated drain hose to handle

condensate.
.6 Unit shall have provision of 45° flare refrigerant pipe
connections.
.7 The coil shall be factory pressure tested at a minimum of 551
psig.
.8 All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be
field insulated.
.7 Condensate Sensor Connection
.1 The unit shall include a factory installed condensate sensor
connection and condensate sensor.
.8 Microprocessor Control
.1 The unit shall have a factory installed microprocessor controller
capable of performing functions necessary to operate the system.
.2 The unit shall be able to communicate with the outdoor unit
using a field supplied minimum of 18 AWG, 4 conductor,
stranded, shielded or unshielded power/communication cable. If
shielded, it must be grounded to chassis at ODU only.
.3 Central control shall be available through an optional control
board for the outdoor unit.
.4 The unit shall be capable of setting Cooling Only operation.
.5 The unit controls shall operate the indoor unit using one of the
five operating modes:
.6 Auto changeover
.7 Heating
.8 Cooling
.9 Dry
.10 Fan only
.9 Electrical
.1 The unit electrical power shall be 208-230/1/60 (V/Ph/Hz)
.2 The unit shall be capable of operating within voltage limits of +/-
10% of the rated voltage.
.10 Controls
.1 The indoor unit shall be supplied with a wireless handheld
controller.
.2 A wired controller shall be provided as an additional accessory.
.3 Ceiling Cassette – 4 Way
.1 General
.1 Unit shall be manufactured by LG.
.2 Unit shall be factory assembled, wired, piped and run tested.
.3 Unit shall be designed to be installed for indoor application.
.4 Unit shall be designed to mount recessed in the ceiling and has a
surface mounted concentric grille on the bottom of the unit.
.2 Casing/Panel
.1 Unit case shall be manufactured using galvanized steel plate.
.2 The unit shall be provided with an off-white Acrylonitrile
Butadiene Styrene (ABS) polymeric resin architectural grille.
<An optional black grille shall be available as an additional
accessory>

23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS

RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 8 of 13

.3 The grille shall have a tapered trim edge, and a hinged, spring
clip (screw-less) return air filter-grille door.
.4 Unit shall be provided with metal ears designed to support the
unit weight on four corners.
.5 Ears shall have pre-punched holes designed to accept field
supplied all thread rod hangers.
.3 Cabinet Assembly
.1 Unit shall have four supply air outlets and one return air inlet.
.2 The supply air outlet shall be through four-directional slot
diffusers each equipped with independent oscillating motorized
guide vane designed to change the airflow direction.
.3 The grille shall have a discharge range of motion of 40° in an
up/down direction with capabilities of locking the vanes.
.4 The unit shall have a guide vane algorithm designed to
sequentially change the predominant discharge airflow direction
in counterclockwise pattern.
.5 Guide vanes shall provide airflow in all directions.
.6 Unit shall be equipped with factory installed temperature
thermistors for
.7 Return air
.8 Refrigerant entering coil
.9 Refrigerant leaving coil
.10 Unit shall have a built-in control panel to communicate with the
outdoor unit.
.11 The unit shall have provision for fresh air ventilation through a
knock-out on the cabinet.
.12 The unit shall have factory designated branch duct knockouts on
the unit case.
.13 The branch duct knockouts shall have the ability to duct up to
half of the unit airflow capacity.
.14 The branch duct shall be ducted within the same room as the
indoor unit.
.15 Unit shall have the following functions as standard
.16 Self-diagnostic function
.17 Auto restart function
.18 Auto changeover function
.19 Dehumidifying function
.20 Forced operation
.21 Hot Start
.22 Sleep mode
.4 Fan Assembly
.1 The unit shall have a single direct driven turbo fan.
.2 The fan shall be made of high strength ABS HT-700 polymeric
resin.
.3 The fan motor is Brushless Digitally controlled (BLDC) with
permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings.
.4 The fan/motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration
attenuating rubber grommets.
.5 The fan speed shall be controlled using microprocessor based
direct digitally controlled algorithm.
23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 9 of 13

.6 In cooling mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings:
Low, Med, High, Power Cool, and Auto.
.7 In heating mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings:
Low, Med, High, and Auto.
.8 The Auto fan setting shall adjust the fan speed to most
effectively achieve the set-point.
.9 Unit shall have factory installed motorized louvers to provide
flow of air in up and down direction for uniform airflow.
.5 Filter Assembly
.1 The return air inlet shall have a factory supplied primary
removable, washable filter.
.2 The filter access shall be from the bottom of the unit.
.3 < If specified in schedule > The unit shall have provision for an
optional plasma filter.
.4 or
.5 <If specified in schedule> The unit shall have provision for an
optional auto-elevating grille kit designed to provide motorized
ascent/descent of the return air grille/pre filter assembly.
.1 The ascent/descent of the return air grille shall be up to a
distance of 14-3/4 feet allowing access to remove and
clean the filter.
.2 The auto-elevating grille shall have a control algorithm
to accept up, down and stop control commands from the
controller.
.3 The auto-elevating grille shall have a control to stop the
descent automatically if a contact is made with any
obstacle.
.6 Coil Assembly
.1 Unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded on copper tubing.
.2 Unit shall have minimum of 2 rows of coils.
.3 Unit shall have a factory supplied condensate drain pan below
the coil.
.4 Unit shall have an installed and wired condensate drain pump
capable of providing minimum 31-1/2 inch lift from bottom
surface of the unit.
.5 The drain pump shall have a safety switch to shut off the unit if
condensate rises too high in the drain pan.
.6 Unit shall have provision of 45° flare refrigerant pipe
connections.
.7 The coil shall be factory pressure tested at a minimum of 551
psig.
.8 All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be
field insulated.
.7 Microprocessor Control
.1 The unit shall have a factory installed microprocessor controller
capable of performing functions necessary to operate the system.

23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS

RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 10 of 13

.2 The unit shall be able to communicate with the outdoor unit

using a field supplied minimum of 18 AWG, 4 conductor,
stranded, shielded or unshielded power/communication cable. If
shielded, it must be grounded to chassis at ODU only.
.3 Central control shall be available through an optional control
board for the outdoor unit.
.4 The unit controls shall operate the indoor unit using one of the
five operating modes:
.5 Auto changeover
.6 Heating
.7 Cooling
.8 Dry
.9 Fan only
.8 Electrical
.1 The unit electrical power shall be 208-230/1/60 (V/Ph/Hz)
.2 The unit shall be capable of operating within voltage limits of +/-
10% of the rated voltage.
.9 Controls
.1 The indoor unit shall be supplied with a wireless handheld
controller.
.2 A wired controller shall be provided as an additional accessory.
.4 Ducted – High Static
.1 General
.1 Unit shall be manufactured by LG.
.2 Unit shall be factory assembled, wired, piped and run tested.
.3 Unit shall be designed to be installed for indoor application.
.4 Unit shall be designed to mount fully concealed above the
finished ceiling.
.5 Unit shall have opening to supply air from front horizontal and a
dedicated rear horizontal return.
.6 The supply air opening shall be flanged for field installed
ductwork that shall not exceed the external static pressure
limitation of the unit.
.2 Casing/Panel
.1 Unit case shall be manufactured using galvanized steel plate.
.2 The cold surfaces of the unit shall be covered internally with a
coated polystyrene insulating material.
.3 The cold surfaces of the unit shall be covered externally with
sheet insulation made of Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer
(M-Class) (EPDM).
.4 T The external insulation shall be plenum rated and conform to
ASTM Standard D-1418.
.5 Unit shall be provided with hanger brackets designed to support
the unit weight on four corners.
.6 Hanger brackets shall have pre-punched holes designed to accept
field supplied, all thread rod hangers.
.3 Cabinet Assembly
.1 Unit shall have supply air discharge outlets horizontal and a
return air inlet horizontal.

23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS

RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 11 of 13

.2 Unit shall be equipped with factory installed temperature

thermistors for
.3 Return air
.4 Refrigerant entering coil
.5 Refrigerant leaving coil
.6 Unit shall have a built-in control panel to communicate with the
outdoor unit.
.7 Unit shall have the following functions as standard
.8 Self-diagnostic function
.9 Auto restart function
.10 Auto changeover function
.11 Dehumidifying function
.12 Child lock function
.13 Dual thermistor control
.14 Hot Start
.15 Sleep mode
.16 External static pressure (ESP) control
.4 Fan Assembly
.1 The unit shall have two direct driven Sirocco (or equal) fans.
.2 The fan shall be made of high strength ABS GP-2200 polymeric
resin.
.3 The fans shall be mounted on a common shaft.
.4 The fan motor shall be Brushless Digitally controlled (BLDC)
with permanently lubricated and sealed ball bearings.
.5 The fan/motor assembly shall be mounted on vibration
attenuating rubber grommets.
.6 The fan speed shall be controlled using microprocessor based
direct digitally controlled algorithm.
.7 In cooling mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings:
Low, Med, High, and Auto.
.8 In heating mode, the indoor fan shall have the following settings:
Low, Med, High, and Auto.
.9 The Auto fan setting shall adjust the fan speed to most
effectively achieve the set-point.
.5 Filter Assembly
.1 The return air inlet shall have a factory supplied removable,
washable filter.
.2 The filter access shall be from the rear of the unit.
.3 < If specified in schedule > Return filter box with high-efficiency
filter shall be field provided and installed not to exceed external
static pressure limitation of the high static ducted indoor unit.
.4 < If specified in schedule > The unit shall have provision to mate
directly with high efficiency filter box to accommodate up to
field provided 1” or 2”MERV rated filter modules.
.5 < If specified in schedule > Supplied Air cleaner shall be
compatible with the capability of ducted unit.
.6 Coil Assembly
.1 Unit shall have a factory built coil comprised of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded on copper tubing.
.2 Unit shall have minimum of 3 rows of coils.
23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 12 of 13

.3 Unit shall have a factory supplied condensate drain pan below

the coil.
.4 Unit shall have an installed and wired condensate drain pump
capable of providing minimum 27-9/16 inch lift from bottom
surface of the unit.
.5 The drain pump shall have a safety switch to shut off the unit if
condensate rises too high in the drain pan.
.6 Unit shall have provision of 45° flare refrigerant pipe
connections.
.7 The coil shall be factory pressure tested at a minimum of 551
psig.
.8 All refrigerant piping from outdoor unit to indoor unit shall be
field insulated.
.7 Microprocessor Control
.1 The unit shall have a factory installed microprocessor controller
capable of performing functions necessary to operate the system.
.2 The unit shall be able to communicate with the outdoor unit
using a field supplied minimum of 18 AWG, 4 conductor,
stranded, shielded or unshielded power/communication cable. If
shielded, it must be grounded to chassis at ODU only.
.3 Central control shall be available through an optional control
board for the outdoor unit.
.4 The unit controls shall operate the indoor unit using one of the
five operating modes:
.5 Auto changeover
.6 Heating
.7 Cooling
.8 Dry
.9 Fan only
.8 Electrical
.1 The unit electrical power shall be 208-230/1/60 (V/Ph/Hz)
.2 The unit shall be capable of operating within voltage limits of +/-
10% of the rated voltage.
.9 Controls
.1 The indoor unit shall be supplied with a wired controller.

2.3 ALTERNATIVE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Approved equals to be reviewed during the tender period.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s requirements, shop drawings, and
contract documents.
.2 Adjust and level condensing unit in alignment on supports.
.3 Adjust and level fan coil unit on wall or in ceiling, as applicable.
23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
RM of Headingley Section 23 63 12
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS
Page 13 of 13

.4 Condensing unit disconnect shall be provided and installed by Electrical Contractor.

.5 Wiring between condensing unit and fan coil shall be installed by Electrical Contractor.
.6 Coordinate electrical installation with electrical contractor.
.7 Coordinate controls installation with control contractor.
.8 Drain piping to be run through a trap to nearby sink, floor drain, or through the exterior
wall with a turndown elbow c/w bug screen. Seal penetrations though walls.

3.2 START-UP
.1 Install proper charge of refrigerant and oil.
.2 Provide testing and starting of machine, and instruct the Owner in its proper operation
and maintenance.

3.3 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT AND FAN COIL SCHEDULE

.1 See Mechanical Drawings for Condensing Unit Schedule.

END OF SECTION

23 63 12.docx Stantec AIR COOLED SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP UNITS

RM of Headingley Section 23 82 39
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 UNIT HEATERS AND OUTDOOR DUCT FURNACES
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 SCOPE

.1 Gas-Fired Unit Heaters.

.2 Related accessories and specialties.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Terminal heat transfer units shall be product of manufacturer regularly engaged in

production of such units who issues complete catalogue date on such products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

.1 Comply with the requirements of Section 01 33 23, Shop Drawings, Product Data and
Submittals.

1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

.1 Entire Specification – All areas of common work.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL

.1 See Mechanical Drawings for Unit Heater Schedule.

2.2 INDOOR GAS-FIRED UNIT HEATERS

.1 Up to 83% Thermal Efficiency

.2 Redundant Single Stage Gas Valve

.3 120/24V Control Transformer

.4 115/1/60 Fan Motor with Internal Overload Protection

.5 Power Vented

.6 Direct Spark Ignition

.7 20GA Baked Enamel Cabinet

.8 10 Year Heat Exchanger Warranty

.9 OSHA Fan Guard

.10 Right Hand Control Access (Field Convertible to Left Hand)

23 82 39.docx Stantec UNIT HEATERS AND OUTDOOR DUCT FURNACES

RM of Headingley Section 23 82 39
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 UNIT HEATERS AND OUTDOOR DUCT FURNACES
Page 2 of 3

.11 High Limit Switch

.12 Air Pressure Switch

.13 Natural Gas

.14 321 Stainless Steel Burner Box

.15 409 Stainless Steel Heat Exchanger

.16 Two Stage Gas Control

.17 Totally Enclosed Motors

.18 Stainless Steel Flue Collector

.19 Two Stage Mercury Free Thermostats

.20 24V SPST Relay

.21 Concentric Vent Kits

.22 Condensate pump

.23 Fan: Resiliently isolated axial fan. The totally enclosed motor and fan assembly be
resiliently mounted to the cabinet to reduce vibration and noise. The cabinet shall be
equipped with a full safety fan guard with no more than ½’ grill spacing.

.24 Burner: Unit heaters shall incorporate a single, one piece burner assembly with a single
orifice. The burner shall have a continuous wound close pressed stainless steel ribbon
separating the flame from the burner interior. Units shall have a single venture tube and
orifice supplying fuel to a one-piece burner housing. Each heat exchanger cell shall use
balanced draft induction to maintain optimum flame control. Unit shall include a single-
stage gas valve; direct spark multi-try ignition with electronic flame supervision with
timed lockout integrally controlled via a printed circuit control board.

.25 Controls: All controls shall be enclosed in the unit housing to protect them from
accidental damage that could be caused by factors in the building that would adversely
affect external controls. Units shall be equipped with a safety limit switch. Unit shall be
controlled by a wall mounted NEMA 4X thermostat. Thermostat shall be supplied by the
manufacturer.

.26 Unit heaters shall be CSA certified.

.27 Acceptable Product: Sterling SF or approved equal.

2.3 OUTDOOR GAS-FIRED DUCT HEATERS

.1 CSA Approved

23 82 39.docx Stantec UNIT HEATERS AND OUTDOOR DUCT FURNACES

RM of Headingley Section 23 82 39
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB # 1758 UNIT HEATERS AND OUTDOOR DUCT FURNACES
Page 3 of 3

.2 Up to 80% Thermal Efficiency

.3 Intermittent pilot ignition system

.4 100% pilot burner shut off

.5 Natural gas with gas valves capable of a maximum pressure of 0.5 psi (14 inches water
column)

.6 Controls are located inside the compartment on the access side of the unit. Electronic
Modulation w/External 0-10 VDC Input

.7 Electronic modulating burner: the unit will first fire at 100% of full fire and modulate
down to 40% of full fire.

.8 Weatherproof enclosure setup for flanged duct connections

.9 Double wall construction

.10 ETL approved for a 20° to 90°F temperature rise

.11 Power vented

.12 321 Stainless Steel package

.13 High Temperature rise

.14 Natural Gas fired

.15 Sized per the schedule

.16 Acceptable product: Sterling Model RT furnace

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Follow manufacturer’s installation recommendations for shop fabricated components.

.2 Install vent cap for all ceiling suspended unit heaters.

.3 Provide gas cock and gas pressure regulator for each unit heater supply piping.

.4 Ductwork connected to duct furnaces should have removable access panels on both the
upstream and downstream sides of the unit. The covers of the openings should be
attached in a manner that prevents leaks.

END OF SECTION

23 82 39.docx Stantec UNIT HEATERS AND OUTDOOR DUCT FURNACES

DIVISION 25

INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
RM of Headingley Section 25 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS –
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Page 1 of 8

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All Sections of all Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents inclusive form
part of the Contract Documents.
.4 All Control system drawings shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the
province having jurisdiction in the location of the installation.

1.2 DESCRIPTION
.1 This section specifies the General Provisions for the supply, delivery, installation,
calibration and commissioning of the process control and instrumentation system.
.2 The Contractor shall apply suitable expertise to bid and provide a complete and fully
operating automation system. Include facilities and services to meet the requirements
described or implied herein. Include full integration of all components of the work.
.3 The Contractor shall allow for components and wiring necessary to interface systems.
.4 The Contractor shall finalize details of design.
.5 The work to be done shall include the provision of all labour, materials, tools and
equipment as well as the application of a competent knowledge of construction, whether
or not directly specified or shown on the plans, required for the installation testing and
placing into service the complete control and instrumentation system, except when it is
specifically mentioned that certain materials and/or labour are not part of the contract.
.6 These specifications shall apply to and govern all trades doing control and
instrumentation work and shall be read in conjunction with and form a part of the general
specifications of the project.
.7 The Control and Instrumentation work includes but is not limited to the following:
.1 Control panels.
.2 Provide process and buildings automation including without limitation the
functionality described or implied in the Process Control Narrative, HVAC
sequences of operation, process mechanical specifications and drawings, building
mechanical specifications and drawings, and electrical and automation
specifications and drawings.
.3 Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) system.
.4 PLC system to be programmed to provide interfaces and interlocks with Vendor
supplied PLCs and equipment. System integrator shall be responsible for all
programming, commissioning and hardware required to interface to vendor
equipment.
.5 Primary elements for the measurement of flow, level, pressure, temperature, etc.

25 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
RM of Headingley Section 25 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS –
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Page 2 of 8

.6 Indicators and annunciators.

.7 Uninterruptible power supplies (UPS).
.8 Control wiring, cable tray and conduit.
.9 Communication systems.
.10 SCADA system package.
.11 Spare Parts & Manuals.
.8 The Integrator shall coordinate with Contractors and equipment vendors to determine the
functionality, wiring, and sequences for all equipment, and any required hardware or
programming to support any equipment. Carry out this exercise at the shop drawing
stage of the project. Assist other trades to make their shop drawings complete,
coordinated, and suitable for a proper functional implementation of the works, prior to
submission of shop drawings. Incorporate results from this coordination into Integrator’s
own shop drawings, prior to submission. Shop drawings from the various trades are to be
coordinated, in agreement, and whole. This coordination is to cover all works, including
but not limited to,
.1 Instrumentation.
.2 Automation.
.3 Field devices.
.4 Field equipment.
.5 Process equipment.
.6 Process packages.
.7 Packaged equipment.
.8 Control panels.
.9 HVAC.
.9 The P&ID, Electrical, and Process Drawings and these Specifications are complementary
to each other and each form a part of the contract. In the event of discrepancies between
Drawings and Specifications, the more restrictive conditions of the two shall apply,
unless a written clarification is obtained from the Consultant.
.10 Coordinate all work with other trades on the job, such that a complete functioning system
can be supplied as shown on the Drawings and Specifications for this project, and there is
no disruption to the other trades on the project.

1.3 RELATED WORK

.1 Review all specifications and include all works indicated or implied.
.2 Review drawings of all disciplines and include all works indicated or implied.
.3 General Requirements - Division 01
.4 Openings - Division 08 (review for any operators or sensors for doors, windows, etc.)
.5 Finishes - Division 09
.6 Water Treatment Equipment - Division 46
.7 Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning - Division 23
.8 Electrical - Division 26
25 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
RM of Headingley Section 25 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS –
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Page 3 of 8

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Information packages submitted for review and/or approval shall include:
.1 An index page.
.2 Have component items identified with the Specification Section and equipment
tag from the equipment and/or instrument list.
.3 Where manufacturers’ information, catalog, cut-sheet, or brochure information is
used, which list more than one style or member of a family or options, the actual
component or item being supplied shall be clearly highlighted.
.2 Submit bid pricing and approximate bid pricing breakdown on request by Consultant.
Provide total pricing, with a reasonable level of breakdown detail. Each major item and
its associated works shall be a line item (e.g., MCC; standby generator plus transfer
switch and other associated hardware; distribution equipment package of panels and
transformers; lighting; PLC control panel; SCADA station; PLC software; SCADA
software; PLC programming; SCADA programming; instrumentation; security system;
CCTV system; cable tray; significant individual wiring runs; wiring, where not
included with other line items; trenching and backfill / directional drilling; etc., plus a
line item for other works). Exact breakdown of items can be as is convenient to the
Contractor, but a reasonable level of detail is to be included. Identify material costs,
labour costs, and totals, per line item. Individual line item costs do not have to be exact
but typically are to be within +/- 15% of the amounts actually bid. If costs do not directly
reconcile with the Progress Payment line items provide clarifying commentary.

1.5 EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURERS

.1 All equipment shall be manufactured by experienced manufacturers who can demonstrate
in-use records for all equipment offered.
.2 Requests for approval of alternative suppliers shall be submitted to the Engineer. Refer
to Division 01 - Submittals.
.3 Equipment of a given nature (e.g., instrumentation; distribution; automation; lighting;
etc.) shall be supplied by a single manufacturer and a single vendor, to an extent
reasonably practicable. This is to simplify training, as well as servicing, maintenance,
and spare parts, and also for a consistent visual appearance.

1.6 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES

.1 The work shall comply with the requirements of the current edition of the Electrical
Code, and all local provincial and municipal rules, laws and ordinances pertaining to the
work.
.2 Obtain the required construction permits, arrange for inspections and supply the Engineer
with approval certificates pertaining thereto including a certificate of final inspection.

1.7 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Unless otherwise specified, equipment shall conform to appropriate standards and
recommendations of:
.1 The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, hereinafter referred to as ASME
Standards.
.2 The Instrument Society of America, hereinafter referred to as ISA.
25 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
RM of Headingley Section 25 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS –
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Page 4 of 8

.3 The Canadian Standards Association, hereinafter referred to as CSA.

.2 All equipment shall be metric - SI Standard.

1.8 MANUALS
.1 Refer to Division 01, General Requirements, for requirements for Operation and
Maintenance Manuals.
.2 Provide operating, maintenance brochures and electrical wiring for all equipment and
arrange for their insertion into the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The information
shall include all applicable, descriptive and technical data, maintenance and operating
procedures, wiring diagrams, spare parts lists, service representatives, and suppliers for
replacement parts. The information shall be neatly and orderly assembled in binders.
.3 Provide training manual specific to the facility, including Well Pump #3 and Concentrate
Pump Station. Training manual to contain screen captures of all SCADA screens and
pop-ups, along with text describing the system operation and user interface as it relates to
each screen.
.4 Requirements for operation and maintenance of process control and instrumentation
equipment shall be as specified in various clauses of Division 25 or Electrical Drawings.

1.9 COORDINATION OF WORK

.1 Cooperate and coordinate with other trades on the project.
.2 Make suitable arrangements with other trades to make provision for the control and
instrumentation work and be responsible for the assurance that such provisions are
satisfactory for the control and instrumentation work.
.3 Check drawings and specifications of other trades for coordination with the control and
instrumentation trade. If any conflicts are found, contact Engineer with a description of
issues and any proposed solutions before proceeding.

1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Refer to Division 01, General Requirements.
.2 Provide network drawings, layout drawings of instrument and control panels, schematic
diagrams and detailed loop drawings of all devices listed in the instrumentation data
sheets and any equipment connected to the control and SCADA systems. The Contract
Administrator review of shop drawings shall be for general arrangement only and shall
not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors, proper fitting, construction of the
work, and furnishing of materials.
.3 Control drawings shall be updated as the work progresses and shall be submitted to the
Engineer as Drawings of Record when the work is completed.
.4 All control drawings, panel layout drawings, and schematic drawings, and PLC programs
shall be sealed by a Professional Engineer in good standing with, and registered with, the
provincial Professional Engineering Association in the jurisdiction in which the site work
is to be performed.
.5 Submit shop drawings for the following items:
.1 Control Panels

25 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
RM of Headingley Section 25 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS –
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Page 5 of 8

.2 Panel layout drawings

.3 Loop drawings for all items connected to the control system
.4 Loop drawings to indicate instrument ranges and settings
.5 Loop Drawings to have table for VFD Input parameter settings and ramp times
where applicable
.6 Loop Drawings to have table for motor data as programmed into intelligent
starter/VFD
.7 Individual loop drawings required for each loop – typical loop drawings that
apply to multiple devices will not be permitted.
.8 Panel wiring schematics and interconnection drawings
.9 Field instruments
.10 Power supplies
.11 PLC and I/O enclosures
.12 PLC and I/O modules
.13 PLC terminals
.14 Operator Work Stations
.15 Control System Hierarchy
.16 Network Drawings
.17 Interconnection drawings, showing system equipment and field device
connections
.18 PLC software documentation, which shall include as a minimum:
.1 I/O listing entailing a complete list of all system addresses, both used and
spare, with a service description for each including mnemonics.
.2 PLC Program Printout, complete with description headings, comments
for each rung or function block, and mnemonics for each element.
.3 Data table listing, identifying all preset values and their service.
.4 Written description of the program(s).

1.11 DRAWINGS OF RECORD

.1 Refer to Division 01, General Requirements.
.2 Submit all control drawings and PLC programs for the instrumentation system.

1.12 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION

.1 As work progresses, record on one (1) set of contract drawings, any change to conduit or
cable tray layout as well as any approved changes and deviations from the original
contract and/or working drawings recorded in red. At completion of work, submit to the
Contract Administrator one clean mark-up set. Refer to section 26 05 00 for details.
.2 In addition to the as-built contract drawings, submit as-built documentation for inclusion
in the Maintenance Manuals as outlined in clause 1.8 above.
.3 Provide as-built PLC/SCADA and/or HMI programming hard copy and back-ups (2
copies) on compatible CD Rom to the Engineer.
.4 All software development packages and manufacturer’s development manuals shall be
turned over to the Engineer.
25 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
RM of Headingley Section 25 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS –
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Page 6 of 8

.5 No final contract payment shall be made until all as-built documentation has been
accepted by the Engineer.

1.13 WARRANTY
.1 Warranty system assembly, installation, hardware, software, and communications
operations for all parts and labour for a period of one year from date of project total
performance.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 All materials shall be new and the best of their respective kind.
.2 All materials shall bear the approval of the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) or
cUL unless otherwise noted.
.3 All materials shall be suitable for full operation within, unless otherwise noted:
.1 Normal areas: NEMA 12 as indicated,
.2 Category 1 only areas: NEMA 4 as indicated,
.3 Category 2 areas: NEMA 4X as indicated.
.4 See subsequent clauses for specific equipment and instrument specifications.

2.2 POWER SUPPLY

.1 Provide all necessary power supplies for controls and instruments.
.2 Power wiring to field devices shall be minimum #14 AWG.

2.3 CONTROL WIRING

.1 Unless specified otherwise, all conductors for control wiring inside the control panel shall
be copper with TEW 105, X-link insulation, insulation voltage to be suitable for the
highest voltage to which the conductors may be exposed.
.2 Colours:
.1 Neutral conductors shall be white
.2 Grounding conductors shall be green
.3 DC conductors shall be blue
.4 AC conductors shall be red.
.3 Control wiring for digital functions shall be 16 AWG ACIC Instrumentation Cables
minimum with 600 Volt insulation.
.4 Control wiring for analog functions shall be 16 AWG ACIC Instrumentation Cables
minimum with 600 Volts insulation, individual and overall twisted and shielded, 2 or 3
wire to match analog function hardware.
.5 Multi-Conductor Cables are preferred when it applicable
.6 Where dimensional details are required, work with the applicable structural and
architectural drawings.
25 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
RM of Headingley Section 25 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS –
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Page 7 of 8

.7 The Contractor is responsible for correcting any work completed contrary to the intent of
the drawings and specification and shall bear all costs for correcting same.

2.4 CONDUIT, CABLE TRAY, WIRING AND CABLE

.1 Supply and install all conduit, cable tray, wiring, control and instrumentation cables for
the control, instrumentation, and low line voltage control for building services.
.2 Conduit, cable tray, and wiring for power, lighting, miscellaneous electrical systems,
power supplies to control instrumentation fed from panel boards, and building service
panels including other components requiring line voltage power supply shall be supplied
and installed as specified in Division 26 - Electrical.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install and interconnect all process control system equipment and components as
indicated.
.2 Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in a
manner that will ensure satisfactory operation upon completion.
.3 Provide all labour and all necessary equipment including timbers, scaffolding, tools and
rigging materials for installation of the equipment.
.4 Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all mechanical, electrical and other
works for the equipment being installed.
.5 Installation shall meet the minimum standards set forth by Standards and Practices for
Instrumentation, Tenth Edition - 1989.
.6 Use trained personnel to install systems and controls as per approved shop drawings and
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.7 Follow building lines with all piping and electrical wiring runs. Utilize proper separation
and wiring techniques.
.8 The in-line mechanical installation of certain items specified to be supplied in this section
are specified to be installed in Division 46 – Water & Wastewater Equipment.

3.2 TESTING
.1 Thoroughly test all control equipment, components, and systems for proper operation and
report in writing to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
.2 Tests shall include:
.1 Complete operational test including interlocks, functions, features, options, etc.,
for all instrumentation, PLC, and computer system control operations.
.2 Operation of alarm initiating devices.
.3 Calibration of all instruments.
.3 Supply all necessary test equipment and personnel to completely test the entire
instrumentation and process control system.

25 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
RM of Headingley Section 25 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS –
INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
Page 8 of 8

3.3 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING

.1 Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall be responsible for testing to
determine correct system operation and sequences as intended in the Contract
Documents. Process Instruments such as flow, level, pressure transmitters, etc., shall be
checked for operation prior to process start-up, by manipulating operating controls like
set points, auto-manual selectors, etc. Status and alarm contacts to be checked by
manipulation or jumpering at the sensing element.
.2 Check sheets for all instrumentation and PLC I/O to be filled out during the
commissioning process and submitted to the Engineer. See Section 250004 for
templates.
.3 Results of tests are to be logged by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer. Any
apparent defects shall be reported and corrected.
.4 When preliminary checks have been completed and process equipment is operating or
ready to operate, individual systems shall be calibrated in accordance with the latest ISA
recommendation.
.5 After calibration and upon submittal of all PLC I/O and instrumentation check sheets the
system shall be placed in operation in conjunction with the Engineer and/or the Owner's
designated operating personnel.
.6 Refer to Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements

3.4 SPARE PARTS

.1 The Contractor shall provide the following spare parts:
.1 Two (2) plug-in control relays of each type and coil-voltage used complete with
base.
.2 Two (2) plug-in time delay relays of each type and coil-voltage used complete
with base.
.3 One (1) package of twenty fuses of each type and ampacity used.
.4 Five (5) indicating lights of each type, voltage, and colour used.
.5 One (1) push button assembly including contact blocks of each type used.
.6 One (1) selector switch assembly including contact blocks of each type used.

END OF SECTION

25 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
RM of Headingley Section 25 14 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS
Page 1 of 10

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read and fully
adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their effect
upon the work of this Section.
.3 All Sections of all Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents inclusive form part of the
Contract Documents

1.2 SCOPE
.1 This section covers the supply and installation of all field located motor control stations and
control panels.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 CSA C22.2 No. 14-13 Industrial Control Equipment

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 25 05 00 and include schematic, wiring
diagrams, and mounting information.
.2 Provide preventive maintenance program for the control panels and communication equipment

Part 2 Products

2.1 ENCLOSURES
.1 All enclosures and devices shall be rated NEMA 12 gasketed for ordinary environments,
NEMA 3R for outdoor environments, NEMA 4X for wet and corrosive environments, and Zone 2
for hazardous locations.

2.2 EMERGENCY STOP STATIONS

.1 Supply, install, and wire Emergency Stop pendant stations as indicated.
.2 Pendants shall be wall wall-mounted or pedestal mounted as indicated.
.3 Where pendants are to be pedestal mounted, install stainless steel pedestals and mount the
pendants at heights suitable for visibility and operator actuation.
.4 Switch assemblies shall have the following features:
.1 Red, mushroom-head pushbutton.
.2 30.5mm size.
.3 NEMA Type 4/13
.4 Maintained in both positions.
.5 Pull-to-reset

25 14 23.docx Stantec FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 25 14 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS
Page 2 of 10

.6 At least 1 set of Normally Closed contacts, opening when the button is pressed.
.7 Labeled “Emergency Stop” using a lamacoid with black lettering on yellow
background, or white lettering on red background.
.8 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Allen-Bradley, Telemecanique, Siemens Class 52 or
approved equal.

2.3 PUSHBUTTONS
.1 Heavy duty oiltight, operator flush, black, with 1-NO and 1-NC contacts rated at 10 A, 120Vac,
labels as indicated. Stop pushbuttons coloured red, provision for padlocking in depressed
position.
.2 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Allen-Bradley, Telemecanique, Siemens Class 52.

2.4 INDICATING LIGHTS

.1 Heavy duty Oiltight, push to test LED type, lens colour as indicated, supply voltage: as required,
labels as indicated.
.2 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Allen-Bradley, Telemecanique, Siemens Class 52.

2.5 SELECTOR SWITCHES

.1 Number of positions as required, labelled as indicated, heavy duty oiltight, operators as indicated,
contact arrangement as indicated, rated 120Vac, 10 A.
.2 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Allen-Bradley, Telemecanique, Siemens Class 52.

2.6 CONTROL RELAYS

.1 Number of poles as required, must be double throw type (Form C).
.2 Removable relay cube from base
.3 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Allen-Bradley, Omron, Carlo Gavazzi, Siemens Sirius

2.7 PANEL MOUNTED ALARMS

.1 Supply panel mounted alarms, as indicated, with the following features:
.1 NEMA 4X.
.2 60 to 80 dBa (at 2 ft.).
.3 Continuous tone.
.4 24Vdc supply.
.5 CSA, cUL, or ETL certified.
.2 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Sonalert SC628 series, or approved equal.

2.8 GENERAL ALARM BEACONS

.1 Supply beacons for general alarm indication, as indicated, with the following features:
.1 NEMA 3R, 4, or 4X
.2 Red Lens.
.3 LED light.

25 14 23.docx Stantec FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 25 14 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS
Page 3 of 10

.4 Rotating reflector.
.5 120Vac supply.
.6 CSA, cUL, or ETL certified.
.2 Supply panel, wall, or conduit mounting accessories to suit installation as indicated.
.3 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Edwards 52R-N5-40WH, or approved equal.

2.9 GENERAL ALARM BUZZERS

.1 Supply beacons for general alarm indication, as indicated, with the following features:
.1 NEMA 3R, 4, or 4X
.2 120Vac supply.
.3 Wall mount.
.4 Sustained tone.
.5 110 dBa at 1 metre.
.6 External volume adjustment, without removal of the cover and without
unmounting the unit.
.2 Supply panel, wall, or conduit mounting accessories to suit installation as indicated.
.3 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Federal Signal 350WB-120, or approved equal.

2.10 DC POWER SUPPLIES

.1 Where DC power sources are required, each shall be a system comprised of:
.1 Two identical supplies.
.2 Each supply shall be able to supply at least 150% of the connected load.
.3 Paralleling rated.
.4 Each supply connected to one input of a redundancy module.
.5 Redundancy module to have at least one status output to be monitored by the
SCADA system. Output shall indicate the status of the redundancy.
.6 Power supplies and redundancy modules all to be from the same manufacturer,
and from the same product family from that manufacturer.
.2 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Weidmuller PRO-Top family, Phoenix Contact TRIO family, Allen-
Bradley or Siemens Sitop.

2.11 TERMINALS
.1 Provide tension clamp terminals.
.1 Number indicated plus 20% spare
.2 Terminals to be rated for connected load.
.3 Fused Terminals c/w light indicator
.4 Double stack terminals will not be permitted unless written approval is obtained from the
Engineer.
.5 Acceptable manufacturer(s):

25 14 23.docx Stantec FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 25 14 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS
Page 4 of 10

.1 Weidmuller - Z tension clamp.

.2 Phoenix Contact - CLIPLINE ST spring-cage.

2.12 BLUE STROBE BEACONS

.1 Provide blue strobe beacons as indicated, with the following features:
.1 Xenon light source.
.2 Minimum 175,000 candela peak output.
.3 120Vac supply.
.4 Shatter resistant lens.
.5 NEMA 4X enclosure.
.6 Operating temperature range: -10°C to 45°C
.7 Can be panel, conduit, and wall mounted.
.2 Supply panel, wall, or conduit mounting accessories to suit installation as indicated.
.3 Acceptable manufacturer(s):
.1 Edwards 125 Class.
.2 Or approved equal.

2.13 PANEL INTERIOR LIGHT

.1 120Vac supply.
.2 Comes with fluorescent or LED light source.
.3 Equipped with a diffuser to protect the light source.
.4 Switch: Integral or door-actuated.
.5 Width: Spans 75% or more of the width of the roof of the panel.
.6 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Hammond, Hoffman, or approved equal.

2.14 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSOR – CONTROL POWER

.1 UL1449 2nd Edition rated using metal oxide varisters.
.2 120 V, 15 A, 2 wire grounded input.
.3 MCOV: 150 V.
.4 Surge Current: 45 kA per phase.
.5 3 modes of protection.
.6 Filtering Bandwidth: 10 kHz to 100 MHz.
.7 Noise Attenuation: Normal Mode 75 dB at 100 kHz, Common mode 50 dB at 5 Mhz.
.8 Let Through voltage: 6 V A3 ringwave, 9.6 V B3 Ringwave, 70 V, B3/C1 impulse.
.9 Manufacturer: Cutler Hammer Aegis, Siemens TPS or approved equal in accordance with B7.

2.15 HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE

.1 Provide 15” human machine interface (HMI), with the following features:

25 14 23.docx Stantec FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 25 14 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS
Page 5 of 10

.1 NEMA 4X / IP66 Front Panel

.2 24V DC Operation
.3 Resistive Analog Touchscreen and Keys
.4 15” TFT Active Matrix 32K Color XGA 1024 X 768 Pixel LCD
.5 USB Host Port to Move Files To and From CompactFlash Card Without a PC
.6 RS-422/485 Serial Port (Isolated)
.7 10/100-Base-TX Ethernet Port
.8 c/w compact flash card
.9 2 10/100 Base TX Ethernet ports
.10 Remote Web Access and Control Facility
.2 Acceptable programmers will be the manufacturer of the Panel Equipment (listed below).
Graphics shall use ‘high performance hmi’ graphic programming techniques (shades of grey, etc).
.3 HMI to be programmed to support local control of primary building process functions, including
the following:
.1 Equipment mode (e.g. Hand, Off, Auto, Remote, etc.).
.2 Equipment status (Running, Fault, etc.)
.3 Equipment manual control.
.4 Duty assignments for redundant equipment.
.5 Instrument readings in engineering units.
.6 Process control setpoints and modes.
.7 PID controller setpoint, control variable, and process variable (read-only).
.8 Equipment and plant operating limits, adjacent to real time variables and
readings.
.9 Adjustable alarm setpoints.
.10 Overall process screen.
.11 Individual process, equipment, and building system detail screens.
.12 Screen titles.
.13 Screen navigation buttons.
.14 Date and time.
.15 Currently logged-in user.
.16 Mathematical constants page.
.17 Communication heartbeat and status.
.18 HMI screens of supplied packages and HVAC System
.19 Trends
.4 Acceptable Manufacturer: A-B PanelView Plus 7, Shnider Electric Harmony GTO, Siemens Soft
Comfort Panels, or approved equal.

2.16 AUTOMATIC VOICE DIALER

.1 Provide cellular base dialer. System Features:
.1 Voice and text capabilities.

25 14 23.docx Stantec FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 25 14 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS
Page 6 of 10

.2 Telephone base remote dialer

.3 8 Programmable inputs
.4 Can dial-out up to 4 Group directories each with as many as 20 telephone
numbers. Each telephone number is individually allocated for either voice or
page.
.5 Dial-out priority
.6 The called party can terminate a received alarm activation message
acknowledgment
.2 Acceptable Manufacturer: Barnett Engineering ProTalk Cv3

2.17 CELL PHONE BOOSTER

.1 Provide cell phone booster. Booster shall improve cell service in area up to 8000 sq ft with
following features
.1 Uplink Frequency Range (MHz):698-716 / 776-787 / 824-849 / 1850-1915 /
1710-1755 (G Block Included)
.2 Downlink Frequency Range (MHz):728-746 / 746-757 / 869-894 / 1930-1995 /
2110-2155 (G Block Included)
.3 Supported Standards: CDMA, WCDMA, GSM, EDGE, HSPA+, EVDO, LTE
and all cellular standards
.4 Impedance:50 Ohm
.5 Maximum Gain:72 dB
.6 Maximum Uplink Power:26 dBm
.7 Maximum Downlink Power:8 dBm
.8 Noise Figure:8 dB
.9 VSWR: ≤2.0
.10 AC Power Transmitter: Input AC 110 V, 60 Hz / Output DC 5-15 V
.11 Maximum Output Power:1 Watt EIRP
.12 Outside Cable: SC-400 (50 ft) – Length confirm on site
.13 Inside Cable: SC-240 (20 ft) – Length confirm on site
.14 RF Connectors: N-Female (both ends)
.15 Power Consumption: <15W
.16 Operation Temperature: -4º to +158º F
.17 4G & 5G phone compatible
.2 Acceptable manufacturer(s): SureCall SC-FusionPro or approved equal

2.18 INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET SWITCHES

.1 General
.1 Provide Industrial Ethernet switches for network communications.
.2 The copper ports shall be 8P8C-style.
.3 The fiber ports, where indicated, shall:
.1 Be ST-style

25 14 23.docx Stantec FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 25 14 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS
Page 7 of 10

.2 Employ a single RX and a single TX transmission structure

.4 The Ethernet switches shall support at least 100BASE-TX data rates on all ports.
.5 Ethernet switches to have at least sufficient ports to connect all communicating
equipment indicated, plus one programming access port, plus 20% spare ports.
.6 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Red lion, Allen-Bradley, Weidmuller, Phoenix
Contact, Siemens Scalence or approved equal.

2.19 REMOTE ACCESS / FIREWALL

.1 Provide one Remote Access Modem as indicated on the drawings and c/w the following:
.1 System Performance - Enterprise Traffic Mix
.1 IPS Throughput -1 Gbps
.2 NGFW Throughput - 800 Mbps
.3 Threat Protection Throughput 600 Mbps
.2 Wireless Interface - Single Radio (2.4GHz/5GHz) 802.11
.3 System Performance and Capacity
.1 IPv4 Firewall Throughput (1518/512/64 byte, UDP) - 5 / 5 / 5 Gbps
.2 Firewall Latency (64 byte, UDP) - 2.97 μs
.3 Firewall Throughput (Packet per Second) - 7.5 Mpps
.4 Concurrent Sessions (TCP) 700 000
.5 New Sessions/Second (TCP) 35 000
.6 Firewall Policies - 2000
.7 IPsec VPN Throughput (512 byte)- 4.4 Gbps
.8 Gateway-to-Gateway IPsec VPN Tunnels - 200
.9 Client-to-Gateway IPsec VPN Tunnels - 250
.10 SSL-VPN Throughput - 490 Mbps
.11 Concurrent SSL-VPN Users -200
.4 Power Required Powered by DC Power Adapter,100–240V AC, 50/60 Hz
.5 Operating Temperature: 0°C to 40°C
.6 Compliance: cUL
.2 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Fortinet FortiWiIfi-40F (Manufacturer Part# FWF-40F )

2.20 GROUNDING
.1 Provided grounding lug, suitable for termination of 2/0 to 4/0 copper grounding cable.
.2 Separate grounding bars are to be provided for power grounds and instrument control system
grounds (signal cable grounding, etc.).

2.21 GENERAL
.1 Supply the control panels in accordance with the general arrangement and dimensions indicated
on the appropriate drawings. Panels must be complete with all instruments, meters, switches,
indication lights, relays, etc., as specified herein or as indicated.

25 14 23.docx Stantec FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 25 14 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS
Page 8 of 10

.2 Provide removable lamacoid nameplates having letters not smaller than 6 mm to identify
equipment.

2.22 CONSTRUCTION
.1 NEMA construction standards, to the Types described in Section 2.1 above, for all panels unless
otherwise specified.
.2 Unless otherwise specified fabricate floor mounted panels, indicated, of high grade, cold rolled
smooth sheet metal steel no thinner than 3 mm thick with all doors and edges neatly turned and
finished smoothly. Visible welding seams will not be accepted.
.3 Construct rigid panels and racks with an angle iron or channel supporting frame, suitably braced
and stiffened to prevent any deformation during shipping or installation, and provide a surface
free from dents, warping or other deformation. Provide a four-sided channel iron mounting base
with front recess.
.4 Provide flush fitting, gasketted, doors hung on piano type hinges with three-point latches and
locking-type handles.
.5 Provide pans and rails for mounting terminal blocks, relays, wiring and other necessary devices.
.6 Use rear connected fittings to hold equipment and instrument cases on the panel, but where not
possible; any front fixing that is required shall be only by means of chrome-plated, brass or
stainless steel machine screws.
.7 Panel surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased before painting. One primer coat shall
be covered by two finished paint coats.
.8 The surface finish shall be free of runs, drops, ridges, waves and laps. The paints shall be applied
in such manner as to provide an even film covering corners and crevices. The interior finish shall
be white and the exterior finished will be selected after award of the contract.
.9 Panel Accessories: a pocket, 250 mm wide x 150 mm high x 25 mm deep, to hold pertinent
drawings and manuals on the lower half of the inside door.

2.23 INTERNAL WORKS

.1 Provide an individual switch for disconnection and a fuse for isolation of all panel mounted
instruments requiring a 120-volt supply.
.2 Make all wiring connections in the shop from the equipment mounted on the panel to numbered
terminal blocks conveniently located in the panel, including the power supply for all instruments.
Conductors shall be extra flexible stranded copper of gauges sufficient to carry the required
currents, and shall in no case be smaller than #16 AWG extra flexible.
.3 Identify all wiring by means of plastic slip-on type or thermally printed heat-shrink type markers.
Install all wiring neatly and laced or bunched into cable form using plastic wire clips, and where
practical, contained in plastic wiring channels with covers.
.4 Each terminal shall be clearly indelibly marked with the wire number connection to it. Each field
connecting conductor shall be served by one terminal. Provide 20% spare unit terminals. Provide
all necessary terminal block accessories such as manufactured jumpers and marking tape.
.5 Wire all spare PLC-card I/O points to terminals. These spare points are to remain grouped with
the other points from their respective cards.

25 14 23.docx Stantec FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 25 14 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS
Page 9 of 10

.6 Mount all internally mounted equipment on DIN rail or mount on a rack and arrange for ease of
access and removal when necessary.
.7 Arrange all terminal blocks in the panel in groups such that all low level signals such as 4-20mA
DC are located in one area, followed by contact closure type signals (limit switches, etc.), that do
not subsequently energize starters, etc. but are for status indication, and the remainder that
contain powered circuits, are to be arranged in such a manner and location so as to prevent
interference into the low level signal.
.8 Submit proposed terminal block layout and identification scheme for review prior to manufacture.
.9 Provide suitable spaces around the terminal blocks for incoming and outgoing conductors or
cable assemblies, with a minimum space of 5cm between terminals and wire trough.
.10 Where the panel has been designed to allow cable entry through the top of the panel, provide a
minimum of 15cm space from the panel’s top inner surface to the upper face of the wire trough to
allow for cable bends, dressing and labelling.
.11 Where the panel has been designed to allow cable entry through the bottom of the panel, provide
a minimum of 15cm space from the panel’s bottom inner surface to the lower face of the wire
trough to allow for cable bends, dressing and labelling.
.12 Provide plastic cable troughs equal to Panduit complete with snap-on covers for containing the
cables. Cables are not to be bunched and tied, but laid in.

2.24 PANEL MANUFACTURER

.1 Panel assembly, subcomponents and all internal components shall be CSA approved. Cabinet
construction shall be performed by an established panel manufacturer who shall comply with all
building codes, factory, and Department of Labour regulations and has CSA approval as a
manufacturer for all components of the work including control panels, MCCs, service entrance,
etc. Panels, components, or any items delivered without CSA approval, without prior explicit
written consent of the Engineer, will not be accepted.
.2 Panel manufacturer shall be CSA certified to fabricate and label equipment up to 1600 A.
.3 Panel manufacturing shall be by the System Integrator (specified elsewhere).

2.25 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES

.1 Custom built motor control center shall be as specified in Section 26 24 19.

2.26 SPARE PARTS

.1 As specified in Section 25 05 00 – Common Work Results – Integrated Automation.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install pushbutton stations, control and relay panels, control devices as indicated, and
interconnect as indicated.

3.2 TESTS
.1 Perform tests in accordance with Sections 25 05 00 and 26 05 00.

25 14 23.docx Stantec FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 25 14 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS
Page 10 of 10

.2 Depending upon magnitude and complexity, divide control system into convenient sections,
energize one section at a time and check out operation of section.
.3 Upon completion of sectional test, undertake group testing.
.4 Check out complete system for operational sequencing.
.5 Submit one copy of test results to the Engineer.

3.3 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING

.1 Perform all panel start-up and commissioning in accordance with Section 25 05 00
.2 Refer to Section 25 90 01 for specific SCADA System integration start-up and commissioning
requirements.

END OF SECTION

25 14 23.docx Stantec FIELD EQUIPMENT PANELS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS CONTROLLERS
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All Sections of all Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents inclusive form
part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 This section covers the supply and installation of the programmable controller.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 01 – Submittals and include details on
all CPU functions, programming, flow charts, operator menus, control sequences,
schematics, component dimensions, data storage quantity, data storage speed, data
storage back-ups, and program storage back-ups.

Part 2 Products

2.1 PLC SYSTEMS

.1 A typical PLC system shall be as shown on the drawings and include:
.1 Central processing unit (CPU) including power supply.
.2 I/O modules: discrete input, discrete output, analog input and analog output
.3 Remote monitoring hardware.
.4 All necessary supporting hardware, e.g. PLC backplane, terminal strips, etc.
.5 PLC programming.
.2 Environmental Conditions
.1 Temperature ratings:
.1 Storage temperature: -40 to 85°C.
.2 Operating temperature: 0 to 60°C.
.2 Humidity: 0 to 93% non-condensing.
.3 Altitude: 2000 metres full operation.
.4 Vibration and shock:
.1 Shock (half sine wave): °15g peak, 11 msec, 3 pulses/axis.
.2 Vibration: 10 to 57 Hz @ 0.075 mm d.a 57 to 150 Hz @ 1G.
.3 Free fall: 1m.
.5 RFI and EMF Protection:

25 30 01.docx Stantec PROCESS CONTROLLERS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS CONTROLLERS
Page 2 of 4

.1 RFI/EMF susceptibility: 27 to 500 Mhz: 10 V/m.

.2 Electrostatic discharge: 8 kV/ 4 kV contact.
.3 Surge withstand: IEC 801-5 2000 V, shield to ground.
.3 Central processing unit (CPU):
.1 General:
.1 The CPU shall consist of rack-mounted sub-assemblies (modules) which
solve application logic, store the application program, store numerical
values related to the logic, and interface to the I/O modules.
.2 The CPU shall provide local diagnostic information via LED indicators
and relay contact outputs. All indicators shall be marked as to their
respective function.
.3 A dry contact shall provide for remote PLC failure alarm indication. The
CPU shall come complete with all necessary software to provide for this
alarm function.
.4 Power back-up for one year via lithium battery, or capacitor to allow
PLC to store program to non-volatile memory prior to shutdown on
power loss.
.5 On board Modbus TCP port or Modbus TCP communication module to
be included in system.
.2 Program Storage:
.1 System program memory sufficient to contain the final program with
100% spare capacity. 3 Megabyte program memory minimum.
.2 PLC program storage medium shall be solid state RAM. RAM memory
shall have battery back-up capability of retaining all stored program data
through a continuous power outage for 12 months under worst case
conditions, or capacitor to allow PLC to store program to non-volatile
memory prior to shutdown. Capability shall exist to remove battery from
RAM module without interrupting system power.
.3 50msec maximum scan time.
.4 Time-of-day clock.
.5 Watchdog timer.
.3 Programming Languages:
.1 All five programming languages according to IEC 61131-3: FBD
(Function block diagram), LD (Ladder diagram), ST (Structured text), IL
(Instruction list) and SFC (Sequential function chart).
.4 Input/Output (I/O) Modules:
.1 General:
.1 All I/O modules shall be of the rack-mounted plug-in type
modular design. Each I/O module shall be keyed to prevent
module insertion into the wrong rack slot.
.2 LED indicators adjacent to each I/O point.
.3 All user wiring to the I/O modules shall be through a heavy duty
terminal strip. Removable, push-in type terminal strip shall
allow for module replacement without disturbing field wiring.

25 30 01.docx Stantec PROCESS CONTROLLERS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS CONTROLLERS
Page 3 of 4

Pressure type screw terminals shall be used to provide fast,

secure wire connections.
.4 Malfunction of an I/O module shall not affect the operation of
the remaining I/O modules or the CPU.
.5 CPU shall retain status of all I/O points of a failed I/O module.
.6 Isolation shall be provided between all internal logic and
external power circuits. Isolation shall meet minimum
specification of 1500V RMS.
.7 System shall contain one Ethernet communication module
dedicated for communication with remote equipment such as
VFDs or intelligent MCC components.
.8 System shall contain one Ethernet communication module
dedicated to HMI/SCADA communications.
.2 Discrete Inputs:
.1 No. of modules: As required.
.2 Description: Isolated Input Module.
.3 Number of points: As required plus 20% or minimum 8 spare
points, of each type of input card used, whichever is greater.
.4 Operating voltage: 10-30Vdc, 120Vac, as required by system.
.5 See drawing(s).
.3 Discrete Outputs:
.1 No. of modules: As required.
.2 Description: Relay (NO) Output Module.
.3 Number of points: As required plus 20% or minimum 8 spare
points, whichever is greater.
.4 Max. current/pt.: 2 Amp, Resistive.
.5 See drawing(s).
.4 Analog Inputs:
.1 No. of modules: As required.
.2 Description: Isolated Analog Input Module.
.3 No. of channels: As required plus 20% or minimum 4 spare
points, whichever is greater.
.4 Operating signal: 4-20 mA, or 0-10 VDC where required.
.5 Isolation: 1000 Vac Channel-to-Bus.
.6 Accuracy: 0.05% of full scale.
.7 See drawing(s).
.5 Analog Outputs
.1 No. of modules: As required.
.2 Description: Isolated Analog Output Module.
.3 As required plus 20% or minimum 4 spare points, whichever is
greater
.4 Operating current: 4-20 mA, or 0-10 VDC where required.

25 30 01.docx Stantec PROCESS CONTROLLERS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS CONTROLLERS
Page 4 of 4

.5 Isolation: 2500 Vdc Channel-to-Bus

.6 Accuracy: 0.2% of full scale.
.7 See drawing(s).
.5 Remote Communication Hardware:
.1 Communication interface: Modbus TCP,
.6 Remote Hard Drive (network attached storage)
.1 3 TB drives.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
.1 For systems requiring a backplane, backplane shall be supplied to house the CPU, AC
power supply, communication module, discrete input, discrete output, analog input, and
analog output modules as required. Backplane shall include at minimum 2 spare slots.
.2 Prewired spare conventional signals
.3 Allow 30% of free panel space

2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/PRODUCT GROUP:

.1 PLC:
.1 Allen-Bradley: CompactLogix 5380
.2 Schneider: Modicon M340

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Mount and install PLC and associated equipment in the control panels as indicated on the
drawings and as specified in Sections 25 14 23 and 26 24 19.
.2 Complete PLC and control system installation, testing, start-up and commissioning shall
be as described in Section 25 05 00.

END OF SECTION

25 30 01.docx Stantec PROCESS CONTROLLERS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 02
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 INSTRUMENTS
Page 1 of 8

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All Sections of all Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents inclusive form
part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 This section specifies the supply installation, field testing, and placing into operation of
flow, pressure, temperature, level, turbidity, and other instruments of control and
instrumentation.

1.3 RELATED WORK

.1 General Requirements - Division 01
.2 Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning – Division 23
.3 Automation - Division 25
.4 Electrical – Division 26

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 01 - Submittals.

Part 2 Products

2.1 INSTRUMENTS
.1 Provide each instrument with mechanisms and enclosures that are corrosion resistant.
.2 Provide each instrument with mechanisms enclosed in a dustproof and moisture proof
case.
.3 Provide all indicator and gauge dials finished in permanent white with black graduations
and figures.
.4 Potentiometric signals shall have a "live" zero or positive minimum value in the signal
range.
.5 Each component shall be carefully selected and designed for a long lifetime with ample
margin to withstand transient and other surge voltages, which may occur in the circuits
from any source in the power supply.
.6 Each component and composite instrument shall be suitable for the location and
installation position at the attitude designated on the drawings, e.g., horizontal, vertical or
sloped position.

25 30 02.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 02
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 INSTRUMENTS
Page 2 of 8

.7 The Contractor shall provide all power supplies. Instruments shall be powered from the
same control panel to which the measured signal is being transmitted, unless specifically
noted otherwise. The power source to each instrument shall be individually fused, fuse
size based on instrument power requirements.
.8 Integrating counters and elapsed time meters shall show the total quantity that has passed
through the meter and shall not require the use of a multiplier other than cipher additions.
The integrators shall have at least seven figures.
.9 All control panel mounted instruments shall be suitable for flush mounting and shall be
furnished with bezel.
.10 Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all signals shall be of the 4-20 mA type. This
applies to both transmitting and receiving instruments.
.11 All materials shall conform to the standards of the Canadian Standards Association
(CSA), or cUL.
.12 For factory calibrated instruments, the factory calibration sheets shall be submitted in the
O&M manual.
.13 All instruments to be installed per Manufacturer’s recommended installation guidelines.
.14 Provide an instrument I.D. tag fastened to each instrument permanently and legibly
marked to match instrument list. Instrument tag to be stainless steel or powder coated
aluminum.
.15 Instruments are to be supplied as a package of one manufacturer, from one vendor, to the
extent readily practicable. Use of more than one manufacturer or more than one vendor
is acceptable, but the number of manufacturers and vendors is to be limited. This aids the
Owner in many aspects including ease of training, operation, maintenance,
troubleshooting, and servicing.

2.2 ULTRASONIC LEVEL SENSOR/TRANSMITTERS

.1 Provide ultrasonic level sensing system(s) suitable for applications as indicated to
monitor water levels as required.
.2 Wall mounted continuous level monitoring device to provide one 4-20 mA signal
proportional to chamber water level.
.3 Power input: 24 VDC
.4 Signal output: 4-20mA, with HART
.5 Range: confirm with Engineer prior to shipment.
.6 Each instrument system and associated components to be CSA or cUL approved, for the
area in which they are mounted, before shipment.
.7 Chemical resistant polyester/polycarbonate alloy surface mounted NEMA 4X rated
enclosure complete with LCD and bar graph display, units as indicated.
.8 Level sensing transducer complete with built-in temperature compensation and
submersible transducer shield. Remotely mount transducer required. Supply necessary
length of transducer cable between transducer and panel mounted transmitter, protect
cable as indicated, refer to mechanical layout drawings.

25 30 02.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 02
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 INSTRUMENTS
Page 3 of 8

.9 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Siemens MultiRanger 100/200, Krohne Optisound VU-31, ,

Endress & Hauser FMU 90 c/w FDU 91 transducer or approved equal.

2.3 MAGNETIC FLOW METERS

.1 Provide magnetic flow meter(s) suitable for the areas as indicated.
.2 Magmeters to have following characteristics:
.1 Electrically rated for use in non-hazardous areas. Shall still have CSA, cUL, or
ETL certification as an approved electrical device in Canada
.2 Pipe size diameter(s) as indicated
.3 Power input: 24VDC
.4 Liner: NSF61 for drinking water service
.5 Electrodes: 316 stainless steel
.6 Enclosure: NEMA 4X
.7 Product temperature: -10 to 50°C
.8 Ambient temperature: 10 to 50°C
.9 Flange Material: Carbon Steel
.10 Signal output: 4-20 mA flow rate signal to be PLC monitored.
.11 Signal output: Pulse output flow totalizer signal to be PLC monitored. Pulse
duration to be of sufficient duration to ensure that PLC does not miss any pulses,
and shall at minimum be 100mSec in duration. Provide one pulse/0.1cubic
meters of flow.
.12 Operating Range: Confirm all operating ranges with Engineer
.13 Accuracy: better or equal to 0.2%
.14 Controller/housing mounting, as indicated
.15 Locally displayed information:
.1 Instantaneous flow in litres per second
.2 Totalizer in cubic metres
.16 Programming: via meter’s controller and HART.
.17 Capacitance back up for retention of settings and current values
.18 Remote-mounted controller applications shall c/w sufficient length of converter
cables to connect the meter and the remote-mounted controller, with integral
display, as indicated, and any appurtenances as necessary for the mounting and
operation of the remote unit.
.19 Normal operating pressure: 0-700 kPa (0-100 psi)
.20 Test pressure: At least 1400 kPa
.21 Grounding rings for PVC pipe installations. Grounding straps for stainless steel
pipe installations.
.22 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Endress & Hauser Promag W, Siemens Sitrans Mag
5100W, Krohne Waterflux 3100, ABB WaterMaster.

2.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE MONITOR SYSTEM

.1 Provide a residual free-chlorine continuous monitoring system as indicated.

25 30 02.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 02
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 INSTRUMENTS
Page 4 of 8

.2 The system shall have the following features:

.1 The following components mounted, plumbed, and wired on a stainless steel,
PVC, or HDPE backboard, with pre-drilled mounting holes, and be suitable for
wall or frame mounting:
.1 Panel-mounted analyser with:
.1 CSA, cUL, or ETL electrical certification.
.2 NEMA 4X rated, or stated equivalent ingress and corrosion
resistance.
.3 Local display indicating: free chlorine concentration, rotor
speed, sample temperature, and operation status.
.4 Fully programmable, scalable, and overvoltage-protected inputs
and outputs.
.5 External programming/calibration keys
.6 Power input: 24 VDC
.7 Scalable 4-20mA output proportional to free chlorine reading.
.8 Sensor inputs suited to the system’s sensing probe(s).
.9 EEPROM memory for:
.1 Data points.
.2 Diagnostic messages.
.3 Sensor bias information.
.10 Measurement range as indicated in the Instrument Schedules
.2 Pressure Regulator:
.1 To reduce process pressure to the level acceptable to the Monitor
System.
.3 Free-chlorine measuring probe with the following features:
.1 Measuring method: three electrode, dual platinum-platinum
amperometric.
.2 Uses no consumables.
.3 Has no moving parts.
.4 Have an integral temperature sensor for temperature
compensation of the free chlorine reading by the analyser.
.5 Have an integral pH sensor for temperature compensation of the
free chlorine reading by the analyser.
.4 Automated Cleaning System
.5 Mechanical rotameter-type flow control with a range suitable for the
flow requirements of the system.
.6 A needle-type valve for collection of grab samples by the operator.
.7 Sample Inlet: Barbed for 10mm O.D. tubing. Easily removable if hard-
piping required.
.8 Sample Outlet: Barbed for 13mm O.D. tubing to atmosphere drain.
Easily removable if hard-piping required.

25 30 02.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 02
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 INSTRUMENTS
Page 5 of 8

.3 Application: Measurement of residual free chlorine in Potable water, PH and RPM with
separate three (3) analog input signals .
.4 Minimum accuracy:
.1 +/- 0.01 ppm from 0.00 to 1.00 ppm
.2 +/- 0.06 ppm from 1.00 to 3.00 ppm
.3 +/- 0.2 ppm from 3.00 – 5.00 ppm
.5 Response time: 90 seconds of change of excessive free chlorine within 60 seconds of the
sample entering the flow cell.
.6 Process normal operating pressure: 0-700 kPa (1-100 psi).
.7 Process operating temperature: 0°C to 30°C.
.8 Installation area conditions: Condensing humidity, corrosive, 0°C to 40°C
.9 Provide a new calibration kit complete with any required fittings, chemicals and
connections required to calibrate the system to the indicated range. To be left on site
after commissioning.
.10 Acceptable manufacturer(s):
.1 Swan AMI Trides

2.5 PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

.1 Surface mounted continuous pressure monitoring device(s) to provide pressure readings
as indicated.
.2 Power input: Loop Powered
.3 Signal output: 4-20mA, with HART.
.4 Range: 0 to 700 kPA (0-100 psi).
.5 Block, vent, and drain valve.
.6 Mounting as indicated.
.7 NSF61 for drinking water service
.8 NEMA 4X enclosure.
.9 CSA or cUL approval, for the area in which the instrument is installed, before shipment.
.10 Acceptable manufacturer(s): , Endress+Hauser Cerabar S PMC71, Siemens Sitrans
P320/420, Rosemount 2051, ABB 266 Series Pressure Transmitters or approved equal.

2.6 COMPACT PRESSURE TRANSMITTERS

.1 Surface mounted continuous pressure monitoring device(s) to provide pressure readings
as indicated.
.2 Specifications according to data sheet: PE 81.60
.3 Material of Wetted Parts: 316L
.4 Case: 316L
.5 Non-linearity: 0.5% BFSL

25 30 02.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 02
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 INSTRUMENTS
Page 6 of 8

.6 Pressure type: absolute

.7 Pressure range: 0...100 psia
.8 Process Connection: 1/4 NPT
.9 Temperature range of medium: 0...+80 °C
.10 Output signal: 4 ... 20 mA, 2-wire
.11 Power supply: 8...30 V DC
.12 Electrical Connection: valve connector, size A
.13 Approvals: NSF 61 / cULus
.14 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Wika Model A-10 or approved equal

2.7 FLOAT SWITCHES

.1 Provide float switches as indicated, teardrop shaped submersible, weighted and
encapsulated in an enclosure suitable for immersion in potable water and wastewater.
.2 Acceptable manufacturer(s) shall be Flygt No.ENM-10 or approved equal.
.3 Float switches shall be individually suspended by means of a submersible cable affixed to
a galvanized steel float bracket as indicated on the drawings. Provide float rings to
prevent cable entanglement. Acceptable manufacturer(s): Flygt No.13-520006 or
approved equal.
.4 Provide horizontal level regulator hanger Acceptable manufacturer(s): Flygt No 13-
520006

2.8 BUILDING FLOOD ALARM SWITCH

.1 Provide building flood switch(es) as indicated.
.1 Measuring principle: Vibrating fork
.2 Output: DPDT Relay
.3 Ambient Temperature: -40 to 70 °C
.4 CSA, cUL, for the area in which the system components are installed, before
shipment.
.2 Install for early alarm indication. Provide mounting brackets and any custom work for
suitable installation.
.3 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Rosemount 2120, Siemens LVL200, E&H FTL50 or
approved equal.

2.9 LOW DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH (HVAC)

.1 Provide differential pressure switch(es) suitable for detection of HVAC dirty filter status
with mounting bracket. The switches shall have the following features:
.1 Relay Type: SPDT
.2 Relay Rating: 15A@120VAC
.3 Set point: 0.5 – 2” w.c Adjustable,

25 30 02.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 02
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 INSTRUMENTS
Page 7 of 8

.4 Filter plug set point: 1” w.c or 1.5” to be confirmed with HVAC filter
manufacturer
.5 Sensor type: Diaphragm
.6 Process connection: 1/8” female NPT
.7 Weatherproof Housing NEMA 4
.8 Provide all hardware, brackets, and components necessary for wall mounting
.9 Approvals: CSA
.10 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Dwyer Series 1800 approved equal

2.10 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTERS

.1 Provide building low temperature transmitters as indicated:
.1 Operating Range -40 to 40 Deg C
.2 Sensor type: Pt100 RTD
.3 Transmitter type: Wall Mounted
.4 Signal output: 4-20mA
.5 NEMA 4X enclosure.
.6 Provide sun cover for outdoor transmitter
.7 CSA, cUL, for the area in which the system components are installed, before
shipment.
.8 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Omega EWSE-PT100-TX or approved equal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Coordinate the work of this Section with the installation of the equipment specified in the
relevant Sections of Divisions 23 and 46, and as indicated on the Mechanical and
Electrical drawings.
.2 Perform all work in compliance with the relevant sections of this Division.

3.2 FIELD INSTRUMENT MOUNTING

.1 "Mounting" shall mean the positioning and fastening with proper brackets in the position
required. Local displays and readouts shall be positioned for easy reading, without the
use of ladders, by operators.
.2 All equipment shall be mounted in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.3 Locations of all field instruments are subject to modification by the Engineer who
reserves the right to move any item up to 3 metres from the position shown, without
change to the contract price, provided notice is given before the related work has
commenced.
.4 Exact locations of all field instruments shall be site determined by the Contractor to the
satisfaction of the Engineer to ensure proper operation of the device.

25 30 02.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 02
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 INSTRUMENTS
Page 8 of 8

.5 Employ any and all means of trade, skill, and workmanship to install all field instruments
to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
.6 Install magnetic flow meters to manufacturer requirements. Install with minimum
5 diameters of straight upstream piping and 2 diameters of straight downstream piping.

3.3 TRAINING
.1 Refer to section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training

3.4 START-UP
.1 Complete an Instrument Check Sheet (see Section 25 30 04) for each device.
.2 Instrument manufacturer’s qualified field service representative shall be onsite as
required to perform instrument calibration, testing and commissioning and to instruct
Owner’s representative in all aspects of instrument operation and maintenance.

3.5 COMMISSIONING
.1 Refer to section 01 91 13 - General Commissioning Requirements

END OF SECTION

25 30 02.docx Stantec INSTRUMENTS

RM of Headingley Seciton 25 30 03
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse Instrument Index
October 2024

RM of Headingley
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse Date: 2024/11/26
INSTRUMENT INDEX Rev: A

LOCATION DEVICE
P & ID SERVICE DESCRIPTION CALIBRATION RANGE I/O TYPE SIGNAL LINE NUMBER SPECIFICATION REVISION GENERAL COMMENTS
SEQUENCE PARALLEL SEQUENCE
SYSTEM COMPONENT INSTALLATION DETAIL TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER
NUMBER NUMBER

0-50 l/s AI ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOW SIZE: 150 mm

01 FIT 110 01-FIT-110 DI-601 POTABLE WATER FLOW TO RESERVOIRS 2 4 - 20 mA E-501 / E-502 PW-150-SS1 25 30 02.2.3
pulse/0.1 m flow DI METER INTEGRATED HEAD
POTABLE WATER PRESSURE FROM DISTRIBUTION
01 PIT 101 01-PIT-101 DI-601 0-100 PSI AI 4 - 20 mA PRESSURE TRANSMITTER PW-200-SS1 25 30 02.2.5
PUMPS
pH: 3-10
CHLORINE CONCENTRATION IN POTABLE WATER TO
01 AIT 110 01-AIT-110 DI-601 CL: 0-6 mg/l 3x AI 4 - 20 mA CHLORINE ANALYZER PW-200-SS1 25 30 02.2.4
RESERVOIRS
RPM: 0-600
2xDO
01 XV 110 01-XV-110 DI-601 POTABLE WATER TO RESERVOIRS FLOW CONTROL N/A 24VDC ON/OFF VALVE PW-250-SS1
2xDI
POTABLE WATER FROM DISTRIBUTION PUMPS FLOW 2xDO
01 XV 120 01-XV-120 DI-601 N/A 24VDC ON/OFF VALVE PW-250-SS1
CONTROL 2xDI
POTABLE WATER FROM DISTRIBUTION PUMPS FLOW
01 FCV 210 01-FCV-210 DI-601 N/A COM MODBUS TCP FLOW CONTROL VALVE PW-300-SS1
CONTROL

01 XV 130 01-XV-130 DI-601 SAMPLE FLOW TO CHLORINE ANALYZER 01-AIT-110 N/A DO 24VDC SOLENOID VALVE

01 XV 140 01-XV-140 DI-601 DRAIN FLOW FROM CHLORINE ANALYZER 01-AIT-110 N/A DO 24VDC SOLENOID VALVE

01 LSH 110 01-LSH-110 DI-601 TANK 01-TNK-110 (RESERVOIR #1) HIGH LEVEL N/A DI 24VDC LIQUID LEVEL REGULATOR 25 30 02.2.7

01 LSH 120 01-LSH-120 DI-601 TANK 01-TNK-120 (RESERVOIR #2) HIGH LEVEL N/A DI 24 VDC LIQUID LEVEL REGULATOR 25 30 02.2.7

-10 °C TO 50 °C TEMPERATURE
01 TT 101 01-TT-101 DI-601 PROCESS ROOM TEMPERATURE AI 4 - 20 mA 25 30 02.2.10
TRANSMITTER

-10 °C TO 50 °C TEMPERATURE
01 TT 102 01-TT-102 DI-601 ELECTRICAL ROOM TEMPERATURE AI 4 - 20 mA 25 30 02.2.10
TRANSMITTER

TEMPERATURE
01 TT 103 01-TT-103 DI-601 OUTDOOR AMBIENT TEMPERATURE -50 °C TO 50 °C AI 4 - 20 mA 25 30 02.2.10
TRANSMITTER

02 LSL 220 02-LSL-220 DI-602 TANK 02-TNK-220 (PUMP CHAMBER #2) LOW LEVEL N/A DI 24VDC LIQUID LEVEL REGULATOR 25 30 02.2.7

TANK 02-TNK-220 (PUMP CHAMBER #2) LOW LOW

02 LSLL 220 02-LSLL-220 DI-602 N/A DI 24 VDC LIQUID LEVEL REGULATOR 25 30 02.2.7
LEVEL
TANK 02-TNK-220 (PUMP CHAMBER #2) LEVEL ULTRASONIC LEVEL
02 LIT 220 02-LIT-220 DI-602 0-6m AI 4 - 20 mA 25 30 02.2.2
INDICATION TRANSMITTER

02 LSL 210 02-LSL-210 DI-602 TANK 02-TNK-210 (PUMP CHAMBER #1) LOW LEVEL N/A DI 24VDC LIQUID LEVEL REGULATOR 25 30 02.2.7

TANK 02-TNK-210 (PUMP CHAMBER #1) LOW LOW

02 LSLL 210 02-LSLL-210 DI-602 N/A DI 24 VDC LIQUID LEVEL REGULATOR 25 30 02.2.7
LEVEL
TANK 02-TNK-210 (PUMP CHAMBER #1) LEVEL ULTRASONIC LEVEL
02 LIT 210 02-LIT-210 DI-602 0-6m AI 4 - 20 mA 25 30 02.2.2
INDICATION TRANSMITTER

POTABLE WATER DRAIN FLOW CONTROL TO TANK

02 FCV 310 02-FCV-310 DI-602 N/A COM MODBUS TCP FLOW CONTROL VALVE PW-200-SS1
02-TNK-210 (PUMP CHAMBER #1)

02 PIT 410 02-PIT-410 DI-602 DISTRIBUTION PRESSURE AFTER PUMPS 0-100 PSI AI 4 - 20 mA PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 25 30 02.2.5

PUMP 02-P-110 (JOCKEY PUMP) DISTRIBUTION

02 PT 110 02-PT-110 DI-602 0-100 PSI AI 4 - 20 mA PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 25 30 02.2.6 CONNECTED TO VFD
PRESSURE
PUMP 02-P-210A (DISTRIBUTION PUMP #1 )
02 PT 210A 02-PT-210A DI-602 0-100 PSI AI 4 - 20 mA PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 25 30 02.2.6 CONNECTED TO VFD
DISTRIBUTION PRESSURE
PUMP 02-P-210B (DISTRIBUTION PUMP #2 )
02 PT 210B 02-PT-210B DI-602 0-100 PSI AI 4 - 20 mA PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 25 30 02.2.6 CONNECTED TO VFD
DISTRIBUTION PRESSURE
PUMP 02-P-310A (HIGH FLOW PUMP #1 ) DISTRIBUTION
02 PT 310A 02-PT-310A DI-602 0-100 PSI AI 4 - 20 mA PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 25 30 02.2.6 CONNECTED TO VFD
PRESSURE
PUMP 02-P-310B (HIGH FLOW PUMP #2 ) DISTRIBUTION
02 PT 310B 02-PT-310B DI-602 0-100 PSI AI 4 - 20 mA PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 25 30 02.2.6 CONNECTED TO VFD
PRESSURE
PUMP 02-P-310C (HIGH FLOW PUMP #3 ) DISTRIBUTION
02 PT 310C 02-PT-310C DI-602 0-100 PSI AI 4 - 20 mA PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 25 30 02.2.6 CONNECTED TO VFD
PRESSURE
0-400 l/s AI ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOW SIZE: 300 mm
02 FIT 310 02-FIT-310 DI-603 DISTRIBUTION POTABLE WATER FLOW 4 - 20 mA E-501 / E-502 PW-300-SS1 25 30 02.2.3
pulse/0.1 m2 flow DI METER REMNOTE HEAD
pH: 3-10
02 AIT 101 02-AIT-101 DI-601 CHLORINE CONCENTRATION IN DISTIRBUTION CL: 0-6 mg/l 3x AI 4 - 20 mA CHLORINE ANALYZER PW-200-SS1 25 30 02.2.4
RPM: 0-600

00 LSH 104 00-LSH-104 E-104 DRY PIT FLOOD ALARM 3mm AFF DI 24 VDC LEVEL SWITCH 25 30 02.2.8

SS 01 SS-01 E-104 SMOKE / HEAT ALARM IN VESTIBULE N/A DI 24 VDC SMOKE /HEAT SENSOR 28 13 00.2.6

SS 02 SS-02 E-104 SMOKE / HEAT ALARM IN OFFICE N/A DI 24 VDC SMOKE /HEAT SENSOR 28 13 00.2.6

SS 03 SS-03 E-104 SMOKE / HEAT ALARM IN WASHROOM N/A DI 24 VDC SMOKE /HEAT SENSOR 28 13 00.2.6

U:\111220838\1200_specification\1202_files_out\IFT\Div_25\25 30 03_Instrument List.xlsx Page 1 of 2 11/27/2024 9:27 AM

RM of Headingley Seciton 25 30 03
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse Instrument Index
October 2024

RM of Headingley
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse Date: 2024/11/26
INSTRUMENT INDEX Rev: A

LOCATION DEVICE
P & ID SERVICE DESCRIPTION CALIBRATION RANGE I/O TYPE SIGNAL LINE NUMBER SPECIFICATION REVISION GENERAL COMMENTS
SEQUENCE PARALLEL SEQUENCE
SYSTEM COMPONENT INSTALLATION DETAIL TYPE MANUFACTURER MODEL NUMBER
NUMBER NUMBER

SS 04 SS-04 E-104 SMOKE / HEAT ALARM IN PROCESS ROOM N/A DI 24 VDC SMOKE /HEAT SENSOR 28 13 00.2.6

SS 05 SS-05 E-104 SMOKE / HEAT ALARM IN PROCESS ROOM N/A DI 24 VDC SMOKE /HEAT SENSOR 28 13 00.2.6

SS 06 SS-06 E-104 SMOKE / HEAT ALARM IN ELECTRICAL ROOM N/A DI 24 VDC SMOKE /HEAT SENSOR 28 13 00.2.6

SS 07 SS-07 E-104 SMOKE / HEAT ALARM IN ELECTRICAL ROOM N/A DI 24 VDC SMOKE /HEAT SENSOR 28 13 00.2.6

DPS 01 DPS-01 E-104 ERV FILTER PLUG ALARM N/A DI 25 VDC DP SWITCH 25 30 02.2.9

DPS 02 DPS-02 E-104 S(F)-1 FILTER PLUG ALARM N/A DI 26 VDC DP SWITCH 25 30 02.2.9

DPS 03 DPS-03 E-104 S(F)-2 FILTER PLUG ALARM N/A DI 27 VDC DP SWITCH 25 30 02.2.9

U:\111220838\1200_specification\1202_files_out\IFT\Div_25\25 30 03_Instrument List.xlsx Page 2 of 2 11/27/2024 9:27 AM

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 04
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse I/O CHECK SHEETS
MWSB #1758 December 2024
Page 1 of 6
PLC Input Check Sheet 4-20mA Device
Site Information
Project Name: Poplar Bluff Industrial Park - Reservoir, Pumphouse and Associated Works

Vendor Drawing Number:

Loop Information
Instrument or Loop ID:

Description:

PLC Information
PLC I/O Type: Analog Input

PLC Physical Address:

Engineering Units:

Range (in Eng units):

Calibration
End Device Current Reading (mA) PLC Value (Eng Units)
At minimum Signal (0%):

At mid Signal (50%):

At maximum Signal (100%):

Notes:

Date (YYYY-MM-DD)
Checked By:

Signature:

25 30 04 Stantec I/O CHECK SHEETS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 04
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse I/O CHECK SHEETS
MWSB #1758 December 2024
Page 2 of 6
PLC Output Check Sheet 4-20mA Device
Site Information
Project Name: Poplar Bluff Industrial Park - Reservoir, Pumphouse and Associated Works

Vendor Drawing Number:

Loop Information
Instrument or Loop ID:

Description:

PLC Information
PLC I/O Type: Analog Output

PLC Physical Address:

Engineering Units:

Range (in Eng units):

Calibration
PLC Output Actual Current Reading (mA) Actual Value (Eng Units) End Device Status
At minimum Signal (0%):

At mid Signal (50%):

At maximum Signal (100%):

Notes:

Date (YYYY-MM-DD)
Checked By:

Signature:

25 30 04 Stantec I/O CHECK SHEETS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 04
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse I/O CHECK SHEETS
MWSB #1758 December 2024
Page 3 of 6
PLC Input Check Sheet Digital Input Device
Site Information
Project Name: Poplar Bluff Industrial Park - Reservoir, Pumphouse and Associated Works

Vendor Drawing Number:

Loop Information
Instrument or Loop ID:

Description:

PLC Information
PLC I/O Type: Digital Input

PLC Physical Address:

Verification
End Device Field Device Status
Input On State

Input Off State

Notes:

Date (YYYY-MM-DD)
Checked By:

Signature:

25 30 04 Stantec I/O CHECK SHEETS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 04
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse I/O CHECK SHEETS
MWSB #1758 December 2024
Page 4 of 6
PLC Output Check Sheet Digital Output Device
Site Information
Project Name: Poplar Bluff Industrial Park - Reservoir, Pumphouse and Associated Works

Vendor Drawing Number:

Loop Information
Instrument or Loop ID:

Description:

PLC Information
PLC I/O Type: Digital Output

PLC Physical Address:

Verification
End Device Field Device Status
PLC Output On State

PLC Output Off State

Notes:

Date (YYYY-MM-DD)
Checked By:

Signature:

25 30 04 Stantec I/O CHECK SHEETS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 04
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse I/O CHECK SHEETS
MWSB #1758 December 2024
Page 5 of 6
PLC Check Sheet Communicating VFD
Site Information
Project Name: Poplar Bluff Industrial Park - Reservoir, Pumphouse and Associated Works
Instrument Drawing Number Network Drawing Number
Vendor Drawing Number:

Motor/Loop Information
Motor or Loop ID:

Description:

PLC/HMI Information
Type Node Number/Address
Network
PLC HMI or SCADA (Logged to Alarm History)
Alarm on Communication
Failure (Yes/No)

Monitoring
Speed Feedback Amperage
Displayed on HMI (Yes/No)
Running Status Fault Status

Displayed on HMI (Yes/No)

Hand/Local Mode Auto/Remote Mode

Displayed on HMI (Yes/No)

Control
VFD Mode: Speed Control from SCADA Start/Stop Control from SCADA
Remote/Auto
Speed Control from door mounted HIM Run Control From "Hand" Switch Pos.

Local/Hand

Notes:

Date (YYYY-MM-DD)
Checked By:

Signature:

25 30 04 Stantec I/O CHECK SHEETS

RM of Headingley Section 25 30 04
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse I/O CHECK SHEETS
MWSB #1758 December 2024
Page 6 of 6
PLC Check Sheet Communicating Starter
Site Information
Project Name: Poplar Bluff Industrial Park - Reservoir, Pumphouse and Associated Works
Instrument Drawing Number Network Drawing Number
Vendor Drawing Number:

Motor/Loop Information
Motor or Loop ID:

Description:

PLC/HMI Information
Type Node Number/Address
Network
PLC HMI or SCADA (Logged to Alarm History)
Alarm on Communication
Failure (Yes/No)

Monitoring
Amperage
Displayed on HMI (Yes/No)
Running Status Fault Status

Displayed on HMI (Yes/No)

Hand/Local Mode Auto/Remote Mode

Displayed on HMI (Yes/No)

Control
Starter Mode: Start/Stop Control from SCADA
Remote/Auto
Run Control From "Hand" Switch Pos.

Local/Hand

Notes:

Date (YYYY-MM-DD)
Checked By:

Signature:

25 30 04 Stantec I/O CHECK SHEETS

RM of Headingley Section 25 90 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SCADA SYSTEM
Page 1 of 10

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Furnish all labour, materials, equipment, and services necessary and required to supply,
install, interconnect, test, and commission a complete supervisory control and data
acquisition (SCADA) system as indicated for the facility.
.2 SCADA to provide plant overview as well as plant detail screens, process system detail
screens, alarming screens, trends, historian, and remote sites.
.3 Replicate all HMI screens from supplied packages to plant’s SCADA and HMI screens.
Create trends for all instruments as per this specification. Create trends for device
statuses.
.4 Provide SCADA screens for each process package.
.5 Provide SCADA screen for the HVAC system. Show statuses and alarms.
.6 Provide SCADA screen for power monitor and standby power systems.

1.3 RELATED WORK

.1 Review all specifications and include all works indicated or implied.
.2 Review drawings of all disciplines and include all works indicated or implied.
.3 General Requirements - Division 01
.4 Demonstration and Training – Section 01 79 00
.5 General Commissioning Requirements – Section 01 91 13
.6 Openings - Division 08 (review for any operators or sensors for doors, windows, etc.)
.7 Finishes - Division 09
.8 Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning - Division 23
.9 Sequence of Operation for HVAC Controls 23 09 93
.10 Common Work Results – Integrated Automation – Section 25 05 00
.11 Field Equipment Panels - Section 25 14 23
.12 Process Controllers - Section 25 30 01
.13 Electrical - Division 26
.14 Water Treatment Equipment - Division 46

25 90 01.docx Stantec SCADA SYSTEM

RM of Headingley Section 25 90 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SCADA SYSTEM
Page 2 of 10

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Div 01 and Section 25 05 00.
.2 Identify hardware.
.3 Identify all pieces of software. Where datasheets are not available, list software in as
exact a fashion as possible.

Part 2 Products

2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

.1 The data acquisition, process control, communication and remote monitoring system shall
supervise and control the facility in a comprehensive fashion. Include without limitation
.1 Computer work stations (Server Grade).
.2 Software.
.3 Programming.
.2 The SCADA shall comprehensively integrate all systems including without limitation
.1 PLCs.
.2 Control panels.
.3 Process packages.
.4 Intelligent equipment in the MCC(s), including starters, VFDs, power
monitoring.
.5 Standby generator and ATS.
.6 HVAC systems.
.7 Building systems.

2.2 COMPUTER WORK STATIONS

.1 Supply and install computer hardware as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
.2 Environmental conditions:
.1 Operating temperature: 0 to 40°C
.2 Humidity: 10 to 90% non-condensing
.3 The work station hardware shall be modular in design with the capability for future
expansion.
.4 The station hardware shall be configured using proven high reliability system
architecture. The failure of individual components of the system shall cause only a
gradual degradation of system performance, limited to the direct control loop involved.
.5 The station hardware shall be fully compatible with system requirements in capability,
speed, and reliability. Features shall include direct memory access, real time clock and
power failure shutdown and restart. Watchdog timer protection and memory data save
shall also be provided.
.6 System hardware components shall include the following installed, minimum, hardware
for each workstation:

25 90 01.docx Stantec SCADA SYSTEM

RM of Headingley Section 25 90 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SCADA SYSTEM
Page 3 of 10

.1 Workstation
.1 Intel Core i7 Processor with the following minimums:
.1 4 Cores
.2 8 Threads
.3 3.4 GHz Clock Speed
.4 16 Mb Cache
.2 2 terabyte SATA6 hard drive for OS.
.3 4 terabyte SATA6 hard drive.
.4 16 gigabyte RAM.
.5 DVD ±RW optical disc burner.
.6 4 USB 2.0 ports, 2 USB 3.0 ports.
.7 PCIE x16 video card comparable to GTX 680 2GB.
.8 HDMI and DVI-D outputs that shall be compatible with the supplied
monitors and Displays.
.9 Integrated audio.
.10 2 speakers, suited for connection to the supplied PC.
.11 1 tower case.
.12 Two Ethernet ports supporting at least 100-BASE-TX communication.
.13 Modem Card.
.14 Power cable.
.15 All ports and drivers necessary to connect the HD 24” flat screen
monitors.
.16 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Dell , HP, or approved equal.
.2 Two 24" flat panel LED monitor that includes the following:
.1 24” (diagonal) viewing area
.2 120Vac input power, Energy Star certified.
.3 Height adjustable stand
.4 Security lock port
.5 Anti-theft stand lock slot (to panel)
.6 Wide screen 16:9 or 16:10 aspect ratio
.7 Anti-glare coating
.8 1000:1 minimum contrast ratio (typical)
.9 2, 000, 000 minimum contrast ratio (dynamic)
.10 300 cd/m2 minimum brightness (typical)
.11 8ms maximum grey-to-grey response time
.12 At least 178°viewing angle
.13 At least one (1) each of the following video connection types:
.1 DVI-D or HDMI
.2 DisplayPort (DP)
.3 VGA

25 90 01.docx Stantec SCADA SYSTEM

RM of Headingley Section 25 90 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SCADA SYSTEM
Page 4 of 10

.14 Appropriate cable to connect the HD-format video output of the PC to

the monitor
.15 Power cable
.16 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Dell , HP, or approved equal
.3 One Windows enhanced keyboard, US standard layout.
.4 One Microsoft corded optical mouse and pad with scroll wheel.
.5 HP LaserJet Pro M255dw Wireless Colour Laser Printer c/w replacement toner
.6 One uninterruptible power supply (UPS) desktop version.
.7 One power bar.
.8 Provide one external network attached hard-drive, minimum 3TB, with
redundancy, installed in main control panel to provide daily backups of system
activity log, alarm logs, event logs, and trend data.
.9 Work station shall be c/w 3 year onsite warranty, and backup disks for recovery
and installation of software to original configuration.
.10 Provide backup disks to recover the PC to the configuration as on the day of turn
over to the Owner. Label disks.

2.3 SOFTWARE
.1 Acceptable computer system operating platform shall be latest version of Microsoft
Windows Professional including all patches and upgrades that provide for a compatible
stable system to work in conjunction with all of the supplied SCADA software, as well as
all associated applications, programs, and modules.
.2 Provide latest copy of Microsoft Office Professional compatible with SCADA system
software and include the following:
.1 MS Excel
.2 MS Word
.3 MS Outlook
.4 MS PowerPoint
.3 Provide latest version of Backup (imaging) software
.4 Provide current version of reporting software XL reporter or approved equal .
.5 Provide current version of Antivirus c/w 3 year license.
.6 Acceptable control system software package shall be Rockwell FactoryTalk View,
VTscada to match PLC manufacturer Provide current version of OPC Server.
.7 Provide, install and configure Specter Instruments Win911 software to automatically
perform any of the following: dial out, e-mail, and or text all Priority 1 and Priority 2
alarms. Win911 version to be latest version including patches that is compatible with the
SCADA system installed. SCADA Phone software is acceptable where Citect SCADA is
used.
.8 All data to be backed up each night at midnight to external Ethernet hard-drive. Failure
to complete a data backup on any occasion shall generate an alarm on the control screen
indicating “DATA Backup Failed – Contact [System Integrator] for support.”

25 90 01.docx Stantec SCADA SYSTEM

RM of Headingley Section 25 90 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SCADA SYSTEM
Page 5 of 10

.9 Remote hard drive shall contain complete backup of all SCADA and PLC software
developed by the System Integrator. This must include any programs, apps, plug-ins,
DLLs, etc. necessary to restore the system from failure. Any changes made to the
existing software after initial installation shall be backed up to the remote hard drive so
that it always contains the latest version of software.

2.4 SCADA
.1 The system monitoring and control software package shall have the following features:
.1 The software package shall be fully compatible with the control system PLC.
Provide all drivers, communication cards, etc., necessary to achieve this
compatibility.
.2 The software package shall be configured to provide for monitoring and control
of all vendor equipment connected to the plant Ethernet network.
.3 Dynamic screen graphics shall be developed providing the operator with a visual
representation of all real time dynamic process activities and statuses. Screen
graphics shall be based on the P&ID drawings and have at minimum the
following features:
.1 Graphic representations of all automation equipment, process equipment,
piping connections, HVAC systems, building systems, and standby
power systems. Features shall include all real time data and cursor
control of processes.
.2 Provide preconfigured display for daily flow totals for all flow meters to
be viewable on a single screen.
.3 All graphic screens from vendor supplied equipment shall be imported
into SCADA system screens allowing full control of the process from the
SCADA system even if remote equipment displays are not functional.
VPN into vendor panels as means of operation is not acceptable. Display
background including heading descriptions, representations (graphic) of
equipment, Engineering units and time of day clock and calendar date.
Background shall be written once during display call up unless
interactive with the process.
.4 Display foreground including all live data, setpoints, alarms and current
process variables. Foreground shall be rewritten periodically.
.5 Displays shall be multicolour and interactive. Colours shall be
assignable during configuration.
.6 Reference Table 1 and Table 2 for interfacing. SCADA/PLC interface
shall be comprehensive. Additional points may be required based on
control system operation requirements. Contractor is responsible to add
further items to create the final comprehensive tables.
.7 Any transition from Auto to Manual in the SCADA system shall not
change the operating status of the equipment. For example if a valve is
open in Auto mode and the operator selects manual mode, the valve shall
remain open on transition to manual. The operator will then have the
ability to close the valve via the “Close” button. Manual control buttons
shall be disabled in Auto Mode and shall be greyed out. All PID control
loops shall be programmed for bumpless transfer between auto->manual
or manual->auto mode. Any equipment with a modulating or analog

25 90 01.docx Stantec SCADA SYSTEM

RM of Headingley Section 25 90 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SCADA SYSTEM
Page 6 of 10

control point shall maintain its last auto-command setpoint as the manual
setpoint during the transition from auto->manual.
.8 Submit screen shots of all graphics screens at least 3 weeks prior to
commissioning for consultant review.
.4 Setpoints shall be adjustable.
.5 Trending displays shall have the following features:
.1 Combined historical and real time trending, all trended points shall be
logged into the historical trend files
.2 Historical data shall be stored and accessible for a minimum of 3 years.
.3 Point descriptors, engineering units, and configuration data for the
trended signal.
.4 Trend background to be white, trend pen colours shall be unique for each
pen on any trend.
.5 Trend screen contain print button allowing the operator to print the
current trend window.
.6 Adjustable vertical and horizontal resolution.
.7 Capability of scrolling through time: continuously and in specific time
intervals.
.8 Capability of panning and zooming both the X-axis and Y-axis with
automatic adjustment of the resolution.
.9 Cursor bar with value search.
.10 All analog inputs including those from networked instrumentation, and
those points monitored by vendor supplied equipment, and those
monitored by the SCADA system shall be trended
.11 All process control variables in the software shall be trended
.12 Setpoints for all process variables shall be trended
.13 Pre-configured trends shall be created for all logical groups of setpoints,
process variables and control variables.
.1 Example: pressure setpoint, pressure input and VFD speeds shall
all appear on the same trend screen for a given pressure control
loop.
.14 Trend data from the Power Monitor. Trend:
.1 Vab, Vbc, Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn (RMS values).
.2 Vunbalance (%), Vthd (%).
.3 Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Iresidual (RMS values).
.4 Iimbalance (%), Ithd (%), A-Phase Ih1, Ih3, Ih5, Ih11, Ih13 (%).
.5 kVA (kVA), kW (kW).
.6 kVAh (kVAh), kWh (kWh). Provide means to reset totalizers.
.7 Demand kVA (kVA). Based on: Every 15 minutes totalize
kVAh consumed during the previous 15 minutes. Multiply by 4
to derive Demand kVA value for the 15 minute interval. Record
the 15 minute Demand kVA values as a trend.
.8 Display inhibited loads on SCADA screen.

25 90 01.docx Stantec SCADA SYSTEM

RM of Headingley Section 25 90 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SCADA SYSTEM
Page 7 of 10

.9 Make load inhibit current and time setpoints adjustable.

.6 Alarm processing shall have the following features:
.1 Audible alarms defined below shall be programmed in the PLC to
“chirp”. Alarm horn on/off times to be adjustable at the SCADA system
and shall initially be set to be on for 0.5 seconds, then off for 4.5 seconds
repeated continuously any time an alarm is active and has not been
silenced.
.2 Alarm priority assignment to be operator settable from SCADA system.
Alarm Priorities to have the following action in addition to being logged
to alarm log file:
.1 Priority 1: Initiate audible and alarm light, Dial-out if alarm not
acknowledged in 120 Seconds, regardless of time of day.
.2 Priority 2: Initiate alarm light and audible alarm between 8:00am
and 5:00pm (operator settable time window). Dial-out alarm if
not acknowledged in 120 seconds. Initiate alarm light only
outside time window
.3 Priority 3: Initiate alarm light and audible alarm between
operator settable time window as set for Priority 2 alarms,
initiate alarm light and disable audible alarm outside time
window
.4 Priority 4: Log to alarm file only
.3 Alarm display graphic indicating all relevant alarm event information.
Alarm display graphic shall be accessible through a single key-stroke.
Alarm summary banner shall be visible along bottom of all system
screen graphics.
.4 Provision for acknowledgement of specific alarms or groups of alarms.
.5 On initiation of alarm the following shall occur:
.1 Flashing message display on alarm banner is activated.
.2 Alarm added to alarm summary.
.3 Alarm name, description and time stamp logged to alarm log file
on disk.
.6 On operator acknowledgement of alarm the following shall occur:
.1 Flashing message display on alarm banner is de-activated
.2 Alarm name, description and time stamp of acknowledgement
logged to alarm log file on disk.
.7 On termination of alarm the following shall occur:
.1 Alarm is removed from alarm summary. Alarm name,
description and time stamp of alarm termination logged to alarm
log file on disk.
.8 Active alarm for any instrument or piece of equipment shall cause the
equipment symbol to flash on the graphics overview screen in an
alternating red/normal colour pattern as long as the alarm is active.
.7 Report generation shall have the following features:
.1 Capability of producing shift, daily, weekly, and/or monthly reports
formatted in accordance with operator requirements.

25 90 01.docx Stantec SCADA SYSTEM

RM of Headingley Section 25 90 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SCADA SYSTEM
Page 8 of 10

.2 Capability of performing elementary process computations.

.3 The reports shall consist of summary process data, totals, averages,
maximums, minimums, etc.
.4 Provide preconfigured report for daily flow totals for all flow meters to
be viewable on a single screen or printed.
.5 Provide preconfigured report for flow totals for all flow meters to be
viewable on a single screen or printed for operator selectable date range.
.6 Provide preconfigured report for all Chlorine Analysers to be viewable
on a single screen or printed.
.7 Reports shall be preconfigured and user friendly for plant operators.
.8 Reports shall be generated by simply selecting pre-configured report and
a date range and shall not require any operator programming or macro
generation whatsoever.
.9 Reports shall be capable of being generated for any time period of
recorded data for the plant.
.10 Provide all software required for report generation to be registered to,
and turned over to Owner. Obtain licencing information from Consultant
prior to ordering software.
.11 Provide reports as requested by Office of Drinking Water (ODW) and
regulators.
.12 Programming of the SCADA system must include data management and
alarms.
.8 Security system shall have the following features:
.1 Password-based user accounts with an assigned security level
determining which displays a user can retrieve and which objects a user
can control.
.2 Dynamic action verification messages warning of potentially dangerous
consequences of specific operator actions.
.3 Event logging of all operator actions.
.4 Automatic start up on PC power up.
.9 System software shall be purchased and registered on behalf of the Owner.
Provide serial numbers and registration information to be included in O&M
manuals.

2.5 POWER MONITORING

.1 Provide manufacturer software for the power monitoring hardware. The software shall
provide the ability to acquire energy and power quality data form the power monitor, and
shall provide the user the ability to analyze, manipulate, and store data.
.2 Install software on the SCADA workstation.

2.6 REMOTE OPERATOR ACCESS

.1 Implement remote access capability when firewall included in design.
.2 Remote access capabilities:

25 90 01.docx Stantec SCADA SYSTEM

RM of Headingley Section 25 90 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SCADA SYSTEM
Page 9 of 10

.1 The user will be able to view screens or equivalent information as if they were
inside the plant accessing the HMIs.
.2 The user will be able to identify alarm status.
.3 The user will be able to identify any current alarms.
.4 The user will be able to review alarms that have been cleared, acknowledged,
silenced, etc.
.5 The user will be able to view and manipulate any trend screens available within
the HMIs.
.6 The user will NOT be able to remotely control the process or the equipment.
.3 Control Equipment:
.1 Equipment provided will be new.
.2 Suitable for minimum 15 years of service.
.3 Suitable for the application.
.4 It is anticipated that the Integrator will provide internet-based remote access
remote viewing of full process, building, alarm, and related information.
.5 Test operation of remote access and include step-by-step writeup in O&M
Manual for remote access to the system including all software used, logins,
addresses, etc.
.4 Networking:
.1 Ethernet. Cat 6.
.5 Software:
.1 Provide copies of all final programs, software configurations, etc

2.7 SYSTEM INTEGRATOR

.1 System Integrator shall be Manco Control Systems Inc, Celco Controls Ltd, Indus
Automation or Triplepoint Solutions ([email protected], ph. 289-768-3626 )

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Installation, testing, start-up and commissioning of SCADA system as described in
Section 25 05 00.
.2 SCADA system integrator shall allow for, as a minimum, the following site trips:
.1 Initial system start-up (1 weeks)
.2 System commissioning (1 weeks)
.3 Three (3) each 1-day future site trips for follow-up training and troubleshooting
during warranty period.
.3 Refer to Process Narrative for specific plant operation.
.4 Refer to section 23 09 13 for HVAC sequence of operation.

25 90 01.docx Stantec SCADA SYSTEM

RM of Headingley Section 25 90 01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SCADA SYSTEM
Page 10 of 10

.5 Configure the power monitoring software. Configure capture and storage of data. Test
the system by capturing various data such as voltage trends, current trends, harmonics
trends, and waveforms; Export reports for energy, power, and power quality; Export
data to spreadsheet.

3.2 TRAINING
.1 Refer to section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training

3.3 COMMISSIONING
.1 Refer to section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements

END OF SECTION

25 90 01.docx Stantec SCADA SYSTEM

DIVISION 26

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 1 of 26

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 A brief but not necessarily all inclusive list of works to be performed under this contract
is given herein.
.2 The Contractor shall supply all labour, material, equipment, transportation, services and
facilities necessary to make, test and place into operation a complete electrical
installation as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein.
.3 Where the term "provide" is used herein, it shall mean "supply, install, adjust, test and
place into operation".
.4 All systems shall be completely assembled, adjusted, tested and demonstrated to be ready
for operation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
.5 The Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and specifications and shall fully
inform himself/herself as to all existing conditions and limitations, including all laws,
ordinances and regulations affecting the contract and the work and shall include in his/her
tender all items implied or required to complete the work of this contract.
.6 The Contractor shall satisfy themselves as to working space, storage space, access
facilities and all other conditions pertaining to the site, relating to the conduct of their
operations, by the inspection of the site and examination of the drawings.
.7 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications to determine their effect upon the work
of this Section. All Sections of all Specification Divisions as well as appendices form part
of the Contract Documents.

1.2 EXTENT OF WORK

.1 This work shall consist of furnishing of all labour, material, equipment, and all
incidentals.
.2 Work shall include, but not be limited to:
.1 All systems shall be complete and functional.
.2 All works shall be to good practices and industry standards.
.3 All works shall be robust, tidy, and safe from mechanical injury.
.4 All works shall be suitable for the presence of water, chemicals, humidity, vapor,
sunlight, heat, cold, insects, vermin, and other environmental influences.
.5 Provide electrical works as indicated on drawings and as required for complete
functional systems.
.6 Wire to and make connections to, all electrical power and control items required,
including motors, controls, etc.
.7 Provide power & control wiring for system process and HVAC equipment.
Wiring shall generally be TECK type in cable tray.
.8 Lighting, Emergency Lighting, Intrusion Alarm System, and Office area power
systems shall be installed in conduit. No exposed conduit shall be permitted in
non-process areas including office and washroom area.
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 2 of 26

.3 Coordinate with Contractors and equipment vendors to determine the functionality,

wiring, and sequences for all equipment, and any required hardware or programming to
support any equipment. Carry out this exercise at the shop drawing stage of the project.
Assist other trades to make their shop drawings complete, coordinated, and suitable for a
proper functional implementation of the works, prior to submission of shop drawings.
Incorporate results from this coordination into own shop drawings, prior to submission.
Shop drawings from the various trades are to be coordinated, in agreement, and whole.
This coordination is to cover all works, including but not limited to,
.1 Electrical.
.2 Instrumentation.
.3 Automation.
.4 Field devices.
.5 Field equipment.
.6 Process equipment.
.7 Process packages.
.8 Packaged equipment.
.9 Control panels.
.10 HVAC.
.4 The P&ID, Electrical, and Process Drawings and these Specifications are complementary
to each other and each form a part of the contract. In the event of discrepancies between
Drawings and Specifications, the more restrictive conditions of the two shall apply,
unless a written clarification is obtained from the Consultant.
.5 Coordinate all work with other trades on the job, such that a complete functioning system
can be supplied as shown on the Drawings and Specifications for this project, and there is
no disruption to the other trades on the project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Information packages submitted for review and/or approval shall include:
.1 An index page.
.2 Have component items identified with the Specification Section and equipment
tag from the equipment and/or instrument list.
.3 Where manufacturers’ information, catalog, cut-sheet, or brochure information is
used, which list more than one style or member of a family or options, the actual
component or item being supplied shall be clearly highlighted.
.2 Submit bid pricing and approximate bid pricing breakdown on request by Consultant.
Provide total pricing, with a reasonable level of breakdown detail. Each major item and
its associated works shall be a line item (e.g., MCC; standby generator plus transfer
switch and other associated hardware; distribution equipment package of panels and
transformers; lighting; PLC control panel; SCADA station; PLC software; SCADA
software; PLC programming; SCADA programming; instrumentation; security system;
CCTV system; cable tray; significant individual wiring runs; wiring, where not
included with other line items; trenching and backfill / directional drilling; etc., plus a
line item for other works). Exact breakdown of items can be as is convenient to the

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 3 of 26

Contractor, but a reasonable level of detail is to be included. Identify material costs,

labour costs, and totals, per line item. Individual line item costs do not have to be exact
but typically are to be within +/- 15% of the amounts actually bid. If costs do not directly
reconcile with the Progress Payment line items provide clarifying commentary.

1.4 EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS

.1 The electrical drawings do not show all architectural, mechanical and structural details.
All electrical schematics are shown diagrammatically unless otherwise noted. The
Contractor shall review the mechanical, structural and architectural drawings to obtain
building dimensions and details. Verify dimensions accurately by measurements.
.2 To change the location of electrical equipment, submit a request in writing to the
Engineer for approval. If approved, such changes are to be made at no additional cost to
the Owner.
.3 No extra will be allowed for any additional labour or materials required for relocation of
equipment due to interference with equipment of other trades, beams, joists, walls, etc.,
unless the conflict has been submitted to the Engineer in writing before closing of
tenders.

1.5 APPROVED DESIGN AND INSTALLATION

.1 Equipment and material to be of approved design and manufactured in accordance with
all governing regulations such as "Canadian Standards Association", "Canadian Electrical
Code", "Provincial Department of Labour", "Underwriters Laboratory", etc. Equipment
and material must bear applicable acceptance labels of all associations and governing
bodies recognized by the municipal, provincial and federal authorities.
.2 Install equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
governing rules, regulations and codes.
.3 Where requirement conflict occurs, install all materials in accordance with the most
severe requirements.
.4 Material installed under this Division to be new and of uniform construction.
.5 All installations are to ensure maximum headroom, minimum interference with free use
of surrounding areas, and best access to equipment.
.6 To deviate major service runs from the location shown on the drawings, submit to the
Engineer suitable drawings showing such deviations together with reasons for deviations
and obtain approval from the Engineer before proceeding with the installation.

1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS

.1 All works shall comply with the more stringent of the Contract Documents and the
current editions of the Electrical Code, Building Code, and all standards and regulations
bearing on the project, including all local amendments, laws, rules, ordinances and codes.
Notify Engineer of any discrepancy between Contract Documents and regulations.
.2 Electrical installation shall be in accordance with the requirements of the local supply
authority and local inspections authority.
.3 Provide a copy of all standards referred to in this Section for use on site.
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 4 of 26

1.7 PERMITS, INSPECTIONS AND FEES

.1 Deliver to the Engineer all necessary interim and final certificates of inspection and
approval which may be required by all Inspection Authorities having jurisdiction over the
work, as evidence that the work installed conforms to the laws and regulations of all
governing authorities.
.2 Submit copies of all plans and specifications to the authority having jurisdiction for
inspections as may be required prior to commencement of work to comply with the
above.
.3 Notify the Inspection Authorities in sufficient time for them to arrange to inspect work.
.4 Pay all associated fees.

1.8 ABBREVIATIONS
.1 Abbreviations for electrical terms shall be to CSA Z85-1983.
.2 Names used throughout these specifications are:
CSA Canadian Standards Association
FM Factory Mutual
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (U.S.)
JIC Joint Industry Conference
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
ISA International Society of Automation
CEC Canadian Electrical Code
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IES Illuminating Engineering Society
NBC National Building Code
ANSI American National Standards Institute
.3 Abbreviations not identified here shall have their common industry meaning. Where
there is any doubt or dispute as to the meaning of an abbreviation, the meaning shall be
that indicated by the Engineer.

1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 01.
.2 Shop drawings submittals shall be of the highest quality.
.3 Submit shop drawings for all equipment as indicated with the exception of conduit,
standard conduit fittings and low voltage wiring.
.4 Indicate on shop drawings ratings, details of construction, dimensions, capacities,
weights, electrical performance characteristics, installation information specific to the
piece of equipment, and the application, and performance and operation information of
the equipment or material.
.5 Include wiring diagrams specific to the installation of each item, single line diagrams,
and schematic diagrams.
.6 Wiring drawings showing interconnection with work of other divisions are required.

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 5 of 26

.7 Indicate the number or letter used as an identification symbol on product data for
panelboards, lighting fixtures and other equipment.
.8 All equipment on shop drawings to be clearly identified with specific device tagging as
identified in the specifications and drawings.
.9 Review of the shop drawing by Consultant shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for errors or omissions therein.
.10 Where a shop drawing indicates a range of products or product family, the specific
product shall be clearly highlighted.
.11 Where electrical equipment requires support or backing by other trades or mechanical
connections, the shop drawings shall also be circulated through the other "services"
contractor(s) prior to submission to the Consultants.

1.10 DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS

.1 Drawings are generally diagrammatic, are intended to indicate the scope and general
arrangement of work and are not detailed installation drawings. Do not scale the
drawings.
.2 Consult the process layouts and architectural drawings and details for exact locations of
fixtures and equipment. Obtain this information from the Consultant where definite
locations are not indicated.
.3 Take field measurements, where equipment and material dimensions are dependent upon
building dimensions.

1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into maintenance manual
specified in Division 01 and as follows:
.2 Include in operations and maintenance data:
.1 Details of design elements, construction features, component function and
maintenance requirements, to permit effective operation, maintenance, repair,
modification, extension and expansion of any portion or feature of installation.
.2 Technical data, product data, supplemented by bulletins, component illustrations,
exploded views, technical descriptions of items, and parts lists. Advertising or
sales literature not acceptable.
.3 Wiring and schematic diagrams.
.4 Names and addresses of local suppliers for items included in maintenance
manuals.
.3 Include in the manual the following major sections:
.1 Title page (in plastic cover).
.2 Comprehensive description of the operation of the systems, including the
function of each item of equipment within the system.
.3 Detailed instructions for the normal maintenance of all systems and equipment
installed including procedures and frequency of operational checks and service
and trouble shooting instructions.
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 6 of 26

.4 Local source of supply for each item of equipment.

.5 Wiring and control diagrams.
.6 Spare parts list.
.7 Copies of guarantees and certificates.
.8 Manufacturer's maintenance brochures and shop drawings.
.4 The manual information shall be bound in a three “D-ring” hard back reinforced vinyl
covered ("bar lock" post type where more than 2 in rings required) binder c/w index tab
separators to divide the different sections.
.5 Submit one (1) digital and one (1) printed copy of manuals and “as-built” drawings to the
Engineer for review and approval thirty (30) days prior to start up of the systems and
equipment. Revise initial manual as required by the Engineer prior to final submission.
.6 Submit three (3) printed copies and one (1) digital copy in the final approved form.

1.12 MAINTENANCE SECTION

.1 General:
.1 Summarize data for this section from Contractor supplied maintenance
submissions, supplemented by any additional appropriate data.
.2 Include maintenance as a section of each system.
.3 Organize data into sections, with divider tabs as follows:
.1 Maintenance Tasks and Schedules
.2 Spare Parts
.3 Suppliers and Contractors
.4 Tags and Directories
.5 Maintenance Brochures
.2 Maintenance Task and Schedules:
.1 Organize data according to system category, with further breakdown into
individual systems. Provide section index and divider tabs for each system
category. Summarize maintenance tasks from maintenance manufacturer's
brochures, for each component of system in following format:
.1 Daily
.2 Weekly
.3 Monthly
.4 Semiannually
.5 Annually
.6 When required
.3 Spare Parts List:
.1 Organize data according to system category, with further breakdown into
individual systems. Provide section index and divider tabs for each system
category. Summarize maintenance tasks from maintenance manufacturer's
brochures, for each component of system.

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 7 of 26

.4 Suppliers and Contractors List:

.1 Provide summary of suppliers and contractors for each component of the system.
List name, address and telephone number of each.
.5 Maintenance Brochures:
.1 Include copies of all manufacturers' printed maintenance brochures pertaining to
each product, equipment or system. Provide section index and divider tabs.
Maximum of twenty-five sheets or one brochure per tab.

1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS

.1 Submit record drawings in accordance with Division 01.
.2 The Contractor shall record all changes made during construction and provide record
drawings to the Owner upon completion of the work.
.3 At the completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit one (1) set of record
drawings, accurately recording all changes, deviations and relocations necessitated by job
conditions and equipment approved shop drawings. Record drawings to be a single set
compilation of all site changes neatly recorded in red pencil to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
.4 Include with the record drawings a list for each motor indicating motor or equipment
number and name, nameplate voltage, horsepower and current, the size and setting of
overload and breaker or fuse protection provided.

1.14 DEFINITIONS
.1 The following are definitions of terms and expressions used in the specification:
.1 "Inspection Authority" means agent of any authority having jurisdiction over
construction and safety standards associated with any part of electrical work on
site.
.2 "Supply Authority" means electrical power company or commission responsible
for delivery of electrical power to project.
.3 "Electrical Code" means the current edition of the Manitoba Electrical Code.
The Manitoba Electrical Code includes, modifies, and gives technical advice on
the Canadian Electrical Code C22.1.
.4 "Indicated" means as shown on contract drawings or noted in contract
documents.
.2 Refer to CSA C22.2 No.0 for "Definitions and General Requirements".

1.15 COOPERATION AND COORDINATION

.1 Check drawings of all trades to verify space and headroom limitations for work to be
installed. Coordinate work with all trades and make changes to facilitate a satisfactory
installation. Make no deviations to the design intent involving extra cost to the Owner,
without the Consultant's written approval.
.2 The drawings indicate the general location and route to be followed by the electrical
services. Where details are not shown on the drawings or only shown diagrammatically,
the services shall be installed in such a way as to conserve head room and interfere as
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 8 of 26

little as possible with the free use of space through which they pass. Service lines shall
run parallel to building lines. All services in the ceiling shall be kept as tight as possible
to beams or other limiting members at high level. All electrical services shall be
coordinated in elevation to ensure that they are concealed in the ceiling or structural
space provided unless detailed otherwise on drawings.
.3 Work out jointly all interference problems on the site and coordinate all work before
fabricating or installing any material or equipment. Where necessary, produce
interference/coordination drawings showing exact locations of electrical systems or
equipment within service areas, shafts and the ceiling space. Distribute copies of the
final interference/coordination drawings to the Consultant and all affected parties.
.4 Ensure that all materials and equipment fit into the allotted spaces and that all equipment
can be properly serviced and replaced, if and when required. Advise the Consultant of
space problems before installing any material or equipment. Demonstrate to the
Consultant on completion of the work that all equipment installed can be properly, safely
serviced and replaced, if and when required.
.5 Schedule expediting of all materials and execution of work with associated work
specified in other Divisions.
.6 Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete. Sleeves through concrete shall
be schedule 40 PVC pipe, sized for free passage of conduit, and protruding 50 mm (2")
.7 Cables, conduits and fittings to be embedded or plastered over neatly and close to
building structure so furring can be kept to a minimum.
.8 Arrange for holes through exterior walls and roof to be flashed and made weatherproof.

1.16 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Arrange for a plant inspection by Engineer where specified.
.2 Inform Engineer of manufacturing progress and arrange inspections at appropriate times.
.3 Action required by factory inspection shall not be construed as final acceptance.
.4 Obtain a Certificate of Acceptance from the inspection authority on completion of work
and provide to the Engineer.
.5 The Engineer may carry out inspections and prepare deficiency lists for action by the
Contractor, during and on completion of project.

1.17 GUARANTEE
.1 Guarantee work described in this Section of the specification against all defects in labour
and materials.

1.18 CARE, OPERATION AND START-UP

.1 Instruct the Owner's operating personnel in the operation, care and maintenance of
equipment.
.2 Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service representative to supervise
start-up of installation, check, test, adjust, balance and calibrate components.

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 9 of 26

.3 Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary, to put
equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with aspects
of its care and operation.

1.19 RESPONSIBILITIES
.1 Ensure that equipment does not transmit noise and/or vibration to other parts of the
building, as a result of poor installation practice.
.2 Where the Contract Documents do not contain sufficient information for the proper
selection of equipment for bidding, notify the Consultant during the tendering period. If
clarification is not obtainable, allow for the most expensive arrangement. Failure to do
this shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to provide the intended equipment.
.3 Protect equipment and material from the weather, moisture, dust and physical damage.
.4 Cover equipment openings and open ends of conduit, piping and pullboxes as work
progresses. Failure to do so will result in the Trade being required to adequately clean or
replace materials and equipment at no extra cost to the Owner.
.5 Protect all existing services encountered. Obtain instructions from the Engineer when
existing services require relocation or modification.
.6 Restore damaged or marred factory finish to factory quality.
.7 The specifications and drawings form an integral part of the Contract Documents.
Neither the drawings nor the specifications shall be used alone. Work omitted from the
drawings but mentioned or reasonably implied in the specifications, or vice versa, shall
be considered as properly and sufficiently specified and shall be provided.
Misinterpretation of any requirement of either plans or specifications shall not relieve this
Contractor of the responsibility of properly completing his/her trade to the approval of
the Consultant.

1.20 STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE

.1 Standard of Acceptance means that item named and specified by manufacturer and/or
catalogue number forms part of specification and sets standard regarding performance,
quality of material and workmanship and when used in conjunction with a referenced
standard, shall be deemed to supplement the standard.
.2 Where two or more manufacturers are listed, the manufacturer's name shown first or
underlined or shown with a model name and/or number was used in preparing the base
design. Tenders may be based on any one of those named, provided that they meet every
aspect of the base design and every aspect of the drawings and specifications.
.3 Where other than the first named or the underlined manufacturer or scheduled/specified
manufacturer is selected or approved, include for the cost of any resulting work (both
under this Division and other Divisions) and any necessary redesign of installation or
structure. Submit redesign drawings for review with Shop Drawings. Maintain
installation, access and servicing clearances. Equipment/materials shall not exceed the
available space limitations. Redesign drawings shall be to scale and of a standard equal to
the Project Drawings.
.4 A visible manufacturer's nameplate shall indicate manufacturer's name, model number,
serial number, capacity data, electrical characteristics and approval stamps.
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 10 of 26

1.21 ADDITION OF ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

.1 Material/products considered to satisfy the specification, but of a manufacturer other than
those named may be submitted to the Consultant for consideration not later than five (5)
working days prior to closing of tender.
.2 Alternate approvals will be given in writing only. No other substitution will be permitted
after closing of tenders.
.3 Alternate approvals granted before the closing of tenders will be limited to a
manufacturer's system and/or series only. This limited approval will not preclude
substitute equipment/material from complying with specific features included with
equipment/material specified. Determine that the alternate product meets the
specification intent before basing a tender on the product
.4 Where alternate equipment/materials are selected, allow for effects on other parts of the
work of this Trade and other Trades. Where substantial changes in arrangement are
required, submit shop drawings of the proposed changes with Plan and Section views and
show effects on work of other Trades. Alternate equipment/materials shall not exceed the
available space limitations. Maintain installation, access and servicing clearances. No
extra will be allowed due to the use of alternate equipment/materials.
.5 Where two or more items of equipment and/or material, of the same type, are required,
provide products of a single manufacturer.
.6 Install and test all equipment and material, in accordance with the detailed
recommendations of the manufacturer.
.7 Alternates to materials, products, and manufacturers specified shall be in accordance with
Division 01.

Part 2 Product

2.1 GENERAL
.1 All materials shall be fully approved by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) or
cUL, unless otherwise specified, for use as installed and meet the requirements of this
specification in all respects.
.2 Where there is no alternative to supplying equipment which has CSA or cUL approval,
submit such equipment to local inspection authority having jurisdiction for special
inspection and obtain approval prior to shipment of said equipment to site. Pay all
associated fees.
.3 Materials and equipment shall be of Canadian manufacture except where specified
otherwise or where Canadian made materials or equipment do not exist.
.4 Where two or more units of the same class or type of equipment are required, the units
shall be the product of a single manufacturer, although components of equipment need
not be products of the same manufacturer.
.5 Use material and equipment available from regular production of manufacturer.
.6 Control panels and component assemblies to be shop manufactured.

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 11 of 26

.7 Supply, Mount and Install all instrument mounting stands and backboards as indicated.
.8 All current carrying equipment including but not limited to cabling, panel busbars,
transformer windings, splitters, CSTE bus bar etc shall be copper unless otherwise noted.

2.2 SHORT CIRCUIT AND TIME-CURRENT CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE

DEVICES INCLUDING STUDY
.1 Submit a complete Short Circuit and Time-Current Coordination Study for the breakers
and fuses provided under this contract as well as for the existing upstream breakers and
fuses affecting the distributions in this contract. If any existing breakers must be adjusted
for proper coordination, other breakers affected must be included in the study and
adjusted as required for proper coordination. Hydro protective devices to be included in
the study.
.1 For the new distributions include all existing upstream overcurrent protection
including the main breaker in the normal main distributions and the main breaker
in the emergency main distributions
.2 The Contractor shall provide all information as required to his supplier of service
to prepare this study. This shall include utility fault levels, feeder sizes, feeder
types, feeder lengths, transformer impedances, breaker catalogue numbers and
tripping characteristics, equipment shop drawings, etc.
.1 Obtain fault level letter from utility.
.2 Feeder types, sizes and lengths to be from the actual installation.
.3 Existing feeders, up to connection point with utility, to be included in
calculations and shown on single line diagrams.
.4 Contractor to measure each feeder length after the feeder is installed.
.5 Estimated lengths from floor plans are not acceptable.
.3 Curves shall be plotted on a standard log-log scale as time versus current values
on a common 600 Volt base. It shall be the responsibility of the Division 26
contractor to provide time-current curves of all breakers, fuses, etc.
.4 The study shall:
.1 Select settings and characteristics for the protective devices in order to
achieve maximum selectivity between devices during fault conditions
(ie. the device nearest the fault will operate first, thus minimizing the
interruption) and to provide proper protection for all distribution
equipment, transformers, cable, etc.
.2 Determine the fault currents at critical points in the power system under
the worst case conditions in order to ensure the adequacy of the electrical
equipment and protective devices. Motor contribution is to be taken into
account. All devices must be fully rated.
.3 Include all breakers in CDP type panelboards. Breaker settings shall be
listed in the study for all breakers with adjustable trips.
.5 In addition to the curves for the protective devices, each drawing shall show and
include proper protection and coordination for:
.1 Transformer inrush points.
.2 Transformer full load currents.
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 12 of 26

.3 Transformer damage curves (single phase and three phase).

.4 Generator decrement curve.
.5 Generator short circuit contribution.
.6 Cable damage curves.
.7 The largest motor or motors likely to present coordination problems.
.6 All required breaker settings shall be listed in table form including breaker details
such as breaker type, trip rating, etc. All breakers with adjustable trips shall be
included in this list.
.7 Maximum available short circuit currents shall be listed for each bus. This listing
shall also include the interrupting rating of the protective devices actually
supplied in the contract.
.8 In all cases use actual cable types, cable sizes and cable lengths.
.9 Use infinite transformer primary fault levels at utility transformer and actual
transformer impedance of the installed transformers.
.10 Identification names and numbers for breakers and distribution in the study shall
match the identification shown on the contract documents.
.11 The short circuit and coordination study shall be done by a Professional Engineer
licensed in the Province of Manitoba and the study shall be signed and sealed by
the Professional Engineer.
.12 Where there is a generator set, the study shall include the generator breakers.
.13 Where there is equipment such as power factor correction panels with incoming
breakers, include these breakers in the study.
.14 As a minimum, the study shall be bound in a 3-ring loose leaf binder and shall
include:
.1 A title sheet listing the study name, project name, project number, date,
engineering company that prepared the study (including address and
phone number), the engineers seal and signature, etc.
.2 Table of Contents.
.3 Purpose of the study.
.4 The criteria for determining proper selective coordination, protection,
adequacy, etc. (eg. describe when coordination is achieved,
minimum/maximum tripping times and current values, separation
between curves, safety margins, damage curves, etc.).
.5 Summary stating that proper selective coordination, proper protection,
adequacy of the equipment for the maximum available short circuit
currents, etc. was achieved and listing any areas of compromise,
potential problems, marginal adequacies, etc.
.6 Drawings of the breaker curves showing proper selective coordination,
protection, adequacies, etc. On each drawing, include a single line
diagram of the distribution for the curves shown on the drawing, breaker
settings, etc.
.7 Maximum available short circuit currents at each bus.
.8 Provide one copy of CD complete with accompanying software.

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 13 of 26

.9 Single line diagrams showing fault levels at each bus, existing (where
present) and new.
.10 Single line diagrams to include exiting feeders up to connection point
with utility.
.15 The study shall be started immediately on award of contract and shall be
submitted as a shop drawing for review in advance of distribution shop drawings.
.16 In cases such as primary breaker protection for transformers. Provide breakers
with fully adjustable solid state trips(fully and independently adjustable L, S, I
and G settings) for transformers 45 kVa and larger in order to allow proper
coordination. Costs for this shall be included in the tender price. For transformer
breakers on emergency power, breakers to be as specified above except that
ground fault element is not to be provided.
.17 All breakers shall be set per the curves in the coordination study.
.18 The Short Circuit and Time-Current Coordination Study (revised to as-built
conditions) shall be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

2.3 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS

.1 Scope
.1 The scope of the studies shall include all new distribution equipment supplied by
the equipment Manufacturer under this contract.
.1 The Contractor shall provide all information as required for supplier of
service to prepare this study. This shall include feeder sizes, feeder types,
feeder lengths, transformer impedances, breaker catalogue numbers and
tripping characteristics, equipment shop drawings, etc.
.2 Feeder types, sizes and lengths to be from the actual installation.
.3 Contractor to measure each feeder length after the feeder is installed.
.4 Estimated lengths from floor plans are not acceptable.
.5 Actual transformer impedances shall be used.
.6 All breakers shall be set by the Contractor per the curves in the
coordination study.
.2 References
.1 IEEE 141 - Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution and
Coordination of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
.2 IEEE 242 - Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of Industrial
and Commercial Power Systems.
.3 IEEE 399 - Recommended Practice for Industrial and Commercial Power System
Analysis.
.4 IEEE 241 - Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial
Buildings.
.5 IEEE 1015 - Recommended Practice for Applying Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers
Used in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
.6 IEEE 1584 - Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations.
.7 CSA Z462 - Workplace Electrical Safety.
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 14 of 26

.8 ANSI Z535.4 - Product Safety Signs and Labels.

.3 Submittals For Construction
.1 Arc flash labels shall be provided in hard copy only and affixed to the relevant
switchgear.
.4 Qualifications
.1 The equipment manufacturer or approved engineering firm shall demonstrate
experience with Arc Flash Hazard Analysis by submitting names of at least ten
actual arc flash hazard analysis it has performed in the past year.
.5 Studies
.1 The contractor shall furnish an Arc Flash Hazard Analysis Study report and
schematics (including calculations) per Z462 - Workplace Electrical Safety,
Annex D.
.6 Arc Flash Hazard Analysis
.1 The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the equations that
are presented in Z462 - Workplace Electrical Safety, Annex D.
.2 The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all
significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards,
switchgear, motor-control centers, panelboards, disconnect switches, variable
frequency drives, capacitor banks, busway, splitters, etc.) where work could be
performed on energized parts.
.3 The Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis shall include all significant locations where work
could be performed on energized parts.
.4 Safe working distances shall be based upon the calculated arc flash boundary
considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.
.5 When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the
phase overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit and
coordination study model. Ground overcurrent relays should not be taken into
consideration when determining the clearing time when performing incident
energy calculations.
.6 The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations
for multiple system scenarios must be compared and the greatest incident energy
must be uniquely reported for each equipment locations. Calculations must be
performed to represent the maximum and minimum contributions of fault current
magnitude for all normal and emergency operating conditions. The minimum
calculations will assume that the utility contribution is at a minimum and will
assume a minimum motor contribution (all motors off). Conversely, the
maximum calculation will assume a maximum contribution from the utility and
will assume the maximum amount of motors to be operating. Calculations shall
take into consideration the parallel operation of synchronous generators with the
electric utility, where applicable.
.7 Infinite utility fault levels shall not be used.
.8 The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy over
time when performing arc flash calculation on buses with multiple sources.
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 15 of 26

Iterative calculations must take into account the changing current contributions,
as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from
motors and generators should be decremented as follows:
.1 Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered
beyond 3-5 cycles.
.2 Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be
decayed to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible
(e.g. contributions from permanent magnet generators will typically
decay from 10 per unit to 3 per unit after 10 cycles).
.9 For each equipment location with a separately enclosed main device (where there
is adequate separation between the line side terminals of the main protective
device and the work location), calculations for incident energy and flash
protection boundary shall include both the line and load side of the main breaker.
.10 When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker
(as required per above), the line side and load side contributions must be included
in the fault calculations.
.11 Mis-coordination should be checked amongst all devices within the branch
containing the immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location
and the calculation should utilize the fastest device to computer the incident
energy for the corresponding location.
.12 Arc Flash calculations shall be based on actual overcurrent protective device
clearing time. Maximum clearing time will be capped at 2 seconds based on
IEEE 1584-2002 section B.1.2. Where it is not physically possible to move
outside of the flash protection boundary in less than 2 seconds during an arch
flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the specific location shall be
utilized.
.13 Incident energy and flash protection boundary calculations
.1 Arcing fault magnitude
.2 Protective device clearing time
.3 Duration of arc
.4 Arc flash boundary
.5 Working distance
.6 Incident energy
.7 Hazard Risk Category
.8 Recommendations for arc flash energy reduction
.7 Field Adjustment
.1 Arc Flash Warning Labels
.1 The contractor of the Arc Flash Hazard Analysis shall provide a 4in. x
6in. thermal transfer type label of high adhesion polyester for each work
location analyzed.
.2 All labels will be based on recommended overcurrent device settings and
will be provided after the results of the analysis have been presented to
Consultant and after any system changes, upgrades or modifications have
been incorporated in the system.
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 16 of 26

.3 The label shall be as specified in Figure Q.3 of CSA Z462, Workplace

Electrical Safety. In addition to the requirements specified in Figure Q.3,
provide information on the equipment location (i.e. Room Name and
Number) following after “Equipment Name”:
.4 Label Colours:
.1 Danger labels need to have the word “DANGER” in safety white
letters on a safety red background;
.2 Warning labels need to have the word “WARNING” in safety
black letters on a safety Orange background; and
.3 If a safety alert symbol is used, it needs to be the same colour as
the signal word lettering and the exclamation mark needs to be
the same colour as the signal word panel background.
.5 Labels shall be machine printed, with no field markings.
.6 Arc flash labels shall be provided in the following manner and all labels
shall be based on recommended overcurrent device settings. For
additions to existing distribution system, all existing electrical
distributions upstream of the new panels up to point of common coupling
shall be labelled.
.1 For each 600 volt CDP type panelboard, one arc flash label shall
be provided. For double tub 600V CDP’s, one arc flash label
shall be provided.
.2 For each motor control centre, one arc flash label shall be
provided. Do not label each individual starter.
.3 For each 120/208V panelboard, one arc flash label shall be
provided. For double and or multiple section panelboards, one
arc flash label shall be provided.
.4 For each disconnect switch, splitter, capacitor bank, variable
frequency drive, etc., one arc flash label shall be provided.
.5 For each switchgear, one arc flash label shall be provided. Do
not label each individual section or breaker cell.
.6 For medium voltage switchgear, one arc flash label shall be
provided. Do not label each individual section, switch or
breaker.
.7 Labels shall be field installed by Electrical Contractor. A label needs to
be readily visible to the worker and alert the worker to the potential
hazard in time to make appropriate action.
.8 NOTE: Persons who will be producing and/or installing arc flash and
shock warning labels should consult ANSI Z535.4 to ensure that all
applicable requirements of ANSI Z535.4 are met.
.8 Arc Flash Training
.1 The contractor shall train the Owner’s personnel of the potential arc flash hazards
associated with working on energized.
.9 Acceptable Supplier of Service
.1 Schneider
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 17 of 26

.2 Eaton
.3 Approved Equal

2.4 ARC FLASH SAFETY LABELLING

.1 Provide arc flash labeling on electrical equipment in accordance with CSA – Z462

2.5 SPRINKLER PROOF REQUIREMENTS

.1 All equipment and wiring systems shall be sprinkler proof where sprinkler fire protection
systems are installed.
.2 In rooms where electrical equipment is installed surface mounted, electrical equipment
contained in these rooms to be protected by non-combustible driphoods, shields, and
gasketed doors as applicable to inhibit water ingress into electrical equipment. Exposed
conduits connected to equipment to utilize watertight connectors. Top entry to be
avoided where possible
.3 In particular all transformer, switchgear, motor control and panelboard shop drawings
shall be certified 'sprinkler proof' design.

2.6 FINISH
.1 Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and
outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel.
.1 Paint outdoor electrical equipment "equipment green" finish.
.2 Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light grey to ANSI 61.
.2 Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during
shipment or installation, to match original paint.
.3 Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent
rusting.

2.7 VOLTAGE RATINGS

.1 Operating voltages to be within those defined in the current edition of CSA Standard
C235.
.2 All motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate
satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard.
Equipment must be able to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above
standard without damage to equipment.

2.8 WIRING TERMINATIONS

.1 All devices used for termination of wiring must be suitable for copper conductors, where
copper is used, and for aluminum conductors, where aluminum is used.

2.9 ENCLOSURES
.1 Minimum enclosure type to be used is NEMA 12 gasketed nonventilated for ordinary
environments, NEMA 4X for wet or corrosive environments, NEMA 7 for hazardous
locations or NEMA 3R for outdoor installations unless otherwise indicated.
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 18 of 26

2.10 MANUFACTURERS AND ELECTRICAL CERTIFICATION LABELS

.1 Manufacturers’ nameplate and electrical certification labels (CSA, cUL, etc.) labels are to
be visible and legible after equipment is installed.
.2 These nameplates shall be in place before equipment is shipped to site.
.3 On-site approvals will not be acceptable unless express written consent is obtained, prior
to the shipment of the equipment to site, from the Engineer. Costs related to on-site
approvals will be the responsibility of the contractor.

2.11 WARNING SIGNS

.1 As specified and to meet requirements of Electrical Inspection Department and Engineer.
.2 Minimum size 178mm x 254mm
.3 All electrical equipment or items with multipale power sources shall have warning signs
firmly attached indicating at a minimum “WARNING: FED FROM MULTIPLE
POWER SOURCES” and indicate all of the power source circuit ID’s. The warning label
shall be indicated in a conspicuous location on the equipment.

2.12 SINGLE LINE ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS

.1 Provide single line electrical diagram and Hazardous Classification Plan(s) in glazed
frames as follows:
.1 Updated electrical power distribution system: locate in all electrical rooms, next
to the primary electrical room entrance/exit as indicated on the Architectural life
safety plan.
.2 Indicate, by drawing attention to in an easily understood manner, the electrical
equipment installed within the electrical room that the single-line electrical
diagram is placed.
.2 Drawing: Architectural Size E, 48 inches x 36 inches minimum size.

2.13 IDENTIFICATION OF UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS

.1 Provide permanently secured lamacoid labels as required.
.2 Mark each label, prior to permanent mounting, with the information as indicated.

2.14 PLYWOOD MOUNTING BOARDS AND CHANNEL STRUTS

.1 Surface wall mounted panelboards and other electrical equipment and control panels in
the electrical room shall be installed on plywood mounting boards or channel struts.
Boards and channel struts shall be provided under this section of the specifications, sized
to suit equipment indicated and/or implied.
.2 Plywood mounting boards shall consist of 20 mm fir plywood fastened securely to wall.
.3 Plywood mounting boards, strapping and trim shall be treated with wood preservative
prior to installation and painted with one coat of primer and two coats of grey enamel
ASA61. Painting shall be completed before any electrical equipment is mounted on the
plywood.

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 19 of 26

.4 Plywood shall be painted with fire retardant paint on one face and edges. Label facing
outwards for ease of identification.
.5 Service entrance equipment shall be spaced from the plywood mounting boards to the
satisfaction of the inspection authorities.
.6 Small standalone enclosures, or enclosures in process areas, outdoors, or other areas
subject to moisture or humidity, are to be mounted using channel of type suitable for the
area and as specified anywhere in drawings and specs.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 WORKMANSHIP
.1 Where sheet metal enclosures are not provided with knockouts, Greenlee punches shall
be used in all cases. Cutting torches shall not be used for making holes.

.2 Install equipment, conduits and cables in a workmanlike manner to present a neat

appearance to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Install conduit and cable runs parallel
and perpendicular to building lines, in chases, behind furring or above ceilings, where
such concealment is possible. In areas where systems are to be exposed, install neatly and
group in a tidy appearance.

3.2 LOCATION OF OUTLETS

.1 Do not install recessed outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150mm horizontal
clearance between boxes.

.2 Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed 3
meters, and information is given before installation.

.3 Locate light switches on latch side of doors.

3.3 RELOCATION OF EQUIPMENT

.1 Consider the location of luminaries fixtures, outlets, process and HVAC instruments and
other mechanical and electrical items (MCC, Lighting Panel, Distribution Panels, Control
Cabinets, cable tray, disconnect switches) indicated on Drawings as approximate and
may be moved by the consultant up to 3000 mm from location shown without change to
Contract Price, provided notice is given to Contractor before related work has
commenced.

.2 Locate equipment to provide minimum interference and maximum usable space, and in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation for safety, access, and maintenance.

.3 All locations of electrical equipment shall be confirmed by the contractor at the

commencement of the project and prior to installation of house keeping pads, otherwise
contractor cannot claim for additional coasts.

.4 Inform the Consultant of:

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 20 of 26

.1 Conflicting installation requirements. Install as directed.

.2 An impending installation. Install as directed.
.3 Submit field drawings to indicate relative position of various services and
equipment when required by Consultant.

3.4 INSTALLATION
.1 Determine manufacturers' recommendations regarding storage and installation of
equipment and adhere to these recommendations.
.2 Check all factory joints and tighten where necessary to ensure continuity.

3.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

.1 Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless
specified or indicated otherwise.
.2 Exact mounting height of unnoted equipment must be verified with Engineer before
proceeding with installation.
.3 Install electrical equipment at heights listed below unless otherwise indicated. (All
heights in millimetres from finished floor unless indicated):
.1 Local Switches: 1200
.2 Wall Receptacles:
.1 General in office areas: 400 mm.
.2 General in plant and service areas: 1000 mm.
.3 Lower point of baseboard heater: 200 mm.
.4 Above top of counters or counter splash backs: 150 mm.
.3 Electrical Unit Heaters : 2400 (minimum)
.4 Voice and data communication outlets: same height as nearest receptacle.
.5 Panelboards, elevation to the top of breaker switches inside the panel: 1800
.6 Control Cabinets elevation to the top: 1800
.7 Emergency Lights: 2400 (minimum)
.8 Fire alarm audible/visual devices: 3600 mm above floor or 300 mm below
ceiling, whichever is lower.
.4 All dimensions indicated are as measured to the top of the device above finished floor
elevation.

3.6 LOAD BALANCE

.1 Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at time of
acceptance. Adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of
current between phases and record changes.
.2 Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of rated voltage
of equipment.

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 21 of 26

.3 Submit, at completion of work, report listing phase and neutral currents on panelboards,
dry-core transformers and motor control centres, operating under normal load. State hour
and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test

3.7 SPECIAL PROTECTION

.1 Accept the responsibility to protect those working on the project from any physical
danger due to exposed electrically energized equipment such as panel mains, outlet
wiring, etc. Shield and mark all live parts "LIVE - 600 VOLTS" or with the appropriate
voltage.
.2 Arrange for the installation of temporary doors, barriers, etc., for all electrical equipment.
Keep these doors locked at all times except when under direct supervision.
.3 Where other site work occurs that creates dust, condensing humidity, or corrosive fumes
ensure that all electrical components are protected from exposure to said hazards in order
to preserve the serviceability and integrity of the electrical systems.

3.8 FIREPROOFING
.1 Where sleeves or openings are installed in walls, floors, roof or partitions to
accommodate raceways, cables or bus duct, provide all necessary seals, fittings, barriers
and fire-resistant materials to restore the installation to its original fire rating to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner's insurance underwriters.

3.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

.1 Supply and install identification nameplates on all equipment such as motor starters,
safety switches, panelboards, pushbutton stations, etc. and any equipment not so supplied.
All nameplates shall be securely fastened to equipment with stainless steel screws.
.2 All identification nameplates, except for motors, shall be laminated phenolic with
minimum 6 mm (1/4 inch) black letters on white background, the wording of which shall
be identical to that on the single line diagrams and the title of the equipment controlled.
Motor nameplates to be of non-corroding metal stamped or engraved with black lettering
on light background.
.3 Warning nameplates shall be laminated phenolic with minimum 6 mm (1/4 inch) white
letters on red background, the wording to be reviewed by the Engineer. All warning
nameplates to be screwed to equipment.
.4 Warning nameplates required by Inspection Authorities shall be provided for all electrical
switchgear and equipment and on access doors to electrical rooms, vaults, switchyards,
etc. in accordance with the applicable Code regulations. Obtain all necessary details
from the Inspection Authorities.
.5 Where wording not specified on the drawings, obtain exact wording from the Engineer.
.6 Install Underground Installation labels as required by the Inspection Authority in the
Electrical Code.
.7 Identify pull boxes, terminal cabinets and junction boxes enclosing cables or connections
with nameplates indicating voltage, box number and circuit number.

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 22 of 26

.8 Provide junction boxes, relay panels and miscellaneous equipment energized from two or
more sources with a warning nameplate prominently displayed, noting number and
location of sources and their voltage.
.9 Provide a typewritten circuit directory with a clear plastic cover for each panelboard in a
suitable holder on the inside of each panel door. Unless otherwise noted, the directory
shall indicate breaker or switch circuit number, rating, load description and associated
load data.
.10 Manufacturer's nameplates and electrical certification labels to be visible and legible after
equipment is installed.

3.10 WIRING IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, either numbered or
coloured plastic tapes, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit
wiring.
.2 Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.
.3 Colour code: to CSA C22.1.
.4 Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.

3.11 CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION

.1 Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables.
.2 Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling, or
floor, and at 15 m intervals.
.3 Colours: 1” wide prime colour and ¾” wide auxiliary colour.
Prime Auxiliary
up to 250 V Yellow
up to 600 V Yellow Green
up to 15 kV Yellow Red
Telephone Green
Other Communication Green Blue
Systems
Fire Alarm Red
Security Systems Red Yellow

3.12 TOUCH-UP PAINTING

.1 Be responsible for field touch-up painting of all shop painted electrical equipment
installed in this Contract.
.2 All surfaces to be painted shall be dry, clean, free from dust, dirt, grease, frost, rust, loose
crystals or extraneous matter, tool and machine marks. Feather out edges of scratch
marks to make patch inconspicuous.
.3 Apply one or more coats of paint until the damaged surface has been restored to original
finish condition. Do not apply succeeding coats until preceding coat is dry and hard.
Sand lightly between coats with No. 00 sandpaper.
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 23 of 26

.4 Be responsible for obtaining the necessary touch-up paint of the original type and quality
from the equipment manufacturer.
.5 Supervise priming and finish painting of all electrical equipment and material not shop
painted.

3.13 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS

.1 Provide sleeves and openings for exposed conduits, busways, and wireways, where they
pass through walls or floors conforming to relevant fire codes where applicable.
.2 Sleeves for individual conduits shall be galvanized steel in ordinary areas or stainless
steel in corrosive environments.
.3 Pack or fill sleeves and openings after the completed work is in place. Filling shall
provide a waterproof seal to prevent leakage of water or other liquids through the sleeve
or opening. For larger gaps (1/2” of larger) to use spray foam insulation to seal opening
and an escutcheon plate over for protection from the elements. For smaller gaps, an
exterior rated silicone should be used. Use cap plate for improved looks (matches the
color of the adjacent panel).”
.4 Sleeves and openings shall not displace reinforcing steel, and shall receive approval of
the Engineer prior to placement.

3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING

.1 Do all drilling, cutting, fitting and patching necessary for the running and securing of
conduits, cable tray, wireways, and other electrical equipment.
.2 Provide supports necessary for same.
.3 Provide bracing and anchorage of work subject to Engineer's approval.
.4 No cutting of the structural members or of their fireproofing shall be done without the
written consent of the Engineer.
.5 Caulk and flash all conduits passing through walls, roofs or other surfaces exposed to
weather or as indicated on the drawings to prevent the passage of water and/or sewer
gases.

3.15 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

.1 Provide hangers, angles, channels, and other supports necessitated by field conditions to
install all items of electrical equipment. Design of supports and methods of fastening to
building structures shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval.
.2 All local motor control devices are to be grouped and mounted on a free-standing frame
of stainless steel construction easily accessible and as close to the motor as possible.
.3 Provide weight-distribution facilities, where required, so as not to exceed the load-
bearing capacities of floors or walls that bear the weight of, or support, electrical items.
.4 Paint all exposed parts of hangers and supports with an rust inhibiting primer.
.5 Equipment shall not be held in place by its own weight. Provide base anchor fasteners in
each case.

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 24 of 26

3.16 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT

.1 Protect conduit and wireway openings against the entrance of foreign matter by means of
plugs or caps.
.2 Fixtures, materials, equipment, or devices damaged prior to final acceptance of the work
shall be restored to their original condition or replaced by the Contractor.

3.17 TESTING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

.1 General
.1 Prior to the Engineer’s acceptance, all electrical equipment, materials and
systems installed shall be subject to an inspection and applicable performance
tests supervised by the Engineer to ensure that the operation of the system and
components satisfy the requirements of the Specifications.
.2 Ensure that the system and its components are ready prior to the inspection and
test for acceptance.
.3 All testing shall be conducted by fully qualified personnel only. Tests requiring
initial power energization of a system shall not be made without notification of
the Engineer. Tests, checks and the like carried out by or on behalf of the
Contractor shall be documented and certified at no additional cost to the Owner.
.4 Carefully check wiring for each system and/or part of a system to ensure that the
system will function properly as indicated by wiring and schematic diagrams,
description of operation, etc.
.5 Manually operate alarms and control devices to check whether their operation
during normal and abnormal operating conditions causes the proper effect.
.6 In addition to tests on purely electrical systems, supply the necessary labour and
equipment for operational tests required by other Divisions where electrical
services are involved and make final adjustments to the electrical controls at no
additional cost to the Owner.
.7 Perform tests on auxiliary or specialized systems with the assistance of the
manufacturer's representative. Upon successful conclusion of the tests, obtain a
certificate from the manufacturer stating that the system has been installed to
their satisfaction and that it is in good working order.
.8 Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays and fuses are
installed to values and settings as indicated.
.2 Conduct and pay for following tests:
.1 Power distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load
balancing.
.2 Circuits originating from branch distribution panels.
.3 Lighting and its control.
.4 Emergency lighting.
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 25 of 26

.5 Motors, heaters and associated control equipment including sequenced operation

of systems where applicable.
.6 Systems: fire alarm system, voice and data communication, access control,
security, video surveillance.
.3 Furnish manufacturer's certificate or letter confirming that entire installation as it pertains
to each system has been installed to manufacturer's instructions.
.4 Insulation resistance testing.
.1 Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V instrument.
.2 Megger 350-600 V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000 V instrument.
.3 Check resistance to ground before energizing.
.5 Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during
and at conclusion of project.
.6 Submit test results for Engineer's review.
.7 Refer to 01 90 00 – Equipment Installation

3.18 CABLE AND WIRE 1000 VOLT AND BELOW

.1 Tests on cables in this voltage range shall be limited to insulation resistance
measurements using a 500V megger for systems up to 350V and a 1000V megger for
351-600V systems.
.2 All testing to be completed prior to connection of equipment, with cable ends suitably
isolated to prevent accidental contact with equipment. Under no circumstances shall
testing be completed with wires/cables connected.
.3 Record all test results in a log book and submit to the Engineer for reference. Replace or
repair all circuits, which do not meet minimum requirements specified in the Electrical
Code, Table 24. Insulation resistance of the following circuits shall be measured:
.1 Power, lighting and motor feeders: phase-to- phase, phase-to-neutral and
phase-to- ground.
.2 Control circuits: measure to ground only.

3.19 GROUNDING SYSTEM

.1 Test the grounding system efficacy for compliance with the Electrical Code and the
Supply Authority requirements. Record the resistance of each ground electrode group.
Report the test results to the Engineer for review and approval prior to energizing the
system.
.2 Notify Inspection and Supply Authorities so that they may be present to witness
Contractor testing, and provide any assistance required by these Authorities for their own
testing procedures.
.3 Visual and Mechanical Inspection
.1 Inspect expose ground conductor and connections.
.2 Inspect ground rod viewport.
.3 Dig to expose to underground ground rods and connections, review condition
26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -
ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS – ELECTRICAL
Page 26 of 26

.4 Ensure proper connections are made to all exposed switchgear, structures,

transformers, fences, gates, and other items per OESC section 36.
.4 Electrical Tests
.1 Perform fall of potential or alternative test in accordance with IEEE Standard 81
on the main grounding electrode or system.
.2 Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main
grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, system neutral,
and/or derived neutral points.
.5 Test Values
.1 The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground should be no
greater than five ohms for commercial or industrial systems and one ohm or less
for generating or transmission station grounds unless otherwise specified by
CNL. (Reference ANSI/IEEE Standard 142)
.2 Investigate point-to-point resistance values which exceed 0.5 ohm.

3.20 TRAINING
.1 Provide for the training of the Owner's representatives in the operation, maintenance and
testing of all systems and equipment including the provision of qualified manufacturer's
technical representatives for specialized systems.
.2 Refer to Section 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training

3.21 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

.1 Ship and store equipment as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
.2 Ship channel bases and anchor stencils in advance of equipment.
.3 Keep equipment doors locked. Protect equipment from damage, dust and weather during
shipping and storage.
.4 Block moving parts when necessary to prevent damage during movement and shipment
of equipment. Instructions to remove blocking before putting equipment in service to be
clearly and conspicuously displayed.
.5 Store all electrical equipment indoors. Temperature sensitive equipment to be stored in
heated spaces. All equipment shall be stored to manufactures recommendations.

3.22 COMMISSIONING
.1 Refer to 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements

END OF SECTION

26 05 00_.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS -

ELECTRICAL
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 21
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WIRE AND CABLE (0 – 1000 V)
Page 1 of 6

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All Sections of all Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents inclusive form
part of the Contract Documents.
.4 All wire and cable shall have CSA, cUL, or cETL certification.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 25 05 00 for project electrical scope of work.
.2 Furnish all labour, materials, supervision, equipment and services specified herein,
indicated or requested to install the complete wiring systems including, but not limited to:
.1 Low voltage wire and cable (1000V and below)
.2 Control wiring
.3 The wiring system shall include all wiring, terminations, wire markers, cable tags, cable
ties, splice fittings, insulating tapes, connectors and miscellaneous materials necessary to
complete the wiring system both functionally, and to the Electrical Code.

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 Follow TIA/EIA-568 standards and best practices of structured cabling.

Part 2 Products

2.1 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE 1000 VOLT AND BELOW

.1 All wire shall have stranded, annealed copper, cross linked polyethylene (XLPE)
insulation, minus 40°C, 90°C maximum conductor temperature, limited flame spread.
.2 Except where otherwise stated, the minimum conductor insulation rating shall be equal to
or greater than the highest voltage to which the insulation may be exposed, but in no case
less than 300V.
.3 The wiring shall be suitable for installation in wet environment and rated RW 90.
.4 Wiring in hazardous locations shall be suitable for the area and shall be provided with
seals to Code.
.5 For direct buried installations, or for installation in direct buried polyethylene pipe, the
cable shall be cross linked polyethylene.
.6 Minimum conductor size shall be #12 AWG unless otherwise specified. #14 AWG
copper may be used for control wiring.

26 05 21.docx Stantec WIRE & CABLE (0-1000V)

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 21
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WIRE AND CABLE (0 – 1000 V)
Page 2 of 6

.7 Use GTF fixture wire, 600-volt, 125°C, flexible copper conductor for all connections
between lighting fixtures and outlet boxes.
.8 Colour coding of insulated conductors shall conform to the following:
Single Phase Systems
Phase A Red
Phase B Black
Neutral White
Ground Green
Three Phase Four Wire Systems
Phase A Red
Phase B Black
Phase C Blue
Neutral White
Ground Green
.9 Insulated ground conductors forming part of a multi-conductor cable assembly shall have
green colour coding.
.10 Cable and wire shall be as manufactured by:
.1 For copper: Nexans Canada, Phillips Cables Ltd., Prysmian FP, General Cable
Inc., Southwire

2.2 TECK CABLE

.1 Conductors:
.1 Grounding conductor: copper
.2 Circuit conductors: copper, size as indicated
.2 Insulation:
.1 Chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene rated 600-volt
.1 RW90 for normal and wet locations
.2 RWU90 for buried locations
.3 Inner Jacket: polyvinyl chloride material (Teck cable)
.4 Armor: interlocking aluminum
.5 Overall covering PVC material, colour black, flame retardant, FT4 rated, AG14.
.6 Fastenings:
.1 One-hole straps to secure surface cables 50 mm and smaller. Two-hole straps for
cables larger than 50 mm. All straps to have inert spacers between spacer and
concrete.
.2 Channel type supports for two or more cables.
.3 Minimum 3/8" (6mm) diameter threaded rods, or larger per manufacturer’s
guidelines to support the load carried upon suspended channels.
26 05 21.docx Stantec WIRE & CABLE (0-1000V)
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 21
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WIRE AND CABLE (0 – 1000 V)
Page 3 of 6

.4 All fastenings and supports must:

.1 Suit the environment in which they are installed, per Electrical Code, and
as outlined in section 26 05 00
.2 Be compatible with the strut, channel, and/or cable tray with which they
are in contact per the manufacturer’s instructions
.7 Connectors:
.1 Watertight approved for Teck cables.
.2 Suitable for hazardous location, as required.
.8 Lugs:
.1 Listed by CSA, cUL, or ETL for use with Copper conductors and sized to accept
conductors of the ampacity specified.

2.3 VFD POWER CABLES

.1 1kV rated cable to current revision of CSA C22.2 No 123 and CSA C22.2 No 174
designed to reduce high frequency noise interference with data and control signals.
.2 Three bonding conductors – soft bare copper.
.3 Cross-linked polyethylene RW90 insulation on main conductors.
.4 Continuously corrugated, corrosion resistant aluminum sheath with matching connectors.
.5 Overall PVC jacket rated CSA FT4.
.6 VFD Power cables shall be provided for all motor circuits that include a VFD.
.7 Acceptable manufacturer shall be Nexans DriveRx VFD Cable, General Cable CCW
Type 9675 or approved equal.

2.4 RTD CABLES

.1 16-stranded copper.
.2 No. 18 AWG
.3 Belfoil aluminum polyester shield.
.4 Twisted and shielded construction.
.5 Bare No.20 AWG copper drain wire
.6 The wiring composition shall match that of the device to which it is attached.
.7 Belden 8770 or approved equal.

2.5 ETHERNET CABLING

.1 All Ethernet cabling shall be CAT 6, round, unshielded, unless otherwise specified.
Where field-installed terminations must be used, they shall use CAT 6 connectors with
load bars (separately installed, or integral to the connector).
.2 Conductors may be 24 or 26 AWG. Selected AWG shall be used throughout the project
for fixed runs between equipment locations.
.3 Cables for fixed runs between equipment locations shall use solid conductors.

26 05 21.docx Stantec WIRE & CABLE (0-1000V)

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 21
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WIRE AND CABLE (0 – 1000 V)
Page 4 of 6

.4 Patch cables, under 10m, between equipment in a given panel, MCC, or from wall outlets
to PCs shall use stranded conductors for flexibility.
.5 The tightest bend radius of the cable during and after installation shall be no less than 5
times the cable diameter.
.6 Any Ethernet cable that runs in air circulation spaces (ducts, suspended ceilings, etc.),
and is not enclosed in conduit, shall be plenum rated.
.7 8P8C connectors shall be CSA, cUL, or cETL certified. They shall match the cable type
(unshielded or shielded).
.8 The crimping tool and associated dies shall be selected to match the 8P8C connectors to
avoid connector damage during crimping.
.9 Field-terminated 8P8C end connectors shall be selected so that the contact type matches
the conductor type. Solid conductors require contacts for solid conductors, and stranded
conductors require contacts for stranded conductors; the two types are not
interchangeable. A universal style may be used, but shall be explicitly made for universal
application.
.10 Factory pre-made and field-terminated cables both shall use the 568A termination pattern
as shown:

T568A
T568A Color Pin Pin Position
Pair
3 white/green stripe 1
3 green solid 2
2 white/orange stripe 3
1 blue solid 4
1 white/blue stripe 5
2 orange solid 6
4 white/brown stripe 7
4 brown solid 8

2.6 WIRING ACCESSORIES

.1 Wire markers, black letters on white background, shall be heat shrink type as
manufactured by Critchley or Brady.
.2 Cable markers for cables or conductors greater than 13 mm (1/2 inch) diameter, shall be
strap-on type, rigid PVC, black letters on white background.
.3 Terminal blocks shall be minimum 600-volt rated, modular, sized to accommodate
conductor size used, as manufactured by Weidmuller, Phoenix Contact, Allen-Bradley.
.4 Where screw-type terminals are provided on equipment, field wiring shall be terminated
with insulated fork tongue terminals, as manufactured by Thomas & Betts, Sta-Kon.
.5 Cable ties shall be nylon, one-piece, self-locking type, as manufactured by Thomas &
Betts, Burndy, Electrovert.
.6 Electrical insulating tape as manufactured by 3M Scotch 88.
26 05 21.docx Stantec WIRE & CABLE (0-1000V)
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 21
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WIRE AND CABLE (0 – 1000 V)
Page 5 of 6

.7 Cable grips shall be provided for all vertical and catenary cable suspension installations
to reduce cable tension at connectors or at cable bends. The cable grips shall be selected
to accommodate the type and geometry of cable supported and shall be of the single
weave, variable mesh design, as manufactured by Kellems, Arrow-Hart.
.8 Cable pulling lubricant shall be compatible with cable covering and shall not cause
damage and corrosion to conduits or ducts.

2.7 CONTROL CABLES

.1 Control wiring for digital functions shall be 16 AWG minimum with 600 Volt insulation.
.2 Control wiring for analog functions shall be 16 AWG minimum with 600 Volts
insulation, individual and overall twisted and shielded, 2 or 3 wire to match analog
function hardware.
.3 Sensor wiring shall be 16 AWG minimum twisted and shielded, 2 or 3 wire to match
analog function hardware or 16 AWG as required by code.
.4 Acceptable manufacturer shall be Belden Instrumentation ACIC cables or approved
equal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Wiring shall be concealed in finished areas, on the building exterior masonry, and other
locations where it would foreseeably be considered unsightly. Wiring may be surface
mounted in service spaces and process areas.
.2 Install all wire according to the drawings.
.3 Install wire into ducts, cable trays, and conduits in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, using patented wire grips suitable for the type of wire or using pulling
eyes to be installed directly onto the conductors.
.4 Limit pulling tensions to manufacturer recommended levels to avoid overstressing wire.
.5 Utilize adequate lubricant when pulling wires through ducts and conduits to minimize
wear on cable jackets.
.6 Make connections to equipment "pig-tails" with mechanical, insulated, screw-on
connectors for wire sizes #14-10 AWG. For wire sizes #8 AWG and larger utilize
split-bolt connectors, taped with three layers minimum of insulating tape. For both
copper and aluminium terminations, wire through the conductor, apply joint compound
anti-oxidant, and torque to lug manufacturer’s recommended torque levels.
.7 No splices shall be permitted in cable or wiring runs without the written permission of the
Engineer and shall only be permitted in junction boxes.
.8 Neutral conductors shall be identified. Paint or other means of colouring the insulation
shall not be used.
.9 Unless otherwise specified, make all wiring taps, splices and terminations with identified
compression screw type terminal blocks, securely fastened to avoid loosening under
vibration or normal strain. Make connections for interior and exterior lighting circuits

26 05 21.docx Stantec WIRE & CABLE (0-1000V)

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 21
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WIRE AND CABLE (0 – 1000 V)
Page 6 of 6

and 120-volt, 15-amp convenience receptacle circuits using screw-on or split-bolt

connectors and insulating tape.
.10 Determine the exact length of cable required to avoid splices.
.11 Identify each conductor by specified markers at each termination indicating the circuit
designation or wire number.

3.2 WIRING IDENTIFICATION

.1 Provide permanent indelible identifying markings, either numbered or coloured plastic
tapes, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring. Maintain
phase sequence and identification throughout system, i.e., panelboards, starters, terminal
blocks, disconnect switches.
.2 All control system wiring to be labeled using permanent heat-shrink wire labels, labels to
be installed at each termination point. Wire labels to match control system wiring
diagrams produced by successful control panel manufacturer defined in Section 25 14 23.
.3 Maintain identification system at all junction boxes, splitters, cabinets and outlet boxes.
.4 Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system. All
colour coding must adhere to the Electrical Code.

3.3 CABLE IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify each cable by attaching a suitable marker, stamped or indelibly marked with the
cable number, at each end of the cable and in all junction boxes and pull boxes.
.2 Provide cable schedule for all cables installed. Match cable identifications as installed on
site. Provide cable length on cable schedule and include with O&Ms and Record
Drawings.

END OF SECTION

26 05 21.docx Stantec WIRE & CABLE (0-1000V)

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 26
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical scope of work.
.2 Furnish all labour, materials, equipment and services specified, indicated or requested to
install a complete grounding system. The grounding system shall include ground rods,
all wiring, ground bus, thermit welds, mechanical fittings, connectors, links and
miscellaneous materials necessary to complete a grounding system acceptable to the
Inspection Authorities.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Division 01.
.2 Shop drawings shall include but not be limited to the following, as applicable:
.1 Ground rods.
.2 Ground rod access well.
.3 Thermit weld kits.
.4 Ground clamps (pipe and beam).
.5 Main ground buss.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Grounding equipment to the current revision of CSA C22.2 No. 41.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GROUND AND BONDING CONDUCTORS

.1 Conductors shall be concentric stranded, soft drawn copper. Insulated conductors shall
be type RW90, 600-volt rating, green colour, and shall meet the same flame-spread
requirements of all wiring in the area and conditions where they are installed. Where
installed underground the insulation shall be rated RWU90.
.2 Conductors shall be sized at least per the requirements of the latest version of the
Canadian Electrical Code and of the local Authority, or as indicated, whichever is the
greater size.

26 05 26.docx Stantec GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 26
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 5

.3 Where direct buried bare ground conductor comes into contact with corrosive material,
the conductor shall be tinned.

2.2 GROUND RODS

.1 Ground rods shall be minimum 19 mm (3/4") diameter, 3 m (10 feet) long or as specified
on drawings, whichever is more stringent.
.2 Ground rods shall be copper clad steel construction with the copper exterior coating
permanently bonded to the steel core.
.3 Where drawings call for ground rods longer than 10 feet, ground rods shall be using
ground rod coupler and driven to 6.3 m depth.
.4 Establish a station ground consisting of four ground electrodes. The ground rods shall be
installed with a minimum separation distance equal to the length of the ground rods.
.5 All ground electrodes shall be connected together with a common continuous copper
ground wire, minimum #4/0 or as specified on drawings, allow for whichever is larger.
.6 Access to the top of one ground rod, and its connector, shall be provided by a ground
well. Cover shall be traffic rated.
.7 Maximum resistance to ground shall be 5 ohms.

2.3 THERMIT WELD CONNECTIONS

.1 Where a ground rod network is used for grounding, connections between the rods and the
grounding conductor shall be of a CSA, cUL, or cETL certified thermit weld type
connection by T&B, Burndy, Erico.
.2 Provide and use new thermit weld mold kit for the project. Submit shop drawing for new
thermit weld kit.
.3 Thermit connection shall be used for all buried connections.

2.4 GROUND CLAMPS

.1 Ground clamps for connecting ground conductors to metal water piping connections shall
be sized to accommodate the system ground conductor and the water pipe, as
manufactured by T & B, Burndy, Erico and be, cUL, or cETL certified for the
application.
.2 Ground clamps are only permissible for accessible locations, do not install ground clamps
in buried conditions.

2.5 COMPRESSION CONNECTIONS

.1 Compression devices shall be of pure wrought copper material, factory fitted with oxide
inhibiting compound, as manufactured by T & B, Burndy, Erico and be CSA, cUL, or
cETL certified for the application.

2.6 MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS

.1 Mechanical connectors shall be of bronze, copper or brass construction, selected and
sized specifically for the particular application and be CSA, cUL, or cETL certified for
the application.
26 05 26.docx Stantec GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 26
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 5

2.7 MAIN GROUND BUS

.1 Provide a copper main ground bus in the MCC room. Connect to grounding system via
min 2/0 AWG bare copper. Provide lugs for connection of up to sixteen bonding
conductors, or greater where the equipment count requires.
.2 Provide dedicated bare copper bonds from main ground buss to major items. Generally,
use min 2/0 AWG. Increase or decrease size to Code requirements or equipment
requirements. These bonds will supplement any bonding provided in the wiring system.
.1 MCC (unless already grounded directly to ground electrode).
.2 Standby power sources (e.g. standby diesel generator).
.3 Transformers 30 kVA and larger.
.4 Two main connections for bonding system that bonds structural steel.
.5 Switchgear.
.6 Large, centralized UPS.
.7 Large standalone active harmonic filters.
.8 Large battery banks.
.9 Cable tray.
.10 Duct banks.
.11 Motors 250hp and greater.
.3 Provide dedicated green insulated bonds from main ground buss to sensitive equipment.
It is not necessary to provide an isolated ground system unless indicated otherwise by
drawings, specifications, regulations, manufacturer recommendations, or normal practice.
Generally, use min #6 AWG for larger equipment min #10 AWG for smaller equipment.
Increase or decrease size to Code requirements or equipment requirements.
.1 Control panels housing PLCs.
.2 Telephone service entrance backboards and major equipment locations.
.3 Main networking equipment locations.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install ground rods.
.1 Drive rods to 6 m depth.
.1 Drive first 3 m rod using driving stud.
.2 Remove driving stud and attach rod coupler.
.3 Attach second 3 m rod to first (for 6 m total rod length).
.4 Drive rod to appx 6.3 m depth using driving stud.
.5 Remove driving stud.
.2 Ground rod spacing to be minimum equal to the length of the ground rod.
.2 Make connections between ground conductors and ground rods using thermit weld
connectors.

26 05 26.docx Stantec GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 26
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 4 of 5

.3 Install the ground rod access points such that the covers are flush with the final grade to
prevent burial.
.4 Make all other buried or encased conductor joints, splices and connections with
permanent-type thermit welds.
.5 Install main ground bus as indicated.
.6 Make ground electrode conductor connections to the main ground bus.
.7 Make bonding connections to building steel (columns, beams, joists, etc.), reinforcing
steel, and flat metallic surfaces. Utilize approved mechanical connectors. Locate
connections where they will not be subject to mechanical damage and, where possible, be
accessible for inspection. Coordinate connections to these components with the
responsible trades. Locate connections where they will not compromise the integrity or
the performance of the item connected to. Coordinate connections to structural
components in wet and corrosive locations. Connections are not to impair the longevity
of the structure. Provide touch up using glyptal paint or means as directed by the
responsible trades.
.8 Where compression type hardware is used, install using the hydraulic tools and methods,
as specified the hardware manufacturer.
.9 Protect grounding and bonding conductors or bus subject to mechanical damage by rigid
steel conduit or steel guards which shall be effectively grounded at both ends to the
ground conductor they are protecting, regardless of their length.
.10 Securely bond metal enclosures, motor frames, steel supports for starters, panels,
switches, etc., which are not rigidly secured to and in contact with grounded structural
steel of a building or conduit system, or which are subject to excessive vibration, to
building steel or conduit system with stranded copper conductors.
.11 Ensure metal to metal contact with full surface area for grounding and bonding
connections. Coordinate the connections with the Contractor supplying the equipment
being connected to if there are paints, membranes, or other surfaces of low conductivity.
.12 Install ground conductors passing through masonry walls, floors, foundations, etc. in 25
mm (1") rigid PVC conduit sleeves. Where sleeves are installed in walls or floors below
grade, seal the sleeves watertight after installation of ground conductor. Seal all
penetrations. Penetrations between areas of different area classification shall have
suitable permanent seal that separates the areas.
.13 Provide a #6 ground to service entrances of all electrically conductive piping systems I
the building. Connection shall be made using permanent mechanical connectors or
compression connectors. Connector locations shall be inspectable. Connect to main
building ground.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

.1 Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily
limited to the following list: service equipment, transformers, switchgear, duct systems,
frames of motors, motor control centres, starters, control panels, building steelwork,
distribution panels, outdoor lighting, telephone backboard.

26 05 26.docx Stantec GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 26
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 5 of 5

3.3 TESTS
.1 Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.2 Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site
conditions and to approval of the Engineer and inspection authority having jurisdiction.
.3 Perform tests, submit reports, and obtain approval of the Engineer before energizing
electrical system.
.4 Disconnect ground fault indicator during tests.
.5 Notify Engineer a minimum of 1 week before performing tests. Perform tests in presence
of the Engineer.
.6 Submit written test results to the Engineer and include in the O&M Manual.

END OF SECTION

26 05 26.docx Stantec GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 This section covers the supply and installation of all fastenings and supports for
equipment mounted under the electrical scope of work.
.2 Significant supports shall be arranged by the Contractor. A sketch will be sent to the
Engineer ahead of time. Revise as requested by the Engineer.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Expansive screw anchors, shields, or other fastening items containing lead or other
material that might loosen or melt under fire conditions shall not be used.
.2 Fastenings, supports, and associated hardware shall be of the following materials,
dependent upon location conditions and loads to be supported:
.1 Category 1 wet or humid: Aluminum or hot dip galvanized steel.
.2 Category 2 corrosive: Stainless steel, or aluminum, or, for light loads not
exposed to mechanical injury or direct heat, fiberglass.
.3 Normal (neither Category 1 or 2): Aluminum or hot dip galvanized steel.
.3 Fastenings and supports (including channels), and their associated hardware shall be
made of the same materials to reduce corrosion potential.
.4 Powder-actuated fasteners and devices shall not be used.
.5 Support channels, length as required, U-shaped, size as required by carried load, or
manufacturer’s recommendations.
.6 Support equipment, conduit or cable clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps etc., to be
purpose-built accessories for standard channel members.
.7 In ordinary areas, for individual (ungrouped) conduit:
.1 Two-hole conduit straps for conduits 35 mm and larger.
.2 One-hole conduit straps for conduit smaller than 35 mm.
.8 Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.

26 05 29.docx Stantec FASTENINGS & SUPPORTS

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 29
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FASTENINGS AND SUPPORTS
Page 2 of 2

.9 Provide Unistrut channel supports to support local wiring, disconnect switches, control
stations, or other devices in areas that are not adjacent to a suitable mounting structure.
Supports shall be rigid.
.10 Acceptable manufacturers: Burndy, Unistrut or approved equal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment, cables and conduit
to manufacturer's installation recommendations.
.2 Group equipment, conduits, and cables to the extent practicable.
.3 Support cables or conduits in groups on channels.
.4 Support cables or conduits in wet locations on channels.
.5 Attach channels to structure where suitable, or support by 6.0 mm diameter threaded rod
hangers otherwise. Use larger diameter rod and hangers where the carried load or
manufacturer’s recommendations require.
.6 Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related support structures where
indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs.
.7 Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.
.8 Provide adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where
there is no wall support.
.9 Do not use supports of other equipment installed for conduit or cable support except with
permission and approval of the Engineer.
.10 Any aluminum support bracket or channel that is in direct contact with concrete is
required to have inert spacers to reduce chemical reaction between support and concrete.
.11 Run sport systems parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.12 Coordinate locations of all support systems with other trades to ensure proper installation
of equipment.

END OF SECTION

26 05 29.docx Stantec FASTENINGS & SUPPORTS

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 32
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Furnish all labour, materials, equipment and services specified, indicated or requested to
install the electrical boxes specified herein and on the drawings.

Part 2 Products

2.1 OUTLET BOXES

.1 Size boxes in accordance with the Electrical Code.
.2 100 mm square or larger outlet boxes as required for special devices.
.3 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.
.4 Provide barriers where outlets for more then one system are grouped.
.5 Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.
.6 All outlet boxes shall be supplied with ground stud.
.7 Surface mounted outlet and switch boxes shall be:
.1 PVC
.2 Ipex F-Series or equivalent.
.3 To CSA C22.2 No. 18.2-06 (R2011) Non-metallic Outlet Boxes.
.8 Flush-mounted outlet boxes for the office areas shall:
.1 Be galvanized steel.
.2 Be to CSA C22.2 NO. 18.1-13 – Metallic Outlet Boxes.
.9 In wet locations, boxes and fitting shall be weatherproof.
.10 In corrosive locations, boxes and fitting shall be corrosion-resistant.
.11 In hazardous locations, boxes and fittings shall be explosion proof, flameproof, or
otherwise suitably rated, where required.
.12 In all areas electrical equipment shall be sprinkler proof.

26 05 32.docx Stantec OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES & FITTINGS

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 32
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
Page 2 of 2

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Equipment shall be surface mounted only in service spaces and process areas. Do not
install surface mount on the building exterior or on any ramp wall.
.2 Install boxes to clear all building and mechanical services equipment. Where two or
more devices are shown at one location, utilize multi-gang boxes. Supply all outlet boxes
with covers as required.
.3 Size all boxes to accommodate the number of conduits, conductors and terminal blocks.
Provide junction boxes with 20% spare terminal blocks.
.4 Securely fasten surface-mounted boxes to the building or mounting structure and support
independently of the conduits entering the box.
.5 Securely fasten flush-mounted boxes to supporting studs or wall structure and support
independently of the conduit or cables entering the box.
.6 Install junction and pull boxes mounted on brick, concrete or block walls with 3 mm
(1/8 inch) thick lead or nylon washers between box and wall face.
.7 Provide pull boxes sized to Electrical Code requirements, in all conduit raceway systems
to limit length of straight conduit runs to 30 m (100 ft). Reduce this length by 7.5 m (25
ft) for each 90 degrees bend or 4 m (12 ft) for each 45 degree bend or offset.
.8 Mark location and size of all pull boxes on the record drawings.

3.2 APPLICATION
.1 Location of outlets indicated may be changed by the Engineer at no extra cost or credit,
providing distance moved does not exceed 3000 mm, and notice is given before
installation is completed.

3.3 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00.
.2 Exact mounting height of unnoted equipment must be verified with the Engineer before
proceeding with installation.

END OF SECTION

26 05 32.docx Stantec OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES & FITTINGS

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 33
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical scope of work.
.2 This section covers the supply and installation of all wire and box connectors.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Wire connectors and solder lugs to CSA C22.2 No. 65-13.
.2 Connectors shall be copper or copper alloy and appropriate for the wire.
.3 Clamps or connectors for cable to CSA-C22.2 No. 18-06.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 All lugs, terminals and screws used for termination of wiring must be suitable for the
conductors.
.2 Clamps or connectors for flexible conduit, as required.
.3 All cable terminations shall be with compression type connectors.
.4 Connectors shall be suitable for the area classification they are installed in.
.5 Connectors shall be rated for hazardous location where required.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors.
.2 Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws with appropriate
compression tool recommended by manufacturer. Installation shall meet secureness tests
in accordance with CSA C22.2 No. 65-13.
.3 Install fixture type connectors and tighten. Replace insulating cap.
.4 Install crimp type connectors to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
.5 Install box connectors to CSA requirements.
26 05 33.docx Stantec WIRE & BOX CONNECTORS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 33
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS
Page 2 of 2

.6 Seal connections against passage of humidity or vapor.

END OF SECTION

26 05 33.docx Stantec WIRE & BOX CONNECTORS

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 34
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONDUIT, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Furnish all labour, materials, supervision, equipment and services specified, indicated or
requested to install a complete conduit raceway system. The raceway systems shall be
comprised of the supply and installation of all conduits, fittings, supports, hangers and
miscellaneous support materials and hardware required.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawing for epoxy coated rigid metal conduit. Include vendor contact
information.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Shall meet the current edition of the standards listed below:
.1 Rigid PVC (Unplasticized) conduit to CSA C22.2 No. 211.2.
.2 Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit to CSA C22.2 No. 56.
.3 Rigid galvanized steel and epoxy coated conduit to CSA C22.2 No. 45.1.
.4 Aluminum rigid conduit to CSA C22.2 No. 45.
.5 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) to CSA 22.2 No. 83.
.6 Electrical non-metallic tubing to CSA C22.2 No. 227.1.

1.5 LOCATION OF CONDUIT

.1 Conceal conduit in finished areas. Generally, mount conduit on surface in service spaces
and process areas. Conceal conduit on building exterior where it would be considered
unsightly, where there is masonry or other architectural finish, where it is feeding
recessed receptacles, etc. Exposed conduit on building exterior is permissible for short
runs where it is necessary e.g. service conductors routed to a surface mount enclosure.
.2 Use conduit for systems such as: security, fire alarm, emergency lighting, exit signs, and
life safety.
.3 Use conduit where mandatory.
.4 The drawings do not generally show specific conduit runs. Those indicated are in
diagrammatic form only.

26 05 34.docx Stantec CONDUIT, CONDUIT FASTENINGS

AND FITTINGS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 34
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONDUIT, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
Page 2 of 5

.5 Electrical contractor shall determine the most efficient rout to run conduits and shall
complete all coordination with other trades.
.6 Where tray is used, power wiring for equipment skids, distribution pumps, and chemical
feed pumps can be installed on tray. Size tray and lay out wiring to achieve required
spacings, or derate the cabling. In these calculations, assume 30% additional wiring is
installed, to allow future wiring to be added without impacting existing wiring. Control
and instrumentation wiring shall generally be installed in the tray to areas the tray
reaches. Provide waterfall drop outs or similar means of maintaining suitable radius for
wiring leaving the tray. Power wiring for lighting, receptacles, HVAC, and plumbing
shall be generally mounted at walls and ceiling. Raceway in slab shall be installed only
where indicated or approved by engineer.

Part 2 Products

2.1 CONDUITS
.1 Minimum size to be 21 mm.
.2 Minimum size for underground runs shall be 27 mm.
.3 Conduit in ordinary areas shall be EMT.
.4 Conduit in humid or corrosive environments shall be Rigid PVC.
.5 Conduit in hazardous areas shall be threaded rigid aluminum or threaded rigid epoxy-
coated steel conduit with internal corrosion resistant epoxy-covered zinc lining.
Minimum size to be 21 mm.
.6 PVC-jacketed, liquid-tight flexible metal conduit for motor and equipment connections.
.7 Where the Engineer approves wiring runs embedded in concrete, utilize ENT.

2.2 STRUT CHANNEL AND ACCESSORIES

.1 Strut channel and associated accessories shall be of the following materials, dependent
upon location conditions and rated for the loads to be supported:
.1 Category 1: Aluminum, or hot dip galvanized steel.
.2 Category 2: Stainless steel, unless susceptible to degradation due to the specific
chemicals in the environment, aluminum, unless susceptible to degradation, or
fiberglass where not exposed to heavy loads, mechanical injury, or direct heat.
.3 Normal (neither Category 1 or 2): Aluminum or hot dip galvanized steel.
.2 Strut clamps shall be one piece heavy-duty construction with parallel hook design.

2.3 FITTINGS
.1 Fittings shall be manufactured for use with conduit specified. Materials and coatings
shall be same as conduit.
.2 Factory “ells” where 90° bends are required for 25mm and larger conduits.

26 05 34.docx Stantec CONDUIT, CONDUIT FASTENINGS

AND FITTINGS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 34
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONDUIT, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
Page 3 of 5

2.4 EXPANSION FITTINGS FOR PVC CONDUIT

.1 All conduits entering outlet boxes and devices that are located in walls subject to
movement shall be terminated by means of liquid-tight flexible conduit, approximately
450 mm in length between the conduit and the outlet box or device which is being
supplied. All conduits, bus duct, wireways, etc., passing through or across expansion
joints of the building shall be installed with the use of approved expansion fittings.

2.5 FISH CORD

.1 Polypropylene of sufficient diameter and strength to pull in future additional cables.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

.1 Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum
interference in spaces through which they pass.
.2 Conduits shall be run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
.3 Cut conduit ends square and ream to remove burrs and sharp edges. Ensure that conduits
butt in couplings and other fittings.
.4 Where any galvanized or epoxy coated components are cut, drilled, welded, or the
surface otherwise compromised, the area shall be repaired using the manufacturer’s
recommended methods and materials to restore the corrosion resistance of the
components to original standards.
.5 Bends and offsets shall have a radius of curvature not less than the minimum bending
radius of the cable to be installed.
.6 Temporarily plug all conduits terminating in cabinets and boxes where moisture and
foreign matter may enter.
.7 Blow all conduits through with clean compressed air to clear all foreign matter and
moisture prior to the installation of wires or cables.
.8 Install fish cord in all conduits.
.9 Group exposed conduits together wherever possible and run parallel to building lines,
supported from structural members and protected by the flanges of the structural member
where practical.
.10 Use manufacturer recommended mounting clips to secure conduit to strut channel.
.11 Support strut channel to structure with suitable fasteners or beam clamps for attaching to
structure. Make no holes in building structural members for supporting conduits without
the permission of the Engineer. Make holes following the directions of the trade
responsible for the structural members. Touch up holes as required so that overall finish
is restored.
.12 Provide additional strut channel supports at each elbow and terminations at a box or
cabinet.
.13 Perforated metal straps used to support conduits are unacceptable.

26 05 34.docx Stantec CONDUIT, CONDUIT FASTENINGS

AND FITTINGS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 34
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONDUIT, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
Page 4 of 5

.14 Install conduits at least 150 mm (6") clear of all steam pipes and flues, and 1 m (39")
clear of heaters. Do not bend over sharp objects or improperly form.
.15 The maximum length of straight conduit run shall be 30 m (100 feet) between pull boxes
or other terminations. This length shall be reduced by 10 m (32 feet) for each 90 degree
bend or 5 m (16.5 feet) for each 45 degree bend or offset. Conduit runs shall not include
more than the equivalent of two 90 degree bends between pull boxes except where
indicated otherwise on the drawings.
.16 Where conduits pass through roof, seal with flashing and make weatherproof. For
conduits passing through exterior walls, above or below grade, seal with waterproof
sealing compound.
.17 All conduits originating or passing through an area containing corrosive or explosive
gases and entering normal areas, control panels, junction boxes, MCC’s or any other
equipment shall be suitably sealed at each point of entry to prevent any ingress of
corrosive or explosive gases.
.18 Sleeve and seal all conduits passing through floors.
.19 Surface mounted conduits shall be run along ceiling or walls. Conduits shall NOT be run
along the floor without written permission from engineer.

3.2 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

.1 Installation of conduit in trenches shall generally follow the rules for installation of cable
in trenches.
.2 Provide trench, backfill, and surface restoration.
.3 Provide sand bed envelope above and below conduit.
.4 Backfill shall be non-shrink fill, compacted in lifts.
.5 Maintain spacings from other wiring and other services to Code and good practice.
Provide spacings to prevent interference between systems.

3.3 CONDUIT IN CONCRETE SLABS

.1 Use only where accepted by Contract Administrator and only for those runs accepted.
.2 Use ENT conduit with approved fittings.
.3 Install to manufacturer recommendations.
.4 Coordinate with concrete trade.
.5 Maximum diameter of raceway in slab is 30% of slab thickness.
.6 Conduit to be located in center 1/3 of slab (vertical center) and between the top and
bottom layers of reinforcing.
.7 Do not group conduits in slab. Provide separation of two conduit diameters between
conduits. Where there are four or more conduit being run near each other, increase
separation to four conduit diameters.
.8 Do not route conduit along (following) rebar. Do not route in perfectly straight lines.
Introduce some curvature in conduit runs. Minimize amount of conduit routed in

26 05 34.docx Stantec CONDUIT, CONDUIT FASTENINGS

AND FITTINGS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 34
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CONDUIT, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND FITTINGS
Page 5 of 5

thickened areas of concrete. Minimize amount of conduit routed in areas of increased

reinforcing.
.9 Tie down conduit prior to pouring concrete.
.10 Take measurements and several quality photographs of routing immediately prior to
pouring. Use wide shots, close shots, and capture enough features so that conduit
locations can be approximately determined after construction is complete. Include photos
in O&M Manual. Mark routing on As Builts and include some dimensions.

END OF SECTION

26 05 34.docx Stantec CONDUIT, CONDUIT FASTENINGS

AND FITTINGS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 36
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 7

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.
.4 All cable tray shall bear certification to CSA or cUL requirements.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical scope of work.
.2 Section Includes:
.1 Cable trays.
.3 Furnish all labour, materials, supervision, equipment and services specified, indicated or
requested to install a complete system. The tray system(s) shall be comprised of the
supply and installation of all tray sections, fittings, supports, hangers and miscellaneous
support materials, adaptors, and hardware required.

1.3 STANDARDS
.1 The current edition of following standards shall apply:
.1 Electrical Code, including provincial amendments.
.2 NEMA VE 1 Metal Cable Tray Systems
.3 NEMA VE 2 Cable Tray Installation Guidelines

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals shall be in accordance with Division 01.
.2 Product Data: For each type of product.
.1 Include data indicating dimensions and finishes for each type of cable tray
indicated.
.3 Shop Drawings: For each type of cable tray.
.1 Show fabrication and installation details of cable trays, including plans,
elevations, and sections of components and attachments to other construction
elements. Designate components and accessories, including clamps, brackets,
hanger rods, splice-plate connectors, expansion-joint assemblies, straight lengths,
and fittings.
.4 Field quality-control reports.

26 05 36.docx Stantec CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 36
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 7

1.5 LOCATION OF CABLE TRAY

.1 The drawings indicate main cable tray runs. Coordinate final locations with all trades
and all equipment. Those runs not indicated as a required run shall be allowed to be
determined by the best available paths, while minimizing obstructions, and maintaining
maximum headroom. All systems shall be ceiling-suspended unless otherwise indicated
in the specifications and/or shown on the drawings.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Cable Trays and Accessories: Identified and installed to Code, and marked for intended
location, application, and grounding.
.2 Obtain cable trays and components from single manufacturer.
.3 Sizes and Configurations: Also review drawings for specific requirements for types,
materials, sizes, and configurations.
.4 Structural Performance: See articles on individual cable tray types for specific values for
the following parameters:
.1 Uniform Load Distribution: Capable of supporting a uniformly distributed load
on the indicated support span when supported as a simple span and tested
according to NEMA VE 1.
.2 Concentrated Load definition: A load applied at midpoint of span and centerline
of tray.
.3 Load and Safety Factors: Applicable to both side rails and rung capacities.
.5 Unless otherwise indicated, cable tray sections, components, support hardware (struts,
clamps, threaded rod, etc.), connecting hardware, and associated accessories shall be of
the following materials, dependent upon location conditions and rated for the loads to be
supported:
.1 Category 1 wet: Aluminum.
.2 Category 2 corrosive: Stainless steel (except where it would be subject to
degradation from the chemicals in the area), or aluminum (except where it would
be subject to degradation from the chemicals in the area), or fiberglass for light
loads and where not subject to heat sources or mechanical injury.
.3 Ordinary area: Aluminum or hot dip galvanized.

2.2 CABLE TRAYS

.1 Manufacturer(s):
.1 Thomas & Betts, Cooper B-Line, or accepted equivalent.
.2 Description:
.1 Configuration: Two side rails with transverse rungs welded to side rails.
.2 Rung Spacing: 300 mm (12 inches).
.3 Radius-Fitting Rung Spacing: 225 mm (9 inches) at center of tray's width.

26 05 36.docx Stantec CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 36
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 3 of 7

.4 Minimum Cable-Bearing Surface for Rungs: 22 mm (7/8-inch) width with radius

edges.
.5 No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of side rails.
.6 Structural Performance of Each Rung: Capable of supporting a maximum cable
load, with a safety factor of at least 1.5, plus a 90-kg (200-lb) concentrated load,
when tested according to NEMA VE 1 / CSA C22.2 No. 126.1.
.7 Minimum Usable Load Depth:
.1 125 mm usable load depth (150 mm tray) for main runs and in general.
.2 75 mm usable load depth (100 mm tray) for final branch runs in areas
where
.1 Present and foreseeable future cable quantity would leave tray
lightly loaded.
.2 Future power cables can be added without requiring derating of
present cables due to reduced spacings or increased quantities of
cables in contact.
.8 Width:
.1 Minimum 150 mm (6 inches) for final run to equipment, unless
otherwise indicated on Drawings.
.2 Minimum 300 mm (12 inches) for main runs, unless otherwise indicated
on Drawings
.9 Fitting Minimum Radius: to accommodate minimum bend radius of conductors
in cable tray
.10 Splicing Assemblies:
.1 Bolted type using locknuts.
.2 Minimum four nuts and bolts per plate.
.3 Splice plates shall be furnished with straight sections and fittings.
.3 Materials and Finishes
.1 Aluminum:
.1 Materials:
.1 Alloy 6063-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H 35.1M for extruded
components.
.2 Alloy 5052-H32 or Alloy 6061-T6 according to ANSI H35.1/H
35.1M for fabricated parts.
.2 Hardware:
.1 Fasteners, rods, hangers, unions. Clamps (beam and cable):
Stainless steel, Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.
.2 Struts: Stainless steel, Type 316, or Aluminum
.3 Hardware for Aluminum Cable Tray Used Outdoors: Stainless steel,
Type 316, ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594.
.4 Supply and install non-metallic isolation washers at all joints and
interfaces where fasteners are of different materials to the fastened
materials.
.2 Stainless steel:
26 05 36.docx Stantec CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 36
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 4 of 7

.1 Stainless steel hardware and fittings.

.3 Fiberglass:
.1 Fiberglass hardware and fittings.

2.3 CABLE TRAY ACCESSORIES

.1 Fittings: Tees, crosses, risers, elbows, waterfalls, and other fittings shall be of same
materials and finishes as cable tray.
.2 Barrier Strips: Same materials and finishes as for cable tray; required if line voltage
cables are run in the same cable tray as instrumentation cables.

2.4 WARNING SIGNS

.1 Lettering: 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm) high, black letters on yellow background with legend
"Warning! Not To Be Used as Walkway, Ladder, or Support for Ladders or Personnel."
.2 Locate Warning labels on each run of cable tray, with multiple labels required to achieve
a maximum spacing between labels of 8m
.3 Comply with requirements for fasteners as recommended by cable tray manufacturer.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Testing: Test and inspect cable trays according to:
.1 NEMA VE 1 for metallic cable tray.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

.1 Install cable trays according to NEMA VE 2 for metallic tray installations.
.2 Install cable trays as a complete system, including fasteners, hold-down clips, support
systems, barrier strips, adjustable horizontal and vertical splice plates, elbows, reducers,
tees, crosses, cable dropouts, adapters, covers, and bonding.
.3 Install cable trays so that the tray is accessible for cable installation and all splices are
accessible for inspection and adjustment.
.4 Remove burrs and sharp edges from cable trays.
.5 Fasten cable tray supports to building structure.
.6 Design fasteners and supports to carry cable tray, the cables, and a concentrated load of
200 lb (90 kg). Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports
for Electrical Systems."
.7 Place supports so that spans do not exceed maximum spans as per manufacturer’s
installation instructions. Install intermediate supports when cable weight exceeds the
load-carrying capacity of the tray rungs.
.8 Construct supports from channel members, threaded rods, and other appurtenances
furnished by cable tray manufacturer. Arrange supports in trapeze or wall-bracket form
as required by application.
26 05 36.docx Stantec CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 36
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 5 of 7

.9 Support bus assembly to prevent twisting from eccentric loading.

.10 Locate and install supports according to NEMA VE 2. Do not install more than one
cable tray splice between supports.
.11 Make connections to equipment with flanged fittings fastened to cable trays and to
equipment. Support cable trays independent of fittings. Do not carry weight of cable
trays on equipment enclosure.
.12 Install expansion connectors where cable trays cross building expansion joints and in
cable tray runs that exceed dimensions recommended in NEMA VE 2. Space connectors
and set gaps according to applicable standard.
.13 Make changes in direction and elevation using manufacturer's recommended fittings.
.14 Make cable tray connections using manufacturer's recommended fittings.
.15 All tray originating in, or passing through, a wall shall be suitably sealed at each point of
entry.
.16 Install cable trays with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables.
.17 Install barriers to separate cables of different systems, such as power, communications,
and data processing; or of different insulation levels, such as 600, 5000, and 15 000 V.
.18 Install warning signs in visible locations on or near cable trays after cable tray
installation.

3.2 CABLE TRAY GROUNDING

.1 Ground cable trays according to the Canadian Electrical Code and NEMA VE 2, and
where additional grounding is specified. Comply with requirements in Section 260526
"Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
.2 Cable trays with electrical power conductors shall be bonded together with splice plates
listed for grounding purposes. Also provide dedicated bond with approved connections
to tray.
.3 Cable trays with single-conductor power conductors shall be bonded together with a
grounding conductor run in the tray along with the power conductors and bonded to the
tray at 1800-mm (72-inch) intervals. The grounding conductor shall be sized according
to the Electrical Code, or NEMA VE 2 if the Electrical Code does not provide guidance.
.4 Bond cable trays to power source for cables contained, with bonding conductors sized
according to Electrical Code, or NEMA VE 2 if the Electrical Code does not provide
guidance.

3.3 CABLE INSTALLATION

.1 Install cables only when each cable tray run has been completed and inspected.
.2 Fasten cables on horizontal runs with cable clamps or cable ties according to NEMA VE
2. Tighten clamps only enough to secure the cable, without indenting the cable jacket.
Install cable ties with a tool that includes an automatic pressure-limiting device.
.3 Fasten cables on vertical runs to cable trays at least every 450 mm (18 inches).
.4 Fasten power cables individually to maintain air gap spacing. Control cables may be
neatly fastened in bundles.
26 05 36.docx Stantec CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
RM of Headingley Section 26 05 36
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 6 of 7

.5 Fasten and support cables that pass from one cable tray to another or drop from cable
trays to equipment enclosures. Fasten cables to the cable tray at the point of exit and
support cables independent of the enclosure. The cable length between cable trays or
between cable tray and enclosure shall be no more than 1800 mm (72 inches).
.6 Lay in cables so that they are parallel throughout their runs without crossing or overlap,
except where necessary to exit or enter the tray.
.7 Tie mineral insulated (MI) cables down every 900 mm (36 inches), where required to
provide a 2-hour fire rating and every 1800 mm (72 inches) elsewhere.
.8 In existing construction, remove abandoned cables from cable trays prior to adding new
cables to the trays.

3.4 CONNECTIONS
.1 Connect raceways to cable trays according to requirements in NEMA VE 2.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Perform the following tests and inspections:
.1 After installing cable trays and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
survey for compliance with requirements.
.2 Visually inspect cable insulation for damage. Correct sharp corners,
protuberances in cable trays, vibrations, and thermal expansion and contraction
conditions, which may cause or have caused damage.
.3 Verify that the number, size, and voltage of cables in cable trays do not exceed
that permitted by the Electrical Code.
.4 Verify that communications or data-processing circuits are separated from power
circuits by barriers or are installed in separate cable trays.
.5 Verify that there are no intruding items such as pipes, hangers, or other
equipment in the cable tray.
.6 Remove dust deposits, industrial process materials, trash of any description, and
any blockage of tray ventilation.
.7 Visually inspect each cable tray joint and each ground connection for mechanical
continuity. Check bolted connections between sections for corrosion. Clean and
retorque in suspect areas.
.8 Check for improperly sized or installed bonding jumpers.
.9 Check for missing, incorrect, or damaged bolts, bolt heads, or nuts. When found,
replace with specified hardware.
.10 Perform visual and mechanical checks for adequacy of cable tray grounding;
verify that all takeoff raceways are bonded to cable trays. Test entire cable tray
system for resistance and electrical continuity. Maximum allowable resistance is
1 ohm.
.2 Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 PROTECTION
.1 Protect installed cable trays and cables.

26 05 36.docx Stantec CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 36
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Page 7 of 7

.2 Install temporary protection for cables in open trays to safeguard exposed cables against
falling objects or debris during construction. Temporary protection for cables and cable
tray can be constructed of wood or metal materials and shall remain in place until the risk
of damage is over.

END OF SECTION

26 05 36.docx Stantec CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 43
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 INSTALLATION OF CABLE IN TRENCHES
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Furnish all labour, materials, supervision, equipment and services specified, indicated or
requested to provide all trenching and backfilling as necessary for the installation of all
underground cables, etc., as indicated.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Installation of cables in trenches and ducts shall meet the requirements of the current
edition of the Canadian Electrical Code CSA C22.1.

Part 2 Products

2.1 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

.1 Trenching shall be approximately 1000 mm in depth, width to suit proper installation.
.2 Backfill for trenches for all direct buried cables, ducts, conduits, etc., shall consist of fine
sand (minimum 100 mm below and above cables, etc.) and firmly compacted. Sand shall
be free of rocks and debris. Backfill finishing material shall be as indicated in Division 31
of the specification.
.3 All direct buried cables, ducts, etc., crossing over each other or over/under other types of
underground service shall be encased in wood planks treated with pentachlorophenol.
.4 Frozen earth, large lumps or boulders shall not be used for backfill material.
.5 Provide treated wood planks meeting approved wood treatment materials over all buried
cables, etc., under existing or future roads and sidewalks.
.6 Provide sleeves under all parking, concrete and traffic areas for cables.
.7 Where cables enter building provide a vertical 100 x 250 mm white sign with black
wording ELECTRICAL CABLES securely fastened to the exterior of the building wall
approximately 300 mm above finished grade.

2.2 CABLE PROTECTION

.1 Provide identification tape labelled as indicated showing location of direct buried cables.

26 05 43.docx Stantec INSTALLATION OF CABLE IN TRENCHES

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 43
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 INSTALLATION OF CABLE IN TRENCHES
Page 2 of 3

Part 3 Execution

3.1 BURIED SYSTEMS

.1 Meet all spacing requirements for underground systems to Codes and good practices.
.2 Adhere to Electrical Code including Section 12 and Section 60.
.3 Adhere to CSA C22.3 No.7 Underground Systems.

3.2 DIRECT BURIAL OF CABLES

.1 Do not install cables in areas of recent excavation and backfill that are prone to settling or
sloughing which will strain the cables. Backfilling with non shrink fill, backfilling in
lifts, and adequately compacting each lift is normally adequate.
.2 After specified sand bed is in place, lay cables in trench, maintaining a 75 mm minimum
clearance from each side of trench to nearest cable. Do not pull cable into trench.
.3 Provide offsets for thermal action and minor earth movements. Offset cables 150 mm for
each 60 metres of run, maintaining minimum cable separation and bending radius
requirements.
.4 Underground cable splices are not acceptable.
.5 Minimum permitted radius at cable bends for rubber, plastic or lead covered cables, 8
times diameter of cable; for metallic armoured cables, 12 times diameter of cables or in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.6 Maintain 190 mm minimum separation between cables of different circuits. Maintain
300 mm horizontal separation between low and high voltage cables. When low voltage
cables cross high voltage cables maintain 300 mm vertical separation with low voltage
cables in upper position. At crossover, maintain 75 mm minimum vertical separation
between low voltage cables and 190 mm between high voltage cables. Maintain 300 mm
minimum lateral and vertical separation for fire alarm and control cables when crossing
other cables with fire alarm and control cables in upper position. Install treated planks on
lower cables 600 mm in each direction at crossings.
.7 After sand protective cover is in place, install continuous row of overlapping 38 x 140
mm pressure treated planks as indicated to cover length of run.
.8 Repair, replace or make good all trenching to ashphalt, concrete, gravel or sod surfaces to
the satisfaction of owner.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Provide digital photographs of each phase of the installation, photographs to include
standard reference point on site to provide spatial relationship of the photograph.
Photograph phases to include at minimum open trench, first layer of sand, cable
installation, second layer of sand, protective planking, first layer of clean fill, marking
tape and final layer of fill.
.2 Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results - Electrical.
.3 Perform tests using qualified personnel. Provide necessary instruments and equipment.
.4 Check phase rotation and identify each phase conductor of each feeder.

26 05 43.docx Stantec INSTALLATION OF CABLE IN TRENCHES

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 43
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 INSTALLATION OF CABLE IN TRENCHES
Page 3 of 3

.5 Check each feeder for continuity, short circuits and grounds. Ensure resistance to ground
of circuits is not less than 50 MegaOhms.

3.4 PRE-ACCEPTANCE TESTS.

.1 After installing cable but before terminating, perform insulation resistance test with
1000V megger on each phase conductor.
.2 Provide Engineer with list of test results showing location at which each test was made,
circuit tested and result of each test.
.3 Remove and replace entire length of cable if cable fails to meet any of test criteria.
.4 Contractor responsible for making all necessary repairs to installation resulting from
improper backfilling, compaction, etc.

END OF SECTION

26 05 43.docx Stantec INSTALLATION OF CABLE IN TRENCHES

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 83
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MISCELLANEOUS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical scope of work.
.2 This section covers the supply and installation of all wiring, conduit, and control devices
related to all mechanical equipment specified in Divisions 23 and 46.
.3 Provide all labour and materials as necessary to install, wire, connect and put into
satisfactory operation the following control panels and mechanical equipment supplied
under Divisions 23 and 46:
.1 Electric motors, actuated valves and electrical dampers
.2 Motor starters, contactors, instruments and interlocks where specified as
components of "packaged" equipment.
.3 Miscellaneous plumbing and HVAC equipment including fans, hot water tank,
air handing units, etc.
.4 Process packages

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Supply and install all motor power wiring and conduit, all control wiring and conduit, all
local and remote control devices, and all motor starters and contactors except where
specified as components of "packaged" equipment.
.2 Where control wiring diagrams are shown they illustrate typical control circuits
applicable to the equipment. Verify all control circuits with the suppliers of the
equipment and make any corrections that may be required.
.3 Do not operate motors or controls until approval is obtained from the trade providing the
equipment.
.4 Assist in placing in operation all mechanical equipment that requires an electrical
connection.

26 05 83.docx Stantec MISC. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 26 05 83
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MISCELLANEOUS MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Page 2 of 2

.5 Verify final motor connections with nameplate and approved shop drawings for all
connections that may be required.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Coordinate the work of this Section with the installation of the equipment specified in the
relevant Sections of Divisions 23 and 46 and shown on the Mechanical and Electrical
drawings.
.2 Perform all work in compliance with the relevant sections of this Division.

END OF SECTION

26 05 83.docx Stantec MISC. MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

RM of Headingley Section 26 12 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 This section covers the supply and installation of all dry-type transformers.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Transformers provided shall meet the current edition of the following standards:
.1 To CSA C22.2 No. 47 - Air Cooled Transformers (Dry Type)
.2 To CSA C9- Dry-Type Transformers
.3 To CSA C802.2 – Minimum Efficiency Values For Dry-Type Transformers
.4 To Electrical Code Section 26-260 "Marking of Transformers".

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and Division 01, including:
.1 Nameplate data.
.2 Voltage ranges and taps.
.3 KVA rating.
.4 Current ratings.
.5 Impedance.
.6 Insulation class.
.7 Winding temperature rise.
.8 Efficiency at various loading levels.
.9 Winding configuration.
.10 Winding material.
.11 Sound levels.
.12 Dimensions.
.13 Enclosure material.
.14 Finish.
.15 Enclosure environmental ratings.
.16 Mounting configurations.
.17 Weight.
.18 Cable terminal sizes.
26 12 16.docx Stantec DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
RM of Headingley Section 26 12 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
Page 2 of 3
Part 2 Products

2.1 TRANSFORMERS
.1 Use transformers of one manufacturer throughout project. If this is not possible, submit
constraint conditions and specifications to the Engineer for approval.
.2 Transformers to have the following characteristics:
.1 Type: Sprinkler-proof enclosure.
.2 Three phase, 600V delta-connected primary, 120/208V wye-connected secondary
or 480/277V wye-connected secondary as indicated on drawings.
.3 kVA rating as indicated on drawings.
.4 Operating frequency of 60 Hz.
.5 Winding insulation of 1000 V class, 150° degree temperature rise.
.6 Maximum impedance of 5%.
.7 Minimum K-Factor 4.
.8 Sound rating: standard.
.9 Hipot is standard.
.10 Taps 4 – 2 1/2 percent FCAN, FCBN.
.11 Air ventilated via louvres.
.12 Termination at bottom of transformer.
.13 Finish shall be ASA 61 grey.
.14 All transformer windings to be copper.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
.1 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Hammond, Square "D", Bemag, Delta Transformer, or
approved equal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 MOUNTING
.1 Installation to Electrical Code, Section 26-248.
.2 Units shall be floor or wall mounted as indicated on drawings.
.3 Mount transformers in level upright position.
.4 Units shall be clear of air obstructions per manufacturer’s installation requirements to
ensure adequate ventilation.
.5 Remove shipping supports only after transformer is installed and just before putting into
service.
.6 Loosen isolation pad bolts until no compression is visible.
.7 Mound floor mounted transformers on 100mm concrete housekeeping pads.

3.2 CONNECTIONS
.1 Make primary and secondary connections.
26 12 16.docx Stantec DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
RM of Headingley Section 26 12 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS
Page 3 of 3
.2 Energize transformers immediately after installation is completed, where practicable.

3.3 TESTING
.1 Testing of transformers is accordance with Section 26 05 00.

3.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

END OF SECTION

26 12 16.docx Stantec DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS

RM of Headingley Section 26 24 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PANELBOARDS – BREAKER-TYPE
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 This section covers the supply and installation of all distribution and power panelboards,
including mounting hardware and breakers.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 All equipment to the current edition of CSA Standard C22.2 No. 29- – Panelboards and
Enclosed Panelboards.
.2 Fault current ratings to be indicated on nameplates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

Part 2 Products

2.1 PANELBOARDS
.1 All panelboards shall be supplied by one manufacturer.
.2 120/208V, 3-phase, 4-wire and 120/240V, 1-phase, 3-wire distribution panelboard bus
and breakers to be rated 18,000 amps (RMS symmetrical) withstand and interrupting
rating, or greater where so indicated.
.3 347/600V, 3-phase, 4-wire power panelboard bus and breakers to be rated 42,000 amps
(RMS symmetrical) withstand and interrupting capacity, or greater where so indicated.
.4 The main bus bars shall be copper and shall be equipped with solderless lugs for
incoming cables. Neutral to be of same ampere rating as mains.
.5 Distribution section to accommodate circuit breakers. Breakers shall be the
interchangeable trip type.
.6 Doors shall have spring hatches and cylinder locks, and all locks shall be keyed alike
with two keys per panelboard.
.7 Doors shall operate lightly and easily throughout the full range of motion. Doors that do
not will be reinstalled by the Contractor or replaced with new.
.8 Panelboards shall be sprinkler-proof type.
26 24 16.docx Stantec PANEL BOARDS - BREAKER-TYPE
RM of Headingley Section 26 24 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PANELBOARDS – BREAKER-TYPE
Page 2 of 2

.9 NEMA rated for the areas in which they are installed, unless otherwise noted.
.10 Distribution panelboard acceptable manufacturer(s): Schneider Canada Square “D” type
NQ, Cutler-Hammer Pow-R-Line Series, Siemens P1, P2.
.11 Power panelboard acceptable manufacturer(s): Schneider Canada Square “D” I-Line,
Cutler-Hammer Pow-R-Line series, Siemens S5.

2.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

.1 Refer to Section 26 28 16 for breaker specification.
.2 Breakers shall be the bolt-on type and shall provide instantaneous trip on over-currents
and time-delay trip on overloads.
.3 Breakers shall be compatible with fault current rating of the panel.
.4 Breakers shall be of the thermal magnetic tripping type.
.5 Main breaker shall be separately mounted on top or bottom of panel to suit cable entry as
required. When mounted vertically, down position should open breaker.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 PLANT ASSEMBLY

.1 Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment.

3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Locate panelboards as indicated on the drawings and mount securely, plumb true and
square.
.2 Install each panelboard 1980 mm above finished floor measured to the top of the
enclosure.
.3 Install panelboards mounted on brick, concrete or block walls on plywood backboards or
use 3 mm thick lead washers between enclosure and wall face. Where practical, group
panels on common backboard. If mounted in a humid or corrosive rated environment,
follow the Electrical Code, Section 22 for installation requirements.
.4 Make all field wiring connections and terminations. Connect loads to circuits as
indicated and connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus with respective neutral
identified.

3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.2 Provide nameplate for each panelboard engraved as directed.
.3 Provide complete circuit directory for each panelboard, with typewritten legend showing
location and load of each circuit.

END OF SECTION

26 24 16.docx Stantec PANEL BOARDS - BREAKER-TYPE

RM of Headingley Section 26 24 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Page 1 of 9

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Conduct equipment inspection at manufacturer's plant.
.2 Provide manufacturer's type test certificates.
.3 The Engineer reserves the right to witness standard factory testing of complete motor
control centre including operation of switches, circuit breakers, starters and controls.
.4 Submit written test results to the Engineer.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and Division 01. Indicate:
.1 Ratings.
.2 Enclosure environmental ratings.
.3 Features and options.
.4 Outline dimensions.
.5 Locations (dimensions) of buss, neutrals, grounding points.
.6 Configuration of identified compartments.
.7 Full shop drawings for each component installed in the MCC.
.8 Layout of bucket doors.
.9 Identification of the Equipment or Load Number to be powered by each
compartment, or “Future” if a compartment is to remain unused.
.10 Wording that will be on lamacoid labels.
.11 Floor anchoring method and dimensioned foundation template.
.12 Cable entry and exit locations.
.13 Dimensioned position and size of busbars and details of provision for future
extension.
.14 Schematic and wiring diagrams.
.15 Bill of materials
.16 Technical Datasheets.

26 24 19.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES

RM of Headingley Section 26 24 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Page 2 of 9

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for motor control centre for incorporation into
the Operation and Maintenance Manual as specified in Section 26 05 00.
.2 Include data for each type and style of starter.
.3 Provide preventive maintenance program for the Motor Control Center

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.2 Provide listed spare parts for each different size and type of starter:
.1 2 sets of contacts, stationary
.2 2 sets of contacts, movable
.3 1 contact, auxiliary
.4 1 control transformer for each VA rating
.5 1 operating coil for each starter size supplied
.6 1 package of ten fuses of each rating
.7 4 indicating lamps for each type provided
.8 2 relays for each type provided

1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS

.1 Materials and workmanship shall comply with codes and standards of the Province in
which the work is located and local codes, regulation, and standards.
.2 In addition, the work shall conform to the current edition of applicable Codes and
Standards of the following agencies:
.1 NEMA Standard ICS 2-322.
.2 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 14, "Industrial Control Equipment".
.3 Electrical Code
.4 Applicable sections of ANSI (American National Standards Institute) Standards.
.5 All equipment to be CSA, cUL, or cETL approved.

1.7 GUARANTEE
.1 The performance of the motor control centre equipment shall be guaranteed throughout to
perform the duty stated herein in accordance with General Conditions.

Part 2 Products

2.1 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS

.1 Motor control centre, rated as indicated.
.2 MCC shall be 4-wire except where shown otherwise.

26 24 19.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES

RM of Headingley Section 26 24 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Page 3 of 9

.3 Motor control centre shall be “Intelligent” type, equipped with Modbus TCP
communication modules for all starter overloads, reduced voltage starters, VFDs, and
power monitor modules.
.4 Motor control centre components shall be capable of communicating directly to the main
plant PLC without the need for protocol conversion.
.5 All controlled loads shall have Hand-Off-Remote switches on MCC bucket door.
Remote Status and Hand Status shall be connected to the Intelligent component input for
remote monitoring by main PLC control system.
.6 Intelligent Overloads for Starters to contain monitoring of current, overload status,
Remote and Hand Switch status and provide for remote start/stop control and fault reset.
Starter to be configurable to either run, stop or maintain current state on communication
failure.
.7 Intelligent reduced voltage starters to contain monitoring of current, overload status, fault
status, Remote and Hand Switch status and provide for remote start/stop control and fault
reset. Starter to be configurable to either run, stop or maintain current state on
communication failure.
.8 Intelligent VFDs to contain monitoring of current, fault status, Remote and Hand Switch
status, running status, speed feedback and provide for remote start/stop control, speed
control and fault reset. VFD to be configurable to either run, stop or maintain current
state on communication failure.
.9 Intelligent VFD’s should support Modbus TCP protocol.
.10 MCC to contain industrial Managed Ethernet Switch that supports Modbus TCP protocol
for connection of all components inside the MCC, allow two (2) free ports for SCADA
interface.
.11 Provide redundant power supplies in the MCC to power all communication modules.

2.2 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE DESCRIPTION

.1 Compartmentalized vertical sections with common power busbars.
.2 Floor mounting, free standing.
.3 Accommodating incoming cable to enter at top or bottom as indicated.
.4 Class 2, Type C.
.5 Motor circuit protector combination starters.
.6 MCC shall be 508 (20”) deep except where indicated.
.7 Sprinkler proof NEMA 12 gasketed enclosure. Sections shall be nonventilated unless
ventilation is required by load e.g. VFD.
.8 Fault level ratings shall be the greater of those listed here and those indicated elsewhere:
.1 Bracing min 50 kA.
.2 Bracing 65 kA where interrupt rating is 42 kA and up to 50 kA.
.3 Bracing to match interrupt rating where interrupt rating is greater than 65 kA.
.4 Interrupt rating min 25 kA.

26 24 19.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES

RM of Headingley Section 26 24 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Page 4 of 9

.5 Interrupt rating min 42 kA where main service is 800A or greater at 600V, or

600A or greater at 208V.
.6 Interrupt rating min 65 kA where main service is 2000A or greater.
.7 Interrupt rating greater where indicated elsewhere in drawings or specs.

2.3 VERTICAL SECTION CONSTRUCTION

.1 Independent vertical sections fabricated from rolled flat steel sheets, bolted together to
form rigid, completely enclosed assembly.
.2 Each vertical section divided into compartment units.
.3 Each unit to have complete top and bottom steel plate for isolation between units.
.4 Horizontal wireways, equipped with cable supports, across top and bottom, extending full
width of motor control centre, isolated from busbars by steel barriers.
.5 Vertical wireways for load and control conductors extending full height of vertical
sections, and equipped with cable tie supports. Installation wiring to units accessible
with doors open and units in place.
.6 Openings, with removable cover plates, inside of vertical sections for horizontal wiring
between sections.
.7 Provision for outgoing cables to exit via top.
.8 Removable lift means.
.9 Divide assembly for shipment to site as indicated, complete with hardware and
instructions for re-assembly.

2.4 SILLS
.1 Continuous 100 mm channel iron floor sills for mounting bases with 19 mm diameter
holes for bolts.

2.5 BUSBARS
.1 Main horizontal and branch vertical, three phase high conductivity tin plated copper
busbars in separate compartment insulated self-cooled, extending entire width and height
of motor control centre, supported on insulators and rated in the drawing
.2 Branch vertical busbars for distribution of power to units in vertical sections.
.3 No other cables, wires, equipment in main and branch busbar compartments.
.4 Bus supports: with high dielectric strength, low moisture absorption, high impact
material and long creepage surface designed to discourage collection of dust.

2.6 GROUND BUS

.1 Tin plated bus size 50 mm x 6 mm extending entire width of motor control centre,
located at top. Ground motor control centre main bus as specified in Section 26 05 26.

26 24 19.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES

RM of Headingley Section 26 24 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Page 5 of 9

2.7 STARTER UNIT COMPARTMENTS

.1 Units NEMA size 4 and smaller, circuit breaker units 225A and smaller, to be plug-in
type with self-disconnect. Guide rail supports for units to ensure that stabs make positive
contact with vertical bus. Provision for units to be installed or removed, off load, while
buses are energized.
.2 Unit mounting:
.1 Engaged position - unit stabbed into vertical bus.
.2 Withdrawn position - unit isolated from vertical bus but supported by structure.
Terminal block accessible for electrical testing of starter.
.3 Provision for positive latching in either engaged or withdrawn position and
padlocking in withdrawn position.
.4 Stab-on connectors free floating silver plated clips, self-aligning, backed up with
steel springs.
.3 External operating handle of circuit switch interlocked with door to prevent door opening
with switch in "on" position. Provision for 3 padlocks to lock operating handle in "off"
position and lock door closed.
.4 Hinge unit doors on same side.
.5 Overload relays manually reset from front with door closed.
.6 Devices and components by one manufacturer to facilitate maintenance.
.7 All starters and contactors to have one N.O. and one N.C. spare contact wired to terminal
block.

2.8 WIRING AND TERMINAL BLOCKS

.1 The shop installed wiring arrangement shall be as indicated. For Type B wiring, all
control connections to be brought to terminal blocks within each starter compartment.
Provide a minimum of 5 spare terminal blocks for #12 AWG incoming control wiring.
.2 Provide internal power wiring from the line side of each starter to the bus stabs with a
minimum of #12 AWG wire rated for 600 volt duty. Size wiring to accommodate the
largest horsepower that the line starter is capable of switching.
.3 Control wiring shall be 600V rated, XLPE insulated, minimum #16 AWG size. Install
wiring to panel doors utilizing extra-flexible 49-strand conductors.
.4 All internal wiring shall employ stranded copper conductors.
.5 Identify all wiring by means of heat shrink type wire markers as manufactured by
Critchley, or Brady, fixed to each conductor at both ends.
.6 Wires shall be colour coded as follows:
.1 Control circuits - Red
.2 Power circuits - Black
.7 Terminal blocks shall be of the compression type and shall be of modular pull-apart
construction enabling unit wiring to be easily separated from the field wiring. Identify all
terminal blocks with numbers identical to the wire numbers.

26 24 19.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES

RM of Headingley Section 26 24 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Page 6 of 9

.8 No more than two wires shall be placed under each terminal screw.

2.9 INCOMING LINE TERMINATION

.1 Provide pressure-type cable lugs and bus adapters or extensions suitable for terminating
the main incoming cable conductors. The lugs shall accommodate the number and size
of cables as indicated. Cable entry shall be from the top of the MCC as indicated.

2.10 FUTURE UNITS

.1 Provide spaces for starters or switching units in the MCCs for equipment designated
"Future". Fully equip these spaces with horizontal and vertical bus bars and all fittings
necessary to accommodate the future equipment with a minimum of field alterations and
additions. Provide blank hinged doors to cover these future spaces.
.2 MCC shall be suitable for future buss extension, or for a tap box for cabling connection
to MCC buss for future extension.

2.11 WIRING IDENTIFICATION

.1 Provide wiring identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

2.12 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.2 Motor control centre main nameplate as indicated.
.3 Individual compartment nameplates engraved as indicated.

2.13 MCC LAYOUT

.1 Per drawings. If unable to arrange the MCC as depicted, provide alternate layout for
approval.
.2 The supplied unit must fit the area in which the unit is to be installed, in footprint shown.
.3 Control Section if shown on drawings:
.1 Control section c/w all items indicated on the drawings and as specified in
Section 25 14 23
.1 Terminal strips (identified) for all wiring.
.2 Identification nameplates on all components, interior and exterior.
.3 Extra flexible wire to door components.
.4 Control relays, OMRON MK3 PN-5S c/w PF-113A-E bases.
.5 Time delay relays, OMRON H3CA series c/w bases.
.6 Push-to-test L.E.D. type pilot lights, selector switches, pushbuttons.
.7 Circuit breakers and/or fuses as required.
.8 Alarm buzzer, Sonalert.
.9 Transient voltage surge suppressor as specified in Section 26 43 13.
.10 UPS as specified in Section 26 33 53.
.11 DC power supply, as specified in Section 25 14 23.

26 24 19.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES

RM of Headingley Section 26 24 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Page 7 of 9

.12 Programmable controller as specified in Section 25 30 01.

.13 HMI operator interface/protocol converter as specified in Section 25 14
23.
.14 Ethernet switch as specified in Section 25 14 23.
.15 IT security system as specified in Section 25 14 23.
.16 Remote 3 TB hard drive
.17 Remote auto dialer as specified in Section 25 14 23.
.18 Remote access Ethernet modem as specified in Section 25 14 23.

2.14 POWER MONITOR

.1 Schneider PowerLogic PM5560 or equivalent by Allen-Bradley, Eaton, Siemens 9410 .
Provide all necessary cables for connection to SCADA system.
.2 The power meter shall have the capability to serve data over the Modbus TCP network to
SCADA or PLC. The power meter shall allow register access through Ethernet
communication port. Provide Modbus TCP protocol converter if required
.3 The power meter shall provide for onboard data logging. Each power meter shall be able
to log data, alarms and events, and waveforms (if applicable). Logged information to be
stored in each Power Meter include the following: Data logs, Min/Max log files of
selected parameter values, Alarm logs for each user defined alarm or event and
Waveform log. The meters shall offer 1.1MB on-board non-volatile memory
.4 Shall be capable of reading, transmitting via Ethernet, and displaying locally the
following as a minimum
.1 Average Voltage and Current
.2 Line – Neutral Voltage for all Phases
.3 Line-Line Voltage for all phases
.4 Individual Line Current
.5 Neutral Current
.6 Average % THD for Voltage
.7 Average % THD for Current
.8 Individual % HD for all voltage harmonics up to 25th order
.9 Individual % HD for all current harmonics up to 25th order

2.15 FINISHES
.1 Apply finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.2 Paint motor control centre exterior ASA 61 light grey enamel and interiors white.

2.16 MANUFACTURERS
.1 Acceptable MCC manufacturer/model shall be Schneider Model 6i MCC which is the
basis of design. It is mandatory to meet the dimensions of the MCC as shown in
drawings. Allen-Bradley Centerline or Eaton Freedom 2100 MCC. MCC are accepted
where they meet the dimensions of the MCC as shown in drawings. Where they do not

26 24 19.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES

RM of Headingley Section 26 24 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Page 8 of 9

meet the dimensions of the MCC in the drawings, they must be submitted for equivalent
along with dimensional drawings.
.2 Fabrication of custom built MCC and associated components, buckets, devices, shall be
by the System Integrator (specified elsewhere).

Part 3 Execution

3.1 SHOP ASSEMBLY

.1 Shop assembly shall be maximized, to minimize the on-site erection work. Equipment
should thus be shipped in as few subassemblies as is practical and in accordance with
overall erection schedule.
.2 Containers and components clearly identified for transportation and field assembly.

3.2 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

.1 Prior to packaging and/or shipping any MCC components, the MCC, associated PLC
control equipment, and all associated communications networks shall be connected and
shown to be properly operational.
.2 The acceptance testing will include demonstration of the automatic restoration of
communications to all devices after a power outage.
.3 Notification of readiness to perform the testing shall be communicated to the Engineer
one (1) week in advance of the testing to allow for a witness to be selected and attend the
testing.

3.3 PACKAGING AND SHIPPING

.1 Each item shall be packed, crated or otherwise protected so that it is not damaged in
transit and arrives in serviceable condition at the site. In particular, measures shall be
taken to prevent accumulation of water in equipment.
.2 Crates, boxes and cartons shall be clearly marked to indicate the purchase order number
and the name of the equipment.
.3 Shipping invoice shall show the crate, box or carton number.
.4 All finished rubbing surfaces which are not assembled in the shop shall be adequately
protected during shipment by wrapping with burlap or canvas or other means which shall
be secured by wooden batts securely wired together to prevent degradation of the surface
finishes during transport and handling.

3.4 INSTALLATION AND TESTING

.1 Install embedded floor channels where applicable.
.2 Set and secure MCCs in place, rigid, plumb and square, on channel bases.
.3 Interconnect MCC cubicles with bus bar and wiring connectors supplied by
manufacturer.
.4 Check factory-made connections for mechanical security, electrical continuity, and
current phasing.
26 24 19.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
RM of Headingley Section 26 24 19
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES
Page 9 of 9

.5 Make bonding connections between equipment ground busses and building grounding
system.
.6 After finishing work, remove foreign material, including dust, before energizing
equipment.
.7 Perform all tests in accordance with Sections 25 05 00 and 26 05 00.
.8 Make all power and control field wiring connections.
.9 Check overload trip unit settings against drawings and motor nameplate data.
.10 Ensure moving and working parts are lubricated where required.
.11 Operate starters in sequence to provide satisfactory performance of motor control centre
during 8 hour period.

3.5 COMMISSIONING
.1 The motor control manufacturer shall include for the testing and commissioning of the
complete systems and instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation of the systems.
Two additional site visits shall also be included during the warranty period.

END OF SECTION

26 24 19.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES

RM of Headingley Section 26 27 26
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WIRING DEVICES
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical scope of work.
.2 This section covers the supply and installation of all receptacles, toggle switches, and
cover plates.
.3 All wiring devices shall be at the same manufacturer throughout the Contract.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings for all wiring devices in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

Part 2 Products

2.1 RECEPTACLES
.1 This specification applies to single and duplex receptacles and receptacles of other
voltage and ampacity as indicated on the drawings.
.2 Type NEMA 5-15R or 5-20R as the circuit requires, 125V, U-ground, heavy duty
specification grade to the current edition of CSA C22.2 No. 42 – General Use
Receptacles.
.3 Receptacle shall have heavy duty nylon face with steel reinforcing plate in centre.
.4 Receptacle shall have spring loaded back wiring.
.5 Receptacle shall have raised ground for safety.
.6 Receptacle contacts shall have spring steel clips to reduce contact fatigue.
.7 Receptacle shall be suitable for No. 10 AWG back and side wiring.
.8 All screws shall be combination slotted socket head design to accept #6 socket head
screwdriver on all screws.
.9 Provide ground fault circuit interrupter receptacle (GFCI) where indicated on plan
drawings. GFCI receptacle shall be complete with:
.1 Testing and reset buttons.
.2 Indicator light to show status of GFCI protection operation.

26 27 26.docx Stantec WIRING DEVICES

RM of Headingley Section 26 27 26
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WIRING DEVICES
Page 2 of 3

.3 Solid state ground sensing device.

.4 5mA trip level.
.10 Receptacles in ordinary and humid corrosive locations shall be duplex-type,
manufactured by Bryant, Cooper, Arrow Hart, Leviton.
.11 Receptacles in Zone 1 and Zone 2 hazardous locations shall be manufactured by Crouse-
Hinds ENR (M3) Explosion-proof Receptacles, Meltric.

2.2 SWITCHES
.1 Switches shall be 15A, 120V, single pole, double pole, or three-way as indicated on the
drawings.
.2 Must adhere to CSA 22.2 No. 111-10 (R2015) – General-use Snap Switches, unless
specified for use in hazardous areas.
.3 Switches to be manually-operated heavy duty with the following features:
.1 Heavy duty mounting strap
.2 One piece Lexan toggle, lever, and cam
.3 Silver alloy contacts
.4 Spring loaded back wired
.5 Green hex head grounding terminal
.6 All screws socket/slotted head suited to accommodate #6 socket head
screwdriver
.7 Switches to be fully rated for tungsten filament and fluorescent lamps, and up to
80% of rated capacity of motor loads.
.4 Switches in ordinary and humid corrosive locations shall be manufactured by Bryant,
Cooper, Crouse-Hinds, Leviton. Type 1201 (number to suit application and amperage).
.5 Switches in Zone 2 hazardous locations shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds No.
EFS/EFD (number to suit application and amperage) or approved equal.

2.3 COVER PLATES

.1 Cover plates from one manufacturer throughout project to match switches and
receptacles.
.2 Cover plates to be PVC.
.3 For wiring devices mounted in flush-mounted outlet boxes, thickness to be 2.5 mm.
.4 Cover plates shall be suitable for Ipex FS/FD boxes.
.5 Acceptable manufacturer is Ipex.

2.4 WEATHERPROOF COVER PLATES

.1 Weatherproof covers for duplex receptacles located indoors, for Category 1 and Category
2 areas or all process areas, shall be self-closing, two independent spring-loaded self-
closing doors, PVC complete with non-corrosion stainless steel springs and stainless steel
mounting screws.

26 27 26.docx Stantec WIRING DEVICES

RM of Headingley Section 26 27 26
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WIRING DEVICES
Page 3 of 3

.2 Weatherproof covers for duplex receptacles located outdoors shall be weatherproof-in-

use type.
.3 Weatherproof covers for light switches shall be plunger style, PVC complete with non-
corrosive stainless steel mounting screws.
.4 Cover plates for receptacles in areas exposed to the weather shall have while-in-use
covers.
.5 Covers shall be complete with EPDM gasket material suitable for –45°C to 85°C.
.6 Acceptable manufacturers are IPEX, Leviton, Crouse-Hinds, Hubbell.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Switches:
.1 Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position when switch is closed.
.2 Utilize gang type outlet box where more than one switch is required in one
location.
.3 Mount toggle switches at height specified in Section 26 05 00 or as indicated.
.2 Receptacles:
.1 Mount duplex receptacles vertically unless otherwise noted.
.2 Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is
required in one location.
.3 Mount receptacles at height specified in Section 26 05 00 or as indicated.
.4 The location of all outlets as shown on the electrical plans is approximately
correct at the time of planning, but as these drawings do not show all structural
details, measure any work requiring accurate dimensions either on the project or
from the architectural details.
.5 The location of outlets shown on the drawings may be changed by the Engineer
at no extra cost to the Owner, providing the distance does not exceed 3000 mm
and the information is given before installation.
.3 Cover Plates:
.1 Install all cover plates prior to energization.
.2 Cover plates shall be straight and true.
.3 Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are grouped.
.4 Flush-mounted cover plates shall be flush with the wall.
.5 Do not use cover plates meant for flush-mounted outlet boxes on surface-
mounted boxes.

END OF SECTION

26 27 26.docx Stantec WIRING DEVICES

RM of Headingley Section 26 28 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical scope of work.
.2 This section covers the supply and installation of all magnetic and thermal magnetic
circuit breakers.
.3 Specific circuit breaker voltage, phase, ampacity, pole numbers, interrupting capacity,
breaker type and settings are indicated elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 All equipment to the current edition of CSA Standard C22.2, No. 5 – Molded-case
Circuit Breakers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and Division 01, including:
.1 Component function, make and model no.
.2 Quantities.
.3 All electrical and physical ratings and features.
.4 Breaker voltage and amperage.
.5 Withstand and interrupt capability, with and without the series ratings that would
apply.
.6 Breaker phase, number of poles & number of wires.
.7 Adjustments.
.8 Indication of solid neutral if required.
.9 Lug information.
.2 Submit time-current curves for breakers.

Part 2 Products

2.1 BREAKERS - GENERAL

.1 Moulded case circuit breakers, quick-make, quick-break type, for manual and automatic
operation with temperature compensation for 40°C ambient.
26 28 16.docx Stantec CIRCUIT BREAKERS
RM of Headingley Section 26 28 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Page 2 of 2

.2 Common-trip breakers with single handle for multi-pole applications.

.3 Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers are to operate only when the
value of current reaches setting. Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to have an
adjustable range from 3-10 times current rating.
.4 Circuit breakers with interchangeable trips as indicated.

2.2 THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS

.1 Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic
tripping devices to provide inverse time current tripping.

2.3 MAGNETIC BREAKERS

.1 Magnetic circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of magnetic tripping devices
to provide instantaneous tripping for short circuit protection (motor starters).

2.4 ELECTRONIC TRIP UNIT

.1 LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous) adjustable breakers shall be c/w electronic trip unit.
Provide independent adjustments of pickup and delay for each parameter via dials on the
front of breaker.

2.5 ENCLOSURES
.1 All breakers shall be housed in panelboards, motor panels, wall mounted enclosures, or
MCC; said panels and enclosures to be rated as indicated for the areas in which they are
installed.

2.6 MANUFACTURERS
.1 All breakers shall be of the same manufacturer as the panel.
.2 For circuit breakers protecting fans, heating elements, transformers and panelboards,
acceptable manufacturer(s): Schneider Canada, Federal Pioneer FHL, Cutler-Hammer
Series C, Siemens Sentron.
.3 For circuit breakers protecting electric motors, acceptable manufacturer(s): Schneider
Canada Square “D” Mag-Guard MCP, Cutler-Hammer Series C HMCP, Allen Bradley-
Bulletin 140U, Frame I, JD or K, Siemens Sentron MCP.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install circuit breakers as indicated.

END OF SECTION

26 28 16.docx Stantec CIRCUIT BREAKERS

RM of Headingley Section 26 28 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DISCONNECT SWITCHES –
FUSED AND NON-FUSED
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 This section covers the supply and installation of all motor and equipment disconnect
switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and Division 01, including:
.1 Quantities and tags of equipment controlled.
.2 Scale drawing of switch and enclosure.
.3 Electrical ratings.
.4 Sizes of fuses accommodated. Availability of kits to accommodate fuse sizes.
.5 Features and options.
.6 Enclosure environmental ratings.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 All disconnect switches to be CSA, cUL, or cETL certified for the area in which they are
mounted.

Part 2 Products

2.1 UNFUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES

.1 Provide unfused disconnect switches, voltage and amperage rated to suit loads.
.2 Disconnect shall be front-operational, heavy duty, industrial grade, quick-make, quick-
break type.
.3 Make provision for padlocking in the "OFF" position.
.4 Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in "ON" position.
.5 "ON/OFF" switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.
.6 Disconnect enclosures shall be NEMA 4X in corrosive environments and NEMA 4 in
ordinary areas, unless otherwise indicated.

26 28 23.docx Stantec DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED & NON-FUSED

RM of Headingley Section 26 28 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 DISCONNECT SWITCHES –
FUSED AND NON-FUSED
Page 2 of 2

.7 Disconnect enclosures shall be explosion proof in hazardous locations.

.8 Disconnect switches to be 100% load-make, load-break rated.
.9 Disconnects shall each have auxiliary contact(s) where required, and as indicated, on
drawings.

2.2 FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCHES

.1 Provide fused disconnect switches, voltage and amperage rated to suit loads.
.2 Disconnect shall be front-operational, heavy duty, industrial grade, quick-make, quick-
break type.
.3 Make provision for padlocking in the "OFF" position.
.4 Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in "ON" position.
.5 "ON/OFF" switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.
.6 Disconnect enclosures shall be NEMA 4X in corrosive environments and NEMA 4 in
ordinary areas, unless otherwise indicated.
.7 Disconnect enclosures shall be explosion proof in hazardous locations.
.8 Disconnect switches to be 100% load-make, load-break rated.
.9 Disconnects shall each have auxiliary contact(s) where required, and as indicated, on
drawings.

2.3 MANUFACTURERS
.1 Disconnects for all equipment specified shall be as manufactured by Cooper Crouse-
Hinds, Hubbell, Arrow Hart, Cutler-Hammer, Schneider Canada, Siemens.
.2 Switches shall be by one manufacturer.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install disconnect switches as per manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Mount switches at 1400 mm above finished floor to the underside of the switch
enclosure.
.3 Install disconnected switches where indicated and where required by the local inspection
authority.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION
.1 .1 Provide lamacoid nameplate on front face of switch identifying equipment.

END OF SECTION

26 28 23.docx Stantec DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED & NON-FUSED

RM of Headingley Section 26 29 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Page 1 of 7

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 This section provides specification requirements for adjustable frequency drives, variable
speed drives, or herein identified as AC Drives for use with NEMA B design AC motors.
.2 Any exceptions/deviations to this specification shall be indicated in writing and
submitted with the quotation.

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 Variable frequency drives to the current edition of:
.1 CSA C22.2 No. 14 - Industrial Control Equipment
.2 IEC 529 - Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosure
.3 NEMA ICS 7 - Industrial Control and Systems Adjustable Speed Drives
.4 NEMA ICS 7.1 - Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection
Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drives
.5 UL 508 - UL Standard for Safety Industrial Control Equipment
.6 UL 508C - UL Standard for Safety Power Conversion Equipment

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Submittal to include
standard catalogue sheets showing voltage, horsepower, maximum current ratings, and
recommended replacement parts list with part numbers shall be furnished for each
different Horsepower rated AC Drive provided.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 The AC Drive and all associated optional equipment shall be CSA, cUL, or cETL
certified. As verification a CSA, cUL, or cETL label shall be attached on the side of the
drive controller and all associated optional equipment.
.2 The AC Drive shall be designed, constructed and tested in accordance with NEMA, NEC,
IEC standards and CSA certified.

26 29 23.docx Stantec VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

RM of Headingley Section 26 29 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Page 2 of 7

Part 2 Products

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
.1 The AC Drive shall be provided by Schneider Altivar ATV630, ABB ACS880 series or
Eaton PowerXL DG series
.2 Alternate control techniques other than sine wave by pulse width modulated (PWM) are
not acceptable.

2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

.1 The AC Drive shall convert the input AC mains power to an adjustable frequency and
voltage as defined in the following sections.
.2 The input power section shall contain an internal 5% line reactor or, if not so equipped,
must be supplied with and connected to an external 5% line reactor that maintains the
electrical approval of the system. The line reactor should provide a minimum of 5%
impedance based on the drive operating at its continuous output current rating.
.3 The input power section shall utilize a full wave bridge design incorporating diode
rectifiers. The diode rectifiers shall convert fixed voltage and frequency, AC line power
to fixed DC voltage. This power section shall be insensitive to phase rotation of the AC
line. The DC voltage shall be filtered.
.4 The output power section shall change fixed DC voltage to adjustable frequency AC
voltage. This section shall utilize insulated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) or intelligent
power modules (IPMs) as required by the current rating of the motor.
.5 The AC Drive’s output shall be connected to an output load reactor for distances shorter
than 30 m, or dv/dt filter for distances longer than 30 m. Load reactors and/or dv/dt filters
to be Transcoil KDR or V1k series, or approved equal.

2.3 MOTOR DATA

.1 The AC Drive shall be sized to operate the AC motor(s) as indicated on the drawings and
having the following ratings unless otherwise noted:
.1 Motor Horsepower: as indicated on drawings.
.2 Motor RPM: 4-pole (1800 rpm @ 60Hz)
.3 Motor voltage: 575 Vac
.4 Motor service factor: 1.15

2.4 APPLICATION DATA

.1 All AC Drives shall be sized to operate a variable torque load, unless otherwise indicated.
.2 The motor speed range shall be from a minimum speed of 1.0 Hertz to a maximum speed
of 60 Hertz.
.3 The AC drive shall have, as a minimum, a 5:1 turndown ratio.

2.5 ENVIRONMENTAL RATINGS

.1 The AC Drive shall be of construction that allows operation in a pollution Degree 2
environment.

26 29 23.docx Stantec VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

RM of Headingley Section 26 29 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Page 3 of 7

.2 The AC Drive shall be designed to operate in an ambient temperature from –10 to +

40°C.
.3 The storage temperature range shall be –40 to + 70°C.
.4 The maximum relative humidity shall be 95% at 40°C, non-condensing.
.5 The AC Drive shall be rated to operate at altitudes less than or equal to 3,300 ft. (1000m).
For altitudes above 3,300 ft., derate the AC Drive by 1% for every 300 ft. (100 m).

2.6 RATINGS
.1 The AC Drive shall be designed to operate from an input voltage of 525 to 690 Vac.
.2 The AC Drive shall operate from an input voltage frequency range from 55 to 66 Hz.
.3 The displacement power factor shall not be less than .96 lagging under any speed or load
condition.
.4 The efficiency of the AC Drive at 100% speed and load shall not be less than 97%.
.5 The constant torque rated AC Drive overcurrent capacity shall be not less than 150% for
1 minute.
.6 The output carrier frequency of the AC Drive shall be selectable from 1.0 to 6 kHz
depending on Drive rating. For low noise operation, derating may be required.
.7 The output frequency shall be from 0.1 to at least 90 Hz.
.8 The AC drive will incorporate sensorless flux vector control technology for increased
starting torque and better dynamic speed control performance.

2.7 PROTECTION
.1 Upon power-up the AC Drive shall automatically test for valid operation of memory,
dynamic brake failure, power and the pre-charge circuit.
.2 The Power Converter shall be protected against short circuits between output phases, and
between output phases and ground. The AC Drive shall safely shut down without
damaging any power circuit devices.
.3 For a fault condition other than a ground fault, short circuit, or internal fault, an auto
restart function should provide up to 10 programmable restart attempts with Lock-out
after the last attempt. The programmable time delay before restart attempts will range
from 1 to 60 seconds. This feature can be defeated if not required.
.4 The rotating motor autostart on power-up function shall be able to be enabled/disabled if
required.
.5 The AC Drive shall be capable of running without a motor connected, for the purposes of
setup and testing.
.6 The deceleration mode of the AC drive shall be programmable for normal and fault
conditions. The stop modes shall include free-wheel stop, emergency stop, and DC
injection braking.
.7 Upon a loss of the analog process follower reference signal, the AC drive shall fault
and/or operate at a user defined speed set between software programmed low speed and
high speed settings.

26 29 23.docx Stantec VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

RM of Headingley Section 26 29 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Page 4 of 7

.8 The AC drive shall have solid state I2t protection that is UL listed and meets UL 508 as a
Class 10 overload protection and meets IEC 947. The minimum adjustment range shall be
from 50 to 110% of the current output of the AC Drive.
.9 There shall be a minimum of 2 skip frequency ranges, each with a programmable
bandwidth from 0 to 10Hz. The skip frequencies shall be able to be programmed
independently, back-to-back or overlapping as the application requires.
.10 The AC Drive shall have an internal over-temperature protection.

2.8 ADJUSTMENTS AND CONFIGURATIONS

.1 If required, a password shall be available to allow the terminal keypad to be locked out
from unauthorized personnel.
.2 The acceleration and deceleration ramp times shall be adjustable from 0.1 to 3000.0
seconds.
.3 The memory shall retain and record run status, operating time, and fault type of the past
10 faults.
.4 Slip compensation shall be a software enabled function.
.5 The AC drive shall offer programmable DC injection braking that will be able to brake
the AC motor by injecting DC current and creating a stationary magnetic pole in the
stator continuously, at start and/or at stop. The level of current will be adjustable between
15-150% of rated current. Where DC braking is required, the associated drive shall be
set to suitably brake and/or hold the load as necessary without damage to the motor or
attached equipment.
.6 The AC drive system shall be supplied, programmed and configured such that stopping or
decelerating the load does not cause the drive to fault.
.7 The AC drive shall be fully programmed to match motor nameplate data as installed on
site.
.8 The AC drive shall be programmed, commissioned and tuned to suit site process
conditions, and per control and equipment requirements. Conditions to note include, but
are not limited to:
.1 Production of sufficient starting torque for the load, without drive overload.
.2 No bus voltage faults on decelerating or stopping the drive.
.9 As a minimum, the following parameters shall be accessible:
.1 Maximum speed
.2 Minimum speed
.3 Current limit
.4 Acceleration time
.5 Deceleration time
.6 Stop method
.7 Thermal overload limits and status
.8 Restart limit
.9 Skip frequency and bandwidth
.10 Preset speed
26 29 23.docx Stantec VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
RM of Headingley Section 26 29 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Page 5 of 7

2.9 OPERATOR INTERFACE

.1 The operator interface terminal shall feature an alphanumeric display with seven
indicators for speed controller status (Run, direction, ready stop, alarm, fault) and three
indicators for control (I/O terminal, keypad, bus/communication). There shall also be
three LED indicators for Ready (green), Run (green), Fault (red). The terminal should
allow the modification of AC drive adjustments via a keypad. All electrical values,
configuration parameters, application and activity function access, faults, local control,
adjustment storage will be in plain English, not coded values.
.2 The display will be a high resolution, LCD backlighted screen capable of displaying two
lines of alphanumeric characters. The use of coded or abbreviated displays shall not be
acceptable.
.3 The following monitoring values shall be accessible and available when in the operating
mode:
.1 Frequency (Hz) and/or motor speed (RPM)
.2 Motor current (A), motor voltage (V), motor torque (%), motor power (%)
.3 Drive temperature (°C)
.4 Motor temperature (%)
.5 Values or status of analog I/O, and digital I/O
.4 The operator terminal shall allow the user to display up to three user selectable
monitoring values on the same screen at a time.
.5 The operator terminal shall offer a general menu consisting of parameter setting, fault
history, and drive configuration. A software lock with password will limit access to the
main menu or parameters.
.6 There will be function keys that allowing the ability to scroll through menus and screens,
select or activate functions or increase the value of a selected parameter.
.7 A data entry key will allow the user to confirm a selected menu or numeric value.
.8 The following control functions shall be available on the keypad:
.1 Start
.2 Stop
.3 Select
.4 Reset
.5 Direction control.
.9 A RESET key will allow a parameter to return the existing value if adjustment is not
required and the value is displayed.
.10 The AC drive shall have a LED on the keypad to indicate RUN status of the drive.

2.10 CONTROL
.1 The AC Drive shall have terminal strips for the attachment of external pilot devices and
signals used for starting/stopping the drive, speed control, and displaying operating
status, and other control functions. All outputs will be software assignable.
.2 The control power for the digital inputs and outputs shall be 24Vdc.

26 29 23.docx Stantec VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

RM of Headingley Section 26 29 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Page 6 of 7

.3 There will be two (2) analog inputs. The analog inputs will be hardware selectable and
consist of the following configurations: 0(4)–20 mA, 0-10Vdc, or +/-10Vdc.
.4 There will be six (6) digital inputs that shall be individually user assignable to perform
the various control functions available.
.5 There will be one (1) software assignable analog output that can be selected and assigned
in the software. The analog output assignments shall be programmable 0(4)-20 mA or 0-
10Vdc.
.6 Two form “C” configurable relay output contacts and an open collector output (24 VDC)
to power a relay or pilot light, shall be provided. Each shall be programmable to indicate
one of the following:
.1 Run
.2 Fault
.3 Ready
.4 At speed
.5 Current limit
.6 Follower present
.7 Auto speed mode
.8 Reverse indicator
.9 PID control active
.10 Over-temperature alarm
.7 There shall be available additional hardware input / output cards for incorporating
alternate control signals including AC voltage logic inputs, PTC thermistor inputs, and
encoder feedback inputs. These items shall be installed and configured on the drive when
necessary to produce the required process functions and interfaces.
.8 Process PID Control
.1 The drive shall incorporate an internal process PI regulator with proportional and
integral gain adjustments as well as error inversion and output clamping
functions.
.2 The feedback shall be configurable for normal or square root functions. If the
feedback indicates that the process is moving away from the set-point, the
regulator shall adjust the drive output until the feedback equals the reference.
.3 Process control shall be capable of being enabled or disabled with a hardwire
input. Transitioning in and out of process control shall be capable of being tuned
for faster response by preloading the integrator.
.4 Protection shall be provided for a loss of feedback or reference signal.
.9 Control Features
.1 Ability to control outputs and manage status information locally within the VFD.
.2 Ability to function stand-alone or complimentary to supervisory control.
.3 Ability to speed reaction time by processing in the VFD.
.4 Ability to provide scaling, selector switches, or other data manipulations not
already built into the VFD.
.5 Ability to read inputs/write outputs and exclusively control the VFD.
26 29 23.docx Stantec VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
RM of Headingley Section 26 29 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Page 7 of 7

.6 Ability to provide an option for decision making if communication is lost with

main controller.
.7 Ability to control other VFDs via a peer-to-peer EtherNet/IP network.
.8 Ability to write programs off-line.

2.11 COMMUNICATIONS
.1 Each AC Drive shall be equipped with Ethernet Base communication protocol. VFD
shall be capable to communicate directly with the SCADA without the need for an
external protocol converter. Refer to Electrical drawing for main communication
protocol.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSPECTION
.1 Verify that the location is ready to receive work and the dimensions are as indicated.
.2 Do not install AC Drive until the building environment can be maintained with the
service conditions required by the manufacturer.

3.2 PROTECTION
.1 Before and during the installation, the AC Drive equipment shall be protected from site
contaminants.

3.3 INSTALLATION
.1 AC drives shall be installed in the motor control centre as indicated. Installation shall be
in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions, drawings and recommendations.

3.4 CONDITIONING
.1 Following any circumstance that causes any AC drive to remain unpowered for duration
of 9 months or more, each affected drive shall not have full supply voltage applied until a
conditioning cycle has been performed on that drive per the manufacturer’s
recommendation.

3.5 TRAINING
.1 An on-site training course of 1 day shall be provided by a representative of the AC Drive
supplier to plant and / or maintenance personnel. Training shall be site specific.
.2 Provide training materials in paper and electronic format. Include operating manuals and
drawings.

3.6 INSPECTION
.1 The supplier of AC Drive shall have a factory trained service representative in domestic
residence within 1000 km (average) of the job site. The factory representative shall be
trained in the maintenance and troubleshooting of the equipment as specified herein.

END OF SECTION
26 29 23.docx Stantec VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
RM of Headingley Section 26 29 34
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL WIRING
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical scope of work.
.2 This section covers the following:
.1 Electrical work pertaining to installation of equipment, which is specified under
other divisions.
.2 Automatic control devices specified in other divisions, supplied and installed
under that division, and wired and connected under this division.
.3 Wiring associated with control wiring schematics on electrical drawings under
this division.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Coordinate with mechanical shop drawings for electrical requirements. Where
mechanical shop drawings differ in control or power requirements this shall be reported
to the Engineer.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Refer to other sections for equipment specifications.
.2 Circuit breaker and feeder sizes as indicated on the electrical drawings for all motors,
fans, HVAC equipment, etc., as supplied under the Mechanical Division are based on
design data only. Contractor responsible for coordinating with the Mechanical Division to
determine exact voltage and amperage of all equipment on site and ensure starters,
breakers, feeder wiring, conduit sizes, etc., are correctly sized for the equipment being
fed in addition to informing the Engineer of all required changes. No extras will be
allowed for costs incurred resulting from failure to properly execute this coordination.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Refer to individual sections for execution.
26 29 34.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL WIRING
RM of Headingley Section 26 29 34
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL WIRING
Page 2 of 3

.2 Coordinate overcurrent and overload protective devices with the nameplate ratings of the
motors.
.3 Fill out a “MOTOR DATA SHEET” for each single phase and 3-phase motor. Provide
these completed sheets to the Engineer at least 2-weeks prior to commissioning.

END OF SECTION

26 29 34.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL WIRING

RM of Headingley Section 26 29 34
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MOTOR CONTROL WIRING
Page 3 of 3

MOTOR DATA SHEET

EQUIPMENT NAME AND NUMBER

NAMEPLATE INFORMATION

MANUFACTURER

KW(HP) MAX AMBIENT 0C

R.P.M. SERVICE FACTOR

VOLTS INSULATION CLASS

AMPS NEMA DESIGN

PHASE SERIAL NUMBER

FRAME MODEL NUMBER

OPERATION CONDITIONS

FULL LOAD AMPS A B C

FULL LOAD OPERATING

VOLTAGE AT MOTOR A-B B-C C-A

OVERLOAD RELAY INSTALLED ADJUSTABLE SETTING AT

M.C.P. AMPS ADJUSTABLE SETTING AT

ACCELERATING TIME (IF OVER 5 SECONDS)

REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER TRANSITION TIME SETTING

SPECIAL CONTROLS AND REMARKS (THERMISTOR AND RELAY TYPE, CAPACITORS AND
WHERE CONNECTED, ETC.)

26 29 34.docx Stantec MOTOR CONTROL WIRING

RM of Headingley Section 26 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BACKUP GENERATOR
Page 1 of 11

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 This section covers the supply and installation of the standby diesel electric generator set.
.2 The generator sets supplied shall have the following features and requirements:
.1 Shop Drawings and Product Data. Submit shop drawings for review and
approval. Include:
.1 Engine: make and model, with performance curves
.2 Alternator: make and model
.3 Voltage regulator: make, model and type
.4 Automatic transfer switch: make, model and type
.5 Battery: make, type and capacity
.6 Battery charger: make, type and model
.7 Alternator control panel: make and type of meters and controls
.8 Governor type and model
.9 Integral automatic levelling load bank rated for 50% of generator output
c/w overcurrent protection.
.10 Flow diagrams for:
.1 Fuel
.2 Lubricating oil
.3 Cooling air
.2 Dimensioned drawing showing complete generating set mounted on steel base,
including vibration isolators, exhaust system, drip trays, and total weight.
.3 Electrical connection drawings including:
.1 Connection points for remote starting signal
.2 Connections and ampacity of any power feeds to the unit during idle or
off periods (heating, ventilation, charging, etc.).
.3 Connection points for remote indication of alarm conditions, as
indicated.
.4 The electrical requirements of those connection points (voltage and/or
current requirements, relay or transistor switching, etc.).
.4 Continuous full load output of the set at 0.8 PF lagging
26 32 13.docx Stantec BACKUP GENERATOR
RM of Headingley Section 26 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BACKUP GENERATOR
Page 2 of 11

.5 Description of set operation including:

.1 Automatic starting and transfer to load and back to normal power,
including time in seconds from start of cranking until unit reaches rated
voltage and frequency
.2 Manual starting
.3 Automatic shut down and alarm on:
.1 Overcranking
.2 Overspeed
.3 High engine temperature
.4 Low lube oil pressure
.4 Over and under frequency protection.
.5 Over and under voltage protection.

1.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Conduct equipment inspection at manufacturer's plant.
.2 Provide manufacturer's type test certificates.
.3 The Engineer is to witness factory testing of the Generator System(s).
.4 Submit written test results to the Engineer and include in O&M Manual.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENSET CHARACTERISTICS

.1 Review drawings for all ratings for generator and related equipment.
.2 Starting kVA capability as shown on drawings.
.3 Provide fuel level alarms as indicated below.
.4 Provide fuel capacity as indicated below.
.5 Provide remote annunciator where indicated below or in drawings.
.6 Relaying as indicated below.
.7 Line circuit breaker, rating as indicated, LSI electronic trip unit type where so indicated
on drawings.
.8 The generator set shall be rated as indicated on the drawings for continuous standby
rating, 0.8% P.F., 347/600 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz for standby power application
at an ambient temperature of 85°F/29°C. Ratings must be substantiated with
manufacturer's standard published curves. The engine shall operate at approximately
1800 RPM and suitable governor shall be provided such that frequency variations shall
not exceed 5%. Ratings must reflect the net power available after deducting all engine
driven accessories.
.9 An automatic solid state voltage regulator shall be provided by the generator
manufacturer to match the characteristics of the generator. Voltage regulations shall be
(+/-) 2% from no-load to full load.

26 32 13.docx Stantec BACKUP GENERATOR

RM of Headingley Section 26 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BACKUP GENERATOR
Page 3 of 11

.10 The engine shall be full compression ionization diesel, four-stroke cycle, single acting,
solid injection, turbo charged, liquid-cooled inline type
.11 The engine shall be equipped with a reliable fuel, lube oil, and intake air filters, lube oil
cooler, fuel transfer pump, any attachments required for continued, dependable operation.
Engine shall be complete with a fill of manufacturer's recommended lubrication and 60%
ethylene glycol concentration in the cooling system.
.12 Genset shall be suitable for the project to meet all requirements of CSA C282.
.13 Tier 3 EPA certified.
.14 CSA, cUL or ULC approved components and overall assembly.
.15 Warranty to be 5 years.
.16 Genset as manufactured by Kohler, Cummins or Cat.

2.2 ALTERNATOR
.1 Alternator shall be single bearing, self-aligning, continuous standby duty, salient pole,
synchronous type with amortisseur winding. It shall be of the drip proof type, entirely
self-contained and with line leads brought out for load connections. Insulation shall be
rated NEMA Class "F". Generator shall be so designed that with a minimum amount of
labour all components will become completely accessible. Engine and generator shall be
completely compatible and warranted by the same manufacturer, or their representative.
Replacement parts shall be readily available.
.2 Alternator to be of 155° rise design.

2.3 FUEL SYSTEM

.1 The engine fuel system shall be equipped with a fuel filter having replaceable elements
which may be easily removed from their housing for replacement without breaking any
fuel line connections or disturbing the fuel pumps on any part of the engine. Fuel filters
shall be located ahead of the injection pumps and injectors so that fuel will have been
thoroughly filtered before it reaches the pumps.
.2 The fuel tank shall be cUL or CSA labelled double-wall sub-base with sufficient capacity
to operate genset at a full load for a minimum of 16 hours.
.1 Fill port, drain port, vent port.
.2 Leak detection alarm, overfill protection, fuel level gauge.
.3 Low fuel level alarm (30% fuel remaining).
.4 Low low fuel level alarm (15% fuel remaining).
.5 Fuel for testing purposes shall be included in this contract and the unit shall be
turned over to the Owner full of fuel.
.6 All alarms to be pre-wired into genset control panel.

2.4 COOLING SYSTEM

.1 Provide a unit mounted radiator for the standby generator set complete with all necessary
connections. The coolant shall be supplied with a 60% ethylene glycol solution, capable
of withstanding temperatures down to -51°C (-60°F ).

26 32 13.docx Stantec BACKUP GENERATOR

RM of Headingley Section 26 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BACKUP GENERATOR
Page 4 of 11

2.5 EXHAUST SYSTEM

.1 Provide a critical type horizontally mounted exhaust silencer, with condensate drain,
properly sized according to the silencer manufacturer's recommendation for the engine
used. A flexible exhaust fitting shall be provided for mounting between the engine
exhaust and the exhaust pipe. The silencer size and pipe size shall be sufficient to ensure
against loss of power due to excessive back pressure.
.2 If the unit is to be mounted indoors, provide an exhaust piping wall thimble, sized to suit
piping and manufactured in accordance with NFPA-37. Thimble shall be sized to
provide a minimum 150 mm clearance all around the exhaust pipe. Provide a rain guard
and wall plates. Thimble to be as manufactured by Silex Inc.

2.6 CONNECTORS
.1 Unit to be complete with flexible connections for fuel, exhaust and ventilation.
.2 Provide all control wiring.

2.7 AUTOMATIC STARTING SYSTEM

.1 The generator system shall be provided with a 24Vdc direct electric starting system
suitable for automatic start-stop operation.
.2 A fully automatic engine start-stop control shall be installed in the generator control
panel. Control shall provide for overcrank lockout, pilot lights for low oil pressure, high
water temperature, overspeed, and overcrank, a 3-position selector switch marked
"Auto"-"Off"-"Manual". Control shall be equipped with timers which provide for 15-
second timed cycle cranking consisting of three timed-crank periods each followed by a
10-second rest period.
.3 The engine shall be furnished with an engine mounted thermal circulation type water
heater to maintain engine jacket water at 90°F, in an ambient temperature of 50°F. A
heater mounted thermostat shall be supplied.
.4 Provide a heavy duty starting type lead acid storage battery set consisting of two (2)
identical 12-volt, 4D heavy duty batteries. Battery cables, inter-connectors and steel rack
shall also be provided. Batteries to be VARTA Promotive Blue or Silver, or approved
equal. Battery rack to hold batteries minimum 150 m (6") above floor surface.
.5 Provide and install battery chargers which shall include the following features:
.1 Be fully automatic in operation to accomplish:
.1 Constant current charging of dead batteries,
.2 Topping charging after batteries reach greater than 70% of charge,
.3 Float charging to prevent self-discharge,
.4 Equalization cycles if the float voltage becomes low.
.2 Suited to charge and maintain the generator’s batteries in place in their installed
configuration.
.3 Sufficient capacity to charge the installed batteries from dead to fully charged in
36 hours or less.
.4 Built-in ammeter and DC voltmeter.

26 32 13.docx Stantec BACKUP GENERATOR

RM of Headingley Section 26 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BACKUP GENERATOR
Page 5 of 11

.5 Be marked with the allowable range of battery capacity with nominal amps and
volts data.
.6 CSA, cUL, or cETL approved.
.7 Hardwired to the batteries, and to supply power.
.6 The necessary relays to provide the operation as described in clause "Operation" are to be
included.

2.8 MOUNTING
.1 The units shall be complete with and mounted on structural steel sub-base, and shall be
provided with spring vibration isolators.

2.9 GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL

.1 Provide a control panel incorporating complete controls for all functions of the electrical
set. The panel shall be a unit mounted type, complete AC voltmeter (0-750 volts) and
selector switch, AC ammeter and selector switch; frequency meter, and voltage regulator
adjusting rheostat, running time meter, pilot lights, engine start selector switch, etc. Panel
shall incorporate the engine automatic cranking panel. Generator line circuit breaker c/w
neutral bar, shall be rated at as indicated, 600-volts, 3-phase, 3-pole.
.2 Provision shall be made to transmit "Generator Running", "Generator Trouble",
“Generator Fuel Tank Leak Alarm”, “Generator Fuel Tank Low Level - 30%”,
“Generator Fuel Tank Low Low Level - 15%”, “Generator Fail To Start” and other
signals to plant PLC via dry (voltage free) contacts rated at a minimum of 5 amps at
120Vac. Provide generator fuel tank low and low low level sensors.
.3 Local emergency stop switch.
.4 Run relay with dry contact output.
.5 Common failure relay with dry contact output.
.6 Dry contact (isolated alarm).

2.10 ENGINE GOVERNOR

.1 The governor shall be of current model and manufacture, to provide the specified "no
load" to "full load" 5% maximum speed variation.
.2 Governor response shall be such that rated engine speed is established within three (3)
seconds during a no-load to full-load condition and vice-versa.

2.11 GUARDS
.1 Provide guards to protect personnel from hot and moving parts. Locate guards so that
normal daily maintenance inspections can be undertaken without their removal.

2.12 DRIP PANS

.1 Supply and install 25 mm deep galvanized metal drip pans under the engine.
.2 These pans shall be sized to fit between the base channels and will be slid under the
engine from the generator end when the unit is installed on site.

26 32 13.docx Stantec BACKUP GENERATOR

RM of Headingley Section 26 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BACKUP GENERATOR
Page 6 of 11

.3 The maximum panel length shall not exceed 1m and if more than one pan is required to
cover the required floor space, there must be an overlap on the edge on the pan to prevent
oil from dripping between the pans.

2.13 OIL DRAIN

.1 Extend oil drain valve to make it accessible alongside of the genset engine.

2.14 GENERATOR ENCLOSURE

.1 Generator shall be equipped with a tight fitting weatherproof enclosure suitable for
location in outdoor cold weather environments and shall come with the following
features:
.1 Lockable and removable access doors with hold-opens on each side of unit for
servicing.
.2 Exhaust muffler mounted inside enclosure with rain cap on exterior
.3 All openings around perimeter of skid base shall be sealed against weather,
blowing dust, vermin, insects, and water.
.4 Entire enclosure, including access doors, shall be insulated with 25mm thick foil
face insulation. All gaps shall be sealed to restrict entrance of blowing snow.
.5 Motorized exhaust and intake air dampers shall be mounted on opposite ends of
enclosure. 60° snow hoods to be installed over damper assemblies. Dampers to
be interlocked with engine controls for automatic operation. Dampers to have
silicon-edged blades
.6 Thermostatically controlled space heater shall be installed inside the enclosure.
.7 Thermostatically controlled engine block heater and battery heater to be installed
inside the enclosure.
.8 10 Amp Automatic battery charger to be mounted inside the enclosure.
.9 All electrical accessories requiring 120/208Vac power (block heater, battery
heater, space heater, battery charger, etc.,) to be pre-wired to a load center.
Provide all necessary circuit breakers, terminal blocks, wiring, etc. to subfeed all
required enclosure electrical loads from a single external power source to the
junction box.
.2 Outdoor enclosure construction to achieve average measured sound levels of less than
75 dBA at 7 m.

2.15 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR

.1 Remote serial annunciator.
.2 12/24 VDC power supply connection point.
.3 120/208 VAC power supply connection point.
.4 Surface mounting option or flush mounting option with trim. To be confirmed at shop
drawing stage.
.5 NEMA 1 enclosure.
.6 Comprehensive LED status lights for generator status and alarm conditions.
.7 Test pushbutton.
26 32 13.docx Stantec BACKUP GENERATOR
RM of Headingley Section 26 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BACKUP GENERATOR
Page 7 of 11

.8 USB port for configuration via PC.

.9 RS-485 Modbus isolated port for communications.
.10 Operating temperature: -20 c to 70 C.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install the standby generator set along with the following items, where so equipped:
.1 Generator control panel and generator breaker
.2 Battery charger
.3 Battery warmer
.4 Engine block heater
.5 Engine silencer
.6 Flexible fuel and exhaust connections (mechanical)
.7 Batteries, battery rack, and battery cables
.8 Vibration isolators
.9 Necessary power and control wiring for a complete and operational system
.10 Radiator and cooling system
.11 Enclosure heater
.2 Control wiring from engine and generator devices to be installed in a separate conduit
from all power wiring.
.3 Generator ventilation system shall be interlocked with engine controls.
.4 All wiring to the generator control panel shall be stranded extra flexible.
.5 Ensure a full fuel tank prior to startup, and prior to the turn over of the equipment to the
client.
.6 Where startup and testing are being conducted after November 1, regardless of the
installation date, the diesel fuel in the tank must meet UFA Seasonal Winter or UFA
Diesel Low Temp requirements either when the fuel is delivered, or by addition of a wax
crystal modifier as recommended by the genset manufacturer for the regional conditions
at the time of testing. The intention is to ensure the generator is able to start and run
without fuel system issues.

3.2 LIFE SAFETY

.1 The generator is not to be connected as the emergency power source for any life safety
loads or any loads that require a source of emergency power by the Electrical Code,
Building Code, or other regulation in force.
.2 Emergency power sources for such systems are to be battery or other sources independent
of the generator equipment.
.3 The generator may back up the emergency power sources for such systems including
battery chargers for such systems.

26 32 13.docx Stantec BACKUP GENERATOR

RM of Headingley Section 26 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BACKUP GENERATOR
Page 8 of 11

3.3 START UP SERVICES

.1 Provide full set up and start up to CSA B282.
.2 Genset supplier to provide complete start-up service in the form of technical assistance
for the installing contractor.
.3 Components requiring field adjustment such as fuel rack settings, governor settings, etc.,
to be performed specifically by this supplier in the presence of the installing contractor.
These services to be submitted along with the generator set operation instruction books to
the Engineer. Operating instructions (complete with spare parts lists) on the engine,
generator, governor, exciter system, control panel, heaters, dampers, charger and batteries
shall be contained in hard-backed binders and to be delivered to the Engineer.

3.4 OPERATION
.1 With the generator selector switch in Auto position, and the normal supply voltage
operating, the generator set is on "automatic service" and shall start automatically on a
signal from the Automatic Transfer Switch on utility power failure. Upon return of
utility power supply voltage, the generator set will continue to run for a pre-set period of
time (initially set at 5 minutes, but adjustable) before transfer to utility power. The
engine will then continue running for a preset period of time (initially set at 5 minutes,
but adjustable) and will then be automatically turned off.
.2 Selector switch in "MANUAL" position, engine starts and runs up to required output
until shut off manually. (No transfer takes place).
.3 Selector switch in "TEST" position, engine starts and the system transfers to generator
service. (Simulating power failure as described for Automatic Conditions).

3.5 TESTING
.1 Prior to acceptance of the installation, the equipment shall be tested to the satisfaction of
the Engineer and subject to a full load test. Any defects which become evident during
this test shall be corrected prior to shipment.
.2 On the completion of the installation, the initial start-up shall be performed by a factory
trained representative of the System Supplier. At the time of start-up operating
instructions and maintenance procedures shall be thoroughly explained to the operating
personnel.
.3 Tests shall be conducted and certified written report of the tests submitted to the
Engineer, tests to include:
.1 "A" - Factory Test
.1 Standard factory test shall be performed. Factory test procedure shall
include the following:

.1 Prepare blank forms and check sheet with spaces to

record data and at top of first sheet record:
.1 Date.
.2 Generator set serial no.
.3 Engine, make, model, serial no.

26 32 13.docx Stantec BACKUP GENERATOR

RM of Headingley Section 26 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BACKUP GENERATOR
Page 9 of 11

.4 Alternator, make, model, serial no.

.5 Voltage regulator, make and model.
.6 Rating of generator set, kW, kVA, V, A, r/min,
Hz.
.2 Mark check sheet and record data on forms in duplicate
as test proceeds.
.2 Tests:
.1 With 100% rated load, operate set for 4 hours, taking
readings at 30 minutes intervals, and record following:
.1 Time of reading.
.2 Running time.
.3 Ambient temp in degrees C.
.4 Lube oil pressure in kPa.
.5 Lube oil temp in degrees C.
.6 Engine coolant temp in degrees C.
.7 Exhaust stack temp in degrees C.
.8 Alternator voltage: phase 1, 2, 3.
.9 Alternator current: phase 1, 2, 3.
.10 Power in kW.
.11 Frequency in Hz.
.12 Power Factor.
.13 Battery charger current in A.
.14 Battery voltage.
.15 Alternator cooling air outlet temp.
.2 After completion of 4 hours run, demonstrate following
shut down devices and alarms:
.1 Overcranking.
.2 Overspeed.
.3 High engine temp.
.4 Low lube oil pressure.
.5 Short circuit.
.6 Alternator over voltage.
.7 Low battery voltage, or no battery charge.
.8 Manual remote emergency stop.
.9 High alternator temperature.
.3 Install continuous strip chart recorders to record
frequency and voltage variations during load switching
procedures. Each load change delayed until steady state
conditions exist. Switching increments to include:
.1 No load to full load to no load.
.2 No load to 70% load to no load.
.3 No load to 20% load to no load.
26 32 13.docx Stantec BACKUP GENERATOR
RM of Headingley Section 26 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BACKUP GENERATOR
Page 10 of 11

.4 20% load to 40% load to no load.

.5 40% load to 60% load to no load.
.6 60% load to 80% load to no load.
.4 With generator running on "no-load", a block load of not
less than 80% of full load shall be applied and voltage
and frequency dip recorded and the subsequent recovery
time recorded. Voltage regulation shall be recorded.
.5 With generator running on 80% (min.) of full load, the
load shall be disconnected, voltage and frequency
variations and subsequent recovery times recorded.

.3 Demonstrate low oil pressure and high engine temperature

shutdown devices operation without subjecting engine to these
excesses.
.4 The manufacturer shall provide three certified copies of factory
test reports.

.2
.2 Submit test information, including ambient temperature (exterior,
interior).
.3 Test shall be run for minimum six (6) hours with continuous standby
rating applied. Meet CSA testing requirements.
.4 Factory testing is to be completed either at the Manufacturer’s factory,
local branch or the Suppliers facility.
.2 “B" - On Site Run Test
.1 A run-up test of the generating set with the generator control panel
controlling its functions and include the simulated power failure
conditions to ensure proper operation.
.2 The Run test does not require plant operating loads. It is a test of the
generator starting, running, and stopping features, along with the
Automatic Transfer switching system.
.3 When completed, this test will have verified the switching of the system
from Utility to Backup and back to Utility power sources.
.3 “C” – On Site Load Test
.1 Meet CSA test requirements.
.2 Running tests shall be conducted at full load (continuous standby rating)
and operated for sufficient time for the engine temperature to stabilize
plus additional five (5) hours.
.3 With generator running on "no-load", a block load of not less than 80%
of full load shall be applied and voltage and frequency dip recorded and
the subsequent recovery time recorded. Voltage regulation shall be
recorded.
.4 With generator running on 80% (min.) of full load, the load shall be
disconnected, voltage and frequency variations and subsequent recovery
times recorded.
26 32 13.docx Stantec BACKUP GENERATOR
RM of Headingley Section 26 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 BACKUP GENERATOR
Page 11 of 11

.5 All safety features shall be tested by appropriately simulating the fail

condition.
.6 Insulation tests shall be conducted on all electrical equipment in
accordance with the applicable standards.
.7 Loading of generator shall be continuous. (Use all available site loads).
.8 All tests shall be performed on site in the presence of the Engineer or
their appointed representative and the Generator Manufacturer's
representative. NOTIFY the Engineer ONE (1) WEEK PRIOR TO
CONDUCTING TESTS to allow for coordination of travel to site.
.4 Record test results and submit to the Engineer (record ambient temperatures, etc.).

3.6 SPARE PARTS

.1 Provide spare parts for each set. Include:
.1 Air cleaner Element
.2 2 each of Lube Oil Filters
.3 2 each of Fuel Oil Filters
.4 2 Sets of Control Fuses
.5 Lubricant Oil for two Oil Changes
.6 2 sets pilot lights lamps
.7 Special Tools for Unit servicing

3.7 COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING

.1 The manufacturer’s representative shall be present during commissioning by the
Engineer.
.2 Instruct the Owner’s staff (Operator(s)) in the proper operation, maintenance and repair
procedures.
.3 Training shall include operation, maintenance and repairs. (A minimum of 4 hours shall
be included for training).

END OF SECTION

26 32 13.docx Stantec BACKUP GENERATOR

RM of Headingley Section 26 33 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLIES
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 This section describes the supply and installation of any uninterruptible power supply.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

1.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for uninterruptible power supply for
incorporation into the Operation and Maintenance Manual as specified in Section 26 05
00.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL
.1 Uninterruptible power supplies for computer station, instrumentation and network
communication systems as indicated. Power from the UPS to be fed through a UPS Panel
Board as indicated on drawings.
.2 Compact, reliable UPS system units based on automatic voltage regulation (AVR)
technology.
.3 Microprocessor controlled.
.4 Auto-sleep mode, instant restart, protection against power variations, and overload.

2.2 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLIES

.1 Capacity:
.1 Desktop Units: 1φ, 120 Vac, 750VA.
.2 Control Panel Units: 1φ, 120 Vac, 3000VA.
.2 Quantity: as indicated.
.3 Input:
.1 Nominal voltage: 120Vac

26 33 53.docx Stantec UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

RM of Headingley Section 26 33 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLIES
Page 2 of 3

.2 Voltage range: 80 – 140Vac

.3 Nominal input frequency: 60 Hz, +/- 5 Hz.
.4 Input power factor correction (PFC): > 0.98 @ full load.
.5 Input short circuit protection: Circuit Breaker on front of the UPS.
.6 Connection: NEMA 5-15P c/w 1.8 metre cord.
.4 Output:
.1 Nominal Output Voltage: 115Vac.
.2 Voltage distortion: Less than 5% at full load.
.3 Output Voltage Regulation: < 3 % @ Linear Load.
.4 High Efficiency Mode (AC-to-AC): > 86%.
.5 Crest factor: 5 : 1.
.6 Output frequency: 60 Hz, +/- 3 Hz.
.7 Output waveform: Sine wave at less than 3% THD.
.8 Connection: Minimum four (4) NEMA 5-15R receptacles.
.5 Overload Protection: Sustaining at least 120 seconds at 101-110% load, 111-150% max
12 seconds. Immediate shutdown and transfer of load to bypass at 150% load. Auto
transfer back to UPS when overload is removed.
.6 Battery
.1 Maintenance-free, sealed, battery with suspended electrolyte,
.2 Leakproof.
.3 Backup Time: 20 minutes @ ½ load.
.4 Maximum Recharge Time: 3 hours to 90%.
.7 Transfer: On-line, double conversion technology with zero transfer time (< 1 ms).
.8 Operation: Transition from, or to, battery operation is accomplished with no interruption
of power to the load. Upon restoration of input power, the UPS will automatically resume
normal operation and recharge the battery.
.9 LED Indicators:
.1 Normal AC mode.
.2 Battery backup mode.
.3 UPS fault / alarms:
.1 Backup DC mode.
.2 Low battery voltage.
.3 Frequency error.
.4 Charger failure.
.5 Overload.
.10 Environmental:
.1 Operating temperature: 0°C to +40°C.
.2 Storage temperature: -15°C to +50°C.
.3 Humidity: 0% to 95%, non-condensing.
26 33 53.docx Stantec UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY
RM of Headingley Section 26 33 53
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLIES
Page 3 of 3

.11 Acceptable manufacturer: Eaton Powerware, Leviton VRM Series, Liebert Vertiv,
Always-On, Toshiba.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 UPS(s) to be supplied as stand-alone units, or factory installed, in motor control centre
and / or control panels as indicated.

3.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Store all UPS(s), whether shipped loose or mounted in panels, indoors in heated spaces.
Care shall be taken to protect UPS(s) and all other temperature sensitive equipment from
extreme heat or cold.
.2 Keep equipment doors locked. Protect equipment from damage and dust.

END OF SECTION

26 33 53.docx Stantec UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

RM of Headingley Section 26 35 33
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 POWER CONDITIONING
Page 1 of 5

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical Scope of Work.
.2 This section covers the supply and installation of active power conditioning equipment in
the form of shunt active filters used to ensure the power quality of the supply network
and/or to limit the pollution generated by one or more harmonic loads.
.3 The active filters shall be provided by a well reputed supplier who can demonstrate
adequate experience (more than 10 years recommended) in the active filtering domain.
.4 The supplied active filters shall be of a fully proven design which is in production
currently as a standard product. All active filters leaving the manufacturer factory shall
have undergone a functional test for filtering harmonics.
.5 The active filter manufacturer shall have in-house R&D facilities and competence for the
design, development, and servicing of the active filter control algorithms and hardware.

1.3 STANDARDS
.1 The specified system shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance
with the current edition of the following codes and standards.
.1 IEC-60439-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies :
Part 1: Type-tested and partial type-tested assemblies.
.2 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 519 - IEEE
Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical
Power Systems
.3 IEC 61000-6-2 ed. 2.0 – Industrial Level EMC Immunity
.4 IEC 61000-6-4 ed. 2.0, Class A EMC Emissions
.5 Canadian Electrical Code

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00 including:
.1 Dimensions of each unit
.2 Dimensions of overall system, where there is more than one modular unit
.3 Mass of each unit
.4 Mass of overall system, where there is more than one modular unit

26 35 33.docx Stantec POWER CONDITIONING

RM of Headingley Section 26 35 33
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 POWER CONDITIONING
Page 2 of 5
.5 Installation instruction details
.6 Wiring configuration.

1.5 AMBIENT CONDITIONS AND SYSTEM DATA

.1 System Voltage: 600Vac, 3-phase
.2 System Frequency: 60Hz
.3 Voltage Notching: Present
.4 Minimum system fault level: 30MVA
.5 Maximum ambient temperature: 29°C
.6 Maximum relative humidity: 95%, non-condensing
.7 Altitude: <1000m
.8 Vibration requirements: None

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 The active filter shall be of shunt connection type.
.2 The active filter shall be able to work on utility fed networks as well as on local backup
generators.
.3 The active filter shall operate on a 600VAC 3-Phase system without the need for voltage
transformation.
.4 The active filter shall monitor the current in the phases in real-time and process the
measured signals by means of a sufficiently fast digital processing and control system
(e.g. Digital Signal Processor based system).
.5 The active filter system can use commonly available standard class current transformers,
with appropriate burden, as current sensors for the filter equipment.
.6 The output of the digital control system shall be a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal
that controls power modules based on IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor)
technology. The IGBT bridge shall be controlled at fixed frequency, to allow for optimal
attenuation of switching frequency components and to avoid high frequency leakage into
the network.
.7 The control method of the power modules (comprised of the IGBT-inverter and a
coupling circuit to the network) shall be such that harmonic currents of exactly the
opposite phase of those to be filtered are injected into the network for each harmonic
considered.
.8 The active filter shall be un-overloadable, even when the load harmonics are higher than
the rating of the filter. The active filter shall limit its output to safe equipment levels and
continue operation without tripping out. When the filter’s output limit is reached a ‘full
load’ signal is generated by the filter equipment.

26 35 33.docx Stantec POWER CONDITIONING

RM of Headingley Section 26 35 33
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 POWER CONDITIONING
Page 3 of 5
.9 The active filter will be air-cooled, by fans or by convection. Water cooling shall not be
used.
.10 The active filter shall allow different filtering modes to be assigned, on a priority basis, to
the filtering of individual harmonics.
.11 The active filter shall be able to generate reactive power and perform load balancing.
.12 Acceptable manufacturer(s):
.1 Powerside PowerAct PSAF0000-01257.1/3B01-0
.2 Hitachi PQFM-V2-M-100A-001
.3 Electrotek Model AHF-100A600vn2

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Filter to within IEEE 519-2014 Harmonic Limits
.2 Line current rating: 90A/100A
.3 Filtering efficiency: At least 95%
.4 Individual harmonic control: Required.
.1 Selection of individual harmonics: Required
.2 Set limits for individual harmonics: Required
.3 Individual control loop for each harmonic: Required
.5 Harmonic Filtering Range: At Least up to 25thharmonic
.6 Measurement Type: True closed-loop via CTs upstream of the loads and filter.
.1 Model-based closed-loop simulation based on subtracting a CT signal from
internal filter current signals to obtain an open-loop signal shall not be allowed.
.7 Reactive power compensation: Required
.1 Freely settable between 0.6 and 1
.2 Programmable as inductive and capacitive as necessary
.3 Shall not reduce the cos phi of the installation
.8 Load balancing ability: Required
.1 Spread phase currents evenly across the phases
.2 Offload neutral conductors (where present) for current and voltage
.9 Number of settings per function: 2
.1 Parallel systems in reactive power compensation shall be able to operate in a
multi master configuration.
.10 The active filter shall be suitable for operation on a network with 600 Vrms system line
voltages (without transformer).

2.3 DESIGN
.1 Enclosure type: Free standing cubicle, indoor design
.2 Enclosure protection degree: sprinkler proof closed door

26 35 33.docx Stantec POWER CONDITIONING

RM of Headingley Section 26 35 33
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 POWER CONDITIONING
Page 4 of 5
.3 Max. enclosure dimensions: 1000(W)x600(D)x2286(H)
.4 Cable Entry: Top
.5 Electrical approval: cUL or CSA
.6 Enclosure colour: Grey preferred, factory default colour acceptable
.7 Digital Output Contacts: 4
.8 Remote On/Off Switch: Required
.9 Operator interface: User interface with access to complete network measurement data and
filter settings/data
.10 Energy saving feature(s): DC capacitor adaptive voltage control, IGBT standby function
during low load
.11 Alarm Contact(s):
.1 Contact with NO and NC functionality, programmable for system normal, system
operating, system warning and system alarm
.2 Dry contacts
.12 Communication interface: Ethernet IP/Modbus TCP. Coordinate protocol with process
integrator
.13 Auto restart: Required, after loss of utility power if the system was already on.
.14 Auto CT detection: Required for each phase
.15 Temperature protection:
.1 Triggering of temperature alarm contact.
.2 Automatic derating when room temp is too high
.3 Automatic return to normal rating after temperature issue is resolved

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Store the system, prior to installation, per the manufacturer’s recommendation. Protect
from moisture, temperature, and mechanical damage
.2 Situate the system on site as indicated
.3 Attach to the housekeeping pad per Electrical Code requirements

3.2 WIRING
.1 The active filter shall be installed and wired in accordance with the applicable sections of
the Electrical Code.
.2 Follow the manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions, superseded only by the
Electrical Code where necessary.
.3 Refer to 26 05 21 for wire requirements.

26 35 33.docx Stantec POWER CONDITIONING

RM of Headingley Section 26 35 33
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 POWER CONDITIONING
Page 5 of 5
3.3 START UP SERVICES
.1 Supplier to provide complete start-up service in the form of technical assistance for the
installing contractor
.2 Adjustments and settings to be performed specifically by this supplier in the presence of
the installing contractor. These services to be submitted along with the system operation
instructions to the Engineer.

3.4 COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING

.1 Commissioning shall occur when the connected equipment has been put into service so
that a representative amount of load is available.
.2 The manufacturer’s representative shall be present during commissioning, along with the
Engineer or their designate.
.3 Commissioning report shall quantify the harmonics, load balance, and power factor with
the Active Filter online (filtering) and offline (inactive) to demonstrate the overall
effectiveness of the system.
.4 Instruct the Owner’s staff (Plant Operator) in the proper operation, maintenance and
repair procedures.
.5 Training shall include operation, maintenance and repairs. (A minimum of 2 hours shall
be included for training).

END OF SECTION

26 35 33.docx Stantec POWER CONDITIONING

RM of Headingley Section 26 36 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TRANSFER SWITCHES
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 This section covers the supply and installation of the automatic transfer switch(es). The
transfer switch(es) shall be installed, connected tested and commissioned as specified
herein.

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Include:
.1 Panel layouts
.2 Wiring connections and diagrams
.3 Dimensions and Weight
.4 Electrical characteristics of each component
.5 Connection requirements

1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS

.1 The ATS shall meet the requirements of the current edition of all applicable standards
including:
.1 C282 Emergency Electrical Power Supply for Buildings
.2 C22.2 No.178 Automatic Transfer Switches
.3 C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code
.4 NFPA 110 Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems
.5 IEEE Standard 446 Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power
Systems

Part 2 Products

2.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

.1 Review all drawings for generator equipment ratings.
.2 Automatic transfer switch (ATS) shall:
.1 Be contactor based, open type
.2 Be rated as indicated, 347/600 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire.

26 36 23.docx Stantec TRANSFER SWITCHES

RM of Headingley Section 26 36 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TRANSFER SWITCHES
Page 2 of 3

.3 Include all the necessary control components to connect to genset controls to

provide automatic utility-to-genset operation and vice versa.
.3 Where the ATS is indicated to be in the MCC lineup, the Contractor is responsible for
ensuring the switch system is coordinated with MCC for interior installation with no
external power cabling between ATS and MCC.
.4 Where the ATS is indicated to be a standalone unit, ATS shall be complete with a NEMA
12, sprinkler proof, gasketed enclosure.
.5 Connections to Utility and Generator power to be coordinated with electrical contractor.
.6 The switch system shall be CSA, cUL, or cETL certified, and meet the fault current
rating of the system as indicated on the single line diagram.
.7 Transfer switch shall come c/w the following options:
.1 Adjustable engine start delay, set at 3 sec.
.2 Adjustable transfer delay, set at 3 sec.
.3 Adjustable re-transfer delay, set at 5 min.
.4 Adjustable stop delay, set at 5 min.
.5 3-phase voltage sensing that includes utility phase-loss detection.
.6 Programmed transition
.7 Test switch
.8 Dry (voltage-free) contacts, each rated at least 1 amp @ 120Vac, to produce the
following status points to be monitored by the plant’s SCADA system:
.1 Alarm or Fault
.2 Switch in Normal Power Position
.3 Switch in Standby Power Position
.4 Switch not in Auto Position
.5 Normal Power Available
.6 Standby Power Available
.7 3 Spare additional programmable contacts
.8 ATS shall be suitable for all requirements of CSA C282.
.9 ATS shall be rated to withstand the rms symmetrical short circuit available at the ATS
terminal
.10 Transfer switch shall be manufactured by the standby generator vendor and supplied as a
package.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install transfer switches as per manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Provide and install all required power and control cables and cable hardware to complete
transfer switch operation.

26 36 23.docx Stantec TRANSFER SWITCHES

RM of Headingley Section 26 36 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TRANSFER SWITCHES
Page 3 of 3

3.2 IDENTIFICATION
.1 Provide lamacoid nameplate on front face of switches identifying function.

3.3 OPERATION
.1 On loss of normal power emergency generator shall start on a signal from transfer switch.
Switch shall transfer to emergency power feed from generator on confirmation of
generator bus nominal voltage and frequency.
.2 On return of normal power, switch shall transfer to normal power from emergency power
feed on confirmation of nominal voltage and frequency.

3.4 TESTING
.1 On the completion of the installation, the initial start-up shall be performed by a factory
trained representative who shall verify satisfactory operation of the transfer switch and
generator. At the time of start-up operating instructions and maintenance procedures
shall be thoroughly explained to the operating personnel.
.2 Carry out all tests to CSA C282.
.3 Tests shall be conducted and certified and a written report of the tests submitted to the
Engineer and included in the O&M Manual.

3.5 TRAINING
.1 Provide on site training for up to five (5) owners representatives. Training shall be by
manufacturer’s field service engineering and shall be site specific.
.2 Provide operations manual and drawings at training.

END OF SECTION

26 36 23.docx Stantec TRANSFER SWITCHES

RM of Headingley Section 26 43 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical Scope of Work.
.2 This section covers the supply and installation of all surge protective devices.

1.3 STANDARDS
.1 The specified system shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance
with the current edition of the following codes and standards.
.1 Underwriters Laboratories UL 1283 and UL 1449
.2 Canadian Standards: cUL, CSA, ETL.
.3 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE C62.11, C62.41,
C62.45)
.4 C22.1 Canadian Electrical Code

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00 including:
.1 Unit dimensions, mass, installation instruction details and wiring configuration.
.2 Voltage, IEEE let through voltage for each waveform listed, UL 1449 latest
revision, latest edition, suppressed voltage ratings, per mode and per phase peak
surge current, modes of discrete suppression circuitry, warranty period and
replacement terms, conductor size, conductor type and lead length.
.3 List and detail all protection systems such as fuses, disconnecting means and
protective features.
.4 Provide verification that the Surge Suppressor device complies with the required
UL 1449, and UL1283, latest editions, latest revisions, and CSA, or cUL, or ETL
approvals.
.5 Provide actual let through voltage test data in the form of oscillograph results for
the ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Categories C, B, and A (as indicated on the drawings),
tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.45.
.6 Provide test report from a recognized independent testing laboratory verifying the
suppressor components can survive published surge current rating on a per phase
mode basis using the IEEE C 62.41, 8x20 microsecond current wave. Test data
must be on a complete SPD with internal fusing in place. Test data on an
individual module is not acceptable.
26 43 13.docx Stantec SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
RM of Headingley Section 26 43 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
Page 2 of 4

Part 2 Product

2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT

.1 The surge protective devices (SPD) described by this specification are to be installed in
the various locations as indicated.
.2 All SPD devices shall be listed under UL 1449 and certified by CSA, cUL, ETL.
.3 SPD device enclosure shall be rated NEMA 12, and sprinkler proof.
.4 The SPD shall protect all modes L-G, L-N, and N-G, have discrete suppression circuitry
in L-G, L-N and N-G, and have bi-directional, positive and negative impulse protection.
Line-to-neutral-to-ground protection is not acceptable where line-to-ground is specified,
and accordingly reduced mode units with suppression circuitry built into only 4 modes
are not acceptable.
.5 The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of all components shall not be less
than 125% for a 120V system and 120% for 220V and 240V systems, and 115% for
277V and 600V systems.
.6 All SPD’s shall be equipped with a comprehensive monitoring system which shall
include a visual LCD panel display providing information on unit status and phase
loss/protection loss.
.7 Internal Fusing – Overcurrent Protection:
.1 Each Metal Oxide Varistor, or other primary suppression component, shall be
individually fused for safety and performance to allow the SPD to withstand the
full rated single pulse peak surge capacity per mode without the operation or
failure of the fuses. Overcurrent fusing that limits the listed peak surge current of
the SPD is not acceptable. Replaceable cartridge type per phase or per mode
overcurrent fusing is not acceptable where there is more than one MOV per
mode.
.2 For arc quenching capability, minimization of smoke and contaminates in the
event of a failure, and to ensure the safest possible design, all surge components,
current carrying paths and fusing shall be packed in fuse grade silica sand.
.3 Fusing shall be present in every mode, including Neutral-to-Ground.
.4 The fusing shall be capable of interrupting up to a 200kA symmetrical fault
current with 600VAC applied.
.8 Each suppressor shall include Form C dry contacts (N.O. or N.C.) for remote monitoring
capability and shall have at minimum an NEMA 12 steel enclosure, sprinkler proof.
.9 Devices are to be installed as indicated.
.10 The SPD shall have an audible alarm, with mute, on front cover.

2.2 MAIN PLANT MCC PROTECTION (INSTALLED IN MCC)

.1 The manufacturer shall provide written specifications showing let-through voltage of the
unit with six inches of lead length pursuant to the latest ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45,
categories C1 and C3 bi-wave, 90 degree phase angle, positive polarity, measurements in
peak voltage from the zero reference, all dynamic test except N-G and UL suppressed
voltage ratings, all of which shall be no higher than:

26 43 13.docx Stantec SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE

RM of Headingley Section 26 43 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
Page 3 of 4

ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Measured Limiting

Voltage B3/C1 Impulse (6kV, 3kA)
Voltage (Voltage Code) L-N L-G L-L N-G
120/208 (3Y208) 725V 726V 1098V 728V
120/240 (1S240) 725V 726V 1098V 728V
347/600 (3Y600) 1273V 1281V 2161V 1295V
600 delta (600NN) - 2095V 2098V -
C3 Impulse (20kV, 10kA)
Voltage (Voltage Code) L-N L-G L-L N-G
120/208 (3Y208) 907V 1173V 1267V 1090V
120/240 (1S240) 907V 1173V 1267V 1090V
347/600 (3Y600) 1537V 1707V 2470V 1800V
600 delta (600NN) - 2160V 2470V -
UL 1449 Voltage Protection Ratings
Voltage (Voltage Code) L-N L-G L-L N-G
120/208 (3Y208) 800V 800V 1200V 800V
120/240 (1S240) 800V 800V 2500V 800V
347/600 (3Y600) 1500V 1500V 2500V 1500V
600 delta (600NN) - 2500V 2500V -

2.3 120/208V DISTRIBUTION PANEL PROTECTION (INSTALLED AT PANEL)

.1 Each suppressor shall incorporate enhanced tracking filtering technology to attenuate
transients that fall within the sine wave normal voltage envelope (Enhanced Transient
Filter).
.2 The manufacturer shall provide written specifications showing let-through voltage of the
unit pursuant to the latest ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45, categories A1 and A3
ringwave and category B3/C1 impulse, 90 or 180 degree phase angle as listed below,
positive polarity, dynamic or static test, which shall be no higher than:
A1 (2kV, 67A) A3 (6kV, 200A) B3/C1 (6kV, 3kA)
(180 degrees) (90 degrees) (90 degrees)
L-N 28 L-N 108 L-N 444
L-G 28 L-G 104 L-G 440
N-G 28 N-G 100 N-G 456

2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER

.1 MCC: Acceptable manufacturer for the SPD devices shall demonstrate that they meet or
exceed the above requirements and include Total Protection Solutions, Leviton, Eaton,
Siemens TPS or approved equal
.2 120/208 Distribution Panel(s): Acceptable manufacturer for the SPD devices shall
demonstrate that they meet or exceed the above requirements and include Total
Protection Solutions, or approved equal

26 43 13.docx Stantec SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE

RM of Headingley Section 26 43 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
Page 4 of 4

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install the SPD devices with the shortest possible conductor length. Conductors shall be
under 350mm in length where possible. Route cable as straight as practicably possible,
with large radius on any required bends. 90 degree bends are not permissible.
.2 Follow the SPD manufacturer’s recommended installation practice as outlined in the
equipment installation manual. The electrical contractor shall ensure that all neutral
conductors are bonded to the system ground at the service entrance or the serving
isolation transformer prior to installation of the associated SPD.
.3 Main service entrance units shall be installed on a 30A breaker or, where indicated, shall
be installed on a non-fused disconnect switch that meets or exceeds the fault current
rating of the switchgear.
.4 Distribution branch panel units shall be installed on 30A dedicated circuit breaker or,
where indicated, shall be wired directly to the main lugs or feed through lugs, or wired
directly to the bus bars.
.5 The installing contractor shall comply with all applicable codes.

END OF SECTION

26 43 13.docx Stantec SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE

RM of Headingley Section 26 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LIGHTING FIXTURES
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical scope of work.
.2 This section covers the supply and installation of lighting fixtures and lamps.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

.1 Supply and install where shown and as specified on the drawing, all lighting fixtures c/w
suspension devices, lamps and other attachments as specified or required to give the best
appearance and mechanical installation.
.2 All fixtures to be CSA, cUL or ETL certified for the installed location and application.
.3 All fixtures, stem hangers, ballast compartments, canopies, reflectors, wireways,
brackets, etc., used in conjunction with the fixtures shall be factory finished, baked
enamel, unless otherwise specified.
.4 All fixtures which have minor scratches after installation shall be "touched up" with an
approved enamel to match the fixture finish to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00 showing information such as
width, depth, finish, etc., of each fixture in addition to all pertinent lamp data. Include
lighting fixture literature in electrical O&M manuals in accordance with Section 26 05
00.
.2 Submit a separate shop drawing for each different lighting fixture.
.3 Where driver details are not included in the luminaire cut-sheet, submit a specific driver
specification cut-sheet.

1.5 GUARANTEE
.1 Replace drivers that fail within 1 year of use.
.2 Replace luminaires are damaged or scratched at no additional cost.
.3 Provide minimum five (5) year warranty on all luminaires, LEDs and drivers.

26 50 00.docx Stantec LIGHTING FIXTURES

RM of Headingley Section 26 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LIGHTING FIXTURES
Page 2 of 3

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL
.1 Provide commercially available stock lighting fixtures that meet the specification
requirements.
.2 Provide all luminaire suspension systems; aircraft cable or chain hanger as specified, all
required supporting devices including frames, junction boxes or outlet boxes where
required for a complete and fully operational system.
.3 Provide lenses or diffusers as specified.

2.2 LAMPS
.1 All lamps shall be LED. Fluorescent and HID lamps are not allowed.
.2 LED lamps shall be rated minimum 50,000 hours.

2.3 DRIVERS AND ACCESSORIES

.1 All drivers shall be currently listed as “Manitoba Hydro Power Smart Approved”.
.2 All drivers shall be rated for use with the luminaire by the manufacturer.

2.4 LUMINAIRES
.1 Refer to fixture schedule on electrical drawings for specific fixture and lamp, make and
models.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Locate and install luminaires as indicated on lighting layout drawings.
.2 Coordinate installation of fixtures with other sections and other trades.
.3 Install process room, mechanical room and electrical room lighting after other trades
have completed their work. Relocate and reposition luminaires as requested by
Consultant to ensure optimum lighting levels and lighting distribution is achieved for the
space.
.4 Coordinate with the work of other Division’s to ensure that the luminaires can be
installed without conflict with structural members, ductwork or pipes. Relocate as
required to a more suitable location as directed by the Consultant at no additional cost to
the project.
.5 All luminaires and lighting assemblies shall be properly secured and supported. Support
luminaires independent of ceiling construction, complete with all fasteners, framing and
hangers as required. Do not secure luminaires to mechanical ductwork or other vibration
producing apparatus, unless specifically detailed on the drawings. Do not secure lighting
to cable tray unless weight limit has been confirmed and specifically detailed on the
drawings.
.6 Unit shall conform to building lines, being parallel or perpendicular.

26 50 00.docx Stantec LIGHTING FIXTURES

RM of Headingley Section 26 50 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 LIGHTING FIXTURES
Page 3 of 3

.7 For suspended ceiling installations, support luminaires from ceiling grid in accordance
with local inspection requirements.
.8 Installation of all lighting equipment shall comply with the relevant Sections of this
Specification and the Electrical Code.
.9 At the completion of construction and acceptance of work, all lighting fixtures shall be
cleaned, complete with all necessary accessories and provided with the required operating
lamp(s).

END OF SECTION

26 50 00.docx Stantec LIGHTING FIXTURES

RM of Headingley Section 26 52 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical scope of work.
.2 This section covers the supply and installation of emergency battery banks, remote
fixtures, combo units, and unit equipment.

1.3 STANDARDS
.1 National Building Code of Canada
.2 National Fire Code of Canada
.3 CSA C22.1 – Canadian Electrical Code
.4 CSA C22.2 No. 141 – Emergency Lighting Equipment
.5 All product shall be certified by CSA, cUL, or cETL for the area where installed, and
their application.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

Part 2 Products

2.1 EQUIPMENT
.1 Emergency Lighting Equipment shall be as per emergency lighting schedule on drawings
and the following:
.1 Supply voltage: 120 Vac
.2 Output voltage: 12 /24Vdc
.3 Operating time on battery: minimum 30 minutes, minimum plus 25%.
.4 Battery: Long life, sealed, rated as indicated on drawings.
.5 Charger(s): Solid state, multi-rate voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature
compensated, short circuit protected.
.6 Solid state or relay transfer.
.7 Low voltage disconnect: Solid state, modular, operates at 80% battery output
voltage.

26 52 00.docx Stantec EMERGENCY LIGHTING

RM of Headingley Section 26 52 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Page 2 of 3

.8 All emergency lighting fixtures shall be rated for use in the environment where
installed.
.9 Signal lights: LED, for
.1 Battery Failure
.2 AC power ON
.3 High Charge Rate
.4 Battery Disconnected
.5 Lamp Failure
.6 Charger Failure
.7 Service Alarm
.10 Lamp heads: Integral on unit, single and/or double as indicated. Lamp type:
LED, wattage as shown on drawings.
.11 Remote heads, single and/or double as indicated. Lamp type: LED, wattage as
indicated.
.12 Cabinet: Suitable for wall mounting or shelf mounting to wall and c/w knockouts
for conduit. Removable or hinged front panel for easy access to batteries.
.13 Battery Bank’s required installed, auxiliary equipment:
.1 Lamp disconnect switch
.2 Test switch
.3 Time delay relay
.4 AC input and DC output terminal blocks inside cabinet
.5 Integral x- Zone sensing control
.14 Acceptable manufacturer(s): AimLite, Emergi-Lite or approved equal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 General
.1 Install unit equipment and remote mounted fixtures at indicated locations.
.2 Aim heads along the path of egress. Re-adjust when instructed by Consultant or
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
.3 Install heads such that failure of a single lamp will not leave the area in total
darkness.
.4 Mount battery units at minimum 2100mm above the finished floor, where
practicable.
.5 Connect emergency lighting battery banks to the lighting circuit in the area that
they serve. Where the battery unit powers remote heads in areas served by a
separate lighting circuit, provide a zone sensing relay for monitoring of that
circuit(s).

26 52 00.docx Stantec EMERGENCY LIGHTING

RM of Headingley Section 26 52 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Page 3 of 3

3.2 RE-ADJUSTMENT
.1 The emergency lighting system may require re-adjustment due to the addition of
obstructions or by request of the AHJ. Make allowance for re-aiming as required and
relocation as required to provide the required illumination over the path of egress.

END OF SECTION

26 52 00.docx Stantec EMERGENCY LIGHTING

RM of Headingley Section 26 53 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EXIT SIGNS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS

.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 Refer to Section 26 05 00 for project electrical scope of work.
.2 This section covers the supply and installation of exit signage.

1.3 STANDARDS
.1 National Building Code of Canada
.2 National Fire Code of Canada
.3 CSA C22.1 – Canadian Electrical Code
.4 CSA C22.2 No. 141-10 Standard for Pictogram Exit Sings
.5 All product shall be certified by CSA, cUL, or cETL for the area where installed, and
their application.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

Part 2 Products

2.1 EQUIPMENT
.1 Exit signs products and installation shall meet the requirements of the National Building
Code of Canada.
.2 Exit sign housing shall be rated for the area in which it is installed. Provide NEMA 4X in
wet or corrosive environments and NEMA 12 in dry, noncorrosive environments.
.3 Exit signs shall operate with an input voltage of 120Vac/12Vdc and consume less than
2.5 watts for both single and double face legends.
.4 Light source shall be high-output light emitting diodes (LED). The LED’s shall provide
illumination in both normal and emergency operation and shall be mounted inside the
frame.
.5 The legend pictogram and arrows shall have the shape and colours green and white as per
the Standard ISO 7010. The pictogram and arrows shall be sized for a height of minimum

26 53 00.docx Stantec EXIT SIGNAGE

RM of Headingley Section 26 53 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EXIT SIGNS
Page 2 of 2

150mm, including the green contour. The whole legend (green and white colours) shall
be trans-illuminated and shall meet the luminance criteria of the Standard ISO 3864-1.
.6 Face shall be single or double face with directional arrows as required.
.7 Mounts shall be universal type for either ceiling, end or wall as required.
.8 Acceptable manufacturer(s): Aimlite, Emergi-Lite or approved equal.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 General
.1 Install exit signage in accordance with applicable codes.
.2 Connect exit signage to exit signage circuit. Ensure breaker is locked in the on
position.

3.2 RE-ADJUSTMENT
.1 The exit signage system may require re-adjustment due to the addition of obstructions or
by request of the AHJ. Make allowance for relocation of exit signage after obstructions
have been installed.

END OF SECTION

26 53 00.docx Stantec EXIT SIGNAGE

DIVISION 28

ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND

SECURITY
RM of Headingley Section 28 13 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SECURITY ACCESS CONTROL
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 All Sections of General Conditions form a part of this Specification. They shall be read
and fully adhered to exactly as if repeated here in full.
.2 Refer to all other Divisions of the Specifications and these Documents to determine their
effect upon the work of this Section.
.3 All sections of all the Divisions of the Specification and all other documents included as
part of this document form part of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SCOPE
.1 This section covers the supply and installation of the security system(s) complete with:
.1 Intrusion panels c/w controller
.2 Input and output modules as required
.3 Interposing relays and other accessories as required
.4 Operator keypads
.5 Alarm horns
.6 Magnetic door switches
.7 Motion Detectors
.8 Card Swipe System
.9 Security System ethernet or cellular dialer.
.10 Coordinate with owner prefer Third Party monitoring company. Coordinate
Connection to the pumphouse.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 00, including component
function, make and model number.

Part 2 Products

2.1 INTRUSION ALARM PANEL

.1 Panel shall be wall mounted, modular design complete with the following:
.1 Minimum three supervised zone capacity.
.2 Standby power batteries sized to provide current for minimum 10 hours.
.3 Differentiation between open line condition and alarm condition.
.4 "Trouble" indication when fault occurs in wiring.
.5 End-of-line resistors to control supervisory current in each circuit.
.6 Provide form "C" dry contacts for remote monitoring of “SECURITY SYSTEM
TROUBLE” and SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM” statuses.
.7 Relays as required for necessary operation as indicated.

28 13 00.docx Stantec SECURITY ACCESS CONTROL

RM of Headingley Section 28 13 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SECURITY ACCESS CONTROL
Page 2 of 4

.8 Provide input card for Fire Alarm from PLC

.9 Provide Internet /cellular dual path alarm communicator. Confirm preferred
connection with owner regarding third party monitoring company.

2.2 OPERATOR KEYPAD

.1 Provide Weatherproof Keypad cover
.2 Keypad by-pass to allow for arming and disarming of system.

2.3 MAGNETIC DOOR SWITCHES

.1 Industrial magnetic door switches suitable for flush mounting on all exterior doors.
.2 All security system equipment shall be provided by a single supplier.

2.4 MOTION DETECTORS

.1 Wall mounted motion detectors should be mounted near the windows or doors. Motion
detectors should provide extra protection by monitoring large areas of the Pumphouse
from burglars who may gain access through unprotected windows or doors.
.2 Wall mounted motion detectors in the process areas should be weatherproof. Accepted
Manufacture: Hubbell, H-MOSS Family AHP1600WRP c/w mounting adaptor or
approved equal.

2.5 CARD SWIPE SYSTEM

.1 Provide a key card access solution. Card swipe system is a combination of card
credentials, door card readers, system software, controller and electronic door locks that
limit access to a building. This door card access system operates by verifying the
information stored on the key card through the security card reader. The key card door
lock system will permit or deny access based on the access privileges assigned to the
cardholder.
.2 Provide 15.6 Laptop for Security Database. Laptop shall be equipped with: Intel Core i7
processor, 16 GB RAM , 1TB hard drive, Ethernet Port. Approved Manufacturers: Dell,
HP, Lenovo, ASUS, ACER
.3 Provide to RM equipment and software for card programing.
.4 Provide 50 cards and card programing tool.

2.6 MULTISENSOR SMOKE AND HEAT DETECTOR

.1 Provide smoke and heat detectors as indicated:
.1 Operating voltage: 15 to 30 VDC
.2 Alarm Relay: 2 mA @ 24 VDC
.3 Isolator Load Rating: 0.0063
.4 Compatible Relay base with surface mounted kit when required. Refer to
electrical drawings
.5 Operating Humidity Range: 15% to 90% Relative Humidity, Noncondensing

28 13 00.docx Stantec SECURITY ACCESS CONTROL

RM of Headingley Section 28 13 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SECURITY ACCESS CONTROL
Page 3 of 4

.6 Operating Temperature Range: 32°F to 100°F (0°C to 38°C)

.7 Air Velocity: 0 to 300 ft./min. (0 to 91.4 m/min.)
.8 Agency Listings CAN/ ULC S529 and CAN/ULC S530
.9 CSFM, FM, cUL approved.
.10 Connect to process PLC
.11 Acceptable manufacturer(s): DCS FSA410ARST*, Honeywell C4W-TBA or
approved equal.

2.7 ALARM HORN

.1 Provide outdoor wall mounted security system alarm horn.

2.8 SYSTEM OPERATION

.1 When alarm system is armed, and a notification appliance is activated, the zone
indicating pilot light flashes and audible notification at control panel or keypad is
activated. User has 60 seconds grace period to enter access code and disarm the alarm.
If the grace period expires send alarm notification to PLC and third-party monitoring
company.
.2 System toggles between armed and disarmed state when keypad code is entered. After ten
(10) failed attempts at entering access code send alarm notification to PLC and third-
party monitoring
.3 Notification appliances can be activated (e.g. opening a supervised door or triggering a
motion sensor) without causing an alarm when the system is disarmed. Zone "Trouble"
pilot light is illuminated even when the zone is deactivated.
.4 Fault in wiring of a zone shall cause audible notification at control panel or keypad to
sound even if zone is deactivated and shall send a “Trouble” signal to PLC.
.5 When Fire Alarm signal received .Send Alarm notification to third-party monitoring
company.

2.9 MANUFACTURER
.1 Acceptable security system manufacturer shall be DSC PowerSeries Pro, Simplex
Grinnell, Silent Knight or Cambridge Security Systems. All Accessories shall be from
one supplier.

2.10 2.8 - INTERFACE COMPONENTS:

.1 Security panel vendor and Integrator shall coordinate to ensure signaling between
security system and PLC can be achieved. Include security system accessories such as
output modules. The Contractor shall ensure that interposing relays and sources of
suitable voltage are available for monitoring security system outputs/inputs.
.2 Coordinate with owner third party monitoring.

28 13 00.docx Stantec SECURITY ACCESS CONTROL

RM of Headingley Section 28 13 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SECURITY ACCESS CONTROL
Page 4 of 4

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 System supplier shall be employed by the Electrical Trade to supply and install all
wiring, equipment, switches, etc., as required.
.2 All equipment, switches, devices, etc., shall be suitably identified. All control wiring
shall be tagged at both ends.
.3 All field wiring shall match identification as shown on shop drawings.
.4 Co-ordinate with door frame supplier to have holes for magnetic door switches pre-
drilled into doors and door frames as required.
.5 Alarming off site shall be via the respective main PLC and associated dialer hardware.
The dialers in the security panels shall not be connected.

3.2 TESTING
.1 Test system and provide written verification of same to the Engineer.

END OF SECTION

28 13 00.docx Stantec SECURITY ACCESS CONTROL

RM of Headingley Section 28 23 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Page 1 of 7

Part 1 General
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
.1 This Section of the Specifications forms part of the Contract Documents and is to be read,
interpreted, and coordinated with all other parts.
.2 Reference Contract drawings and these specifications for equipment details, including
camera, camera housing, and guards.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1 Conform to the following reference standards:
.1 ANSI/EIA/TIA-568 B2.1 (CSA 568) Commercial Building Telecommunications
Cabling.
.2 ANSI/EIA/TIA-606 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications
Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings.
.3 ANSI/EIA/TIA-569-A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Shop Drawings: Submit with the related items of equipment in accordance with
Section 013300 and Div 26.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1 Operating and Maintenance Data: Provide with the related item of process equipment for
incorporation in operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 017800 and
Div 26.
1.5 COORDINATION
.1 Coordinate equipment and cabling locations.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1 The contractor shall be fully trained and factory certified on all CCTV systems as
required by this document.
1.7 SHIPMENT, PROTECTION AND STORAGE
.1 Ship, protect and store equipment in a manner that prevents damage or premature aging.
1.8 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
.1 The Surveillance CCTV system:
.1 The system shall be used to record, monitor and view cameras.
.2 The system shall consist of but not be limited to IP based cameras, network video
recorder, wiring, and infrastructure.
.2 All CCTV Head-end equipment and camera cable termination (i.e. NVR, DVR, KVM
console) to be installed and mounted in security cabinet(s).
.3 User interface equipment (monitor and mouse) to be located remotely from head end
equipment.

28 23 00.docx Stantec VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

RM of Headingley Section 28 23 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Page 2 of 7

.4 The video surveillance system shall be a package by one vendor. Major components to
be a product of one manufacturer to the extent possible. Accessory components may be
of other manufacture.

Part 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
.1 Provide Security Monitoring system
.1 System: Surveillance CCTV for local recording using cameras and to allow local
monitor viewing and system interaction within the building from a user interface
terminal.
.2 The Contractor will provide the cameras and hardware, wire the system, and
commission the camera recording system.
.3 All equipment CSA, cUL, ULC, or other accepted listing agency.
.2 Manufacturers
.1 Basis of design and specifications is: Samsung Wisenet by SI Alarms Ltd.
.2 The following may submit package to Engineer for review as equivalent.
Identify any discrepancy between the design system and the system submitted as
equivalent.
.1 HikVision
.2 Bosch Security.
.3 Panasonic.
.3 Network Video Recorder (NVR) and Network Switches
.1 16 channels for up to 16 cameras. 16 POE / POE+, 100 Mbps. 2 LAN/WAN
1 Gbps.
.2 HDMI output and VGA output, support dual monitors.
.3 Local live video performance: 12 megapixel (MP) @ 30 fps. 8MP@120fps.
3MP@240fps.
.4 Web server live video performance: 5MP@30fps. 3MP@60fps. 2MP@120fps.
.5 Embedded Linux OS.
.6 Compression: h.265, h.264, mjpeg, WiseStream.
.7 Record 180 Mbps.
.8 Recording modes: manual, schedule, event.
.9 Event triggers: Alarm input (8); Video loss; Camera event (Sensor, MD, video
analytics); VF event (tampering, enter/exit, passing, virtual-line, appear,
disappear, face detection, audio detection); Camera defocus.
.10 Event response: email; PTZ preset; Alarm out; Buzzer; Monitor out.
.11 Playback bandwidth 32 Mbps, 16 channels simultaneous.
.12 Playback controls: Fast/slow playback/reverse; Step up/down.
.13 Storage: Built-in storage 0 TB - 6 TB, provide with 2 TB; Internal, 4 SATA
ports, support up to 24 TB storage; External eSATA port, iSCSI support up to
384 TB. Configure to capture approximately 30 days of recordings.
.14 Security: IP filtering; User access log; 802.1x authentication; Encryption.
28 23 00.docx Stantec VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
RM of Headingley Section 28 23 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Page 3 of 7

.15 Camera setup via GUI. PTZ via GUI and webserver.
.16 Smartphone playback.
.17 Front panel LEDs for Power; HDD activity; Alarm; Recording; Network.
.18 2 USB ports.
.19 HDMI port. Support up to 4K single monitor.
.20 VGA port support up to 16 channels.
.21 Audio out, RCA (line level).
.22 Sensors: 8 input (selectable NO/NC); 4 output (selectable NO/NC). Terminal
blocks.
.23 Alarm reset.
.24 100 - 240 VAC input power. Max 300W consumption w/ 4 HDD and POE on.
Max 60W consumption w/ 4 HDD and POE off. POE budget max 220W.
.25 Dimensions: 440W 88H 385D (17.3” x 3.5” x 15.2”); 2U.
.26 Suitable for use in sealed NEMA 4 cabinet.
.27 Hanwha Wisenet WRN-1610S.
.4 NVR security housing
.1 EIA/TIA compliant 19” tilt out wall rack.
.2 Tilt out rack can pivot to a fixed working position or to a fixed 105° servicing
position.
.3 Tamper resistant. 18 gauge steel, 16 gauge steel ears and fascia, 11 gauge steel
rack rails, capacity of 100 lbs (45 kg).
.4 Surface mounting.
.5 Cable pass through on back pan, 8.5” x 8.5”. Knockouts on top and bottom.
.6 Cable management tie points.
.7 Front rack rail adjustable from 1.5” - 3.5” to accommodate handles and knobs.
.8 Overall dimensions 622 (24.5”) W, 767 (30.2”) H, depth less than 200.
.9 Middle Atlantic Products TOR-X-20XX.
.5 Monitor
.1 Package supplier to select monitor suitable for the system and with performance
equivalent to Dell Ultra HD 4K P2415Q or View Sonic VX2475SMHL-4K 24”.
.2 24-Inch 4K UHD 2160p (3840x2160) 16:9 LED monitor.
.3 HDMI (2.0, MHL).
.4 Fast response time and wide viewing angle.
.5 Modern design, adjustable forward/back tilt, and anti-glare surface.
.6 120M:1 Dynamic Contrast Ratio.
.7 Wall Mounted.
.8 Energy Star Certified.
.9 Supply a wall mount bracket for CCTV monitor. Coordinate mounting location
with the Owner and Engineer.
.6 Mouse
.1 Package supplier to provide quality laser mouse and mouse pad.
28 23 00.docx Stantec VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
RM of Headingley Section 28 23 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Page 4 of 7

.7 Ethernet extender
.1 Package supplier to provide quality Ethernet extender suitable to connect the
mouse and monitor to the remote NVR via one Ethernet cable.
.2 Accepted Manufacturer: HDMI over CAT 6 Extender with USB hub Startech
Product ID: ST121USBHD or approved equal
.8 Cameras
.1 2MP Network IR Vandal Resistant Camera
.1 Field of view: H 103.8° (32.4°), V 53.7° (18.4°), D 121.9° (37.1°).
.2 1984 horizontal x 1105 vertical pixels effective resolution.
.3 Color recording above 0.095 lux. BW above 0 lux (IR LED). IR
viewing distance 30m.
.4 Focal length 2.8 - 12 mm (4.3x), manual. Focus manual. Lens DC auto
iris.
.5 PTZ. Pan 0° - 350°. Tilt 0° - 67°. Rotate 0° - 355°.
.6 True day/night. Backlight compensation with wide dynamic range
120dB. Gain control. White balance.
.7 Motion detection. Privacy masking. Lens distortion correction.
.8 Video analytics: Motion detection w metadata; Defocus; Tampering.
.9 Camera titles.
.10 Ethernet: 10/100baseT, RJ-45.
.11 Resolution selectable from 10 resolutions.
.12 h.265, h.264 - 30fps all resolutions. Mjpeg 15fps.
.13 Target bitrate or CBR or VBR.
.14 Audio: Line in. Unidirectional.
.15 Alarm I/O: 1 input, 1 output.
.16 Security: SSL login; IP filtering; User access log; 802.1x authentication.
.17 Local storage: micro SD/SDHC/SDXC supporting up to 128 GB.
.18 IP66. IK10. -30 C to 55 C. (Startup above -20 C recommended).
.19 Power: POE max 7W or 12VDC max 6W.
.20 Metal housing. 137mm DIA base x 106mm H.
.21 Wisenet QNV-6082R or approved equal
.22 Mounting accessories to suit installation:
.1 Wall : SBP-300WMW1.
.2 Sofit: SBV-136B Dome Back Box
.9 Field-mounted equipment
.1 Sun Shield: provide fabricated sun shield for camera mounts with exposure to
direct sunlight. Equipment to be powder coated Vulcan black.
.10 Power Supplies
.1 IP based cameras will use POE, with spare circuit allowed for in the installation.

28 23 00.docx Stantec VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

RM of Headingley Section 28 23 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Page 5 of 7

.2 For the Power Supply to the camera systems, provide power from source that is
UPS backed. Provide power from source that is generator backed where
available.
.11 Provide all necessary conduit rough in, electrical cabling materials, supports, and labour
for the CCTV system components. See drawings for specific installation requirements.
Not all wiring or support details are shown in drawings.
2.2 WIRING
.1 Reference drawings and wiring specifications. Ethernet cabling to be Cat 6 structured
cabling.
2.3 WARRANTY
.1 NVR and cameras shall have extended Warranty. 1st year shall be full Warranty
including parts, labor, and all costs. After year 1 and until end of year 5, equipment can
be returned for repair or replacement at vendor’s option.

Part 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Coordinate the installation with the system vendor beforehand. Confirm details of
equipment installation, mounting, and wiring.
.2 Ensure the equipment is properly installed to provide satisfactory service.
.3 NVR to be mounted in security enclosure to resist attack in the event of intrusion.
Enclosure to be mounted as securely as possible using min #8 x 2” screws. Provide 2x4
blocking in wall behind enclosure to allow wood screws to be sunk into plywood and
blocking to at least 37mm depth.
.4 Confirm all camera mounting locations on site. Coordinate between trades to ensure no
equipment blocks views.
.5 Provide mounting detail and hardware at each location with shop drawings.
.6 Camera mounting shall be robust. Coordinate with system vendor to obtain appropriate
mounting hardware accessories. Coordinate with trades to provide strong blocking in
camera mounting locations. Attach with screws, typically sunk into min 37mm solid
wood.
.7 Mount cameras high for protection from attack.
.8 Provide photos of security enclosure location and camera mounting location prior to
installation of devices but showing the blocking that is in place.
.9 System vendor will review the mounting and installation of devices and shall sign off that
the installation is robust and meets good practice as well as specifications.
.10 All wiring and cabling shall be installed in conduit.
.11 Provide 2m slack cable at head end of each camera and extender cable. Slack length
shall be contained in pullbox mounted above security housing. Provide slack as can be
accommodated at field end of each cable.
3.2 LABELLING
.1 All equipment units to have machine printed description label.
28 23 00.docx Stantec VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
RM of Headingley Section 28 23 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Page 6 of 7

.2 All wire and cable to be labeled with suitable identification code affixed to cable jacket
near terminations and in junction boxes and pullboxes along the run. Label to be
permanently affixed, vinyl, plastic or similar material.
.3 Electrical panel circuit number shall be clearly identified on all system panels.
.4 All cables shall be permanently identified and listed on as-built drawings as follows:
.1 Cable number.
.2 Source.
.3 Destination,
3.3 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
.1 Configure NVR.
.1 System vendor to provide on site setup.
.2 Configure system based on good practices and providing good monitoring for the
facility.
.3 Set monitor display configurations.
.4 Set recording based on: Continuous low framerate; Events with higher framerate
and pre and post recordings.
.5 Configure motion sensing.
.6 Configure masking for privacy and where necessary to prevent excessive
recording.
.7 Configure to capture approximately 60 days of recordings.
.2 Perform tests and document results in accordance with Div 01, Div 25, Div 26, and
Div 28 requirements.
.3 For each item of equipment, attach test documentation.
.4 Upon completion of system installation, tests to be conducted by the system installer to
determine system conformity to the requirements of this specification. Security
Contractor to prepare test forms. Tests to be conducted in the presence of the Consultant
and/or his representative who may suspend or discontinue tests of any time performance
is considered unsatisfactory. Resumption of testing to cover the previously untested
elements and any completed elements at the discretion of the Consultant.
.5 All equipment or wiring provided by the system installer which tests prove to be
defective or operating improperly to be corrected or replaced promptly at no additional
cost to the Owner.
.6 Test system for proper operation and programming. Contractor to complete and submit
all test results.
.7 Test all equipment as directed by Consultant and systems manufacturer, as for example:
.1 Test cameras for auto iris function, lens clarity, proper resolution, pan-tilt-zoom,
presets, and alarm recording.
.2 Test monitors for proper resolution, stability, good signal termination, etc.
.3 Test network video recorder and digital video recorder software for proper
operation, presets, etc.
.4 Contractor shall provide necessary test equipment to verify CCTV system
performance.
28 23 00.docx Stantec VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
RM of Headingley Section 28 23 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Page 7 of 7

3.4 TRAINING
.1 System installer to conduct training program for designated maintenance and operating
personnel. This program to include but not be limited to the following:
.2 Operation: designated personnel to be trained to accomplish and understand all aspects of
system operation.
.3 Maintenance: designated personnel to be trained to perform routine maintenance on the
system.
.4 O&M Manuals and As Built drawings: as part of training, review O&M literature and As
built drawings.
.5 Training period schedule to be coordinated with the Owner. Training periods to take
place after construction completion and prior to system use. The training session shall be
for at least four (4) people. Provide a total of four (4) hours of instruction. Each attendee
shall do thorough hands-on use of the system to operate cameras, change configurations
settings, etc.
.6 Contractor shall provide the Owner with a training attendance sheet. This sheet shall
identify the site, time and date as well as a listing of all those in attendance. The
Contractor shall get the Owner’s sign-off in writing on the sheet that training was
conducted and satisfactorily covered the system.

END OF SECTION

28 23 00.docx Stantec VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

DIVISION 31

EARTHWORK
RM of Headingley Section 31 23 33.01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The work described herein shall consist of the excavating, trenching and backfilling
requirements to complete the Works.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 31 32 19.01 – Geotextiles
.2 Section 32 11 16.01 – Granular Sub-base and Base Course
.3 Section 32 91 19.13 – Topsoil Placement, Grading and Seeding
.4 Section 33 11 16 – Water Utility Distribution Piping
.5 Section 33 31 13 – Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping
.6 Section 33 42 13 – Pipe Culverts

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications.

1.4 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Samples:
.1 Submit samples of in-situ site clay material to be used for subgrade construction
for Standard Proctor Density testing.
.2 Submit samples of Select Granular Backfill for pipe trenches for Standard
Proctor Density Testing.

1.5 DEFINITIONS
.1 Shaft means a vertical or inclined opening excavated below ground level.
.2 Trenchless installation methods are methods of installing pipe inside a hole that has been
made between shafts by coring, boring, horizontal directional drilling, jacking, tunnelling
and extraction of an existing pipe or slimier methods with minimal excavation and
surface disruption.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Pipe bedding shall be Class ‘B’ sand conforming to The Manitoba Water Services Board
Standard Construction Specifications, Section 022180 – Pipe Excavation, Bedding and
Backfill except where shown otherwise in the Drawings.
.2 Pipe trench or shaft backfill shall be compacted select granular backfill conforming to
The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications, Section

31 23 33.01.docx Stantec EXCAVATING, TRENCHING

AND BACKFILLING
RM of Headingley Section 31 23 33.01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
Page 2 of 3

022180 – Pipe Excavation, Bedding and Backfill for all excavations under and within two
(2) metres of an existing or proposed paved surface or roadway. Pipe trench or shaft
backfill in all other areas shall be compacted common backfill conforming to The
Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications, Section 022180 –
Pipe Excavation, Bedding and Backfill.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXISTING UTILITIES

.1 Location and protection of all existing utilities is the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.2 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

.1 Strip topsoil within the excavation areas for the pipe trenches or shafts where required.

3.3 STOCKPILING
.1 Stripped material shall be removed from site or stockpiled for replacement.
.2 Topsoil shall not be mixed with other materials.
.3 Implement sufficient erosion and sediment control measures to prevent sediment release
off construction boundaries and into adjacent ditches.

3.4 COMMON EXCAVATION

.1 Maintain surface drainage throughout the course of construction.
.2 Excavate to the lines and grades shown on the drawings and as staked on the ground by
the Engineer.
.3 Notify the Engineer immediately of any discrepancies between the lines and grades
shown on the drawings and the stakes placed by the Engineer.
.4 Elevations of excavated areas shall be graded within 25 mm of the specified elevation.
.5 Remove unsuitable materials encountered during excavation as directed by the Engineer
and replace with suitable site material or imported material as directed by the Engineer.
.6 Scarify the bottom of the excavated area to a depth of 150 mm and compact with suitable
equipment to achieve the required density and moisture content.
.7 Do not place any fill material within the excavated areas until authorized to do so by the
Engineer.
.8 Dispose of surplus and unsuitable excavated material at an offsite location determined by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

3.5 PIPE EXCAVATION

.1 Pipe excavations shall conform to The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard
Construction Specifications, Section 022180 – Pipe Excavation, Bedding and Backfill.
.2 All pipe specified to be installed by trenchless installation methods are to be installed by
coring or horizontal directional drilling.

31 23 33.01.docx Stantec EXCAVATING, TRENCHING

AND BACKFILLING
RM of Headingley Section 31 23 33.01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
Page 3 of 3

3.6 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION

.1 Subgrade material for roadway or parking lot construction shall be compacted to 98% of
the Standard Proctor Density.
.2 Suitable site material for roadway construction shall be compacted to 98% of the
Standard Proctor Density.

3.7 BACKFILLING
.1 Backfill material for pipe trenches shall conform to The Manitoba Water Services Board
Standard Construction Specifications, Section 022180 – Pipe Excavation, Bedding and
Backfill.
.2 Select Granular backfill above pipe trench shall be compacted to 100% of the Standard
Proctor Density.
.3 Do not proceed with backfilling operations until authorized by the Engineer.

3.8 RESTORATION
.1 All surfaces disturbed by construction shall be reinstated to their pre-construction
conditions and elevations or better.

3.9 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION

.1 Refer to The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specification,
Section 022190 – Structural Excavation, Backfill and Compaction for structural
excavation requirements.
.2 Delete Clause 1.6.2 of MWSB Section 022190 – Structural Excavation, Backfill and
Compaction. Backfill material shall be compaction tested by an independent testing
agency and paid for by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

31 23 33.01.docx Stantec EXCAVATING, TRENCHING

AND BACKFILLING
RM of Headingley Section 31 32 19.01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GEOTEXTILES
Page 1 of 1

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The work described herein shall consist of the installation of geotextile.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 31 23 33.01 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling
.2 Section 32 11 16.01 – Granular Sub-base and Base Course

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIAL
.1 Geotextile shall be non-woven polyester in accordance with CGSB 148.1 – 1705/m2, 1.7
mm thickness, or as approved by the Engineer.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Place geotextile material by unrolling onto graded surface in orientation, manner and
locations indicated.
.2 Place geotextile material smooth and free of tension stress, folds, wrinkles and creases.
.3 Place geotextile material on sloping surfaces in one continuous length from toe of slope
to upper extent of geotextile.
.4 Overlap each successive strip of geotextile 600 mm over previously laid strip.
.5 Install pins or place piles of sub-base material as required to hold geotextile fabric in
place.
.6 Protect installed geotextile material from displacement, damage or deterioration before,
during and after placement of material layers.
.7 After installation, cover with overlying layer within 4 hours of placement.

3.2 PROTECTION
.1 Vehicular traffic not permitted directly on geotextile.
.2 Place a minimum of 150mm of granular material over the geotextile fabric before driving
construction vehicles over the geotextile fabric.

END OF SECTION

31 32 19.01.docx Stantec GEOTEXTILES

DIVISION 32

EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
RM of Headingley Section 32 11 16.01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GRANULAR SUB-BASE AND BASE COURSE
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The work described herein shall consist of the installation of granular sub-base and
granular base course.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 31 23 22.01 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling
.2 Section 31 32 19.01 – Geotextile

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 ASTM International
.1 ASTM C131, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
.2 ASTM C535, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Large-Size
Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.

1.4 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide gradation and LA abrasion test results to Engineer for sub-base and base material
prior to placement of material.

Part 2 Products

2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Granular sub-base material shall be well graded crushed rock conforming to the
following grading requirements.
Sieve Size [mm] Percent (%) of Total Dry
Weight Passing Each Sieve
200 -
150 -
100 97 – 100
50 -
25 30 – 50
5 -
0.08 0-8

.1 Other properties as follows:

Los Angeles degradation maximum loss by mass of 40 % for 100 mm
sub-base tested in accordance with grading 1 of ASTM C535 and
.2 Base course material shall be well graded crushed limestone conforming to the following
grading requirements.

32 11 16.01.docx Stantec GRANULAR SUB-BASE AND BASE COURSE

RM of Headingley Section 32 11 16.01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 GRANULAR SUB-BASE AND BASE COURSE
Page 2 of 2

Sieve Size [mm] Percent (%) of Total Dry

Weight Passing Each Sieve

25 -
20 100
5 40 - 70
2.5 25-60
0.315 8 - 25
0.08 6 - 17
.1 Other properties as follows:
.1 Los Angeles degradation: maximum loss by mass of 35 % when tested
in accordance with grading B of ASTM C131.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 No sub-base material is to be placed until the Engineer has approved the sub-grade and
geotextile installation.
.2 No base course material is to be placed until the Engineer has approved the granular sub-
base construction.

3.2 PLACING
.1 Ensure no frozen material is placed.
.2 Place material only on clean unfrozen surface, free from snow or ice.
.3 Place granular sub-base and base course using methods which minimize segregation and
degradation of the material.
.4 Place granular sub-base in a sufficient thickness to prevent damage to the geotextile prior
to equipment traveling over the placed sub-base.
.5 Construct the granular sub-base and base course to the lines and grades shown on the
drawings.
.6 Compact sub-base to 98% of Standard Proctor Density.
.7 Proof roll granular sub-base in the presence of the Engineer with equipment approved by
the Engineer.
.8 Maintain finished sub-base condition until succeeding layer of sub-base or base material
is constructed.
.9 Compact base course to 100% of Standard Proctor Density.
.10 Apply water as required to achieve the required densities.

END OF SECTION

32 11 16.01.docx Stantec GRANULAR SUB-BASE AND BASE COURSE

RM of Headingley Section 32 31 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FENCING AND GATES
Page 1 of 1

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The work described herein shall consist of the requirements for fencing, gates and gate
operators.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications.

1.3 SUBMITALS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

Part 2 Products

2.1 CHAIN LINK FENCES

.1 Chain link fences shall conform to The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard
Construction Specifications, Section 02.71 10 – Fencing except where noted on the
drawings.

2.2 GATES
.1 Gates shall conform to The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction
Specifications, Section 02.71 10 – Fencing except where noted on the drawings.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 FENCES AND GATES

.1 As per The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications,
Section 02.71 10 – Fencing.

END OF SECTION

32 31 00.docx Stantec TOPSOIL PLACEMENT, GRADING

AND SEEDING
RM of Headingley Section 32 91 19.13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT GRADING AND SEEDING
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The work described herein shall consist of the requirements for topsoil placement,
grading and seeding.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 31 23 33.01 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications.

Part 2 Products

2.1 TOPSOIL
.1 Topsoil shall conform to The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction
Specifications, Section 024850 - Topsoil and Finish Grading.

2.2 SEED
.1 Grass seed shall conform to The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction
Specifications, Section 02 48 60 - Seeding.

2.3 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

.1 Temporary erosion and sedimentation controls including silt fences, erosion control
blankets and stenlogs shall conform to The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard
Construction Specifications, Section 022010 - Construction of Waterways.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

.1 Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion
and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff.
.2 Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
.3 Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed
during removal.

3.2 PREPARATION OF EXISTING GRADE

.1 No topsoil shall be placed until the Engineer has accepted the grade and condition of the
receiving subgrade.

32 91 19.13.docx Stantec TOPSOIL PLACEMENT, GRADING

AND SEEDING
RM of Headingley Section 32 91 19.13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT GRADING AND SEEDING
Page 2 of 2

.2 Grade soil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots and ensure positive drainage.
Grading to conform to elevations shown on the Drawings.
.3 Remove debris, roots, branches, stones in excess of 50 mm diameter and other deleterious
materials.
.4 Remove soil contaminated with petroleum products.
.5 Dispose of removed material off site at an approved waste disposal facility.

3.3 PLACING AND SPREADING OF TOPSOIL

.1 Place topsoil with a minimum thickness of 100 mm to the required finished elevations
within the reservoir / pumphouse site area except those areas specified to have granular or
concrete surface.
.2 Place topsoil with a minimum thickness of 100 mm to all disturbed landscaped area as a
result of underground infrastructure installations or any other construction activity.
.3 The surface of the topsoil shall be graded until it is smooth and free of lumps.
.4 The topsoil shall be fine graded to ensure positive drainage and shall be feathered around
perimeters into existing areas requiring re-growth of vegetation.

3.4 SEEDING
.1 Seeding operations including timing, placement and maintenance shall conform to The
Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications, Section 024860 -
Seeding.
.2 All area where topsoil is placed shall be seeded.

END OF SECTION

32 91 19.13.docx Stantec TOPSOIL PLACEMENT, GRADING

AND SEEDING
DIVISION 33

UTILITIES
RM of Headingley Section 33 11 16
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
Page 1 of 1

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

1. The work described herein shall consist of the installation of watermains, water supply
lines and associated appurtenances.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

1. Section 31 23 33.01 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

1.3 REFERENCES
1. The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications, Section
027060 - Pressure Pipelines.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL
1. All products shall conform to The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction
Specifications unless otherwise noted in the specifications or drawings.
2. Water supply and distribution piping shall be HDPE DR 17.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL
1. Watermain and water supply pipes shall be installed in accordance with MWSB Section
027060 - Pressure Pipelines.
2. The Contractor shall confirm the elevation and location of all existing infrastructure prior
to construction and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies.
3. All water pipes shall have a minimum cover of 2.4m under grassed areas and 3.0m below
gravel and paved areas.
4. All water pipes shall have a minimum of 3 m horizontal separation from any wastewater
sewer and a minimum of 0.45 m vertical separation at any pipe crossing.
5. All existing utility crossings shall be coordinated with the responsible agency.
6. Repair damage to underground and surface structures due to surface subsidence and soil
heaving caused by trenchless installation methods.
7. Hydrostatic testing and disinfection in accordance with MWSB Section 027060 –
Pressure Pipelines shall be conducted on the proposed watermain and water supply
piping. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner at the bulk water rate in effect at
the time of purchase. The bulk water rate for 2025 is $2.51 per cubic metre.

END OF SECTION

33 11 16.docx Stantec WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING

RM of Headingley Section 33 31 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING
Page 1 of 1

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The work description herein shall consist of the installation of gravity wastewater sewer
pipe and low-pressure sewer pipe.

1.2 REFERENCES
.1 The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications, Section
027030 – Sewers and Section 027060 – Pressure Pipelines.

Part 2 Products

2.1 GENERAL
.1 All products shall conform to The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction
Specifications unless otherwise noted in the specifications or drawings.
.2 Gravity Sewer shall be PVC SDR 35.
.3 Low Pressure Sewer shall be HDPE DR 17.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL
.1 Gravity Sewer shall be installed to the alignment and grade indicated in the Drawings in
accordance with MWSB Section 027030 - Sewers.
.2 Low-pressure Sewer shall be installed to the alignment and grade indicated in the
Drawings in accordance with MWSB Section 027060 – Pressure Pipelines.
.3 All existing utility crossings shall be coordinated with the responsible agency.
.4 Repair damage to underground and surface structures due to surface subsidence and soil
heaving caused by trenchless installation methods.
.5 Hydrostatic testing shall be in accordance with MWSB Section 027060 – Pressure
Pipelines shall be conducted on the proposed low-pressure sewer piping. Potable water
may be purchased from the Owner at the bulk water rate in effect at the time of purchase.
The bulk water rate for 2025 is $2.51 per cubic metre.

END OF SECTION

33 31 13.docx Stantec SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING

RM of Headingley Section 33 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WEEPING TILE PACKAGED PUMPING STATION
Page 1 of 4

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION

.1 Supply and install a factory built and tested effluent station consisting of a submersible
pumping unit complete, motors, controls and alarm for pumping non-potable water from
buildings identified on the drawings to the septic tank.
.2 Include the following as a minimum for the pump station:
.1 basin housing with anti-floatation collar.
.2 submersible pumps and electric motors
.3 pump discharge elbow
.4 cables
.5 guide rail removal system
.6 chains and lifting accessories
.7 all necessary bolts, nuts, gaskets and couplings to assemble pumping units
.8 controls, alarm panels and all necessary wiring.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

.1 The pump supplier shall submit all shop drawings and maintenance and installation
manuals to the Contractor. Include schematic wiring diagrams and panel mounting
details. Shop drawings must show pump performance characteristics with pump and
system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve where applicable.

1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENT

.1 The pump supplier shall be responsible for the design, fabrication, assembly in factory
and testing of the equipment. The pump supplier shall supply all necessary shop drawings
and installation and maintenance manuals for Contractor. The Contractor shall be
responsible for taking the delivery of the equipment and assembly and installation of the
equipment to produce an operational pumping system including pump controls.

Part 2 Products

2.1 PRE-PACKAGED EFFLUENT PUMP STATION

.1 Supply and install complete factory-built effluent pump station consisting of an effluent
pump(s) mounted in a fiberglass basin, pump guide rail assembly, shut off valve, integral
check valve, simplex control panel and all necessary internal wiring.
.2 Locations: As shown on the drawings.
.3 Manufacturer: Liberty Pumps EPS series or approved equal.

33 32 13.docx Stantec WEEPING TILE PACKAGED

PUMPING STATION
RM of Headingley Section 33 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WEEPING TILE PACKAGED PUMPING STATION
Page 2 of 4

2.2 EFFLUENT STATION SUBMERSIBLE PUMP (04-P-101)

.1 Submersible single stage effluent pump with:

.1 Simplex completely submersible for effluent and drain water.
.2 Cast iron construction motor housing and volute case with stainless steel
hardware.
.3 Vortex style engineered polymer impeller with unitized ceramic/carbon seals.
.4 32 mm discharge port.
.5 Schedule 80 PVC discharge piping.
.6 Galvanized steel pump guide rails.
.7 All exposed bolts shall be stainless steel.
.8 Liberty FL52M-3 effluent pump or approved equal.
.2 Motor:
.1 Pump motor shall be CSA approved.
.2 208 V, 1 phase.
.3 0.5 HP, 3450 RPM, 60 Hz.
.3 Fibreglass Reinforced Barrel
.1 762mm diameter (30”)
.2 Depth = 5791mm (228”)
.3 Anti-floatation collar
.4 Provide Stainless Steel lifting chain
.1 Lifting chain shall be complete with stainless steel lifting ring at one end and
stainless steel hook suitable for attaching to tank wall.
.2 Hook and chain shall be capable of supporting pump weight plus additional 50
kg without deflection.
.3 Provide nylon rope tie to top of chain and tank wall.
.5 Manufacturer: Liberty Pumps Simplex Effluent Pump Station or approved equal.

2.3 SUBMERSIBLE EFFLUENT STATION SIMPLEX PUMP CONTROL PANEL

.1 NEMA 4X simplex control panel with three float switches and high-water alarm.
.2 Control panel features to include:
.1 Reliable for operation of single pump 0.5HP, 208V, 1 phase.
.2 Red beacon and horn with exterior test/silence switch
.3 Green pump run and float indicators
.4 Three (3) PVC float switches
.5 Terminal block design for easy service and maintenance
.6 Control/alarm fuse and circuit breakers (Pump Disconnect and Brack Circuit)
.7 Thermal overload protection
.8 Aux. Contacts w/ Automatic Reset for general alarm/ high level

33 32 13.docx Stantec WEEPING TILE PACKAGED

PUMPING STATION
RM of Headingley Section 33 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WEEPING TILE PACKAGED PUMPING STATION
Page 3 of 4

.9 cUL listed.
.10 Manufacturer: Liberty Pumps SX-Series or approved equal.

2.4 FINISHING

.1 Pumps shall be supplied in completely assembled units.

.2 After installation thoroughly clean the pumping units.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 DELIVERY

.1 Provide for unloading and storage of the pumping units on the site of the work.

3.2 EFFLUENT PUMP STATION

.1 Install effluent pump station in a vertically plumb position. Check vertical alignment of
effluent pump station at manhole in two positions 90 degrees to each other.
.2 Compact and level soil area immediately below effluent station base.
.3 Provide 100 mm sand base bedding under base. Compact sand.
.4 Slope area around manhole away from entrance.
.5 Install 50mm rigid insulation to underside of lid. Attach with bolts through lid and large
diameter non-corrosive washers.

3.3 EFFLUENT STATION SUBMERSIBLE PUMP

.1 Install pump and make all mechanical and electrical connections according to
manufacturer’s installation manual.
.2 Confirm proper rotational direction of pump.

3.4 SUBMERSIBLE EFFLUENT STATION PUMP CONTROL PANEL

.1 Mount panel inside building as indicated on drawings.
.2 Conductor between effluent lift station to control panel to be Teck cable.
.3 All electrical wiring to be according to CSA code requirements and completed by a
certified electrician.
.4 Provide settling loop in conductor at effluent station to allow for settlement.

3.5 REMOTE ALARM

.1 Provide a connection between the effluent station control panel and the SCADA system
to provide an alarm signal to the operators.

3.6 TESTING

33 32 13.docx Stantec WEEPING TILE PACKAGED

PUMPING STATION
RM of Headingley Section 33 32 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 WEEPING TILE PACKAGED PUMPING STATION
Page 4 of 4

.1 The Contractor shall be overall responsible for the start-up of the equipment associated
with all the packaged lift station and associated components with assistance from the
Supplier.
.2 The Supplier will provide the required services on-site to assist the Contractor for start-up
of their equipment to ensure proper operation.
.3 The Contractor shall coordinate with the Supplier with respect to providing a fully
functional packaged lift station and associated components.
.4 Meet the requirements of Section 01 91 13 – General Commissioning Requirements.
.5 Field test the pump in presence of the Engineer to demonstrate the installation is correctly
completed and all pumps are operating satisfactorily without vibration in meeting the
flow requirements.

3.7 TRAINING

.1 Training must be provided by a factory certified trainer.

.2 Co-ordinate all training seminars for the Owner’s operators.
.3 Meet the requirements of Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training.

END OF SECTION

33 32 13.docx Stantec WEEPING TILE PACKAGED

PUMPING STATION
RM of Headingley Section 33 36 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SEWAGE SEPTIC TANKS
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 This section specifies the requirements for the installation of pre-fabricated fibreglass
septic tank and is supplemented by other specific details shown on the drawings or
specified elsewhere.
.2 The work includes the following:
.1 Supply and placement of tanks, ballasts, and supports
.2 Piping to limits shown
.3 Excavation and backfill
.4 All other related operations

1.2 REGULATIONS
.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.2 Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean,
dry, well-ventilated area.
.2 Store and protect drainage material from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

Part 2 Products

2.1 FIBREGLASS REINFORCED TANKS (FRP)

.1 Size – 3,768 L “2-cell” style
.2 Material – FRP
.3 Wall thickness – As required to allow 2.1m of earth cover, and as recommended by
manufacturer.
.4 Joints – As specified by the manufacturer
.5 Interior lining – FRP resin
.6 Access – one 600 mm minimum diameter access hatch with cover. Height to conform to
drawings
.7 Accessories: Hook, galvanized chain to lift and rubber hose.
.8 Certification:
.1 CSA
.2 Meet all Manitoba Provincial Codes
.9 Polywest, D&L Concrete and Fiberglass Products, Equinox and Carlson.
33 36 00.docx Stantec SEWAGE HOLDING TANKS
RM of Headingley Section 33 36 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 SEWAGE SEPTIC TANKS
Page 2 of 2
2.2 BEDDING AND SURROUND MATERIALS
.1 Filter bedding and pipe envelope material shall conform to the Manitoba Water Services
Board Standard Construction Specifications, Section 024140 - Underslab and Foundation
Drainage Pipe.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 Excavation
.1 Excavate to the depth shown on the drawings and dispose of the material excavated as
approved by the Engineer.

3.2 BASE PREPARATION

.1 Backfill with pea gravel to manufacturers specifications.

3.3 PLACING OF TANKS

.1 Handle tank with care to ensure no damage to finish coating or to anodes.
.2 Prior to lowering into the excavation, repair any damaged portion of coating.
.3 Tanks where the fibreglass was damaged shall be removed from the site, and either
repaired at the manufacturer’s shop or replaced.
.4 Lower tank carefully into the excavation using lifting lugs provided. Under no
circumstances shall chains or slings, nor any other method of tank handling be employed.
.5 After positioning of tank in the excavation, carefully inspect tank, in presence of
Engineer, for any damage. Repair where necessary.
.6 Install anti flotation concrete beams and straps as specified and recommended by the
manufacturer.

3.4 BACKFILLING
.1 Notify Engineer at least 48 hours prior to backfilling tank.
.2 Backfill with pea gravel.
.3 Properly seal connections and piping. Make all unused plugged openings leak tight.
.4 Complete backfilling in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01.

END OF SECTION

33 36 00.docx Stantec SEWAGE HOLDING TANKS

RM of Headingley Section 33 42 13
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PIPE CULVERTS
Page 1 of 1

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The work described herein shall consist of the installation of corrugated steel pipes.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section 31 23 33.01 – Excavating, Bedding and Backfilling

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications.

Part 2 Products

2.1 CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE

.1 All corrugated steel pipe, couplers and bolts to conform to the Manitoba Water Services
Board Standard Construction Specifications, Section 024350 – Supply of Corrugated
Steel Pipe.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 GENERAL
.1 Culverts are to be installed to the alignment and grade indicated in the Drawings in
accordance with The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction
Specifications, Section 024360 – Placing Pipe Culverts and Pipe Arches.

END OF SECTION

33 42 13.docx Stantec PIPE CULVERTS

RM of Headingley Section 33 46 13.01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FOUNDATION AND UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE
Page 1 of 2

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The work described herein shall consist of the installation of foundation drainage pipe.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Section 31 23 33.01 – Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.

1.3 REFERENCES
.1 The Manitoba Water Services Board Standard Construction Specifications (2013).

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory
packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.
.2 Storage and Handling Requirements:
.1 Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean,
dry, well-ventilated area.
.2 Store and protect drainage material from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

Part 2 Products

2.1 DRAINAGE PIPE

.1 Drainage Pipe shall conform to the Manitoba Water Services Board Standard
Construction Specifications, Section 024140 - Underslab and Foundation Drainage Pipe
and the Listing of Approved Products.

2.2 BEDDING AND SURROUND MATERIALS

.1 Filter bedding and pipe envelope material shall conform to the Manitoba Water Services
Board Standard Construction Specifications, Section 024140 - Underslab and Foundation
Drainage Pipe.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 EXAMINATION
.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under
other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for drainage materials installation in
accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Consultant.
.2 Inform Consultant of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.

33 46 13.01.docx Stantec FOUNDATION AND

UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE
RM of Headingley Section 33 46 13.01
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 FOUNDATION AND UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE
Page 2 of 2

.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied
and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Consultant.
.2 Make sure graded subgrade conforms with required drainage pattern before placing
bedding material.
.3 Make sure improper slopes, unstable areas, areas requiring additional compaction or
other unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to approval of Consultant.

3.2 BEDDING PREPARATION

.1 The Contractor shall prepare the subgrade to the required shape, grade and drainage
pattern and as shown on the drawings.
.2 Coarse filter aggregate bedding shall be installed providing a uniform bearing surface for
the pipe. Transverse depressions shall be shaped to suit joints.

3.3 PIPE OR TUBING INSTALLATION

.1 Perforated pipe shall be placed on the filter aggregate providing uniform support to the
pipe.
.2 All fittings, tees and joints shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.
.3 The pipe shall be surrounded and covered with the filter aggregate material in layers
uniformly and simultaneously placed on each side of the pipe.
.4 Use solid pipe where indicated on the drawings.

3.4 PIPE SURROUND MATERIAL

.1 Upon completion of pipe laying and after the Consultant has inspected and approved
Work in place, surround and cover pipe and install geotextile filter as indicated on the
drawings.

3.5 BACKFILL MATERIAL

.1 Place backfill material above pipe surround in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm
compacted thickness up to grades as indicated.
.2 Use appropriate compaction equipment.
.1 Conduct hand tamping around confined areas of pipe.
.2 Do not use water or other hydraulic means to place or consolidate backfill
material.

END OF SECTION

33 46 13.01.docx Stantec FOUNDATION AND

UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE
DIVISION 40

Process Integration
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
Page 1 of 8

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 This section specifies general clauses applicable to the supply and installation of all
process mechanical systems.
.2 The process mechanical systems include all of the systems handling process water and
wastewater fluids and those directly related to the process system.
.3 The Work under this section shall include the supply, installation, testing and start-up of
the Process Mechanical Material and Products to provide a complete and workable
installation in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and all applicable
codes, standards and ordinances. Any work and/or other necessary materials not
specifically mentioned in the specifications or shown on the drawings, but necessary to
complete the installation, shall be furnished by the Contractor as if specifically mentioned
herein and detailed.
.4 All work related to domestic plumbing (building water and wastewater lines), and heating
systems are specified in Division 22 and Division 23.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 Refer to Division 26 and 25 for Electrical Work and Controls and Instruments related to
Process Mechanical work.
.2 All Sections Division 1 - are an integral part of this specification and shall be read in
conjunction herewith.
.3 The process mechanical drawings do not show structural details and any information
involving accurate measurements of buildings. Refer to architectural and structural
drawings as well as all other divisions of this specification.
.4 Piping and mechanical work shall be painted in accordance with the painting
specifications in Division 9.

1.3 WARRANTY
.1 Furnish a written guarantee stating that all work executed in this contract will be free
from defective workmanship and materials for a period of one (1) year from the date of
substantial performance of work. The Contractor shall repair and replace any work
which fails or becomes defective during the term of the guarantee/warranty, providing the
operating and maintenance instructions have been complied with. The period of
guarantee specified shall not, in any way, supplant any other guarantees of a longer
period provided by Manufacturers or as called for in the project documents.

1.4 PERMITS, CERTIFICATES, AND FEES

.1 The Contractor shall give all notices, obtain all permits and pay all fees so that the work
specified herein may be carried out.
.2 The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with Utilities Companies for
services and meters as required and pay for all the costs involved.

40 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
Page 2 of 8

.3 Arrange for inspection of all work by the authorities having jurisdiction over the work
including local building, plumbing and Utilities Representatives. On completion of the
work, present to the Contract Administrator the final unconditional certificate of approval
of the inspecting authorities.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

.1 Comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the applicable CSA standards, the
requirement of the Authorities, Federal, Provincial and Municipal Codes, the applicable
standards of the Underwriters Association and all other Authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with the guidelines of Manitoba Conservation in the undertaking of the work.
These codes and regulations constitute an integral part of these specifications.
.2 Welding shall conform to the ANSI/ASME Power Piping Code and the ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.
.3 Welders shall be qualified and licensed in Manitoba, and welder qualifications shall be in
accordance with CSA-Z662.
.4 Welding safety requirements shall be in accordance with CSA-W117.2 - Code for Safety
in Welding and Cutting.
.5 Work shall be performed in accordance with the Regulations of the Manitoba Workplace
Health and Safety Act.
.6 Installation shall be in accordance with the National Building Code and all regulations
and codes of the Province, Territory or Municipality in which the work is located.
.7 In case of conflict, the codes shall be taken as the minimum acceptable criteria where
they exceed those in the contract documents. In no instance reduce the standard or scope
of work, or intent established by the contract documents by applying any of the codes
referred to herein. Where the contract documents indicate a standard exceeding code
requirements, the contract documents shall take precedence.

1.6 APPROVED EQUALS

.1 Approval of alternative equipment shall be in accordance with Tender Documents.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 All materials and equipment shall be delivered, handled and stored subject to the
provisions contained herein and according to the manufacturer's recommendations.
.2 Provide temporary storage facilities and heated storage where required for sensitive items
such as motors.
.3 Equipment, including pumps and motors, shall not be placed in temporary or final
locations in the new structures before a date approved by the Engineer. The date of
delivery into the structure shall be commensurate with the construction progress and the
suitability, with respect to temperature, humidity, etc. of the building.
.4 Take precautions to maintain equipment in good condition and to avoid corrosion or
other damage, which may affect the equipment's performance. Provide temporary
coatings as required to prevent corrosion.
.5 Leave factory covers in place and prevent entry of foreign materials into working parts of
equipment.
40 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
Page 3 of 8

.6 Protect members and bearings with plastic covers.

.7 Grease all shafts and sheaves to prevent corrosion.
.8 The Contractor shall recognize the time interval required for complete construction
before the structure is suitable for equipment installation. If equipment is manufactured
before it is required at the site, the Contractor shall provide suitable heated dry storage
space for the equipment, to the approval of the Engineer. All equipment and motors shall
be rotated at least weekly during the storage period, and after installation, until the
equipment is placed in normal use.
.9 All material damaged or otherwise harmfully affected during delivery, storage, handling
or installation shall be replaced by the Contractor at his/her own expense.

1.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, ANCHORS, AND BASES

.1 The Contractor shall provide all structural work required for foundation and support of
units, foundation bolts, sleeves, washers, nuts, shims and templates to locate bolts.
.2 Anchor bolts shall be set in concrete with one end of the bolt hooked as detailed; or
sleeved anchor bolts as detailed may be set in concrete. Expansion type bolts drilled into
concrete may not be used in lieu of anchor bolts.
.3 Provide a minimum of 25 mm non-metallic grout between bedplates and concrete
foundation, fill voids, finish and remove wedges after grout is set. Grout shall be Embeco
or approved equivalent alternative, non metallic type.
.4 Where grouting is required for bedplates and equipment bases on concrete foundations,
the surface of the concrete foundation shall be roughened to provide a bond.
.5 All bases shall be finished to match the floor.

1.9 MATERIALS
.1 Provide new materials and equipment of first class quality, delivered, erected, connected
and finished in every detail, and supplied with the acceptance of the Engineer.
.2 Assume responsibility of ensuring that equipment provided performs as specified.

1.10 INSTALLATION
.1 Follow the recommended installation details and procedures for all equipment as found in
the supplier's technical data, supplemented by the shop drawings, the contract drawings
and the specifications and the directions of the Engineer. Co-ordinate work with the work
of other trades to avoid conflict.
.2 Install mechanical work in advance of concrete pouring as necessary.
.3 For equipment or material of the same type or classification, install only products of one
manufacturer.
.4 Install all equipment with adequate access for inspection and servicing and to provide
minimum interferences. Conserve headroom and leave maximum usable space.
.5 Employ only skilled tradesmen properly licensed by the Province or Territory, for all
work requiring tradesmen with special skill.

40 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
Page 4 of 8

.6 Motors shall be aligned, shimmed and coupled to fit shafts, to the tolerances given by the
manufacturer.
.7 Set equipment in place and install piping, fittings, valves and other items. Make final
adjustments in alignment and elevation before securely fastening equipment and other
items in place.
.8 Control alignment so that excess forces are not imposed on equipment when piping
connections are tightened.
.9 Do not tighten pipes until grout is set.
.10 Tighten so that there are no excessive stresses set up in flanges.

1.11 VIBRATION ISOLATION

.1 Provide vibration isolators for all mechanical motor driven equipment throughout the
project, unless specifically noted otherwise. This shall include but not be limited to all
piping connected to vibration isolated equipment.
.2 Provide Vibration Isolators as manufactured by Vibro-Acoustics, Vibron or Air Master.
.3 Provide all sound and vibration elimination materials by one supplier unless otherwise
specified. Provide shop drawings showing isolator location, load forces, anchor positions,
etc. and installation instructions.
.4 Statically and dynamically balance rotating equipment for minimum vibration and low
operating noise level.
.5 Provide flexible connectors for pipes to all equipment supported by vibration isolators.
.6 Provide flame proof flexible connectors between fans, heaters, equipment and ducts.
.7 Equipment installed by the Contractor shall operate smoothly without excessive wear,
adjustment and attention. Vibration shall not exceed the manufacturer's specified limits
for individual products. Vibrations in pumps shall be within acceptable field vibration
limits as outlined in the Standards of the Hydraulics Institute.

1.12 GUARDS
.1 Provide vibration free guards on all exposed drives and rotating parts, to meet the
requirements of the Manitoba Workplace Health and Safety Act.
.2 Provide means to permit lubrication, use of test instruments and movement of motors to
adjust belt tension.

1.13 MINOR DEVIATIONS

.1 The Contractor shall allow for additional material such as pipe and ducts for
modifications that may be required to correct minor conflicts or deviations.

1.14 PRIMARY MEASURING ELEMENTS

.1 Install all primary elements specified in Division 25 – Integrated Automation.

40 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
Page 5 of 8

1.15 SHOP DRAWINGS

.1 Shop drawings shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal
Procedures, and in accordance with the requirements of the various divisions.
.2 Materials incorporated into the work prior to approval of shop drawings shall be removed
and replaced at the Engineer’s discretion and at the Contractor’s expense.

1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

.1 Submit operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 -
Closeout Submittals, and in accordance with the requirements of Division 40, all
sections.

1.17 TRAINING
.1 Refer to Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training.

1.18 COMMISSIONING
.1 Refer to Section 01 98 13 – General Commissioning Requirements.

1.19 MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVE

.1 Refer to Section 01 91 00 – Equipment Installation, Section 01 91 13 – General
Commissioning Requirements and to other sections of Division 40 with regard to start up
and check out services by the manufacturers of equipment.
.2 Arrange and pay for field services of Manufacturer’s representatives required for
instruction on specialized portions of the installation.

1.20 PAINTING
.1 All piping, with the exception of stainless steel, shall be painted in accordance with paint
specifications in Division 9.
.2 All unpainted equipment and appurtenances shall be given shop prime paint suitable for
field painting as specified in Division 9.
.3 Do not paint over nameplates.
.4 Equipment having a finished shop coat shall be touched up.
.5 Hangers, supports and fabricated equipment shall be primed and painted as specified in
Division 9.

1.21 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT

.1 Provide a manufacturer's nameplate on each piece of equipment.
.2 Fasten nameplates securely in a conspicuous place.
.3 Identify each piece of equipment by the tag indicated on the Process and Instrumentation
Diagrams.

1.22 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING

.1 All piping shall be colour coded.

40 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
Page 6 of 8

.2 Colours will be primary colours, numbered in accordance with CGSB Standard Paint
Colours.
.3 Use Stencil painted or glue-on lettering for pipe identification letters.
.4 Bands shall be 25 mm wide.
.5 Use standard plastic colour bands and marker tags on small piping.
.6 Direction arrows shall be black 150 mm x 25 mm.
.7 Arrows shall be painted at each branch and termination point.
.8 Locate markers from usual operating areas and identify piping runs at least once in each
room and where piping enters or leaves a room.
.9 The entire length of each pipe will be painted in the basic colour, with bands to indicate
the specific fluid and an arrow to indicate flow direction.
.10 Pipe colors are as follows:

Band
Pipe Tag Pipe Color
No. Color
Potable Water (S.S.) PW N/A 1 Dark Blue
Potable Water (PVC) PW Dark Blue N/A N/A
Sodium Hypochlorite SHC Yellow N/A N/A
Vent (S.S.) VT N/A N/A N/A
Overflow (S.S.) OF N/A N/A N/A

1.23 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

.1 Tag all valves, automatic control and instruments with the corresponding valve number
as indicated on the Process and Instrumentation Diagrams. For any valves not listed on
the P&IDs, tag each valve according to type, and counting up from 001 (ie. Butterfly
valves = BFV 001, BFV 002…) generally following the direction of flow through the
facility.
.2 Tags shall be 75 mm x 35 mm x 2.5 mm thick laminated plastic with black faced and
white lettering, secured to the valve stem with a key chain.

1.24 ELECTRIC STARTING SWITCH IDENTIFICATION

.1 Identify electric starting switches, remote push button stations and equipment supplied
under this division with lamacoid plates having 6 mm minimum letter size. Identification
to state equipment controlled.

1.25 CLEANUP AND DISINFECTION

.1 All piping and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, cuttings and other foreign
substances.
.2 Disconnect, clean and reconnect whenever necessary for purposes of locating and
removing obstructions.
.3 Flush and chlorinate all potable water systems as specified in plumbing codes and where
applicable, in accordance with AWWA standards for Disinfection of Facilities.
40 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
Page 7 of 8

.4 The Contractor shall provide bacteriological testing showing that domestic pipe
cleanliness meets provincial standards prior to placing potable water systems into service.

1.26 LUBRICATION
.1 For all equipment, furnish lubricants in sufficient quantity for 12 months operation by the
Owner.
.2 Identify lubricants furnished by brand, grade and item of equipment for which it is
intended.
.3 Operate, drain and flush out bearings and refill with a new change of oil before
completion.

1.27 DRAWINGS OF RECORD

.1 Refer to Division 1, Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2 Drawings of Record are required for process mechanical revisions.

1.28 MOTORS
.1 Refer to Division 26 for all motor design requirements.

1.29 CUTTING AND PATCHING

.1 The Contractor shall locate and provide holes and sleeves for all process mechanical
work in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications.

1.30 TEMPORARY USE

.1 Refer to Section 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities regarding temporary use of process
mechanical piping and/or equipment.

1.31 PATENTS
.1 Pay all royalties and licence fees, and defend all suits or claims for infringement of any
patent rights, and save the Owner and the Engineer harmless of loss or annoyance on
account of suit, or claims of any kind for violation or infringement of any letters patent or
patent rights, by this Subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by him or
by reason of the use by him or them or any part machine, manufacture or composition of
matter on the work, in violation or infringement of such letters patent or rights.

1.32 DOCUMENTATION AND SYSTEMS ACCEPTANCE

.1 Meet requirements stated in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.2 Contractor shall obtain suitable document signed by the Owner or his representative,
confirming:
.1 Owner has received satisfactory instruction in operation and maintenance of all
equipment and systems.
.2 Operation and maintenance manuals have been provided to the Owner.
.3 Specified spare parts of components, keys, removables, handles, tools and the
like, have been accepted by the Owner.

40 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
Page 8 of 8

Part 2 Products

2.1 NOT USED

.1 Not used.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NOT USED

.1 Not Used.

END OF SECTION

40 05 00.docx Stantec COMMON WORK RESULTS

FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 51
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS VALVES
Page 1 of 11

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The supply and installation of all process valves applicable to the reservoir and
pumphouse. Excluded are domestic plumbing valves.

1.2 RELATED WORKS

.1 General Conditions – MWSB 1000
.2 General Requirements (Stantec) – Division 01
.3 Section 40 05 00 – Common Work Results for Process Integration
.4 Section 40 20 00 – Process Piping Materials and Methods

1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section
01 33 00 Submittals and as follows:
.1 Assembly drawings and material list.
.2 Details of all parts and principal dimensions.
.3 Submit installation manuals before shipment of any equipment.
.4 Submit operation and maintenance manuals.

1.4 SUPPLIERS
.1 All valves and operators of the same type shall be provided by one manufacturer.

Part 2 Products

2.1 BALL VALVES

.1 Ball valves for PVC/CPVC:
.1 Meets NSF 61 standards for contact with drinking water
.2 PVC or CPVC body, to match pipe
.3 Seal Material:
.1 Water systems – EPDM
.2 Sodium hypochlorite systems – Viton (FPM)
.4 Ball valves installed in sodium hypochlorite systems shall have a vented ball.
.5 12 mm to 50 mm sizes to 1586 kPa working pressure and larger sizes to 1035
kPa working pressure
.6 All valve stems shall have blow out proof design and double O-rings for safety.
.7 Full port and two-way blocking
.8 Socket ends shall be Schedule 80 conforming to ASTM D-2467
.9 Threaded ends shall be Schedule 80 conforming to ASTM D-2464

40 05 51.docx Stantec PROCESS VALVES

RM of Headingley Section 40 05 51
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS VALVES
Page 2 of 11

.10 PVC / CPVC compound shall have an ASTM cell classification 12454-A /
23567-A with a minimum suffix “A” chemical resistance
.11 Chemline Type 21 true union or IPEX VXE Series true union.
.2 Ball valves for stainless steel pipe:
.1 Two-piece stainless-steel body
.2 Meets NSF 61 standards for contact with drinking water
.3 Full standard port
.4 Minimum 5515 kPa cold working pressure
.5 Type 316 stainless steel wetted parts to CF8M
.6 Blow out proof stem
.7 Solid stainless steel ball
.8 PTFE seat and packing
.9 Lever handle
.10 Ends to suit connection
.11 Apollo 76F-100-A Series, Flow-Tek S85 Series or approved equal.

2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVES AND MANUAL ACTUATORS:

.1 Non-submersed Potable Water:
.1 Valves 50 mm to 100 mm shall be wafer style body. Valves over 100 mm shall
be lug style body
.2 CRN # (Canadian Registration Number) for applicable Province (include on shop
drawings)
.3 All materials contacting the process fluid shall be “Food Grade” quality and meet
ANSI safety criteria as set out in NSF 60/61
.4 Ductile iron body with extended neck to allow 50 mm insulation
.5 Stainless steel disc and stem
.6 Shaft sealing design shall exceed the pressure rating of the valve. Secondary
shaft sealing as backup
.7 Wafer body to have flange locating holes, factory coated for use in potable water
immersion
.8 Rated for 1035 kPa working pressure
.9 For installation between 1035 kPa ANSI drilled flanges. Connecting pipe flanges
shall have a flat mating surface for proper sealing against the valve.
.10 Maximum seating/unseating torque based on water at 70° F, 100 psi.
100φ = 59 n.m. 150φ = 114 n.m. 200φ = 195 n.m.

250φ = 311 n.m. 300φ = 422 n.m. 350φ = 678 n.m.

400φ = 917 n.m. 450φ = 1212 n.m. 500φ = 1565 n.m.

.11 Single piece shaft – 316 SS – consistent diameter throughout body
.12 Valve seat – peroxide cured EPDM (sulphur cured seats are not acceptable)
.13 Flange gaskets not required
40 05 51.docx Stantec PROCESS VALVES
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 51
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS VALVES
Page 3 of 11

.14 For operating temperature range -35° to 130° C

.15 Bi-directional drip-tight shutoff to working pressure
.16 Keystone Series GR or Apollo 141 Series.
.17 Manual butterfly valve actuators:
.1 For valves 150 mm and smaller – lever operated cast iron c/w 10 position
plated steel notch plate and stainless steel spring
.2 For valves 200 mm and larger – enclosed gear actuator, cast iron housing
and cover, alloy steel worm, steel shaft, Buna N seals, self lubricated,
totally enclosed, aluminum hand wheel, position indicator, and
adjustable travel stops. Design for 445 N rim pull
.2 Submersed Potable Water:
.1 Lug style body
.2 All materials contacting the process fluid shall be “Food Grade” quality and meet
ANSI safety criteria as set out in NSF 60/61
.3 Cast iron body
.4 Cast iron disc secured to shaft with stainless steel pins
.5 Factory internal and external epoxy coating for use in potable water immersion
.6 Rated for 1035 kPa working pressure
.7 For installation between 1035 kPa ANSI drilled flanges
.8 Single piece shaft – 304 SS - sized per AWWA C504
.9 Valve seat – Buna N
.10 Nylatron bearings
.11 V-Type shaft seals
.12 Mueller Lineseal III or Val-matic Series 2000
.13 Valve actuators:
.1 Enclosed quarter-turn gear actuator sized to AWWA specifications, cast
iron housing and cover, stainless steel input shaft, stainless steel drive
sleeve, NSF epoxy coating, food grade grease, rated for continuous
submergence to a depth of 15 m, stainless steel external fasteners, 50 mm
AWWA square operating nut. Rotork AB series or approved equal.
.2 Provide wall mounted stem guide to support extension stem so that
unsupported extension stem length does not exceed 5 m. Trumbull
Adjustable Stem Guide or approved equal.

2.3 GATE VALVES

.1 Non-buried service (for valves 300 mm and smaller):
.1 To AWWA-C509
.2 NSF 61 listed
.3 Face to face dimensions to ASME B16.10
.4 Resilient seat
.5 Cast iron body c/w non-rising stem
.6 Internal and external epoxy coating to AWWA-C550
.7 Rubber encapsulated wedge or gate
40 05 51.docx Stantec PROCESS VALVES
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 51
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS VALVES
Page 4 of 11

.8 O-ring seals replaceable under pressure

.9 Bronze or stainless steel stem
.10 Bronze or stainless steel 50mm square operating stem nut for valves in
submerged installations
.11 Hand wheel operators for non-submerged installations
.12 Ends to suit pipe
.13 Turns counter clockwise to open
.14 Mueller Series 2360, McAvity 2006, Clow Series F6100, Kennedy Series KS-
FW, or American AVK Series 45
.2 Non-buried service (for valves larger than 300 mm):
.1 To AWWA-C515
.2 NSF 61 listed
.3 Face to face dimensions to ASME B16.10
.4 Resilient seat
.5 Ductile iron body c/w non-rising stem
.6 Internal and external epoxy coating to AWWA-C550
.7 Rubber encapsulated wedge or gate
.8 O-ring seals replaceable under pressure
.9 Bronze or stainless steel stem
.10 Bronze or stainless steel 50mm square operating stem nut for valves in
submerged installations
.11 Hand wheel operators for non-submerged installations
.12 Ends to suit pipe
.13 Turns counter clockwise to open
.14 Mueller 2361 Series, Clow Model 2638, Kennedy Series KS-RW, or American
AVK Series 45

2.4 VARIABLE FLOW SILENT CHECK VALVES

.1 Body constructed of ductile iron and coated inside and out with NSF/ANSI 61 certified
fusion epoxy
.2 Begins to close as flow is reduced, with complete closure prior to reversal of flow
condition
.3 Valve shall operate quietly and efficiently due to varying flow rates, throughout the entire
stroke of the poppet, especially with VFD controlled pumps, across the specified range of
flow velocities from the applicable pump
.4 Flow area in full open position shall be equal to nominal pipe area
.5 Centre guided, spring loaded poppet
.6 Poppet, seat ring, and spring constructed of stainless steel
.7 EPDM o-ring seal providing drip tight closure
.8 Suitable for horizontal or vertical up flow
.9 Flomatic 888VFD, Val-Matric Series 1400 Silent Check Valve or approved equal
40 05 51.docx Stantec PROCESS VALVES
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 51
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS VALVES
Page 5 of 11

2.5 PRESSURE RELIEF, SUSTAINING, OR REDUCING VALVES

.1 Diaphragm type. Pressure sustaining valve shall be reduced port
.2 NSF 61 fusion bonded epoxy coating interior and exterior
.3 Valve operation:
.1 Pressure relief or sustaining: pilot operated, opening quickly when the inlet
pressure meets or exceeds the specified setpoint and closing smoothly at an
adjustable speed. In pressure sustaining applications the pilot shall react to small
changes in inlet supply pressure to maintain a constant upstream pressure
.2 Pressure reducing: adjustable opening and closing speed control, pilot operated,
reacting to small changes in downstream pressure to modulate the main valve
bonnet pressure and maintain a constant downstream pressure, regardless of
fluctuations in supply pressure or flow rate
.4 Flanged ductile iron body to ANSI-B16.42, Class 150
.5 Angle or horizontal flow type as indicated on drawings
.6 Type 316 stainless steel seat and stem
.7 Adjustable pressure range with factory-set pressure setting as per drawings
.8 Anti-cavitation trim required when discharging to atmospheric pressure
.9 For valves 75mm and larger, (3) B16 brass pilot isolation ball valves shall be supplied
.10 Provide pilot strainer for valves 75mm and larger. Strainer screen to be 40-mesh. The
external pilot strainer shall have a removable plug for easy maintenance access to the
pilot screen and have provision for installation of a ball valve for pilot screen flushing
.11 Singer 106/206, Cla-Val 50-01/650-01/90-01, or approved equal

2.6 FLOW CONTROL VALVES (01-FCV-210/02-FCV-310)

.1 Diaphragm type. Pressure sustaining valve shall be full port.
.2 NSF 61 fusion bonded epoxy coating interior and exterior.
.3 Flanged ductile iron body to ANSI-B16.42, Class 150.
.4 Angle or horizontal flow type as indicated on drawings.
.5 Type 316 stainless steel seat and stem.
.6 Adjustable pressure range with factory-set pressure setting as per drawings.
.7 Anti-cavitation trim required when discharging to atmospheric pressure.
.8 For valves 75mm and larger, (3) B16 brass pilot isolation ball valves shall be supplied.
.9 The pilot control system shall include strainers and solenoid manual by-pass valves. The
pilot control system shall utilize copper control tubing and brass fittings. The solenoid
pilot valves either add or relieve line pressure from the cover chamber of the main valve,
causing it to open or close as directed by the electronic controller. Solenoids shall have
NEMA 4 enclosures.
.10 Controller c/w control algorithm with Mag meter feedback and Modbus TCP
communication. Control panel shall be equipped with color touch screen HMI, NEMA 4
(or IP 65) enclosure and proportional flow band 0-100% base on 24VDC solenoid valves.
40 05 51.docx Stantec PROCESS VALVES
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 51
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS VALVES
Page 6 of 11

.11 Ability to automatically maintain minimum target pressure, modulate flow to achieve
target flow rate and open/close when call for water is initiated and stopped.
.12 Fail closed on loss of power.
.13 Two (2) solenoid valves, 24 VAC.
.14 Singer 106-2SC-PCO-AC flow control valve c/w Singer MCP-TP-RF-R-MOD-CIP
control panel, Cla-Val 131 Series electronic control valve c/w VC-22D controller or
approved equal.

2.7 RESERVOIR ISOLATION VALVE POSITION INDICATOR ASSEMBLIES

.1 T316 Stainless Steel body and lid
.2 O-ring lid seal
.3 Provide standard socket head cap screws
.4 Trumbull Model No. 367-4621 or approved equal
.5 Valve Position Indicator – compatible with valve box
.1 Delrin polymer construction
.2 Double o-ring seals
.3 Square extension stem
.4 Counter clockwise opening position to match valve
.5 Field adjustable for number of turns to open to match valve
.6 Trumbull or approved equal

2.8 AIR RELEASE VALVES

.1 ARV (distribution and supply headers) and CAVV (individual pump discharges):
.1 NSF 61 listed for contact with drinking water
.2 Size as shown on drawings: 25Ø and 50Ø valves with NPT, screwed male
connection
.3 Single chamber, reinforced nylon body, and with solid polypropylene control
float
.4 Inlet shall be of equal diameter to the nominal valve size
.5 E.P.D.M. rolling seal mechanism
.6 Pressure rating:
.1 25Ø and 50Ø NPT: 2500 kPa (363 psi)
.7 Valve shall be leak tight throughout the range of 50 kPa to 1.5x rated working
pressure
.8 Valve outlet shall be piped to a drain as shown on the drawings. Drain pipe size
to be equal to the valve’s discharge outlet
.9 A.R.I. D-40 series or approved equal

2.9 DOUBLE CHECK BACKFLOW PREVENTER:

.1 Valves 50 mm and smaller:
.1 ASSE listed 1015
40 05 51.docx Stantec PROCESS VALVES
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 51
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS VALVES
Page 7 of 11

.2 Lead free construction

.3 Full port ball valves
.4 Cast bronze body and covers to ASTM B-584
.5 Seat rings of NSF listed Noryl
.6 Seat disc elastomers of silicone
.7 Stainless steel springs
.8 Maximum working pressure of 1207 kPa
.9 Check valves maintainable without removing assembly from line
.10 Zurn Wilkins 950XL2, Febco LF850, or approved equal

2.10 REDUCED PRESSURE ZONE ASSEMBLY:

.1 Valves 65 mm and larger:
.1 Certified to NSF 61 and ASSE Listed 1013
.2 Assembly consisting of two independent link check modules, a differential
pressure relief valve located between and below the two modules, two drip tight
shutoff resilient seated non-rising stem gate valves, and test cocks
.3 Type 304 SCH 40 stainless steel check valve housing and sleeve
.4 Link checks shall have reversible elastomer discs and provide drip tight closure
.5 Lead free construction
.6 Flanged connections
.7 Maximum working pressure of 1207 kPa
.8 Check valves maintainable without removing assembly from line
.9 Provide air gap assembly with splash guard to provide an unobstructed, physical
separation between the potable water supply and receiving vessel
.10 Ames C400 series, Wilkins 375AST series, or approved equal

2.11 SAMPLING VALVE

.1 Valve material to match pipe.
.2 Quarter turn handle
.3 EPDM or Viton seat and stem seals
.4 1035 kPa pressure rating
.5 6mm male thread end x 6mm hose end
.6 Acceptable products:
.1 PVC: Chemline LC Series, IPEX LV Series, or approved equal.
.2 Stainless Steel: Swagelok SS-4P4T1, DK-LOK V23A-MD-4N4T-S or approved
equal.

2.12 STATIC MIXER

.1 Compact Type 316 stainless steel body and mixing plate design for installation between
two flanges.
.2 Mixer shall be NSF 61 certified.
40 05 51.docx Stantec PROCESS VALVES
RM of Headingley Section 40 05 51
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS VALVES
Page 8 of 11

.3 Neoprene gaskets on both sides of the body.

.4 Concentration of the injected fluid throughout the pipe’s cross section shall be within 1%
of mean value at 10 pipe diameters downstream of the mixer.
.5 Provide two Type 316 stainless steel injection ports on the mounting ring fitted with two
stainless steel corporation stop and Hastelloy injection tube. Injection tube shall be fitted
with sealed tip to isolate chemical from potable water to limit and minimize calcification.
.6 Designed each static mixer for the addition of sodium hypochlorite into potable water
with the following rates:
.1 01-SM-101: 4.7 to 33 L/s
.2 02-SM-401: 5 to 253 L/s
.7 Westfall Model 2800 or approved equal.

2.13 INJECTION QUILL

.1 Retractable injection quill
.2 Check valve: integrated spring load
.3 Quick disconnect coupling
.4 Ball valve material: Stainless steel
.5 Tube material: PVC
.6 Insertion Length: 1/3 of pipe diameter of receiving pipe (max 150 mm)
.7 Tip Configuration: Standard
.8 Seal type: EPDM
.9 Pressure rating: 150 psi
.10 SAF-T-FLO EB-125 or approved equal.

2.14 MANUAL GEAR OPERATOR

.1 Manual gear operators shall be sized for the operating rim pull of 80 N at maximum
working pressure differential across the valve
.2 Provide hand lever operator for valves 150 mm and smaller
.3 Provide handwheel operators for gate valves, knife gate valves and globe valves unless
operators are specified
.4 Provide geared type actuator complete with valve position indicator for valves 200 mm
and larger. Handwheel operator shall be provided unless otherwise specified
.5 Extension stem operator:
.1 Provide extension stem, stem guides, 50 mm square AWWA operating nut where
shown on the drawings.
.2 Valve extension stem shall be 316 SS c/w SS wall brackets at max 3 m spacing
as required for complete installation. The stems shall withstand the maximum
operator torques with a safety factor of 1.5

40 05 51.docx Stantec PROCESS VALVES

RM of Headingley Section 40 05 51
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS VALVES
Page 9 of 11

2.15 CHAINWHEEL OPERATORS

.1 Provide chainwheels for valves installed overhead as indicated on the drawings.
.2 Chainwheel operators shall include chain wheel, sprocket rim, chain guide, chain away
holder, hammer blow mechanism, and non-sparking brass chain
.3 Chainwheel material: ductile iron
.4 Chainwheel coating: epoxy
.5 Handwheel attachments: 304 stainless steel
.6 Sized to operate valve as per manufacturer’s recommendations
.7 Babbitt Steam Specialty Company hammer blow chain wheel or approved equal

2.16 ELECTRIC ACTUATOR

.1 Electric operators shall include motor, power gearing, torque switches, mechanical
position indicator and accessories as required and specified hereunder.
.2 Cast aluminum construction and permanently lubricated gears.
.3 Temperature rating from -29° to 65°C
.4 Operator shall be furnished with a handwheel for manual operation. The motor rotor shall
not operate when handwheel is in use. No declutch mechanism shall be required for
manual operation. Handwheel shall not require more than 180 N pull at the rim to
operate.
.5 Electric motors shall be CSA approved, suitable for humid environment, NEMA 4.
Provide Class F or better insulation.
.6 Output relays for monitoring, fault alarms, and open/closed limits.
.7 Suitable for two-position, ESD, or modulating applications as noted.
.8 Able to accept analogue or digital inputs.
.9 Operator shall develop 1.5 times the torque required to operate valve at 1035 kPa.
.10 Refer to Section 09 91 00 – Painting for finishing requirements.
.11 Keystone EPI2 or approved equal.

2.17 SOLENOID VALVES

.1 Single seated, direct acting
.2 Brass body
.3 Wetted parts are to be compliant to NSF 61-372 low lead requirements
.4 Globe body control valve
.5 Seals and discs of PTFE
.6 Normally closed or open as required and indicated on drawings.
.7 120V, 60 Hz
.8 ASCO Red Hat general purpose enclosure or approved equal.

40 05 51.docx Stantec PROCESS VALVES

RM of Headingley Section 40 05 51
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS VALVES
Page 10 of 11

2.18 PRESSURE GAUGES

.1 Provide 115 mm diameter, ½ of 1% accuracy phenolic pressure gauges c/w stainless steel
internals, liquid filled, dial type to CGSB 91-GP-1. Gauges to include glass window,
white dial face, black lettering, and both kPa and psi units of measure.
.2 Full scale value of each gauge shall be such that at normal system operating pressure the
dial shall be between the 11:00 and 2:00 positions on the gauge based on the connection
being located at the 6:00 position.
.3 Use materials compatible with system requirements.
.4 Provide isolation ball valve on all pressure gauges.
.5 Acceptable Gauge Manufacturers: Ashcroft, Trerice, Taylor, Weiss, Weksler, Winters,
Wika or approved equal.

2.19 PRESSURE SWITCHES

.1 Provided as per Division 26.
.2 Provide ball valve on all pressure switches.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 FIELD PAINTING

.1 All exposed surfaces of valves shall be painted after installation; refer to Division 09.

3.2 DELIVERY
.1 Provide for unloading and storage of the valves on the site of the Work.

3.3 VALVES AND OPERATORS

.1 Install all valves and operators in strict accordance with manufacturer's shop drawings
and instructions.
.2 Install extension stems, stem supports and other accessories as required and as shown on
drawings.
.3 Pipe air release valve outlet to drain. If valve is supplied with dirt/dust cap, remove cap to
expose internal pipe threads and install appropriate fittings to facilitate piping to drain.

3.4 GAUGES AND FIXTURES

.1 Install all gauges and fixtures in strict accordance with manufacturer's shop drawings and
instructions.

3.5 TESTING
.1 Field test all valves in presence of the Engineer to demonstrate the installation is correctly
completed and all valves are operating satisfactorily.

40 05 51.docx Stantec PROCESS VALVES

RM of Headingley Section 40 05 51
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS VALVES
Page 11 of 11

3.6 TRAINING
.1 The Contractor shall provide training to the designated Owner’s operators in accordance
to Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training. Training shall include suggested
maintenance, inspection, replacement of moving parts, etc.

END OF SECTION

40 05 51.docx Stantec PROCESS VALVES

RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 1 of 13

Part 1 General

1.1 DESCRIPTION
.1 This section specifies the general requirements for supply and installation of all process
mechanical piping systems and is supplemented by other specific details shown or
specified in the respective piping system section.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.1 All sections, Division 01
.2 Section 02 70 60 – Pressure Pipe
.3 Section 09 91 00 – Painting
.4 Division 26 – Electrical
.5 Division 40 – Process Integration
.6 Division 46 – Process Equipment

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

.1 The design has been completed to the degree necessary for the Contractor to tender the
project. The pipe support system is not fully detailed and will require the Contractor to
undertake some design for the piping system to be installed.
.2 Piping supports are generally not shown on the process/mechanical layout drawings.
Provide the design of piping supports, pipe guides, and anchors based upon the piping
layout. Typical support details and structural attachments shown on the drawings indicate
the level of quality that will be considered acceptable.
.3 The Contractor is responsible for the final aspects of the pipe support system and thrust
restraint design. The components of the design that will be generated will be as follows:
.1 Piping support system design, including details and location of all supports. The
support system will ensure that the weight of the pipework and commodities, and
the need for lateral and vertical support are considered fully.
.4 Design documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer as necessary to indicate
acceptability of the piping systems’ support and thrust restraint. The documentation shall
be stamped and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the Province of Manitoba.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings and product data as follows:
.1 Assembly drawings and material list.
.2 Details of all parts and principal dimensions.
.3 Submit installation manuals before shipment of any equipment.
.4 Submit operation and maintenance manuals 30 days prior to start up.

40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS

AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 2 of 13

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCES

.1 Domestic Water, Drainage and Vent Piping: Provincial and Municipal codes.

1.6 REFERENCES
.1 ASTM D2564-88, Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly Vinyl Chloride
.2 CAN/CSA-B137.3, Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) for Pressure Application
.3 CAN/CSA-B137.6, Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
for Hot- and Cold- Water Distribution Systems
.4 CAN/CSA-B181.2-M87, PVC Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Pipe Fittings
.5 CAN/CSA-B182.1-M87, Plastic Drain and Sewer Pipe and Pipe Fittings
.6 CSA B181.12-1967 – Recommended Practice for the Installation of PVC Drain, Waste
and Vent Pipe and Pipe Fittings

Part 2 Products

2.1 PIPE - FOR BURIED SERVICE

.1 Polyethylene Pipe
.1 to CGSB-41GP-25M
.2 material to ASTM-D1248, P34 high density
.3 All underground pipe shall be by Division 2 and 33
.4 Refer to Section 33 11 17 – HDPE Pipe for requirements and pipe series

2.2 PIPE - FOR NON-BURIED SERVICE

.1 Steel Pipe
.1 65 diameter and smaller
.1 To ASTM-A120
.2 Galvanized, standard wall
.3 Black standard wall for gas
.4 Screwed joints Class 150
.2 75 diameter to 300 diameter
.1 To ASTM-A53 - Grade B
.2 Galvanized
.3 Standard wall thickness
.4 Seamless pipe
.5 Victaulic flanged joints for valve and equipment connections
.6 Victaulic coupled joints for pipe to pipe connections
.7 Welded joints are not acceptable
.8 Exterior primed for field painting (refer to Section 09 91 00 - Painting)

40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS

AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 3 of 13

.2 Polyvinyl Chloride
.1 CSA-B137.3
.2 Class 12454B PVC compound as specified in ASTM D1784
.3 Schedule 80
.4 Solvent weld joints
.3 Polyvinyl Chloride (Non-pressure Service - DWV)
.1 PVC Schedule 40
.2 CSA-B181.2 and CSA-B 182.1
.3 Solvent weld joints
.4 Polyethylene Pressure Pipe
.1 Series rating as indicated in Section 33 11 17 – HDPE Pipe
.2 CSA-B137.1
.3 Flanged joints
.4 Electrofusion coupling joints acceptable where jointing type is not indicated
.5 Stainless Steel for Process Piping
.1 ASTM-A778 or A312 Type 304 L pipe
.2 ASTM-A774 or A403 Type 304 L fittings
.3 Minimum Wall Thickness:
.1 Schedule 10S
.4 Vacuum rating: 100 kPa
.5 Longitudinally welded by Tungsten Inert Gas (TIG) for all sludge treatment
piping and/or Metal Inert Gas (MIG) method elsewhere
.6 Ends prepared for welding or to suit connections as shown on drawings
.7 Provide flanges where required to connect to valves and equipment and at 3 m
maximum spacing on straight runs
.6 Polyvinylidene Fluoride Tubing
.1 ASTM D32295
.2 Inert material that is non-wetting and non-leachable
.3 Rated for 200 psi

2.3 PIPE FITTINGS

.1 Steel Victaulic and Flanged Fittings (All Steel Process Pipe Containing Water)
.1 Includes elbows, tees, caps, reducers and other fittings as shown on drawings
.2 Fabricate to ASTM A-53
.3 Standard weight
.4 Physical properties to match pipe
.5 Dimensions to conform with standard steel pipe
.6 Finished to match pipe
.2 Steel - Threaded
40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS
AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 4 of 13

.1 ANSI-B16.3 - standard malleable

.2 Pressure rate to match pipe
.3 Lined and coated to match pipe
.4 Standard straight thread ANSI-B1.20.1
.3 PVC
.1 For pressure service to CSA3-B137.3
.2 For non-pressure service to CSA-181.2
.3 Schedule as noted in Clause 1.3 - Pipe Material
.4 Solvent joint fittings to match pipe
.5 To AWWA-C111 - rubber gasket type where required
.6 Flanges, reducing bushings and other fittings to be compatible with line pipe
material
.4 Polyethylene
.1 To match pressure rating of pipe supplied
.5 Stainless Steel
.1 Wall thickness to match or exceed line pipe wall
.2 Elbows to 500 mm shall be smooth flow and manufactured to the requirements of
ANSI B16.9.
.3 Backing flanges to be stainless steel, ANSI-B16.5 Class 150 standard, or ANSI-
B16.5 Class 300 where noted on drawings.
.4 Ends to be prepared to suit piping as required.
.5 Weld-o-lets are acceptable in lieu of reducing tees. Where the reducing tee is for
an air release valve or combination air vacuum valve, the weld-o-let shall provide
equivalent volume to the reducing tee.
.6 Fittings ASTM type to match pipe ASTM type.

2.4 FLANGES
.1 Flanges for use in cold water service with galvanized steel pipe shall be victaulic as
shown on the drawings, or welded neck when specifically called for.
.2 Flanges for stainless steel shall be welding neck or slip-on type as shown on the
drawings.
.3 Slip-on flanges shall be in accordance with AWWA-C207, and rated for 1035 kPa.
.4 Screw-on flanges for air piping to be Class D for pressures as follows:
.1 Pipe size 100 to 300 1035 kPa
.5 Flanges shall be steel to ASTM-A181, Grade 60, fabricated to ANSI B16.5, rated for
1035 kPa or 2070 kPa as shown on the drawings.
.6 Use flat face flanges to connect to cast iron flanges, and raised face flanges to connect to
raised face flanges.
.7 Flange class shall be plainly marked on all flanges.

40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS

AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 5 of 13

2.5 BOLTS AND NUTS

.1 Bolts and nuts shall be to AWWA C207.
.2 Bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel to ASTM-240, Type 304 hexagonal heads.
.3 Size and length to match flanges and valves.

2.6 FLANGE GASKETS

.1 For flanges, 1.6 mm cloth inserted rubber SBR, Garlock Style 22 or approved alternate
for temperatures below 100°C.
.2 Use flat ring gaskets with raised face flanges.
.3 For flanges in air piping use 1.6 mm neoprene, Garlock 7797 gasket or approved
alternate.
.4 Use full faced gaskets with flat face flanges.

2.7 VICTAULIC COUPLINGS

.1 Victaulic couplings shall be used for jointing standard steel pipe.
.2 Victaulic couplings shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the Victaulic
Company of Canada, Anvil International (Gruvlok) or approved alternative.
.3 For rigid connections in water piping use:
.1 Victaulic Zero - Flex Style 07.
.2 Gruvlok Figure 7401.
.4 For flexible couplings allowing for expansion, contraction and deflection use:
.1 Victaulic 71, Gruvlok Figure 7001 Standard Couplings for maximum working
pressures to 3450 kPa.
.2 Victaulic 77 Gruvlok Figure 7001 Standard Couplings for maximum working
pressures in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.5 Coupling gaskets - Grade E-EDPM for water from -34°C to +110°C.
.6 Bolts and nuts - Zinc electroplated, from ASTM-A183 or stainless steel Type 304.
.7 Coupling Materials
.1 Ductile Iron to ASTM-A536 for normal conditions.
.2 Stainless steel Type 304 for corrosive conditions.

2.8 VICTAULIC GROOVES

.1 Standard Steel Pipe – roll or cut grooves to coupling manufacturer’s standards. The use
of cut grooves shall maintain a minimum pipe work pressure of 1035 kPa.
.2 Light Wall Steel Pipe - roll grooves to coupling manufacturer's standards.
.3 Stainless Steel Pipe - roll grooves to coupling manufacturer's standards.

2.9 VICTAULIC FITTINGS (GROOVED ENDS)

.1 Steel to ASTM A106 Grade B - segmentally welded.
40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS
AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 6 of 13

2.10 VICTAULIC FLANGES

.1 Use hinged Victaulic Flange Style 341 or Gruvlok Flange Figure 7012 for pipe diameters
300 mm and smaller.
.2 Use four-piece Victaulic Flange Style 341 or Gruvlok Flange Figure 7012 for pipe
diameters 350 mm and larger.

2.11 FLEXIBLE PIPE ACCESSORIES

.1 Power Lock Clamp
.1 Provide Power Lock Clamp to connect PVC ridged pipe to fittings.
.2 Clamp to be double bolted stainless steel.
.3 Acceptable product: Kanaline Power Lock Clamp or approved alternative.
.2 Cam-Lock Couplers
.1 Provide female coupler c/w hose shank for attachment to PVC hose.
.2 Provide threaded male adapter for connection to rigid pipe elbow.
.3 Material of construction shall be 316 stainless steel.
.4 Provide Buna “N” gaskets.
.5 Fittings to be rated for a minimum operating pressure of 150 psi.

2.12 FLEXIBLE PROCESS PIPE SECTIONS

.1 Double arched butyl rubber expansion joint with multiple plies of polyester or nylon cord
and full faced flanges with retaining rings drilled to 150# ANSI standards
.2 50mm minimum axial compression.
.3 Acceptable product: Flexicraft Ultraspool Double, or approved equal.

2.13 SLEEVE TYPE COUPLINGS

.1 Use only as indicated on the drawings.
.2 Use cast ductile iron couplings to ASTM A536, body and end plates to be fusion bonded
epoxy coated to AWWA C-213, T304 stainless steel nuts and bolts, and NBR rubber
gaskets meeting ASTM D2000.
.3 Couplings to be ROBAR 1506 or approved alternative, standard length, standard weight.
.4 Transition couplings to be Robar 1506R or approved alternative.
.5 Operating pressure up to 1035 kPa unless otherwise noted.

2.14 WELDING OUTLETS

.1 Fabricate to the requirements of ANSI-B16.9, ANSI-B16.11 and ANSI-B31.1.
.2 Welded outlets include weldolets, sockolets and thredolets.

40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS

AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 7 of 13

2.15 PIPE SLEEVES

.1 Process pipes passing through walls of the reservoir shall be stainless steel with a
diameter equal to the process pipe. These sleeves shall be puddle flanged and be flanged
for a bolted pipe connection each end as indicated on the Drawings.
.2 300 mm and smaller pipe sleeves shall have a 50 mm by 6 mm thick steel ring
continuously welded all around the middle of the pipe length.
.3 350 mm and larger pipe sleeves shall have a 100 mm by 10 mm thick steel ring
continuously welded all around the middle of the pipe length.
.4 Special sleeves shall be as shown on the drawings.

2.16 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS - GENERAL

.1 Hangers and supports shall conform to ANSI Code for Pressure Piping B31.1.
.2 Materials, design and manufacture for Pipe Hangers and Support shall be in accordance
with ANSI/MSS SP-58.
.3 Hot dip galvanize all supports, hangers, guides, sway braces, restraints, dampeners, bolts,
washers and nuts after fabrication and before installation.
.4 Hangers and supports shall be sized to suit the pipe sizes as shown on drawings and as
recommended by the manufacturer.

2.17 PIPE SUPPORTS

.1 Wall supports - use Grinnell Fig. 194, Fig. 195, Fig. 199 or Caddy welded steel brackets
hot dipped galvanized, or as shown on the drawings.
.2 Floor Supports - use supports as detailed on drawings.
.3 Pipe saddle supports - use Grinnell Fig. 265 or Caddy 724 adjustable pipe saddle support
complete with riser pipe and floor flange.
.4 Strap supports - use Grinnell Fig. 212 or Caddy 450 for PVC pipe. Use stainless steel u-
bolts for stainless steel piping. Provide straps for larger pipe as detailed on drawings.
.5 Wall supports for PVC pipe up to 50 mm diameter shall be Grinnell tube strap or
approved alternate.

2.18 PIPE HANGERS

.1 For non-insulated steel pipe of 150 mm and smaller use Grinnell Figure CT97C coated
adjustable pipe ring complete with hanger rod and expansion case or insert for mounting
on concrete surface.
.2 For non-insulated steel pipes to 600 mm use Grinnell Fig. 260 or Caddy 401 adjustable
clevis galvanized.
.3 For concrete inserts use Grinnell Fig. 152, Fig. 117 and Fig. 285 to suit service conditions
and pipe size.
.4 For ceiling flanges, use Grinnell Fig. 153.
.5 Hanger rods shall be machine threaded both ends and shall be hot dipped galvanized after
fabrication.
40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS
AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 8 of 13

.6 Spring hangers shall be Grinnell Fig. 80-V or 81-H constant support spring hangers.
.1 Any part of a hanger or other pipe support in direct contact with stainless steel
shall be nylon coated with NCA-1477 nylon thermoplastic 0.5 mm thick or shall
be of 304 stainless steel. Provide felt paper between pipe and concrete pipe
supports to prevent bonding.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 NUTS AND BOLTS

.1 Install nuts and bolts so that bolts have a minimum of two exposed threads projecting
after tightening; with a maximum of 8 threads projecting.
.2 Apply Denso paste to exposed threads, flanges and coupling bolts.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE AND FITTINGS

.1 Prior to commencing piping work, examine route for conflicts and notify the Engineer of
any conflicts. Obtain approval of the Engineer for any relocations.
.2 Install to piping lines and elevations shown on the drawings.
.3 Install all piping parallel to building walls.
.4 Determine exact location of each pipe in the field with respect to adjacent and
interconnecting piping and equipment.
.5 Install all piping systems in accordance with the ANSI code for pressure piping, B31.1.
.6 Provide victaulic flanged or coupled joints intermittently in all steel piping systems to
facilitate removal of every section of the piping systems by two men and without cutting
any pipe or joint.
.7 Provide unions intermittently in all screwed piping systems to facilitate removal of valves
and every section of the piping system without cutting any pipe or joint.
.8 Provide temporary bracing and supports to adequately support pipes and fittings during
installation.
.9 Where the required piping is not shown on drawings or is shown diagrammatically, the
pipes shall be installed in such a way as to conserve head room and interfere as little as
possible with the spaces through which they pass.
.10 Maintain grade on all draining pipes. Horizontal water piping shall be run with a grade
of 2% to drain.
.11 Make reductions in water pipes with eccentric reducing fittings installed to provide
drainage and venting. Top of the fitting shall be flat for water-containing pipe.
.12 Where piping is to connect to equipment, dimensions shown on the drawings are based
on catalogue information of first named supplier.
.13 Modify work to suit final dimensions shown on shop drawings for equipment.
.14 Ascertain the correct equipment dimensions before ordering piping closure lengths and
fittings. Review of drawings by the Engineer will not relieve the Contractor of his/her
obligation in this respect.
40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS
AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 9 of 13

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION UNDERGROUND

.1 All underground piping shall be installed by Division 2 and Division 33 in accordance
with these contract specifications and in accordance with Section 33 23 33.01 –
Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling and Section 33 11 17 – HDPE Pipe.

3.4 JOINTING PIPES - GENERAL

.1 Clean pipes inside and outside before assembly. Remove welding slag.
.2 Ream pipes and tubes.
.3 Make screwed joints using approved compound or teflon tape applied to male threads.
Use thread tape on P.V.C. pipe.
.4 Connect pipes to equipment as shown or specified, without springing the pipes.
.5 Provide complete isolation of dissimilar metals. Do not connect copper to any ferrous
metal.
.6 Use standard fittings for direction changes.
.7 Follow the recommendations of the manufacturer for jointing pipes and installing
couplings and fittings.

3.5 WELDED STAINLESS STEEL PIPING

.1 Welds shall be made by a certified welder, skilled in welding stainless steel pipes.
Submit quality control manual, registration, certificates and welding ticket for all
welders, welding protocols and proposed methods.
.2 Prepare pipe ends by grinding and bevelling; then clean using stainless steel brushes and
acetone.
.3 Select filler rods and electrodes to conform with the pipe composition and submit lists for
review.
.4 Make tack welds employing gas tungsten arc methods and remove while making the root
pass.
.5 Use gas tungsten arc welding for materials to 3 mm thick; and for root pass for heavier
thicknesses, use Gas Metal Arc Welding or Shielded Metal Arc Welding.
.6 Use argon only as arc shielding gas and purge gas.
.7 All welds shall have full penetration without shrinkage or porosity. Welds shall be
smooth and shall not have undue protrusions on the pipe interior.

.8 Inspections and Tests

.1 Examinations are to be performed by a specialist qualified in accordance with

CSA W178-1-14 and W178.2-08 (R2013) and approved by the Engineer.

.2 Provide a visual examination of all welds, including entire circumference of weld

externally and whenever possible internally.

.3 Inspect and test the first two (2) welds made by every welder by non-destructive
full gamma ray radiographic (hereinafter referred to as “radiography”) tests and
40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS
AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 10 of 13

submit this information to the Engineer. The Engineer will have authority to
randomly select welds and undertake readiography testing (costs by others).

.4 Identify each radiographic film with date, location, name of welder and submit to
the Engineer. Interpretation of radiographic films to be done by a qualified
radiographer.

.5 If any weld fails the radiographic tests, tests will be extended to all welds made
by welder responsible.

.6 Re-inspect and re-test any repaired or re-worked welds.

.9 All welds shall be pickled and passivated.

3.6 RUBBER GASKET JOINTS

.1 Make rubber gasket and mechanically coupled victaulic joints in carbon steel pipe, PVC
pipe or other pipes in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Use appropriate
tools to pull joints, to field cut joints and to prepare pipes for joining. After assembly
check the gasket position.

3.7 FLANGED JOINTS

.1 Fit flanged joints so that gaskets are bearing uniformly and joints are even. Apply an
anti-seize compound to bolt threads and tighten bolts evenly.

3.8 VICTAULIC JOINTS

.1 Grooves shall be rigid style, made in accordance with the coupling manufacturer's
recommendations.

3.9 EXPANSION PIECES

.1 Install piping to permit free movement of piping caused by thermal expansion and
contraction except where it is anchored.
.2 Install Victaulic couplings on flexible radius grooved cast iron pipe wherever pipe
crosses structural expansion joints and install flexible Victaulic couplings wherever steel
pipe crosses structural expansion joints.
.3 Provide for expansion and contraction by installing suitable expansion pieces as is
necessary or where indicated.
.4 Provide expansion pieces having ratings equivalent to the test pressures specified for the
particular piping system and wetted surfaces of material similar to that of the piping
system.
.5 Design expansion pieces for the lengths of straight runs shown and the temperature
differentials specified.
.6 Provide anchors and guides where necessary to direct expansion into expansion pieces.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AND HANGERS

.1 Support all piping after alignment and before tightening joints.

40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS

AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 11 of 13

.2 Do not move pipe after tightening joints.

.3 Provide all hangers, supports, anchor bolts, washers and nuts to support pipes at the lines
and elevations indicated and/or as detailed on the drawings.
.4 Provide inserts in concrete, concrete piers and anchor bolts as required. Provide
reinforcing bars in concrete for inserts carrying pipe over 100 mm in diameter.
.5 Bolt base flanges to the floors or to concrete.
.6 Provide all necessary sway braces, dampeners, flexible hoses and restraints to eliminate
all movements of piping due to vibration. Install additional braces and anchors as
necessary to eliminate vibrations.
.7 Provide hangers, supports, anchors, guides, dampeners, flexible hoses, restraints and
sway braces that will cope with the loads and thrust forces from all directions so that all
pipe joints will function and thrust is not transferred to the equipment to which the pipe is
connected.
.8 Maximum hanger spacing and minimum rod size shall be in accordance with the
following:
Maximum Maximum
Pipe Size Rod Size Spacing Steel Spacing P.V.C.

up to 25 mm 10 mm 1200 mm 1200 mm
25 - 50 mm 10 mm 1800 mm 1800 mm
65 - 90 mm 12 mm 2400 mm 2100 mm
100 - 125 mm 16 mm 2400 mm 2100 mm
150 mm 20 mm 3600 mm 2400 mm
200 - 300 mm 22 mm 5500 mm 2400 mm
350 and up 25 mm 6500 mm 2800 mm

.9 A pipe hanger, support or brace shall be provided at each fitting which changes the
direction of flow or splits flow, and at each proposed valve.
.10 Install sufficient hangers and supports to provide an adequate safety factor as outlined in
ANS1-B31.1.
.11 Drilling into concrete, and using expansion type inserts will be permitted only on
approval of the Engineer.

3.11 PIPES THROUGH FLOORS AND WALLS

.1 Provide stainless steel pipe sleeves where pipes pass through floors and walls. (PVC, tin
or blocked out sleeves are only acceptable where indicated on the drawings).
.2 Install sleeves as detailed on the drawings.
.3 Provide continuously welded rings on pipes passing through walls below grade or where
walls are watertight. The thrust/seepage rings shall be as detailed on the drawings.
.4 Remove coating from pipes to be cast in concrete to permit a good bond.
.5 Where electrical insulation from concrete rebar is required, use link seals with pipe
sleeves where shown on drawings.

40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS

AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 12 of 13

.6 Where thrust restraint is required design according to AWWA Manual M11 or as

detailed.
.7 For stainless steel pipe passing through concrete use stainless steel sleeves. Coat surfaces
of stainless steel in contact with concrete, with bitumastic.
.8 There shall be no direct contact between structural steel and stainless steel.
.9 Seal space between sleeves and pipes with non-hardening mastic -Daraseal-A or
approved alternative.

3.12 CLEANING
.1 Clean all pipes, fittings and miscellaneous items after installation.
.2 Remove all materials from pipes, whatever their origin, by flushing with water, blowing
with air and dismantling and manually cleaning.
.3 Prevent entrance of foreign materials from pipes to equipment or pumps.

3.13 SHOP FINISHES

.1 Shop priming of the equipment shall be as specified in Section 09 91 00 - Painting.

3.14 FIELD PAINTING

.1 Field painting shall be in accordance with Section 09 91 00 - Painting.

3.15 PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING

.1 Hydraulic tests shall be carried out for a period of 8 hours and pressure maintained with
no appreciable pressure drop (0 kPa pressure drop over duration of test). Where leakage
occurs, repairs shall be made and the entire system shall be retested.
.1 Process liquid piping shall be tested at 1.5X working pressure or 1035 kPa (150
psi), whichever is greater and within the pipe’s rated capacity, measured at the
low point in the system or as specified otherwise.
.2 Lines which will be normally open-ended on completion of the work shall be initially
plugged for testing purposes.
.3 Air shall not be used as a test medium for systems not using air.
.4 Leaks in screwed fittings shall be corrected by remaking joints; leaks in PVC joints shall
be cut out and reglued. Caulking will not be permitted.
.5 Leaks in valves shall be rectified by replacement of the valve.
.6 Test air lines with compressed air. Maintain the greater of 1.5X working pressure or 1035
kPa (150 psi), up to the rated pressure of the pipe, for a period of 24 hours. Pressure drop
shall not exceed 1.7% of the starting test pressure over a 24 hour period, after allowance
for temperature changes.
.7 A test form is to be filled out, witnessed, kept on site for the Engineer to verify at any
time during construction and then they are to be included in the final submission of the
contractor O&M manuals.

40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS

AND METHODS
RM of Headingley Section 40 20 00
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
Page 13 of 13

3.16 DISINFECTION
.1 All Potable Water piping is to be disinfected prior to commissioning.
.2 Flush and chlorinate in accordance with AWWA Standards for Disinfection of Facilities.

END OF SECTION

40 20 00.docx Stantec PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS

AND METHODS
DIVISION 41

Bulk Material Processing Equipment

RM of Headingley Section 41 22 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MONORAIL HOISTS
Page 1 of 3

Part 1 General

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

.1 Supply and install complete hoist and trolley lifting systems for installation on the
provided monorails. Any other requirements not set forth in these specifications, but
necessary for the safe and reliable operation of the equipment, shall be included.
.1 Provide one (1) 2000 kg capacity hoist and trolley systems.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

.2 05 12 00, Structural Steel Framing
.3 05 50 00, Miscellaneous Metals
.4 09 91 00, Painting and Finishing

1.3 REFERENCES
.5 The following is a list of standards which may be referenced in this Section:
.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
.1 B30.10, Hooks.
.2 B30.11, Monorails and Underhung Cranes.
.3 HST 2M, Performance Standard for Hand Chain Manually Operated
Chain Hoists.
.4 MH27.1, Underhung Cranes and Monorail Systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.
.2 Shop drawings/product data:
.1 Submit shop drawings or manufacturer’s product data sheets for all items.
.2 Indicate manufacturer, product description or model/catalogue numbers, sizes,
quantities, materials and finishes, accessories, options and installation details,
Indicate requirements for related work.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.
.2 Maintenance data: submit operation and maintenance data for each specified item for
incorporation into maintenance manual.
.3 Spare parts: provide spare parts and extra materials as specified by items.
.4 Warranties: submit manufacturer’s warranties. All warranties shall be on the
manufacturer’s letterhead.

41 22 23.docx Stantec MONORAIL HOISTS

RM of Headingley Section 41 22 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MONORAIL HOISTS
Page 2 of 3

Part 2 Products

2.1 HOIST AND TROLLEY

.1 The equipment will be operated in ambient temperatures ranging from 5°C to 40°C.
.2 All bearings in trolley and hoist shall be lifetime lubricated.
.3 Other conditions:

Parameter Value
Capacity rating (kg) 2000
Crane Type Underhung monorail cranes
Manual or Electric Manual
Total lift (m) 6.0
Hoist control Manual
Trolley Control Plain
Acceptable Hoist Manufacturers KITO CF Series
CM 622A Series
Acceptable Trolley Manufacturers KITO TSP Series
CM HTP Series

Part 3 Execution

3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install the equipment described above in accordance with the drawings and with strict
adherence to the manufacturer’s instructions.
.2 Ensure that the crane rails are perfectly horizontal, correctly aligned, and properly
fastened to the supporting structures. Install the travel limits stops on each end of rails.
.3 Lubricate all necessary points on the as per manufacturer’s recommended lubricates.

3.2 PAINTING AND FINISHING

.1 The crane assembly shall receive one shop coat of high visibility yellow epoxy paint.
.2 All exposed surfaces of crane to be painted after installation.
.3 The capacity of crane systems shall be clearly painted on the side of the crane beam.

3.3 INSPECTION AND TESTS

.1 Do performances test on each hoist and monorail systems.
.2 Load tests in compliances with OSHA, ANSI B30.11, and ANSI MH27.1.
.3 Final acceptance will be made after the entire installation and testing has been completed.
All tests required to prove the ability of the crane shall be made by the Contractor.

41 22 23.docx Stantec MONORAIL HOISTS

RM of Headingley Section 41 22 23
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 MONORAIL HOISTS
Page 3 of 3

END OF SECTION

41 22 23.docx Stantec MONORAIL HOISTS

DIVISION 43

Process Gas and Liquid Handling,

Purification and Storage Equipment
RM of Headingley Section 43 21 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
Page 1 of 6

General

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

.1 The supply and installation of all vertical turbine pumping units c/w motors applicable to
construction of the proposed water treatment plant, as shown on the drawings.
.2 Provide with each pump:
.1 Electric motor
.2 Pump discharge head
.3 Discharge pressure gauge
.4 Sole plate
.5 Column pipe and shaft
.6 Bowl assembly
.7 Basket strainer
.8 All necessary stainless steel bolts, nuts, gaskets and couplings to assemble
complete pumping units
.9 Supervision of installation and commissioning by pump supplier for all vertical
turbine pumps
.1 The pump manufacturer shall have unit responsibility for the pump, driver, and
accessories. Unit responsibility means the accountability to answer and resolve any and
all problems regarding the proper installation, compatibility, performance, and
acceptance of the equipment.
.2 The pump Supplier shall be responsible for the design, fabrication, assembly in factory
and testing of the equipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking the delivery
of the equipment and assembly (as required) and installation of the equipment to produce
an operational pumping system.
.3 Training of the Owner’s designated personnel by the pump supplier shall occur on a
separate site trip than that for supervision of installation and commissioning.

1.2 RELATED WORK

.1 General Requirements – Division 01
.2 Division 25 – Integrated Automation
.3 Division 26 - Electrical
.4 Section 40 05 00 – Common Work Results for Process Integration

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS

.1 Horizontal and Vertical Lineshaft Pumps – ANSI/AWWA E103-15
.2 ANSI/HI 2.1-2.6 Vertical Pumps
.3 ANS/HI 9.6.3 Centrifugal and Vertical Pumps Allowable Operating Region

43 21 50.docx Stantec VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS

RM of Headingley Section 43 21 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
Page 2 of 6

.4 ANSI/HI 9.6.4 Centrifugal and Vertical Pumps, Vibration Measurements and Allowable
Values
.5 ANSI/HI 14.6 Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Tests

1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals
.2 The pump supplier shall submit all shop drawings and maintenance and installation
manuals to the Contractor.
.3 The Contractor shall submit shop drawings and product data demonstrating conformance
with the specifications, including the following:
.1 Performance data
.2 Assembly drawings and material list
.3 Details of all parts and principal dimensions
.4 Submit installation manuals before shipment of any equipment

1.5 SUPPLIERS
.1 All electric driven vertical turbine pumps and motors shall be supplied by a single
manufacturer.

Part 2 Products

2.1 DESCRIPTION AND CHARACTERISTICS

.1 Pumps shall be vertical turbine pumps to pump media as indicated:

Distribution Pump (02-P-110) Jockey Pump

Number of Units 1
Centreline Pump Discharge to Pump 6.15 m (approximate; Contractor to field
Chamber Floor measure)
Media Potable water
Drive VFD (1800 rpm max)
Duty Point >= 5 L/S @ 52.8 m TDH at discharge
flange
Max NPSH3 at Duty Point ≤ 1.3 m
Motor Power ≤ 5.6 kW (7.5 hp)
Minimum Operating Water Depth ≤ 0.23 m above pump inlet
Discharge 100 mm

Distribution Pump (02-P-210) Domestic Pump No. 1

Number of Units 1
Centreline Pump Discharge to Pump 6.15 m (approximate; Contractor to field

43 21 50.docx Stantec VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS

RM of Headingley Section 43 21 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
Page 3 of 6

Chamber Floor measure)

Media Potable water
Drive VFD (1800 rpm max)
Duty Point >= 12 L/S @ 52.8 m TDH at discharge
flange
Max NPSH3 at Duty Point ≤ 1.6 m
Motor Power ≤ 11.2 kW (15 hp)
Minimum Operating Water Depth ≤ 0.33 m above pump inlet
Discharge 150 mm

Distribution Pump (02-P-220) Domestic Pump No. 2

Number of Units 1
Centreline Pump Discharge to Pump 6.15 m (approximate; Contractor to field
Chamber Floor measure)
Media Potable water
Drive VFD (1800 rpm max)
Duty Point >= 32 L/S @ 52.8 m TDH at discharge
flange
Max NPSH3 at Duty Point ≤ 3.6 m
Motor Power ≤ 29.8 kW (40 hp)
Minimum Operating Water Depth ≤ 0.50 m above pump inlet
Discharge 150 mm

Distribution Pump (02-P-310A/B/C) High Flow Pumps

Number of Units 3
Centreline Pump Discharge to Pump 6.15 m (approximate; Contractor to field
Chamber Floor measure)
Media Potable water
Drive VFD (1800 rpm max)
Duty Point >= 102 L/s @ 52.8 m TDH at discharge
flange
Max NPSH3 at Duty Point ≤ 7.5 m
Motor Power ≤ 74.6 kW (100 hp)
Minimum Operating Water Depth ≤ 0.83 m above pump inlet
Discharge 250 mm

.2 Specified duty flow shall be within +15% / -10% of flow at BEP.

.3 Approved manufacturers: Goulds, Flowserve, and Peerless

43 21 50.docx Stantec VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS

RM of Headingley Section 43 21 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
Page 4 of 6

2.2 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS

.1 Pumps shall have NSF61 certification stamped onto the pump nameplate.
.2 Manufacture pumps according to the standards of the Hydraulic Institute and to
ANSI/AWWA specification E103.
.3 Materials:
.1 Discharge head:
.1 Variable speed pumps: fabricated steel (cast/ductile iron is acceptable
when pump supplier has completed a finite element analysis
demonstrating compliance with 2.2.17)
.2 Constant speed pumps: cast/ductile iron or fabricated steel
.2 Pump bowls: ASTM A48 Class 30 cast iron
.3 Head shaft & lineshaft: 416 stainless steel, turned and ground
.4 Column pipe: A53, Grade B steel with epoxy lining
.5 Bowl bearings: bronze; lineshaft bearings: EPDM
.6 Impeller: ASTM B584 C903 bronze
.7 Replaceable bowl wear rings: bronze
.4 Provide open lineshaft with pumped media lubrication.
.5 The discharge head shall include an elbow with a standard 125-pound ANSI pipe flange
integrally cast.
.6 The pump shall be supplied with a steel sub-base plate which shall be grouted in place to
which the pump discharge head shall be bolted. This sub-base plate will facilitate
removal and reinstallation of pumps without releveling and grouting.
.7 Pump impellers shall be adjustable at the top of the head shaft. On vertical hollow shaft
drivers, this should be at the top of the motor. This method shall provide a positive
locking device.
.8 Provide flanged type column assembly in max 1.5 m long sections.
.9 Provide flanged type bowl construction and epoxy coated column and discharge head
passageways.
.10 Enclosed or semi-open impeller shall be dynamically balanced and shaft shall be
adjustable vertically by external means at the driver location.
.11 Provide lineshafts in max 1.5 m long sections. Steel lineshaft couplings shall have 1.5
times the lineshaft safety factor. Couplings shall be left hand threaded to tighten during
pump operation.
.12 Pump shafts shall be supported by bronze bearings above and below each impeller.
.13 Suction bell bearing shall be permanently grease packed and sealed.
.14 Head shaft shall be a two piece design with driver stand.
.15 The pump shall have a packed stuffing box.
.16 Pump head capacity curves shall slope in one continuous curve, with steadily rising
pressure to dead head.

43 21 50.docx Stantec VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS

RM of Headingley Section 43 21 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
Page 5 of 6

.17 The complete pumping unit including frames, supports, enclosures, and casings shall be
free from dangerous critical speeds from 20% below to 30% above the operating speeds
required to achieve the specified performance characteristics.

2.3 MOTORS
.1 CSA approved and cUL listed.
.2 All motors controlled by VFD shall be inverter duty rated.
.3 Direct connected, vertical, hollow shaft, high thrust, WP1.
.4 600 V/3phase/60 Hz
.5 Refer to Item 2.1 for drive type
.6 Squirrel cage induction motor
.7 Non-reversing ratchet
.8 Service factor 1.15
.9 Motors shall be premium efficiency
.10 Notify Contractors involved with pump automation to accommodate a scenario of minor
reverse shaft rotation (low speed and short duration) in the event of a check valve and
non reversing ratchet not performing correctly and a 20 m column of water draining
through the pump after pump shutoff

2.4 FINISHING
.1 Distribution pumps shall have NSF potable water epoxy paint on exterior of pump bowl,
interior and exterior of column and interior discharge head assembly.

Part 3 Execution

3.1 FIELD PAINTING

.1 After installation and reassembly, thoroughly clean the pumping units and apply paint to
touch up the areas in which factory applied paint has been removed.

3.2 DELIVERY
.1 Provide for unloading and storage of the pumping units on the site of the Work.

3.3 INSTALLATION
.1 Install pumps and accessories in accordance with manufacturer recommendations
supplemented by details on the drawings.
.2 Install at correct elevations, true, square, plumb and level. The driver shall not be aligned
using shims because this setup will change the resonant frequency of the driver/discharge
head structure.
.3 All electrical wiring to be according to CSA code requirements and completed by a
certified electrician.

43 21 50.docx Stantec VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS

RM of Headingley Section 43 21 50
Field Way Reservoir and Pumphouse December 2024
MWSB No. 1758 VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
Page 6 of 6

3.4 TESTING
.1 Provide in-factory, certified non-witnessed bowl performance tests and provide pump
curves to Engineer prior to field tests. Tests shall be in accordance with ANSI/HI 14.6
acceptance grade 2B.
.2 Field test all pumps in presence of the Engineer to demonstrate the installation is
correctly completed and all pumps are operating satisfactorily without undue vibration.
.3 Test shall be supervised by the manufacturer's representative.
.4 Field testing shall be used to confirm each pump curve, as well as develop an overall
distribution flow curve.
.5 Provide written notice to the Engineer of the date when tests will be made at least two (2)
weeks in advance of the test.

3.5 PUMP SEQUENCE

.1 The pump controls shall be programmed such that:
.1 Each successive pump starts when the currently operating pumps reach their
upper flow limit, as defined by operation at 60 Hz, and maintain that operating
speed for a user selectable duration.
.2 Once a pump starts, a timer shall prevent that pump from turning off for a user
adjustable duration.
.3 Each pump shall be programmed with a minimum run speed selected to keep the
pump operating in its AOR at all times.
.4 The next pump in the control sequence shall be called to start prior to shutting
down any pumps in the previous step of the control sequence.
.5 Each successive pump stops when its operating speed drops to a predetermined
level and stays at or below that level for a predetermined duration. Both speed
and duration setpoints shall be determined during commissioning.

3.6 TRAINING
.1 Refer to Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training. Training shall include
suggested maintenance, inspection, replacement of moving parts, etc.
.2 Training must be provided by a factory certified trainer.
.3 The Contractor shall coordinate the training session for the Owner’s operating personnel,
the Engineer and the pump manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

43 21 50.docx Stantec VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS

 APPENDIX 1

Geotechnical Report
Geotechnical Engineering Report,
Headingley Second Reservoir
RM of Headingley, Manitoba

May 14, 2024

Prepared for:

Stantec Consulting Ltd

500-311 Portage Avenue
Winnipeg, MB R3B 2B9

Prepared by:

Stantec Consulting Ltd.

500-311 Portage Avenue
Winnipeg, MB R3B 2B9

Project Number: 111220838

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

This document entitled Geotechnical Engineering Report, Headingley Second Reservoir was prepared by
Stantec Consulting Ltd. (“Stantec”) for the account of Stantec Consulting Ltd. (the “Client”). Any reliance on
this document by any third party is strictly prohibited. The material in it reflects Stantec’s professional
judgment in light of the scope, schedule and other limitations stated in the document and in the contract
between Stantec and the Client. The opinions in the document are based on conditions and information
existing at the time the document was published and do not take into account any subsequent changes. In
preparing the document, Stantec did not verify information supplied to it by others. Any use which a third party
makes of this document is the responsibility of such third party. Such third party agrees that Stantec shall not
be responsible for costs or damages of any kind, if any, suffered by it or any other third party as a result of
decisions made or actions taken based on this document.

Prepared by
(signature)
Farouk Fourar Laidi. M.Sc., P.Eng.
Associate, Geotechnical Engineer
33009

Reviewed by
(signature)
Rhett Bonham, M.Eng., P.Eng.
Senior Associate, Geotechnical Engineer
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Table of Contents
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................... 1

2.0 SITE DESCRIPTION AND PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION............................................. 2

2.1 PROJECT INFORMATION ............................................................................................... 2
2.2 TOPOGRAPHY ................................................................................................................. 2

3.0 INVESTIGATION PROGRAM .......................................................................................... 3

3.1 UTILITY CLEARANCES ................................................................................................... 3
3.2 DRILLING AND SAMPLING PROGRAM .......................................................................... 3
3.3 LABORATORY TESTING ................................................................................................. 3

4.0 INVESTIGATION RESULTS ............................................................................................ 5

4.1 STRATIGRAPHY .............................................................................................................. 5
4.1.1 Topsoil ............................................................................................................. 5
4.1.2 Fat Clay (CH)................................................................................................... 5
4.1.3 Sandy Silt Till (ML) .......................................................................................... 5
4.2 LABORATORY TEST RESULTS ...................................................................................... 6
4.3 GROUNDWATER AND SLOUGHING CONDITIONS....................................................... 7
4.4 STANDPIPE PIEZOMETER MONITORING RESULTS.................................................... 7

5.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS ....................................................................... 8

5.1 FROST CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................................................. 8
5.1.1 Frost Penetration Depth .................................................................................. 8
5.2 FOUNDATION DESIGN .................................................................................................... 8
5.2.1 Limit States Design.......................................................................................... 9
5.2.2 Cast-in-Place Concrete Raft Foundation ....................................................... 10
5.3 FOUNDATION CONCRETE ........................................................................................... 11

6.0 SUBSURFACE STRUCTURES AND LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE ......................... 13

7.0 DEWATERING ................................................................................................................ 15

8.0 TEMPORARY EXCAVATIONS ...................................................................................... 16

9.0 SEISMIC SITE CLASSIFICATION ................................................................................. 17

10.0 DESIGN REVIEW, CONSTRUCTION MONITORING AND TESTING........................... 18

11.0 SUMMARY ...................................................................................................................... 19

12.0 CLOSURE ....................................................................................................................... 20

LIST OF TABLES

i
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Table 1: Particle Size Analysis Results ......................................................................................... 6

Table 2: Atterberg Limits Test Result ............................................................................................ 6
Table 3: Unconfined Compressive Strength and Unit Weight Tests Results ................................ 6
Table 4: Water Soluble Sulfate Content Test Results ................................................................... 7
Table 5: Observed Groundwater Seepage and Soil Sloughing Conditions .................................. 7
Table 6: Standpipe Piezometer Monitoring Data .......................................................................... 7
Table 7: Estimated Frost Penetration Depth for the Winnipeg Surrounding Areas ....................... 8
Table 8: Raft Foundation Founded on Firm Clay Design Parameters ........................................ 10
Table 9: Raft Foundation Uplift Pressure Parameters ................................................................ 11
Table 10: Foundation Concrete Requirements ........................................................................... 12
Table 11: Lateral Earth Pressure Design Parameters ................................................................ 13

LIST OF APPENDICES

APPENDIX A STATEMENT OF GENERAL CONDITIONS ................................................. A

APPENDIX B SITE PHOTOS ............................................................................................... B

APPENDIX C BOREHOLE LOCATION PLAN ..................................................................... C

APPENDIX D BOREHOLE RECORDS ................................................................................ D

APPENDIX E LABORATORY TESTING RESULTS ............................................................ E

APPENDIX F LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE FIGURE ....................................................... F

ii
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Introduction

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Manitoba Water Services Board (MWSB) has retained Stantec Consulting Ltd. (Stantec) to provide
engineering services for the proposed new reservoir and pumphouse within the Rural Municipality (RM) of
Headingley. As part of the overall project and as requested by Stantec engineer, Brett Ransom, P.Eng., a
geotechnical site investigation was performed to support design recommendations for the proposed
reservoir and pumphouse.

The purpose of the geotechnical investigation was to explore the subsurface soils and groundwater
conditions at the subject site and to provide foundation options and geotechnical design parameters for
the proposed reservoir and pumphouse.

The work that has been performed as part of this geotechnical investigation has included the following:

 Arrange for public and private utility locates at the subject site prior to the site investigation.
 Perform a geotechnical drilling program consisting of a total of two (2) boreholes, soil sampling, and
laboratory testing to identify the existing soil and groundwater conditions at the site; and,
 Prepare a geotechnical report (this report) including:
 Methodology of the geotechnical investigation, the subsurface stratigraphy at the borehole
locations, groundwater depths as observed in the boreholes during drilling, and a site plan
indicating the approximate borehole locations;
 Borehole records and laboratory test results;
 Frost considerations and estimation of frost penetration depth;
 Foundation recommendations within the Limit States Design framework for the proposed
reservoir and pumphouse;
 Lateral earth pressure design parameters for below grade walls;
 Recommendations for temporary excavations, backfilling, and dewatering;
 Recommendations regarding use of sulphate-resistant cement for foundation concrete;
 Site Class recommendation for seismic response as per 2020 National Building Code of Canada
(NBCC); and,
 Recommendations for geotechnical related design review, construction monitoring, and testing.

Use of this report is subject to the Statement of General Conditions provided in Appendix A.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 1
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Site Description and Proposed construction

2.0 SITE DESCRIPTION AND PROPOSED CONSTRUCTION

2.1 PROJECT INFORMATION

The project site is located in the RM of Headingley, Manitoba. The proposed development will include a
new reservoir and pumphouse structure. It is our understanding that the proposed reservoir and
pumphouse structure will have a footprint of approximately 44.0 m by 25.0 m, with the top of the proposed
reservoir approximately 1.4 m above existing grade, the base of the proposed reservoir approximately 3.7
m below existing grade, and the base of the proposed pump chamber approximately 4.8 m below existing
grade. It is our understanding that the proposed reservoir will be constructed on a cast-in-place concrete
raft foundation with the bearing surface at approximate Elev. 233.85 m and the pump chamber bearing
surface at approximate Elev. 232.75 m. It is our understanding that drawings of the proposed reservoir
and pumphouse were not available at the time of preparation of this report.

Site photos taken during the field investigation are included in Appendix B.

2.2 TOPOGRAPHY
A detailed topographic survey was completed by Stantec at the proposed reservoir and pumphouse
location. Generally, the topography of the project site was observed to be relatively flat at approximate
Elev. 237.5 m_. The detailed topographic survey data that was reviewed was provided by the Stantec
water design team and is not included in this report.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 2
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Investigation Program

3.0 INVESTIGATION PROGRAM

The investigation program for this project consisted of a geotechnical drilling and sampling program, and
a laboratory testing program which is outlined in the following subsections.

3.1 UTILITY CLEARANCES

Prior to completing the geotechnical drilling and sampling program, Stantec coordinated with Click Before
You Dig Manitoba and the RM of Headingley Public Works to locate the public utility services at the
proposed drilling locations. Structure Scan Inc. was also retained to locate potential private utility services
at the proposed drilling locations.

3.2 DRILLING AND SAMPLING PROGRAM

The geotechnical drilling and sampling program was performed on May 2, 2024, with drilling services
provided by Paddock Drilling Ltd. under the continuous supervision of Stantec geotechnical personnel. A
total of two (2) boreholes were drilled on the project site using a track mounted Acker SS3 drill rig. The
boreholes were drilled within the footprint of the proposed reservoir and pumphouse at locations selected
by Brett Ransom, P.Eng. (Stantec Water Engineer). The boreholes were drilled to power auger refusal,
which occurred at a depth of 8.8 m and 9.5 m in BH24-01 and BH24-02, respectively. The approximate
borehole locations are shown on the Borehole Location Plan provided in Appendix C.

The drilling program consisted of advancing 125 mm diameter solid stem augers through the topsoil and
native overburden materials. Soil stratigraphy (i.e., soil type, texture, moisture, color, etc.) in each
borehole was logged in the field. Soil stratigraphy was described using the Unified Soil Classification
System (USCS). Overburden soil samples were retrieved directly from auger flights at 0.75 to 1.5 m
intervals. One (1) Shelby tube sample was also collected at a depth of 2.4 m in borehole BH24-02.
Cohesive soil samples were tested using a field torvane to estimate the undrained shear strength of the
soil. All samples were visually inspected in the field for material types and transferred to our Winnipeg
laboratory for further inspection and testing.

A description of the soil stratigraphy is as given within Section 4.1 of this report and on the detailed
borehole logs enclosed in Appendix D. Appendix D also includes summary sheets outlining the symbols
and terms used on the borehole records.

3.3 LABORATORY TESTING

A laboratory testing program was performed on select soil samples from the drilling program to evaluate
the relevant engineering properties of the subsurface materials relative to the foundation assessment.
Index testing included moisture contents on all collected soil samples (ASTM D2216), as well as particle
size analyses (AASHTO T88), Atterberg limits (ASTM D4318), unconfined compressive strength (ASTM

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 3
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Investigation Program

D2166), unit weight of soil (ASTM D7263) and water-soluble sulfate content (CSA A23.2) on select
representative soil samples. The results of the laboratory testing excluding unconfined compressive
strength, unit weight and water-soluble sulfate are shown on the detailed borehole records located within
Appendix D. All laboratory testing results sheets are included in Appendix E.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 4
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Investigation Results

4.0 INVESTIGATION RESULTS

The subsurface conditions were based on the investigation results obtained during the field investigation
and laboratory testing program. The pertinent results from these programs are summarized in the
following sections.

4.1 STRATIGRAPHY
In general, the stratigraphy of the boreholes drilled at the site consisted of a surficial layer of topsoil
overlying clay, overlying silt till. A description of the soil stratigraphy is summarized below and on the
detailed borehole records included in Appendix D. Also included in Appendix D are summary sheets
outlining the symbols and terms used on the borehole records.

4.1.1 Topsoil

A layer of topsoil was encountered at the surface of all boreholes (BH24-01 to BH24-02). The topsoil
consisted of black clayey sand with high organic content. The thickness of the topsoil was approximately
100 mm.

4.1.2 Fat Clay (CH)

Clay was encountered below the topsoil and extended to a depth of 6.2 m and 6.1 m in BH24-01 and
BH24-02, respectively (Elev. 231.3 m and 231.4 m). The clay was brown in colour, silty, and contained
trace sand. The moisture content of the clay ranged from 29% to 57%. From field torvane testing
performed, the undrained shear strength of the clay ranged from 37 kPa to 88 kPa, classifying the clay as
firm to stiff in consistency. The undrained shear strength of the clay generally decreased with depth in the
boreholes.

From Atterberg Limits testing completed on samples from BH23-01 at 0.9 m and 1.5 m, the clay had a
Liquid Limit ranging from 89 to 91 and Plasticity Index ranging from 61 to 64, classifying the clay as fat
(i.e. of high plasticity).

4.1.3 Sandy Silt Till (ML)

A layer of sandy silt till was encountered below the fat clay in all boreholes (BH24-01 and BH24-02). The
sandy silt till extended to the explored depth in the boreholes. The sandy silt till was tan in colour, inferred
to be dense to very dense, clayey and contained trace gravel. The moisture content of the sandy silt till
ranged from 12% to 21%. Although not observed during the investigation, cobbles and boulders are
thought to be present in the sandy silt till layer. Auger refusal was encountered within the sandy silt till at
depths ranging from 8.8 m to 9.5 m (Elev. 228.0 m to 228.7 m).

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 5
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Investigation Results

4.2 LABORATORY TEST RESULTS

A laboratory testing program was performed on select soil samples from the drilling program to evaluate
the relevant engineering properties of the subsurface materials relative to the foundation assessment.
Index testing included moisture contents on all collected soil samples (ASTM D2216), as well as particle
size analyses (AASHTO T88), Atterberg limits (ASTM D4318), unconfined compressive strength (ASTM
D2166), unit weight of soil (ASTM D7263) and water-soluble sulfate content (CSA A23.2) on select
representative soil samples. A summary of particle size analyses, Atterberg limits, Unconfined
Compressive Strength, unit weight and water-soluble sulfate content test results are shown in Table 1,
Table 2, Table 3 and Table 4 below. Moisture content, particle size analyses and Atterberg limits tests
results are also shown on the borehole records included within Appendix D. The laboratory summary
sheets for all testing performed have been included within Appendix E.

Table 1: Particle Size Analysis Results

Particle Size
Sample
Borehole Gravel (%)
Depth Soil Type Sand (%) < 4.75 Silt (%) < 0.075 Clay (%)
No. 75 to 4.75
(m) to 0.075 mm to 0.002 mm < 0.002 mm
mm
BH24-01 0.9 Fat Clay (CH) 0.0 1.0 21.5 77.5
BH24-01 1.5 Fat Clay (CH) 0.0 0.4 21.9 77.7
Sandy Silt Till
BH24-02 6.4 7.8 22.5 46.2 23.5
(ML)

Table 2: Atterberg Limits Test Result

Borehole Sample Plasticity

Soil Type Liquid Limit Plastic Limit Activity
No. Depth (m) Index
BH24-01 0.9 Fat Clay (CH) 89 28 61 0.79
BH24-01 1.5 Fat Clay (CH) 91 27 64 0.82

Table 3: Unconfined Compressive Strength and Unit Weight Tests Results

Unconfined Approximate
Sample
Borehole Compressive Undrained Dry Unit Water Wet Unit
Depth Soil Type
No. Strength Shear Weight Content Weight
(m)
Strength
Fat Clay
BH24-01 4.6-5.2 127 kPa 64 kPa 12.4 kN/m3 40.7% 17.5 kN/m3
(CH)

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 6
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Investigation Results

Table 4: Water Soluble Sulfate Content Test Results

Borehole Sample
Soil Type Water Soluble Sulfate Content
No. Depth (m)
BH24-01 1.5 Fat Clay (CH) 0.081%

4.3 GROUNDWATER AND SLOUGHING CONDITIONS

Groundwater and soil sloughing conditions were recorded during and upon completion of the drilling of
each borehole. Table 5 summarizes the groundwater seepage and soil sloughing conditions observed in
the boreholes. Groundwater levels were measured upon completion of drilling.

Table 5: Observed Groundwater Seepage and Soil Sloughing Conditions

Observed Depth Depth of Groundwater

Groundwater Observed Depth of Soil
Borehole No. of Groundwater Upon Completion of
Seepage Sloughing (m)
Seepage (m) Drilling (m)
BH24-01 Moderate 6.4 6.3 6.4
BH24-02 Moderate 6.1 5.9 6.1

It should be noted that only short-term seepage and sloughing conditions were observed, and
groundwater levels will normally fluctuate during the year and will be dependent on precipitation and
surface drainage.

4.4 STANDPIPE PIEZOMETER MONITORING RESULTS

A standpipe piezometer was installed in borehole BH24-01. The piezometer was installed to a depth of
8.8 m and was slotted between depths of 5.8 m and 8.8 m. Silica sand was used as backfill around the
slotted portion of the piezometer and the remaining portion was backfilled with bentonite chips. The
recorded groundwater depths below existing grade are provided on Table 6.
Table 6: Standpipe Piezometer Monitoring Data
Date Groundwater Depth at BH23-01
April 2, 2024 4.1 m
May 6, 2024 2.9 m

Standpipe piezometers in silt till type soils generally respond relatively quickly to changes in groundwater
levels, and groundwater level regimes can change frequently during the course of a year. As such, these
measured water level should not be taken to be indicative of the long-term groundwater level at these
sites. It is recommended to monitor the groundwater level within the installed standpipe piezometer prior
to construction of the foundation for the proposed reservoir and pumphouse.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 7
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Geotechnical Recommendations

5.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS

This section outlines the geotechnical recommendations related to the proposed reservoir and
pumphouse structure.

5.1 FROST CONSIDERATIONS

5.1.1 Frost Penetration Depth

The depths of frost penetration have been estimated for a range of annual air freezing indices identified in
Table 7 below. The mean annual freezing index is based on published climate normal from Environment
Canada between 1981 and 2010 for the Winnipeg, Manitoba area. The ten-year return annual freezing
index was calculated using the mean value and recommendations outlined in the Canadian Foundation
Engineering Manual 4th Edition (CFEM), (Canadian Geotechnical Society, 2006). The 50-year return
annual freezing index was inferred from Figure K-5 of the National Building Code of Canada (2010)
Commentary document.

Table 7: Estimated Frost Penetration Depth for the Winnipeg Surrounding Areas

Period
Parameter 10-Year 50-Year
Mean
Return Return
Annual Air Freezing Index (°C-Days) 1,750 2,300 2,375
Estimated Frost Penetration – Clay subgrade, snow cover (m) 1.2 1.4 1.5
Estimated Frost Penetration – Asphalt, no snow Cover (m) 1.9 2.2 2.3
Note: Snow creates an insulating effect limiting the frost penetration depth.

For foundation design considerations, the CFEM recommends using the ten-year return annual freezing
index to predict frost penetration. For design, a potential frost penetration depth of approximately 2.2 m
should be used for the project site. This frost penetration depth only applies to unheated structures.

The United States Army Corp of Engineers (USACE) frost design soil classification system is a widely
used system that places soils in one of four categories. The categories (or Frost Groups), from F1 to F4,
reflect an increase in frost susceptibility and decrease in strength during thaw. The clay materials would
have a frost group rating of F4 and the frost susceptibility classification may be considered as high.

5.2 FOUNDATION DESIGN

Based on the soil and groundwater conditions encountered at the borehole locations and our
understanding of the proposed development, the proposed reservoir and pumphouse may be supported
on a cast-in-place concrete raft foundation.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 8
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Geotechnical Recommendations

5.2.1 Limit States Design

In accordance with the 2020 National Building Code of Canada (NBCC), the use of Limit States Design is
required for the design of buildings and their structural components including foundations. The limit states
of LSD are classified into two groups; the Ultimate Limit States (ULS) and the Serviceability Limit States
(SLS).

The ULS case is primarily concerned with the collapse mechanisms for the structure and hence, safety.
For foundation design, the ultimate limit state consists of:

 Exceeding the load-carrying capacity of the foundation;

 Sliding;
 Uplift;
 Large deformation of foundation leading to an ultimate limit state being induced in the superstructure
of building;
 Overturning; and
 Loss of overall stability.

The factored resistance at the ULS is the ultimate geotechnical resistance multiplied by the appropriate
resistance factor outlined in the NBCC. For LSD, the factored resistance must be greater than or equal to
the factored applied load as per the following general equation:

Φ Rn ≥ ∑i αi Sni

Where,

Φ = geotechnical resistance factor at ULS

Rn = ultimate geotechnical resistance
αi = load factor at ULS
Sni = load effect at ULS

The SLS case considers mechanisms that restrict or constrain the intended use of the occupancy of the
structure. These are typically associated with movements that interrupt or hinder the purpose of the
structure. For foundation design, the serviceability limit state consists of:

 Excessive movements; and

 Unacceptable vibrations.

The SLS case is addressed by determining the maximum available resistance to keep the foundation
under service loads within tolerable limits as provided by the structural engineer. Unfactored permanent
and transitory loads are used for calculating total deformation in non-cohesive soils. Unfactored
permanent loads and appropriate portions of transitory loads are used for the initial and time-dependent
deformations of cohesive soils. Therefore, the foundation loads and serviceability tolerances must be
known to properly determine the SLS resistance values. In cases where tolerable movements are not

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 9
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Geotechnical Recommendations

provided by the structural engineer, the tolerable limit of total settlement for foundations subject to
compression is typically assumed to be 25 mm.

5.2.2 Cast-in-Place Concrete Raft Foundation

Based on the preliminary information provided by Stantec’s water design team, we understand that the
new reservoir and pumphouse will be approximately 44.0 m by 25.0 m, with the top of the proposed
reservoir approximately 1.4 m above existing grade and the base of the reservoir approximately 3.7 m
below existing grade (Elev. 233.85 m). The pump chamber base slab will be approximately 4.8 m below
the existing grade (Elev. 232.75 m).

Based on the soil conditions encountered in the boreholes, the soil conditions below at depths of 3.7 m
(Elev. 233.85 m) and 4.8 m (Elev. 232.75 m) consists of firm fat clay. A cast-in-place concrete raft
foundation constructed on firm fat clay may be designed based on the design parameters included in
Table 8.

Table 8: Raft Foundation Founded on Firm Clay Design Parameters

Factored Bearing Serviceability

Bearing Surface Resistance, Limit Pressure
Structure Soil Type
Elevation
ϕ = 0.5 (ULS) ϕ = 1 (SLS)
Reservoir/Pumphouse 233.85/232.75 m Fat Clay (CH) 120 kPa 80 kPa

The resistance factor ‘ϕ’ used for bearing resistance calculations was 0.5 as outlined in the NBCC. The
Serviceability Limit Pressure (SLS) presented in Table 8 above is based on foundation loads for the
proposed reservoir not exceeding a total settlement of 25 mm.

The most recent groundwater level as of the date of preparation of this report was recorded at 2.9 m
below existing grade (corresponding elevation 234.6 m) at the location of the standpipe piezometer
installed at borehole BH24-01. In this respect, required excavations for the reservoir and pumphouse will
be below the monitored groundwater level and may therefore encounter groundwater seepage/infiltration.
More information regarding potential dewatering and temporary excavations are provided in Section 7.0
and Section 8.0.

Construction of the raft slab should be in accordance with the following:

 Construction equipment should not be allowed to travel directly on the raft bearing surface. To
minimize disturbance of the bearing surface, the reservoir designer should specify the method of
excavation to be used at the foundation level.
 All disturbed soils must be removed from the bearing surface for the raft foundation. The bearing
surface should not be exposed to excessive wetting or drying during construction.
 The reservoir designer should consider specifying the placement of a 75 mm thick mud slab (non-
reinforced 0.5 MPa concrete slab) on the bearing surface upon completion of excavation to minimize

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 10
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Geotechnical Recommendations

exposure to moisture and prevent disturbance of the subgrade during construction of the raft
foundation.
 Remove any soft or unsuitable materials if encountered at the bearing elevation.
 The bearing surface should be inspected by qualified geotechnical personnel prior to placement of
the mud slab (if used) and/or the raft slab.

Construction under freezing conditions is not recommended. If construction takes place during freezing
conditions, measures must be taken to prevent frost penetration beneath the raft foundation bearing
surface. Frost heave of the subgrade soil and/or subsequent thaw settlements may potentially occur if it is
exposed to freezing temperatures.

5.2.2.1 Buoyancy Uplift

Potential uplift due to buoyancy of the reservoir structure should be checked, particularly during
construction, when foundation loads will be less than the design loads. The potential uplift pressure for
various bearing surface elevations is provided Table 9, with the water table conservatively assumed at
the ground surface (approximate Elev. 237.5 m) and raft slab bearing depths assumed at 3.7 m below
existing grade (approximate Elev. 233.8 m) for the reservoir and 4.8 m below existing grade (approximate
Elev. 232.7 m) for the pumphouse.

Table 9: Raft Foundation Uplift Pressure Parameters

Unfactored Uplift Pressure Due to

Bearing Surface Elevation Bearing Surface Depth
Buoyance
233.8 m 3.7 m 37 kPa
232.7 m 4.8 m 48 kPa

5.3 FOUNDATION CONCRETE

One representative sample of the native soils was submitted to CARO Analytical Services in Kelowna,
British Columbia for analysis of the water-soluble sulfate concentration. The test was completed to
determine the potential for degradation of the concrete in the presence of soluble sulfates. The results of
the analyses are shown in Table 10.Based on the test results, the class of exposure for concrete in
contact with clay soil is considered to be severe (S-2 in CSA A23.1-09). The requirements for concrete
exposed to severe sulphate attack are provided in Table 10 below.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 11
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Geotechnical Recommendations

Table 10: Foundation Concrete Requirements

Parameter Design Requirement

Class of exposure S-2
Compressive strength 32 MPa at 56 days
Air content to be determined depending on exposure to
Air content freezing and thawing and maximum sizes of coarse
aggregate, as per CSA A23.1-14, Table 2 and Table 4
Water-to-cementing materials ratio 0.45 max.
Cement Type HS or HSb
Concrete in contact with the native soils should meet the above requirements.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 12
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Subsurface Structures and Lateral Earth Pressure

6.0 SUBSURFACE STRUCTURES AND LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE

Below grade structures will be subjected to lateral forces created by soils acting along the structural walls.
The below grade reservoir and pumphouse walls must be designed to resist lateral earth pressures. The
forces resulting from lateral earth pressures must be resisted and accounted for in the structural design.
Lateral earth pressures must also be resisted by temporary shoring systems during construction. Design
of temporary shoring systems are not included in the scope of work and must be designed by others.
Estimates of the geotechnical parameters for the use in the design of permanent below grade walls are
provided in Table 11.

Table 11: Lateral Earth Pressure Design Parameters

Lateral Earth
Angle of
Soil Unit Pressure
Soil Type Internal
Weight Coefficient at
Friction, ɸ
Rest, Ko
Granular Backfill 22.0 kN/m³ 34° 0.44

The recommended lateral earth pressure distributions against the walls of proposed buried substructures
are presented on the figure included in Appendix F.

The proposed subsurface structures should be designed to resist lateral soil pressures from the wall
backfill material. For purposes of this report, it has been assumed that the wall backfill will consist of
crushed, free-draining granular backfill material (i.e. gravel). If other backfill material is considered (such
as clay), Stantec should be contacted for additional recommendations. Due to the rigidity of the proposed
concrete subsurface structures (i.e. structurally connected members), it is recommended that the walls be
designed for static earth pressures assuming an “at-rest” pressure distribution over the full length of the
embedded wall, where Ko is the “at-rest” earth pressure coefficient (static earth pressure distribution
shown as “Ps” on the figure in Appendix F).

Compaction induced lateral pressures should also be included (shown as Pc on the figure in Appendix
F). The stresses resulting from compaction should vary linearly from 20 kPa at the ground surface to 0
kPa at a depth of 1.7 m below grade.

If surcharge loadings are present within a distance equal to the buried depth of the wall, additional
horizontal earth pressures resulting from the surcharge must be included (shown as Pq on the figure in
Appendix F).

If a permanent drainage system is not provided at the base of the wall, the full hydrostatic pressure
should be considered for the design of below grade walls (shown as Pw on the figure in Appendix F). A
clay cap with a minimum thickness of 300 mm should be placed at the final ground surface to prevent
surface water infiltration.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 13
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Subsurface Structures and Lateral Earth Pressure

Applicable load factors should be applied to the lateral earth pressures in accordance with the Limit
States Design framework and governing code (e.g. National Building Code of Canada).

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 14
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Dewatering

7.0 DEWATERING

It is our understanding that excavations for the proposed reservoir and pumphouse will be potentially
below the existing groundwater level and therefore dewatering may be required. Regardless of the
excavation method chosen, appropriate dewatering techniques must be considered by the Contractor
during excavation for below-grade structures.

Based on the existing clay soils, it is anticipated that the contractor can utilize conventional dewatering
techniques such as a sump and pumps to control any groundwater seepage during excavations for the
proposed reservoir and pumphouse. If the groundwater seepage can not be controlled, the contractor
should hire a professional engineer to calculate the amount of the dewatering required. Dewatering
design was not part of our scope of work and therefore is not included in this report.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 15
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Temporary Excavations

8.0 TEMPORARY EXCAVATIONS

Temporary excavations will be required for construction of the proposed reservoir and pumphouse. The
stability of temporary excavations is a function of several factors, including but not limited to, the total time
the excavation is exposed, moisture conditions, soil type and consistency, and the contractor’s
operations. It is the responsibility of the contractor to maintain safe and stable slopes or design and
provide suitable shoring during construction for temporary excavations at this site. Based on the relatively
high groundwater conditions, elevation of the underlying till material, and proposed excavation depths, the
potential for basal heave should also be considered for temporary excavations at this site.

The design of excavation slopes must also recognize the presence of water-bearing layers that may be
encountered during excavation (see Section 7.0). The introduction of excessive moisture will often result
in unstable excavation conditions, therefore excavated slopes should be protected from wetting and
weathering by suitable temporary covering. Surface drainage should ensure surface water is directed
away from the excavation. As a preliminary guideline, it is recommended that a minimum side slope of
1H:1V be maintained for excavations no deeper than 1.5 m, however, it is the responsibility of the
contractor to retain the services of a professional engineer to design a suitable shoring system or
establish safe side slopes for excavations as required. All excavation works must comply with the
Province of Manitoba Workplace Safety and Health Act and Safework Guide for Excavation Work.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 16
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Seismic Site Classification

9.0 SEISMIC SITE CLASSIFICATION

As per the 2020 NBCC, the Seismic Site Class is based on the average shear wave velocity of the
ground profile within the top 30 m. In accordance with the 2020 NBCC, when shear wave velocities
calculated from in-situ measurements are not available (as per this case), the Seismic Site Class can be
assessed based on soil properties within the top 30 m. The soil properties from the borehole records and
the ground profile criteria in Table 4.1.8.4.-B of the 2020 NBCC were considered to assess the Seismic
Site Class. From the available information, the Seismic Site Class may be considered “Site Class D” (stiff
soil).

Seismic Hazard Values specific to the project location and associated with this Seismic Site Class can be
obtained using Earthquakes Canada’s “2020 National Building Code of Canada Seismic Hazard Tool”.
Seismic design parameters associated with the above recommended Seismic Site Class should be
reviewed by a structural engineer and incorporated into the design as required by the 2020 NBCC.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 17
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Design Review, Construction Monitoring and Testing

10.0 DESIGN REVIEW, CONSTRUCTION MONITORING AND

TESTING

Stantec should be retained to review the foundation plans and specifications for conformance with the
intent of this report. During construction, the designer should consider that a representative from our firm
be involved with the following tasks:

 Inspection of subgrade conditions for the raft foundation;

 Testing of concrete;

The purpose of the foundation and subgrade inspection services would be to provide Stantec the
opportunity to observe the soil conditions encountered during construction, evaluate the applicability of
the information presented in this report to the soil conditions encountered, and provide appropriate
changes in design or construction procedures if conditions differ from those described herein. The
purpose of the concrete testing is to review compliance with the recommendations made in this report
and specification requirements.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 18
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Summary

11.0 SUMMARY

Stantec was retained to provide engineering services to support the development of the proposed
reservoir and pumphouse within the RM of Headingley, Manitoba. As a part of the overall project, a
geotechnical investigation was completed to support the design of the proposed reservoir and
pumphouse.

A total of two (2) boreholes were drilled at the project site on April 2, 2024. Boreholes BH24-01 and
BH24-02 were drilled within the footprint of the proposed reservoir to power auger refusal depths of 8.8 m
and 9.5 m, respectively.

The soil stratigraphy, as interpreted from the borehole records and laboratory test results, consisted of a
of a surficial layer of topsoil overlying fat clay, overlying silt till. A laboratory testing program was
completed and included moisture contents, Atterberg limits, particle size analyses, unit weight,
unconfined compressive strength and water-soluble sulfate tests.

Based on the soil and groundwater conditions encountered at the borehole locations advanced for the
proposed reservoir, the proposed reservoir and pumphouse may be supported on a cast-in-place
concrete raft foundation installed at depths of 3.7 m and 4.8 below grade for the reservoir and pump
chamber slabs, respectively. The placement of a 75 mm thick mud slab (non-reinforced 0.5 MPa concrete
slab) on the bearing surface should be considered upon completion of excavation to minimize exposure
to moisture and prevent disturbance of the clay during construction of the raft foundation.

Soil sloughing and groundwater seepage may be encountered during the temporary excavations for this
project and therefore considerations for temporary excavation stability and groundwater management
should be accounted for by the Contractor during construction.

The seismic site class in accordance with the NBCC has been reviewed and is recommended to be “Site
Class D” (stiff soil).

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 19
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Closure

12.0 CLOSURE

This report has been prepared for the sole benefit of Stantec Consulting Ltd. and its agents, and may not
be used by any third party without the express written consent of Stantec Consulting Ltd. Any use, which
a third party makes of this report, is the responsibility of such third party. Use of this report is subject to
the Statement of General Conditions provided in Appendix A. It is the responsibility of Stantec
Consulting Ltd. who is identified as “the Client” within the Statement of General Conditions, and its agents
to review the conditions and to notify Stantec Consulting Ltd. should any of these not be satisfied. The
Statement of General Conditions addresses the following:

 Use of the report

 Basis of the report
 Standard of care
 Interpretation of site conditions
 Varying or unexpected site conditions
 Planning, design, or construction

We trust the above information meets with your present requirements. Should you have any questions or
require further information, please contact us. This report has been prepared by Farouk Fourar Laidi,
M.Sc., P.Eng., and reviewed by Rhett Bonham, M.Eng., P.Eng.

We appreciate the opportunity to assist you in this project.

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx 20
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Appendix A Statement of General Conditions

Appendix A STATEMENT OF GENERAL CONDITIONS

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx A
 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR
Appendix A Statement of General Conditions

USE OF THIS REPORT: This professional work product (“hereinafter referred to as the Report”) has been
prepared for the sole benefit of the Client in accordance with Stantec’s contract with the Client. While the
Report may be provided by the Client to applicable authorities having jurisdiction and to other third parties in
connection with the project, Stantec disclaims any legal duty based upon warranty, reliance, or any other
theory to any third party, and will not be liable to such third party for any damages or losses of any kind that
may result.

BASIS OF THIS REPORT: This Report relates solely to the site-specific project for which Stantec was
retained and the stated purpose for which the Report was prepared. The information, opinions, conclusions
and/or recommendations made in this Report are in accordance with Stantec’s present understanding of the
site-specific project as described by the Client. The applicability of these is restricted to the site conditions
encountered at the time the scope of work was conducted and do not take into account any subsequent
changes. If the proposed site-specific project differs or is modified from what is described in this Report or if
the site conditions are altered, this Report is no longer valid unless Stantec is requested by the Client to
review and revise the Report to reflect the differing or modified project specifics and/or the altered site
conditions. This Report is not to be used or relied on for any variation or extension of the project, or for any
other project or purpose or site, and any unauthorized use or reliance is at the recipient’s own risk.

STANDARD OF CARE: Preparation of this Report, and all associated work, was carried out in accordance
with the normally accepted standard of care in the state or province of execution for the specific professional
service provided to the Client. No other warranty is made.

PROVIDED INFORMATION: Stantec has assumed all information received from the Client and third parties
in the preparation of this Report to be correct. While Stantec has exercised a customary level of judgment or
due diligence in the use of such information, Stantec assumes no responsibility for the consequences of any
error or omission contained therein.

INTERPRETATION OF SITE CONDITIONS: Soil, rock, or other material descriptions, and statements
regarding their condition, made in this Report are based on site conditions encountered by Stantec at the
time of the scope of work and at the specific testing and/or sampling locations. Classifications and
statements of condition have been made in accordance with normally accepted practices which are
judgmental in nature; no specific description should be considered exact, but rather reflective of the
anticipated material behaviour. Extrapolation of in-situ conditions can only be made to some limited extent
beyond the sampling or test points. The extent depends on variability of the soil, rock and groundwater
conditions as influenced by geological processes, construction activity, and site use.

VARYING OR UNEXPECTED CONDITIONS: Should any site or subsurface conditions be encountered that
are different from those described in this Report or encountered at the test and/or sample locations, Stantec
must be notified immediately to assess if the varying or unexpected conditions are substantial and if
reassessments of the Report conclusions or recommendations are required. Stantec will not be responsible
to any party for damages incurred as a result of failing to notify Stantec that differing site or subsurface
conditions are present upon becoming aware of such conditions.

PLANNING, DESIGN, OR CONSTRUCTION: Development or design plans and specifications should be

reviewed by Stantec geotechnical engineers, sufficiently ahead of initiating the next project stage (e.g.,
property acquisition, tender, construction, etc.), to confirm that this Report completely addresses the
elaborated project specifics and that the contents of this Report have been properly interpreted. Specialty
quality assurance services (e.g., field observations and testing) during construction are a necessary part of
the evaluation of subsurface conditions and site work. Site work relating to the recommendations included in
this Report should only be carried out in the presence of a qualified geotechnical engineer; Stantec cannot
be responsible for site work carried out without being present.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Appendix B Site Photos

Appendix B SITE PHOTOS

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx B
Photograph 1 – Project Site Looking South

Photograph 2 – Drilling Borehole BH24-01

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Appendix C Borehole Location Plan

Appendix C BOREHOLE LOCATION PLAN

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx C
 KEY PLAN N SITE PLAN N

N.T.S N.T.S
AIRPORT

HEADINGLEY
WEST WOOD THE HEADINGLEY G
RAND TRUNK TRAIL

HACIENDA

SITE

BH24-01
axar ©CNES (2024) Distribution Airbus DS

BH24-02

AD
RO
BOREHOLE LOCATION TABLE (UTM 14 U)

ALL
ID NORTHING (m) EASTING (m) ELEVATION (m)

CK
BH24-01 5523008 620028 237.5

RO
BH24-02 5523005 619986 237.5

Client/Project Title

STANTEC CONSULTING LTD. BOREHOLE LOCATION

PLAN
HEADINGLEY SECOND
For Report AA FF 2024.05.01 RESERVOIR Revision Date
By Appd YYYY.MM.DD
Stantec Consulting Ltd.
500 - 311 Portage Avenue
Issued 0 2024/05/01
Winnipeg MB R3B 2B9 Project No. Reference Sheet Figure No.
Tel: (204) 489-5900
www.stantec.com
File Name: HEADINGLEY_SECOND_RESERVOIR
Project Number: 111220838
AA
Dwn.
-
Dsgn.
FF
Chkd.
2024.05.01
YYYY.MM.DD 111220838 - 1
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Appendix D Borehole Records

Appendix D BOREHOLE RECORDS

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx D
 SYMBOLS AND TERMS USED ON BOREHOLE AND TEST PIT RECORDS
SOIL DESCRIPTION
Terminology describing common soil genesis

Rootmat vegetation, roots and moss with organic matter and topsoil typically forming a mattress at the ground
surface
Topsoil mixture of soil and humus capable of supporting vegetative growth
Peat mixture of visible and invisible fragments of decayed organic matter
Till unstratified glacial deposit which may range from clay to boulders
Fill material below the surface identified as placed by humans (excluding buried services)

Terminology describing soil structure

Desiccated having visible signs of weathering by oxidization of clay minerals, shrinkage cracks, etc.
Fissured having cracks, and hence a blocky structure
Varved composed of regular alternating layers of silt and clay
Stratified composed of alternating successions of different soil types, e.g. silt and sand
Layer > 75 mm in thickness
Seam 2 mm to 75 mm in thickness
Parting < 2 mm in thickness

Terminology describing soil types

The classification of soil types are made on the basis of grain size and plasticity in accordance with the Unified Soil
Classification System (USCS) (ASTM D 2487 or D 2488) which excludes particles larger than 75 mm. For particles larger than
75 mm, and for defining percent clay fraction in hydrometer results, definitions proposed by Canadian Foundation Engineering
Manual, 4th Edition are used. The USCS provides a group symbol (e.g. SM) and group name (e.g. silty sand) for identification.

Terminology describing cobbles, boulders, and non-matrix materials (organic matter or debris)
Terminology describing materials outside the USCS, (e.g. particles larger than 75 mm, visible organic matter, and construction
debris) is based upon the proportion of these materials present:

Trace, or occasional Less than 10%

Some 10-20%
Frequent > 20%

Terminology describing compactness of cohesionless soils

The standard terminology to describe cohesionless soils includes compactness (formerly "relative density"), as determined by
the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) N-Value - also known as N-Index. The SPT N-Value is described further on Page 2. A
relationship between compactness condition and N-Value is shown in the following table.

Compactness Condition SPT N-Value

Very Loose <4
Loose 4-10
Compact 10-30
Dense 30-50
Very Dense >50

Terminology describing consistency of cohesive soils

The standard terminology to describe cohesive soils includes the consistency, which is based on undrained shear strength as
measured by in situ vane tests, penetrometer tests, or unconfined compression tests. Consistency may be crudely estimated
from SPT N-Value based on the correlation shown in the following table (Terzaghi and Peck, 1967). The correlation to SPT
N-Value is used with caution as it is only very approximate.
Undrained Shear Strength Approximate
Consistency
kg/cm2 or kips/sq.ft. kPa SPT N-Value
Very Soft <0.25 <12.5 <2
Soft 0.25 - 0.5 12.5 - 25 2-4
Firm 0.5 - 1.0 25 - 50 4-8
Stiff 1.0 - 2.0 50 – 100 8-15
Very Stiff 2.0 - 4.0 100 - 200 15-30
Hard >4.0 >200 >30

SYMBOLS AND TERMS USED ON BOREHOLE AND TEST PIT RECORDS – JUNE 2019 Page 1 of 3
STRATA PLOT
Strata plots symbolize the soil or bedrock description. They are combinations of the following basic symbols. The dimensions
within the strata symbols are not indicative of the particle size, layer thickness, etc.

Asphalt Concrete Fill Organics Clay Silt Sand Gravel Undifferentiated Sedimentary Metamorphic Igneous
Cobbles Bedrock Bedrock Bedrock Bedrock
Boulders

SAMPLE TYPE WATER LEVEL

AS, BS, GS Auger sample; bulk sample; grab sample
Measured: in standpipe,
Direct-Push sample (small diameter tube
DP piezometer, or well
sampler hydraulically advanced)
PS Piston sample
SO Sonic tube Inferred: seepage noted, or;
Split spoon sample (obtained by performing the measured during or at
SS
Standard Penetration Test) completion of drilling
ST Shelby Tube or thin wall tube
SV Shear vane
RC Rock Core; samples obtained with the use of
HQ, NQ, BQ, etc. standard size diamond coring bits.

RECOVERY FOR SOIL SAMPLES

The recovery is recorded as the length of the soil sample recovered in the direct push, split spoon sampler, Shelby Tube, or
sonic tube.

N-VALUE
Numbers in this column are the field results of the Standard Penetration Test (SPT): the number of blows of a 140-pound
(63.5 kg) hammer falling 30 inches (760 mm), required to drive a 2 inch (50.8 mm) O.D. split spoon sampler one foot (300 mm)
into the soil. In accordance with ASTM D1586, the N-Value equals the sum of the number of blows (N) required to drive the
sampler over the interval of 6 to 18 in. (150 to 450 mm). However, when a 24 in. (610 mm) sampler is used, the number of
blows (N) required to drive the sampler over the interval of 12 to 24 in. (300 to 610 mm) may be reported if this value is lower.
For split spoon samples where insufficient penetration was achieved and N-Values cannot be presented, the number of blows
are reported over sampler penetration in millimetres (e.g. 50 for 75 mm or 50/75 mm). Some design methods make use of N-
values corrected for various factors such as overburden pressure, energy ratio, borehole diameter, etc. No corrections have
been applied to the N-values presented on the log.

DYNAMIC CONE PENETRATION TEST (DCPT)

Dynamic cone penetration tests are performed using a standard 60-degree apex cone connected to ‘A’ size drill rods with the
same standard fall height and weight as the Standard Penetration Test. The DCPT value is the number of blows of the hammer
required to drive the cone one foot (300 mm) into the soil. The DCPT is used as a probe to assess soil variability.

OTHER TESTS

S Sieve analysis Single packer permeability test; test

H Hydrometer analysis interval from depth shown to bottom of
k Laboratory permeability borehole
γ Unit weight
Gs Specific gravity of soil particles Double packer permeability test; test
interval as indicated
CD Consolidated drained triaxial
Consolidated undrained triaxial with pore pressure
CU
measurements Falling head permeability test using
UU Unconsolidated undrained triaxial casing
DS Direct Shear
C Consolidation Falling head permeability test using well
Qu Unconfined compression point or piezometer
Point Load Index (Ip on Borehole Record equals Ip(50) in
Ip which the index is corrected to a reference diameter of
50 mm)
SYMBOLS AND TERMS USED ON BOREHOLE AND TEST PIT RECORDS – JUNE 2019 Page 2 of 3
ROCK DESCRIPTION
Except where specified below, terminology for describing rock is as defined by the International Society for Rock Mechanics
(ISRM) 2007 publication “The Complete ISRM Suggested Methods for Rock Characterization, Testing and Monitoring: 1974-
2006”
Total Core Recovery (TCR) denotes the sum of all measurable rock core recovered in one drill run. The value is noted as a
percentage of recovered rock core based on the total length of the drill run.
Solid Core Recovery (SCR) is defined as total length of solid core divided by the total drilled length, presented as a
percentage. Solid core is defined as core with one full diameter.
Rock Quality Designation (RQD) is a modified core recovery that incorporates only pieces of solid core that are equal to or
greater than 10 cm (4”) along the core axis. It is calculated as the total cumulative length of solid core (> 10 cm) as measured
along the centerline of the core divided by the total length of borehole drilled for each drill run or geotechnical interval,
presented as a percentage. RQD is determined in accordance with ASTM D6032.
Fracture Index (FI) is defined as the number of naturally occurring fractures within a given length of core. The Fracture Index
is reported as a simple count of natural occurring fractures.

Terminology describing rock quality

Rock Quality Designation
Rock Mass Quality Alternate (Colloquial) Rock Mass Quality
Number (RQD)
Very Poor Quality 0-25 Very Severely Fractured Crushed
Poor Quality 25-50 Severely Fractured Shattered or Very Blocky
Fair Quality 50-75 Fractured Blocky
Good Quality 75-90 Moderately Jointed Sound
Excellent Quality 90-100 Intact Very Sound

Terminology describing rock strength

Strength Classification Grade Unconfined Compressive Strength (MPa)
Extremely Weak R0 <1
Very Weak R1 1–5
Weak R2 5 – 25
Medium Strong R3 25 – 50
Strong R4 50 – 100
Very Strong R5 100 – 250
Extremely Strong R6 >250

Terminology describing rock weathering

Term Symbol Description
No visible signs of rock weathering. Slight discoloration along major
Fresh W1
discontinuities
Discoloration indicates weathering of rock on discontinuity surfaces. All the
Slightly W2
rock material may be discolored.
Moderately W3 Less than half the rock is decomposed and/or disintegrated into soil.
Highly W4 More than half the rock is decomposed and/or disintegrated into soil.
All the rock material is decomposed and/or disintegrated into soil. The original
Completely W5
mass structure is still largely intact.
Residual Soil W6 All the rock converted to soil. Structure and fabric destroyed.

Terminology describing rock with respect to discontinuity and bedding spacing

Spacing (mm) Discontinuities Spacing Bedding
>6000 Extremely Wide -
2000-6000 Very Wide Very Thick
600-2000 Wide Thick
200-600 Moderate Medium
60-200 Close Thin
20-60 Very Close Very Thin
<20 Extremely Close Laminated
<6 - Thinly Laminated

SYMBOLS AND TERMS USED ON BOREHOLE AND TEST PIT RECORDS – JUNE 2019 Page 3 of 3
 BOREHOLE RECORD BH24-01
CLIENT: Stantec Consulting Ltd. BH COORDINATES PROJECT NO.: 111220838
PROJECT: Headingley Second Reservoir [NAD83] BH ELEVATION: 237.549m
LOCATION: RM of Headingley, MB 5523008 N 620028 E DATUM: NAD 83
DATE BORED: April 02 2024 WATER LEVEL: 2.9 m on May 6, 2024
UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, Cu (kPa)
SAMPLES
ELEVATION (m)

ELEVATION (m)
LABORATORY TEST FIELD VANE TEST

STRATA PLOT
DEPTH (m)

POCKET PENETROMETER POCKET SHEAR VANE

RECOVERY (mm)

BACKFILL
SOIL DESCRIPTION OTHER TESTS / 50 kPa 100 kPa 150 kPa 200 kPa

or RQD %
or TCR %
N-VALUE
NUMBER
(MUSCS) REMARKS

TYPE
WP W WL
WATER CONTENT & ATTERBERG LIMITS
SPT (N-value) BLOWS/0.3m
Water Content (%) and Blow Count
237.5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0
TOPSOIL: black clayey sand with high
237.4
organic content AS
Stiff brown fat CLAY (CH) 237
- silty, trace sand
1 AS Sieve/Hydro at 0.9 m
G S M C
0% 1% 22% 78%

AS Sieve/Hydro at 1.5 m
>> 236
G S M C
0% 0% 22% 78%
2

AS
- firm below 2.4 m 235

3 AS

234

4 AS

233
AS

232

6
231.3 AS
Dense tan sandy silt TILL (ML)
- clayey, trace gravel 231

7 AS
5/13/24

230
AS

8
Printed May 13 2024 02:43:04 SOIL 111220838_HEADINGLEY_LIFT_STATION.GPJ

- very dense below 8.0 m AS

229
228.7 AS
9 End of Borehole
• Auger refusal at a depth of 8.8 m on very dense silt till.
• The soil was frozen to a depth of 0.6 m.
• Moderate groundwater seepage was observed at a depth of 6.4 m.
228
• The groundwater level was observed at a depth of 6.3 m upon completion of drilling.
• Soil sloughing was observed at a depth of 6.4 m upon completion of drilling.
10 • A standpipe pieometer was installed, slotted between 5.8 m and 8.8 m
• Borehole backfilled with auger cuttings and bentonite chips .

227

11

226

12
Water Level Observed During Drilling Drilling Contractor: Paddock Drilling Ltd. Logged By: RK
Water Level Measured On Date Indicated
BACKFILL SYMBOL ASPHALT GROUT CONCRETE Drilling Method: 125 mm SSA Reviewed By: FL
BENTONITE DRILL CUTTINGS SAND SLOUGH Completion Depth: 8.8 m Page 1 of 1
 BOREHOLE RECORD BH24-02
CLIENT: Stantec Consulting Ltd. BH COORDINATES PROJECT NO.: 111220838
PROJECT: Headingley Second Reservoir [NAD83] BH ELEVATION: 237.526m
LOCATION: RM of Headingley, MB 5523005 N 619986 E DATUM: NAD 83
DATE BORED: April 02 2024 WATER LEVEL: N/A
UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH, Cu (kPa)
SAMPLES
ELEVATION (m)

ELEVATION (m)
LABORATORY TEST FIELD VANE TEST

STRATA PLOT
DEPTH (m)

POCKET PENETROMETER POCKET SHEAR VANE

RECOVERY (mm)

BACKFILL
SOIL DESCRIPTION OTHER TESTS / 50 kPa 100 kPa 150 kPa 200 kPa

or RQD %
or TCR %
N-VALUE
NUMBER
(MUSCS) REMARKS

TYPE
WP W WL
WATER CONTENT & ATTERBERG LIMITS
SPT (N-value) BLOWS/0.3m
Water Content (%) and Blow Count
237.5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
0
TOPSOIL: black clayey sand with high
237.4
organic content AS
Stiff brown fat CLAY (CH) 237
- silty, trace sand
1 AS

AS 236

AS
- firm below 2.4 m 235
ST

3 AS

234

4 AS

233
AS

232

6 231.4 AS
Dense tan sandy silt TILL (ML)
- clayey, trace gravel AS Sieve/Hydro at 6.4 m 231
G S M C
8% 23% 46% 24%

7
5/13/24

230

8
Printed May 13 2024 02:43:24 SOIL 111220838_HEADINGLEY_LIFT_STATION.GPJ

AS

229

9
- very dense below 9.0 m
AS
228.0
228
End of Borehole
• Auger refusal at a depth of 9.5 m on very dense silt till.
10 • The soil was frozen to a depth of 0.6 m.
• Moderate groundwater seepage was observed at a depth of 6.1 m.
• The groundwater level was observed at a depth of 5.9 m upon completion of drilling.
• Soil sloughing was observed at a depth of 6.1 m upon completion of drilling. 227
• Borehole backfilled with auger cuttings and bentonite chips .
11

226

12
Water Level Observed During Drilling Drilling Contractor: Paddock Drilling Ltd. Logged By: RK
BACKFILL SYMBOL ASPHALT GROUT CONCRETE Drilling Method: 125 mm SSA Reviewed By: FL
BENTONITE DRILL CUTTINGS SAND SLOUGH Completion Depth: 9.5 m Page 1 of 1
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Appendix E Laboratory Testing Results

Appendix E LABORATORY TESTING RESULTS

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx E
 AASHTO T88 / ASTM D422 - PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS OF SOILS

TO Stantec Consulting Ltd. PROJECT RM of Headingley Lift Station - 2nd Reservoir

500 - 311 Portage Avenue
Winnipeg, Manitoba
R3B 2B9 PROJECT NO. 111220838

ATTN Farouk Fourar Laidi REPORT NO. 1

DATE SAMPLED: 2024.Apr.02 DATE RECEIVED: 2024.Apr.08 DATE TESTED: 2024.Apr.10

SAMPLED BY: Stantec Consulting Ltd. SUBMITTED BY: Stantec Consulting Ltd. TESTED BY: Larry Presado

MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION
CLIENT FIELD ID BH24-01, 3' STANTEC SAMPLE NO. 4184

Sieve Size
100 % Passing
(mm)
90
37.5 100.0
80
25.0 100.0
Percent Passing (%)

70 19.0 100.0
60 16.0 100.0
12.5 100.0
50
9.5 100.0
40 4.75 100.0

30 2.00 100.0
1.18 99.9
20 0.425 99.9
10 0.250 99.8
0.150 99.6
0
100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.075 99.0
0.005 84.3
Particle Size (mm) 0.002 77.5
0.001 Not Tested

Sand
Gravel Silt Clay Colloids
Coarse Medium Fine
0.0 0.0 0.1 0.9 21.5 77.5 Not Tested

COMMENTS

REPORT DATE 2024.Apr.11 REVIEWED BY Guillaume Beauce, P.Eng.

Geotechnical Engineer - Materials Testing Services

Reporting of these test results constitutes a testing service only. Engineering interpretation or evaluation of the test results is provided on written request. The data presented is for sole use of client
stipulated above. Stantec is not responsible, nor can be held liable, for the use of this report by any other party, with or without the knowledge of Stantec.
 AASHTO T88 / ASTM D422 - PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS OF SOILS

TO Stantec Consulting Ltd. PROJECT RM of Headingley Lift Station - 2nd Reservoir

500 - 311 Portage Avenue
Winnipeg, Manitoba
R3B 2B9 PROJECT NO. 111220838

ATTN Farouk Fourar Laidi REPORT NO. 2

DATE SAMPLED: 2024.Apr.02 DATE RECEIVED: 2024.Apr.08 DATE TESTED: 2024.Apr.10

SAMPLED BY: Stantec Consulting Ltd. SUBMITTED BY: Stantec Consulting Ltd. TESTED BY: Larry Presado

MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION
CLIENT FIELD ID BH24-01, 5' STANTEC SAMPLE NO. 4185

Sieve Size
100 % Passing
(mm)
90
37.5 100.0
80
25.0 100.0
Percent Passing (%)

70 19.0 100.0
60 16.0 100.0
12.5 100.0
50
9.5 100.0
40 4.75 100.0

30 2.00 100.0
1.18 99.9
20 0.425 99.8
10 0.250 99.8
0.150 99.7
0
100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.075 99.6
0.005 84.8
Particle Size (mm) 0.002 77.7
0.001 Not Tested

Sand
Gravel Silt Clay Colloids
Coarse Medium Fine
0.0 0.0 0.2 0.2 21.9 77.7 Not Tested

COMMENTS

REPORT DATE 2024.Apr.11 REVIEWED BY Guillaume Beauce, P.Eng.

Geotechnical Engineer - Materials Testing Services

Reporting of these test results constitutes a testing service only. Engineering interpretation or evaluation of the test results is provided on written request. The data presented is for sole use of client
stipulated above. Stantec is not responsible, nor can be held liable, for the use of this report by any other party, with or without the knowledge of Stantec.
 AASHTO T88 / ASTM D422 - PARTICLE-SIZE ANALYSIS OF SOILS

TO Stantec Consulting Ltd. PROJECT RM of Headingley Lift Station - 2nd Reservoir

500 - 311 Portage Avenue
Winnipeg, Manitoba
R3B 2B9 PROJECT NO. 111220838

ATTN Farouk Fourar Laidi REPORT NO. 3

DATE SAMPLED: 2024.Apr.02 DATE RECEIVED: 2024.Apr.08 DATE TESTED: 2024.Apr.10

SAMPLED BY: Stantec Consulting Ltd. SUBMITTED BY: Stantec Consulting Ltd. TESTED BY: Larry Presado

MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION
CLIENT FIELD ID BH24-02, 21' STANTEC SAMPLE NO. 4187

Sieve Size
100 % Passing
(mm)
90
37.5 100.0
80
25.0 100.0
Percent Passing (%)

70 19.0 100.0
60 16.0 100.0
12.5 98.0
50
9.5 97.3
40 4.75 92.2

30 2.00 88.9
1.18 86.9
20 0.425 81.5
10 0.250 78.2
0.150 74.6
0
100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.075 69.7
0.005 31.1
Particle Size (mm) 0.002 23.5
0.001 Not Tested

Sand
Gravel Silt Clay Colloids
Coarse Medium Fine
7.8 3.3 7.4 11.8 46.2 23.5 Not Tested

COMMENTS

REPORT DATE 2024.Apr.11 REVIEWED BY Guillaume Beauce, P.Eng.

Geotechnical Engineer - Materials Testing Services

Reporting of these test results constitutes a testing service only. Engineering interpretation or evaluation of the test results is provided on written request. The data presented is for sole use of client
stipulated above. Stantec is not responsible, nor can be held liable, for the use of this report by any other party, with or without the knowledge of Stantec.
 ASTM D4318 - LIQUID LIMIT, PLASTIC LIMIT AND PLASTICITY INDEX OF SOILS
(LL METHOD A - MULTIPOINT)

TO Stantec Consulting Ltd. PROJECT RM of Headingley Lift Station - 2nd Reservoir

500 - 311 Portage Avenue
Winnipeg, Manitoba
R3B 2B9 PROJECT NO. 111220838

ATTN Farouk Fourar Laidi REPORT NO. 1

DATE SAMPLED: 2024.Apr.02 DATE RECEIVED: 2024.Apr.08 DATE TESTED: 2024.Apr.10

SAMPLED BY: Stantec Consulting Ltd. SUBMITTED BY: Stantec Consulting Ltd. TESTED BY: Larry Presado

MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION
CLIENT FIELD ID BH24-01, 3' STANTEC SAMPLE NO. 4184

LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT LIQUID LIMIT, LL 89

TRIAL 1 2 3 TRIAL 1 2 PLASTIC LIMIT, PL 28
BLOWS 31 23 17 MC (%) 28 28 PLASTICITY INDEX, PI 61
MC (%) 86 90 93 AS REC'D MC (%) 29.3

60
94
93
50
92 CH
Water Content (%)

91 40
Plasticity Index

90
30
89
88
20
87 CL MH
86 10
85 CL-ML ML
15 20 25 30 35 0
Blows 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Liquid Limit

COMMENTS

REPORT DATE 2024.Apr.11 REVIEWED BY Guillaume Beauce, P.Eng.

Geotechnical Engineer - Materials Testing Services

Reporting of these test results constitutes a testing service only. Engineering interpretation or evaluation of the test results is provided on written request. The data presented is for sole use of client
stipulated above. Stantec is not responsible, nor can be held liable, for the use of this report by any other party, with or without the knowledge of Stantec.
 ASTM D4318 - LIQUID LIMIT, PLASTIC LIMIT AND PLASTICITY INDEX OF SOILS
(LL METHOD A - MULTIPOINT)

TO Stantec Consulting Ltd. PROJECT RM of Headingley Lift Station - 2nd Reservoir

500 - 311 Portage Avenue
Winnipeg, Manitoba
R3B 2B9 PROJECT NO. 111220838

ATTN Farouk Fourar Laidi REPORT NO. 2

DATE SAMPLED: 2024.Apr.02 DATE RECEIVED: 2024.Apr.08 DATE TESTED: 2024.Apr.10

SAMPLED BY: Stantec Consulting Ltd. SUBMITTED BY: Stantec Consulting Ltd. TESTED BY: Larry Presado

MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION
CLIENT FIELD ID BH24-01, 5' STANTEC SAMPLE NO. 4185

LIQUID LIMIT PLASTIC LIMIT LIQUID LIMIT, LL 91

TRIAL 1 2 3 TRIAL 1 2 PLASTIC LIMIT, PL 27
BLOWS 33 26 19 MC (%) 27 27 PLASTICITY INDEX, PI 64
MC (%) 88 90 94 AS REC'D MC (%) 32.0

60
95
94 50
93 CH
Water Content (%)

40
92
Plasticity Index

91 30
90
20
89 CL MH
88 10
87 CL-ML ML
15 20 25 30 35 0
Blows 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Liquid Limit

COMMENTS

REPORT DATE 2024.Apr.11 REVIEWED BY Guillaume Beauce, P.Eng.

Geotechnical Engineer - Materials Testing Services

Reporting of these test results constitutes a testing service only. Engineering interpretation or evaluation of the test results is provided on written request. The data presented is for sole use of client
stipulated above. Stantec is not responsible, nor can be held liable, for the use of this report by any other party, with or without the knowledge of Stantec.
 ASTM D2166 - UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF COHESIVE SOILS

TO Stantec Consulting Ltd. PROJECT RM of Headingley Lift Station - 2nd Reservoir

500 - 311 Portage Avenue
Winnipeg, Manitoba
R3B 2B9 PROJECT NO. 111220838

ATTN Farouk Fourar Laidi REPORT NO. 1

DATE SAMPLED: 2024.Apr.02 DATE RECEIVED: 2024.Apr.08 DATE TESTED: 2024.Apr.10

SAMPLED BY: Stantec Consulting Ltd. Stantec Consulting Ltd. TESTED BY: Madison Murphy

MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION
CLIENT FIELD ID BH24-02, ST, 15'-17' STANTEC SAMPLE NO. 4186
SAMPLE TYPE Shelby Tube DEPTH OF BOTTOM OF TUBE (m) 5.050
DEPTH OF TOP OF TUBE (m) 4.570
LENGTH RECOVERED IN TUBE (cm) 48
SOIL DESCRIPTION Clay, brown, stiff, moist, high plasticity, some silt, trace fine to medium-grained sand, trace fine gravel

DIAMETER (mm) 71.69 WET UNIT WEIGHT (kN/m3) 17.5

HEIGHT (mm) 161.49 DRY UNIT WEIGHT (kN/m3) 12.4
HEIGHT to DIAMETER RATIO 2.3 VOID RATIO 1.1
SAMPLE MASS (g) 1160.8 SATURATION (%) 96.7
MOISTURE CONTENT (%) 40.7 UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (kPa) 127.0
STRAIN AT FAILURE (%) 2.1

FAILURE DESCRIPTION Failure along slickenside, diagonal shear (50 deg) failure in test specimen.

Insert Stress vs. Strain Graph from Page 2 of the CTAP Report here
Set height as 2.45"
Picture

Or "Graph Unavailable" if no graph was obatined for some reason

COMMENTS
Shelby Tube recovered 48 cm of soil. Test sample portion taken from 18 cm to 38 cm from bottom end of tube.

REPORT DATE 2024.Apr.11 REVIEWED BY Guillaume Beauce, P.Eng.

Geotechnical Engineer - Materials Testing Services

Reporting of these test results constitutes a testing service only. Engineering interpretation or evaluation of the test results is provided on written request. The data presented is for sole use of client
stipulated above. Stantec is not responsible, nor can be held liable, for the use of this report by any other party, with or without the knowledge of Stantec.
CERTIFICATE OF ANALYSIS

REPORTED TO Stantec Consulting Ltd. (Winnipeg)

199 Henlow Bay
Winnipeg, MB R3Y 1G4

ATTENTION Jason Thompson, C.E.T WORK ORDER 24D1231

PO NUMBER RECEIVED / TEMP 2024-04-10 11:00 / 19.4°C

PROJECT 111220838 REPORTED 2024-04-19 11:36
PROJECT INFO COC NUMBER No #

Introduction:

CARO Analytical Services is a testing laboratory full of smart, engaged scientists driven to make the world a safer and
healthier place. Through our clients' projects we become an essential element for a better world. We employ methods
conducted in accordance with recognized professional standards using accepted testing methodologies and quality
control efforts. CARO is accredited by the Canadian Association for Laboratories Accreditation (CALA) to ISO/IEC
17025:2017 for specific tests listed in the scope of accreditation approved by CALA.

Big Picture Sidekicks We've Got Chemistry Ahead of the Curve

You know that the sample you collected after It’s simple. We figure the more you Through research, regulation
snowshoeing to site, digging 5 meters, and enjoy working with our fun and knowledge, and instrumentation, we
racing to get it on a plane so you can submit it engaged team members; the more are your analytical centre for the
to the lab for time sensitive results needed to likely you are to give us continued technical knowledge you need,
make important and expensive decisions opportunities to support you. BEFORE you need it, so you can stay
(whew) is VERY important. We know that too. up to date and in the know.

By engaging our services, you are agreeing to CARO Analytical Service's Standard Terms and Conditions outlined here:
https://www.caro.ca/terms-conditions

If you have any questions or concerns, please contact me at [email protected]

Authorized By:

Hanane El Hannaoui
Junior Account Manager

1-888-311-8846 | www.caro.ca
#110 4011 Viking Way Richmond, BC V6V 2K9 | #102 3677 Highway 97N Kelowna, BC V1X 5C3 | 17225 109 Avenue Edmonton, AB T5S 1H7 |
#108 4475 Wayburne Drive Burnaby, BC V5G 4X4

Page 1 of 4
Rev 2022-08 Caring About Results, Obviously. Page 1 of 4
TEST RESULTS

REPORTED TO Stantec Consulting Ltd. (Winnipeg) WORK ORDER 24D1231

PROJECT 111220838 REPORTED 2024-04-19 11:36

Analyte Result RL Units Analyzed Qualifier

4185 (24D1231-01) | Matrix: Soil | Sampled: 2024-04-09

General Parameters
Sulfate, Water-Soluble 0.081 0.050 % 2024-04-19

Page 2 of 4
Rev 2022-08 Caring About Results, Obviously. Page 2 of 4
APPENDIX 1: SUPPORTING INFORMATION

REPORTED TO Stantec Consulting Ltd. (Winnipeg) WORK ORDER 24D1231

PROJECT 111220838 REPORTED 2024-04-19 11:36

Analysis Description Method Ref. Technique Accredited Location

Sulfate, Water-Soluble in Soil CSA A23.2-3B / CSA Extraction (HCl) / Gravimetry (Barium Sulfate Richmond
A23.2-2B Precipitation)

Glossary of Terms:
RL Reporting Limit (default)
% Percent
CSA Canadian Standards Association Chemical Test Methods

General Comments:

The results in this report apply to the received samples analyzed in accordance with the Chain of Custody document .
This analytical report must be reproduced in its entirety. CARO is not responsible for any loss or damage resulting
directly or indirectly from error or omission in the conduct of testing. Liability is limited to the cost of analysis. Caro will
dispose of all samples within 30 days of sample receipt, unless otherwise agreed.

Please note any regulatory guidelines applied to this report are added as a convenience to the client, at their request, to
help provide some initial context to analytical results obtained. Although CARO makes every effort to ensure accuracy of
the associated regulatory guideline(s) applied, the guidelines applied cannot be assumed to be correct due to a variety of
factors and as such CARO Analytical Services assumes no liability or responsibility for the use of those guidelines to
make any decisions. The original source of the regulation should be verified and a review of the guideline (s) should be
validated as correct in order to make any decisions arising from the comparison of the analytical data obtained to the
relevant regulatory guideline for one ’s particular circumstances. Further, CARO Analytical Services assumes no liability
or responsibility for any loss attributed from the use of these guidelines in any way.

Page 3 of 4
Rev 2022-08 Caring About Results, Obviously. Page 3 of 4
APPENDIX 2: QUALITY CONTROL RESULTS

REPORTED TO Stantec Consulting Ltd. (Winnipeg) WORK ORDER 24D1231

PROJECT 111220838 REPORTED 2024-04-19 11:36

The following section displays the quality control (QC) data that is associated with your sample data. Groups of samples are prepared
in “batches” and analyzed in conjunction with QC samples that ensure your data is of the highest quality. Common QC types include:
• Method Blank (Blk): A blank sample that undergoes sample processing identical to that carried out for the test samples. Method
blank results are used to assess contamination from the laboratory environment and reagents.
• Duplicate (Dup): An additional or second portion of a randomly selected sample in the analytical run carried through the entire
analytical process. Duplicates provide a measure of the analytical method's precision (reproducibility).
• Blank Spike (BS): A sample of known concentration which undergoes processing identical to that carried out for test samples, also
referred to as a laboratory control sample (LCS). Blank spikes provide a measure of the analytical method's accuracy.
• Matrix Spike (MS): A second aliquot of sample is fortified with a known concentration of target analytes and carried through the
entire analytical process. Matrix spikes evaluate potential matrix effects that may affect the analyte recovery.
• Reference Material (SRM): A homogenous material of similar matrix to the samples, certified for the parameter(s) listed.
Reference Materials ensure that the analytical process is adequate to achieve acceptable recoveries of the parameter(s) tested.
Each QC type is analyzed at a 5-10% frequency, i.e. one blank/duplicate/spike for every 10-20 samples. For all types of QC, the
specified recovery (% Rec) and relative percent difference (RPD) limits are derived from long-term method performance averages
and/or prescribed by the reference method.

Spike Source REC RPD

Analyte Result RL Units % REC % RPD Qualifier
Level Result Limit Limit

General Parameters, Batch B4D2833

Blank (B4D2833-BLK1) Prepared: 2024-04-16, Analyzed: 2024-04-19

Sulfate, Water-Soluble < 0.050 0.050 %

Page 4 of 4
Rev 2022-08 Caring About Results, Obviously. Page 4 of 4
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT, HEADINGLEY SECOND RESERVOIR

Appendix F Lateral earth Pressure Figure

Appendix F LATERAL EARTH PRESSURE FIGURE

flf u:\111220838\0500_reports\0502_final\geotech\rpt_headingley_2nd_reservoir_20240514.docx F
 20 kPa

Dw
1.7 m

D D D

γ Kx D q Kx γw (D-Dw)
Static Earth Pressure, Ps Compaction Pressure, Pc Surcharge Pressure, Pq Hydrostatic Pressure, Pw

LEGEND:
D = wall burial depth, m
γ = soil unit weight, kN/m^3
Kx = recommended coefficient of lateral earth pressure (Ko or Ka)
q = vertical surcharge pressure within distance D from wall, kPa
γw = unit weight of water, kN/m^3
Dw = depth to water table, m

NOTE:
- Figure must be used in conjunction with recommendations included in the report text.
- Pressure distributions above assume a permanent horizontal backslope (i.e. non-sloping backfill).
- Unfactored earth pressures shown. Applicable load factors should be applied in accordance with the Limit States Design framework.

Lateral Earth Pressure Distributions for Below Grade Structures

 APPENDIX 2

Process Narrative
Headingley Field Way
Reservoir and Pumphouse

Process Narrative

November 18, 2024

Prepared for:

Manitoba Water Services Board

Prepared by:

Stantec Consulting Ltd.

500-311 Portage Ave.
Winnipeg, MB R3B 2B9
Revision Description Author Quality Check Independent Review
1 95% J Brewster 09/20/24 C. Perez 09/24/24 G. Nicholson
2 IFT J Brewster 10/22/24 C. Perez 10/23/24 G. Nicholson 11/08/24
Sign-off Sheet

This document entitled Process Narrative was prepared by Stantec Consulting Ltd. (“Stantec”) for the account
of Manitoba Water Services Board (the “Client”). Any reliance on this document by any third party is strictly
prohibited. The material in it reflects Stantec’s professional judgment in light of the scope, schedule and other
limitations stated in the document and in the contract between Stantec and the Client. The opinions in the
document are based on conditions and information existing at the time the document was published and do
not take into account any subsequent changes. In preparing the document, Stantec did not verify information
supplied to it by others. Any use which a third party makes of this document is the responsibility of such third
party. Such third party agrees that Stantec shall not be responsible for costs or damages of any kind, if any,
suffered by it or any other third party as a result of decisions made or actions taken based on this document.

Prepared by

(signature)

Jamie Brewster, M.Sc.

Prepared by

(signature)

Aliksey Mostovsky, E.I.T.

Reviewed by

(signature)

Glen Nicholson, E.I.T.

Reviewed by

(signature)

Carlos Guzman Perez, P.Eng.

Approved by

(signature)

Jamie Brewster, M.Sc.

HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

Table of Contents
ABBREVIATIONS ..................................................................................................................... II

1.0 RESERVOIR / PUMPHOUSE OVERVIEW ..................................................................1.1

1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION ..........................................................................................1.1
1.2 EQUIPMENT MODES ..................................................................................................1.1
1.3 SCADA SYSTEM INTERFACE ....................................................................................1.1

2.0 GENERATOR START UP PROCEDURE ....................................................................2.1

3.0 HVAC CONTROL.........................................................................................................3.1

4.0 RESERVOIR FILL ........................................................................................................4.1

4.1 POTABLE WATER FROM THE HEADINGLEY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ..................4.1

5.0 POTABLE WATER STORAGE ....................................................................................5.1

5.1 RESERVOIRS ..............................................................................................................5.1
5.2 PUMP CHAMBERS ......................................................................................................5.1

6.0 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ............................................................................................6.1

6.1 DISTRIBUTION PUMPING...........................................................................................6.1
6.2 DISTRIBUTION HEADER ............................................................................................6.2

7.0 ALARM SETPOINTS AND PRIORITIES......................................................................7.1

LIST OF TABLES
Table 2-1: Operator Selectable Reservoir Level and Flow Rate for Commissioning ...........4.2
Table 7-1 Process Alarms .................................................................................................7.1
Table 7-2 Non-Process Alarms .........................................................................................7.4
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

Abbreviations

AE Analysis Element

AIT Analysis Indicating Transmitter

BFV Butterfly Valve

FCV Flow Control Valve

FE Flow Element

FIT Flow Indicating Transmitter

HV Hand Valve

HVAC Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning

LE Level Element

LIT Level Indicating Transmitter

LSH Level Switch High

LSHH Level Switch High High

LSL Level Switch Low

LSLL Level Switch Low Low

P Pump

PLC Programmable Logic Controller

PID Proportional Integral Derivative

SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition

TK Tank

WTP Water Treatment Plant

XV Open / Close Valve

ii
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

1.0 RESERVOIR / PUMPHOUSE OVERVIEW

1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION

The Headingley Field Way Reservoir Pumphouse is a potable water storage and distribution facility.
Potable water is provided from the Headingley Bobiche Street Reservoir Pumphouse via the Headingley
Distribution System. The below ground concrete reservoir provides fire storage for the southeast portion
of the Municipality and will provide equalization and emergency storage as the Municipality continues to
grow.

The Reservoir Pumphouse is equipped with a back-up generator capable of running the distribution
pumping systems, HVAC system and building systems.

1.2 EQUIPMENT MODES

Many of the process systems have either hardware, software or both hardware and software manual
modes of operation. The primary intent of these modes of operation is to provide a method for testing
equipment or running systems in an emergency basis in the event of a control system failure. Extreme
caution should be used when running equipment in any mode other than the described automatic mode,
as unpredictable behavior could result.

Any transition from Auto to Manual mode in the SCADA system shall not change the operating status of
the equipment. For example, if a valve is open in Auto Mode and the operator selects manual mode, the
valve shall remain open on transition to manual. The operator will then have the ability to close the valve
via the “Close” button. Manual control buttons shall be disabled in Auto Mode and shall be greyed out.
All PID control loops shall be programmed for bumpless transfer between auto -> manual or manual ->
auto mode. Any equipment with a modulating or analog control point shall maintain its last auto
command setpoint as the initial manual setpoint if the equipment mode is transitioned from auto ->
manual.

In general, all tanks or reservoirs shall have an “Out of Service” mode. When the tank is placed in this
mode, all pumps in the tank shall be locked out in the PLC, all alarms associated with the tank or sensors
in the tank shall be disabled and all calls to operate associated with the tank shall be disabled.

1.3 SCADA SYSTEM INTERFACE

All systems and components shall have user interface, control, monitoring, trending and reporting as
defined in section 25 90 01 of the specification as well as the Process Narrative.

1.1
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

2.0 GENERATOR START UP PROCEDURE

• Refer to Electrical drawing E-601 for clarification

3.0 HVAC CONTROL

• Refer to Specification Section 23 09 93 for HVAC sequence of operational.

4.0 RESERVOIR FILL

4.1 POTABLE WATER FROM THE HEADINGLEY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

• Potable water enters the Reservoir Pumphouse via a 250 mm dia. water supply pipelines from
the RM of Headingley Distribution System.

Manual Operation Mode:

• In manual mode the status of 01-FCV-210 is selected by the operator through the SCADA
system. The selections are either “Open” or “Closed”.

• Tripping of the high-level floats (01-LSH-110/120) in the reservoir override the “Open” selection,
force the valve into the “Closed” status and sends an alarm.

Automatic Operation Mode:

• The initiation of reservoir filling is based on the level in the reservoir, as measured by 02-LIT-
210/220. Note that the reservoir base slab is 1100 mm higher than the pump chamber base slab
and 02-LIT-210/220 are located in the pump chambers.

• When filling the reservoir, the valve that interconnects the distribution pumping header and the
west distribution system (01-XV-110) is closed and the valve that allows discharge to the
reservoir from the west distribution system (01-XV-120) is open.

• The rate of flow to the reservoir is controlled by a diaphragm style flow control valve (01-FCV-
210). The valve has modulating, on/off and pressure sustaining functionality.

• 01-FCV-210 includes a control panel that will communicate via Modbus TCP/Ethernet IP with the
PLC. Signals communicated include:

o Target flow rate as measured by 01-FIT-110 (operator selectable, varies based on

reservoir level noted Table 2.1)

4.1
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

Reservoir Fill
November 18, 2024

o Measured flow rate (01-FIT-110)

o Target minimum pressure as measured by 01-PIT-110 (operator selectable, initially set at

40 psi)

o Measured upstream pressure (01-PIT-101)

• 01-FCV-210 is modulated to maintain the minimum pressure setpoint using difference between
target and measured pressure signal.

• Provide an interlock in the PLC such that when there is no call for water (based on reservoir level)
no target flow signal is sent to the flow control panel for 01-FCV-210 and the valve remains
closed.

• While the call for water is active, the PLC sends the target flow rate signal to the flow control
panel for 01-FCV-210 and the panel operates 01-FCV-210 solenoid valves as required to achieve
the target flow rate, based on the difference between the target flow rate and measured flow rate.

• Tripping of the high-level floats (01-LSH-110/120) in the reservoir override control by the level
sensors (02-LE-110/120), force the valve into the “Closed” status and sends an alarm.

Table 2-1: Operator Selectable Reservoir Level and Flow Rate for Commissioning

Reservoir Level (Operator Selectable) Flow Rate (Operator Selectable)

[Note: Reservoir slab is 1,100 mm above pump
chamber slab where 01-LIT-210/220 are located]

3,900 mm above the reservoir slab 0 L/s (Close Valve, Call for Water Inactive)

3,800 mm above the reservoir slab 4 L/s (Open Valve, Call for Water Active)

3,500 mm above the reservoir slab 10 L/s (Call for Water Active)

3,200 mm above the reservoir slab 15 L/s (Call for Water Active)

2,900 mm above the reservoir slab 20 L/s (Call for Water Active)

2,600 mm above the reservoir slab 33 L/s (Call for Water Active)

• Magnetic flow meter 01-FIT-110 instantaneous flow is to be trended on a SCADA screen and the
cumulative daily flow is to be outputted into a monthly report to track daily total flow from the RM
of Headingley distribution system to the Field Way Reservoir.

4.2
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

• Chlorine concentration as indicated by 01-AIT-110 is to be trended on a SCADA screen and the

min, max and average chlorine concentration is to the outputted into a monthly report. When
there is no flow to the reservoir (ie. call for water inactive), solenoid valves (01-XV-130 & 01-XV-
140) to close and the chlorine residual is not to be monitored or reported in the monthly report.

• The chlorine analyzer (01-AIT-110) outputs for pH, chlorine residual, RPM and temperature are to
be monitored through the SCADA. The solenoid valve (01-XV-140) on the drain line is to close for
an operator adjustable time (initially set at 2 seconds) if the RMP reported by the analyzer
decreases below an operator adjustable set point (initially set at 300 RPM).

4.3
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

5.0 POTABLE WATER STORAGE

• The potable water storage is made up of four separate reservoir cells. They are:

o Reservoir No. 1 / 2 (01-TNK-110/120)

o Pump Chamber No. 1 / 2 (02-TNK-210/220)

5.1 RESERVOIRS
• Potable water can be discharged to either the northwest corner of Reservoir No. 1 (01-TNK-110),
or the southwest corner of Reservoir No. 2 (01-TNK-120). There is also a pipe installed to allow
discharge to a future reservoir.

• Normal operation is to discharge to the northwest corner of Reservoir No. 1, manual butterfly
valve 01-BFV-110A is open and manual butterfly valve 01-BFV-120A is closed. Reservoir
interconnecting valves 01-BFV-110B/C, 01-BFV-120B/C and 02-BFV-210A/B are open and
reservoir interconnecting valves 02-BFV-210C and 02-BFV-220 are closed.

• To take Reservoir No. 2 out of service, the manual valves that interconnect Reservoir No.1 and 2
(01-BFV-110B/C) are closed and the manual valve that interconnect Reservoir No. 1 and Pump
Chamber No. 1 (02-BFV-210C) is opened. The reservoir interconnecting valves between Pump
Chamber No. 2 and Reservoir No. 2 (02-BFV-220 and 01-BFV-120B/C) are closed. Manual
butterfly valve 01-BFV-110A is open and 01-BFV-120 is closed.

• To take Reservoir No. 1 out of service, potable water is discharged to Reservoir No. 2 by opening
manual butterfly valve 01-BFV-120A and closing manual butterfly valves 01-BFV-110A. The
manual valves that interconnect Reservoir No.1 and 2 (01-BFV-110B/C) are closed and the
manual valve that interconnect Reservoir No. 2 and Pump Chamber No. 2 at the northwest corner
of Reservoir No. 2 (02-BFV-220) is open, while the valves that interconnect Reservoir No. 2 and
Pump Camber No. 2 at the southwest corner of Reservoir No. 2 (01-BFV-120B/C) are closed.

• High level floats 01-LSH-110/120 are set at 3,950 mm above the reservoir base slab and, when
tripped lock, close 01-FCV-210 and send an alarm.

• The “Reservoir Out of Service” function in the SCADA system disables all controls related to that
reservoir.

5.2 PUMP CHAMBERS

• The pump chambers typically receive potable water from the reservoirs and included vertical
turbine pumps, low level floats and ultrasonic level sensors.

5.1
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

Potable Water Storage

November 18, 2024

• The low level floats 02-LSL-210/220 are set at 3,460 mm above the pump chamber base slab to
indicate the potable water volume allotted for fire storage is below the design value (2,376 m3). .
Trip alarm only if ultrasonic level transmitters 02-LIT-210/220 are not working. When tripped an
alarm is triggered but nothing is disabled

• Low level lockout floats 02-LSLL-210/220 are set at 1,220 mm above the pump chamber base
slab to prevent the pump chambers from operating below the specified minimum submergence.
Prior to setting this float elevation confirm the minimum submergence with the pump installed.
The above float elevation is based on the minimum submergence with the pump strainer 150 mm
above the bottom of the pump chamber floor. When tripped, the distribution pumps are locked
out and an alarm is triggered. The low level lock out is ended when the water level is above the
lockout elevation.

• The ultrasonic level transmitters 02-LIT-210/220 indicate the water level in each pump chamber
and reservoir and control the operation of the reservoir filling. The reservoir and pump chamber
level is to be trended. Note that the reservoir base slab is 1100 mm higher than the pump
chamber base slab and 02-LIT-210/220 are located in the pump chambers.

• The “Pump Chamber Out of Service” function in the SCADA system disables all controls related
to that pump chamber.

5.2
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

6.0 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

6.1 DISTRIBUTION PUMPING

• The distribution pumping system is made up of:

o Jockey Pump (02-P-110) – 5 L/s @ 75 psi

o Domestic Pump 1 (02-P-210) – 12 L/s @ 75 psi

o Domestic Pump 2 (02-P-220) – 32 L/s @ 75 psi

o High Flow Pumps (02-P-310A/B/C) – 102 L/s @ 75 psi

• The distribution pumps operate in a sequenced fashion to meet the domestic and fire flow
demands with one of the High Flow Pumps as a standby. The pumps are all operated by variable
frequency drives and the drives operate to maintain an operator selectable pressure in the
distribution header as monitored by 02-PIT-410. The pressure target set point will initially be set
to 64 psi.

• Jockey pump (02-P-110) is the dedicated lead pump and operates continuously to maintain the
operator selectable pressure target setpoint in the distribution. If the distribution pressure is 2 psi
(operator selectable) below the pressure target setpoint for a continuous period of 20 seconds
(operator selectable) domestic pump 1 (02-P-210) will be called to start. Domestic pump 1 will be
called to stop if the distribution pressure is greater than or equal to the distribution pressure target
set point for two continuous minutes (operator selectable) when running at minimum speed. If the
jockey pump is out of service domestic pump 1 will not be called to stop.

• Domestic pump (02-P-220) will be called to start if the distribution pressure is 2 psi (operator
selectable) below the pressure target setpoint for a continuous period of 20 seconds (operator
selectable) with the jockey pump and domestic pump 1 operating. Domestic pump 2 will be called
to stop if the distribution pressure is greater than or equal to the distribution pressure target set
point for 90 seconds (operator selectable) when running at minimum speed.

• The lead high flow pump (02-P-310A/B/C) will be called to start if the distribution pressure is 2 psi
(operator selectable) below the pressure setpoint target for a continuous period of 20 seconds
(operator selectable) with the jockey pump, domestic pump 1 and domestic pump 2 operating.
The lead high flow pump will be called to stop if the distribution pressure is greater than or equal
to the distribution pressure target set point for 90 seconds (operator selectable) when running at
minimum speed.

• The lag high flow pump (02-P-310A/B/C) will be called to start if the distribution pressure is 2 psi
(operator selectable) below the pressure target setpoint for a continuous period of 20 seconds
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

(operator selectable) with the jockey pump, domestic pump 1, domestic pump 2 and the lead high
flow operating. The lag high flow pump will be called to stop if the distribution pressure is greater
than or equal to the distribution pressure target set point for 90 seconds (operator selectable)
when running at minimum speed.

• In the event that a pump is out of service the next largest pump will take its place in the pump
sequence, resulting in the standby high flow pump becoming the lag high flow pump.

• In general, the most recently started pumps speed will be controlled by the SCADA system to
maintain system pressure. With multiple pumps in operation, pumps previously started (not the
most recently started) will operate at full speed with only the most recently started pump speed
varied to maintain the distribution pressure target setpoint. Once the most recently started pump
maintains the minimum operating speed for a period of 5 continuous seconds (operator
selectable) the second most recently started pump speed will be varied to maintain the pressure
target setpoint. If the second most recently started pump operates for 5 continuous seconds at full
speed, then the most recently started pump speed will once again be varied to maintain the
operator selectable distribution pressure.

• If the flow is less than the jockey pump operating at minimum speed excessive flow will be
returned to the pump chamber via the pressure relief valve. The pressure relief valve is to be set
at 67 psi.

• If there is a problem with PLC, a PLC running relay connected to the PLC will switch VFD from
Mode 1 PLC control to Mode 0 PID control. In Mode 0, the pump drives will be controlled by VFD
built-in PID controller. Each pump has a dedicated pressure transmitter (02-PT-110, 02-PT-210,
02-PT-220 and 02-PT-310A/B/C) that are wired directly back to their respective drives. The VFD
controllers will operate independently with varying start and stop delays (duration to be confirmed
during commissioning) to maintain the PLC pump sequence. Once a VFD has run at maximum
speed for 15 seconds it will maintain that speed until it has shutdown. All timers will be reset at
pump stops.

• The high flow pumps can be automatically exercised through recirculating water back to the
reservoir via flow control valve 02-FCV-310. The frequency (initially set at weekly, Monday at 11
pm), target flow rate (initially set at 60 L/s) and duration (initially set at 2 minutes) are operator
selectable. When triggered, the PLC sends the target flow rate signal to the flow control panel for
02-FCV-310 and the panel operates 02-FCV-310 solenoid valves as required to achieve the
target flow rate, based on the difference between the target flow rate and measured flow rate (02-
FIT-310).

6.2 DISTRIBUTION HEADER

• Under normal conditions the distribution header delivers domestic demands out the east
distribution pipe to the northeast portion of the RM’s distribution system. Under this situation the
valve that interconnects the distribution pumping header and the west distribution system (01-XV-
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

110) is closed and the valve that allows discharge to the reservoir from the west distribution
system (01-XV-120) is open.

• Under a fire flow situation flow the distribution header delivers domestic and fire flow demands
out the east and west distribution pipes. Under this situation the valve that interconnects the
distribution pumping header and west distribution system (01-XV-110) is open and the valve that
allows discharge to the reservoir from the west distribution (01-XV-120) is closed.

• A fire flow situation is trigger by either low pressure on the reservoir fill line (monitored by 01-PIT-
101) or high flow on the distribution header (monitored by 02-FIT-310).

o Low pressure triggers a fire situation if the reservoir fill valve (01-FCV-210) is closed and
the pressure monitored by 01-PIT-101 is less than an operator selectable pressure (set at
35 psi for commissioning) for an operator selectable time (set at 30 seconds for
commissioning).

o High flow triggers a fire situation if the flow measured through 02-FIT-310 is higher than
or equal to an operator selectable flow (set at 45 L/s for commissioning) for an operator
selectable time (set at 30 seconds for commissioning).

• When a fire flow event is triggered:

o 01-XV-120 closes and 01-XV-110 opens using the stepping function of the actuator and
each valve is to take 3 minutes to fully open or close.

• The fire flow event is triggered to end when the flow measured through 02-FIT-310 is lower than
an operator selectable flow (set at 45 L/s for commissioning) for an operator selectable time (set
at 30 seconds for commissioning.

• When the fire flow event ends:

o 01-XV-120 opens and 01-XV-110 closes using the stepping function of the actuator and
each valve is to take 3 minutes to fully open or close.

• Flow to the distribution system is to be monitored by magnetic flow meter 02-FIT-310. The total
instantaneous flow is to be trended and the cumulative daily flow is to be outputted into a monthly
report to track total daily flow distributed from the Field Way Reservoir.

• Chlorine concentration as indicated by 02-AIT-101 is to be trended on a SCADA screen and the

min, max and average chlorine concentration is to the outputted into a monthly report in
accordance with the Office of Drinking Water monthly reporting requirements.

• The chlorine analyzer (02-AIT-101) outputs for pH, chlorine residual, RPM and temperature are to
be monitored through the SCADA. The solenoid valve (02-XV-101) on the drain line is to close for
an operator adjustable time (initially set at 2 seconds) if the RMP reported by the analyzer
decreases below and operator adjustable set point (initially set at 300 RPM).
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

7.0 ALARM SETPOINTS AND PRIORITIES

Refer to Table 5.1 for alarm setpoints and priorities. Alarm priorities are defined as follows:

• Alarm Priority 1 – Initiate audible alarm and dial out, email and text if not acknowledged in 120
seconds regardless of the time of day.

• Alarm Priority 2 – Initiate audible alarm and email and text if not acknowledged in 120 seconds.

• Alarm Priority 3 – Log alarm to file only.

Table 7-1 Process Alarms

Instrument / Equipment Description Setpoint Priority

Reservoir Supply Flow High high 45 L/s 1

(01-FIT-110)
High 35 L/s 2

Low Disable 3

Low low Disable 3

Reservoir Supply Pressure High high 70 psi 1

(01-PIT-101)
High 65 psi 2

Low 35 psi 2

Low low 20 psi 1

Reservoir Supply Chlorine High high 4 mg/L 2

Residual
(01-AIT-110) High 2 mg/L 3

Low 0.6 mg/L 2

Low low 0.2 mg/L 1

Reservoir Supply pH High high 10 2

(01-AIT-110)
High 9 3

Low 6 3

Low low 5 2
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

Instrument / Equipment Description Setpoint Priority

Reservoir Floats High 3,950 mm 1

(01-LSH-110/120)

Distribution Pumps Fault N/A 2

(02-P-110/210/310)

High Flow Pumps Fault N/A 2

(02-P-301A/B/C)

Pump Chamber Float Low 3,460 mm 3

(02-LSL-210/220)

Pump Chamber Float Low Low 1,220 mm 1

(02-LSLL-210/220)

Distribution header flow High high 300 L/s 2

(02-FIT-310)
High 260 L/s 2

Low Disabled 3

Low low Disabled 3

Distribution chlorine residual High high 4 mg/L 2

(02-AIIT-101)
High 2 mg/L 3

Low 0.7 mg/L 2

Low low 0.5 mg/L 1

Distribution pH High high 10 2

(02-AIT-101)
High 9 3

Low 6 3

Low low 5 2

Distribution pressure High high 80 psi 1

(02-PIT-410)
High 70 psi 3

Low 35 psi 3

Low low 20 psi 1

HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

Instrument / Equipment Description Setpoint Priority

Flow Control Valve Fault N/A 2

(01-FCV-210)

Flow Control Valve Fault N/A 2

(01-FCV-310)

Pump Chamber Level High high 5020 mm 1

(02-LIT-210/220)
High 3

Low 3,460 mm 3

Low low 1,320 mm 1

ON/OFF Valve Fault If limit switch not 2

(01-XV-110/120) activated
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

Table 7-2 Non-Process Alarms

Instrument / Equipment Description Setpoint Priority

Process Room Temperature High high 55°C 1

(00-TT-101)
High 45°C 2

Low 10°C 2

Low low 0°C 1

Electrical Room Temperature High high 55°C 1

(00-TT-102)
High 45°C 2

Low 10°C 2

Low low 0°C 1

Outdoor Temperature High high Disable 3

(00-TT-103)
High Disable 3

Low Disable 3

Low low Disable 3

F(S)-2 Clogged Air Filter Fault 187 Pa 2

(DPS-1)

ERV-1 Clogged Air Filter Fault 187 Pa 2

(DPS-2)

F(S)-1Clogged Air Filter Fault 187 Pa 2

(DPS-3)

Motorized Damper Actuators Fault If limit switch not 2

(MD-1/2/3/4/5) activated

HVAC Supply Fans Fault N/A 2

( F(S)-1, F(S)-2, F(S)-3)

HVAC Exhaust Fans Fault N/A 2

( F(E)-1, F(E)-2)

Fire Alarm, Smoke/Heat Sensors Alarm N/A 1

(SS-1/2/3/4/5/6/7)
HEADINGLEY FIELD WAY
RESERVOIR AND PUMPHOUSE

November 18, 2024

Instrument / Equipment Description Setpoint Priority

Septic Tank Pump Fault/High Level N/A 2

(04-P-101)

Weeping Tile Pump Fault/High Level N/A 2

(04-P-201)

Dry Pit flood Alarm Alarm 5mm AFF 1

(00-LSH-104)

Security Panel Alarm Alarm N/A 2

Security Panel Fault Fault N/A 2

Control Panel UPS Fault N/A 2

Control Panel 24VDC power Fault N/A 2

Generator Control Panel Running N/A 3

Alarm N/A 3

Tank Leak N/A 2

Low Fuel Level N/A 2

Fail to Start N/A 3

Automatic Transfer Switch Normal Power N/A 3

Standby Power N/A 3

Fault N/A 1

Active Harmonic Filter Fault N/A 2